zone 12 interconnect pump station project under construction...4 americans with disabilities act 48...
TRANSCRIPT
Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station Project
Project Specifications
and
Contract Documents
DESCRIPTION: This project will provide the City the ability to utilize
Airport area wells to serve customers throughout the City’s
service area. The new pump station will allow water from
the City’s Airport Zone wells to be diverted from Zone 12 to
Zone 0 and provide source redundancy and reliability to the
City water system. The new pump station will be constructed
at the southwest corner of Pioneer Parkway and Willow
Creek Road adjacent to the City’s existing Airport #1
Pressure Reducing Station.
SPONSOR: CITY OF PRESCOTT, ARIZONA
PROJECT NUMBER: 17-7007810-8930-15018
BID OPENING: May 25, 2017 at 2:00 PM
Prescott City Council Chambers
201 S. Cortez Street, Prescott, Arizona 86303
PREPARED BY: Public Works Department
April 2017
2
Table of Contents
SPECIAL NOTICE ............................................................................................................................................................. 5
BID DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................................................. 5
NOTICE INVITING BIDS ................................................................................................................................................. 6
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS ..................................................................................................................................... 7
BIDDING SCHEDULE ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
SUBCONTRACTORS LIST BID FORM ....................................................................................................................... 13
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING PROPOSAL ...................................................................................................... 14
PROPOSAL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15
PROPOSED STAGING LOCATIONS............................................................................................................................ 18
BIDDERS AFFIDAVIT .................................................................................................................................................... 19
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................... 20
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ..................................................................................................................................... 23
CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS ......................................................... 28
AND CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION OF WARRANTIES ............................................................................. 28
GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 29
COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS .......................................................................................... 30
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................................................................ 30 COMMENCEMENT ....................................................................................................................................................... 30 PUBLIC NOTICE............................................................................................................................................................ 30 SUBCONTRACTORS .................................................................................................................................................... 31 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE AND EMERGENCIES .................................................................................. 31 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR RECORDS............................................................................................... 31 ADDENDA, REVISIONS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DRAWINGS ............................................................................. 32 ERROR AND OMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 32 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN ...................................................................................................................................... 32 SUSPENSION OF WORK .............................................................................................................................................. 32 DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME ......................................................................................................................... 33 PAYMENT FOR DELAY ............................................................................................................................................... 34 TERMINATION FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT ........................................................................................................ 34 METHODS AND EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................................................... 34 DATE OF ACTUAL COMPLETION ............................................................................................................................. 34 FINAL ACCEPTANCE ................................................................................................................................................... 34 SAFETY, HEALTH AND SANITATION PROVISIONS .............................................................................................. 35 TRAFFIC CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................................... 35 WATER ........................................................................................................................................................................... 35 PROTECTION OF WORK ............................................................................................................................................. 36 CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL ............................................................................................................................... 36 GUARANTEE OF WORK .............................................................................................................................................. 36 CONTINGENCIES ......................................................................................................................................................... 36 NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF ............................................................................................................................. 36
3
PROJECT MEETINGS ................................................................................................................................................... 36 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ..................................................................................................................................... 37 ACCIDENT PREVENTION ........................................................................................................................................... 37 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES .................................................................................................................................... 38 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................................... 38 WARNING DEVICES AND BARRICADES ................................................................................................................. 38 HAZARDS IN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY ..................................................................................................................... 38 HAZARDS IN PROTECTED AREAS ............................................................................................................................ 38 PROTECTION OF EXISTING ITEMS .......................................................................................................................... 38 PROJECT SECURITY .................................................................................................................................................... 38 FIRE EXTINGUISHER................................................................................................................................................... 38 OFF-SITE ROADS .......................................................................................................................................................... 38 NOISE ABATEMENT .................................................................................................................................................... 39 DRAINAGE CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................. 39 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT ................................................................................................................................................. 39 WASTE DISPOSAL, GRADING AND MATERIAL STORAGE .................................................................................. 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................................. 40
CONTROL OF WORK .................................................................................................................................................... 40
ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 40 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTOR ............................................................................................................. 41 INSPECTION .................................................................................................................................................................. 41 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER ............................................................................................................................... 41 PLANS............................................................................................................................................................................. 41 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND ALLOWABLE DEVIATIONS ........................................................................... 42 COORDINATION AND INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 42 ORDER OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................................... 42 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES AND GRADES .................................................................................................... 42 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AND/OR UNAUTHORIZED WORK ................................................................... 42 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................ 42 COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS ........................................................................................................... 42 COORDINATION OF WORK ........................................................................................................................................ 43 LINES AND GRADES .................................................................................................................................................... 43
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................................................... 43
GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 43 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 44 FABRICATED MATERIALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 44 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CITY .................................................................................................................. 44 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 44 REJECTED MATERIALS .............................................................................................................................................. 44 UTILITIES ...................................................................................................................................................................... 44 DRIVEWAYS AND WALKS ......................................................................................................................................... 44 ROADS AND FENCES ................................................................................................................................................... 45 TREES AND SHRUBBERY ........................................................................................................................................... 45 IRRIGATION DITCHES AND STRUCTURES ............................................................................................................. 45 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................................................ 45 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES .......................................................................................................... 45 QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................... 46 SAMPLES AND TESTS ................................................................................................................................................. 46
LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY ........................................................................................................... 46
LAWS TO BE OBSERVED ............................................................................................................................................ 46 ALIEN LABOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 46 COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL AND STATE LAWS ............................................................................................... 46 EMPLOYMENT PROVISIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 47 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS .................................................................................................................. 47 NONDISCRIMINATION ............................................................................................................................................... 47
4
AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT .................................................................................................................... 48 PERMITS, TAXES AND LICENSES ............................................................................................................................. 48 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES ........................................................................................... 48 SURVEY LAND MONUMENTS ................................................................................................................................... 48 PROTECTION OF PERSON AND PROPERTY ............................................................................................................ 48 PROTECTION OF ANTIQUITIES ................................................................................................................................. 49 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS ....................................................................................................... 49 NON-RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CITY ....................................................................................................................... 49 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS ................................................................................................................................ 49 PROPERTY RIGHTS IN MATERIAL ........................................................................................................................... 49
PAYMENT TO CONTRACTORS .................................................................................................................................. 49
GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 49 PARTIAL PAYMENT .................................................................................................................................................... 49 PAYMENT ...................................................................................................................................................................... 50 PAYMENT OF ITEMS IN PROPOSAL ......................................................................................................................... 50 CHANGES IN THE WORK ............................................................................................................................................ 51 FORCE ACCOUNT ........................................................................................................................................................ 51 EXTRA WORK ............................................................................................................................................................... 52 CONTRACT AMENDMENT ......................................................................................................................................... 52 CLAIMS FOR EXTRA WORK ....................................................................................................................................... 53 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE OF WORK ........................................................................................................................... 54 NOTIFICATION OF CHANGED CONDITIONS, FORMAL PROTEST AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION.................. 54 PUBLICITY RELEASES ................................................................................................................................................ 55
SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................................................................... 55
ATTACHMENTS:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
APPENDIX A- STANDARD DETAILS
APPENDIX B- GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
5
SPECIAL NOTICE
BIDS WILL BE RETURNED UNOPENED IF NOT SUBMITTED PROPERLY SEALED AND
PRIOR TO THE TIME SET FORTH IN THE NOTICE INVITING BIDS. ADDENDA SHALL BE
ATTACHED INSIDE THE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOKLET.
BIDS SHALL BE ENCLOSED IN SEALED ENVELOPES, ADDRESSED TO THE CITY OF
PRESCOTT AND MARKED ON THE OUTSIDE LOWER RIGHT-HAND CORNER
INDICATING:
1. The Bidder's Name;
2. The Project Title;
3. Bid Opening Date and Time;
4. Acknowledgment of Addenda received, if applicable.
BID DOCUMENTS
ALL BIDS MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY THE FOLLOWING COMPLETED FORMS
PROVIDED HEREIN:
1. Bidding Schedule (page 11-12)
2. Subcontractors List Bid Form (page 13)
3. Proposal (pages 15-17)
4. Proposed Staging Locations Form (page 18)
5. Bidder’s Affidavit (page 19)
6. Bid Security
7. Acknowledgement of Addenda
Failure to complete and sign (where required), and return the above documents with your bid may
render it irregular. It is not necessary to return a complete copy of the Notice Inviting Bids, Project
Specifications and Contract Documents, other than the forms noted above.
QUESTIONS PERTAINING TO THIS PROJECT PRIOR TO AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
SHALL BE DIRECTED TO: City of Prescott, Public Works Department, 433 N. Virginia Street,
Prescott, AZ 86301; Phone (928) 777-1130; TDD (928) 777-1100; Fax (928) 771-5929.
6
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
PROJECT: Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station
DESCRIPTION: This project will provide the City the ability to utilize Airport area wells to serve
customers throughout the City’s service area. The new pump station will allow water from the City’s
Airport Zone wells to be diverted from Zone 12 to Zone 0 and provide source redundancy and
reliability to the City water system. The new pump station will be constructed at the southwest corner
of Pioneer Parkway and Willow Creek Road adjacent to the City’s existing Airport #1 Pressure
Reducing Station.
BID OPENING: Thursday, May 25, 2017 at 2:00 PM
MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING: Wednesday, May 10, 2017 at 2:00 PM, City of Prescott
Public Works Department
Sealed bids will be received at the Office of the City Clerk, addressed to the attention of the City
Clerk, City of Prescott, 201 S. Cortez Street, Prescott, AZ 86303, before 2:00 PM on May 25, 2017
for furnishing all plant, materials, and labor and performing work for construction of the Zone 12
Interconnect Pump Station Project.
Bids will be opened and read aloud at the noted date and time in the Prescott City Hall Council
Chambers. Any bid received at or after 2:00 PM on the above stated date will be returned unopened.
The City of Prescott reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and/or some or all of the
alternates bid, and waive any informality deemed in the best interest of the City and to reject the bids
of any persons who have been delinquent or unfaithful to any contract with the City of Prescott.
Copies of the Plans, Project Specifications and Contract Documents are available for public
inspection at the Public Works Department, 433 N. Virginia Street, Prescott, Arizona, 86301, (Phone:
(928) 777-1130; TDD: 777-1100) or on the City’s website at http://www.prescott-
az.gov/business/bids/. Those interested in having individual sets of the Plans and Documents may
obtain them free of charge on the City’s website or by payment of $110.00 per set from Public Works,
of which cost is non-refundable. An additional fee of $25.00 will be required for mailing, if so
desired.
Candace Manibusan, Contract Specialist
PUBLISHED: 2TC April 30 and May 7, 2017
7
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
PROPOSAL. All standard specifications and details referenced unless otherwise noted shall conform
to all the City of Prescott (hereinafter “City”) Standard Specifications and Detail Drawings, most
current revision, and to the most current edition of the Uniform Standard Specifications and Details
for Public Works Construction by the Maricopa Association of Governments, Arizona, including
revisions thereto.
ADDENDA. MAG Specifications, Sections 102.1 through 102.13, including: Any Addenda issued
during the time of bidding, forming a part of the documents issued to the bidder for the preparation of
his bid, shall be covered in the bid and shall be made a part of the contract. Addenda may be issued
until noon on the Monday prior to the bid opening date. It is the prospective bidder’s responsibility to
check for Addenda related to this procurement. Addenda will be posted on the City’s website at
http://www.prescott-az.gov/business/bids/. Addenda may also be emailed to registered plan rooms
and attendees of the mandatory pre-bid meeting, if applicable.
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS. MAG Specifications, Sections 102.1 through
102.13, including: Bids shall be delivered to the office of the City Clerk, City of Prescott, Arizona,
before the day and hour set for the submittal of bids in the Notice Inviting Bids as published. Bids
shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope bearing the title of the work and the name of the bidder. It is
the SOLE responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received in proper time. Any bids received
after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids will be returned to the bidder unopened.
IRREGULAR PROPOSALS. MAG Specifications, Section102.7, including: (f) if the bid is
mathematically unbalanced, and (g) if the bid is materially unbalanced.
CONFIRMATION OF BID. At any time after the opening of the bids the Public Works Director may
require any bidder on the project to confirm such bid in writing prior to contract award. The
following certification language shall be submitted as requested by the Public Works Director:
“I, the undersigned hereby certify the prices bid for the Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station Project
have been reviewed and I hereby confirm work can be completed in accordance with the requirements
of the contract documents, plans and specifications in the total bid amount of $0.00 as stated in the
Bidding Schedule.”
EXPERIENCE AND QUALIFICATIONS. When requested by the City, the Bidder shall supply a list
of all public projects begun within the previous three (3) years prior to contract award. The project
list shall contain all public projects entered into by the Bidder and shall include the project name and
location, original and final contract amounts, project status and a contact name and information. The
Bidder shall provide a description and explanation for any projects that were not completed
successfully. Failure to provide complete and factual information may be grounds for rejection of the
bid in accordance with City Procurement Code Section 1-27-1.18(K).
SUBCONTRACTORS LIST BID FORM. The Subcontractors List Bid Form must be completed,
attached and submitted along with the Bidding Schedule.
BID SECURITY. A certified check, cashier’s check or bid bond in the amount of TEN PERCENT
(10%) of the bid shall be required at the time the bid or proposal is submitted, in accordance with
A.R.S. § 34-201(A)(3).
WITHDRAWAL OF BID. Any bidder may withdraw his bid, either personally, telegraphic, or by
written request, at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids.
8
INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND DOCUMENTS. MAG Specifications, Section 102.4,
including: If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed Contract is in doubt as to the
true meaning of any part of the Plans, specifications, or other proposed Contract Documents, or finds
discrepancies in or omissions from the Plans or Specifications, he shall submit to the City Public
Works Director a written request for an interpretation or correction thereof no later than five working
days before bid or proposal opening. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its
prompt delivery. Any interpretation or correction of the proposed documents will be made or
delivered to each person receiving a set of such documents. Interested bidders may call or visit the
office of the City Public Works Director with any questions up to 5:00 PM on the last Thursday prior
to the bid opening date. The City will no longer address or interpret any general questions or
comments after 5:00 PM on the last Thursday prior to the bid opening date. Comments or questions
received after the above referenced time will not be given consideration by the Department. Should
any issue be determined significant to the project by the Public Works Director, appropriate action
will be taken. Voice: (928) 777-1130; TDD (928) 777-1100.
PRE-AWARD CONFERENCE. The City may require the apparent low bidder to attend a Pre-award
conference in order to establish that the Contractor fully understands the scope, complexity and
expectations of the project as described in the Contract Documents; to discuss issues, concerns, risk
areas and how to minimize them within the bounds of the contract; and to determine that the apparent
low bidder is the most responsible and/or most qualified bidder in accordance with City Procurement
Code Section 1-27-1.18(K).
The purpose of the Pre-award Conference is to ensure that all participants are apprised of their
responsibilities and obligations regarding all applicable laws, rules, regulations and Ordinances
contained in the contract documents prior to entering into a contract.
AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. MAG Specifications, Section 103.1 through 103.8,
Award of Contract, first paragraph, 103.1, to be revised as follows:
The Contract will be awarded to the lowest qualified bidder complying with these instructions and
with the Notice Inviting Bid. The City, however, reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids if
it deems it best for the public good, and to waive any informality in the bids received. The award, if
made, will be within sixty (60) calendar days after the opening of bids.
ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. No partial or full assignment by the Contractor of any contract to
be entered into hereunder, or any part thereof, or of funds to be received there under by the
Contractor, will be recognized by the City unless such assignment has had prior written approval of
the City and the surety has been given due notice of such assignment in writing and has consented
thereto in writing.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO SUCCESSFUL BIDDER. The successful bidder may obtain
six (6) sets of Plans and Specifications for this project at no extra cost. If he desires more than the six
(6) sets, he may purchase additional sets of Plans and Specifications from the Public Works Director
at the cost set forth in the Notice Inviting Bids.
NOTICE TO PROCEED. The Contractor or subcontractor shall not work on any part of the project or
incur any expenses or obligations until a Notice to Proceed has been issued by the City. The Notice to
Proceed will be sent to the Contractor by first class mail or delivered to him in person.
ASSIGNMENT OF PAYMENTS. MAG Specifications, Section 109.3, including assignment of
contract clause included in the “Information for Bidders” in this set of specifications.
9
NON-PERFORMANCE OF WORK TASKS BY THE CONTRACTOR. If the Contractor fails,
neglects, or refuses to perform work tasks necessary for the completion of the total job; replace
defective work; to repair or resurface, in a manner that is acceptable to the City and Engineer, public
rights-of-way disturbed by his work which are a nuisance, hazard, impedes or endangers vehicular
traffic and the public; the City may serve written notice upon the Contractor of its intention to have
the work performed by others. Unless, within three (3) calendar days after the service of such notice,
the Contractor has made such arrangement and scheduled the accomplishment of said work tasks to
the satisfaction of the City and Engineer, the City will proceed to have the work accomplished by
others or by itself and deduct the costs thereof from amounts due to the Contractor.
INDEMNIFICATION OF CITY AGAINST LIABILITY. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and
hold harmless the City, its departments, officers, officials, agents, and employees (hereinafter referred
to as “Indemnitee”) from and against any and all claims, actions, liabilities, damages, losses, or
expenses (including court costs, attorneys’ fees and costs of claim processing, investigation and
litigation) (hereinafter referred to as “Claims”) for bodily injury or personal injury (including death),
or loss or damage to tangible or intangible property caused, or alleged to be caused, in whole or in
part, by the negligent or willful acts or omissions of the Contractor or any of its owners, officers,
directors, agents, employees or subcontractors. This indemnity includes any claim or amount arising
out of or recovered under Worker’s Compensation Law or arising out of failure of such contractor to
conform to any federal, state or local law, statue, ordinance, rule, regulation or court decree. It is the
specific intentions of the parties that the Indemnitee shall, in all instances, except for Claims arising
solely from the negligent or willful acts of Indemnitee, be indemnified by Contractor from and against
any and all claims. In consideration of the award of this contract, the Contractor agrees to waive all
rights of subrogation against the City, its departments, officers, officials, agents, and employees for
losses arising from the work performed by the Contractor for the City.
DEFINITIONS. According to MAG Specifications, Section 101.2, including:
A. AWARD: The formal action of the governing body in accepting a proposal.
B. BID SECURITY: Refers to the certified check, cashier's check, or surety bond, which is required
to be submitted with the proposal to insure execution of the contract and the furnishing of the
required bonds.
C. CITY: City of Prescott
D. CITY'S REPRESENTATIVE: The authorized representative of the City, which may be an
individual or a firm, or his assistants assigned to the project work, the project site, or any part
thereof during the performance of the work by the Contractor and until final acceptance.
E. PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR: The City of Prescott Public Works Director or his designee,
representative or assistants.
F. DESIGN ENGINEER: The firm or person and his properly authorized assistants, designated by
the City to prepare Plans and Specifications for the work.
G. NOTICE TO BIDDERS: Refers to the standard forms inviting proposals or bids.
H. MATERIALLY UNBALANCED BID: A bid that generates a reasonable doubt that award to the
bidder submitting a mathematically unbalanced bid will result in the lowest ultimate cost to the
City.
10
I. MATHEMATICALLY UNBALANCED BID: A bid containing lump sum or unit bid prices that
do not reflect reasonably anticipated actual costs plus a reasonable proportionate share of the
bidder’s anticipated profit, overhead costs, and other indirect costs.
Line
No.Item No. Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Price
1 100.4-1 Public Relation Allowance 1 LS 1,500.00$ 1,500.00$
2 105.8-1 Construction Staking 1 LS
3 107.15-1 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) 1 LS
4 109.10-1 Mobilization/Demobilization, Site General Conditions 1 LS
5 109.11 Contract Allowance 1 LS 50,000.00$ 50,000.00$
6 205.2-1 4" of Gravel (Roadway) 100 CY
7 206-1 Structure Excavation and Structure Backfill 200 CY
8 220-1 Riprap Construction 10 CY
9 02200-1 Demolition and Misc. Sitework 1 LS
10 618-1 24" CMP (Incl. Trenching) 120 LF
11 728-1 CLSM (1/2 Sack Slurry) 100 CY
12 420-1 Chain Link Fence and Gates at Pump Site 110 LF
13 421-1
ADOT Barbed 4-Wire Game Fence and 2-14' Type I
Gates Per ADOT Drawings C-12.10 (At Access Roads) 50 LF
14 505-1 Reinforced Concrete 90 CY
15 505-2
Precast Concrete Drainage Structures (MAG Std Dtls
501-4, 535 Type F, 530, 536-1) 3 LS
16 05051-1 Anchor, Inserts and Dowels 1 LS
17 515-1 Valve Vault Ladder and Hatch 1 LS
18 07900-1 Joint Sealants 1 LS
19 09900-1 Mechanical Painting 1 LS
20 10400-1 Identification/Signage 1 LS
21 11200-1 Vertical Turbine Pump and Can 1 EA
22 11200-2 Sound Enclosure 1 EA
23 13341-1 12" Flow Meter 1 EA
24 13343-1 Pressure Transmitter 2 EA
25 13343-2 Pressure Gauge 1 EA
26 610-1 Pipe Supports 5 EA
27 610-2 12" DIP (Incl. Trenching, Fittings) 130 LF
ZONE 12 INTERCONNECT PUMP STATION
BID SCHEDULE
11
ZONE 12 INTERCONNECT PUMP STATION
BID SCHEDULE
28 15200-1 12" Check Valve 1 EA
29 630.3a-1 12" Gate Valve 4 EA
30 630.6a-1 2" ARV 2 EA
31 15100-1 12" Motorized Gate Valve Operator 1 EA
32 15100-2 1" Needle Valve 2 EA
33 630.4-1 18" X 12" Tapping Sleeve and Valve 2 EA
34 15120-1 12" Dismantling Joint 1 EA
35 15080-1 Insulation and Heat Tracing 1 LS
36 15120-1 12" X 1", 2" Service Sleeves 6 EA
37 608-1 Horizontal Drilling and Three-2" HDPE Conduits 1 LS
38 16130-1 Electrical Work 1 LS
DOLLARS
Total Bid Amount (All Items Inclusive): $
Address
City/State
Signature of Company Official
Phone NumberCompany Name
Fax Number
Zip Code
TOTAL BID AMOUNT:
(Price in Written Words)
Date Signed
Title
12
13
City of Prescott Public Works Department
SUBCONTRACTORS LIST BID FORM
Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station Project
Company Name and
License Number
Mailing Address Phone Number Bid
Item(s)
Total Sub-Contract
Amount 1 $
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Total Sub-Contract Amount $
14
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING PROPOSAL
Payment for all work performed under this Contract shall be based on the units as shown in the
Bidding Schedule. Payment of the bid items as stated in the Contractor's proposal for the completed
work, shall be compensation in full for the furnishing of all overhead, labor, materials, devices,
equipment and appurtenances included in the work as are necessary to complete the total work under
this Contract in a good, neat, and satisfactory manner as indicated on the Plans, as described in the
Specifications, and as otherwise implied or required to fulfill the objective of the work. It is the
intent of the contract that maximum payment shall not exceed the agreed unit price without duly
authorized contract amendments. Each item, fixture, piece of equipment, work, etc., as indicated on
the Plans, or specified anywhere in these Documents shall be completed with all necessary
connections and appurtenances for the satisfactory use and operation of said item, and the total
system or systems.
Any and all patents, license fees, insurance premiums, etc., for the right to use equipment or
processes included in this Contract shall be included in the total bid price.
Cost of testing, and other incidental operations, profit and overhead cost, including the cost of
supervision, temporary field offices, move-in, move-out, insurance, taxes, equipment not a
permanent part of the job, and other incidental items, shall be included in the total bid price.
The “Total Amount of Bid” must be filled out by the bidder. In case of any discrepancy between the
price in figures and price in written words, as written or corrected, the price in written words shall be
presumed to be correct unless obviously in error, and shall be considered as the Contractor's correct
and intended bid.
Bids shall not contain any recapitulations of the work to be done. Alternative proposals will not be
considered unless called for. If anyone is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Plans,
Specifications, or other Contract Documents, or finds discrepancies in or omissions from the Plans
or Specifications, he must submit to the Engineer a written request for an interpretation or correction
thereof. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery.
Any interpretation or correction of the Contract Documents will be made only by an Addendum duly
issued by the City and a copy of such Addendum will be available on the City’s website at
http://www.prescott-az.gov/business/bids/. The City will not be responsible for any other
explanations or interpretations of the Documents.
If the Proposal is made by an individual, it shall be signed and his full name and address shall be
given. If it is made by a partnership, it shall be signed with the partnership name and by a general
partner of the firm who shall also sign his own name, and the name and address of each partner shall
be given; and, if it is made by a corporation, the name of the corporation shall be signed by its duly
authorized officer or officers.
The required forms as requested on page 5 must be completed, attached and submitted along with the
Bidding Schedule.
15
PROPOSAL
Place:
Date:
Proposal of
(Name)
Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona; a partnership consisting
of or an individual trading as
.
TO THE HONORABLE MAYOR AND COUNCIL
CITY OF PRESCOTT
PRESCOTT, ARIZONA
Ladies and Gentlemen:
The Undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to furnish any and all required labor, material,
construction equipment, transportation, and services for completion of the Zone 12 Interconnect
Pump Station Project, in strict conformity with the plans and specifications, at the total bid price of:
Dollars
($ ).
The Undersigned hereby declares that he has visited the site and has carefully examined the Contract
Documents relating to the work covered by the above bid or bids.
The Bid Security (Certified Check, Cashier's Check, or Bid Bond) attached, payable to the City of
Prescott in the sum of not less than ten percent (10%) of the total bid price bid for the complete
project, to insure that the undersigned, if his bid is accepted, shall enter into contract and give the
bonds and certificates of insurance required. In the event that the contract and bonds and certificates
of insurance required are not furnished to the City within the time required, then and in that event the
City may retain from the bid bond an amount, not to exceed the amount of the bid bond, representing
the difference between the amount specified in the proposal or bid, and such larger amount that the
City in good faith contracts with another party to perform the work covered by the proposal or bid.
The project shall be completed within two hundred seventy (270) calendar days after the starting date
set forth in the NOTICE TO PROCEED.
The undersigned hereby declares, as bidder, that the only persons or parties interested in this
PROPOSAL as principals are those named herein; that no elected official or employee of the City is
in any manner interested directly or indirectly in this PROPOSAL or in the profits to be derived from
the Contract proposed to be taken, other than as permitted by law; that this bid is made without any
connection with any other person or persons making a separate bid for the same purpose; that the bid
is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud; that he has read the NOTICE INVITING BIDS
and the INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS hereto attached, and as more fully described in the
16
attached contract and specifications, and agrees to furnish the items and perform the work called for
in accordance with the provisions of said form of Contract and the Specifications and to deliver the
same within the time stipulated herein, and that he will accept in full payment therefore the total bid
price named in this Proposal.
The bidder shall be an A-General Engineering contractor properly licensed at the time of bidding to
perform construction in connection with fixed works, including streets, roads, power and utilities
plants, dams, hydroelectric plants, sewage and waste disposal plants, bridges, tunnels, and overpasses
and shall also be licensed to perform work within residential and commercial property lines, or shall
be properly licensed to sub-contract residential or commercial work, as may be required in the Scope
of Work.
Any bid submitted without the proper contracting license to perform the required work shall be
considered non-responsive and rejected.
The bidder further agrees that, upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of this PROPOSAL,
he will execute the Contract in accordance with the PROPOSAL as accepted and furnish the required
bonds TEN (10) days from the date of mailing of said notice of award to him at his address as given
below, or within such additional time as may be allowed by the City; and that upon his failure or
refusal to do so within said time, then the certified or cashier's check or bid bond accompanying this
bid shall be cashed or enforced and the money payable pursuant thereto shall be forfeited to and
become the property of the City as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal; provided that if
said bidder shall execute the Contract and furnish the required bonds within the aforesaid time, his
certified or cashier's check, if furnished, shall be returned to him within three (3) days thereafter, and
the bid bond, if furnished, shall become void.
Bidder understands and agrees that the City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive
any informality in the bidding.
The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60)
calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:
The undersigned is the holder of Arizona State Contractor's License No(s). and Classification(s):
Respectfully submitted,
Bidder Corporate Seal
By:
Title:
17
Bidder’s Contact Information:
Address:
Telephone No:
Fax No:
Email:
Names and addresses of all members of the firm or names and titles of all officers of the corporation:
18
PROPOSED STAGING LOCATIONS
PROJECT NAME: ZONE 12 INTERCONNECT PUMP STATION
BID DATE: MAY 25, 2017
CONTRACTOR NAME:
Proposed Location No. 1
General Description: Parcel No:
Physical Address:
Legal Owner: Zoning District:
Proposed Location No. 2
General Description: Parcel No:
Physical Address:
Legal Owner: Zoning District:
*A map of each location may be attached to this form
If no staging areas are proposed, please check here and sign below: No Areas Proposed
By signing below, I (“Contractor”) certify that no staging areas are required for the above named project. If
necessary staging area(s) are later determined, I understand that any associated costs shall be furnished by the
Contractor and will be considered incidental without additional compensation from the City.
Signature of Company Official Date Signed
19
BIDDERS AFFIDAVIT
Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station Project
State of )
) ss.
County of )
, being first duly sworn, deposes and says:
That he/she is of .
(Title) (Bidder)
who submits herewith to the City of Prescott, Arizona, a proposal:
That all statements of fact in such proposal are true;
That said proposal was not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person,
partnership, company, association, organization or corporation;
That said bidder has not, directly or indirectly by agreement, communication or conference with
anyone attempted to induce action prejudicial to the interest of the City of Prescott, Arizona, or of
any bidder or anyone else interested in the proposed contract; and further,
That prior to the public opening and reading of proposal, said bidder:
1. Did not directly or indirectly, induce or solicit anyone else to submit a false or sham
proposal;
2. Did not directly or indirectly collude, conspire, connive or agree with anyone else that said
bidder or anyone else would submit a false or sham proposal, or that anyone should refrain
from bidding or withdraw his proposals;
3. Did not in any manner, directly or indirectly, seek by agreement, communication or
conference with anyone to raise or fix the proposal price of said bidder or of anyone else, or
to raise or fix any overhead, profit or cost element of his proposal price, or of that of anyone
else;
4. Did not, directly or indirectly, submit his proposed price or any breakdown thereof, or the
contents thereof, or divulge information or data relative thereto, to any corporation,
partnership, company, association organization, bid depository or to any member or agent
thereof, or to any individual or group of individuals, except the City of Prescott, Arizona, or
to any person or persons who have a partnership or other financial interests with said bidder
in his business.
By:
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me by
this day of , 2017.
Notary Public Commission Expires
20
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
INSURANCE: Contractor and subcontractors shall procure and maintain until all of their obligations
have been discharged, including any warranty periods under this Contract are satisfied, insurance
against claims for injury to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection
with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees
or subcontractors.
The insurance requirements herein are minimum requirements for this Contract and in no way limit
the indemnity covenants contained in this Contract.
The City in no way warrants that the minimum limits contained herein are sufficient to protect the
Contractor from liabilities that might arise out of the performance of the work under this Contract by
the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees, or subcontractors. Contractor is free to
purchase such additional insurance as may be determined necessary.
ADDITIONAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: The policies shall include, or be endorsed to
include, the following provisions:
1. On insurance policies where the City of Prescott is named as an additional insured, the City
of Prescott shall be an additional insured to the full limits of liability purchased by the
Contractor even if those limits of liability are in excess of those required by this Contract.
2. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance and non-contributory with
respect to all other available sources.
NOTICE OF CANCELLATION: With the exception of a ten (10) day notice of cancellation for non-
payment of premium, any changes material to compliance with this contract in the insurance policies
above shall require a thirty (30) day written notice.
ACCEPTABILITY OF INSURERS: Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M.
Best's rating of no less than A-VII, unless otherwise approved by the City. General liability,
automobile liability, and worker’s compensation insurance is to be placed with an insurer admitted in
the state in which operations are taking place.
VERIFICATION OF COVERAGE:
A. Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance (ACORD form or equivalent
approved by the City) as required by this Contract. The certificates for each insurance policy are
to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf.
All certificates and any required endorsements are to be received and approved by the City before
work commences. Each insurance policy required by this Contract must be in effect at or prior to
commencement of work under this Contract and remain in effect for the duration of the project
and warranty period as set forth in Paragraph 3 of the “Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding
Settlement of Claims and Certification of Completion of Warranties”. Failure to maintain the
insurance policies as required by this Contract or to provide evidence of renewal is a material
breach of contract.
All certificates required by this Contract shall be sent directly to the Public Works Department,
433 N. Virginia Street, Prescott, AZ 86301. The City project/contract number and project
description shall be noted on the certificate of insurance. The City reserves the right to require
complete, certified copies of all insurance policies required by this Contract at any time.
21
B. MAG Specifications, Sections 103.1 through 103.8, including: Unless otherwise specifically
required by the Special Conditions, the minimum limits of public liability and property damage
liability shall be as follows:
C. Contractor shall provide coverage with limits of liability not less than those stated below. An
excess liability policy or umbrella liability policy may be used to meet the minimum liability
requirements provided that the coverage is written on a following form basis.
Commercial General Liability – Occurrence Form –
Policy shall include bodily injury, property damage, broad form contractual liability and XCU
coverage.
General Aggregate $ 3,000,000
Products – Completed Operations Aggregate $ 3,000,000
Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000
Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000
Fire Legal Liability (Damage to Rented Premises) (if applicable) $ 100,000
The policy shall be endorsed to include the following additional insured language:
“The Contractor agrees to endorse the City of Prescott as an Additional Insured on the
Commercial General Liability with the following Additional Insured endorsement, or similar
endorsement providing equal or broader Additional Insured coverage, the CG 2010 10 01
Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees, or Contractors, or CG2010 07 04 Additional Insured –
Owners, Lessees, or Contractors – Scheduled Person or Organization endorsement in
combination with the additional endorsement of GC2037 10 01 Additional Insured –
Owners, Lessees, or Contractors – Completed Operations shall be required to provide back
coverage for the contractor’s “your work” as defined in the policy and liability arising out of
the products-completed operations hazard.”
Business Automobile Liability: Bodily Injury and Property Damage for any owned, hired, and/or
non-owned vehicles used in the performance of this Contract.
Combined Single Limit (CSL) $ 1,000,000
The policy shall be endorsed to include the following additional insured language:
“The City of Prescott shall be named as additional insured with respect to liability arising out
of the activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor, involving automobiles, owned,
leased, hired, or borrowed by the Contractor.”
Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability
Workers’ Compensation Statutory
Employer’s Liability
Each Accident - $1,000,000
Disease – each employee - $1,000,000
Disease – policy limit - $1,000,000
Policy shall contain a waiver of subrogation against the City of Prescott for losses arising from
work performed by or on behalf of the Contractor.
22
Professional Liability (Errors and Omissions Liability) – if applicable
Each Claim $ 1,000,000
Annual Aggregate $ 2,000,000
1. In the event that the professional liability insurance required by this Contract is written on a
claims-made basis, Contractor warrants that any retroactive date under the policy shall
precede the effective date of this Contract and that either continuous coverage will be
maintained or an extended discovery period will be exercised for a period of two (2) years at
the time work under this contract is completed.
2. The policy shall cover professional misconduct or lack of ordinary skill for those positions
defined in the Scope of Work of this contract.
Notice of Cancellation: With the exception of a ten (10) day notice of cancellation for non-
payment of premium, any changes material to compliance with this contract in the insurance
policies above shall require a thirty (30) day written notice.
D. Such policy shall not exclude coverage for the following:
1. Injury to or destruction of any property arising out of the collapse of/or structural injury to
any building or structure due to grading of land, excavation, borrowing, filling, backfilling,
tunneling, pile driving, cofferdam work or caisson work.
2. Injury to or destruction of wires, conduits, pipes, mains, sewers, or other similar property or
any apparatus in connection therewith, below the surface of the ground, if such injury or
destruction is caused by and occurs during the use of mechanical equipment for the purpose
of grading of land, paving, excavating, drilling; or injury to or destruction of any property at
any time resulting there from.
3. Injury to or destruction of any property arising out of blasting or explosion.
4. Motor vehicle public liability and property damage insurance to cover each automobile,
truck, and other vehicle used in the performance of the Contract in an amount of not less than
$1,000,000.00 for one person, and $1,000,000.00 for more than one person, and property
damage in the sum of $1,000,000.00 resulting from any one accident which may arise from
the operations of the Contractor in performing the work provided for herein.
E. The Contractor shall carry and maintain fire and extended coverage with an endorsement for
vandalism and malicious mischief in Contractor’s name and also in the name of the City in an
amount of at least ONE HUNDRED PERCENT (100%) of the Contract amount (if applicable).
F. The Contractor shall secure “all risk”-type builder's risk insurance for work to be performed.
Unless specifically authorized by the City, the amount of such insurance shall not be less than
ONE HUNDRED PERCENT (100%) of the contract price. Such policy shall include coverage
for earthquake, landslide, flood, collapse, or loss due to the results of faulty workmanship, during
the contract time and until final acceptance of work by the City (if applicable).
23
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station Project
Contract No. **
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this ** day of **, 2017, by and between ** of the city
of **, county of **, state of Arizona, hereinafter designated “Contractor”, and the City of Prescott, a
municipal corporation, organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of
Arizona, hereinafter designated “City”.
WITNESSETH: That the said Contractor, for and in consideration of the sum to be paid him by the
said City, and of the other covenants and agreements herein contained, and under the penalties
expressed in the bonds provided, hereby agrees, for himself, his heir, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns as follows:
ARTICLE I - SCOPE OF WORK: The Contractor shall furnish any and all labor, materials,
equipment, transportation, utilities, services and facilities, required to perform all work for the
construction of the project described as City of Prescott: Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station Project
and install the material therein for the City, in a good and workmanlike and substantial manner and
to the satisfaction of the City through its Engineers and under the direction and supervision of the
Public Works Director, or his properly authorized agents and strictly pursuant to and in conformity
with the Plans and Specifications prepared by the engineers for the City, and with such written
modifications of the same and other documents that may be made by the City through the Public
Works Director or his properly authorized agents, as provided herein.
ARTICLE II - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Notice Inviting Bids, Plans, Technical
Specifications, Special Provisions, Addenda, if any, Proposal and Insurance Requirements as
accepted by the Mayor and Council per Council Minutes of **, 2017, Performance Bond, Payment
Bond, Bid Bond, Certificate of Insurance and Contract Amendments, if any, are by this reference
made a part of this Contract to the same extent as if set forth herein in full.
ARTICLE III - TIME OF COMPLETION: The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work on
or before the tenth (10th) day after written notice to do so, and to fully complete the same within two
hundred seventy (270) calendar days after the date of the written notice to commence work, subject
to such extensions of time as are provided by the General Conditions.
ARTICLE IV - COMPENSATION: Contractor shall be paid, pursuant to the provisions as set
forth in the Contract documents, the total sum of ** Dollars ($**), plus any approved contract
amendments, for the full and satisfactory completion of all work as set forth in the Project
Specifications and Contract Documents. Retention shall be in accordance with A.R.S. § 34-221.
ARTICLE V - CONFLICT OF INTEREST: Pursuant to A.R.S. § 38-511, the City may cancel
this contract, without penalty or further obligation, if any person significantly involved in initiating,
negotiation, securing, drafting or creating the contract on behalf of the City is, at any time while the
contract or any extension of the contract is in effect, an employee or agent of any other party to the
contract in any capacity or a consultant to any other party of the contract with respect to the subject
24
matter of the contract. In the event of the foregoing, the City further elects to recoup any fee or
commission paid or due to any person significantly involved in initiating, negotiation, securing,
drafting or creating this contract on behalf of the City from any other party to the contract, arising as
a result of this contract.
ARTICLE VI - AMBIGUITY: This Agreement is the result of negotiations by and between the
parties. Although it has been drafted by the Prescott City Attorney, it is the result of the negotiations
between the parties. Therefore, any ambiguity in this Agreement is not to be construed against either
party.
ARTICLE VII - NONDISCRIMINATION: The Contractor, with regard to the work performed by
it after award and during its performance of this contract, will not discriminate on the grounds of
race, color, national origin, religion, sex, disability or familial status in the selection and retention of
subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The Contractor will not
participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by or pursuant to Title VI of
the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Section 109 of the
Housing and Community Development Act of 1974, the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, the
Americans With Disability Act (Public Law 101-336, 42 U.S.C. 12101-12213) and all applicable
federal regulations under the Act, and Arizona Governor Executive Orders 99-4, 2000-4 and 2009-09
as amended.
ARTICLE VIII - INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS: It is expressly agreed and
understood by and between the parties that the Contractor is being retained by the City as an
independent contractor, and as such the Contractor shall not become a City employee, and is not
entitled to payment or compensation from the City or to any fringe benefits to which other City
employees are entitled other than that compensation as set forth in Article IV - Compensation above.
As an independent contractor, the Contractor further acknowledges that he is solely responsible for
payment of any and all income taxes, FICA, withholding, unemployment insurance, or other taxes
due and owing any governmental entity whatsoever as a result of this Agreement. As an independent
contractor, the Contractor further agrees that he will conduct himself in a manner consistent with
such status, and that he will neither hold himself out nor claim to be an officer or employee of the
City by reason thereof, and that he will not make any claim, demand or application to or for any right
or privilege applicable to any officer or employee of the City, including but not limited to workmen's
compensation coverage, unemployment insurance benefits, social security coverage, or retirement
membership or credit.
ARTICLE IX - CITY FEES: Prior to final payment to the Contractor, the City shall deduct
therefrom any and all unpaid privilege, license and other taxes, fees and any and all other unpaid
moneys due the City from the Contractor, and shall apply to those moneys to the appropriate account.
Contractor shall provide to the City any information necessary to determine the total amount(s) due.
ARTICLE X - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: All time limits stated in the contract documents are of
the essence and should the Contractor fail to complete the work required to be done on or before the
time of completion as set forth in these contract documents, including any authorized extension of
time, it is mutually agreed and understood by and between the parties that the public will suffer great
damages; that such damages, from the nature of the project, will be extremely difficult and
impractical to fix; that the parties hereto wish to fix the amount of said damages in advance; and that
the sum of $710.00 per day for each and every day's delay in completion and acceptance of the work
required to be done by the Contractor subsequent to the time of completion, including any authorized
extensions of time, is the nearest and most exact measure of damages for such breach that can be
fixed now or could be fixed at or after such breach and that, therefore, the Owner and Contractor
25
agree to fix said sum of $710.00 per day for each and every said day's delay as liquidated damages,
and not as a penalty or forfeiture for the breach of the agreement to complete the work required to be
done by the Contractor on or before the time of completion and acceptance and, in the case of such
breach, the Owner shall deduct said amount from the amount due the Contractor under the contract.
In the event the remaining balance due the Contractor is insufficient to cover the full amount of
assessed liquidated damages, then the Contractor or the surety on the bonds shall pay the difference
due the Owner.
ARTICLE XI - OTHER WORK IN PROJECT AREA: The City, any other contractors, whether
under contract with the City, a third party, and/or utilities, may be working within the project area
while this Contract is in progress. The Contractor herein acknowledges that delays and disruptions
may, and in all likelihood, will occur due to other work. The Contractor’s bid shall be deemed to
have recognized and included costs arising from and associated with other work in the project area
disclosed by the Contract Documents or which would be apparent to an experienced contractor
exercising due diligence during inspection of the project documents, the question and answer session
in the pre-bid process or during site inspection. No payment will be made for any delays or
disruptions in the work schedule that are wholly the fault of the contractor, its agents, employees or
any of the contractor’s subcontractors. In the event that the contractor encounters delay or disruption
in the project schedule due to factors not wholly the fault of the contractor or within the contractors
control then the Contract may be adjusted pursuant to the Delay’s and Extension of Time provisions
of this Contract and a timely request submitted for Contract Amendment. Failure to submit a timely
request for Contract Amendment shall be deemed a waiver of any entitlement to additional
compensation.
ARTICLE XII - BONDS:
A. On or before the execution of the contract, the Contractor shall obtain in an amount equal to the
full contract price a performance bond pursuant to A.R.S. § 34-222, conditioned upon the
faithful performance of this contract in accordance with the plans, specifications and conditions
herein. Such bond shall be solely for the protection of the City. A copy of this bond shall be filed
with the Prescott City Clerk.
B. Contractor shall also obtain a payment bond, pursuant to the provisions of A.R.S. § 34-222, in an
amount equal to this full contract price herein, said bond to be solely for the protection of
claimants supplying labor or materials to the Contractor or his subcontractors in the prosecution
of the work provided for in this contract. A copy of this bond shall be filed with the Prescott City
Clerk.
C. All bonds must be written by an insurance company authorized to do business in the State of
Arizona, to be evidenced by a Certificate of Authority as defined in A.R.S. § 20-217, a copy of
which certificate is to be attached to the applicable bid bond, payment bond and performance
bond. In addition, depending upon the nature of the contract and amount thereof, the City
Manager may also require insurance companies and/or bonding companies to have an “A” rating
or better with Moody's or A.M. Best Company, and/or to be included on the current list of
“Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended) by the audit staff,
Bureau of Accounts, US Treasury Department.
ARTICLE XIII - MISCELLANEOUS:
A. The parties hereto expressly covenant and agree that in the event of a dispute arising from this
Agreement, each of the parties hereto waives any right to a trial by jury. In the event of
26
litigation, the parties hereby agree to submit to a trial before the Court. The Contractor further
agrees that this provision shall be contained in all subcontracts related to the project, which is the
subject of this Agreement.
B. The parties hereto expressly covenant and agree that in the event of litigation arising from this
Agreement, neither party shall be entitled to an award of attorney fees, either pursuant to the
Contract, pursuant to A.R.S. § 12-341.01 (A) and (B), or pursuant to any other state or federal
statute, court rule, case law or common law. The Contractor further agrees that this provision
shall be contained in all subcontracts related to the project that is the subject of this Agreement.
C. Any notices to be given by either party to the other must be in writing, and personally delivered
or mailed by prepaid postage, at the following addresses:
Public Works Director **
City of Prescott **
433 N. Virginia Street **
Prescott, AZ 86301
D. This Agreement shall be construed under the laws of the State of Arizona.
E. This Agreement represents the entire and integrated Agreement between the City and the
Contractor and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or
oral. This Agreement may be amended only by written instrument signed by both the City and
the Contractor. Written and signed amendments shall automatically become part of the
Agreement, and shall supersede any inconsistent provision therein; provided, however, that any
apparent inconsistency shall be resolved, if possible, by construing the provisions as mutually
complementary and supplementary.
F. In the event any provision of this Agreement shall be held to be invalid and unenforceable, the
remaining provisions shall be valid and binding upon the parties. One or more waivers by either
party of any provision, term, condition or covenant shall not be construed by the other party as a
waiver of a subsequent breach of the same by the other party.
G. No oral order, objection, claim or notice by any party to the other shall affect or modify any of
the terms or obligations contained in this Agreement, and none of the provisions of this
Agreement shall be held to be waived or modified by reason of any act whatsoever, other than by
a definitely agreed waiver or modification thereof in writing. No evidence of modification or
waiver other than evidence of any such written notice, waiver or modification shall be introduced
in any proceeding.
H. In the event of a discrepancy between this Agreement and other documents incorporated into this
Agreement, this Agreement shall control over Exhibit “A”.
I. Non-Availability of Funds: Fulfillment of the obligation of the City under this Agreement is
conditioned upon the availability of funds appropriated or allocated for the performance of such
obligations. If funds are not allocated and available for the continuance of this Agreement, this
Agreement may be terminated by the City at the end of the period for which the funds are
available. No liability shall accrue to the City in the event this provision is exercised, and the
City shall not be obligated or liable for any future payments as a result of termination under this
paragraph.
27
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, three (3) identical counterparts of this Contract, each of which shall for
all purposes be deemed an original thereof, have been duly executed by the parties herein above
named, on the date and year first above written.
ATTEST:
Witness, if Contractor is an Individual **
By:
Title:
City of Prescott, a municipal corporation:
Harry B. Oberg, Mayor
Attest: Approved as to Form:
Dana R. DeLong, City Clerk Jon M. Paladini, City Attorney
28
CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS
AND CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION OF WARRANTIES
PROJECT: Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station
To the City of Prescott, Arizona
Gentlemen:
1. This is to certify that all lawful claims for materials, rental of equipment and labor used in
connection with the construction of the above project, whether by subcontractor or claimant in
person, have been duly discharged.
2. The undersigned, for the consideration of $
(total project price) as set out in the final pay estimate, as full and complete payment under the
terms of the Contract, hereby waives and relinquishes any and all further claims or right of lien
under, in connection with, or as a result of the above-described project. The undersigned further
agrees to indemnify and save harmless the City of Prescott against any and all liens, claims of
liens, suits, actions, damages, charges and expenses whatsoever, which said City may suffer
arising out of the failure of the undersigned to pay for all labor performance and materials
furnished for the performance of said project.
3. This is to further certify that the project is completed to acceptable standards as defined in the
plans and specifications for said Project Contract Agreement. Any changes to the plans have
been noted on the Construction As-built Mylar Drawings certified by the Engineer of Record,
which As-built Drawings have been delivered to the Public Works Director. All materials used
and workmanship performed are expressly warranted to be free of defects for a period of twenty-
four (24) months from the date of final acceptance by the City of Prescott.
Signed and dated this day of , 2017.
Contractor
By:
Title:
State of )
) ss.
County of )
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me by
this day of , 2017.
Notary Public Commission Expires
29
GENERAL CONDITIONS
30
COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within 15 days of the date of the Notice of Award, the Contractor is required to attend a Pre-
construction Conference. The City will contact the Contractor to schedule a specific date, time and
location for the Pre-construction Conference. The purpose of the meeting is to outline specific
construction items and procedures and to address items, which require special attention on the part of
the Contractor. The Contractor may also present proposed variations in procedures, which the
Contractor believes may be of benefit to the project, reduce cost, or will reduce inconvenience to the
public. Communication and coordination issues will be also addressed during the Pre-construction
Conference. The Contractor will be required to provide five sets of the following information at the
Pre-construction Conference:
A. Names and emergency telephone number of key personnel involved in the project.
B. A copy of each subcontractor’s contract or purchase order agreement for each and every item of
work under subcontract on the project.
C. The Construction Schedule as defined elsewhere in the General Conditions.
D. A payment schedule showing the estimated dollar volume of work for each calendar month
during the life of the project.
E. The Traffic Control and access management plan providing for continuous access to residents
and businesses affected by the project.
F. The Contractor’s Company Safety Plan.
G. The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan.
H. An itemized list of shop drawings, materials, mix designs, equipment submittals and a schedule
indicating the dates each of these items will be transmitted to the Public Works Director for
review.
Each of the above items is subject to review and approval by the Public Works Director.
COMMENCEMENT
The Contractor shall commence work on or before the tenth (10th) calendar day after receiving the
Notice to Proceed, and shall complete all work under the Contract within the period of time specified
in the Special Conditions. The City reserves the right to issue Notice to Proceed at any time between
zero (0) and sixty (60) days after contract award. Notice to Proceed will be issued not later than sixty
(60) calendar days after the Contract has been awarded unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, or as
may be specified in the Special Conditions. In addition, Contractor shall not commence work until
all required documents, bonds, plans and schedules have been received and approved by the City.
These submittals will not affect the issuance of Notice to Proceed by the City.
PUBLIC NOTICE
A. Contractor shall issue written notification to those residents affected by the Zone 12 Interconnect
Pump Station Project. This notification shall contain at a minimum: (1) Type of Work; (2)
Contractor; (3) Contractor's Phone Number and Point of Contact; (4) Duration of Project; (5)
Date Project Commences; (6) Description of Project Site; (7) Contractor’s After-hours Point of
Contact and Phone Number.
31
B. The Contractor is required to post public notification signs at all entrances to the project
specifying the following information: (1) Project Name/Description (2) Construction Calendar
(3) Contractor Name/Phone Number Day and Night (4) City Public Works (928) 777-1130.
C. The sign size and legend shall be appropriate for the intended purpose and be easily read. Sign
background shall be blue with white letters. The sign size and legend content shall be approved
by the Public Works Department prior to sign manufacture. All signs shall be posted prior to
commencement of any work on the project. Signs will be removed by the contractor upon final
acceptance of the project. No direct payment shall be made for said signs, cost of such shall be
considered incidental to the contract.
SUBCONTRACTORS
MAG Specifications, Section 108.2, including the following:
A. All subcontractors and purchase orders for equipment shall state and establish guaranteed
delivery dates, at such times as determined by the Contractor, which will allow the Contractor to
complete the project within the Contract time.
B. The Contractor shall perform more than forty percent (40%) of the work (by total contract
amount) involved in this project with his own forces. Total subcontracted amounts shall be
limited to less than sixty percent (60%) of the total contract amount. For purposes of this
requirement, materials purchased directly from suppliers and installed by the Contractor’s own
forces shall be included in the Contractor’s total and materials installed by subcontractors,
regardless of who originally purchased them, will be included in the Subcontractors totals.
C. The Contractor shall furnish the form list of subcontractors with his bid including the estimated
amount of each subcontract. Additionally, a duplicate copy of each subcontract, including lower
tier subcontracts, shall be delivered to the Public Works Director upon award of the project and
prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE AND EMERGENCIES
MAG Specifications, Section 105.5, including: Plans and specifications to successful bidder clause
in the “Information for Bidders” in this set of specifications.
CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR RECORDS
A. The Contractor shall keep at the work site a copy of the Contract Documents and shall at all
times give the Public Works Director access thereto.
B. The Notice Inviting Bids, Information for Bidders, Special Conditions, Specifications, Plans, and
all supplementary documents are intended to be complete and complementary and to prescribe a
complete work. If any omissions are made of information necessary to carry out the full intent
and meaning of the contract documents, the Contractor shall immediately call the matter to the
attention of the Public Works Director for furnishing of detailed instructions. In case of
discrepancies, the Specifications shall govern over the plans. Figured dimensions shall govern
over scaled dimensions.
C. Any drawings or plans listed anywhere in the Specifications or Addenda thereto shall be regarded
as a part thereof and of the Contract. Anything mentioned in these Specifications and not
indicated on the plans, or anything indicated on the plans and not mentioned in these
Specifications, shall be in the same force and effect as if indicated or mentioned in both.
32
D. The Contractor, subcontractors and all suppliers shall keep and maintain all books, papers,
records, files, accounts, reports, bid documents with back-up data, including electronic data, and
all other material relating to the contract and project for three years following completion and
acceptance of the work. All records shall be accurately maintained in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles and practices uniformly and consistently applied in a format that
will permit audit. The Public Works Director or his authorized representative(s) shall have
access at all reasonable times to all applicable records of the Contractor and the records of the
Contractor’s subcontractors.
The Contractor and Subcontractors shall preserve all such materials for a period of three years
after all payments to the Contractor or subcontractors, or until the final resolution of all claims
made by the Contractor or subcontractor on this contract, whichever is later. The Contractor and
subcontractors shall make all of the above materials available to the Public Works Director for
auditing, inspection and copying and shall produce such materials upon written request at the
office of the Public Works Director located at 433 N. Virginia St., Prescott Arizona.
The Contractor shall insert the above requirement in each subcontract, purchase order, lease
agreement, or other document under which goods or services are provided for the performance of
this contract and shall also include in all subcontracts a clause requiring subcontractors to include
the above requirement in any lower-tier subcontract, purchase order, lease agreement or
document under which goods or services are provided for the performance of this contract.
ADDENDA, REVISIONS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DRAWINGS
A. The work shall conform to such other drawings relating thereto as may be furnished by the City
prior to the opening of proposals, and to such drawings in the explanation of details or minor
modifications as may be furnished from time to time during construction, including such minor
modifications as the Public Works Director may consider necessary during the prosecution of the
work.
B. Scaled dimensions shall not be used in the construction of the work.
ERROR AND OMISSIONS
The written dimensions, calculations and quantities on the plans are presumed to be correct, but the
Contractor shall be required to check carefully all dimensions, calculations and quantities before
beginning work. If any errors or omissions are discovered, the Public Works Director shall be so
advised in writing and will make the proper corrections. If the Contractor claims that any such errors
or omissions should change the cost of any Pay Item or the construction as identified in the plans, the
Contractor shall also submit to the Public Works Director a written proposed Contract Amendment.
Any such adjustments made by the Contractor that are claimed to change the cost of any Pay Item or
the construction as identified in the plans, without prior review and acceptance of a proposed
Contract Amendment, shall be at the Contractor’s own risk. The settlement of any complications or
disputed expenses arising from a Contractor’s adjustment shall be borne by the Contractor at his own
expense.
CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
MAG Specifications, Section 108.6.
SUSPENSION OF WORK
A. The Public Works Director shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly or in part, for
such period as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather, or to such other conditions as
33
are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as he may
deem necessary due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given, or to
perform any provisions of the Contract. The Contractor shall immediately comply with the
written order of the Public Works Director to suspend work wholly or in part. The suspended
work shall be resumed when conditions are favorable and methods are corrected, as reviewed
and accepted in writing by the Public Works Director.
B. In case of suspension of work for any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall be responsible for
all materials and shall properly store them if necessary and shall provide suitable drainage and
erect temporary structures where necessary.
C. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended or delayed by the Public Works
Director in writing for an unreasonable period of time (not originally anticipated, customary, or
inherent to the construction industry) and the contractor believes that additional compensation
and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension or delay, the contractor shall submit to
the Public Works Director, in writing, a request for an adjustment within seven (7) calendar days
of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for
such adjustment.
D. Upon receipt, the Public Works Director will evaluate the contractor’s request. If the Public
Works Director agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has
increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the
control of and not the fault of the contractor, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier,
and not caused by weather, the Public Works Director will make an adjustment (excluding
profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The contractor will be notified of the
Public Works Director’s determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is
warranted. In the event an adjustment of the contract is warranted a contract amendment shall be
executed by both parties evidencing mutual agreement to same.
E. No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the contractor has submitted the request for
adjustment within the time limits prescribed.
F. No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would
have been suspended or delayed by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or
excluded under any other term or condition of this contract.
DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME
MAG Specifications, Section 108.7, including:
A. It is the Contractors responsibility to establish construction methods and a construction schedule,
which will facilitate the completion of work required by this Contract within the contract period
and with full consideration for the season during which the work is scheduled. Judgment as to
hazardous conditions shall be made by the Public Works Director.
B. To receive consideration for an extension of time, a request must be made in writing to the
Public Works Director stating the reason for said request, and such request must be received by
the Public Works Director as soon as reasonably practicable when the contractor has knowledge
or should have known of the delay causing event, condition or circumstances, but in no event
later than immediately following the end of the delay-causing condition. The extension of time
allowed shall be as determined by the Public Works Director and approved by the City. In setting
the Contract time, it has been assumed that up to five (5) working days may be lost as a result of
weather conditions which will slow down the normal progress of work; therefore no extensions
34
in contract time will be allowed for the first five (5) working days lost due to bad weather
conditions. An extension of time may be granted by the City after the expiration of the time
originally fixed in the Contract or as previously extended, and the extension so granted shall be
deemed to commence and be effective from the date of such expiration.
C. Any extension of time shall not release the sureties upon any bond required under the Contract.
Extensions of time in and of themselves will not be a basis for a request of additional
compensation by the Contractor.
D. Any delays in this project, or extensions of time which may be granted, shall not entitle the
Contractor to any additional compensation or monies whatsoever, including but not limited to
compensation for loss of anticipated profits, extended overhead, unabsorbed home office
overhead, or any other payments, unless expressly agreed to by the City in a duly executed and
approved contract amendment.
PAYMENT FOR DELAY
MAG 109.8 except as modified hereafter:
109.8.2, (B) Any compensation paid to the Contractor shall be in accordance with the General
Conditions, Payment to Contractors, section of this Contract.
109.8.3 Extension of Contract Time: For any such delays, the contract time will be adjusted in
accordance with the General Conditions, Delays and Extension of Time, section of this Contract.
TERMINATION FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT
MAG Specifications, Sections 108.10 and 108.11, including: The foregoing provisions are in
addition to and not in limitation of any other rights or remedies available to the City.
METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
MAG Specifications, Section 108.6, including: The methods and equipment adopted by the
Contractor shall be such as will secure a satisfactory quality of work and will enable the Contractor
to complete the work in the time agreed upon. The selection and use of these methods and equipment
is the responsibility of the Contractor.
DATE OF ACTUAL COMPLETION
The date upon which the project will be considered as complete shall be that date upon which the
work is accepted by the City.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
MAG Specifications, Section 105.15 (B), including:
A. After all work under the Contract has been completed, as determined by the Public Works
Director, the Public Works Director will recommend in writing to the City that final acceptance
of the entire work under this Contract be made as of the date of the Public Works Director final
inspection. The City will make final acceptance promptly after receiving the Public Works
Director’s recommendation.
B. Partial Acceptance may be given upon substantial completion of the work at the sole discretion
of the Public Works Director in accordance MAG 105.15 and the paragraph entitled PARTIAL
ACCEPTANCE OF WORK in these General Conditions.
C. For the purpose of this section, Substantial Completion shall mean that stage in the progress of
the Work where the Work or designated portion is sufficiently complete in accordance with the
35
Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use with
only minor work items or cleanup items remaining to be accomplished. Partial Acceptance shall
not be given for incomplete major work items nor minor work items affecting public health and
safety.
D. Contract Time accounting and/or Assessment of Liquidated Damages shall be suspended on the
date of Partial Acceptance and the Contractor shall complete all remaining work items necessary
for Final Acceptance within 30 calendar days of the date of Partial Acceptance. The City shall
withhold release of retention until all items under the contract have been completed and Final
Acceptance has been issued.
SAFETY, HEALTH AND SANITATION PROVISIONS
MAG Specifications, Section 107.5, including:
A. The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate sanitary conveniences for the use of all
persons employed on the project. All sanitary conveniences shall conform to the regulations of
the public authority having jurisdiction over such matters. At the completion of the project, all
such sanitary conveniences shall be removed and the premises left in a sanitary condition.
B. On all projects, with respect to sanitation facilities, for which Federal funds are allocated, the
Contractor shall cooperate with and follow directions of representatives of the Public Health
Service and the State. State and County public health service representatives shall have access to
the work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper
facilities for such access and inspection.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Traffic control is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be in accordance with MAG
Specifications, Section 401. The Contractor shall submit to the City, for approval, a traffic control
plan for all activities connected with the proposed work.
WATER
A. The Contractor shall supply adequate, pure cool drinking water with individual drinking cups for
the use of employees on this construction. The quality of drinking water shall meet the
“Standards for Public Water Supplies” specified in the State Health Department Code.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain, at his own expense, an
adequate supply of water for his use for construction and to install and maintain necessary supply
connections and piping for same. Before final acceptance of the completed project, all temporary
connections and piping installed by the Contractor shall be removed.
C. The Contractor shall apply for a fire hydrant meter for all construction water used if the
Contractor desires to obtain water from the City distribution system at any point. All contractors
requesting construction water from the City must submit a Construction Water Meter Application
to the Water Distribution Department. A $1,000 deposit will be required for hydrant meters. If
construction water use occurs during the months of May through September the Contractor shall
also include a dust abatement program. Potable water may not be allowed for dust abatement
during these months. Potable water can be used to process embankment fill and base materials
year round. However, contractors are encouraged to use treated effluent for construction
activities. The City has two outlets for effluent, the Sundog Wastewater Treatment Plant and the
Airport Wastewater Treatment Plant. The City will provide metered standpipes for effluent at
both plants. The Contractor will be required to estimate daily and total potable/effluent water
36
usage for the project as identified on the Construction Water Meter application. The Contractor
will be responsible for all costs associated with obtaining and delivering construction water.
PROTECTION OF WORK
MAG Specifications, Section 107.10.
CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL
MAG Specifications, Sections 104.1.3 and 104.1.4, including: Salvage material shall be stored at
areas designated by the Public Works Director.
GUARANTEE OF WORK
MAG Specifications, Section 108.8, shall apply, but modify: Guarantee period is two (2) years.
During the two year guarantee period, should the Contractor fail to remedy defective material and/or
workmanship, or to make replacements within five (5) calendar days after written notice by the City,
it is agreed that the City may make such repairs and replacements and the actual cost of the required
labor and materials shall be chargeable to and payable by the Contractor.
CONTINGENCIES
All loss or damage arising from obstruction or difficulties which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, from the action of the elements, or from any act or omission on the part of
the Contractor or any person or agent employed by him shall be borne by the Contractor.
NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF
Any notice to the Contractor from the City relative to any part of this Contract shall be in writing and
considered delivered and the service thereof completed when said Notice is posted, by first class
mail, to the said Contractor at his last given address, or delivered in person to said Contractor or his
authorized representative on the work.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to conduct weekly meetings to be attended by
representatives of Subcontractors, utilities, the Public Works Director and other interested parties
for the purpose of keeping the project on schedule and to provide for necessary coordination of
the work of the various parties. The Contractor shall take minutes at each meeting for
distribution to all attendees the following week. The minutes shall be of sufficient detail to
accurately recount the meeting discussion, including but not limited to progress, work schedule,
submittals and certifications, utilities, construction issues, contract changes, safety and traffic
control, action items, resolved and unresolved issues.
B. Additionally the Contractor shall furnish the Public Works Director with written weekly project
status reports at the beginning of each weekly project meeting. The report shall cover the work
of the preceding work week and shall include the following for each week.
1. A comprehensive daily list of the Contractor’s men and equipment performing the work on
the jobsite.
2. A comprehensive daily list of Contractor’s subcontractors’ men and equipment, if any,
performing the work on the jobsite.
3. A brief description of the work performed by the Contractor and Contractor’s subcontractors,
if any.
37
4. The estimated percentage of each portion of the work performed for the period together with
the total percentage of each portion of the work performed to the date of the report.
5. A detailed summary of each work stoppage, if any, occasioned by the City, other contractors,
or other designated reasons, which were beyond the contractor’s control.
6. Comments or exceptions to prior weekly meeting minutes shall be addressed at each
subsequent construction meeting.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Per MAG Specifications, Section 108.4 and Section 108.5, including:
A. The Construction schedule shall indicate the time of starting and completing each major phase of
the project and such intermediate phases as will serve for well-defined control points. The
schedule shall be of sufficient detail to define the Critical Path for project completion. It shall
also indicate the scheduled receipt of major items of equipment and the items of equipment
installation dates of which is critical to the scheduled progress of the project. Two week look-
ahead schedules will be provided by the contractor at each weekly construction meeting. The
comprehensive project schedule shall be updated and submitted monthly. Such updates shall
include and accurately reflect additional work, changes in the work, delays to individual items of
work and reasons therefore along with the extent of delay and any other items affecting the
progress of the project.
B. Failure by the contractor to provide the weekly/monthly updates will result in the City
withholding an amount equal to 5% of the monthly pay estimate relative to the billing period in
which the schedule updates are to be provided. Said 5% withholding will be retained by the City
until the required schedule updates are submitted by the Contractor, reviewed by the City and
found to be current. When the schedule updates are determined to be in conformance with the
provisions herein the 5% retainer will be released with the next monthly payment.
C. The construction schedule shall serve as an index of progress prosecution as contemplated by the
Contractor. In the event the actual construction progress varies substantially from the scheduled
progress, the Public Works Director will require and the Contractor shall be required, within ten
(10) calendar days written notice, to provide a revised construction schedule, giving in detail the
particular changes in production as estimated by the Contractor to complete the work within the
specified Contract Time. Time is of the essence in this regard.
ACCIDENT PREVENTION
MAG Specifications, Section 107.5 and 107.6 including:
A. Machinery, equipment and other hazards shall be guarded or eliminated in accordance with the
safety provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction published by the
Associated General Contractors of America, and the requirements of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration.
B. First aid facilities and information posters conforming at least to the minimum requirements of
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration shall be provided in a readily accessible
location or locations.
C. The Contractor shall make all reports as are, or may be, required by the Engineer or any authority
having jurisdiction, and permit all safety inspections of the work being performed under this
Contract. Before proceeding with any construction work, the Contractor shall take all the
necessary action to comply with all provisions for safety and accident prevention. In the event the
38
Contractor fails to comply with said safety provisions or directions of the Public Works Director,
the Public Works Director without prejudice to any other rights of the City, may issue an order
stopping all or any part of the work.
D. Thereafter, a start order for resumption of the work may be issued at the discretion of the Public
Works Director when in his opinion the defection from safety requirements has been corrected.
The Contractor shall make no claim for an extension of time or for compensation or damages by
reason of or in connection with such work stoppage.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
All construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities shall be
of ample size and capacity to adequately support and/or move the loads to which they will be
subjected. All railings, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by law or for adequate
protection of life and property shall be provided.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide all temporary facilities and utilities required for prosecution of the
work; protection of employees and the public; protection of the work from damage by fire, weather
or vandalism; and such other facilities as may be specified or required by any legally applicable law,
ordinance, rule, or regulation.
WARNING DEVICES AND BARRICADES
Per MAG Specifications, Section 107.7.
HAZARDS IN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY
Per MAG Specifications, Section 107.7.
HAZARDS IN PROTECTED AREAS
Excavations on project sites from which the public is to be excluded shall be marked or guarded in a
manner appropriate for the hazard.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING ITEMS
The Contractor shall protect all existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items on the project site
that are to be preserved, by substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with the hazard,
from injury or destruction by vehicles, equipment, workmen, or other agents.
PROJECT SECURITY
The Contractor shall make adequate provision, subject to the approval of the Public Works Director,
to protect the project and Contractor's facilities from fire, theft, and vandalism, and the public from
unnecessary exposure to injury.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
At least one (1) fire extinguisher, rated at least 2A, shall be provided on the job site.
OFF-SITE ROADS
Except as otherwise shown or specified, off-site access roads shall be adequately maintained,
graded-earth roads. Such roads shall be built only in the public right-of-way or easements obtained
by the City. If the Contractor elects to build along some other alignment, he shall obtain, without
additional cost to the City, necessary rights-of-way or easements.
39
NOISE ABATEMENT
In inhabited areas, particularly residential, operations shall be performed in a manner to minimize
unnecessary noise generation. Particular consideration shall be given to noise generated by repair and
service activities during the night hours in residential areas. No repair or service activities shall be
conducted between the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m.
DRAINAGE CONTROL
In excavation, fill, and grading operations, care shall be taken to disturb the pre-existing drainage
pattern as little as possible. Particular care shall be taken not to direct drainage water onto private
property or into streets or drainage ways inadequate for the increased flow.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
It is the intent of these Specifications and Contract Documents that the Contractor shall deliver a
complete and operable facility capable of performing its intended functions and ready for use. The
City shall withhold Final Payment and release of retention until ALL of the following items have
been completed:
A. Completion of all work, including punch-list items and Final Acceptance of the work by the City.
B. Submittal by Contractor of final pay estimate, which shall show the amount of work performed
according to the Contract and approved by the City.
C. Submittal by the Contractor of all Project Record Documents, including As-Built drawings,
operation and maintenance manuals, and other records as referenced herein.
D. Submittal by Contractor of CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF
CLAIMS AND CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION AND WARRANTIES.
E. Closeout of any and all permits issued to the Contractor by the City or any other agency for the
work included in the project.
F. Submittal by Contractor of EPA SWPPP Notice of Termination (if applicable).
WASTE DISPOSAL, GRADING AND MATERIAL STORAGE
A. The Contractor shall provide for the disposal of all surplus materials, waste products, debris, etc.,
and shall make necessary arrangements for such disposal. The Contractor shall obtain written
permission from property owners(s) prior to disposing of any surplus materials, waste products,
debris, etc., on private property, and shall also obtain the approval of the Public Works Director
prior to such disposal.
B. The Public Works Director will not approve the filling of ditches, washes, drainage ways, etc.,
which may in his opinion create water control problems.
C. The Public Works Director will not approve disposal operations, which will, in his opinion,
create unsightly and/or unsanitary nuisances.
D. The Contractor shall maintain the disposal site(s) in a reasonable condition of appearance and
safety during the construction period as required by the Public Works Director. Prior to final
acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall have completed the leveling and cleanup of the
disposal site(s) to the satisfaction of the Public Works Director.
E. The Contractor shall obtain a grading permit or any other permit required by the City, Yavapai
County or any other county, or State or federal rules, regulations, laws, ordinances, or any other
40
regulatory authority for all construction operations of the Project, including but not limited to the
following:
1. Areas disturbed by the Contractor, including staging areas, borrow areas, waste areas, or
material storage areas, located within the City limits that are subject to any requirements of
the City Code or City Land Development Code, including but not limited to Section 6.7 –
Site Disturbance, Grading and Restoration Standards, of the City Land Development Code;
Section 9.6 – Site Disturbance and Grading Permit, or Chapter 16-2: DRAINAGE
REGULATIONS;
2. Areas outside of the City limits that are subject to the requirements of Yavapai County for
any activities described in this section, “WASTE DISPOSAL”;
3. The disposal of waste material on private property dependent upon site specific conditions at
the waste area(s) and characteristics of the fill in accordance with Paragraph 1. The fees for a
permit for this activity shall not be waived; said fees are incidental to the appropriate bid
item(s);
4. The staging or material storage area(s) that:
a. Are not City owned property on the project, or
b. Require clearing or grubbing in excess of 10,000 sf.
Fees for a permit(s) for this activity shall not be waived; said costs are incidental to the
appropriate bid item(s).
5. Site disturbances for infrastructure improvements on City owned property not within the
right-of-way for which the disturbance is greater than 50 cubic yards of material or in excess
of 10,000 square feet. The associated fees for grading permits for this activity on City owned
property shall be waived.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, available to the City and Engineer, one (1) copy of all
Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change of Orders, and other
modifications in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These
shall be delivered to the City upon completion of the Project or the earlier termination of the
parties' contract.
B. The contractor shall maintain any and all documentation to substantiate all costs on the project,
including but not limited to those items included in “Force Account” computations, computations
reflecting the actual cost of work on the project and computations substantiating any claimed
increases or additional costs incurred in the project by the contractor, and shall make those
records available to the City (or provide copies thereof to the City) within 24 hours of request by
the City. The failure of the Contractor to maintain and produce the foregoing documentation will
preclude the Contractor from being entitled to any additional payments for any additional work in
question.
CONTROL OF WORK
ABBREVIATIONS
MAG Specifications, Section 101.1, including abbreviations as shown on the Plans.
41
AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTOR
Per MAG Specifications, Section 105.9, including:
A. An inspector is to be assigned to the project by the City to monitor the project and to keep the
Public Works Director informed as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is
being done. Additionally, the inspector will call the Contractor’s attention to any
non-conformance with the Plans and Specifications. He will not be authorized to approve or
accept any portion of the work or to act as foreman for the Contractor. Inspection will be done
on an as needed or on-call basis.
B. The inspector will exercise such additional authority only as may from time to time be delegated
to him by the Public Works Director.
INSPECTION
MAG Specifications, Section 105.10, including:
Inspection is to be done by the City Public Works Department. The Contractor shall furnish the
Public Works Director with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work as
performed is in accordance with the requirements and intent of the Specifications and Contract. If the
Public Works Director requests it, the Contractor at any time before acceptance of the work shall
remove or uncover such portions of the finished work as may be directed. After examination, the
Contractor shall restore said portions of the work to the standards required by the Specifications.
Should the work thus exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering or removing and the
replacing of the covering or making good of the part removed will be paid for as provided under
CHANGES IN THE WORK, but should the work so exposed or examined prove unacceptable, the
uncovering or removing and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall
be at the Contractor's expense. Inspection or supervision by the Public Works Director shall not be
considered as direct control of the individual workman and his work. The direct control shall be
solely the responsibility of the Contractor's foreman and superintendent.
AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER
MAG Specifications, Section 105.1 with the following exception: References to “the Engineer”
shall mean Public Works Director.
PLANS
A. The Contract Plans consist of general drawings. These indicate such details as are necessary to
give a comprehensive idea of the construction contemplated. All authorized alterations affecting
the requirements and information given on the Contract Plans shall be in writing. The Contract
Plans shall be supplemented by such working or shop drawings prepared by the Contractor as are
necessary to adequately control the work. No change shall be made by the Contractor in any
working or shop drawing after it has been accepted by the Public Works Director.
B. The Contractor shall keep a copy of the Plans and Specifications at the job site, and shall at all
times give the Public Works Director access thereto. Any drawings or plans listed in the Detailed
Specifications shall be regarded as a part thereof and the Public Works Director will furnish from
time to time such additional drawings, plans, profiles, and information as he may consider
necessary for the Contractor's guidance.
C. All authorized alterations affecting the requirements and information given on the accepted plans
shall be in writing. No changes shall be made of any plan or drawing after the same has been
42
accepted by the Public Works Director except by consent of the Public Works Director in
writing.
CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND ALLOWABLE DEVIATIONS
MAG Specifications, Section 105.3.
COORDINATION AND INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MAG Specifications, Section 105.4, including:
A. In the event of any doubt or question arising regarding the true meaning of these Specifications,
Special Provisions, or the Plans, reference shall be made to the Public Works Director, whose
decision thereon shall be final. In the event of any discrepancy between any drawing and the
figures written thereon, the figures shall be taken as correct.
B. In the event of there being a conflict between one contract document and any of the other
contract documents the document highest in precedence shall control and supersede the
document which is contrary to it. The order of precedence of the contract documents is as
follows:
1. Supplemental Agreements, the last in time being the first in precedence.
2. The formal Contract.
3. Notice Inviting Bids.
4. Information for Bidders.
5. Special Provisions.
6. Technical Specifications.
7. Plans.
8. General Conditions.
9. Contractor Proposal.
ORDER OF WORK
A. When required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall follow the sequence of
operations as set forth therein.
B. Full compensation for conforming to such requirements will be considered as included in the
prices paid for contract items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.
CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES AND GRADES
MAG Specifications, Section 105.8.
REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AND/OR UNAUTHORIZED WORK
MAG Specification, Section 105.11.
MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
MAG Specifications, Section 105.12.
COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
The City reserves the right at any time to contract for and perform other additional work on or near
the work covered by the contract.
43
When separate contracts are let within the limits of any one project, each contractor shall conduct his
work so as not to interfere with or hinder the progress or completion of the work being performed by
other Contractors. Contractors working on the same project shall cooperate with each other as
directed.
The Contractor shall arrange his work and shall place and dispose of the materials being used so as
not to interfere with the operations of the other Contractors within the limits of the same project. He
shall join his work with that of others in an acceptable manner and shall perform it in proper
sequence to that of others.
The City will not honor any claim for extra compensation due to delays, extra work, or extension of
time caused by any other Contractors working within the limits of the same project.
COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Prior to starting construction, the Contractor shall submit their construction schedule to the
Public Works Director for approval.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain overall coordination of the project.
Based on the general contract construction schedule prepared in accordance with these
Specifications, the Contractor shall obtain from each of his Subcontractors a similar schedule and
shall be responsible for all parties maintaining these schedules or for coordinating changes
necessitated by unforeseen difficulties.
LINES AND GRADES
All work under this Contract shall be built in accordance with the detailed scope of work.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
MAG Specifications, Section 106.1, including:
A. Where equipment, materials, or articles are referred to in the Specifications as “or equal”, or
“equal to” any particular standard, the Public Works Director shall decide the question of
equality.
B. Wherever any standard published specification is referred to, the latest edition or revision,
including all contract amendments, shall be used unless otherwise specified. Materials of a
general description shall be the best of their several kinds, free from defects, and adapted to the
use for which provided. The physical characteristics of all materials not particularly specified
shall conform to the latest standards published by the American Society for Testing and
Materials, where applicable. All material shall be new and of the specified quality and equal to
the accepted samples, if samples have been submitted.
C. All work shall be done and completed in a thorough, workmanlike manner notwithstanding any
omission from these Specifications or from the Plans; and it shall be the duty of the Contractor to
call the Public Works Director's attention to apparent errors or omissions and request instructions
before proceeding with the work. The Public Works Director may, by appropriate instructions,
correct errors and supply omissions, which instructions shall be binding upon the Contractor as
though contained in the original Specifications or Plans.
44
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT
MAG Specifications, Section 106.4, including: Requests relative to substitutions for materials or
equipment specifically designated on the Plans or in the Specifications shall be made in writing, and
such requests shall be accompanied by complete data on which the Public Works Director can make
determination on the merits of the proposed substitution. The written request shall state how the
product proposed for a substitution compares with or differs from the designated product in
composition, size, arrangement, performance, etc., and in addition, the request shall be accompanied
by documentary evidence of equality in price and delivery or evidence of difference in price and
delivery. Data on price shall be in the form of certified quotations from suppliers of both the
designated and proposed items. All items accepted for substitution shall be subject to all applicable
provisions of the Specifications. Should substitution be allowed under the foregoing provisions, and
should the item subsequently prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for
which it was intended, the Contractor, shall without cost to the City, and without obligation on the
part of the Public Works Director, replace the item with the material originally specified.
FABRICATED MATERIALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
Fabricated materials and shop drawings shall be handled as set forth in the Special Conditions.
MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CITY
MAG Specifications, Section 106.8.
STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
MAG Specifications, Section 106.5 and 106.6, including: Protection of materials and equipment
stored on the site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The City reserves the right to direct the
Contractor to provide proper means of protection for materials if such is deemed advisable by the
Public Works Director; however, the exercise of or failure to exercise this right shall not be deemed
to relieve the Contractor of his primary responsibility for protecting the material and equipment. The
Contractor shall provide suitable warehouses or other adequate means of protection for such if the
materials and equipment require storage and protection. The Contractor shall store and care for the
materials and equipment in the most suitable manner to protect them from distortion, rain, dust, or
other damage. The cost of replacing any material or equipment damaged in storage shall be borne by
the Contractor, and the fact that material or equipment has been damaged after partial payment has
been made shall not relieve the Contractor of his primary responsibility. No motor shall be left
uncovered or unprotected.
REJECTED MATERIALS
MAG Specifications, Section 106.7.
UTILITIES
MAG Specifications, Section 107.11.
DRIVEWAYS AND WALKS
Inconvenience caused by digging across driveways and sidewalks shall be kept to a minimum by
restoring the serviceability of the drive or sidewalk as soon as possible. Before blocking driveways,
the Contractor shall notify the property owner. The Contractor shall replace or repair any damage
done to driveways and walks to not less than the condition existing prior to the Contractor's work. If
it is necessary to leave an excavation open across driveways or sidewalks, the Contractor shall
provide temporary relief in the form of steel plates over the excavation. Direct access shall be
45
provided at all times to fire engine houses, fire hydrants, hospitals, police stations, and at all other
agencies or services where emergencies may require immediate access to same.
ROADS AND FENCES
Streets and roads subjected to interference by the prosecution of this work shall be kept open and
maintained by the Contractor until the work is completed.
TREES AND SHRUBBERY
A. All trees and shrubbery within the right-of-way or easements shall be protected by the Contractor
insofar as practicable.
B. In the event shrubbery or trees must be trimmed, or removed, the Contractor shall notify the
property owner to do so within a reasonable time prior to construction. All shrubbery or trees not
removed by the property owner shall be trimmed or removed by the Contractor and hauled from
the job at the Contractor's expense.
C. All trees, shrubs, hedges, brush, etc. designated on the Plans, or by the Public Works Director for
removal, shall be completely removed and disposed of as indicated on the Plans or as specified
by the Public Works Director.
IRRIGATION DITCHES AND STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall contact the owners of any ditches, irrigation lines, and appurtenances, which
interfere with the work and shall make arrangements for dry- up or scheduling of water deliveries.
The Contractor shall be liable for any damage due to irrigation facilities damaged by his operations
and shall repair such damaged facilities to an “equal or better than” original condition.
SUBMITTALS
Per MAG Specifications, Section 105.2, including:
A. In ample time for each to serve its proper purpose and function, the Contractor shall submit to the
Public Works Director such schedules, reports, drawings, lists, literature samples, instructions,
directions, and guarantees as are specified or reasonably required for construction, operation, and
maintenance of the facilities to be built and/or furnished under this Contract.
B. Shop drawings and data shall be submitted to the Public Works Director in such number of
copies as will allow him to retain four (4) copies of each submittal. The submittal shall clearly
indicate the specific area of the Specifications or Plans for which the submittal is made. The
additional copies received by him will be returned to the Contractor's representative at the job
site. The Public Works Director’s notations of the action, which he has taken, will be noted on
one (1) of these returned copies.
C. The above drawings, lists, prints, samples, and other data shall become a part of the Contract and
a copy of the same shall be kept with the job site plans and the fabrications furnished shall be in
conformance with the same.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
Drawings of minor or incidental fabricated materials and/or equipment may not be required by the
Public Works Director. The Contractor shall furnish the Public Works Director tabulated lists of
such fabrications, showing the names of the manufacturers and catalog numbers, together with
samples of general data as may be required to permit determination by the Public Works Director as
to their acceptability for incorporation in the work.
46
QUALITY CONTROL
A. All material shall be of the specified quality and equal to the approved samples, if samples have
been submitted. All work shall be done and completed in a thorough, workmanlike manner,
notwithstanding any omission from these Specifications or from the Plans; and it shall be the
duty of the Contractor to call the Public Works Director’s attention to apparent errors or
omissions and request instructions before proceeding with the work. The Public Works Director
may, by appropriate instructions, correct errors and supply omissions, which instructions shall be
as binding upon the Contractor as though contained in the original Specifications or Plans.
B. Materials which will require testing and inspection at the place of origin shall not be shipped
prior to such testing and inspection.
SAMPLES AND TESTS
Per MAG Specifications, Sections 106.2 and 106.3, including:
A. At the option of the Public Works Director, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be
approved by him before the delivery is started and before such material is used in the work.
Representative preliminary samples of the character and quality prescribed shall be submitted by
the Contractor or producer of all materials to be used in the work for testing or examination as
desired by the Public Works Director.
B. Sieves used in determining the grading of samples of aggregates, select material, and other
graded materials, shall conform to ASTM Designation E 11-81.
LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY
LAWS TO BE OBSERVED
MAG Specifications, Section 107.1.
ALIEN LABOR
The Contractor shall comply with the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1996.
COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL AND STATE LAWS
The Contractor understands and acknowledges the applicability to it of the Americans with
Disabilities Act, the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 and the Drug Free Workplace Act
of 1989. The following is only applicable to construction contracts: The Contractor must also
comply with A.R.S. §34-301, “Employment of Aliens on Public Works Prohibited”, and A.R.S. §34-
302, as amended, “Residence Requirements for Employees”.
Under the provisions of A.R.S. §41-4401, Contractor hereby warrants to the City that the Contractor
and each of its subcontractors (“Subcontractors”) will comply with, and are contractually obligated
to comply with, all Federal Immigration Laws and regulations that relate to their employees and
A.R.S. §23-214(A) (hereinafter “Contractor Immigration Warranty”).
A breach of the Contractor Immigration Warranty Shall constitute a material breach of this Contract
and shall subject the Contractor to penalties up to and including termination of this Contract at the
sole discretion of the City.
The City retains the legal right to inspect the papers of any Contractor or Subcontractors employee
who works on this Contract to ensure that the Contractor or Subcontractor is complying with the
47
Contractor Immigration Warranty. Contractor agrees to assist the City in regard to any such
inspections.
The City may, at its sole discretion, conduct random verification of the employment records of the
Contractor and any of the subcontractors to ensure compliance with Contractor Immigration
Warranty. Contractor agrees to assist the City in regard to any random verification performed.
Neither the Contractor nor any of the Subcontractors shall be deemed to have materially breached the
Contractor Immigration Warranty if the Contractor or Subcontractor establishes that it has complied
with the employment verification provisions prescribed by Sections 274A and 274B of the Federal
Immigration and Nationality Act and the E-Verify requirements prescribed by A.R.S. §23-214,
Subsection A.
The provisions of this Article must be included in any contract the Contractor enters into with any
and all of its subcontractors who provide services under this Contract or any subcontract. “Services”
are defined as furnishing labor, time or effort in the State of Arizona by building or transportation
facility or improvement to real property.
EMPLOYMENT PROVISIONS
Subject to existing law, and regulations, illegal or undocumented aliens will not be employed by the
Contractor for any work or services to be performed pursuant to this contract. The Contractor will
ensure that this provision is expressly incorporated into any and all Subcontracts or subordinate
agreements issued in support of this contract. Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of
Section 274A(a)(1)(A) and 274A(a)(2) of the Immigration and Nationality Act (8 U.S.C.
1324a(a)(1)(A), 1324a(a)(2)) (the “INA employment provisions”), and any amendments thereto,
prohibiting the unlawful employment of illegal or undocumented aliens. Under the terms of this
agreement, the contractor shall not knowingly hire or employ for any work performed pursuant to
this contract any workers or employees not lawfully authorized to work under the provisions of the
Immigration and Nationality Act or any other applicable federal or state laws. Violation of the
provisions of this section shall be deemed a material breach of this contract.
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS
It is expressly agreed and understood by and between the parties that the Contractor is being retained
by the City as an independent contractor, and as such the Contractor shall not become a City
employee, and is not entitled to payment or compensation from the City or to any fringe benefits to
which other City employees are entitled. As an independent contractor, the Contractor further
acknowledges that he is solely responsible for payment of any and all income taxes, FICA,
withholding, unemployment insurance, or other taxes due and owing any governmental entity
whatsoever as a result of this Agreement. As an independent contractor, the Contractor further agrees
that he will conduct himself in a manner consistent with such status, and that he will neither hold
himself out nor claim to be an officer or employee of the City by reason thereof, and that he will not
make any claim, demand or application to or for any right or privilege applicable to any officer or
employee of the City, including but not limited to workmen's compensation coverage, unemployment
insurance benefits, social security coverage, or retirement membership or credit.
NONDISCRIMINATION
The Contractor, with regard to the work performed by it after award and during its performance of
this contract, will not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, national origin, religion, sex,
disability or familial status in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of
materials and leases of equipment. The Contractor will not participate either directly or indirectly in
48
the discrimination prohibited by or pursuant to Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Section 504
of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Section 109 of the Housing and Community Development Act of
1974, the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, the Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-
336, 42 U.S.C. 12101-12213) and all applicable federal regulations under the Act, and Arizona
Governor Executive Orders 99-4, 2000-4 and 2009-09 as amended.
AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT
Contractor shall comply with all federal, state and local nondiscrimination statues in the operation,
implementation and delivery of, including state and federal civil rights and disabilities laws. In
particular the contractor shall ensure that the City 's obligations for program, facility and service
accessibility in Title II of the Americans with Disabilities Act are complied with in all activities
arising under this contract, and shall hold harmless the City for any and all loss, including but not
limited to damages, costs or expenses, incurred or arising from any alleged violations of the
Americans with Disabilities Act under the auspices of this contract unless resulting from an
intentional or actual negligent act of the City and its employees. Failure to comply with the
nondiscrimination or accessibility requirements herein shall be construed as nonperformance and
may result in termination of funding, civil action or both.
PERMITS, TAXES AND LICENSES
MAG Specifications, Section 107.2, including: Except as otherwise provided in the Specifications, it
is the duty of the Contractor to procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges and fees, and give all
notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work. All applicable permits,
licenses and taxes are the responsibility of the Contractor.
PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES
MAG Specifications, Section 107.3.
SURVEY LAND MONUMENTS
Survey land monuments and property marks shall not be moved or otherwise disturbed by the
Contractor until an authorized agent of the agency having jurisdiction over the land monuments or
property marks setting, has witnessed or otherwise referenced their location, and only then in
accordance with the requirements of the agency having jurisdiction. Any monuments displaced by
the Contractor shall be replaced at the Contractors expense.
PROTECTION OF PERSON AND PROPERTY
MAG Specifications, Sections 107.5 through 107.10, including:
The Contractor shall confine all aspects of his operations within the construction limits as identified
in the project plans. Should the Contractor contemplate the use of any private property adjacent to
the project, beyond the project limits, for materials and equipment storage or to perform any work, he
shall first obtain the written permission of the property owner. The Contractor shall provide a copy
of the owner’s permission to enter the property and for what purpose to the Public Works Director
prior to entering the property. The Contractor will be fully and solely responsible for any and all
adverse impacts and / or damages caused by his operations on private property and the settlement of
all claims pertaining thereto. Upon completion of his operations the Contractor shall obtain a signed
release from the property owner pertaining to his activities on the owner’s property and provide a
copy of that document to the Public Works Director. The failure of the Contractor to comply with
these provisions will result in the retention of some portion of Contractor funds, payable under the
contract, until such claims are resolved.
49
PROTECTION OF ANTIQUITIES
MAG Specifications, Section 107.4.
PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS
MAG Specifications, Section 107.13.
NON-RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CITY
Indebtedness incurred for any cause in connection with this work must be paid by the Contractor, and
the City is hereby relieved at all times from any indebtedness or claim other than payments under
terms of the Contract.
NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS
MAG Specifications, Section 107.14.
PROPERTY RIGHTS IN MATERIAL
Nothing in the Contract shall be construed as vesting in the Contractor any right of property in
materials used after they have been attached or affixed to the work or the soil and accepted. All such
materials shall become the property of the City upon being so attached or affixed and accepted.
PAYMENT TO CONTRACTORS
GENERAL
A. The basis of payment for construction of this project shall be unit prices for all work actually
performed in accordance with the Specifications and Scope of work, and shall include all labor
and materials incorporated in the completed work.
B. Upon final inspection and acceptance of the work, the City will pay the Contractor the amount
earned under the Contract, as provided herein.
PARTIAL PAYMENT
A. Once each month, the City Project Inspector and the Contractor’s Superintendent shall meet or as
necessary to jointly measure all work items under the contract to determine pay quantities for
each pay period. Quantities of work items shall be documented on the respective plan sheets and
separately in tabular fashion with Station to Station measurements noted to assure there is no
duplication of payment for work performed. Measurements will be for work actually completed.
No projections for expected completion of work will be allowed.
B. Contractor shall submit partial payment requests in a format approved by Public Works together
with the City of Prescott Pay Request Application and Certification for Payment (form provided
by Public Works) or equal, subject to approval by the Public Works Director.
C. The City will retain ten percent (10%) of the amount of each such estimate to insure full and
faithful compliance with the terms of these contract documents. After fifty percent (50%) of the
work on this project has been completed, one half (½) of the amount retained shall be paid to the
Contractor provided the Contractor is making satisfactory progress on the contract and there is no
specific clause or claim requiring a greater amount to be retained. After the contract is fifty
percent (50%) completed, only five percent (5%) of the amount of any subsequent progress
payments made under the contract shall be retained provided the Contractor is making
satisfactory progress on the project, except that if at any time the City determines satisfactory
50
progress is not being made, ten percent (10%) retention shall be reinstated for all progress
payments made under the contract subsequent to the determination.
D. The Contractor shall furnish a detailed breakdown showing unit prices and quantities for use in
preparing the monthly estimate. No partial payment will be made until this breakdown is
presented by the Contractor and has been reviewed and accepted by the Public Works Director.
Green-lined plan sheets shall be submitted with each monthly pay request illustrating the line
item quantities constructed for the period. The green-lined plan sheets and pay estimate
spreadsheets must reconcile with one another.
E. No partial payment for job site delivered material will be made.
PAYMENT
For and in consideration of the faithful performance of the work, the City will pay to the Contractor
the amount earned less retention as computed from the actual quantities of work performed under the
Contract and to make such payment in the manner and at the time(s) specified, as follows:
A. After final completion under the Contract, the Contractor shall render to the City a final estimate,
which shall show the amount of work performed according to the Contract.
B. Before the final payment will be made, the Contractor shall satisfy the City by affidavit that all
bills for labor and materials incorporated in the work have been paid. See CONTRACTOR'S
AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS AND CERTIFICATION OF
COMPLETION OF WARRANTIES, page 28. Additionally, the Contractor shall furnish lien
waivers for all completed labor and materials consumed during the project.
C. Final payment constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract sum (including all retained
moneys) shall be paid by the City to the Contractor within sixty (60) days after completion of the
work or filing the Notice of Completion of the Contract unless a specific written finding by the
City of the reasons justifying the delay in payment is provided to the Contractor, and further
provided that all work has been completed, the Contract fully performed, and any final certificate
has been issued by the City's architect, if any. Prior to the final payment to the Contractor, the
City shall deduct therefrom any and all unpaid privilege, license and other taxes, fees and any and
all other unpaid moneys due the City from the Contractor, and shall apply to those moneys to the
appropriate account. Contractor shall provide to the City any information necessary to determine
the total amount(s) due. The quantities appearing in the Bidding Schedule are approximate only,
and are prepared for the comparison of bids. Payment to the Contractor will be made only by
actual quantities of work performed and accepted in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract. Only the items listed in the Bidding Schedule are pay items. The scheduled quantities
of work to be done and materials to be furnished may each be increased, decreased or omitted.
D. Final project As-built plans shall verify line item quantities constructed for the project by
individual plan sheet. Contractor shall submit final payment request in a format approved by
Public Works together with the City of Prescott Pay Request Application and Certification for
Payment (form provided by Public Works).
PAYMENT OF ITEMS IN PROPOSAL
A. Only those items listed in the Proposal under Bidding Schedule are pay items.
B. Compensation for all work necessary for the completion of the project or improvement shall be
included by the bidder in the price bid for the items shown in the Proposal.
51
CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. The City, without invalidating the Contract, may order extra work, make changes by altering, or
delete any portion of the work as specified herein, or as deemed necessary or desirable by the
Public Works Director. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original
Contract except that any claim for extension of time and additional cost caused thereby shall be
adjusted at the time of ordering such change or extra work.
B. Extra work shall be that work not indicated or detailed on the Plans and not specified. Such work
shall be governed by all applicable provisions on the Contract Document.
C. In giving instructions, the Public Works Director shall have authority to make minor changes in
the work, not involving extra cost, and not inconsistent with the purposes of the work, but
otherwise, except in an emergency endangering life or property, no extra work or change shall be
made unless in pursuance of a written order by the Public Works Director, and no claim for an
addition to the total amount of the Contract shall be valid unless so ordered. It is mutually
understood that it is inherent in the nature of municipal construction that some changes in the
Plans and Specifications may be necessary during the course of construction to adjust them to
field conditions, and that it is of the essence of the Contract to recognize a normal and expected
margin of change. The Public Works Director shall have the right to make such changes, from
time to time, in the Plans, in the character of the work, and in the termination of the completion
of the work in the most satisfactory manner without invalidating the Contract.
D. Any change ordered by the Public Works Director which involves installation of work essential
to complete the Contract, but for which no basis of payment is provided for herein, said payment
therefore shall be subject to agreement prior to said work being performed.
E. The prices agreed upon and any agreed upon adjustment in Contract time shall be incorporated in
the written order issued by the Public Works Director, which shall be written so as to indicate
acceptance on the part of the Contractor as evidenced by his signature. In the event prices cannot
be agreed upon, the City reserves the right to terminate the Contract as it applies to the items in
questions and make such arrangements as it may deem necessary to complete the work, or it may
direct the Contractor to proceed with the items in question to be reimbursed pursuant to the unit
prices in the Contractor's bid or on a force account basis as provided hereinafter, at the City's
option.
FORCE ACCOUNT
The compensation for force account work performed by the Contractor shall be approved by the
Public Works Director in the following manner:
A. LABOR: The Contractor shall provide monthly certified payroll reports for all labor and for
foremen in direct charge of the specific operations. The Contractor will be compensated as
follows:
1. The actual cost of wages paid by him but at rates not to exceed those for comparable
labor currently employed on the project as determined by Public Works Director.
2. The actual cost of social security taxes and unemployment compensation insurance.
There will be no payment for Fringe Benefits unless mandated by Federal Law on
Federally funded projects.
3. An amount equal to fifteen percent (15%) of the actual cost of wages and other costs
listed above to cover the Contractor's profit and overhead.
52
4. In case work is performed by a subcontractor, the said fifteen percent (15%) will be
added only once to the actual cost of the work, however, the Contractor may add five
percent (5%) to the Subcontractor's price to cover his own overhead and supervision.
B. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT: For any special or heavy equipment, the use of which has been
authorized by the Public Works Director, except for small tools and manual equipment, the
Contractor shall be reimbursed his actual cost of rental, not to exceed the latest Schedule of
Equipment Rental Rates published by the Arizona Department of Transportation. In the event
that any of the equipment to be used is not shown in said schedule, the rental rate for such
equipment shall be as agreed upon in writing before the work is started. No percentage shall be
added to equipment rental rates. In the event said special or heavy equipment is owned by the
Contractor, he shall be compensated only for the actual hours said equipment is required for the
work under Force Account on the job site, at a rate not to exceed the latest ADOT. Schedule of
Equipment Rental Rates.
C. MATERIALS: For all materials accepted by the Public Works Director and used in the work the
Contractor shall be paid the actual cost of such material, including transportation charges, to
which cost shall be added a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof.
D. SUPERVISION OVERHEAD AND HOME OFFICE OVERHEAD: No allowance shall be made
for general superintendence. The cost of supervision and all overhead is presumed to be included
in the fifteen percent (15%) added in accordance with the above.
E. RECORDS: The Contractor's representative and the Public Works Director shall compare the
records of the work performed as ordered on a force account basis at the end of each day on
which such work is performed. Copies of these records shall be made on suitable forms provide
for this purpose and signed by both the Public Works Director and the Contractor's
representative. All claims for work done on a force account basis shall be certified and submitted
to the Public Works Director by the Contractor, and such statements shall be filed with the Public
Works Director not later than the fifth (5th) day of the month following that in which the work
was actually performed.
F. BONDS AND INSURANCE: The Contractor shall be paid the actual cost for additional bonding
and insurance pertaining to Force Account work when the Contractor can provide evidence of
additional payment for premiums on required payment and performance bonds. No duplication
of payment for Contractors costs associated with labor costs above will be allowed.
G. The Public Works Director authorized representative is in charge of Force Account Work and
has the authority to direct which labor and equipment will be used, to suspend operations, and to
refuse to pay for any labor or equipment, which he feels is not doing productive work.
EXTRA WORK
New or additional work will be classed as extra work when determined by the Public Works Director
that such work is not covered by the Contract.
CONTRACT AMENDMENT
The value of such work or change shall be determined and paid for with a Contract Amendment in
one of the following ways according to the Contract Amendment Procedure set down by the Public
Works Department, City of Prescott, and at the option of the City:
A. As may be mutually agreed upon by the City and the Contractor.
B. By unit prices in accordance with the Contractor's bid.
53
C. By lump sum based upon the Contractor's estimate and the Public Works Director’s review and
acceptance of the estimate.
D. By Force Account in accordance with the requirements of that section.
E. The Contractor shall do such extra work and furnish material and equipment therefore upon
receipt of an accepted Contract Amendment or other written order of the Public Works Director.
In no case shall work be undertaken without written notice from the Public Works Director to
proceed with the work. In absence of such Contract Amendment or other written order of the
Public Works Director, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for any extra work. All
contract amendments must be approved by the Public Works Director. Contract Amendments
over $10,000.00 must be approved by City Council.
F. In the event that the Contractor and the City cannot agree on the compensation to be paid to the
Contractor prior to the issuance of a Contract Amendment, then and in that event the City has the
option of terminating the Contract with the Contractor or directing the Contractor to proceed and
to receive compensation pursuant to the Force Account provisions herein. In the event that this
Contract is terminated by the City pursuant to this subsection, the Contractor shall only be paid
for those services performed to date of the City’s Notice of Termination, said payment to be
based upon the unit prices as set forth in the Contractor’s bid. In no event shall the Contractor be
entitled to additional compensation for lost profits, mobilization or de-mobilization costs, loss of
anticipated profits, extended overhead, unabsorbed home office overhead, or any other payments
other than for work actually performed as based upon unit prices. In the event that there are no
unit prices pertaining to work in question, then and in that event the Contractor’s compensation
for early termination pursuant to this subsection shall be based upon Force Account as here-in-
before described.
G. It is expressly agreed that in the event of a Contract Amendment, any compensation due the
Contractor shall be set forth in the Contract Amendment, and shall be considered full and
complete payment (if any) for any and all work related costs, including but not limited to labor,
materials, equipment, supervision, field office overhead, extended home office overhead,
unabsorbed home office overhead, taxes, bonds, insurance and profits. Additionally, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation based upon a Contract
Amendment (or the accumulation of contract amendments) unless specifically set forth in that
Contract Amendment.
H. In the event that the contractor submits a proposed Contract Amendment, the Public Works
Director shall have ten (10) days after receipt of the Contractor’s written proposed Contract
Amendment to either accept or agree to the Contract Amendment under the above provisions or
deny such proposed Contract Amendment. If necessary to assess the proper purpose and function
of a Contractor’s proposed Contract Amendment, because of the proposed Contract
Amendment’s complexity or scope, the Public Works Director may either accept and agree to the
Contract Amendment of deny such proposed Contract Amendment under the above provisions
beyond such ten (10) day period and for an additional reasonable period commensurate with the
nature of the proposed Contract Amendment. The failure of any party to take any action within
the time periods or in the manner specified in the subparagraph shall be deemed a waiver of that
party’s right to recover for such delay in acting.
CLAIMS FOR EXTRA WORK
If the Contractor claims that any instructions involve extra cost under this Contract, he shall give the
Public Works Director written notice thereof within forty-eight (48) hours after the receipt of such
54
instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute the work, except in emergency
endangering life or property, and the procedure shall then be as provided for under CHANGES IN
THE WORK. No such claim shall be valid unless so made.
PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
A. After completion of certain units of work under this Contract, including all testing and other
preparation necessary for operation of the unit by the City as herein specified, but prior to final
project completion, provisions may be made for partial acceptance in writing by the City for
these certain units only. The units to be included for partial acceptance prior to final project
completion will be noted at the time of the pre-construction conference in accordance with
Contractor's schedule, or by written notice to the Contractor at the earliest possible time.
B. The guarantee period for these units shall commence with the date of final acceptance of the
entire project by the City. Full payment for these units will not be made until final acceptance of
the total work is made.
C. Acceptance of any portion of the project prior to acceptance of the whole shall not be construed
as absolving the Contractor of responsibility for any item of construction or incidental work
included in the original Contract.
NOTIFICATION OF CHANGED CONDITIONS, FORMAL PROTEST AND DISPUTE
RESOLUTION
MAG 110 as modified herein:
110.2.2(A) and 110.3.2, add the following: “In providing the information required by this section,
the Contractor shall provide specific factual detail as to each item and show the methods of
calculating each item.”
110.3.1 shall be amended as follows:
Level I shall mean the Public Works Project Manager as appointed by the Public Works Director
Level II shall mean the Public Works Division Manager as appointed by the Public Works Director
Level III shall mean the Public Works Director
In the event of litigation, the parties hereby agree to submit to a trial before the Court. The
Contractor further agrees that this provision shall be contained in all subcontracts related to the
project, which is the subject of this Agreement.
The parties hereto expressly covenant and agree that in the event of litigation arising from this
Agreement, neither party shall be entitled to an award of attorney fees, either pursuant to the
Contract, pursuant to A.R.S. § 12-341.01 (A) and (B), or pursuant to any other state or federal
statute. The Contractor further agrees that this provision shall be contained in all subcontracts
related to the project that is the subject of this Agreement.
110.4 The last sentence of the first paragraph shall read: “The arbitration of claims shall be
conducted either in Prescott or Phoenix, Arizona as agreed to by the parties, or if the parties cannot
agree, to be determined by the arbitrator, taking into consideration the convenience and costs to the
parties and their witnesses.”
Delete the last two sentences of the section and replace with: “The decision or award of the arbitrator
shall be nonbinding.”
55
Any resolution of a dispute in accordance with the applicable sections of MAG110 and this Contract
which causes the Contract amount to be exceeded by $10,000.00 or more shall not be final until
approved by the City Council.
PUBLICITY RELEASES
The Contractor and their subcontractors and their suppliers, if any, shall not reveal to others through
literature, brochures, or other types of publicity releases any information regarding the work or the
Contractors activities or participation on the project without prior written approval from the City
Public Works Director. Any and all jobsite photographs taken by the Contractor, subcontractor or
others must be processed in duplicate form with copies provided to the Public Works Director. No
project photographs shall be released to others without prior written approval of the Public Works
Director.
SCOPE OF WORK
INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The intent of the Specifications and Scope of Work is to prescribe a complete work for the CITY
OF PRESCOTT: Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station Project which the Contractor shall perform
in a manner acceptable to the City Public Works Director and in full compliance with the terms
of the Contract.
B. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Conditions, the Contractor shall furnish all materials,
labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary
construction of every nature, and incidentals, including, but not limited to, dust and traffic
control measures, and to perform all work involved in executing the contract in a satisfactory and
workmanlike manner within the specified time.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION
This project will provide the City the ability to utilize Airport area wells to serve customers
throughout the City’s service area. The new pump station will allow water from the City’s Airport
Zone wells to be diverted from Zone 12 to Zone 0 and provide source redundancy and reliability to
the City water system. The new pump station will be constructed at the southwest corner of Pioneer
Parkway and Willow Creek Road adjacent to the City’s existing Airport #1 Pressure Reducing
Station.
TIME OF COMPLETION
A. The Contractor shall commence the work under this contract on or before the tenth (10th)
calendar day after receiving written Notice to Proceed from the Owner. The Contractor shall fully
complete all work under this contract within two hundred seventy (270) calendar days beginning
with the calendar day of receipt of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall at all times during
the continuance of the Contract prosecute the work with such work force and equipment as is
sufficient to complete the project within the time specified.
B. Project Milestones are estimated to be as follows:
Award of Contract June 27, 2017
Pre-Construction Meeting July 5, 2017
Notice to Proceed Week of July 10, 2017
Expected Completion Date April 6, 2018
56
All milestones are “earliest” dates for planning purposes only, and shall not represent any
contractual commitment whatsoever on the part of the City.
SUPPLEMENT TO THE MARICOPA ASSOCIATION OF GOVERNMENTS (MAG)
UNIFORM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION
Technical Specifications
August 1, 2016
City of Prescott Public Works 433 N. Virginia Street, Prescott, Arizona 86301
Ph: 928.777.1130 | TDD: 928.777.1100 | Fax: 928.771.5929
Page 2 Rev. 08/01/16
TABLE OF CONTENTS Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................4
100.1 SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................................4
100.2 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS............................................................................4
100.3 GENERAL NOTES ...................................................................................................................4
100.4 PUBLIC RELATIONS ...............................................................................................................6
101.1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS ......................................................................................................8
104.1.4 CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................8
105.6 COOPERATION WITH UTILITIES .............................................................................................8
105.8 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES AND GRADES .......................................................................9
105.16 RECORD DRAWING PREPARATION AND COORDINATION .....................................................11
106 CONTROL OF MATERIALS ....................................................................................................16
106.2 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIALS ..................................................................................16
106.9 QUALITY ACCEPTANCE TESTING .........................................................................................19
107.6 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY ...................................................................................20
107.9 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND LANDSCAPE .......................................21
107.15 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP) ..................................................21
108.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .................................................................................................22
109.10 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION ................................................................23
109.11 CONTRACT ALLOWANCE .....................................................................................................23
200.1 DEWATERING ......................................................................................................................24
200.2 BY-PASS PUMPING ..............................................................................................................24
201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ..................................................................................................26
205 ROADWAY EXCAVATION .....................................................................................................27
205.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL......................................................................................................28
206 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ...........................................................................28
211 FILL CONSTRUCTION ...........................................................................................................29
306 MECHANICALLY STABILIZED SUBGRADE – GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT ..............................31
310 PLACEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION OF AGGREGATE BASE COURSE ......................................31
317 ASPHALT MILLING ..............................................................................................................32
321 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ........................................................................................35
329 TACK COAT.........................................................................................................................41
336 PAVEMENT MATCHING AND SURFACING REPLACEMENT ....................................................42
340 CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK, SIDEWALK RAMPS, DRIVEWAY, & ALLEY ENTRANCE ..........................................................................................................................43
345 ADJUSTING FRAMES, COVERS, VALVE BOXES, WATER METER BOXES AND PULL BOXES ..45
350 REMOVAL OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS .............................................................................47
350.6.1 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPE .......................................................49
401 TRAFFIC CONTROL ..............................................................................................................52
402.2 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS ............................................................................54
402.3 TEMPORARY STRIPING ........................................................................................................54
402.4 PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS ...................................................................................54
Page 3 Rev. 08/01/16
403.1 PERMANENT SIGNING, SIGN POSTS AND DELINEATORS .......................................................54
404 LOOP DETECTORS ...............................................................................................................56
405 MONUMENTS: .....................................................................................................................56
430 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTING ............................................................................................57
431 REMOVE AND REPLACE LANDSCAPE ROCK .........................................................................60
505 CONCRETE STRUCTURES .....................................................................................................60
505.1.1A CONCRETE DRAINAGE OUTLET/STRUCTURE .......................................................................61
505.1.1B CONCRETE HEADWALL .......................................................................................................61
505.1.1C CONCRETE CATCH BASIN....................................................................................................61
505.1.1D SCUPPER .............................................................................................................................61
505.1.1E CONCRETE RETAINING WALL .............................................................................................61
601 TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION ....................................................61
601.2.11 ROCK EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY AND/OR DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION ...............................62
610 WATER MAIN CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................64
610.9 FIRE HYDRANTS ..................................................................................................................66
610.11 METER SERVICE CONNECTIONS ..........................................................................................66
610.15 TESTING ..............................................................................................................................69
612 TEMPORARY WATER MAINS (FLY LINES) ...........................................................................69
615.1 SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION ..............................................................................................71
615.7 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE .................................................................................................72
618 STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION ...........................................................................................76
625 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION AND DROP SEWER CONNECTIONS ............................................76
626.1 MANHOLE COATINGS ..........................................................................................................79
630.3 GATE VALVES .....................................................................................................................83
630.4 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES ..........................................................................................84
630.6 AIR RELEASE, COMBINATION VALVES, AND BLOW OFF ASSEMBLY ...................................85
650 ABANDONMENT AND REMOVAL OF WATER MAIN ...............................................................87
651 ABANDONMENT AND REMOVAL OF SANITARY SEWER ........................................................88
701 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................................90
710 ASPHALT CONCRETE ...........................................................................................................90
725 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE ..........................................................................................91
Page 4 Rev. 08/01/16
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ADD the following Sections:
100.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent of Plans and Specifications: 1. The intent of the Specifications and Scope of Work is to prescribe a complete work for the Project
which the Contractor shall perform in a manner acceptable to the City of Prescott and in full compliance with the terms of the Contract.
2. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Conditions, the Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary construction of every nature, and incidentals, including, but not limited to, dust and traffic control measures, and to perform all work involved in executing the contract in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner within the specified time.
3. The Engineer shall be that person or his designees employed by or contracted by the City Of Prescott responsible for all aspects of the project and with the authority to make revisions to and approve changes to the plans or specifications.
B. Project Description and Location: 1. The Project description and location are as noted in the contract documents and plans.
C. Time of Completion: 1. The Contractor shall commence the work under this contract on or before the tenth (10th) calendar
day after receiving written Notice to Proceed from the Owner. The Contractor shall fully complete all work within the calendar days allowed for in the contract, in accordance with the date set forth in the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall at all times during the continuance of the Contract prosecute the work with such work force and equipment as is sufficient to complete the project within the time specified.
100.2 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS
A. Standard details and specifications for this project shall be the Maricopa Association of Governments Standard Specifications and Details (MAG Standards), latest revision, and the City of Prescott Supplement to the Maricopa Association of Governments Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works, latest revisions, in conjunction with the City of Prescott Standard Details, latest revisions, except as modified in the plans.
B. Other standard specifications and details will be incorporated within the plans, project documents and technical specifications by reference, as necessary. These may include references to Maricopa Association of Governments Uniform Standard Details for Public Works Construction (MAG Standard Details, Arizona Department of Transportation Standard Specifications and Standard Drawings for Road and Bridge Construction (ADOT Specifications or ADOT Standard Details), and others.
100.3 GENERAL NOTES
A. All construction shall conform to the Maricopa Association of Governments Standard Specifications and Details (MAG Standards), latest revisions, and City of Prescott Supplement to MAG Specifications (COP Specifications) and City of Prescott (COP) Standard Details, latest revisions, unless specifically modified on the plans.
B. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain copies of MAG, and COP Standards and
Page 5 Rev. 08/01/16
Specifications as well as all other standards and specifications necessary to completely and accurately interpret the plans.
C. All plans signed by the Public Works Director are null and void one year from date of signature if construction has not started.
D. All quantities shown on plans are not verified by the Engineer. The Contractor shall verify all quantities shown and make his bid based upon those verifications. If any discrepancy in quantities is found, Contractor shall notify the Engineer of such no later than 24 hours prior to bid opening.
E. A City of Prescott Public Works Department permit will be required for all off-site construction and construction within the public right of way.
F. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to obtain, at his own expense, such permits as are required from the appropriate agencies.
G. The Public Works Department shall be notified a minimum of 24 hours prior to beginning any construction in the public right of way at (928) 777-1640.
H. Inspection is to be done by the City of Prescott Public Works Department. I. Any work performed without the knowledge of the City of Prescott inspector or his representative is
subject to removal and replacement of same, to be done at the Contractor's expense. J. All work and materials, which do not conform to the specifications, are subject to removal and
replacement at the Contractor's expense. K. Approval of a portion of the work in progress does not guarantee its final acceptance. Testing and
evaluation may continue until the written final acceptance of a complete and workable unit. L. The City of Prescott may suspend the work by written notice when, in its judgment, progress is
unsatisfactory, work being done is unauthorized or defective, weather conditions are unsuitable, or there is a danger to the public health and safety.
M. The Contractor shall provide sufficient men and equipment on the job at all times during construction to comply with specifications and to complete work.
N. Contractor shall be responsible for construction surveying and layout. O. The Contractor shall notify "Blue Stake" at 811 or 1-800-782-5348 at least 48 hours prior to
construction. P. It is the Contractor's responsibility to locate all underground pipelines, telephone and electric conduits
and structures in advance of any construction and will observe all possible precautions to avoid any damage to such. The Engineer and/or City will not guarantee any locations as shown on these plans, or those omitted from it.
Q. The Contractor is to uncover all existing lines being tied into and verify grades, pipe material, and pipe diameter before material submittals and planned construction activities.
R. Arizona Department of Environmental Quality Requirements shall be complied with. S. All water lines shall be provided with 14 AWG HS-CCS wire. Trace wire shall be subject to
traceability test. T. Water/sewer separation shall be pursuant to AAC R-18-5-502C and COP specifications. U. Water mains shall be subject to a pressure and leakage test in accordance with AWWA C-600 Standard. V. Water mains shall be disinfected in accordance with ADEQ Engineering Bulletin No. 8 "Disinfection of
Water Systems". W. Operation of valves to be done by City personnel only. X. All pipeline materials shall be installed per manufacturer's requirements unless superseded by COP
specifications.
Page 6 Rev. 08/01/16
Y. All materials for water line construction shall meet AAC R-18-4-119. Z. Arizona Department of Environmental Quality requirements will apply when more stringent than MAG
Standard Specifications; more specifically where they pertain to maximum allowable sewer line/pressure sewer line exfiltration-infiltration rates.
AA. Sewer line low-pressure air tests shall be done on 100% of all lines. BB. Sewer manholes exfiltration tests shall be done on 100% of all manholes. Vacuum testing in
accordance with City of Prescott Standards may be used in lieu of exfiltration test. CC. Sewer line deflection tests shall be done on 100% of all pipes. DD. Prior to project acceptance, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing the City of Prescott with
video (DVD) of the entire sewer main installed including service laterals. The video will be previewed and deemed acceptable by the City prior to project release.
EE. Acceptance of the completed water/sewer system will not be given until 3 ml photo Mylar or Xerox graphic “as-built” reproducible plans and all required digital files have been submitted by a Registered Professional Engineer and approved by the Engineer.
FF. Contractor shall warrant all work for a minimum of two years after formal acceptance of the work.
100.4 PUBLIC RELATIONS Description:
The Contractor shall be required to furnish a private telephone line to be used solely for receiving incoming calls from local citizens with questions or complaints concerning construction operations or procedures. The Contractor shall be required to publish this telephone number and maintain a 24-hour answering service. The answering service shall be manned by Contractor personnel during all hours during the course of construction that there is work being performed on this project. The Contractor shall maintain a log of incoming calls, responses, and action taken, which shall be submitted to the Engineer weekly and on request.
The Contractor shall retain the services of a community relations organization for this project. The Contractor shall submit for approval, to the Engineer, the resume of the proposed community relations organization. Included in the resume shall be the names and credentials of the staff. The community relations organization shall be proactive and knowledgeable in the means and effectiveness of various notification techniques. The Engineer will rely on the organization’s experience and suggestions in the presentation of information to the public. The Engineer will review the resume and possibly interview the organization. The Engineer will notify the Contractor within ten calendar days of the acceptability of the community relations organization. Upon notification by the Engineer of an acceptable community relations organization, the Contractor shall hire the organization.
The community relation organization’s activities shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Printing and distribution of public notices. 2. Providing media news releases after review by the Engineer. 3. Planning and attending other public meetings as required by the Engineer. 4. Planning or otherwise participating in the Dedication Ceremonies as requested by the
Engineer. 5. Possess the means for the development and fabrication of newsletters, notices, posters and
demonstration boards. 6. Providing telephone "Hot Line" 24-hour service.
A pre-construction meeting will be scheduled between the Engineer and the Contractor to specifically address the hiring of a community relations organization. This meeting will be scheduled as soon as possible after the Award. The intent is to have a community relations organization on board prior to the
Page 7 Rev. 08/01/16
pre-construction meeting, a meeting in which the community relations organization will have an important participatory role.
The community relations organization shall develop a community relations program. The program shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
A. Distributing a pre-construction information letter to all residents, businesses, schools and churches within an area determined by the Engineer, which shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:
1. Name of contractor.
2. A 24-hour informational telephone number.
3. Brief description of project.
4. Names of project manager and superintendent (contractor).
5. Name of project engineer (Public Works Department).
6. Construction schedule including anticipated work hours.
7. Traffic regulations including lane restrictions.
8. Time and place for the pre-construction meeting. This notification shall be delivered a minimum of five working days prior to the meeting.
B. Holding a pre-construction community meeting with affected neighbors, businesses, schools, churches, etc., as directed by the Engineer.
C. Scheduling and conducting progress meetings, as required, with the affected business tenants and property owners.
D. Printing and mailing of public notices and/or newsletters, including a list of the names, addresses and receipt of postage or delivery for recipients of these newsletters and/or notifications.
E. Holding other public meetings as required by the Engineer.
F. The community relations organization shall use the means (Items A through E) or others to inform the local citizens of operations which may create changes to the norm such as high noise levels, road closures, limited access, haul routes, changes to material delivery routes, unusual hours of construction, disruption of bus routes or changes to other passenger delivery/pick-up routes.
G. Newsletters shall be distributed each month. A final draft shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approved at least two days before the planned distribution. Each distribution area shall be approved by the Engineer. Each distribution shall include twelve copies for the Engineer.
H. The community relations organization shall keep daily personnel time logs which shall include the name of the employee, date of work, amount of time worked, description of work performed and project number.
Measurement and Payment:
The bid schedule includes an allowance for Public Relations for the purpose of encumbering funds to cover the cost of Public Relations. The amount of the allowance is determined by the Engineer and is not subject to individual bid pricing. All bidders shall incorporate the amount pre-entered in the bid proposal and shall reflect the same in the total bid for this project.
It shall be understood that this allowance item is an estimate only. The allowance shall not be used
Page 8 Rev. 08/01/16
without approval of the Engineer, and in no case exceed the allowance.
Reimbursement for Public Relations shall be based on the community relations organization invoice cost, plus an allowable markup to the prime contractor of 15%, for those services approved by the Engineer.
Pay Item: 100.4 Public Relations Allowance
101.2 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
REPLACE the definition of Engineer with the following:
The Engineer shall be that person or his designees, subordinate to the Public Works Director, employed by or contracted by the City Of Prescott responsible for all aspects of the project and with the authority to make revisions to and approve changes to the plans or specifications.
104.1.4 CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL
ADD the following:
A. The work under this item shall consist of applying water required for dust control per MAG Specifications and as modified herein.
B. If in the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor fails to keep dust for his operation under control, the Engineer may order by written order suspension of operations until the situation is remedied. No time extension or additional costs will be allowed for this suspension.
C. All contractors requesting construction water from the City must submit a Construction Water Meter Application to the Public Works Department. A $1,000 deposit will be required for hydrant meters. If construction water use occurs during the months of May through September the Contractor shall also include a dust abatement program. Potable water may not be allowed for dust abatement during these months. Potable water can be used to process embankment fill and base materials year round. However, contractors are encouraged to use treated effluent for construction activities. The City of Prescott has two outlets for effluent, the Sundog Wastewater Treatment Plant and the Airport Wastewater Treatment Plant. The City will provide metered standpipes for effluent at both plants. The Contractor will be required to estimate daily and total potable/effluent water usage for the project as identified on the Construction Water Meter application. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs associated with obtaining and delivering construction water.
Measurement and Payment:
No separate measurement or payment shall be made for dust control. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction of the appropriate contract pay items.
104.1.5 Final Cleaning Up:
ADD the following:
Upon completion of construction and before Final Acceptance can be made by the Engineer, the Contractor shall clean up each individual construction area to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Small trees, weeds, and brush, which were removed as part of construction work, shall be removed from the project site and properly disposed of. All debris, broken pipe, concrete and other construction debris shall be removed from the project site and properly disposed.
Mailboxes and traffic signs removed during construction shall be reinstalled in “like kind” and shall be considered incidental to the unit prices for utility work included in the bidding schedule.
105.6 COOPERATION WITH UTILITIES
Page 9 Rev. 08/01/16
ADD the following:
A. Location of Underground Utilities
1. Contractor shall contact Blue Stake within the time frame specified under Blue Stake law and request field location of underground utilities. At the time these locations have been marked and prior to the commencement of excavation within the affected area, the Contractor shall at his expense manually determine the exact location of all buried facilities.
2. Contractor shall notify all affected utilities prior to the start of construction and shall ascertain the location of the various underground utilities either shown on the plans and/or as may be brought to his attention.
3. Contractor shall perform all operations in accordance with Arizona Blue Stake law.
4. Utility locations shown on the plans are approximate and based on drawings furnished by the respective utility. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to protect all existing utilities. Should a utility conflict occur, the Contractor shall cooperate with the said utility to resolve the conflict. No claim for extra costs shall be made against the Owner for delays due to any utility conflict.
5. If performance of the Contractor’s work is delayed because the utility owners fail to relocate or adjust their facilities in a timely manner, the Contractor may file for an extension of time. To receive consideration, this request shall contain specific information as to the nature of the delay and the actual loss of time involved.
6. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for damage to all marked utilities due to his operations and shall repair the damaged utilities in accordance with regulatory authority requirements at his own expense.
Measurement and Payment:
No separate measurement and payment shall be made for Location of Underground Utilities. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction or installation of the appropriate contract pay items.
105.8 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES AND GRADES
Replace Section 105.8 in its entirety with the following:
A. Construction staking shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The control for the project is provided in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The CONTRACTOR shall be held responsible for preservation of control monumentation. If any of the control monumentation have been carelessly or willfully destroyed or disturbed by the CONTRACTOR, the cost of replacing them will be charged against him and will be deducted from the payment of work.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall not retain the ENGINEER of Record for construction staking due to conflict of interest.
C. Staking shall be performed and certified by a Registered Land Surveyor in good standing with the Arizona State Board of Technical Registration.
D. The staking shall be performed in such a manner and frequency that the CONTRACTOR is able to construct the project in accordance with the plans and specifications. At a minimum, staking shall include
1. Slope or limit stakes
Page 10 Rev. 08/01/16
2. Limits of Temporary Construction Easements (TCE)
3. Horizontal and vertical alignment of pipeline
4. Valves, tees, horizontal and vertical bends, blow offs, air release valves, tracer wire stations, water meters and hydrant locations
5. Tank and appurtenances
6. Electrical, instrumentation and control facilities, including, but not limited to, antennae pole
7. Site improvements including, but not limited to, retaining walls, curbs, fencing, drainage, chain link fence enclosures, protection posts, gates, etc. The original grade of all retaining walls shall be surveyed and established prior to beginning any earthwork.
8. Cross-sections will be required, at no additional expense to the City, should quantity disputes arise pertaining to the following: Earthwork, Sub-grade, ABC or Asphaltic Concrete.
9. Curb stakes at all PC's, PT's, vertical PI's (grade breaks), transitions to and from super elevated sections and at 50 foot intervals
10. Blue tops for sub-grade and ABC at intervals specified for curb. Quarter crown blue tops shall be required when the typical section is four lanes or more without median curb.
11. Other staking as needed to complete the work in conformance with the plans and specifications.
F. The ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR’s Superintendent shall meet monthly or as necessary to jointly measure all work items under the contract to determine pay quantities for each pay period. Quantities of work items shall be documented on the respective plan sheets and separately in tabular fashion with Station to Station measurements noted to assure there is no duplication of payment for work performed. Measurements will be for work actually completed. No projections for expected completion of work will be allowed.
G. All survey data will be referenced to the CITY Coordinate System in accordance with the CITY Survey Datum Requirements as noted below.
SURVEY DATUM REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF PRESCOTT SURVEY DATUM REQUIREMENTS COORDINATE UNITS: International Feet DISTANCE UNITS: International Feet HEIGHT UNITS: International Feet
DATUM GEODETIC (HORIZONTAL) DATUM: North American Datum of 1983 (1992), (NAD83 (1992)) COODINATE SYSTEM: Arizona Coordinate System (State Plane) ZONE: Central (0202) VERTICAL DATUM: North American Vertical Datum of 1988, (NAVD88) GEOID MODEL: GEOID99 (Conus) CITY OF PRESCOTT COORDINATE SYSTEM (COPCS) – CONVERSION FROM STATE PLANE COPCS NORTHING= (State Plane Northing x 1.000329975) – 701,456.0090 COPCS EASTING= (State Plane Easting x 1.000329975) + 69,457.2499
Page 11 Rev. 08/01/16
Note: Distances computed between COPCS coordinates approximate “ground” distances STATE PLANE – CONVERSION FROM CITY OF PRESCOTT COORDINATE SYSTEM
STATE PLANE NORTHING= (COPCS Northing + 701,456.0090) x 0.999670134 STATE PLANE EASTING= (COPCS Easting – 69,457.2499) x 0.999670134
EXAMPLE - CITY OF PRESCOTT MINGO BASE LATITUDE 34°34’29.27969” N LONGITUDE 112°28’48.72638” W HEIGHT 5582.412’
STATE PLANE COORDINATES CITY OF PRESCOTT COORDINATES NORTHING 1,301,026.703 600,000.0000 EASTING 530,367.742 600,000.0000 ELEVATION 5,673.955’ 5,673.955’ Measurement and Payment
The quantity of “Construction Staking” measured for payment shall be the lump sum bid by the CONTRACTOR. The contract unit price per lump sum paid for “Construction Staking” shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment to perform the construction staking as described in this section.
Pay Item: 105.8 Construction Staking
ADD the following to MAG Section 105 Control of Work:
105.16 RECORD DRAWING PREPARATION AND COORDINATION
A. As-built field data collection and preparation of Record Drawings will be performed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER as required in this Section, provide access to the work, and cooperate with the ENGINEER to accurately depict the as-built conditions. During the construction phase and prior to any backfilling or covering, the ENGINEER will survey the work for the purpose of Record Drawing preparation. As-built measurements and surveying shall be performed and certified by a Registered Land Surveyor in good standing with the Arizona State Board of Technical Registration. The ENGINEER shall supply all horizontal and vertical as-built data in ASCII format, including a northing, easting, elevation and description of all work completed under this contract. The CONTRACTOR shall aid the ENGINEER in determining and providing this information. As-built data shall include, but not be limited to all items noted below.
1. Grading and Drainage Plans
a. Finished pad grades. An Average pad grade may be used if the pad is not flat. Pas elevations shall not exceed plus 0.5 feet tolerance (plus 0.2 feet if located adjacent to an existing development). Pad elevations shall not exceed minus 0.2 feet tolerance (0.1 feet if located in a floodplain or adjacent to a wash or channel).
b. Flow line elevations of channels
c. Hinge point elevations on all slopes and grade breaks
d. Percentage of all slopes, flow lines and channels
e. Catch basin grates elevation at top of grate
f. Inverts of storm drain lines and headwalls
g. As-built elevations shall be provided at all drainage control point (i.e.
Page 12 Rev. 08/01/16
detention overflow point, tops and bottoms of detention basins, drain rims, valley gutters, curbs, curb openings, flow line elevations in swales, etc). As-built enough spot elevations to verify the design intentions are met (i.e. grade breaks, high/low points, scuppers, extreme outfall, etc). Show the direction of drainage flow to illustrate that design intent has been met.
h. Provide calculations to verify that actual as-built volume of all detention facilities included on the as-builts, as well as a table which compares the as-built volumes with the approved, required volumes indicated on the design drawings or in the approved Drainage Report
i. Detention calculations shall be revised to as-built condition by the Engineer of Record
j. Flow line elevations and/or pipe inverts, grate elevations for catch basins, underground detention storage tanks, and all other drainage structures
k. Top of flood walls, retaining walls, and cutoff walls
l. Stations, offsets, and invert elevations for spillways and box culverts
m. When storm drain lines and appurtenances are included in the G&D drawings, please refer to the Storm Drain Plan record drawing requirements for additional required items
2. Water/Fire/Reclaimed Water Plans
a. All fittings and appurtenances shall be surveyed, including but not limited to the following: valves, bends, tees, reducers blow offs, air release valves, tracer wire stations, water meters, and hydrant locations.
i. Valves shall be measured on the nut and center of the cover. If extensions are used, the length of the extension shall be noted.
ii. All fittings shall be measured at the middle of the fitting.
iii. Air release valves shall be measured at the main connection, the air release box, and any major alignment changes between the two.
b. Pipe sizes, lengths and materials
c. Horizontal and vertical separation from existing and new utilities and drainage culverts/storm drain
d. Street centerline station and offset dimension to:
i. All fire hydrants and fittings (e.g. valves)
ii. Main at all changes in alignment
iii. All horizontal control points (e.g. centerline intersects, PC, PT)
e. Centerline station and offset to each service tap; size of tap and meter
f. Note centerline station, offset and elevations to all changes in vertical alignment (e.g. dips, bends, etc. required to avoid conflicts with other utilities). If the water main continues in a straight horizontal and vertical alignment for more than 100 feet, the water main will be surveyed every 100 feet. Sufficient survey measurements shall be taken on horizontal and vertical curves to establish an accurate alignment.
g. The drawings must clearly indicate the specific points of reference. No dimensioning from points of curvature or tangency is acceptable for record drawing purposes. In all cases where the pipeline is constructed within, or parallel in close proximity with the right-of-way, all stationing and dimensioning must be from the nearest appropriate
Page 13 Rev. 08/01/16
monument line and monument line intersection.
h. When water services are not installed perpendicular to the water main, both the location of the tap at the main and the distance of the meter set from the nearest side property line of the lot must be shown.
i. On phased projects, the phase lines must be clearly shown on the key map and on the plan and profile sheets, and their locations clearly identifiable. Actual pipe end locations relative to phasing lines must be shown by dimensioning or stationing.
j. A complete list of all materials installed and abandoned must be shown. The specific size and material type of each pipeline installed must be shown at every construction reference to that pipe. Any changes to the record drawing must be reflected on the materials list.
k. Water tank and appurtenances
i. Required information for water tanks include, but are not limited to finished floor elevation, footing elevations, inlet, outlet, drain, and overflow locations.
ii. Required information for site piping and appurtenances shall follow the requirements of this section.
iii. Manufacturer detail drawings for tanks shall be supplied and sealed by a Registered Engineer.
3. Sewer Plans
a. The alignments of the main(s) including all horizontal and vertical curves. If the sewer main continues in a straight horizontal and vertical alignment for more than 100 feet, the sewer main shall be surveyed every 100 feet. Sufficient survey measurements shall be taken on horizontal and vertical curves to establish an accurate alignment.
b. All manholes, cleanouts, backwater valves, individual services, lift stations, and force main valves shall be surveyed. Structures shall have rim and invert elevations included.
c. Pipe sizes and lengths
d. Recalculated pipe slopes
e. All valves at lift stations and line or isolation valves on force mains shall be measured on the nut and the center of the cover or vault lid.
f. Separation from existing/newly installed water main and culverts
g. Street centerline station and offset dimension from street centerline to main at manholes
h. Sewer line stationing at centerline of each service tap at 90 degrees to main; if not installed at 90 degrees to main, station and offset to end of each service tap
i. New manholes built on existing lines require showing its station from the nearest existing downstream manhole and its distance to the nearest existing upstream manhole
j. Where construction begins with removal of an existing pipe plug or cleanout, 0+00 stationing always begins at the nearest existing downstream manhole. Pipe length measurement and stationing is always from the centerline of the downstream manhole to the centerline of the upstream manhole or cleanout. Do not give partial pipe lengths in plan or profile at match lines- Always indicate the distance between manholes or to cleanouts or pipe ends.
Page 14 Rev. 08/01/16
k. All as-built adjustments to manhole, cleanout and pipe information shall be shown on both plan and profile, and repeated on every sheet that refers to the same information
l. A complete list of all materials installed and abandoned must be shown. The specific size and material type of each pipeline installed must be shown at every construction reference to that pipe. Any changes to the record drawing must be reflected on the materials list
m. On phased projects, the phase lines must be clearly shown on the key map and on the plan and profile sheets- and their locations clearly identifiable. Actual pipe end locations relative to phasing lines must be shown by dimensioning or stationing
4. Paving Plans
a. Top of curb, flow line, and pavement centerline elevations at all grade breaks, Points of Tangency (PT), Points of Curvature (PC), Beginning Curb Return (BCR), and Ending Curb Return (ECR), valley gutters, spandrels at intersections, plus any other location necessary to adequately show drainage
b. Percentage of slope
c. ADA ramps including ramp slopes
d. Edge of pavement on rural road sections
e. Location of traffic signage, signals, poles and cabinets
f. Station for all grade breaks
g. Back of curb offset dimension at all changes in alignment
h. Survey monuments - as-built installation and provide City of Prescott Northing/Easting to the hundredth of one foot. For street monuments, provide top of monument as-built elevation in addition
i. Distances from monument line to back/face of curb, edge of pavement, and sidewalk; show on plan view or typical detail for street section
j. Beginning and ending stations and elevations for all traffic calming devices
k. Stations, offsets, and invert elevations for spillways and box culverts
l. Flow line elevations and/or pipe inverts, grate elevations for catch basins, underground detention storage tanks, and all other drainage structures
5. Traffic Signal Plans
a. Street centerline station and offset dimension to all fixture poles, cabinets, boxes, or other signal related furniture
b. Horizontal location of conduit along with elevations to top of conduit
6. Signing & Striping Plans
a. Street centerline station and offset dimension to all signage, painted arrows, wording, and symbols
b. Face of curb dimensions to all striping
7. Storm Drain Plans
Page 15 Rev. 08/01/16
a. Street centerline station and offset dimension to the main at all changes in alignment and/or changes in grade
b. Street centerline station and offset dimension to all structures and changes in alignment
c. Top and invert elevations for all structures
d. Drainage pipe inverts
e. Finish elevation for catch basins
f. Invert elevations of box culverts
g. Headwall data shall include top of wall/wingwall, footing elevations, inverts, and apron boundaries whether concrete or rip-rap
h. Length of catch basin wings
i. Drainage ditches, swales, and channels; the flow line and sufficient cross sections (minimum of 50-foot intervals) including grade changes, shall be provided
8. Landscaping
a. Revise as needed to reflect the addition, removal, relocation or change of irrigation main lines, plant materials or hard-scape
9. Street Light Plans
a. Record drawings for street lights are required to have the Arizona Public Service (APS) ID number of each street light noted on the plan
b. Street centerline stationing and offsets for street lights
B. Prior to backfilling or covering any work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER 48-hours in advance in writing for the item of work. The minimum 48-hours notice time shall not include weekends or holidays. The notification shall be via e-mail to both the CITY and ENGINEER.
C. The CONTRACTOR must provide access for the ENGINEER to verify all as-built information prior to backfilling or covering. The CONTRACTOR shall not backfill or cover an item of work until verification has been completed by the ENGINEER. If the CONTRACTOR backfills or covers an item of work prior to being measured or recorded by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR at the direction of the ENGINEER shall uncover the item of work at no additional cost to the OWNER.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a redlined copy of the project plans including changes made in construction of the project on-site, and at all times. The redline copy shall be updated on a weekly basis in preparation for the weekly as-built field meeting. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with a copy of the redline plans upon completion of the project.
E. Weekly field meetings with the CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and CITY shall occur to review As-Built information for conformance with the specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with a schedule of work items to be constructed in the upcoming 30 day period, including approximate dates of installation prior to backfilling or covering. The CONTRACTOR field redlines will be reviewed for notation of changes in the work. Missing, erroneous or deficient data must be corrected by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER.
Measurement and Payment:
No separate measurement and payment shall be made for Record Drawing Preparation and Coordination. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction or installation of
Page 16 Rev. 08/01/16
the appropriate contract pay items.
106 CONTROL OF MATERIALS
ADD the following:
Contractor shall submit in writing all materials to be used in the project in accordance with ADOT Specification Section 106 and Subsection 730-4.
106.2 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIALS
REPLACE Section 106.2 in its entirety with the following:
A. Quality control measures sufficient to produce materials and workmanship of acceptable quality are the responsibility of Contractor. Upon request Contractor shall provide factory certificates of compliance or analysis or both to the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide full-time asphaltic concrete laydown compaction testing and adequate plant control for each paving day. The Contractor shall provide an independent geotechnical firm to perform all soils and concrete testing, as required, per these specifications.
B. The weekly reports shall state the type of work performed during the report period and other process control measures taken to assure quality. Type of work must be identified by activity, location, station, and offset, purpose of test, and any other relevant information that the Engineer needs to identify or replicate the quality control testing. Results of all tests, corrective actions, re-tests, and control charts shall be attached to the weekly reports. Although hand written documentation can be included, the quality control report narrative and test results must be typed to insure that clear reproductions of the documents can be made. The report period shall end at midnight each Friday and the report shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than 5:00 pm of the following Wednesday. Payment in the amount of $500.00 per report will be withheld for each individual report that is not delivered to the Engineer by the time and day specified above. Only one half of the withheld payments will be returned on the next regular project progress payment when the delinquent reports have been turned in and all of the above requirements have been met. Any report turned in more than 10 business days beyond the Wednesday due date will not be eligible for withheld payments to be returned.
Page 17 Rev. 08/01/16
Standard MAG Spec Section
Material Type of Test(s) Required
Sampling Point Minimum Sampling Frequency
Aggregate Base* Proctor DensityRoadway and Pipe Bedding
At start of production, then as material changes
(ABC) Compaction Roadway and Pipe Bedding
One per 500ft, per lift, per lane pass
Gradation, PIRoadway and Pipe Bedding
One per project, or one per 1,000 tons of fraction thereof
321, 322, 323, 710 Hot In-Place Asphaltic Concrete
Oil Content and Gradation**
If no City Inspector is at plant, sample in-place
One per day or one per 500 tons or fraction thereof
Mix Design Properties
If not City Inspector is at plant, sample in-place
One per day or one per 500 tons or fraction thereof
Density/Nuke Roadway One per 500ft per lift, per lane pass
Density/Core Roadway
5 to 7 cores per mix/project** (additional cores to be taken if source or mix changes) per Engineer
**Asphalt deficient in oil content, at the direction of the City Inspector/Lab, will be cored 50ft on both sides of failed section. The results of these 2 cores will be averaged with the original test result. Also the cores for gauge calibration.
The City Inspector, on an as needed basis, may require additional tests.
Table 1 – Quality Control Minimum Sampling Standard for ABC and Asphalt
701, 702
321, 322
Hot In-Place Asphaltic Concrete
Remarks:
*If Asphalt Millings are used for bedding, they shall meet the requirements of virgin aggregate base course, Asphalt Millings are not accepted as ABC for pavement cross-section.
Page 18 Rev. 08/01/16
Standard MAG Spec Section
Material Type of Test(s) Required
Sampling Point Minimum Sampling Frequency
Compressive Strength At Discharge
One set of three cylinders per 50 C.Y. or one per shift
Slump, Air, Time and Temperature*
At Discharge One per set of cylinders
Thickness Roadway See Spec
Structural Pre-cast** and Re-bar Certification Project
One per 100 LF of item. Re-bar size and heat number
701, 702, 725, 728 Lean Mix Concrete (Slurry)
Compressive Strength At Discharge
One set of three cylinders per shift (per Engineer)
Table 2- Quality Control Minimum Sampling Standard for Concrete
505, 701, 702, 725
Remarks:
Testing was in accordance to MAG/YAG and the City of Prescott Supplements to MAG for Soils Subgrade and Trench Compaction, Aggregate Base Course and Asphalt sampling and compaction and concrete sampling and cylinder breaks.
Concrete Flat Work, CIP, Structural
*Concrete spec for time is 90 minutes and temperature is 90 degrees.
**Manhole Shafts and Concrete Pipe need to have acceptance stamp on them and VCP need D-load test results from Certified Lab.
The City Inspector, on an as needed basis, may require additional tests.
Verification Packet should include the following:
All laboratories must submit a Verification Packet at the end of the project stating that the testing for the said project was in accordance to ASTM and/or AASHTO test procedures, including P.E.’s stamp.
Sampling and testing was in accordance to the City of Prescott Acceptance Sampling Guide.
Page 19 Rev. 08/01/16
Standard MAG Spec Section
Material Type of Test(s) Required
Sampling Point Minimum Sampling Frequency
Proctor Density In-Place One per soil typeCompaction In-Place One per 500ft, per liftProctor Density Roadway One per soil typeCompaction Roadway One per 500ft, per liftGradation, PI Roadway In-Place One per soil type
Manholes and Laterals Compaction In-Place
One per structure, pipe and lateral trench at various lifts
Proctor Density In-Place One per soil typesCompaction In-Place One per 1,000 C.Y.Gradation, PI In-Place or Source One per soil type
211 Fill Construction Compaction In-Place One per 500ft, per lift (MAG 211.3)
Remarks:
*All Compaction failures will be re-tested using a Sandcone. Any resulting failure will be re-worked before any re-tests are performed.
**The Nuclear Gauge shall be calibrated against the Sandcone at least every ten tests or per Engineer. Rock correction shall be used for any + #4 material to obtain Max Proctor Density.
The City Inspector, on an as needed basis, may require additional tests.
Table 3- Quality Control Minimum Sampling Standard for Soil
206, 601, 603, 205, 301 Soil Backfill or
Trench Backfill
Subgrade
205, 601 Roadway, Excavation, Embankments
ADD the following Section:
106.9 QUALITY ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. The Engineer may provide quality acceptance sampling and testing. The number of tests and location of each shall be determined by the Engineer. The expense of the initial sampling and testing shall be paid for by the City. Additional sampling and testing required due to failure of the initial test(s) shall be accomplished as provided by the City and these additional expenses shall be deducted from moneys due Contractor.
B. Contractor and the Engineer’s representative shall coordinate on a daily basis the following day’s work schedule and any testing that may be necessary. The Engineer’ quality acceptance testing will generally consist of (1) daily sampling and testing for asphalt extraction/gradation and Marshall density for each paving day; and (2) asphaltic concrete core drilling after placement to verify thickness and density. A minimum of one core per each 1,000 square yards of paving shall be randomly sampled by the Contractor’s quality control lab after marking by the City inspector.
C. Construction quality acceptance testing performed by the City of Prescott does not relieve the Contractor or the manufacturer of materials produced for the Contractor, of the obligation to perform and document quality control testing of materials and workmanship.
Measurement and Payment:
No separate payment shall be made for Contractor Quality Control. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction or installation of the appropriate contract pay items. An independent geotechnical firm shall perform all quality control testing. The Contractor shall furnish copies of all test results to the City on a weekly basis.
No separate payment shall be made for Quality Acceptance Testing or any related work performed by
Page 20 Rev. 08/01/16
Contractor.
107.6 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY
ADD the following:
A. Maintenance of Traffic
1. Contractor shall at all times conduct his/her work as to ensure the least possible obstruction to traffic. 2. Unless otherwise provided, the road, while being improved shall be kept open to all traffic by
Contractor. When so requested by Contractor and approved by the Engineer, Contractor may by-pass traffic over an approved detour route. Regardless of whether it is through or local traffic, Contractor shall keep the portion of the project being used by traffic in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated.
3. Contractor shall also provide and maintain in a safe condition temporary approaches or crossings and intersections with trails, roads, streets, businesses, parking lots, driveways residences, garages and farms; however, Contractor will not be required to remove snow.
4. Before any detour is opened to traffic, the Engineer shall have been satisfied that traffic is able to proceed in a safe manner.
5. Contractor shall bear all expense of maintaining traffic over the road being improved as well as constructing, maintaining and subsequently removing Contractor requested detours, approaches, crossings, intersections and other features as may be necessary without any direct compensation.
B. Access to Businesses/Residences
Contractor shall provide to all residents and businesses affected by the project, access to one of their driveways at all times except as modified by the following: If Contractor finds it unavoidable to temporarily close off access for any time, the residents/businesses affected shall be contacted a minimum of 48 hours in advance and an alternate procedure for access mutually agreed to. Contractor shall provide the Engineer with signed evidence of a mutually accepted agreement between the property owner/business manager/residential manager and Contractor prior to said closure.
C. Safety
1. The safety and convenience of the general public and the residents along the project and the protection of persons and property shall be provided for by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of this contract.
2. Contractor shall submit a Safety Plan to the Engineer at the preconstruction conference. The plan shall detail the procedures The Contractor will implement to satisfy OSHA and the State Occupational Safety Guidelines related to the worker as well as public safety in construction of excavations, structures and confined air spaces as identified by the Engineer. Contractor’s Safety Plan shall include the requirement that all workers and visitors must wear hard hats while within the project limits.
3. The Safety Plan submitted by Contractor shall include proposed methods to prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to the work areas.
4. In conjunction with the Safety Plan, Contractor shall furnish and install 72” temporary chain link fencing, or approved equal satisfactory to the Engineer, around any unattended excavation deeper than four feet with slopes steeper than 2:1. Temporary fencing shall completely enclose the referenced construction activity and shall be secured after normal working hours to prevent unauthorized access.
5. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, open utility trenches shall be limited to 50 ft.
Page 21 Rev. 08/01/16
in length except for cast-in-place pipe installations and during non-working hours shall be covered with steel plate in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
107.9 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND LANDSCAPE
ADD the following:
Mailboxes and traffic signs removed during construction shall be installed in “like kind” and shall be considered incidental to the unit prices for utility work included in the bid schedule, provided they are not in the bid schedule.
Existing landscape improvements, drainage ditches, etc., shall be restored in “like kind” so that the improvement is put back in as close to its prior state as possible
The Contractor shall restore each individual work site to grades existing before construction work, including wheel ruts and other scarring.
Measurement and Payment:
No separate payment will be made for restoration of items impacted by the Contractor’s construction operation and the cost of these items shall be included in the unit bid prices in the bid schedule.
ADD the following Section:
107.15 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP)
This project is subject to the Arizona Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (AZPDES) stormwater requirements for construction sites under the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) delegation to the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) for the Construction General Permit for Arizona. The following specifications shall apply:
A. General Requirements:
The Contractor shall comply with the Arizona Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (AZPDES) Stormwater requirements for construction sites under the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) Construction General Permit for Arizona. Under provisions of that permit, the Contractor shall be designated as permittee and shall be responsible for providing the necessary labor and materials, and for taking the appropriate measures to assure compliance with the AZPDES Construction General Permit for Arizona as well as other Federal, State and local requirements pertaining to stormwater discharges. As the permittee, the Contractor is responsible for completing, in a manner acceptable to the ADEQ, all documents required by this regulation including the following:
(1) Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan shall be sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Arizona.
(2) Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the project including certification form. The Contractor will be required to update and revise the SWPPP as necessary throughout the construction of the project in order to assure compliance with ADEQ permit requirements. The completed SWPPP shall be kept on the project site at all times during construction of the project.
(3) Notice of Intent (NOI) to be covered by AZPDES Construction General Permit for Arizona including certification of signature.
(4) Notice of Termination (NOT) of coverage under AZPDES Construction General Permit for Arizona (upon project completion).
Page 22 Rev. 08/01/16
Copies of necessary forms and guidance for preparing the SWPPP are available at ADEQ's website www.adeq.state.az.us/environ/water/permits/azpdes.html
B. Submittals:
(1) Preliminary Copies of the NOI and SWPPP shall be submitted to the Engineer at the time of the preconstruction meeting. Any necessary revisions to the SWPPP shall be subject to review by the Engineer, prior to implementation.
(2) The Contractor shall submit completed, signed NOI forms at least 48 hours prior to the initial start of construction on the project to ADEQ. One copy of the completed, signed NOI form shall be submitted to Arizona Department of Environmental Quality at the following address: Stormwater Program - Water Permits Section/NOI, ADEQ (5415B-3), 1110 West Washington, Phoenix, AZ 850071.
(3) Failure by the Contractor (or any of its appropriate subcontractors) to submit the NOI forms within the required time frame shall result in delay of the start of construction. The Contractor shall submit a completed copy of the NOI prior to Notice to Proceed. A copy of the completed NOI shall be posted on the construction site and a copy of the SWPPP shall be kept on the construction site.
C. Contractor’s Responsibilities:
(1) It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform inspection of all stormwater pollution control devices on the project on a monthly basis and following each rainfall of 0.50 inches or more at the project site and as required under the AZPDES Construction General Permit for Arizona. The Contractor shall prepare reports on these inspections and retain these reports for a period of three years following project completion as required under the AZPDES Construction General Permit for Arizona. Inspection reports shall be submitted monthly to the contracting agency along with payment requests. The Contractor shall maintain all stormwater pollution control devices on the project in proper working order, including cleaning and/or repair during the duration of the project.
(2) No condition of either the AZPDES Construction General Permit for Arizona or the SWPPP shall release the Contractor from any responsibilities or requirements under other environmental statutes and regulations.
D. Upon total project completion, acceptance, and de-mobilization, the Contractor shall submit its completed, signed NOT form to the ADEQ with Copies to the same agencies who received Copies of the NOI, thereby terminating all AZPDES permit coverage for the project.
Measurement and Payment:
Payment shall be at the lump sum unit price bid in the Contract Documents for all material, labor, and other incidental costs relating to the provision, installation, and maintenance of items relating to this permit during project construction. Such incidental costs shall include Contractor costs in order to assure proper operation of the pollution-control devices installed including all maintenance, cleaning, and disposal costs associated with clean-up and repair following storm events or other runoff or releases on the project.
Pay Item: 107.15 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
108.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
ADD the following:
A. At the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall submit for review by the Engineer a complete construction schedule as stated in the General Conditions of these contract documents.
B. Once this schedule has been accepted by the Engineer, Contractor shall not deviate from it until a
Page 23 Rev. 08/01/16
revised schedule has been submitted and accepted by the Engineer.
C. The Engineer reserves the right to reject construction schedule submittals when in his opinion the schedule lacks the proper detail.
109.10 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION
REPLACE Section 109.10 in its entirety with the following:
The Agency will compensate Contractor for a single round trip mobilization/demobilization of Contractor's personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals, including establishment of offices, buildings and other facilities required for the performance of the work on the project, as well as preparatory work and operations prior to the commencement of the work on the project site.
Measurement and Payment:
Mobilization will be measured for payment by the lump sum bid as a single complete unit of work. Payment for mobilization will be made as provided herein which shall be full compensation for supplying and furnishing all materials, facilities, and services and performing all the work involved as specified above. The total amount allowed for mobilization during the life of the contract shall not exceed nine percent (9%) of the original contract amount. If the bid price exceeds this percentage the excess amount will be paid to the Contractor upon completion of the contract and nine percent of the contract amount shall be used to determine partial payments. Partial payments under this item will be made in accordance with the following provisions:
1. The first payment of one third of the lump sum price for mobilization may be made provided that all submissions required under this Section and the General Conditions of the Contract are submitted by the Contractor at the pre-construction conference to the satisfaction of the Engineer and when the Engineer has determined that a significant amount of equipment has been mobilized to the project site which will be used to perform portions of the project work.
2. The second payment of one third of the lump sum price for mobilization shall be made on the first estimate following completion of thirteen percent (13%) of the contract.
3. The third payment of one third of the lump sum price for mobilization will be made on the first estimate following completion of twenty-six percent (26%) of the contract.
Pay Item: 109.10 Mobilization
ADD the following Section:
109.11 CONTRACT ALLOWANCE
A. Contract allowance items are provided for the purpose of encumbering funds to cover the costs of possible contract amendment work. The amount of the allowance item is determined by the Engineer and is not subject to individual bid pricing. All bidders shall incorporate the amount pre-entered in the bid proposal and shall reflect the same in the total amount bid for this project.
B. This allowance item provides an estimated funding to cover unforeseen changes that may be encountered and corresponding extra work needed to complete the contract per plan. Unforeseen extra work, if any, shall be in accordance with the Contract Amendment section of the General Conditions.
It shall be understood that this allowance item is an estimate only and is based on contract amendment history of similar projects. It shall not be utilized without an approved contract amendment. It is further understood that authorized extra work, if any, may be less than the allowance item. The Contractor, by submittal of his bid, acknowledges that the total bid and individual bid items were prepared without anticipation of use of the contract allowance.
Page 24 Rev. 08/01/16
Pay Item: 109.11 Contract Allowance
ADD the following Sections:
200.1 DEWATERING
A. All water encountered during the work shall be disposed of by the Contractor in a manner such that it will not damage public or private property or create a public nuisance or health problem. Contractor shall submit drawings and complete design data showing methods and equipment he proposes to utilize in dewatering prior to completing any dewatering work. This work shall consist of obtaining permits, furnishing equipment, materials, and labor necessary for the control and removal of water, the construction or installation of all facilities necessary to accomplish the work, and the subsequent removal of such facilities except when designated on the project plans or in the special provisions to remain in place.
B The Contractor shall keep, where appropriate, the rehabilitated pipe section free from water during rehabilitation. If groundwater is present in any excavation, the static groundwater level shall be drawn down a minimum of one (1) foot below the bottom of excavations to maintain the undisturbed state of natural soils and allow the placement of any fill to the specified density. Disposal of water shall not damage property or create a public nuisance. The Contractor shall have on hand pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for emergencies and shall have workmen available for its operation. Dewatering systems shall operate continuously until backfill has been completed to one (1) foot above the normal static groundwater level.
Groundwater shall be controlled to prevent softening of the bottom of excavations, or formation of “quick” conditions. Dewatering systems shall not remove natural soils. The Contractor shall control surface runoff to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations.
Release of groundwater to its static level shall be controlled to prevent disturbance of the natural foundation soils or compacted fill and to prevent flotation or movement of structures or pipelines.
Measurement and Payment:
No separate measurement or payment shall be made for dewatering. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction or installation of the appropriate contract pay items.
200.2 BY-PASS PUMPING
A. Description:
1. Scope: This section specifies the requirements for temporary bypass pumping of sewers
2. Requirements:
a. Contractor shall provide labor, materials, and supervision to temporarily bypass flow around the Contractor’s work.
b. The Contractor shall have the entire bypassing system in place and tested before bypassing any sewage.
3. At the Pre-construction Conference, the Contractor shall submit drawings and complete design data showing methods and equipment he proposes to utilize in sewer bypassing for approval by the Engineer. The submittal shall include the following information:
a. Drawings indicating the location of temporary sewer plugs and bypass discharge lines.
b. Capacities of pumps, prime movers, and standby equipment.
Page 25 Rev. 08/01/16
c. Design calculations providing adequacy of the system and selected equipment.
d. Standby power source.
e. Staffing plan.
f. Traffic Control Plan.
4. FLOW DATA: It is the responsibility of the Contractor for design, construction, and operation of an adequate and properly functioning bypass. It is also the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the city to gather flow data.
5. PROTECTION: In areas where flows are bypassed, all bypass flow shall be discharged as approved by the Engineer. No bypassing to the ground surface, receiving waters, storm drains or bypassing which results in groundwater contamination or potential health hazards shall be permitted.
6. SCHEDULING: The bypass system shall not be shut down between shifts, on holidays or weekends, or during work stoppages without written permission from the Engineer. Public advisory services will be required to notify all parties whose service laterals will be out of service and to advise against water usage until the main line is back in service.
B. Materials:
1. The Contractor shall provide temporary pumps, conduits and other equipment to bypass the sewer flow. Contractor shall furnish the necessary labor and supervision to set up and operate the pumping and bypass system. Engines shall be equipped with mufflers and/or enclosed to keep the noise level less than 50dB or 10dB above ambient noise levels when measured at the property line closest to the noise source. Pumps and bypass lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle the flows.
2. The Contractor shall maintain on site sufficient equipment and materials to ensure continuous and successful operation of the bypass systems. Standby pumps shall be fueled and operational at all times. The Contractor shall maintain on site a sufficient number of valves, tees, elbows, connections, tools, sewer plugs, piping and other parts or system hardware to ensure immediate repair or modification to any part of the system as necessary.
3. All piping, joints and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure, or 50psi, whichever is greater. All hoses/pipes used for bypass pumping shall be ramped to allow for the ease of vehicular and pedestrian traffic. All hoses/pipes shall be color-coded for identification to prevent cross contamination of water and wastewater lines. Hose/pipes used for wastewater conveyance are not used for water conveyance.
C. General:
1. During bypass pumping, sewage shall not be leaked, dumped or spilled outside the sewer system. When bypass pumping operations are complete, all piping shall be drained into the sanitary sewer prior to disassembly. In the event that sewage accidentally drains into the storm drainage system or the street, the Contractor shall immediately stop the overflow, notify the Owner and take the necessary action to clean up and disinfect the spillage to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Contractor shall submit their emergency spillage and cleanup action plan for all sewage spills to the Engineer for approval prior to beginning construction. It shall include but not be limited to a remediation plan that indicates what labor, equipment and resources will be used to restore the site to the condition prior to the spillage.
2. The Contractor shall repair without cost to the Owner any damage that may result from this negligence, inadequate or improper installation, maintenance and operation of bypassing system including mechanical or electrical failures, regulatory infractions and penalties resulting from sewer
Page 26 Rev. 08/01/16
spillage.
D. Flow Control:
1. Complete stoppage or bypassing of flow is required during sewer line and manhole rehabilitation work.
2. When the depth of flow at the upstream manhole of the sewer line section being worked is above the maximum allowable for television inspection, the flow shall be reduced to the level shown below by plugging or blocking of the flow, or by pumping and bypassing of the flow as specified.
3. PLUGGING OR BLOCKING: A sewer line plug shall be inserted into the line upstream of the section being worked. The plug shall be so designed that all or any portion of the sewage can be released. During TV inspection, flow shall be reduced to within the limits specified above. After the work has been completed, flow shall be restored to normal. Precautions shall be taken to prevent flooding damage. See flow precautions below.
4. PUMPING AND BYPASSING: When pumping and bypassing is required the Contractor shall supply the pumps, conduits and other equipment to divert the flow of sewage around the manhole section in which work is to be performed. The bypass system shall be of sufficient capacity to handle existing flow plus additional flow that may occur during peak flow periods or from precipitation and shall be constructed of such material that will prevent leakage during the pumping operation. The Contractor will be responsible for furnishing the necessary labor and supervision to set up and operate the pumping and bypassing systems. All pump drivers shall have noise suppressor exhaust systems to reduce noise levels to less than 50dB, or 10dB above ambient noise levels, when measured at the closest property line.
5. FLOW CONTROL PRECAUTIONS: When flow in a sewer line is plugged, blocked or bypassed; sufficient precautions must be taken to protect the sewer lines from damage that might result from sewer surcharging. Further, precautions must be taken to insure that sewer flow control operations do not cause flooding or damage to public or private property being served by the sewer involved. All piping(s), joints and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure or a minimum of 50psi whichever is greater. During by-pass pumping sewage shall not be leaked, dumped or spilled onto any area outside the sewer system. When by-pass pumping operations are complete all piping shall be drained into the sanitary sewer prior to disassembly. In the event sewage accidentally drains into the drainage system or street, the Contractor shall immediately stop the overflow, notify the Engineer and take the necessary action to clean up and disinfect the spillage to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If sewage is spilled onto public or private property, the Contractor shall wash down, clean up and disinfect the spillage to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor shall report any and all overflows to the City.
E. Measurement and Payment:
Payment for By-pass Pumping shall be made at the lump sum bid by the Contractor
Pay Item: 200.2 By-pass Pumping
201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
201.1 Description:
Replace in its entirety with the following:
This work shall consist of removing objectionable material from the right-of-way, easements, all areas to be graded, and such other areas as may be specified in the special provisions. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in advance of grading operations.
Page 27 Rev. 08/01/16
201.3 Construction Methods:
REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
All trees and shrubs found suitable for improvement and beautification, which will not interfere with excavation or embankment or cause disintegration of the improvements shall not be disturbed. In any event, the Contractor shall avoid injury to shrubbery, vines, plants, grasses and other vegetation growing outside of the clearing limits. The dragging and the piling of materials of various kinds and the performing of other work which may be injurious to vegetation shall be confined to areas which have no vegetation or which will be covered by embankment or disturbed by excavation during grading operations.
REPLACE the fourth paragraph with the following:
From excavated areas, all stumps, roots and other obstructions 3 inches or over in diameter shall be grubbed to a depth of not less than 24 inches below finish grade.
REPLACE Table 201-1 in its entirety with the following:
TABLE 201-1 EMBANKMENT CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Height of Embankment Over Stump
Height of Clearing and Grubbing
0 Feet to 2 Feet All stumps or roots 6 inches or over in diameter shall be grubbed to 24 inches below original grade. All others shall be cut flush with the ground.
2 Feet to 3 Feet All stumps 1 foot and over in diameter shall be grubbed to 24 inches below original grade. All others shall be cut flush with the ground.
Over 3 Feet All stumps shall be cut flush with the ground.
REPLACE the eighth paragraph with the following:
All tree trunks, stumps, brush, limbs, roots, vegetation and other debris removed in clearing and grubbing shall be completely removed from the project and properly disposed of.
201.5 Measurement and Payment, Clearing and Grubbing:
REPLACE with the following:
No separate payment shall be made for clearing and grubbing.
205 ROADWAY EXCAVATION
ADD the following Section:
205.1.1 General:
The bidding schedule quantities for this item of work will be considered to be the final quantities for payment. Adjustments in the bidding schedule quantities for Roadway Excavation as contained in these specifications may be initiated by Contractor or the Engineer if evidence indicates that the required quantity varies by an amount greater than 5% of the bidding schedule quantity. Contractor shall advise the Engineer, in writing, submitting evidence in the form of a construction survey or photogrammetric survey with measurement for the proposed adjustment and requesting an adjustment in quantities. The Engineer will determine the amount of adjustment, if any. The quantity upon which payment will be based will be the bidding schedule quantity plus or minus only that portion of the adjustment that exceeds 5% of the bidding schedule quantity.
Variations caused by shrink/swell of materials shall not be considered for quantity adjustments.
Page 28 Rev. 08/01/16
Adjustments in Roadway Excavation quantities due to revisions ordered by the Engineer will be isolated by measurement or calculations. The bidding schedule quantities will be adjusted by the amount either measured or calculated, regardless of the 5% variation requirement above.
205.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
REPLACE the third paragraph with the following:
If material is encountered during excavation that the Engineer determines to be unsuitable, the following shall apply:
1. Material which is located in a cut section at an elevation above finished sub-grade shall not be utilized in construction but shall be removed and disposed of at a site secured by Contractor.
2. Material which is located below the finished sub-grade elevation in excavation areas shall be removed to the limits as determined by the Engineer and the resultant cavity backfilled with aggregate base course in accordance with Section 310.
205.6 Surplus Material
REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, addressed in the special provisions, or approved by the Engineer, no surplus excavated material shall be disposed of within the right-of-way. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for disposal of the material at off-site locations as may be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer copies of the written consent of the owner of the property upon which he intends to dispose of such material, and any permits that may be required by a governing agency for said disposal.
205.7 Measurement:
REPLACE the first two paragraphs with the following:
The following earthwork operations will be measured as roadway excavation for the quantities of material involved.
Excavating the roadway prism including public and private roadway approaches; excavating slides and slip-outs not resulting from overshooting; excavating excess material; excavating selected material and topsoil from within the limits of the project and removing such materials from stockpiles when stockpiling is ordered; and excavating ditches.
ADD the following:
Measurement for unsuitable material shall be to the nearest cubic yard as calculated in the field.
205.8 Payment: ADD the following:
Payment for unsuitable material shall be at the contract unit price and shall include all excavation, hauling and disposal at a site secured by Contractor, and backfilling with aggregate base course.
Pay Item: 205.1 Roadway Excavation
Pay Item: 205.2 Removal of Unsuitable Material and Backfill With ABC
206 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
206.4.2 Structure Backfill For Earth Retaining Structures:
REPLACE (A) with the following:
Page 29 Rev. 08/01/16
(A) Shall conform to the material and the graduation requirements for Select Material, Type B in Table 702-1 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
206.4.4 Structure Backfill For Structures Within Paved Areas:
REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Where a structure is located within an existing street, proposed street, or paved area:
All backfill material with the exception of controlled low strength material shall be compacted to 95% maximum dry density per ASTM D-698. Controlled low strength material shall be 1 sack material as specified in Sections 604 and 728.
211 FILL CONSTRUCTION
211.1 Description:
Replace in its entirety with the following:
Fill construction shall consist of constructing embankments except as may otherwise be specified, including the preparation of the areas upon which they are to be placed; including the construction of dikes.
The bidding schedule quantities for this item of work will be considered to be the final quantities for payment. Adjustments in the bidding schedule quantities for Fill Construction as contained in these specifications may be initiated by Contractor or the Engineer if evidence indicates that the required quantity varies by an amount greater than 5% of the bidding schedule quantity. Contractor shall advise the Engineer, in writing, submitting evidence in the form of a construction survey or photogrammetric survey with measurement for the proposed adjustment and requesting an adjustment in quantities. The Engineer will determine the amount of adjustment, if any. The quantity upon which payment will be based will be the bidding schedule quantity plus or minus only that portion of the adjustment that exceeds 5% of the bidding schedule quantity.
Variations caused by shrink/swell of materials shall not be considered for quantity adjustments.
Adjustments in Fill Construction quantities due to revisions ordered by the Engineer will be isolated by measurement or calculations. The bidding schedule quantities will be adjusted by the amount either measured or calculated, regardless of the 5% variation requirement above.
Measurement and payment shall be in accordance with Sections 211.5 and 211.6
211.2 Placing:
REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
Rocks or other solid material which are larger than 4 inches in greatest dimension shall not be placed in fill areas. Broken concrete or asphalt shall not be placed in the fill.
211.3 Compacting:
REPLACE the seventh paragraph in its entirety with the following:
The interstices around the rock in each layer shall be filled with earth or other fine material and compacted. Broken portland cement concrete and bituminous pavement shall not be permitted in the fill.
211.4 Tests:
ADD the following:
Quality control testing frequency shall be one per soil type for proctor density testing and one per 500 feet
Page 30 Rev. 08/01/16
per 8-inch lift for compaction testing.
211.5 Measurement:
Replace the first paragraph with the following:
The quantities of fill construction used to construct embankments or dikes will be those of the complete bid item within the limits of dimensions shown on the plans.
211.6 Payment:
ADD the following:
Pay Item: 211.6 Fill Construction
300 STREETS AND RELATED WORK
300.1 Saw Cut
A. The work under this item shall consist of saw cutting the existing pavement where new asphalt concrete is to match existing bituminous surfaces with no provisions for overlaying the entire section. This item shall also include saw cutting of existing Portland cement concrete pavement, sidewalks, driveways and parking lots where new construction shall match the grade of existing surfaces that are to remain where called for on the project plans or where designated by the Engineer.
B. Saw cuts shall be made to a full depth of the material to insure a neat vertical joint. Portland cement concrete designated to remain that is damaged by the saw cutting shall be replaced in kind at The Contractor's expense.
C. No separate measurement or payment will be made for saw cutting, being considered incidental to the cost for work for which saw cutting is required.
301 SUB-GRADE PREPARATION
301.1 Description
ADD the following:
The work under this item shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for preparation of natural or excavated areas prior to the placement of any sub-base material, pavement, curbs and gutters, driveways, sidewalks or other structures. Unless provided for in another bid item, this work shall include the removal and disposal of all unsuitable material including existing pavement and other obstructions in accordance with MAG Specification Section 301. The Contractor shall be required to provide and pay for all quality control geotechnical testing in accordance with the MAG Specifications and the City’s MAG Supplement.
301.2.1 REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
The contractor shall not use asphalt concrete or other bituminous roadway surfacing materials as embankment fill.
Project earthwork quantities, when included as separate contract pay items, will include removed asphalt/bituminous material volumes, unless there is a pay item for asphalt removal or asphalt milling in the bid schedule or otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
All unsuitable material and all excess material shall be disposed of in accordance with the requirements of Sections 205.2 and 205.6, respectively. When additional material is required for fill, it shall conform to
Page 31 Rev. 08/01/16
Section 210.
301.3 Relative Compaction:
The subgrade shall be scarified and loosened to a depth of eight (8) inches.
(B) Below detached sidewalk not subject to vehicular traffic 95 percent
Sub-grade quality control testing shall be one per 500 lf per lane for compaction testing.
301.7 Measurement:
REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Measurement for Subgrade Preparation will be by the square yard, measured by the total accepted area of new pavements, including paved shoulders, tapers, turnouts and driveways that are paved or surfaced with an aggregate base material. The areas under concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk and concrete driveway entrances will not be included. Unless provided for in other separate bid items or unless otherwise specified; Clearing and Grubbing, Roadway Excavation, Rock Excavation, Borrow Excavation, and Fill Construction shall not be measured, in which case payment for these earthwork items, if required, shall be included in the unit price for Subgrade Preparation.
301.8 Payment:
REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Payment for Subgrade Preparation will be made only when it is performed for street or roadway paving projects. Payment shall be compensation in full for stripping, scarifying, grading, excavating, hauling, filling, compacting, and disposing of excess or unsuitable materials, together with all costs incidental thereto.
Pay Item: 301 Sub Grade Preparation
306 MECHANICALLY STABILIZED SUBGRADE – GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT
306.2 Materials:
ADD the following
Reinforcement Geogrid shall be Tensar BX1200 or approved equal.
306.8 Payment: REPLACE 306.8 in its entirety with the following:
Measurement of geogrid reinforcement shall be the surface area of accepted geogrid to the nearest square yard. No additional measurement or payment shall be made for geogrid overlap as required by the manufacturer.
Payment for geogrid reinforcement shall be per square yard installed complete and in place.
Pay Item: 306 Geogrid, Tensar BX-1200
310 PLACEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION OF AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
310.1 Description
The work under this item shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for the placement of an approved, imported aggregate base course material on top of a prepared subgrade per the required design thickness, grade, cross-section and compaction as specified on the project plan documents and in accordance with MAG Specification Sections 310, 701 and 702. Aggregate base course shall not be placed on a prepared subgrade until the City Engineer or authorized representative has inspected and accepted the underlying subgrade. The Contractor shall be required to provide and pay for all quality control
Page 32 Rev. 08/01/16
geotechnical testing in accordance with the MAG Specifications and the City’s MAG Supplement. Use of Reclaimed Concrete Material (RCM) is not allowed.
ADDITION of the following to MAG Section 310.1:
310.1.1 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)
Use of Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) aggregates or “millings” produced on-site for the intended use in the underlying base or subgrade material must be approved by the City Engineer or authorized
representative. Imported or stockpiled RAP milling material allowed to be used in lieu of or blended with virgin aggregate base course material shall be screened and meet MAG Specification Sections 310, 701 and 702. RAP millings must be uniformly mixed with an imported virgin aggregate base course material.
310.2 Placement and Construction:
ADD the following: Aggregate base course shall not be placed on excessively wet or frozen sub-grade materials as determined by the Engineer.
310.2.1 Aggregate base course quality control testing frequency shall be as follows:
Resistance to Degradation and Abrasion One at the start of production and again if source changes Fractured Faces, One Face, PI, and Gradation One per shift
310.3 Compaction:
The fifth paragraph shall be REPLACED as follows: For roadway construction, a minimum of one field density test shall be performed per 6-inch lift per 500 feet per lane. For other aggregate base course applications, a minimum of one field density test shall be performed for each 800 square yards.
Delete (A), (B), and (C) in their entirety, and ADD the following: Aggregate base course shall be compacted to 98% in all instances.
310.5 Measurement and Payment:
REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Measurement for aggregate base course material will be per ton furnished and placed. Copies of material delivery tickets will be required for quantity verification purposes. Payment shall be made at the unit price bid and shall be considered full compensation for this work item.
Pay Item: 310 Aggregate Base Course
317 ASPHALT MILLING
MAG Section 317 shall be replaced in its entirety as follows:
317.1 Description: The work under this section shall consist of milling existing asphalt concrete pavement where shown on the plans or requested by the Engineer.
317.2 Construction Requirements:
When milling is specified, the existing asphaltic concrete shall be removed in accordance with the details shown on the project plans with equipment specifically designed to remove such material by means of grinding or chipping to a controlled line and grade. The equipment used shall be capable of removing the existing asphaltic concrete within 0.01 feet of the specified removal depth. The removal shall be accomplished in a manner which does not destroy the integrity of any asphaltic concrete pavement that remains and which does not result in a contamination of the milled asphaltic concrete with the underlying
Page 33 Rev. 08/01/16
base material.
Pavement to be removed by milling, adjacent to manholes, valve boxes, small radius curbs and other fixed objects that produce confined areas shall be removed with milling equipment specifically designed to operate in restricted areas and capable of removing asphaltic concrete of the specified thickness without damage or displacement of the adjacent object. The removal of asphalt concrete pavement at the approaches to structures shall be accomplished in a manner approved by the City.
On projects with existing curb and gutter, any asphaltic concrete buildup in the gutter designated to be removed, shall be removed prior to the pavement removal operation by equipment and methods approved by the Engineer. The equipment and methods used shall be capable of removing the asphaltic concrete buildup without causing damage to the curb and gutter
Upon removal, the excess existing asphalt concrete material shall be delivered and off-loaded and stock-piled by the Contractor to the City Waste Transfer Station on Sundog Ranch Road at a location on site determined by the City. The millings will then become the property of the City.
Prior to milling and roadway excavation, all existing manholes, valve boxes, etc. shall be lowered and protected. All City facilities shall be protected from debris that may result from any adjustments and the Contractor shall be responsible for any maintenance activity resulting from debris related to the construction. No separate payment shall be made for lowering and protecting existing manholes, valve boxes, etc.
Under no circumstance shall the removal of existing asphaltic concrete begin until the mix design for replacement asphaltic concrete has been approved by the Engineer.
The extent of removal of existing asphaltic concrete must be in keeping with the contractor's ability to produce, haul, place and compact replacement asphaltic concrete so that at all times the length of open " trench" is at a minimum. If the contractor's product ion of replacement asphaltic concrete is stopped for any reason, the removal of asphaltic concrete shall either cease or shall be reduced. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether the removal shall cease or be reduced. The Engineer’s decision will be based on the reason for the stoppage in asphaltic concrete product ion, the expected length of the stoppage, the type and depth of the material being removed, and the time of day.
317.2.1 Quality Control:
All milling shall be inspected and approved prior to paving. High spots in excess of the tolerances noted shall be milled until in conformance.
Low spots in excess of ½” (one-half inch) shall have a leveling course placed prior to paving at no additional cost to the CITY.
317.2.2 Paving:
For mill and overlay areas, replacement asphaltic concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after milling has occurred and been approved. The surface on which the material is to be placed shall be uniform and free of loose material. Any exposed base material shall be compacted to the extent required by the Engineer.
The "trench" in which asphaltic concrete is being placed shall be filled before the end of each day's work and the lane shall be opened to traffic. The length of open "trench" at any one time shall not exceed two miles or half the length of the work, whichever is the lesser.
In the event of circumstances beyond the control of the contractor, such as equipment breakdown, or if the production of the replacement asphaltic concrete has been stopped by the Engineer and the contractor is unable to comply with the requirements in the preceding paragraph, the contractor shall provide and maintain such traffic control devices that the Engineer deems necessary under the circumstances in order to provide safe and efficient passage through the work zone.
Page 34 Rev. 08/01/16
If the Engineer deems it to be warranted, the contractor shall provide for the surface drainage of areas where the pavement surface has temporarily been removed.
317.3 Mean Macrotexture Depth:
Macrotexture asphalt milling when included as a separate contract pay item shall be performed in accordance with the following:
Existing asphaltic concrete shall be removed by milling in accordance with the details shown on the project plans and as specified herein. The milling equipment shall be specifically designed to remove material to a controlled line and grade by means of grinding or chipping. The equipment used shall be capable of removing the existing asphaltic concrete uniformly throughout the milled area at the required cross-slope and within 1/8 inch of the specified removal depth. The specified removal depth of the existing bituminous pavement shall be as noted on the plans. The removal shall be accomplished in a manner which does not destroy the integrity of any pavement that remains. During production milling, the contractor shall verify the actual depth of milling required to remove the desired underlying pavement surface. If it is determined by the Engineer that the required milling depth is greater than the specified milling depth, the additional material shall be completely removed to the desired underlying pavement surface, as approved, in accordance with MAG 109.4. The milled material shall be removed and disposed of as specified by the CITY.
The milled surface shall have a maximum mean macrotexture depth of 4.50 millimeters, as determined in accordance with Arizona Test Method 742- Mean Macrotexture Depth of Milled Pavement.
At the start of the milling operation, the contractor shall mill a 500-foot test section. The milled surface of the test section shall be evaluated by the Engineer for compliance with the maximum mean macrotexture depth requirement. If the milled surface is in compliance with the macrotexture requirement, the contractor may begin production milling. If the milled surface is not in compliance with the macrotexture requirement, the contractor shall make adjustments to the milling operation and then mill another test section.
During production milling, the mean macrotexture depth shall be determined at a minimum frequency of one test per one-half mile per lane. If, at any time, during the milling operation the Engineer determines that the macrotexture requirement is not being achieved, the contractor shall stop milling. Milling shall not resume until the Engineer is satisfied that the macrotexture requirement can be met or until successful completion of another test section. The forward speed of the milling machine during production milling shall not exceed the speed used for the test section. The forward speed of the milling machine shall be checked throughout each production day, or at the discretion of the Engineer.
The profile of the milled surface, in both the longitudinal and transverse directions, shall not vary by more than 1/8 inch over a distance of ten feet.
Under no circumstance shall the removal of existing asphaltic concrete begin until the mix design for replacement asphaltic concrete has been approved by the Engineer.
The extent of removal of existing asphaltic concrete must be in keeping with the contractor’s ability to produce, haul, place and compact replacement asphaltic concrete so that at all times the length of milled surface is at a minimum. If the contractor’s production of replacement asphaltic concrete is stopped for any reason, the removal of asphaltic concrete shall either cease of shall be reduced. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether the removal shall cease or be reduced. The Engineer’s decision will be based on the reason for the stoppage in asphaltic concrete production, the expected length of the stoppage, the type and depth of the material being removed, and the time of day.
Asphaltic concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after the milling. The surface on which the material is to be placed shall be uniform and free of loose material.
The length of milled surface at any one time shall not exceed two miles, or one-half the length of the work, whichever is less. Asphaltic concrete shall be placed on the milled surface before the end of each day’s
Page 35 Rev. 08/01/16
work. The lane shall be opened to traffic at the end of each day’s work.
In the event of circumstances beyond the control of the contractor, such as equipment breakdown, or if the product ion of the replacement asphaltic concrete has been stopped by the Engineer and the contractor is unable to comply with the requirements in the preceding paragraph, the contractor shall provide and maintain such traffic control devices that the Engineer deems necessary under the circumstances in order to provide safe and efficient passage through the work zone.
If the Engineer deems it to be warranted, the Engineer will require that the contractor provide for the surface drainage of areas where the pavement surface has temporarily been removed.
Pavement, to be removed by milling, adjacent to manholes, valve boxes, small radius curbs and other fixed objects that produce confined areas shall be removed with milling equipment specifically designed to operate in restricted areas and capable of removing asphaltic concrete of the specified thickness without damage or displacement of the adjacent object. Such areas may be excluded from macrotexture testing at the discretion of the Engineer.
On projects with existing curb and gutter, any asphaltic concrete buildup in the gutter designated to be removed, shall be removed prior to the pavement removal operation by equipment and methods approved by the Engineer. The equipment and methods used shall be capable of removing the asphaltic concrete buildup without causing damage to the curb and gutter.
317.4 Measurement and Payment:
Payment for milling shall be based on plan quantities at the unit bid price in the bid schedule to include milling, delivery, and stock-piling millings at the City Waste Transfer Station on Sundog Ranch Road.
Pay Item: 317.2 Asphalt Milling
Pay Item: 317.3 Macrotexture Milling
321 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Asphalt mix design materials, manufacture, and placement shall be in accordance with Section 321 and Section 710 with the additions, clarifications and changes herein:
Section 321.3 Weather and Moisture Conditions: shall be changed as follows:
Asphalt concrete shall be placed only when the surface on which the material is to be placed is dry, unfrozen, the atmospheric temperature in the shade is at 40 degrees F and rising, and the temperature of the road surface or subsurface is at 50 degrees F and rising as measured in the shade. No asphalt concrete shall be placed when the weather is foggy or rainy, when precipitation is eminent, or when the base or sub base on which the material is to be placed is unstable. Asphalt concrete shall be placed only when the Engineer or his authorized representative determines that weather conditions are suitable and sub base conditions on which the material is to be placed are acceptable.
Section 321.4 Application of Tack Coat: the first and second paragraphs are modified as follows:
A tack coat shall be applied to all existing and to each new course of asphalt concrete prior to the placing of a succeeding lift of asphalt concrete.
The application of the tack coat shall comply with Section 329. The grade of emulsified asphalt shall be SS-1 h as specified in Section 713.
Section 321.6 Mix Production: is supplemented as follows:
1. STOCKPILING
Page 36 Rev. 08/01/16
a. Sufficient virgin mineral aggregate material shall be stockpiled at the site of the hot plant to produce the quantity of asphalt concrete required for a minimum of two successive eight hour shifts; however, this requirement will be modified during the last two days production, or under special conditions with the Engineer’s approval.
b. Mineral aggregate shall be stockpiled so that segregation is minimized. An approved divider of sufficient size to prevent intermingling of stockpiles shall be provided.
2. PROPORTIONING
a. No fine material which has been collected in the dust collection system shall be returned to the mixture unless the Engineer, on the basis of tests, determines that all or a portion of the collected fines can be utilized. If the Engineer so determines, he will authorize in writing the utilization of a specific proportion of the fines; however, authorization will not be granted unless the collected fines are accurately and uniformly metered into the mixture.
b. Mineral aggregate and bituminous material shall be proportioned by volume, by weight, or by a combination of volume and weight.
c. When mineral aggregate and bituminous material are proportioned by weight, all boxes, hopper buckets or similar receptacles used for weighing materials, together with scales of any kind used in batching materials, shall be insulated against the vibration or movement of the rest of the plant due to the operation of any equipment so that the error in weighting with the entire plant operating shall not exceed 2% for any setting nor 1½% for any batch. Bituminous material shall be weighed in a heated, insulated bucket suspended from a springless dial scale system.
d. When mineral aggregate and bituminous material are proportioned by volume, the correct portion of each mineral aggregate size introduced into the mixture shall be drawn from the storage bins by an approved type of continuous feeder which will supply bituminous material and so arranged that the proportion of each mineral aggregate size can be separately adjusted. The continuous feeder for the mineral aggregate shall be mechanically or electrically actuated.
3. DRYING AND HEATING
a. A recording pyrometer or other approved recording thermometric instrument sensitive to a rate of temperature change of not less than 10 F per minute shall be so placed at the discharge chute of the drier in order to record mineral aggregate and to facilitate reading the recorded temperature. A copy of the recording shall be given to the Engineer. The moisture content of the asphalt concrete immediately behind the paver shall not exceed 1%.
4. MIXING
a. The production of the plant shall be governed by the rate required to obtain a thorough and uniform mixture of the materials. Mixing shall continue until the uniformity of coating, when tested in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T-195, is at least 95%.
b. A positive signal system shall be provided to indicate the low level of mineral aggregate in the bins. The plant will not be permitted to operate unless this signal is in good working condition. Each bin shall have an overflow chute or a divider to prevent material from spilling into adjacent bins.
c. The temperature of asphalt concrete upon discharge from the mixer shall not exceed 325 F. If the asphalt concrete is discharged from the mixer into a hopper, the hopper shall be constructed so that segregation of asphalt concrete will be minimized.
Section 321.8 Placement: is supplemented as follows:
a. Contractor shall stringline finish ABC grade in the presence of the Engineer or his representative to
Page 37 Rev. 08/01/16
verify compliance to specified tolerances prior to the placement of asphalt concrete. Placement of asphalt concrete shall not begin until adjacent Portland cement concrete items have obtained 75% of design strength.
b. The handling of asphalt concrete shall at all times be such as to minimize segregation. Any asphalt concrete which displays segregation shall be removed and replaced.
c. All wheels and tires of compactors and other equipment shall be wiped when necessary with an approved product in order to prevent the picking up of the asphalt concrete.
d. Before asphalt concrete is placed, the surface to be paved shall be cleaned of objectionable material.
e. The base or sub-grade upon which the asphalt concrete is to be placed shall be prepared in accordance with the applicable requirements for the material involved and maintained in a smooth and firm condition until placement.
f. At any time, the Engineer or his designee may require that the work cease or that the work day be reduced in the event of weather conditions either existing or expected which would have an adverse effect upon the asphalt concrete.
g. The temperature of asphalt concrete just prior to compaction shall be at least 250 F but shall not exceed 300 F, unless permitted by the Engineer.
h. The asphalt concrete shall be placed as a surfacing course. Surfacing courses are defined as courses placed to serve either as a traffic surface or as a surface upon which a finishing course or seal coat is to be placed. The thickness of surfacing courses will be shown on the project plans.
i. In order to achieve, as far as practicable, a continuous operation, the speed of the paving machine shall be coordinated with the production of the plant.
j. Tapered sections exceeding eight feet in width or widened sections not exceeding four feet in width may be placed and finished by other means approved by the Engineer.
Section 321.8.4 Compaction Base and Surface: is supplemented as follows:
a. Compacting and smoothing shall be accomplished by the use of self-propelled equipment. Compactors shall be pneumatic tired and tandem powered (steel wheel) and shall be approved by the Engineer.
b. Compactors shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Compactors shall be designed and properly maintained so that they are capable of accomplishing the required compaction.
c. Steel wheel compactors shall weigh not less than eight tons and have the vibratory mode option.
d. Pneumatic tired compactors shall be the oscillating type having a width of not less than four feet with pneumatic tires of equal size, diameter and having treads satisfactory to the Engineer. Wobble-wheel compactors will not be permitted. The tires shall be spaced so that the gaps between adjacent tires will be covered by the following tires. The tires shall be inflated to 90 lb. per square inch, or such lower pressure will not vary more than five lb. per square inch from the designated pressure.
e. Pneumatic tired compactors shall be constructed so that the total weight of the compactor can be varied to produce an operating weight per tire of not less than 2,000 lb.
f. Steel wheel compactors shall not be used in the vibratory mode when the surface temperature of the asphalt concrete falls below 180 F.
g. Asphalt concrete shall be compacted to not less than 95.0% of laboratory density.
Page 38 Rev. 08/01/16
h. Compaction control shall be defined as the responsibility of Contractor on the basis of his anticipated rate of production to determine the number and types of compactors and the sequence and manner in which they shall be used in order to achieve the specified percent density.
i. The responsibility for developing and controlling the compaction lies with Contractor.
j. The City reserves the right to test Contractor’s percent of density at any time.
k. Core samples shall be taken by Contractor on a random location basis with locations determined by the Engineer and consist of one core per every 1,000 square yards of roadway, for each day’s production. The asphalt cores shall be taken on the following workday or within 24 hours whichever applies and shall be submitted to the City’s Quality Assurance firm for testing.
l. For complete acceptance, all core densities must show a minimum relative density of 95.0% based on a 75 blow Marshall Density, AASHTO T-245. The Marshall Density shall consist of two sets of three specimens averaged for each day’s production.
m. If the core densities show inadequate compaction the unit price will be adjusted per the table below:
Percent Compaction Reduction in Payment
94.0 - 94.9 5%
93.0 - 93.9 10%
92.0 - 92.9 25%
n. When the percent compaction is less than 92.0%, Contractor may be required to remove and replace any portions at the discretion of the Engineer at no extra cost to the City.
Section 321.8.5 Smoothness: the second sentence is changed as follows:
a. Surfacing course surfaces shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from the lower edge of ten-ft. straightedge when the straightedge is placed parallel to the center of the roadway.
Section 321.9 Quality Control: shall be changed as follows:
A. Contractor Quality Control
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to administer a Quality Control Plan, hereinafter referred to as “Plan”, sufficient to assure a product meeting the requirements of these specifications. The Plan may be operated wholly or in part by a subcontractor or an independent organization; however, the Plan’s administration, including compliance with the Plan and its modification, shall remain the responsibility of Contractor.
b. Contractor is required to provide and maintain a Quality Control Plan, along with all the personnel, equipment, supplies and facilities necessary to obtain samples, perform tests, and otherwise assure the quality of the project.
c. Contractor shall submit the Quality Control Plan to the Engineer or his designee at the preconstruction conference.
e. Contractor shall perform process control sampling, testing and inspection during all phases of the work and shall perform the process control sampling, testing, and inspection at a rate sufficient to assure that the work conforms to the contract requirements. Contractor shall provide the Engineer a
Page 39 Rev. 08/01/16
certification stating that all of the testing equipment to be used is properly calibrated and will meet the specifications applicable for the specified test procedures.
2. ELEMENTS OF THE PLAN
a. The Plan shall address all elements which affect the quality of the asphalt concrete including, but not limited to the following: Mix Design, Aggregate Production, Quality of Components, Stockpile Management, Proportioning, Mixing (including addition of Mineral Admixture, if required), Placing and Finishing, Joints, Compaction.
3. PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
a. The Contractor shall provide testing at the frequencies listed in Table 321.9.1 during production of the asphalt concrete. A laboratory accredited in each of the listed tests by the AASHTO Materials Laboratory (AMRL) shall perform the testing.
TABLE 321.9.1
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Test Sample Point Frequency
Ignition Binder Calibration, ASTM D 6307
Stockpiles or storage tanks
1 per mix design per project
Ignition Binder Test, ASTM D 6307, C 117 & C116
Plant, truck, or on-grade
1 per 1000 tons, but not less than 1 per day
Gyratory or Marshall Density, ASTM D 4013 or AASHTO T 166
Plant, truck, or on-grade
1 per 1000 tons, but not less than 1 per day
Maximum Theoretical Density, ASTM D 2041
Plant, truck, or on-grade
1 per 1000 tons, but not less than 1 per day
Temperature On-grade Continuous Reading
Aggregate Gradation, ASTM C 117 & C 136
Cold Feed 1 per 1000 tons, but not less than 1 per day
b. Results of each test shall be provided to the Engineer or his designee immediately upon completion and in no case later than the end of the day asphalt was produced. Test results shall be used to control the asphalt concrete production. Production of the asphalt concrete on consecutive paving days shall not commence until the prior day’s test results have been submitted to the Engineer or his designee and appropriate actions have been taken in accordance with the criteria listed in Table 321.9.1 and Table 321.9.2.
Page 40 Rev. 08/01/16
c. The guidelines in Table 321.9.2 and Table 321.9.3 shall be used to determine if the plant will require adjustment or stoppage. If the Contractor’s test results indicate the mixture does not comply with Criteria A in Table 321.9.2, an adjustment to the plant will be required to bring the production closer to the middle of the specification bands. The Contractor is responsible for determining the extent and the method of adjustment, and shall notify the Engineer or his designee in writing of what adjustments were made.
d. If the Contractor’s test results indicate the mixture is at or beyond the range established by Criteria S in Table 321.9.2, production shall cease immediately, and shall not resume (except as required to produce material for additional samples) until additional test results verify the adjustments will produce test results meeting Criteria A in Table 321.9.2. The Engineer or his designee may enforce the adjustment or stoppage criteria if the acceptance tests and the quality control tests are not in agreement.
e. A representative of the City shall secure two representative samples of the mixture for each day’s production.
f. Samples will be tested for conformance with the mineral aggregate gradation in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T27. The gradation of the mineral aggregate will be considered to be acceptable unless the average of any three consecutive tests or the results of a single test varies from the mix design gradation percentages as follows:
TABLE 321.9.2 CRITERIA FOR REQUIRED PLANT ADJUSTMENT Property Criteria A (Adjustment) Criteria S (Stoppage)
Binder Content ±0.4%of Mix Design ±0.5%of Mix Design
Air Voids 4±1.5% 4±2.0%
Gradation Table 321-3 Table 321-3
Temperature ±10BC of Mix Design ±15BC of Mix Design
TABLE 321.9.3 ALLOWABLE GRADATION VARIATION FROM MIX DESIGN TARGET Maximum Aggregate Size 100%
Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size (NMAS) ±5%
#8 (2.36 mm) Sieve to NMAS ±4%
#40 (0.425mm)Sieve ±3%
#200 (0.75 mm) Sieve ±1.5%
Page 41 Rev. 08/01/16
Number of Tests
Passing Sieve Three Consecutive One
Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size
6% 8%
No. 8 4% 6%
No. 40 4% 6%
No. 200 1.5% 2.0%
g. Samples will be tested for conformance with the sand equivalent in accordance with AASHTO T176 and will be considered acceptable if the result is 45 or greater and does not vary from the design by more than -10 points. At any time that test results indicate that the gradation of the mineral aggregate or sand equivalent does not fall within all of the limits indicated, the production of asphalt concrete shall cease immediately and shall not begin again until calibration tests indicate that the gradation and sand equivalent is within the limits indicated.
Section 321.12 Measurement: shall be supplemented as follows:
a. Measurement under this item shall be to the nearest square yard.
b. No separate measurement shall be given for the thickened edge, COP Standard Detail 201P and as detailed on project drawings. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid in the contract documents. Payment shall be made at the unit price bid in the contract documents for the items complete in place, adjusted for compaction and thickness deficiencies as herein provided.
Section 321.13 Payment: ADD the following:
Pay Item: 321 Asphalt Concrete (AC) Pavements
Pay Item: 321.8.3 Asphalt Leveling Course
Pay Item: 321.8.6 Asphalt Concrete Overlay
Pay Item: 321.8.7 Pavement Fabric Interlayer
329 TACK COAT
329.3 Application: REPLACE with the following:
a. The application rate shall be between 0.04 to 0.06 gallons per square yard of diluted material, 50% water and 50% emulsion, using SS-1H.
b. The tack coat shall be applied only as far in advance of placing the asphalt concrete as ordered by the Engineer; however, in no event shall the tack coat be applied and not covered by the asphalt concrete in the same day.
329.6 Measurement: REPLACE with the following:
Measurement shall be per ton diluted as placed, based on weight tickets.
329.7 Payment: ADD the following:
Page 42 Rev. 08/01/16
Pay Item: 329 AC Bituminous Tack Coat, Type SS-1h
336 PAVEMENT MATCHING AND SURFACING REPLACEMENT
336.1 Description: REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
Asphalt concrete roadway pavement replacement shall be constructed in accordance with COP Standard Detail 200Q-1 and as indicated on the plans.
REPLACE the fourth paragraph with the following:
All other surface replacement in the right-of-way but not in paved roadways shall be constructed in accordance with COP Standard Detail 200Q-1 and as indicated on the plans.
336.2.1 Pavement Widening or Extensions: REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
The existing pavement shall be cut and trimmed after placement of required ABC and just prior to placement of asphalt concrete for pavement widening or extension, and the trimmed edges shall be painted with a light coating of emulsified asphalt immediately prior to constructing the new abutting asphalt concrete pavements. No extra payment shall be provided for these items and all costs incurred in performing this work shall be incidental to the widening or pavement extension.
336.2.3 Temporary Pavement Replacement: REPLACE the first and second paragraphs with the following:
Temporary pavement replacement with UPM in accordance with COP Standard Detail 200Q-1 shall be required in right-of-way until permanent hot mix trench pavement replacement can be performed. The Contractor shall install temporary asphalt pavement or the first course of permanent pavement replacement in accordance with MAG Section 336 immediately following backfilling and compaction of trenches that have been cut through existing pavement. Except as otherwise provided in MAG Section 336, this preliminary pavement shall be maintained in a safe and reasonably smooth condition until required backfill compaction is obtained and final pavement replacement is completed. Temporary paving removed shall be hauled from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
Permanent pavement replacement shall replace temporary repairs within 5 working days after completion of temporary work.
336.2.4.1 Permanent Pavement Replacement: ADD the following:
(G) AC trench pavement replacement shall be a minimum four inch (4”) thickness compacted to 95% of laboratory density in accordance with COP Standard Detail 2-01P, MAG Sections 601.6.
(H) Permanent hot mix AC pavement replacement shall be required for all trench cuts. Installation of UPM or other high performance cold mix shall not be permitted for permanent installation. The Contractor shall be required to maintain pavement trench cuts to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(I) The Contractor shall coordinate with Engineer a minimum of two (2) working days in advance of trench paving.
REPLACE 1/4-inch with 1/8-inch in the ninth paragraph.
DELETE the last paragraph of this section in its entirety.
336.3 Types and Locations of Pavement and Surfacing Replacement: REPLACE paragraphs one through five (inclusive) with the following:
Normally, the type of pavement replacement and backfill required will be noted on the plans or specified in other portions of the contract documents and construction shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail
Page 43 Rev. 08/01/16
200Q-1. If a type is not noted on the plans or specified in the special provisions, the following criteria will govern:
T-Top trench repair will be utilized on all streets.
COP Standard Detail 200Q-1 trench repair shall be utilized to repair surfaces other than asphalt concrete or Portland cement concrete pavement. It may also be used when the condition of the existing pavement does not justify construction of T-Top trench repair. Prior written approval of the Engineer is required for this condition.
336.4 Measurement: REPLACE the first and second paragraphs with the following:
(A) In computing pay quantities for replacement using COP Standard Detail 200Q-1, pay widths shall not exceed the maximum widths as depicted on Table 601-1, plus 24-inches for the T-Top.
(B) In computing pay quantities for replacement using COP Standard Detail 200Q-1, pay widths shall not exceed the maximum widths as depicted on Table 601-1.
336.5 Payment: ADD the following:
Pavement Matching and Surfacing Replacement shall include all saw cutting, removal and disposal of existing pavement, plus all labor and material for complete installation of permanent pavement replacement. No extra payment will be made for temporary pavement required for maintenance of utility trench cuts or for trench widths in excess of Section 336.4.
Pay Item: 336 Pavement Matching and Surfacing Replacement
340 CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK, SIDEWALK RAMPS, DRIVEWAY, & ALLEY ENTRANCE
340.2 Materials: REPLACE the first sentence with the following:
Concrete shall be Class AA unless otherwise noted.
ADD the following:
340.2.2 Detectable warnings shall be Masco Detectable Warning Panels, or approved equal, color Salem Red.
340.3 Construction Methods: REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
The subgrade shall be constructed and compacted true to grades and lines shown on the plans and as specified in Section 301. All soft or unsuitable material shall be removed to a depth of not less than 6 inches below subgrade elevation and replaced as directed by the Engineer. Unsuitable material shall be measured and paid in accordance with Section 205.2. The subgrade shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density.
All concrete items in this section shall be constructed on a minimum of 4-inches of aggregate base course unless noted otherwise, whether shown on the standard details or not. Aggregate base course shall be compacted to not less than 98% of maximum dry density.
DELETE Section 304.4 Backfilling, Section 304.5 Measurement, and Section 304.6 Payment in their entirety.
ADD the following Sections:
340.4 Concrete Items;
340.4.1 Concrete Curb, Gutter, and Curb Terminations
Page 44 Rev. 08/01/16
The pavement section (base and sub-base) shall extend to the back of curb.
340.4.2 Concrete Sidewalk, Sidewalk Landing, and Ramp
Concrete sidewalk, sidewalk landings, and ramps shall be in accordance with City of Prescott Standard Details or as otherwise modified on the plans.
340.4.3 Concrete Driveway Entrances and 6” Concrete Slabs
Portland cement concrete pavement shall contain 6% ±1% entrained air. Slump shall be a maximum of 3½”.
Construction Joints shall be a maximum of 15 feet apart. Contractor shall submit a jointing pattern for review and approval prior to construction.
Driveways shall include the curb returns to the existing grades as shown on MAG Standard Detail 251 and modified by the driveway details in the plans. All concrete used in the driveways and adjacent sidewalk crossings shall be six–inches (6”) thick.
Match up construction shall include ten feet (10’) of replacement driveway surfacing from the new top of sidewalk to the existing driveway elevations behind the sidewalk unless otherwise shown on the plans.
340.4.4 Concrete Valley Gutter
All concrete valley gutter shall be constructed on a minimum eight-inch (8”) thick aggregate base course, whether shown on the standard details or not.
340.5 Backfilling:
Unless otherwise specified the Contractor shall backfill behind the curbs, sidewalk or sidewalk ramps with soil native to the area to the lines and grades shown on the plans.
340.6 Measurement:
Concrete curbs and gutters of the various types shown on the plans and in the proposal will be measured along gutter flow line through inlets, catch basins, driveways, sidewalk ramps, etc., by the lineal foot to the nearest foot for each type, complete in place. Measurement for curb terminations and transitions shall be included with the linear measurement of the various types of curb or curb and gutter as shown on the plans and in the proposal.
Concrete sidewalks, driveways, alley intersections, valley gutters and aprons will be measured to the nearest square foot complete in place. When concrete sidewalk, sidewalk ramps, driveways, alley intersections, valley gutters, and/or aprons are cut during trenching operations, the square foot measurement for payment will be in accordance with Section 336.
Concrete sidewalks, driveways, alley intersections, valley gutters and aprons will be measured to the nearest square foot complete in place.
Detectable warnings shall not be measured for payment. Detectable warnings are considered integral to the walking surface that they form a part of and the cost is included in the related pay item.
Curb ramp installations shall be measured as complete installed units and shall include the ramp curb and the walking surfaces between the ramp curb and back of curb and gutter or single curb. Single curb or curb and gutter located at the edge of roadway shall be measured and paid for separately. The surface area of curb ramps shall not be included in the measured quantity for sidewalk.
Aggregate base course shall be considered incidental to all items in the section.
No separate measurement or payment for the curb returns and transition curbs for driveways shall be made, the cost being considered incidental to Pay Item 340.3, Concrete Driveway Entrance and 6”
Page 45 Rev. 08/01/16
Concrete Slab
340.7 Payment:
Pay Item: 340.4.1 Concrete Curb and Gutter
Pay Item: 340.4.1.1 Single Curb
Pay Item: 340.4.2 Concrete Sidewalk
Pay Item 340.4.2.1 ADA Ramp
Pay Item: 340.4.3 Concrete Driveway Entrances and 6” Concrete Slabs
Pay Item: 340.4.4 Concrete Valley Gutter
345 ADJUSTING FRAMES, COVERS, VALVE BOXES, WATER METER BOXES AND PULL BOXES
345.1 Description: REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
All frames, covers, valve boxes, manholes, etc., shall be adjusted to finished grade after placement of asphalt concrete surface course by the Contractor in accordance with the Standard Details.
The Contractor shall remove old frames and covers and install new frames and covers in accordance with standard detail drawings.
345.3 Adjusting Frames: REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
Frames shall be set to the elevations and slopes established by the Engineer and shall be firmly blocked in place with masonry or metal supports. Spaces between the frame and the old seat shall be sealed on the inside to prevent any concrete from entering the hand hole or manhole. Class AA concrete shall be placed around and under the frames to provide a seal and properly seat the frame at the required elevation and slope.
A single No. 4 rebar hoop will be placed in each concrete collar in accordance with the respective detail. The hoop diameter shall be such that its placement is centered between the edge of the manhole frame or valve box, and the outer edge of the concrete collar, the depth of the hoop shall be centered in the thickness of the collar. Each concrete ring shall be scored radially at quarter-circle points. Score lines shall be ¼ -inch wide by ½ - inch deep. The concrete collar surface shall be rough broom finished. (See COP Standard Detail 270Q and 422Q)
Existing frames and covers shall be salvaged to the City. All salvaged items shall be delivered to the City of Prescott Wastewater collections, 1505 Sundog Ranch Road and placed as directed by the Engineer.
REPLACE the fourth paragraph with the following:
After removal of the temporary asphalt pavement in the area of adjustment, and prior to placement of the final concrete collar ring (as shown on COP Standard Details 270Q and 422Q) the asphalt pavement in proximity of the adjustment shall be rolled with a self-propelled steel wheel roller if requested by the Engineer.
Traffic shall not be allowed on the concrete collars until the concrete had reached a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi on residential and 3000 psi on collector and major streets. On major streets the contractor shall use “high-early” in the concrete mix, approved by the Engineer, to minimize delay in reopening the street(s) to traffic.
345.4 Adjusting Valve Boxes: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Valve boxes shall be adjusted to the new elevations indicated on the plans, or as established by the Engineer.
Page 46 Rev. 08/01/16
New valve box top risers and caps shall be furnished by the Contractor at existing water valve locations and placed as directed by the Engineer. New valve box top risers and caps shall be considered incidental to the cost of adjustment.
Existing valve box risers and caps shall be salvaged to the City. All salvaged items shall be delivered to the City of Prescott Water Operations, 1481 Sundog Ranch Road and placed as directed by the Engineer.
A single No. 4 rebar hoop will be placed in each concrete collar in accordance with the respective detail. The hoop diameter shall be such that its placement is centered between the edge of the manhole frame or valve box, and the outer edge of the concrete collar, the depth of the hoop shall be centered in the thickness of the collar. Each concrete ring shall be scored radially at quarter-circle points. Score lines shall be ¼ -inch wide by ½ - inch deep. The concrete collar surface shall be rough broom finished. (See COP Standard Detail 391Q)
Traffic shall not be allowed on the concrete collars until the concrete had reached a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi on residential and 3000 psi on collector and major streets. On major streets the contractor shall use “high-early” in the concrete mix, approved by the Engineer, to minimize delay in reopening the street(s) to traffic.
ADD the following Section:
345.4.1 Adjusting Meter Boxes:
Meter boxes shall be adjusted to the new elevations indicated on the plans, or as established by the Engineer.
Additional meter box sections, concrete, and miscellaneous items required to protect the utility in accordance with the respective standard detail shall be considered incidental to adjusting the meter box.
345.5 Adjusting Manhole and Valve Covers with Adjusting Rings:
REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Existing sanitary sewer manhole and covers shall be salvaged to the City. All salvaged items shall be delivered to the City of Prescott Wastewater collections, 1505 Sundog Ranch Road and placed as directed by the Engineer.
Adjusting rings may be used to raise manhole covers in conformance to the dimensions noted on COP Standard Detail 420Q-1. The amount of adjustment, thickness of seal or overlay, and cross slope will be considered when using adjusting rings. Each location where an adjusting ring is used must have a sufficient depth of asphalt to assure the proper installation and operation of the ring. The rings shall be made of concrete and installed per the manufacturer’s specifications. The rings shall be approved by the Engineer.
The concrete collar ring around the frame or valve box shall be circular, shall be a minimum of eight (8) inches thick, struck off and finished 1/4” below with the adjacent new pavement surface. Concrete shall be a minimum of Class AA. All concrete shall be obtained from plants approved by the Engineer.
A single No. 4 rebar hoop will be placed in each concrete collar in accordance with the respective detail. The hoop diameter shall be such that its placement is centered between the edge of the manhole frame or valve box, and the outer edge of the concrete collar, the depth of the hoop shall be centered in the thickness of the collar. Each concrete ring shall be scored radially at quarter-circle points. Score lines shall be ¼ -inch wide by ½ - inch deep. The concrete collar surface shall be rough broom finished. (See COP Standard Detail 4-05P)
Traffic shall not be allowed on the concrete collars until the concrete had reached a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi on residential and 3000 psi on collector and major streets. On major streets the contractor shall use “high-early” in the concrete mix, approved by the Engineer, to minimize delay in reopening the street(s) to traffic.
Page 47 Rev. 08/01/16
345.6 Measurement: ADD the following:
Measurement for adjusting existing frames, covers, valve boxes, and water meter boxes to finished grade shall be the actual number of each type adjusted and accepted.
Measurement for adjusting new frames, covers, valve boxes, and water meter boxes shall not be measured as adjustment to finished grade is considered incidental to installation of the respective item.
345.7 Payment: ADD the following:
Pay Item: 345.3 Adjust Existing Frame and Cover
Pay Item: 345.4 Adjust Existing Valve Box and Cover
Pay Item: 345.4.1 Adjust Existing Meter Box
Pay Item: 345.5 Adjust Existing Manhole
350 REMOVAL OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
350.1 Description:
The work under this section shall consist of the removal, wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all structures and obstructions within the right-of-way which have not been designated on the project plans or specified in the Special Provisions to remain, except for those structures and obstructions which are to be removed and disposed of under other items of work in the contract. The work shall also include salvaging of designated materials and backfilling the resulting cavities.
Existing structures, pavement, sidewalks, curbs, gutters and other existing improvements which are to become an integral part of the planned improvements shall remain even though not specifically noted.
Materials removed and not designated to be salvaged or incorporated into the work shall become the property of the contractor.
All existing utilities not designated for removal shall remain in place and be protected against damage.
The removal of existing improvements shall be conducted in such a manner as not to injure active utilities or any portion of the improvement that is to remain in place.
350.2 Construction Requirements:
Bridges, culverts and other structures in use by traffic shall not be removed until l satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate the traffic. Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure or obstruction, which may damage new construction, shall be completed prior to commencing the new work.
Items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully stockpiled or stored by the contractor at locations designated in the Special Provisions or as directed by the Engineer.
Items which are to be salvaged or reused in the new construction and are damaged or destroyed as a result of the contractor's operations shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the City.
Holes, cavities, trenches and depressions resulting from the removal of structures or obstructions, except in areas to be excavated, shall be backfilled with suitable material which shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined in accordance with the requirements of Section 601 or Section 211. Backfill of all excavated areas below structures shall be in accordance with Section 206.4.
Page 48 Rev. 08/01/16
350.3 Removal of Pavement:
A. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement:
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, concrete pavement designated on the project plans to be removed shall be removed from the job site and disposed of at a site secured by the contractor.
Where new construct ion is to join the existing concrete pavement, the pavement shall be saw cut to a true line perpendicular to the centerline of the pavement with straight vertical edges free from irregularities.
B. Bituminous Pavement:
Unless milling is noted on the plans or is a bid item, all bituminous pavement designated on the project plans to be removed, shall be completely removed down to the underlying base course or subgrade. The pavement material shall be removed and disposed of at a site secured by the contractor.
Where new construction is to join existing bituminous pavement, the existing pavement shall be cut to a true line perpendicular to the centerline of the pavement with straight vertical edges free from irregularities. The removal of asphaltic concrete at the approaches to structures shall be accomplished in a manner approved by the Engineer.
350.4 Removal of Storm Pipe and Culverts:
All removed pipe which is to be salvaged or re-laid shall be cleaned of all earth and other material inside and outside prior to being stockpiled or reused. Pipe to be reused shall be stored when necessary to avoid damage or loss before relaying.
Existing pipe to be partially removed shall be cut with straight and smooth edges on a plane perpendicular to the center line of the pipe.
Pipe that is not salvaged shall become property of the Contractor, removed from the project, and disposed of properly.
350.5 Removal of Miscellaneous Concrete:
Miscellaneous concrete shall be defined as all or portions of mortared rubble masonry, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, driveways, aprons, slope paving, island paving, retaining walls, spillways, drainage structures, concrete box culverts, foundations, footings and all other Portland cement concrete or masonry construction, except bridges and pavement. All existing miscellaneous concrete shall be removed to a depth of at least five feet below finished subgrade elevation unless otherwise noted on the project plans or special provisions. Other specification sections that discuss removal of concrete items shall supersede the provisions in this Section.
Where new concrete is to join existing concrete, the existing concrete shall be saw cut to a true line with straight vertical edges free from irregularities.
Concrete removal operations shall be performed without damage to any portion that is to remain in place. All damage to the existing concrete, which is to remain in place, shall be repaired to a condition equal to that existing prior to the beginning of removal operations. The repairing of existing concrete damaged by the contractor's operations shall be at no additional cost to the City.
Existing reinforcement that is to be incorporated in new work shall be protected from damage and shall be thoroughly cleaned of all adhering material before being embedded in new concrete.
Page 49 Rev. 08/01/16
Concrete shall be disposed of as provided in Subsection 350.3.A.
The floors of concrete basements, pits and structures that are located within the right-of-way shall be completely removed.
350.6 Removal of Utilities:
Removal of water mains, sewer mains, and related appurtenances shall be in accordance with Sections 650 and 651, respectively.
All existing utilities not designated for removal shall remain in place and be protected against damage.
A utility may be abandoned in place below a new major structure that is part of the work only if approved by the Agency and solidly filled with grout using methods approved by the Agency. All abandoned utilities to remain and the approved abandonment method shall be noted on the installation record drawings.
Utilities to be removed by the Contractor shall be disconnected and taken out in accordance with the requirements of the utility owner to the limits shown on the plans. Utility removal shall not be performed until a release has been obtained from the utility stating that their respective service connection and appurtenant equipment have been disconnected, removed or sealed and plugged in a safe manner.
The Engineer shall be notified when utilities are encountered that are not shown on the plans.
350.6.1 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPE
A. BACKGROUND:
Asbestos-Cement Pipe (ACP) is a mixture of Portland cement and asbestos fibers. It was introduced into North America in 1931 and, by 1953, the American Water Works Association (AWWA) had established standards for ACP. Along with many other cities, ACP water mains were installed in the City of Prescott and as a consequence, we have a considerable quantity of this material in service. Some of these mains are old and need to be replaced; some are undersized and need to be upsized; and others are in conflict with new utility installations and need to be relocated. These actions require all or part of the existing ACP system to be removed and disposed. Subsequent to ACP's introduction into the United States, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) determined that asbestos, in an airborne condition, is a hazardous material and established laws/guidelines for the handling and disposal of the material. The Asbestos National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) establishes requirements for the removal and disposal of regulated asbestos containing materials. This Policy Statement establishes procedures and identifies responsibilities for the proper handling of asbestos-cement pipe in conformance with the Asbestos NESHAP requirements in effect as of November 1990.
NOTE: As used herein, the term "Engineer" shall refer to the City of Prescott Public Works Director or his/her designated representative. The term "Excavator" shall refer to that entity (individual or contractor) which actually excavates and exposes the pipe. The term "Generator" means any owner or operator of a source (covered by the regulation) whose act or process produces asbestos containing waste material. The term "extra cost" shall refer to the cost over and above the removal and disposal of the pipe in a non-friable state.
B. POLICY:
A. It is the intent of the City of Prescott to comply with the requirements of the Asbestos NESHAPS found at 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M. This Policy Statement will establish procedures to be used by all Excavators in the removal and disposal of ACP in compliance with NESHAPS. Nothing in this Policy Statement shall be construed to void any provision of a contract or other law, ordinance, regulation or policy whose requirements are more stringent.
B. ACP is defined under NESHPS as a Category II, non-friable, non-regulated material in its intact state
Page 50 Rev. 08/01/16
but which may become friable upon removal, demolition, and/or disposal. Consequently, if the removal/disposal process renders the ACP friable, it is regulated under the disposal requirements of 40 CFR 61.150. If more than 260 linear feet of ACP is removed which on removal will become friable, a NESHAPS notification must be filed with the Yavapai County Environmental Services Department. The notification must be filed at least ten days prior to removal of the material. If it remains in its non-friable state, as defined by the NESHAPS, it can be disposed as a conventional construction waste. EPA defines friable as material, when dry, which may be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressures.
C. The Generator of the hazardous material is responsible for the identification and proper handling, transportation, and disposal of the material. Therefore, it is the policy of the City of Prescott that if the actions of the Excavator cause the material to become friable, and therefore subject to the regulations, that Excavator becomes the Generator.
D. The requirements of Arizona Revised Statutes, Chapter 2, Article 6.3, Section 40-360.21 through 40-360.32 (Blue Stake Law) are important with respect to implementation of this Policy Statement. The Blue Stake Law mandates the Owner of the facility (in this case the City of Prescott) to maintain installation records and, upon request, to properly locate the underground facility. The Law also places requirements on the Excavator to:
1. Call the Blue Stake Center at least two (2) working days prior to the start of excavation.
2. Mark the boundaries of the location to be excavated.
3. Excavate in a careful and prudent manner, including hand digging within twenty-four (24) inches of the underground facility.
4. Notify the Owner if the Excavator encounters an underground facility that has not been located and marked or has been marked in the wrong location.
If the Excavator does not comply in full with the Blue Stake requirements and therefore causes non-friable ACP to become friable, any and all extra costs incurred to handle, containerize, transport, and dispose of the asbestos containing waste shall not be paid or reimbursable by the City. If Blue Stake requirements are met and ACP is accidentally or unknowingly disturbed thereby causing it to become friable, the Excavator may seek reimbursement from the City for additional costs to handle, containerize, transport and dispose of the material following the procedures described in Sections E and F below.
E. The Contractor shall retain the services of an independent, qualified, licensed asbestos abatement Consultant. All removal and disposal of ACP shall be under the cognizance of the Consultant. The Excavator is responsible to contact the Consultant a minimum of two (2) working days prior to the initiation of removal/disposal operations.
The Consultant will monitor the Excavator's work. If the ACP was not planned for removal and the Excavator accidentally disturbs the pipe, the Excavator will cease all work and notify the Engineer immediately for further instructions.
F. It is the intent of the City of Prescott that all ACP shall be removed in such careful and prudent manner that it remains intact and non-friable. The Excavator is responsible to deploy the means, methods, techniques, and sequences to ensure this result. When it is a practical impossibility, as determined by the Engineer, to remove the ACP without creating a friable material, the City will pay the Excavator for the removal of friable material in accordance with the measurement and payment section. The Excavator shall take steps to minimize the amount of the friable waste and abide with all asbestos regulatory requirements. The Consultant shall be available to provide recommendations or suggestions, which the Excavator may or may not choose to deploy. The Consultant shall measure or otherwise assess and recommend to the Engineer the amount or percentage of friable
Page 51 Rev. 08/01/16
waste for which the City should pay for removal and disposal with the remainder being the responsibility of the Excavator. If the ACP is caused to become friable, the Consultant shall conduct perimeter air monitoring upon request by the City. If the Excavator fails to notify the Consultant, fails to excavate and remove the ACP in a careful and prudent manner creating friable material or fails to abide with all asbestos regulatory requirement, the Excavator shall be deemed to be the Generator responsible to handle, transport and dispose of the ACP in accordance with the NESHAPS requirements and will not be reimbursed for any cost incurred. This will include all penalties and associated legal fees of the Generator as well as any penalties assessed against the City of Prescott, and any associated legal fees incurred by the City of Prescott for violation of any of the asbestos regulatory requirements that are caused by the Excavator.
G. ACP shall NOT be crushed and left in place.
H. Compliance with all aspects of worker safety and health regulations including but not limited to the OSHA Asbestos Standard is the responsibility of the Excavator. The City of Prescott assumes no responsibility for compliance programs which are the responsibility of the Excavator.
I. Payment for removal of non-friable existing asbestos cement pipe shall be at the unit bid price shown in the bidding schedule for complete removal, proper disposal and trench backfill in accordance with the specifications.
J. Payment for removal of friable existing asbestos cement pipe shall be a contingent item at the unit bid price shown in the bidding schedule for complete removal, proper disposal and trench backfill as determined by the Engineer in accordance with Paragraphs E and F and other provisions of the specifications.
350.7 Removal of Signs and Delineators:
Street signs, traffic control signs, traffic signal material and control devices shall be removed as designated on project drawings, salvaged and delivered to the City at the site designated by the Engineer. The contractor shall dismantle the sign panels and delineators and remove the sign posts from the ground in such a manner as to prevent damage to the posts. The contractor shall not remove the existing signs prior to the completion of the new sign installation, but shall remove them within five working days after the installation of the new signs or as directed by the Engineer.
350.8 Removal of Fence:
All fence to be removed, shall become the property of the contractor unless designated for salvage on the project plans. If fence is designated to be removed and salvaged, all fence, including gates shall be salvaged in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 202-3.01.
When designated for salvage, fence and gates shall be carefully dismantled and neatly rolled or coiled. Posts shall be cleaned of all concrete and dirt.
In areas where new fence or relocated fence is to be installed, Contractor shall perform the removals in such a manner as to prevent the escape of any livestock and/or domestic pets, including the placement and removal of temporary fence when necessary.
350.9 Removal of Guardrail:
All guardrail to be removed, shall become the property of the contractor unless otherwise specified on the project plans.
If guardrail is designated to be removed and salvaged, the contractor shall carefully dismantle the guardrail and remove the blocks and posts in such a manner as to prevent any damage to the removed items. The guardrail, including panels, end sections, posts and all hardware shall be salvaged in accordance with the
Page 52 Rev. 08/01/16
requirements of Subsection 350.2.
350.10 Measurement and Payment:
No separate measurement or payment shall be made for removal of existing improvements unless otherwise noted on the plans or there being removal bid items. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction of the appropriate contract pay items.
Measurement for non-friable and friable asbestos cement pipe shall be by the lineal foot of pipe removed.
Payment for removal of non-friable existing asbestos cement pipe shall be at the unit bid price shown in the bidding schedule for complete removal, proper disposal and trench backfill in accordance with the specifications.
Payment for removal of friable existing asbestos cement pipe shall be a contingent item at the unit bid price shown in the bidding schedule for complete removal, proper disposal and trench backfill as determined by the Engineer in accordance with Paragraphs E and F and other provisions of the specifications.
Pay Item: 350.6.1 Removal, Disposal, and Backfill of Non-Friable ACP
Pay Item: 350.6.1a Removal, Disposal, and Backfill of Friable ACP
401 TRAFFIC CONTROL
401.1 Description: REPLACE with the following:
Traffic control during construction shall be performed in accordance with MAG Section 401 and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, US Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration, latest edition with the latest revisions, Arizona Department of Transportation Traffic Control Manual, the project plans, and as stated herein.
(A) Prior to beginning the project, Contractor shall submit for approval a Traffic Control Plan for the entire project. He must obtain approval from the Engineer for the Traffic Control Plan and Schedule prior to any construction. Contractor shall submit the Traffic Control Plan to the Director of Public Works at or before the project preconstruction conference.
(B) Written notice shall be given to the Engineer or his representative on the job 48 hours prior to any changes in detours or routes of access. The notice shall give specific details with maps showing the access to all residences and businesses affected by the project.
(C) The Police and Fire Departments shall be continually updated on access routes along and through the site during construction.
401.2 Traffic Control Devices: ADD the following:
(C) All traffic control devices required for the project shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
(D) When required to cross, obstruct, or close a street, traffic way, or sidewalk for a short duration that is approved by the Director of Public Works, the Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable bridges, detours or other approved temporary means for the accommodation of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
(E) When traffic conditions at the construction site warrant the use of certified police personnel to direct traffic, arrangements shall be made with the City of Prescott Police Department, Yavapai County, or Department of Public Safety for off-duty officers.
401.6 Measurement: DELETE in its entirety
Page 53 Rev. 08/01/16
401.7 Payment: DELETE in its entirety
ADD the following:
401.6 Measurement and Payment:
Payment for traffic control shall be at the applicable unit price bid in the Contract Documents.
1. Preparation of traffic control plan shall be inclusive of all submittals, reviews and if needed, re-submittals.
2. Flaggers shall be per hour for actual time directing traffic. It does not include travel time or time spent setting up or taking down devices.
3. In the event off-duty police personnel are required to direct traffic, the Bid Schedule includes an allowance for Certified Police Personnel for the purpose of encumbering funds to cover the cost of Certified Police Personnel. The amount of the allowance is determined by the Engineer and is not subject to individual bid pricing. All bidders shall incorporate the amount in the bid proposal and shall reflect the same in the total bid for this project.
It shall be understood that this allowance is an estimate only. The allowance shall be not used without approval of the Engineer.
Reimbursement for Certified Police Personnel shall be based on actual cost, plus an allowable markup to the prime contractor of 15%, for use of Certified Police Personnel approved by the Engineer.
Flagmen, uniformed off-duty law enforcement officers or pilot cars, with driver, will be measured by the hour for each individual, including vehicle and equipment, required to perform traffic control. When an officer is used less than 3 hours, a minimum of 3 hours will be charged. Anything over 3 hours will be measured by the hour.
Payment will be made at the contract bid price in the proposal for uniformed, off-duty law enforcement officer. If the officer is utilized in excess of 8 hours in any calendar day or in excess of 40 hours in any calendar work week, payment shall be at the rate of 1 1/2 times the contract bid price for all hours worked in excess in either of the above time periods.
4. Barricades and storage shall be at the lump sum bid and shall be inclusive of all temporary signs and devices in the traffic control plan and as required by the MUTCD and the Engineer.
5. Message boards shall be measured by each per day as determined necessary by the approved traffic control plan and the Engineer.
6. Pilot car and driver shall be per hour for actual time used as required by the approved traffic control plan and the Engineer. It does not include travel time or time spent setting up or taking down devices.
7. Incidental traffic related items shall include all other pertinent tools, equipment, devices and or work required to provide safe and effective traffic control in accordance with the approved traffic control plan, the MUTCD and the Engineer.
Pay Item: 401 Traffic Control Plan (LS)
Pay Item: 401.2a Barricades and Storage (LS)
Pay Item: 401.2b Message Boards (each per day)
Pay Item: 401.2c Incidental Traffic Related Items (LS)
Page 54 Rev. 08/01/16
Pay Item: 401.3a Flaggers (HR)
Pay Item: 401.3b Off Duty Police Officers (HR)
Pay Item: 401.3c Pilot Car and Driver (HR)
402.2 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Work under this item shall be performed per ADOT Specifications Section 704.
1. Stop Bars and Crosswalks - Work under this item shall consist of the application of thermoplastic striping material at the locations noted on the project plans. All stop bars shall be 18 inches in width unless otherwise specified. Crosswalks shall be 12 inches in width.
2. Measurement shall be in accordance with ADOT Section 704-5 (Width times Length divided by 4 inches equals LF as shown in bid schedule).
3. Pavement Markings - Pavement markings shall be in accordance with ADOT Section 704-4, ADOT 4-M 1.12 through 4-M 1.17 and as modified herein. Work under this item shall consist of the application of thermoplastic striping material at the locations noted on the project plans.
Measurement and Payment:
Measurement and payment for pavement markings shall be at the per each basis for each legend or marking installed in accordance with ADOT Section 704-5.
Pay Item: 402.2 Thermoplastic Striping
402.3 TEMPORARY STRIPING
A. Work under this item, Temporary Striping (paint) where required, shall be performed per ADOT Specifications Section 701-3.05.
Measurement and Payment:
Measurement and payment shall be per ADOT Section 708-4 and 708-5.
Pay Item: 402.3 Temporary Striping
402.4 PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Work under this item shall be performed per ADOT Specifications Section 708.
Measurement and Payment:
Measurement shall be in accordance with ADOT Section 708-4 (Width times Length divided by 4 inches equals LF as shown in bid schedule).
Payment shall be in accordance with ADOT Section 708-5.
Pay Item: 402.4 Permanent Striping
403.1 PERMANENT SIGNING, SIGN POSTS AND DELINEATORS
Work under this item shall be done in accordance with the project drawings and requirement of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), MAG Detail 131, and ADOT Signing and Marking Standards.
A. General Signing Guidelines
Page 55 Rev. 08/01/16
1. All signing shall conform to the most recent editions of the publications shown above with regard to size, color, shape and placement.
2. All signs shall be new (other than those shown to be relocated). All new and relocated signs shall be mounted on new posts with new hardware. Signs designed for installation on existing street light poles shall be mounted with new hardware.
3. Traffic sign dimensions, colors and lettering shall conform to the latest MUTCD specifications. Traffic sign size shall be standard unless otherwise specified here or on the plans.
4. All non mountable curb section signs shall be located at least two (2’) feet from the curb face to the nearest edge of the sign. All other roadways signs shall be mounted from six (6’) feet to twelve (12’) feet from the edge of the pavement to the nearest edge of the sign, unless otherwise noted in the sign summary table or on the plans.
5. Roadways with guardrail signs shall be located at least six (6’) feet from the face of the guard rail to the nearest edge of the sign, unless otherwise noted in the sign summary table or on the plans.
6. Sign location shall be coordinated with landscaping plans to ensure sign visibility per AASHTO standards.
7. Signs shall be mounted on street light poles whenever feasible.
8. All signs installed in areas where parking or pedestrian movements occur shall typically be erected at a height of seven (7’) feet above the normal edge of pavement or sidewalk to the bottom of the sign or to the lowest sign in a multiple sign installation assembly with the following exceptions:
a. The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be up to two (2’) feet less than the height specified above.
b. If the bottom of a secondary sign that is mounted below another sign is mounted lower than 7 feet above a pedestrian sidewalk or pathway, the secondary sign shall not project more than four (4”) inches into the pedestrian facility.
c. Object markers shall be installed at least four (4’) feet above the normal edge of pavement.
9. All R1-1 “STOP” signs and pedestrian warning signs shall be reflective with all reflective sheeting material to be diamond grade.
10. All other signs are to be reflective with all reflective sheeting material to be high intensity prismatic meeting or exceeding ASTM 4956-04.
11. Sign blanks shall be 5052-H38 alloy treated aluminum with Alodine 1200 conversion coating, 0.080” thick with rounded corners.
12. Stop signs are to be shown at all local street intersections within a subdivision unless an engineering study shows that no control or yield control is warranted. Stop signs shall be designed and shown at all collector and non signalized arterial street intersections.
13. Stop signs and Yield signs shall be a minimum of thirty (30”) inches in width. When specified by the City Traffic Engineer thirty-six (36”) inch and/or forty-eight (48”) inch signs may be required on major collectors and arterial streets.
B. SIGN POSTS
1. Sign posts shall conform to the COP Standard Detail 821P.
2. For new construction the Telspar, Uni-strut or approved equal twelve gauge, galvanized steel, four (4) sided perforated square tubing is required. Two (2”) inch tubing shall be used for smaller signs
Page 56 Rev. 08/01/16
while two and one-half (2½”) inch tubing shall be used for the larger signs.
3. The post shall be tall enough to provide the minimum clearances specified in section A (8).
4. The base and sleeve system for the sign shall be anchored in a minimum of a twenty-four (24”) inch deep, twelve (12”) inch diameter foundation of concrete. The base shall have a breakaway slip base system. The exposed post from the base shall be four (4”) inches to six (6”) inches high.
5. Signs over forty-eight (48”) inches wide shall be mounted on two (2), two and one-half (2½”) inch posts with a horizontal support frame.
6. All station locations are approximate. The Contractor shall verify actual sign locations with the Engineer prior to the installation of all signs.
7. The Contractor shall verify post lengths and elevations prior to installation.
Measurement and Payment:
Measurement and payment shall be the unit price per each for posts and delineators and per square foot for sign panels, complete and in place.
Pay Item: 403.1a Sign Posts and Delineators
Pay Item: 403.1b Sign Panels
404 LOOP DETECTORS
A. Loop detectors shall be installed in base course of asphalt concrete pavement and conform to ADOT Specs Section 735 and 732-2.01, ADOT Traffic Signal and Lighting Standard Drawings (1985) 7-1. All loop detectors shall be installed per T.S. 7-1 Detail 2. Installation shall include the home runs and installation of loop wiring into the existing signal cabinet. The hardwiring in the cabinet will be accomplished by City forces.
B. Prior to bidding the Contractor shall verify the location and layout of the existing detector loops and appurtenant home runs to ensure that home runs are re-established in their original configuration. Loop detectors shall be centered in lanes. Contractor shall verify loop layout with project inspector prior to installation.
Measurement and Payment:
Payment shall be made on a per each installed basis.
Pay Item: 404 Quadrapole Loop Detectors, Complete
405 MONUMENTS:
405.1 Description: ADD the following:
A. All efforts shall be made to protect survey monuments in hand holes from damage. Monuments shall be located and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor at the Contractors’ expense if damaged, or where noted on plans.
405.4 Installation: ADD the following:
A. Existing property corner monuments disturbed or covered in the course of the work shall be located and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor or under the direct supervision of a Registered Land Surveyor. Monuments set shall be in accordance with Arizona Revised Statutes and Arizona Boundary Survey Minimum Standards.
Page 57 Rev. 08/01/16
B. Survey monuments shall be installed in accordance with Quad City Standard Detail 120Q, unless otherwise noted. Monuments shall be placed as shown on the plans.
405.2 Materials: REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
Concrete shall be Class AA.
405.5 Payment: ADD the following:
No separate payment shall be made for resetting property monuments. This work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction or installation of the appropriate contract pay items.
Payment for survey monuments shall be based on a per each unit complete in place.
Pay Item: 405 Survey Monument
430 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTING
430.3.2 Seeding:
REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
430.3.2 Seeding (Hydraulic):
A. Seeding consists of furnishing and applying chemical fertilizer; furnishing and planting seed and furnishing, applying and affixing mulch. The areas to be seeded are disturbed or un-vegetated areas. Slopes are required to be seeded immediately upon completion; coordination with grading operations will be required.
Application rates of seed as specified are for Pure Live Seed (PLS). PLS is determined by multiplying the sum of the germination and hard or dormant seed by purity. Weed content of seed shall not exceed 0.5 percent. No substitution of species, strain or origin of seed will be allowed unless evidence is submitted in writing by the Contractor to the Engineer showing that the specified materials are not reasonably available during the contract period. The substitution of species, strains or origins shall be made only with the written approval of the Engineer, prior to making said substitution.
The seed shall be delivered to the project site in standard, sealed, undamaged containers. Each container shall be labeled in accordance with Arizona Revised Statues and the U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations under the Federal Seed Act. Labels shall indicate the variety or strain of seed, the percentage of germination, purity and weed content, and the date of analysis, which shall not be more than 9 months prior to the delivery date.
B. Seed Mix
Rate/Acre-PLS Botanical Name Common Name Seed/ Lb. (Pure Live Seed)
Agropyron dasystachym Thickspike Wheatgrass 154,000 3.0 Bouteloua gracilis Blue Gramma 825,000 2.0 Koeleria crisata Prairie Junegrass 825,000 1.0 Mulenbergia wrightii Spike Muhly 1,000,000 1.5 Festuca arizonica Arizona Fescue 500,000 2.0 Sitnian hystrix Squirrel Tail 192,000 4.0 Sporobolus cryptandrus Sand Dropseed 5,298,000 0.75
C. Seed Supply Agreement:
Page 58 Rev. 08/01/16
The required species may be in short supply during this project. Therefore, the Contractor shall enter a contractual agreement with a seed collector/supplier that verifies that sufficient supply of specified plant materials will be available on or immediately prior to the seeding dates. This requirement shall be fulfilled within 45 days following the preconstruction conference in order to allow sufficient time for seed collection. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Engineer verifying that the required species are available and secured for the project. The collection contractor shall test the seed for purity and viability and hold the seed in a manner which maintains its’ viability. The Contractor shall submit purity and viability test results to the Engineer for approval prior to the initiation of seeding operations. If it is required to be held for more than a year from initial testing the seed shall be tested again for viability. The Contractor shall compensate the seed supplier a percentage of the seed cost to hold seed material and for the seed tests as identified in Basis for Payment.
D. General:
The slurry for the hydroseed process shall be as follows:
SLURRY MIX RATE
Hydrofiber: Silva, Conwed, or Spray mulch 800 lbs./acre x-100 wood fiber, or equivalent Tackifier: 80 lbs. active ingred./acre Starter fertilizer: Ammonium Phosphate 16-20-0 200 lbs./acre Seed mix: As Specified Soil conditioner 1000 lbs./acre
The seed shall be applied within 30 minutes after being combined with the slurry mix.
INGREDIENTS FOR SLURRY APPLICATION PERCENTAGES (MINIMUM)
Nitrogen 5 Phosphoric Acid 3 Water soluble Potash 1 Humas 50 Humic Acids 15 Soluble Metallic Iron 1
E. Wood Cellulose Fibers:
Wood fiber mulch shall consist of a specially prepared wood fiber processed to contain no growth germination inhibiting factors. The mulch shall be virgin wood and be manufactured and processed so the fibers will remain in uniform suspension in water under agitation to form a homogenous slurry. The mulch shall have a pH range between 4.5 to 6.5.
When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the material will form a blotter-like cover impregnated uniformly with seed. The cover will allow the absorption of moisture and allow rainfall to percolate to the underlying area.
F. Tacking Agent:
Binder shall be free flowing, non-corrosive powder produced from natural plant gum marketed under M-Binder, M145 Binder, AZ-TAC or approved equal. It shall have gelling properties to inhibit the tendency of water and fiber to move downhill as they are sprayed on steep slopes.
G. Construction Requirements:
Page 59 Rev. 08/01/16
1. General:
The Engineer will regularly observe the weighing of seed, mixing of slurry mix, and application of seed.
2. Seeding:
Seeding shall be done immediately following the final grading or disking of each cut slope and each fill slope. The soil surface shall be loose. The Contractor will be required to mobilize frequently to accomplish this goal. No seeding shall be carried out under wind conditions exceeding 5 m.p.h. Scheduling of seeding mobilization will be coordinated with the Engineer at the weekly construction meetings. In no case shall a decision by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from the requirement of seeding prior to measurable rainfall. If measurable rain falls prior to seeding, or if the surface of the graded area has formed a crust or slightly hardened surface, the Contractor shall be responsible for ripping, blading or loosening the ground surface, or otherwise repairing and/or preparing the affected areas for seed, after they adequately dry out and prior to seeding, at no cost to the Owner. The use of specialized equipment or manual methods may be required to prepare the surface for seeding, if seeding is not accomplished immediately after grading or disking.
Seed is to be accomplished during the window of June 1 to July 15 and November 1 to January 30. These windows are to allow expected seasonal rains to start germination process.
All areas disturbed by construction are to be seeded. This may be more area than shown on the plans. All areas are to be approved by Engineer. The Contractor shall coordinate seeding operations with slope construction so that the tops of cuts and toes of fills can be reached with hydroseed equipment.
Hoses may be used where heavy equipment cannot access.
3. Tillage:
All slopes steeper than 3:1 shall either have a loose, friable soil depth of 2" or more or be tilled a minimum of 4" in depth as they are constructed.
Tillage shall be accomplished with a ripper bar, chisel plow or harrow tool or with other equipment which will provide thorough soil cultivation.
Tillage shall be performed long the contour. The slopes behind guardrail, and in the ditch line in cut shall be left with roughened surface to aid in water absorption. Seeded areas which are not behind guardrail or between the ditch line and the roadway on a cut shall be left in a Firm surface free of foreign material that would interfere in the seeding operation.
No work shall be done when the moisture content of the soil is unfavorable or the ground is otherwise in a condition not conducive to tillage.
Planting:
The Contractor shall submit a batch (tank) mix for the Engineer’s approval prior to mixing any seed/mulch slurry. Batch mixing and coverage will be monitored throughout seeding operations. The Contractor is to coordinate monitoring with the Engineer in advance of mixing.
After the tillage is complete and accepted by the Engineer, seed shall be planted by slurry mix (cut slopes steeper than 3:1).
All areas to be seeded shall have a starter fertilizer of ammonium phosphate 16-20-0 applied at a rate of 200 pounds per acre and soil condition at the rate of 1,000 pounds per acre.
Any material sprayed on non-designated areas shall be immediately removed by the Contractor at his expense. Non-designated areas include pavement, guardrails, signs, plants and existing vegetation.
Page 60 Rev. 08/01/16
Anchorage by Tacking:
Mulch shall be anchored by tacking using a slurry consisting of a minimum of 150 pounds of binder, 400 pounds of wood fiber mulch and 700 gallons of water per acre.
Preservation of Seeded Areas:
Any material sprayed on non-designated areas shall be immediately removed by the Contractor at his expense. Non-designated areas include pavement, guard rails, signs, plants, and existing vegetation.
Warranty:
The Contractor shall guarantee that 75% of the applied tackifier remains in place for a period of 30 days after acceptance of the seeding application. Any areas that have less than 75% of the tackifier remaining shall be reseeded, re-mulched and re-tacked at the Contractor’s expense.
Areas that require reseeding and re-mulching under the warranty shall be done at no additional cost to the City of Prescott. The 30 day period(s) shall be within the allotted contract time.
Measurement and Payment:
Seeding will be measured by the acre, to the nearest tenth acre, measured along the ground surface for the areas which have been plated and mulched, as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor may be reimbursed a partial payment based on the invoice amount for the cost to hold and test the seed in conformance with the Seed Supply Agreement.
The accepted quantities of seeding, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract price per acre for the full performance of the work herein described, which price shall be full compensation for the work completed including all equipment, labor and materials required.
Pay Item: 430.3.2 Seeding (Hydraulic)
ADD the following Section:
431 REMOVE AND REPLACE LANDSCAPE ROCK
Landscaping shall be protected and restored in accordance with Section 107.9. Existing landscaping rock shall be removed, stockpiled, and replaced in its original position as closely as possible.
Measurement and Payment:
Payment shall be per lump sum amount.
Pay Item: 431 Remove and Replace Landscape Rock
505 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
505.1.1 Minor Structures: REPLACE with the following:
Concrete structures such as manholes, catch basins, median barriers, headwalls, cattle guards, and other miscellaneous structures as defined by the Engineer are hereby defined as Minor Structures. Minor structures shall be precast units. MAG Type D Catch Basins shall be cast-in-place. Cattle guards, median barriers, and headwalls, at the option of the Contractor, may be either constructed of cast-in-place concrete, or furnished as precast units. Precast units shall be fabricated in accordance with shop drawings submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of Section 105.2. All structures not defined as Minor Structures shall be classified as Major Structures.
Page 61 Rev. 08/01/16
505.1.1A CONCRETE DRAINAGE OUTLET/STRUCTURE
The work consists of constructing a concrete drainage outlet(s) and structure(s) as designated on the project drawings in accordance with MAG Specifications Sections 505, and 725 and as modified herein. All cast-in-place concrete shall be class “AA” 4,000 psi. Sub-grade and base materials under the structure shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T-99. No additional payment will be made for aggregate base materials required under concrete structures. The base material shall be considered incidental to the construction of this item and provided for in the unit price for the work. Measurement and payment under this item shall be to the nearest square foot complete in place in accordance with the respective detail for flat work, and per each unit installed for structures.
505.1.1B CONCRETE HEADWALL
Work under this item shall be in accordance with MAG Specifications Sections 505, 725, 726 and 727; MAG Standard Details 501-1 and 501-2; and the project drawings. Concrete shall be Class AA, 4,000 psi. Payment shall be made per each headwall installed complete in accordance with the respective detail.
505.1.1C CONCRETE CATCH BASIN
Work under this item shall be in accordance with MAG Standard Details 530 through 540-2, MAG Specifications Sections 505 and 725 and above mentioned specifications for Portland Cement Concrete. All grates shall be bicycle safe type. Measurement and payment under this item shall be per each catch basin complete in place in accordance with the respective detail, to include grates.
505.1.1D SCUPPER
Work under this item shall be in accordance with MAG Standard Detail 203 and 206. Concrete shall be Class AA, 4,000 psi. Measurement and payment under this item shall be per each scupper installed complete in place in accordance with the respective detail.
505.1.1E CONCRETE RETAINING WALL
Work under this item shall be in accordance with the project drawings. Measurement and payment under this item shall be to the nearest square foot of the retaining wall measured from the top of the footing to the top of the wall complete in place in accordance with the respective detail.
505.6.2 Adverse Weather Concreting: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Adverse weather concreting shall be in accordance with Section 725.
505.12 Payment: Add the following:
Pay Item: 505.1.1A Concrete Drainage/Outlet Structure
Pay Item: 505.1.1B Concrete Headwall
Pay Item: 505.1.1C Concrete Catch Basin
Pay Item: 505.1.1D Scupper
Pay Item: 505.1.1E Concrete Retaining Wall
601 TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
601.1 Description: ADD the following:
A. Unless specifically identified, no investigation of subsurface soil conditions for water or sewer main
Page 62 Rev. 08/01/16
installation has been made for project limits.
B. Excavation, backfilling and compaction shall be in accordance with this Section and COP Standard Details as noted.
C. All water encountered during the work shall be disposed of by the Contractor in a manner such that it will not damage public or private property or create a public nuisance or health problem. The costs of furnishing pumps, pipes, special bedding, and over excavation as required to provide a stable foundation, and other equipment and materials shall be incidental to the work in accordance with Section 200.1 of these specifications.
601.2.3 Trench Grade: REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
All construction staking shall be in accordance with Specification Section 105.8.
REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
For all pipe, the Contractor shall excavate for and provide an initial granular bedding at least 6 inches thick. This bedding material shall be placed at a uniform density with minimum compaction and fine graded as specified below.
601.2.5 Over Excavation: REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
Unauthorized excavation below the specified grade line shall be refilled at the Contractor's expense with bedding material compacted to a uniform density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T-99 and T-191 or ASTMD6938. When AASHTO T-99, method A or B, and T-191 are used for density determination, ARIZ 227c will be used for rock correction.
ADD the following Section:
601.2.11 ROCK EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY AND/OR DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION
A. Definition of Rock.
When rock is encountered, it shall be stripped of earth and shale, and the Engineer notified in order that he may measure or cross-section the same. In lieu of stripping the earth overburden prior to excavation/blasting, the Engineer and the Contractor may mutually agree on a method to define the vertical limits of rock. Any rock excavated before such measurement or agreement is made, will not be estimated, allowed, or paid for. Rock excavation shall be defined to include: all hard, solid rock in ledges; bedded deposits and unstratified masses; all natural conglomerate deposits so firmly cemented as to present all the characteristics of solid rock; and masonry or concrete structures not shown on the plans. Shales, hard pan, masonry and concrete rubble boulders less than one cubic yard which are not a part of or attached to substrata of rock, shall not be considered rock excavation. Additionally, material to be considered "rock" shall be of such hardness that it cannot be excavated using hydraulic backhoe with combined breakout force, for bucket and stick cylinders, of at least 100,000 pounds.
B. Blasting
1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the type of material he will encounter and whether blasting will be necessary.
2. Blasting shall be done only by experienced, qualified blasters. Blasting shall be done in accordance with the recommendations for best practice in Section 9 of the AGC Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction and in accordance with the recommendations for best practices of the Institute of Makers of Explosives. Also, all blasting must comply with the requirements of the Division of Industrial Safety and OSHA and all other federal, state and local ordinances.
3. When work requires blasting or explosive conditions, precautions shall be taken to protect life and
Page 63 Rev. 08/01/16
property, and give proper warning to persons who may be in vicinity of work before blast is set off.
4. Blasting shall be performed in such a manner that no damage will result to any building, structure, pipeline, or facility on or off the site of work, above or below ground. Any damage suffered as a result of blasting shall be immediately settled, including repair or replacement.
5. Blasting shall be done in such a manner that the earth is not loosened or disturbed below the footing or foundation of any proposed structure. Loosened material below footings or foundations shall be replaced with Class C concrete.
6. The stemming of each hole or cover over explosive shall be sufficient to prevent surface blast wave, but in no case less than three (3) feet six (6) inches. Multiple holes shall be shot using millisecond delays.
7. The Contractor shall enlist the services of an experienced explosives engineer for advice on blasting methods and for the protection of existing structures or facilities.
8. Blasting procedures shall comply with all rules and regulations as specified and determined by the Fire Marshall or the Public Works Director of Prescott.
601.4.2 Bedding: REPLACE the first two paragraphs with the following:
Bedding shall be a minimum of six inches and shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 2-01P for paved areas and COP Standard Detail 2-02P for unpaved areas. Bedding/shade material shall be of granular consistency such as sand or crushed aggregates conforming to the following gradation and plasticity requirements:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing By Weight
1" 100
No. 200 < 25
PI 10 Max.
Volcanic cinders or glass materials are not acceptable.
Use of open graded rock i.e., 3/8" pea gravel or 3/4" rock must be approved by the engineer prior to placement and will be considered only in special circumstances.
Water consolidation by any means shall not be permitted.
Bedding and shading material shall not be considered “corrosive” or “aggressive” soil per the definitions in AWWA (including C105), DIPRA and other similar standards and industry accepted documents. The CONTRACTOR shall submit material certification documents from the bedding and shading material supplier indicating that the bedding and shading material to be provided is not considered “corrosive” or ”aggressive” soil to ferrous metals, and shall include the pH, resistivity, oxidation/reduction, and sulfide values of the material within the certification package. Upon delivery of the material, the Contractor’s geotechnical engineer shall provide quality control testing by testing samples of the bedding/shading material for corrosivity. Contractor’s geotechnical engineer shall provide a letter sealed by a registered professional engineer, licensed in the state of Arizona, that the bedding/shading material is not corrosive to ferrous metals as defined by AWWA C105. If the material is found to be corrosive, the Contractor must install polyethylene encasement per Section 610.6 at no additional cost to the City. Testing shall occur a minimum of every 1,000 linear feet of pipe installed.
Page 64 Rev. 08/01/16
601.4.3 Backfill: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Backfill material shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 200Q-1 for paved areas and COP Standard Detail 200Q-1 for unpaved areas. In paved areas, backfill from 1-foot above the pipe to the bottom of the base course shall be non-shrink slurry backfill compacted in 1-foot lifts. In unpaved areas, backfill from 12-inches above the pipe to 6-inches below existing grade shall be minus 3-inch native material similar in nature to material existing prior to excavation.
Trench backfill quality control testing frequency shall be one per soil type for Proctor Density testing and one per 1-foot vertical lift per 200 linear feet of trench.
601.4.4 Compaction Densities: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
All backfill material with the exception of non-shrink slurry backfill shall be compacted to 95% maximum dry density per ASTM D-698.
601.4.5 Compaction Methods: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Water consolidation by any means shall not be permitted.
601.7 Payment: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
ADD the following Section:
601.7 Measurement:
No separate measurement or payment shall be made for trench excavation, backfilling, compaction, or placement of temporary pavement. This work shall be included in the respective unit bid price for water, sewer, or storm main and lateral construction.
Rock excavation within the roadway excavation limits shall not be measured separately. It will be included in Roadway Excavation. No separate payment will be made for roadway rock excavation. It shall be combined as one item under roadway excavation.
Rock Excavation within structural excavation limits shall not be measured separately. It will be considered incidental and shall be included in the appropriate bid item.
Rock excavation within trenches shall be measured in accordance with the following:
a. Width of trench for rock excavation shall be based on pipe outside diameter plus 24 inches.
b. Depth for rock excavation shall be actual depth from top of rock to bottom of rock, or to bottom of normal bedding section, whichever depth occurs first.
601.8 Payment:
Payment for rock trenching shall be at the unit price bid per cubic yard which shall include the cost of blasting, excavation, removal, hauling and disposal.
Pay Item: 601.2.11 Rock Removal (trench)
610 WATER MAIN CONSTRUCTION
610.1 Description: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Water main construction shall be in accordance with all applicable standard specifications and COP Standard Details.
610.3 Materials REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
Page 65 Rev. 08/01/16
(A) Water Main piping shall be slip joint Class 350 ductile iron unless otherwise noted on the project plans, in accordance with MAG Section 610 and 750. Trace wire per COP Standard Detail 3-19P shall be required for all water main installations. Water main piping shall be furnished new in full lengths with manufacturer, class rating, and all other applicable information clearly marked on the barrel. Water main piping for 2-inch shall be copper in accordance with MAG Section 754 and encased in polyethylene protective wrapping in accordance with MAG Section 610.6.
REPLACE the third paragraph with the following:
Ductile iron water pipe and fittings - Section 750. Concrete pressure pipe-steel cylinder type - Section 758.
ADD the following:
(C) All ductile iron water main and fittings shall be encased in polyethylene protective wrapping in accordance with MAG Section 610.6 where called for on the plans or after contractor testing of bedding and shading material is found to be corrosive in accordance with AWWA C105.
All copper and brass water main and fittings shall be encased in polyethylene protective wrapping in accordance with MAG Section 610.6.
(D) All water mains shall have NSF-PW seal clearly marked on each barrel and installed with trace wire in accordance with COP Standard Detail 319Q-1.
(E) Thrust restraint shall generally be accomplished through the use of restrained joints in lieu of thrust blocking. The preferred joint restraint system shall be "Field-Lok" gasket or approved equal except that vertical deflections, tees, valves and bends shall be restrained utilizing Mega-Lug, as manufactured by Ebba Iron, or equal.
(F) Required minimum lengths of joint restraint shall be per MAG Standard Detail 303. In locations where lines perpendicular to main lines are shown as restrained, the main line piping shall be restrained for a minimum of 10 feet or one joint (whichever is greater) each side of the main line “Tee”. Concrete thrust blocking will be required at connections to existing lines at the locations noted on the plans. Thrust blocks placed at these connections shall be in conformance with MAG Details and shall be adequately braced to allow system operation during curing of the concrete thrust blocks. Heavy plastic sheeting shall be used to wrap fittings to be restrained with thrust blocks to prevent covering with concrete on nuts and threading on fittings.
(G) All lateral water main connecting piping, valves and fittings shall be constructed using restrained joints from the main line “Tee” to the connection point at the existing water main at the locations shown on the plans.
(H) Prior to ordering of materials and scheduling connections to existing water mains and services, the contractor shall complete investigations to verify the size, type and location of the existing water mains and services.
(I) COP Technical Specifications for “Air Release Valves” is expanded to include Combination Air Release-Vacuum Breaker valves at the locations shown on the plans constructed as shown in Detail 317Q-1.
(J) Payment for water main shall be at the unit price in the bidding schedule and shall include all connections, fittings, joints, flanges, thrust restraint and incidentals unless specifically itemized in the bidding schedule.
610.4 Construction Methods: REPLACE the first five paragraphs with the following:
All water mains shall have a minimum cover of 48 inches over the top of the pipe.
Cover for water mains will be measured from existing or proposed finished grade of pavement or from
Page 66 Rev. 08/01/16
natural ground, whichever is deeper.
No water main shall be deflected, either vertically or horizontally, in excess of 80% of the manufacturers’ recommendation for the pipe or coupling, without the appropriate use of bends or offsets.
REPLACE the twelfth (12th) paragraph with the following:
All corporation stops used for testing and chlorination shall be removed and a stainless steel full circle repair clamps shall be installed.
DELETE the fifteenth (15th) paragraph in its entirety.
ADD the following:
(C) The existing water main shall not be taken out of service prior to completion and ADEQ Approval to Operate the replacement water main and connection of all water services and fire hydrants to the replacement system.
(D) The existing water system shall not be taken out of service at any time without the approval of the Engineer. With the approval of the Engineer, the existing water main may be taken out of service for limited periods to facilitate project construction. City water Operations shall be contacted a minimum of 48 hours prior to a planned water service disruption.
(E) The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a plan for each connection to the existing system which demonstrates the ability to complete all work within the allowed period.
(F) All temporary connections and/or elements which must be placed in service prior to full system disinfection, testing and approval shall be disinfected in accordance with Paragraph 4.7 of AWWA C651 after approval of the engineer.
(G) All existing water service connections shall be replaced in accordance with the provisions of the COP Technical Specifications for “Water Service Replacement”.
610.5 Separation:
610.5.1 General: ADD the following:
Concrete encased water mains that cross storm drains and/or other dry utilities which clear the crossed line by less than 12 inches shall incorporate a 6” sand pad to break the frictional contact.
610.9 FIRE HYDRANTS
ADD the following:
(A) Hydrant installation shall be in accordance with COP Standard Details 360Q, 362Q, 363Q and 364Q, and as specified on the project plans. Hydrants shall be Waterous, Mueller, East Jordan, or as approved by the Engineer.
(B) All ductile iron water pipe used in fire hydrant installation shall be Class 350.
(C) All new fire hydrants and connecting piping shall be constructed using restrained joints from the main line “Tee” to the hydrant.
(D) Payment for hydrant installation shall be at the unit price in the bidding schedule and shall include the hydrant, piping, valve, box and cover, and all appurtenant fittings, as noted for a complete assembly.
610.11 METER SERVICE CONNECTIONS
REPLACE 610.11(A) with the following:
Page 67 Rev. 08/01/16
A. Type K soft copper pipe or tubing shall be used except as otherwise called for on the plans.
REPLACE 610.11(B) with the following:
B. When the existing main is not abandoned and the existing meter is to be connected to the new line, the corporation stop and saddle shall be removed and a stainless steel full circle repair clamp shall be installed.
ADD the following:
(E) Water Service Connection
1) New Water Service shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 316P. All service piping and fittings from main tap to meter box shall be encased in polyethylene protective wrapping in accordance with MAG Section 610.6. Existing water service shall be abandoned in place and existing meter box and cover shall be salvaged and delivered to the COP Maintenance Yard and placed as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply all necessary materials for new water service including service saddle, corporation stops, piping, meter yoke, boxes and covers, plus all appurtenant fittings to connect to customers existing service line. The Contractor shall maintain a minimum four (4) feet of cover material over water service and set new box and yoke as indicated on plans.
2) The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to maintain water service. Customers affected by water disruption due to water service installation/connection shall be notified by written flyer delivered by the Contractor a minimum of 24 hours in advance of scheduled water service disruption. The Contractor shall not disconnect or disrupt water service until new water main and services pass hydrostatic and disinfection tests and is accepted by the Engineer. Customers shall not be without water service for a total time period greater than 4 hours. The Contractor shall supply bottled potable water and temporary water service meeting all state health requirements for periods of water service disruption exceeding 4 hours. No separate payment will be made for water service maintenance or Contractor written notification of water service disruption.
3) No separate measurement or payment will be made for adjustment of new water meter boxes to finished grade. This work is considered as incidental to the construction of the water service replacement.
4) The Contractor shall install water service line from the main to the new water meter location and continue to a point after the existing water meter location. This point of connection shall be a maximum of ten feet (10’) from the existing meter location. Contractor shall remove existing valves, pressure regulators, nipples, connectors, etc. and replace per specifications. All private service lines shall be Type “K” copper in accordance with MAG Section 754 and encased in polyethylene protective wrapping in accordance with MAG 610.6. The Contractor shall maintain a minimum of four ( 4) feet of cover material, including ditch inverts, over new private water service line and utilize existing in-situ material for backfill. The Contractor shall supply all necessary material for new private water service installation including a curb stop, plus an approved type pressure regulator, in an accessible box per COP Standard Detail 316P at the new meter box location and all appurtenant fittings to connect to existing service line.
5) The Contractor shall remove the existing water meter and reinstall in the new yoke at the new meter box location with all appurtenant fittings and adapters. The City shall supply the Contractor with new meters for use in new locations that were not previously served or there is no existing meter to remove.
6) The Customer Box called out in Standard Detail 316P for the curb stop and pressure regulator on the customer side of the meter box shall be minimum #1 box, and the curb stop, regulator, box and lid
Page 68 Rev. 08/01/16
shall be provided and installed by the Contractor.
7) The Contractor shall be required to distribute written notices approved by the Engineer to all customers 24 hours in advance of proposed private service line reconnection work.
8) Existing improvements disturbed by the Contractor shall be restored in “like kind” to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No extra payment will be made for restoring existing improvements in “like kind” to include concrete walkways, retaining walls, landscape improvements, etc.
9) It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to review existing water meter location and points of private service line reconnection locations and ascertain all work including existing improvement restoration costs to perform the private service line reconnection work as specified. Costs associated for private service line reconnection work shall be at the appropriate unit bid price in the bidding schedule and shall include private service line piping, curb stop and pressure regulator, plus all appurtenant fittings and existing improvement restoration work as specified.
10) The pressure regulators shall be set at 65psi. The Contractor shall bench-test or otherwise provide written verification from the supplier prior to installation that the pressure regulators have been set at the required psi.
11) Payment for new water service and reconnection shall be at the appropriate unit bid price shown in the bidding schedule and shall include service saddle, corporation stops, curb stops, piping, meter yoke, adapters, boxes, pressure regulator, plus all appurtenant fittings for complete assembly for connection to existing service line. Contractor to supply and install all fittings necessary to install meter into new yoke.
(F) Commercial Water Service (Greater than 2”)
1) The Contractor shall install water service line from the main to the new water meter location and continue to a point after the existing water meter location. This point of connection shall be a maximum of ten feet (10’) from the existing meter location. Contractor to furnish and install gate valve and Pressure Regulating Valve (PRV) after meter vault. PRV shall be installed in accordance with the International Building Code as adopted by the City of Prescott. All commercial service lines shall be a minimum of 4” Class 350 Ductile Iron Pipe in accordance with Section 610. The Contractor shall maintain a minimum of four (4) feet of cover material over new water service line and may utilize existing in-situ material for backfill provided it meets the project specification. The Contractor shall supply all necessary material for commercial water service installation including a customer shutoff valve and PRV, in an accessible vault per COP Standard Detail 321Q at the new meter vault location and include all appurtenant fittings to connect to existing service line.
2) The Contractor shall be required to distribute written notices approved by the Engineer to all customers 24 hours in advance of proposed private service line reconnection work.
3) Existing improvements disturbed by the Contractor shall be restored in “like-kind” to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No extra payment will be made for restoring existing improvements in “like-kind” to include concrete walkways, retaining walls, landscape improvements, etc. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to review existing water meter location and points of service line connection locations and ascertain all work including existing improvement restoration costs to perform the service line connection work as specified.
4) Measurement and Payment for commercial water service shall be at the appropriate unit bid price in the bidding schedule and shall include piping, customer shutoff valve, PRV and vault, including all appurtenant fittings and existing improvement restoration work as required.
(G) Traffic Rated Meter Box
Page 69 Rev. 08/01/16
1) Meter boxes located within traffic areas shall be Christy model B1324 by Christy Concrete Products or approved equal.
2) Pre-cast concrete meter boxes shall have H-20 loading and be constructed of high density reinforced concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 4,000psi. Covers to be furnished with the boxes shall be a steel checker plate, H-20 loading, and lid.
610.14 Blocking: REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
All pipe lines, valves and fittings shall be restrained using mechanical joints, mechanical joint restraints, or gasket joint restraints in accordance with standard details.
610.15 TESTING
REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
Water lines, including all fittings and connections to the water mains shall be tested for water tightness by subjecting each section to hydrostatic testing in accordance with applicable provisions of AWWA C-600, except as modified below, and the City Of Prescott Water Line Testing and Acceptance Procedures, and shall consist of pressure testing and allowance testing.
Testing shall be performed by the Contractor and shall be witnessed by the Engineer for approval.
Payment for testing of water mains shall be included in the unit bid price for water main construction
610.16 Disinfection Water Lines: REPLACE with the following:
Water main and services shall be disinfected in accordance with MAG Section 611 and the City Of Prescott Water Line Testing and Acceptance Procedures. The Owner or his representative shall perform the sampling for bacteriological and residual chlorine testing. The Contractor shall notify the Owner 24 hours in advance to coordinate disinfection testing.
All valves in the lines being disinfected shall be opened and closed several times during the 24 hour period of disinfection.
Payment for disinfection of water mains shall be included in the unit bid price for water main construction
610.19 Measurement and Payment: ADD the following:
Pay Item: 610 Water Main
Pay Item: 610.9 Fire Hydrant Assembly
Pay Item: 610.11.E Water Service Connection
Pay Item: 610.11.F Commercial Water Service
Pay Item: 610.11.G Traffic Rated Concrete Meter Box
612 TEMPORARY WATER MAINS (FLY LINES)
612.1 Description: ADD the following:
This section describes the requirements and procedures for the installation, testing and maintenance of temporary water main systems where required to maintain service to customers during the shutdown or removal of existing City water mains for new construction. All existing water services shall be moved to the temporary main so that customer service interruptions are avoided.
A. Materials:
Page 70 Rev. 08/01/16
All pipe valves, fittings, hose and connections furnished by the Contractor shall be of good quality, clean, meet NSF61 requirements for potable water. The City shall be the final arbiter if any questions arise regarding the suitability of any materials to meet these criteria. Previously used pipe that has been used in sanitary sewer, force main or effluent applications is specifically NOT allowed, regardless of any disinfection procedures or results submitted.
Temporary mains 6” or greater shall be constructed of HDPE solid wall pipe conforming to AWWA C906 with a minimum DR ration based on 150 psi. Higher rated pipe may be required based on analysis of the City water system for the construction area.
Temporary mains less than 4” may be constructed of either HDPE or PVC with the appropriate pressure rating for system and testing pressures.
B. Installation and Protection
The temporary line may be installed above grade as necessary to facilitate the construction of new waterline. The temporary pipe shall be installed in such a manner that it will not present a hazard to vehicle traffic or pedestrians and will not interfere with access to homes, businesses and driveways along its route. Cover plates shall be installed as necessary. Where installed at driveway or street crossings the line shall be protected from traffic loads and displacement. During seasons with potential for freezing the lines shall be insulated to the degree necessary to prevent damage to the line or fittings and to maintain service.
Valves shall be installed at the beginning and end of the temporary line and at three hundred foot (300’) intervals, or as directed by the City. The use of pressure reducing valves for individual service connections may be required as directed by the City.
All temporary piping, fittings and service connections shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the Contractor for the duration of the construction. The Contractor shall make connections to a water source designated by the City or as shown on the plans. Alternative connection points may be considered by the City.
C. Testing
1. Disinfection and Testing
The contractor shall be responsible to disinfect all pipe, connections and fittings in accordance with Section 615.15 of the City of Prescott Technical Specifications. Disinfection of the line, if not connected to the City’s existing system at either end, may be treated as a closed vessel for purposes of the disinfection period and combined with the pressure test. If the temporary line is connected to the City’s existing system the line shall be disinfected, flushed and then pressure tested after a bacteriological sample is obtained and tested.
2. Pressure Testing
All temporary water mains shall be pressure tested to ensure integrity of the system supplying water to the City’s customers. Test pressure shall be a minimum of 50 psi over normal system operating pressure for the area served by the temporary line and shall be maintained for two hours. Pressure test results should be provided to the City’s Public Works Inspector responsible for the project. A single length of HDPE line with no joints will not require a pressure test.
3. Bacteriological Testing
Following disinfection, pressure testing and flushing of the temporary line the contractor shall obtain water samples from the line and submit to a certified laboratory for bacteriological testing. Results shall be provided to the City’s Public Works Inspector responsible for the project. City’s Utility
Page 71 Rev. 08/01/16
Engineer will review test results prior to connection of existing customers to the temporary line.
D. Maintenance and Repairs
1. Maintenance
Following acceptance of the temporary system as a potable system by the City, the Contractor shall maintain continuous service through the temporary piping to all customers normally served both directly and indirectly by the pipe line. Once the temporary pipe has been accepted, the Contractor shall request the City to shut down the existing system piping and the Contractor shall remove the existing system piping in conflict with the new mains or as shown on the project plans.
Upon completion of the work the contractor shall remove the temporary piping and appurtenances and shall restore all ground surfaces and water service connections to the satisfaction of the City.
2. Repairs
If repairs to temporary piping are necessary the Contractor shall make such repairs in a timely manner as directed by the City. If progress in making repairs is inadequate, as determined by the City, or in the event of an emergency, the City may take immediate corrective measures, which may include the performance of repair work by City forces or another contractor. All costs for corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor.
3. Fire Hydrants
Fire hydrants not on the temporary main that are taken out of service shall be covered with a bag to be easily recognized as being out of service until they are removed or until they are brought back into service. The Contractor shall notify the City Fire Marshal and the Water Operations Division of any fire hydrants that will be taken out of service.
E. Measurement and Payment
Measurement for the installation, testing and maintenance of temporary water mains shall be for each separate main installation.
Payment shall be made at the unit price contained in the bid schedule. Such payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing the pipe, fittings valves, adaptors, service connections, and all miscellaneous fittings, complete in place, standard details, and/or Temporary Water Main Plan submittal and approval, and shall include all costs of excavation, removal of obstructions, shoring, bracing, bedding, backfilling, compaction, maintenance of traffic, testing, disinfection, connections to existing mains and services, disposal of existing pipes and materials. Disposal of asbestos cement pipe, lead joints and other potential hazardous materials shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable Federal, State and local regulations and shall be considered incidental to the payment for Temporary Mains unless specifically identified in other bid items.
Pay Item: 612 Temporary Water Mains (Flylines)
615.1 SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION
615.1 Description: REPLACE the second (2nd) paragraph with the following:
High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall conform to Section 738. Vitrified clay pipe shall conform to Section 743. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 745. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to Section 750.
ADD the following:
A. Sanitary sewer main construction shall be in accordance with all applicable COP Standard Details and
Page 72 Rev. 08/01/16
MAG Section 750. All sanitary sewer piping and fittings shall be ASTM 3034 SDR-35 PVC or AWWA C-151 ductile iron Class 350 with an epoxy coating (Protecto Coat 401, Series 431 Perma-Shield, or approved equal). Sewer pipe shall be furnished new in full lengths with manufacturer, class, rating and other pertinent information clearly marked on the barrel. All ductile iron sewer main shall be encased in polyethylene protective wrapping in accordance with MAG Section 610.6 where called for on the plans or after contractor testing of bedding and shading material is found to be corrosive in accordance with AWWA C105.
B. Field cuts and taps of Ductile Iron Pipe shall be re-coated with Protecto Coat 401, Series 431 Perma-Shield, (or approved equal) field kit in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Where noted on project plans, mechanical joint or restrained joint, Class 350, ductile iron sewer main shall be installed ten feet (minimum) each direction from water/sewer interface where vertical separation is less than two feet or until six feet of horizontal separation is attained per MAG Standard Detail 404.
D. The method of construction of manhole and sewer main replacements is of prime importance to the City of Prescott. Maintenance of sewage flows is critical and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor’s construction schedule shall be phased as to allow for minimal pumping of sewage flows for manholes and sewer main under construction.
E. Payment for sanitary sewer main will be at the appropriate unit bid prices for sewer main, as shown in the bidding schedule and shall include all excavation, backfill and compaction in accordance with trench details and all materials necessary for installation of the new sewer main.
615.7 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE
DELETE the last sentence in the fourth (4th) paragraph.
ADD the following:
A. All new or replacement sewer services, and any existing sewer services disturbed during construction, shall be replaced to the location indicated on project plans with a new minimum four-inch (4”) ASTM 3034 SDR-35 PVC or AWWA C-151 Ductile Iron, Class 350, with an epoxy coating (Protecto Coat 401, Series 431 Perma-Shield, or approved equal) sewer pipe, backwater valve, manufactured wye, and appurtenances in accordance with COP Standard Details 405Q, 414P, 440P-1, 440P-2 and 440P-3, except as modified herein.
B. If individual sewer service disruption is anticipated, the Contractor shall notify the property owner 24 hours in advance. Sewer service must be restored within four hours or some alternate means of sewage disposal provided to allow for the resumption of individual sewer service.
C. Payment for sanitary sewer service shall be at the unit price indicated on the bidding schedule for the sewer service installation, and shall include connecting each existing sewer service including all labor, material, equipment, removal of existing pipe, new pipe, coupling concrete reinforcement, new concrete encasement, fittings, by-pass pumping and other work required to connect the existing yard line service to the new sewer main.
615.9 Manholes: ADD the following:
A. The Contractor is to provide to the Engineer a detailed written description of the method of construction for manhole and sewer replacement for each individual area of work. This should include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Maintenance of sewage flows during construction and curing of concrete.
2. Type of concrete for manhole bases, i.e. pre-cast, “high early”, etc.
Page 73 Rev. 08/01/16
3. Method of curing concrete, i.e. protection against freezing, development strength before barrels and cones are set, etc.
4. What steps will be taken to ensure the grade around the manholes will not sink when complete, i.e. compaction testing, special base preparation, etc.
615.11 Testing: REPLACE Section 615.11 in its entirety with the following:
1. Sanitary sewers shall be low pressure air tested in accordance with ADEQ Engineering Bulletin 11, Chapter IV and in accordance with the Arizona Administrative Code Title 18 Chapter 9 Part E301(D)(2)(j)(i), one-hundred percent (100%) of the total length of pipe shall be tested.
2. 100% of new sewer main construction, regardless of pipe material shall be deflection tested in accordance with the following:
a. The pipe section to be tested shall be cleaned free of dirt, sand, water, or other foreign materials.
b. Backfill and compaction will have been completed prior to testing. Initial tests will be done immediately upon completion of the first reach of pipe for each diameter to ascertain if the Contractor’s means, materials and methods are producing the desired quality within permissible tolerances.
c. Test mandrels shall be solid sleeve or cage type with outside diameter and type of pipe permanently and clearly identified on the mandrel body. Worn, damaged or deformed mandrels will not be allowed. The mandrel shall have a cable attached at each end to enable removal if it becomes stuck.
d. For acceptance, the mandrel must pass through the entire section between manholes or other structures in one pass when pulled by hand, without the use of excessive force. All testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or his representative and the Engineer reserves the right to order additional tests in excess of twenty percent of new main installed.
e. Any section of the installation which fails to pass the deflection test will be repaired and retested.
3. Force mains shall be pressure tested at a minimum of 50 PSI above the design working pressure for two (2) hours in accordance with AAC R-18-9-E301.4.01.
4. Testing is considered incidental to the price bid for sewer main installation and no additional payment shall be made for this item.
615.11.1 Closed Circuit Television Inspection:
1. DESCRIPTION
This section defines the requirements for internal television inspection of the sewer main and service laterals after they have been installed for all new construction and shall include the connection point to the existing system. The Contractor shall inspect the sewer interior using a color closed circuit television (CCTV) camera and document the inspection on video with audio location and date information, video title information and hard copy inspection logs.
Upon completion of sewer main rehabilitation, the Contractor shall perform Closed Circuit Televising (CCTV) inspection for 100% of the newly rehabilitated sewer main to provide a video record and associated written report to become the property of the Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed scheduled sewer camera inspection, so Engineer may witness the video recording. Any inspection completed without Engineer witnessing will not be accepted.
Page 74 Rev. 08/01/16
2. SUBMITTALS
a. The Contractor shall submit samples of main and lateral (if separate) inspection logs and reports for approval in accordance with Section 105.2.
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for modifications to his equipment and/or inspection procedures to achieve report material of acceptable quality. No work shall commence prior to approval of the material by the Engineer. Once accepted, the report material shall serve as a standard for the remaining work.
B. Contractor shall maintain a copy of all inspection documentation (reports, DVD,) for the duration of the work and warranty period.
C. Mainline inspection reports shall be provided by the Contractor and shall show all observations, at a minimum: project title, name of Owner, time of day, manhole-to-manhole pipe section, pipe segment length, pipe material, line size, compass direction of viewing, lateral identification and clock position, direction of camera’s travel, pipe depth, name of operator and footage counter reading at the beginning and end of each manhole-to-manhole pipe segment. Report shall identify any deficiencies observed.
D. Video of sewer mainlines shall at a minimum include the following information: project title, time of day, pipe material, line size, compass direction of viewing, direction of camera’s travel, and footage counter reading continuously through-out each manhole-to-manhole pipe section. The video shall pause at and identify all observations.
E. Service lateral inspection reports shall be provided by the Contractor and shall show all observations, at a minimum: project title, time and date, property address of service, manhole-to-manhole pipe section, pipe segment length, pipe material, line size, direction of camera’s travel, name of operator and footage counter reading at the beginning and end of each service. Report shall identify any deficiencies observed.
F. Video of sewer lateral shall show, at a minimum: project title, street address, time and date, pipe material, line size, direction of camera’s travel, and counter reading at the beginning and end of each service. The video shall pause at and identify all observations including the connection point to the existing service line.
b. The Contractor shall supply finished video recordings upon completion of sewer construction. Four (4) sets of the videos (DVD) and reports shall be submitted to the City.
3. EQUIPMENT
a. Cameras: For inspection of sewer, the camera shall be equipped with a rotating head, capable of 90-degree rotation from the horizontal and 360-degree rotation about its centerline. Minimum camera resolution shall be 400 vertical lines and 460 horizontal lines. The camera lens shall not have less than 140-degree viewing angle and shall have automatic or remote focus and iris controls. The focal distance shall be adjustable through a range of from 2 inches to infinity. Camera(s) shall be intrinsically safe and shall be operative in 100-percent humidity conditions. Lighting intensity shall be remote controlled and shall be adjusted to minimize reflective glare. Lighting and camera quality shall provide a clear, in-focus picture of the entire inside periphery of the sewer.
b. Recording Media: Video recordings of all sewer line inspections shall be made on DVD. The audio portion of the composite video shall be sufficiently free from electrical interference and background noise to provide complete intelligibility of the oral report. Each video shall be identified with labels showing the Owner’s name, Contractor’s name, Engineer’s name and each manhole-to-manhole pipe segment of sewer line represented on the video. Each video shall be submitted at the completion of
Page 75 Rev. 08/01/16
the project for records.
c. Footage Counter: A footage counter device which measures the distance traveled by the camera in the sewer device shall be accurate to plus or minus 2 feet in 1,000 feet.
d. Depth Gauge: The camera shall be fitted with a depth gauge to identify sags present in the main lines. The gauge shall have ¼” increment markings to measure the depth of the pipe sag. The depth of the sag and location shall be noted as an observation and recorded on the report.
d. Video Titling: Video recording equipment shall include genlocking capabilities to the extent that computer generated data, (i.e., footage, date, size etc.) as determined by the Owner can be overlaid onto video, and both indicated on the television monitor and permanently recorded on the inspection video recording.
4. FLOW CONTROL
a. Flow control is required for TV inspection and for sewer line rehabilitation. Limited sewage flow, as defined below, is acceptable for TV inspection.
b. Depth of flow shall not exceed 40% of pipe diameter as measured in the manhole when performing television inspection.
c. Bypass pumping, if required, shall conform to the requirements of Section 200.2 and shall be incidental to Closed Circuit Television Inspection.
5. INSPECTION METHODS
a. The Engineer and the City’s wastewater collection representative shall have access to observe the video monitor and all other operations at all times. The system of cabling employed to transport the camera and transmit its signal shall not obstruct the camera’s view.
b. Contractor shall physically measure and record on the inspection log, the length of each sewer reach from the centerline of its terminal manholes.
c. The camera may travel through the sewer in either direction. Maximum rate of travel shall be 30 feet per minute when recording.
d. The camera image shall be down the center axis of the pipe when the camera is in motion. The Contractor is required to provide a 360-degree sweep of the pipe interior, at points of interest, in order to more fully document the existing condition of the sewer. Points of interest may include, but are not limited to, defects, encrustations, mineral deposits, debris, sediment and any location determined not to be clean or part of a proper line installation and defects in the liner including, but not limited to, bumps, folds, tears, dimples, etc.
e. The video and all inspection documentation should include the sewer line and manhole identifiers shown on the plans. After the rehabilitation of the sewer main is complete, the Contractor shall use the upstream manhole as the identifier in conjunction with the distance meter.
f. The City will review videos and logs to ensure compliance with the requirements listed in this specification and contract documents. If the sewer line, in the sole opinion of the City, is not adequately clean, it shall be cleaned and re-inspected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. If the construction work, in the sole opinion of the City, has not been properly installed, it shall be reinstalled and re-inspected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Final acceptance of the project will not be granted until sewer line video results, including any re-inspection of deficient sewer main, meet the satisfaction of the Engineer and are in accordance with this Section.
Page 76 Rev. 08/01/16
615.14 Measurement and Payment: ADD the following:
Measurement and payment shall be for the complete work of CCTV Inspection at the unit price in the bid schedule. Measurement for sewer main shall be linear feet from center of manhole to center of manhole. Measurement for service laterals shall be per each lateral.
Cleaning and bypass pumping for CCTV is incidental to video inspection and will not be measured or paid.
Pay Item: 615 Sanitary Sewer Main
Pay Item: 615.7 Sanitary Sewer Service
Pay Item: 615.8 Sanitary Sewer Cleanout
Pay Item: 615.11.1 Mainline Closed Circuit Television (LF)
Pay Item: 615.11.1a Service Lateral Closed Circuit Television (EA)
618 STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION
618.1 Description: ADD the following:
Work under this item shall be in accordance with Section 601 and as modified herein.
DELETE the second paragraph in its entirety.
618.2 Materials: REPLACE the first paragraph the following:
The concrete pipe, HDPE pipe, CMP pipe, specials, joints, gaskets, and testing shall be according with Sections 621, 735, 736, and 738 except as specified below or as modified by special provisions.
All CMP shall have 22/3" x ½" corrugations with a minimum gauge of 14. Steel lined or paved CMP will not be allowed.
(B): Rubber Gasket Joints: ADD the following:
(3) All joints for CMP shall conform to Section 621.3.1 and shall be watertight.
618.3 Construction Methods: REPLACE the first (1st) paragraph with the following:
Excavation, bedding, backfilling, and compaction of backfill and bedding of trenches shall be accomplished in accordance with Sections 601 and 603 for HDPE pipe, or as modified by special provisions.
618.6 Measurement:
Measurement shall be in accordance with Sections 618.6.
618.7 Payment: ADD the following:
Pay Item: 618 Storm Pipe
625 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION AND DROP SEWER CONNECTIONS
625.1.1 Sewer Manholes: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Construction shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing manholes complete in place, as detailed, including foundation walls, manhole frames, covers, and any incidentals thereto, at locations shown on the plans.
Sanitary sewer manhole construction shall be in accordance with COP Standard Details 420Q-1, 421Q, 422Q, 423P-1, 423P-2, 426Q-1, 426Q-2 and 427Q. Final grade adjustment in roadway sections shall be in
Page 77 Rev. 08/01/16
accordance with COP Standard Detail 4-05P.
625.2 Materials: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Unless otherwise shown on the plans or modified by special provision, materials to be used shall conform to the following:
Cement mortar for manholes Class D, Section 776.
Concrete for manholes Class A, Section 725.
Pipe used in manholes or drop sewer connections shall comply with pipe requirements of Section 615.
Manhole frame, cover and steps, Section 787 and cast in accordance with standard details.
Plastic manhole steps, which conform to O.S.H.A. and A.S.T.M. C-487 requirements. The manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer a certification indicating conformance.
625.3 Construction Methods: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
A. Manholes:
Manholes shall be constructed of precast concrete sections, frames and covers, in accordance with the standard details. The invert channels shall be smooth and semi-circular in shape, conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer sections. Changes in direction of flow shall be made with a smooth curve, having a radius as large as the manhole will permit. Changes in size and grade of the channels shall be made gradually and evenly.
Invert channels may be formed of concrete having a smooth mortared surface, or may be constructed by laying a full section of sewer pipe through the manhole and cutting out the portion of pipe above the floor after the surrounding concrete has hardened. The floor of the manhole outside the channels shall be smoothed and shall slope towards the channels.
Existing manholes shall be totally removed, including the bases, and disposed of by the Contractor. Existing rings and covers shall be salvaged and delivered to the City Wastewater Collection Yard at 1505 Sundog Ranch Rd. No separate payment will be made for removing manholes or salvaging manhole rings and covers. The cost of this item of work shall be included in the cost of manhole construction.
The excavation shall be made cylindrical to a diameter sufficient in size to permit sheeting if necessary and leave room that the precast concrete sections may be properly assembled.
Concrete foundations shall be Class A concrete and in accordance with the Standard Details and Section 505 for both poured-in-place and pre-cast bases. Cast-in-place concrete bases and inverts shall cure for a minimum of 72 hours, depending on concrete development strength before barrels and cones can be placed and before sewage flows across the inverts.
Frame and Cover. All machined surfaces on the frame and cover shall be such that the cover will lie flat in any position in the frame and have a uniform bearing through its entire circumference. Any frame and cover which creates any noise when passed over by automobiles shall be replaced. Frames shall be set in accordance with COP Standard Detail 420Q.
Backfilling shall be done in accordance with the requirements for trench backfilling as stated in Section 601. Quality control density testing shall be one test per 16-inches of fill, beginning at two (2) feet above the crown of the pipe. A minimum of two density tests are required for each manhole. Each density test taken shall be in a different quadrant of the manhole as the previous test. If four tests are required, each quadrant shall have a density test.
Page 78 Rev. 08/01/16
B. Watertight Ring and Cover
Installation of watertight ring and cover shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 420Q as indicated on the plans. Rings and covers shall be approved by the City prior to installation.
C. Drop Sewer Manholes
1. Drop manholes that intercept existing mains (upper invert) shall not have a block-out for the pipe during the casting process. Said manholes shall be core drilled in place once the appropriate invert elevation has been verified in the field.
i. Core drilling shall not commence without approval from the Engineer.
ii. The pipe shall be sealed at the penetration using a Link-Seal Modular Seal or approved equal.
2. Internal Drop
i. Internal drop systems shall be installed in drop manholes where indicated on the plan sheets and accordance with COP Standard detail 426Q-1.
ii. Internal drop systems shall be constructed using Reliner Inside Drop System as manufactured by Reliner/Duran Inc or approved equal.
iii. Manholes with internal drop systems require Internal Manhole Coating, and shall have the protective coating installed and tested prior to the installation of the drop system. Manhole coating shall be in accordance with Section 626.1.
D. Sanitary sewer cleanout shall be installed in accordance with COP Standard Detail 440P-1 and 440P-2.
E. All water encountered during the work shall be disposed of by Contractor in a manner such that it will not damage public or private property or create a public nuisance or health problem in accordance with Section 220.1. The costs of special bedding, and over excavation as required to provide a stable foundation, and other equipment and materials shall be incidental to the work.
F. Testing of Sanitary Sewer Manholes.
All manholes installed shall be tested by exfiltration or by vacuum testing per ASTM C-1244-3 and in accordance with Arizona Administrative Code Title 18 Chapter 9 Part E301(D)(3)(e).
Testing of sanitary sewer manholes is considered incidental to the price bid for manhole installation and no additional payment shall be made.
625.5 Measurement: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Measurement of manholes shall be per manhole installed, complete in place regardless of depth.
Measurement of drop manholes shall be per manhole installed, complete in place regardless of depth.
Measurement for internal drops shall be per drop installed, complete in place regardless of depth.
Measurement for cleanouts shall be per cleanout installed, complete in place.
625.6 Payment: REPLACE in its entirety with the following:
Payment for manhole installation shall be at the appropriate unit bid price in the bidding schedule and shall include all excavation, backfill, installation, grade ring adjustment, and all necessary materials for complete manhole installation.
Page 79 Rev. 08/01/16
Payment for drop manhole installation shall be at the bid unit price and shall include all excavation, backfill, installation, internal coating, internal drop assembly, core drilling, grade ring adjustment, and all necessary materials for complete manhole installation
Payment for internal drop system in existing manholes shall be at the bid unit price and shall include complete installation of the internal drop assembly, and internal coating in accordance with COP Standard Detail 426A-P and all materials necessary for installation of the new drop sewer connections.
Pay Item: 625 Sanitary Manhole
Pay Item: 625a Sanitary Drop Manhole
Pay Item: 625b Internal Drop System
626.1 MANHOLE COATINGS
A. DESCRIPTION
1. This section specifies the coating system used for the lining of the manholes as indicated on the drawings. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to clean, modify and coat the manholes. Contractor shall comply with the local authority and all Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for confined space entry. The coating shall yield a hard, durable chemical resistant coating and shall be specifically designed to be applied on a dry surface. The finish coating shall provide a watertight seal and shall adhere to all components of pipeline liner systems.
2. Specific coating terminology used in this section is in accordance with definitions contained in ASTM D16, ASTM D 3960 and the following definitions:
a. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): The thickness of one fully cured continuous application of coating.
b. Field Coat: The application or the completion of application of the coating system after installation of the surface at the site of the work.
c. Shop Coat: One or more coats applied in a shop or plant prior to shipment to the site of erection or fabrication, where the field or finishing coat is applied.
d. Tie Coat: An intermediate coat used to bond different types of paint coats. Coatings used to improve the adhesion of a succeeding coat.
e. Photochemically Reactive Organic Material: Any organic material that will react with oxygen, excited oxygen, ozone or other free radicals generated by the action of sunlight on components in the atmosphere giving rise to secondary contaminants and reaction intermediates in the atmosphere which can have detrimental effects.
f. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: The portion of the coating that is a compound of carbon is photochemically reactive and evaporates during drying or curing, expressed in grams per liter or pounds per gallon.
g. Touch-Up Painting: The application of a paint on areas of painted surfaces to repair marks, scratches and areas where the coating has deteriorated to restore the coating film to an unbroken condition.
3. Quality Assurance
a. References: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section
Page 80 Rev. 08/01/16
and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
ASTM D 16-93 Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products.
ASTM D 3359 A-92 Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
ASTM D 3960-92 Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings.
ASTM F 595 B-89 Federal Standard Colors.
b. Standardization: Materials and supplies provided shall be the standard products of manufacturers. Materials in each coating system shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
4. Delivery and Storage
a. Materials shall be delivered to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer’s name, coating type, batch number, date of manufacture, storage life and special directions.
b. Materials shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and excessive heat or cold. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer shall be removed from the site.
B. MATERIALS
1. The pre-approved coatings for the lining of manholes include; Sewer Shield Liner 150 as manufactured by Environmental Coatings, Mesa, Arizona, Sauereisen No. 210 as manufactured by Sauereisen, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania or Raven 405 as manufactured by Raven Lining Systems, Broken Arrow, Oklahoma. The coating color shall be approved by the owner.
2. Primer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each application.
3. Defect filler shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each application. The coating shall contain no more than 20% filler, sand; no fiberglass fillers.
4. Applicator Experience and Qualifications
The coating applicator must have a minimum of two (2) years experience in applying either the specified coating or an equivalent coating and shall be certified as an applicator by the manufacturer. They shall submit a successful performance history for the application of either the specified coating or a similar coating in the wastewater industry:
a. The coating applicator shall submit three (3) references relating to the quality of workmanship performed on other projects using the same coating being proposed or an equivalent coating.
b. The coating applicator shall be an Arizona Licensed contractor with an AE License or equivalent.
c. The coating Contractor shall submit a manufacturer’s certification to apply the coating specified herein for each applicator involved in the coating process.
5. Product Data
Before materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall provide the following information in accordance with these Specifications.
a. For the filler, primer and finish coating, the Contractor shall furnish a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
Page 81 Rev. 08/01/16
b. For the filler and finish coating, the Contractor shall provide the manufacturer’s application instructions, which shall include the following:
(i) Surface preparation recommendations.
(ii) Primer type, where required.
(iii) Maximum dry and wet mil thickness per coat.
(iv) Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including atmospheric conditions for each.
(v) Curing time before submergence in liquid.
(vi) Thinner to be used with coating material.
(vii) Ventilation requirements.
(viii) Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the coating shall be applied.
(ix) Allowable application methods.
(x) Maximum allowable moisture content.
(xi) Maximum storage life.
c. List of materials proposed to be used under this section and manufacturer’s data for each material.
C. COATING
1. Coating products shall not be used until the Owner has inspected the materials and the coating manufacturer’s technical representative has instructed the Contractor and Owner in the surface preparation, mixing and application of the coating. The coating manufacturer’s technical representative must be a factory representative, not a local representative or an affiliate of the Contractor.
2. Field coats shall consist of one or more finish coats to build up the coating to the specified dry film thickness. Unless otherwise specified, finish coats shall not be applied until other work in the area is complete and until all previous coats have been inspected.
3. All items of equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment, which are immersed when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves shall have all surface preparation and coating work, performed in the field.
4. Preparations
a. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry. Before applying coating or surface treatments, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, old weathered coatings and other foreign substances shall be removed except as specified. Oil and grease shall be removed before mechanical cleaning is started. Where mechanical cleaning is accomplished by blast cleaning, the abrasive used shall be washed, graded and free of contaminants, which might interfere with the adhesion of the coatings. The air used for blast cleaning shall be sufficiently free of oil and moisture to not cause detrimental contamination of the surfaces to be coated. The Contractor shall examine all surfaces to be coated and shall correct all surface defects as required by manufacture before application of any coating.
b. Contractor shall protect the sewer from debris, overspray or any detrimental activity due to restoration of the manholes.
c. Holes shall be filled using a grout as recommended by the coating manufacturer, and approved by the Engineer. The grout filler shall be used to bring all areas of holes and pitting up to the
Page 82 Rev. 08/01/16
nominal surface of the manhole so that there is an even interior surface in the manhole without waves, pits or holes. Any exposed rebar shall be cleaned, and all areas of corrosion removed, prior to application of the grout as recommended by the coating manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
d. After surface preparation is complete, all loose material shall be removed from the sewer and manholes.
e. The Contractor shall repair all defects in the coating system where directed by the Engineer.
f. Surface preparations for each type of surface shall be in accordance with the specific requirements of the coating system specification sheet (COATSPEC). COATSPEC shall be supplied by the manufacturer.
5. Application
a. The surface of the installed coating will be cleaned and prepared to permit visual inspection by the Engineer. Any areas of the coating showing poor adhesion, excessive air inclusion or edge or seam defects shall be properly repaired and re-inspected.
b. Coated surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps and brush marks. Coats shall be applied so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness completely coating corners and crevices. Painting shall be done in accordance with the requirements of SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 1. SSPC Paint Application Specification shall be supplied by the manufacturer.
c. The Contractor’s equipment shall be designed for application of the materials specified. The coating shall be obtained with the proper thickness and surface characteristics as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
d. Each coat shall be applied evenly and sharply cut to line. Care shall be exercised to avoid over-coating or spattering on surfaces not to be coated.
e. Film Thickness and Continuity: Coating system thickness is the total thickness of the finished coats. The surface area covered for various types of surfaces shall not exceed those recommended by the manufacturer. Coatings shall be applied to the thickness specified, and in accordance with these Specifications. In testing for continuity of coating about welds, projections (such as bolts and nuts), and crevices, the Owner will determine the minimum conductivity for smooth areas of like coating where the dry mil thickness has been accepted. This conductivity shall then be taken as the minimum required for these rough or irregular areas. Pinholes and holidays shall be repainted to the required coverage.
f. Safety and Ventilation: Requirements for safety and ventilation shall be in accordance with SSPC Paint Application Guide No. 3. SSPC Paint Application Guide shall be supplied by the manufacturer.
g. Cleanup: Upon completion of coating, the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, protective coverings and accumulated rubbish and thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any over spray or other paint-related damage.
6. Testing
a. Spark Testing; All coated surfaces shall be spark tested for holes. The spark tester used shall provide 14,000 volts. If pinholes are found, the Contractor shall repair the coating as recommended by the manufacturer and retest. All testing and repair work shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
Page 83 Rev. 08/01/16
a. Adhesion Testing: The Contractor shall perform an adhesion test after proper cure in accordance with ASTM D3359 to demonstrate that the specified field coatings adhere to the substrate. Test results showing an adhesion rating of 5A on immersed surfaces and 4A or better on all other surfaces shall be considered acceptable.
D. DEFECT REPAIR
1. The Contractor shall repair all defects in the coating system where directed by the Engineer.
2. Where unacceptable adhesion test results are obtained, the Contractor shall be responsible for removing and reapplying the specified coatings at no expense to the Owner.
E. WARRANTY
The coating applicator shall supply a minimum five-year warranty, for the coating that has been approved through the submittal process. The coating applicator shall also supply a warranty from the coating manufacturer addressed to the City. The warranty shall state, at a minimum, that the coating is applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and that the coating will not fail for a period of five years. The definition of coating failure is that blistering, cracking, embrittlement or softening of the coating is starting to occur.
All structural rehabilitation work performed by the Contractor shall be guaranteed against faulty workmanship and/or materials for a period of 2 years after final acceptance of work.
F. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment for manhole coating shall be per square foot as measured from the invert to the ring & cover. The unit price shall include by-pass pumping and all materials necessary for internal coating of manholes specified on the plan sheets.
Pay Item: 626.1 Coat Manhole
630 Tapping Sleeves, Valves and Valve Boxes on Water Lines
630.3 GATE VALVES
630.3.1 General: REPLACE the fifth (5th) paragraph with the following:
All valves shall be designed for a minimum of 250 psi rated pressure unless otherwise noted.
REPLACE the thirteenth (13th) paragraph with the following:
Valves 20 inches and smaller may be furnished with flanged ends or mechanical joint ends, unless otherwise noted.
ADD the following:
A. Valves shall be resilient wedge gate valves, Waterous 2500 series, Clow, Mueller, or equal, suitable for use in line and in wet tapping water mains in conjunction with tapping sleeves. Gate valves shall be mechanical joint except where flange joints are specifically detailed in project plans or where required for tapping sleeves and hydrant installation.
B. Valve blocking shall be provided on all valves in accordance with COP Standard Detail 3-05P. No separate payment will be made for valve blocking and the cost shall be included in the water main unit price.
C. Valve boxes shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 391Q.
D. Debris caps shall be installed on all valves within project limits according to MAG Standard Detail 392
Page 84 Rev. 08/01/16
and shall be color-coded according to COP Standard Detail 391Q. Debris caps shall be SW Services DC600 or approved equal.
E. Retrofit Debris Caps on Valves: Debris caps shall be installed on all valves within project limits according to MAG Standard Detail 392 and shall be color-coded according to COP Standard Detail 391Q. Debris caps shall be SW Services DC600 or approved equal.
F. The Contractor shall notify customers of scheduled water service disruption a minimum of 24 hours in advance of construction. Customers shall not be without water service nor shall the water main line be out of operation for a total time period greater than four (4) hours, inclusive of contract time period from issuance of Notice to Proceed to Final Acceptance by the Engineer.
630.3.2 Supplements Specifically Relating to Valve Size:
(C) Valves. 14 inches through 20 inches: REPLACE with the following:
(C) Valves 14 inches through 16 inches:
REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
Valves shall be iron body resilient-seated gate valves in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C-509 or AWWA C-515.
DELETE the third paragraph in its entirety.
(D) Valves 24 inches and larger: REPLACE with the following:
(D) Valves 18 inches and larger:
REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
(C) Valves. 14 inches through 20 inches: REPLACE with the following:
(C) Valves. 14 inches through 16 inches:
REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
Valves shall be iron body resilient-seated gate valves in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C-515.
REPLACE the second paragraph with the following:
Valves shall be for operation in a horizontal position. The valve shall have bevel gears. The gears and stuffing box shall be enclosed in a watertight iron case, for operation in a buried location. The case shall be filled with grease at the factory.
630.4 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
ADD the following:
A. The City of Prescott Utility Operations shall be notified 48 hours in advance to schedule water main tap. If the Contractor is not ready for the tap at the scheduled time, the tap will be rescheduled. City crews will not remain on standby until the Contractor is ready for the tap. The rescheduled tap shall include a new 48 hour notification.
630.4.1 Tapping Sleeves and Valves: REPLACE the third paragraph with the following:
Once the tap has been installed, the Contractor shall not operate the valve.
ADD the following:
Page 85 Rev. 08/01/16
A. Debris caps shall be installed on tapping sleeve valve according to MAG Standard Detail 392 and shall be color-coded according to COP Standard Detail 391Q. Debris caps shall be SW Services DC600 or approved equal.
630.4.3 Tapping and Associated Fees: ADD the following:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for payment to the City Utility Operations for the quoted costs for the City Water Department to perform water main tap work. The water tap fees are as follows:
1” Tap $100.00
2” Tap $130.00
4” Tap $240.00
6” Tap $260.00
8” Tap $325.00
10” Tap $380.00
12” Tap $435.00
B. The Contractor shall add the cost of this work to the unit price bid in the bidding schedule for tapping, sleeve, valve, box and cover. Tapping sleeves shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 340Q-1 and 340Q-2 and this Section.
630.5 Butterfly Valves:
(A) 16 inch and larger: REPLACE with the following:
(A) 18 inch and larger:
REPLACE (1) with the following:
Valve body shall be of cast iron or ductile iron with connecting ends one of or a combination of Flanged (Short Body) or mechanical joint.
DELETE (B) in its entirety.
630.6 AIR RELEASE, COMBINATION VALVES, AND BLOW OFF ASSEMBLY
ADD the following:
F. Air/vacuum release valves shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 317Q-1 or 317Q-2.
G. Combination Air Valves
1. Air valves shall be standard combination style. Cast iron air valves shall comply with AWWA C-512 except as modified herein. Valves shall be of the size shown and shall have threaded or flanged ends to match piping. Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron, conforming to ASTM A126 class B, or NSF 61 certified reinforced nylon. Floats of cast iron air valves shall be heavy stainless steel, suitable to withstand 1,000 psi external pressure. Seats of cast iron air valves shall be Buna-N. Other internal components of cast iron air valves shall be constructed of stainless steel, bronze, delrin, or cast iron as appropriate. Internal components for reinforced nylon valves shall be NSF 61 certified nylon, polypropylene, EPDM or NBR 70. Inlet and outlet ports for large orifice valves shall be baffled to prevent the action of high volume airflows from interfering with valve operations. Interior and exterior carbon steel surfaces shall be epoxy coated. Valves shall be designed for a minimum of 300 psi water working pressure, unless
Page 86 Rev. 08/01/16
otherwise shown.
2. Internal protective coatings shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C-550.
a. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water.
b. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.203 mm (0.008-inch or 8 mils). Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance with AWWA C-210.
3. Combination air valves shall be in accordance with COP Standard. Detail 317Q-1 or 317Q-2-17P, unless shown otherwise. They shall have both large and small orifices in a single body. The large orifice shall serve to vent large quantities of air during filling operations and shall automatically open to relieve vacuum conditions. The small orifice shall vent small quantities of air under full line pressure that may become entrained in the system and collect at high points. Valves shall be APCO Series 140, Val-Matic Corp. Series 200, or equivalent
ADD the following Section:
630.6.1 Blow Off Installation:
A. Blow off installation shall be in accordance with COP Standard Detail 318P. Contractor shall be required to provide Mega-Lug restraint for all joints for a distance specified per MAG Standard Detail 303.
630.8 Measurement: REPLACE with the following:
Measurement will be by the unit each of the various kinds and sizes of valves, manholes, vaults, or tapping sleeves and valves, including valve boxes and covers, retrofit debris covers, air release valve assemblies, combination valve assemblies, and blow off assemblies.
630.9 Payment: ADD the following:
Payment for valves, box and cover shall be per each at the unit bid price shown in the bidding schedule. Valves on tapping sleeves and hydrant installations shall be included in the appropriate bid item in the bidding schedule.
Payment for retrofit debris cap shall be per each installed complete and in place.
Payment for tapping sleeves shall be at the unit price bid in the bidding schedule and include the tapping fee, tapping sleeve, valve, box and cover, and all appurtenant fittings for complete assembly.
Payment for air release valve installation shall be at the unit price bid in the bidding schedule and shall include all materials and appurtenant fittings at noted for a complete installation.
Payment for combination air valve assembly shall be at the unit price bid in the bidding schedule and shall include all materials and appurtenant fittings at noted for a complete installation.
Payment for blow off installation shall be at the unit price bid in the bidding schedule and shall include all materials and appurtenant fittings as noted for complete installation. No extra payment shall be made for Mega-Lug restraint.
Pay Item: 630.3a Gate Valve, Box, & Cover
Pay Item: 630.3b Retrofit Debris Cap
Pay Item: 630.4 Tapping Sleeve, Valve, Box, and Cover
Pay Item: 630.6a Air Release Valve Assembly
Page 87 Rev. 08/01/16
Pay Item: 630.6b Combination Valve Assembly
Pay Item: 630.6.1 Blow-Off Assembly
ADD Section 650 as follows:
650 ABANDONMENT AND REMOVAL OF WATER MAIN
650.1 Abandonment of Water Main:
A. Abandonment of existing water main shall not commence until hydrostatic and disinfection test results for the new main have been accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall contact the Engineer a minimum of 48 hours in advance of abandonment activities to schedule City water crews to coordinate valve operation. Water customers affected by water service disruption due to water main abandonment shall be notified by written flyer delivered by the Contractor a minimum of 24 hours in advance of scheduled water service disruption. Scheduled water service disruptions are limited to a maximum of 4 hours.
B. Abandonment of existing main shall include the removal of all valves, hydrants, and appurtenances within the reach to be abandoned. All valves and hydrants to be abandoned shall be salvaged to the City unless otherwise noted on the plans or special provisions. All salvaged items shall be delivered to the City of Prescott Water Operations, 1481 Sundog Ranch Road and placed as directed by the Engineer. Removed materials not identified to be salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and properly disposed of. Removed or salvaged materials shall not be used in new main installation.
At all locations indicated on the plans, a minimum of four (4) feet of water main shall be removed capped and the appropriate thrust restraint installed.
Existing valves to be abandoned shall include removing the valve, valve box, and cover in its entirety. Abandonment of appurtenances located in any structure (manhole, vault, etc.) shall include the complete removal and proper disposal of the appurtenance and the structure.
Abandonment of valves, hydrants, and appurtenances shall include the installation of the requisite number of mechanical joint caps as necessary to seal all pipe remaining in place.
C. Restoration for water main abandonment shall include excavation, backfilling, compaction and re-surfacing in accordance with Section 601.
D. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be incidental to water main abandonment.
650.2 Removal of Water Main:
A. Removal of water main shall not commence prior to authorization from the Engineer.
B. Water main removal shall include the complete removal of all existing water main, valves, hydrants, structures, and appurtenances within the reach as indicated on the plans. All valves and hydrants to be removed shall be salvaged to the City unless otherwise noted on the plans or special provisions. All salvaged items shall be delivered to the City of Prescott Water Operations, 1481 Sundog Ranch Road and placed as directed by the Engineer. Materials not otherwise identified to be salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and properly disposed of. Removed or salvaged materials shall not be used in new main installation.
C. Removal of water main shall include excavation, backfilling, compaction, disposal and salvage in accordance with Section 601.
D. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be measured and paid accordance with Section
Page 88 Rev. 08/01/16
336. Any other restoration shall be considered incidental.
650.3 Measurement:
Measurement for abandonment of water main and laterals shall be by the lineal foot of pipe abandoned, measured horizontally through valves and fittings. Hydrants, valves, fittings, vaults, services, and other appurtenances shall be considered incidental to water main abandonment.
Measurement for removal of water mains and laterals shall be by the lineal foot of pipe removed, measured horizontally through valves and fittings. Hydrants, valves, fittings, vaults, services, and other appurtenances shall be considered incidental to water main abandonment.
650.4 Payment:
Payment for water main abandonment shall be at the appropriate unit bid price and shall include all work and appurtenant fittings necessary for complete abandonment. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be incidental to water main abandonment.
Payment for water main removal shall be at the appropriate unit bid price and shall include all work and appurtenant fittings necessary for complete removal. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be measured and paid accordance with Section 336. Any other restoration shall be considered incidental.
Pay Item: 650.1 Water Main Abandonment
Pay Item: 650.2 Water Main Removal
ADD Section 651 as follows:
651 ABANDONMENT AND REMOVAL OF SANITARY SEWER
651.1 Abandonment of Sanitary Sewer:
A. Abandonment of sanitary sewer shall not occur until all existing sanitary sewer services have been transferred to another main or lateral, and abandonment is approved by the Engineer.
B. Abandonment of sanitary sewer shall include gravity and/or force mains, manholes, vaults, wet wells, and other appurtenances within the reach noted on the plans to be abandoned.
C. Manhole frames, covers, vault access hatches, and clean-out frame & covers shall be salvaged to the City unless otherwise noted on the plans or special provisions. All salvaged items shall be delivered to the City of Prescott Wastewater Collections, 1505 Sundog Ranch Road and placed as directed by the Engineer. Materials not otherwise identified to be salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and properly disposed of. Removed or salvaged materials shall not be used in new sewer installation.
D. Restoration for sanitary sewer abandonment shall include all excavation, backfilling, compaction, and resurfacing in accordance with Section 601.
651.1.1 Sanitary Sewer Mains:
A. Abandonment of sanitary sewer mains shall include all gravity mains, laterals, and force mains, and shall be accomplished by pipe bursting or grout filling as indicated on the plans.
1. Pipe bursting shall be performed using industry standard methods and equipment.
A pipe bursting plan including equipment used, means and methods shall be submitted and approved in accordance with Section 105.2 prior to beginning bursting operations.
Valves shall be removed and disposed of prior to pipe bursting, and shall become property of
Page 89 Rev. 08/01/16
the contractor. All valves shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these specifications.
2. Grouting shall be accomplished following industry standard methods, using a cement based grout to fill the void of the existing sanitary sewer main. The grouting material must have a minimum compressive strength of 100 PSI and shall have flow characteristics appropriate for filling a sanitary sewer.
Injection of the grout material shall be done with sufficient pressure and injection locations to fill the existing sanitary sewer line. The method shall adequately provide for the removal and legal disposal of existing sewage in the lines and any pipe materials removed, and release of air from the system to facilitate proper abandonment.
A grouting plan including equipment used injection locations, grout mix design, and means and methods shall be submitted and approved in accordance with Section 105.2 prior to beginning grouting operations.
651.1.2 Manholes, Vaults, and Wet Wells:
A. Abandonment of manholes, vaults, wet wells and other structural appurtenances shall include the complete removal of each structure within the reach to be abandoned as indicated on the plans.
B. All items removed and not salvaged shall become property of the contractor and properly disposed of in accordance with these specifications.
C. Backfilling after removal shall be in accordance with Section 601.
D. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be incidental to sewer abandonment.
651.2 Removal of Sanitary Sewer:
A. Removal of sanitary sewer shall not commence prior to authorization from the Engineer.
B. Removal of sanitary sewer shall include the complete removal of gravity and/or force mains, manholes, vaults, wet wells, and other appurtenances within the reach noted on the plans to be removed.
Existing sanitary sewer that is removed coincident with the installation of new sanitary sewer shall be considered incidental to the installation and shall not be measured or paid for under this section.
C. Manhole frames, covers, vault access hatches, and clean-out frame & covers shall be salvaged to the City unless otherwise noted on the plans or special provisions. All salvaged items shall be delivered to the City of Prescott Wastewater collections, 1505 Sundog Ranch Road and placed as directed by the Engineer. Materials not otherwise identified to be salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and properly disposed of. Removed or salvaged materials shall not be used in new sewer installation.
D. Removal of sewer main, laterals, or force main that tie into an existing manhole that is to remain in service shall include complete removal of the penetrating pipe and grouting the hole with lean, non-shrink grout. A water stop shall be used to ensure the integrity of the manhole.
The water stop proposed shall be submitted for review and approval prior to removal activities in accordance with Section 105.2
E. Removal of sanitary sewer shall include excavation, backfilling and compaction in accordance with Section 601. Disposal, salvage, and bypass pumping shall be considered incidental to sewer removal.
F. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be measured and paid in accordance with Section 336. Any other restoration shall be considered incidental.
Page 90 Rev. 08/01/16
651.3 Measurement:
Measurement for abandonment of sewer main, laterals, and force main shall be by the lineal foot of pipe abandoned, measured horizontally through manholes, vaults, valves, and fittings. Valves, fittings, services, cleanouts, and other appurtenances shall be considered incidental to sewer abandonment.
Abandonment of manholes and wet wells shall be the number of each abandoned. Vaults shall be considered incidental to sewer abandonment unless otherwise noted in the special provisions.
Measurement for removal of sewer main, laterals, and force main shall be by the lineal foot of pipe abandoned, measured horizontally through manholes, vaults, valves, and fittings. Valves, fittings, services, cleanouts, and other appurtenances shall be considered incidental to sewer abandonment.
Measurement for manholes and wet wells shall be the number of each removed. Vaults shall be considered incidental to sewer abandonment unless otherwise noted in the special provisions.
651.4 Payment:
Payment for abandoning sewer mains, laterals, and force main shall be made at the contract unit price. Said price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be incidental to sewer abandonment.
Payment for abandoning manholes and wet wells shall be made at the contract unit price. Said price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be incidental to sewer abandonment.
Payment for removing sanitary sewer shall be made at the contract unit price. Said price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be measured and paid in accordance with Section 336. Any other restoration shall be considered incidental.
Payment for removing manholes and wet wells shall be made at the contract unit price. Said price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Pavement matching and surface replacement shall be measured and paid in accordance with Section 336. Any other restoration shall be considered incidental.
Pay Item: 651.1 Abandonment of Sanitary Sewer
Pay Item: 651.1a Abandonment of Sanitary Manhole
Pay Item: 651.2 Removal of Sanitary Sewer
Pay Item: 651.2a Removal of Sanitary Manhole
701 AGGREGATE
701.4 Reclaimed Concrete Material (RCM)
REMOVE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
Use of Reclaimed Concrete Material (RCM) is not allowed.
701.5 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP):
REMOVE in its entirety.
710 ASPHALT CONCRETE
Page 91 Rev. 08/01/16
SECTION 710.2.1 Asphalt Binder: shall be deleted and replaced as follows:
a. The asphalt binder shall be a Performance Grade (PG) PG 64-22 Asphalt conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 320-09 Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder. The binder grade shall be as specified in the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer.
b. The Engineer may review a request by the Contractor to change from a PG 64-22 binder grade to a PG 64-16 grade. The owner may require the Contractor to provide supporting justification and/or data for changing the grade of binder from PG 64-22 to PG 64-16.
SECTION 710.3.2 Mix Design Criteria: add the following:
a. The intent of this supplement is to use only 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch Marshall or Gyratory Mix Designs within the specification unless specifically called out in the project specifications.
b. The asphalt mix design shall be for high traffic volume, unless otherwise specified.
SECTION 710.3.2.1 Marshall Mix Design: make the following change:
a. In Table 710-3 change the Tensile Strength Ratio minimum percent requirement from 65 to 75. A tensile strength ratio of 75 percent may require more than one percent mineral admixture.
725 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
725.1 General: ADD the following:
All Portland cement concrete placed under this contract shall be Class AA with a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45.
Adverse Weather Concreting
A. Hot Weather Concreting:
Hot weather is defined as any combination of high ambient temperature, low relative humidity, and wind velocity which would tend to impair the quality of fresh concrete. These effects become more pronounced as wind velocity increases. Since last minute improvisations are rarely successful, preplanning and coordination of all phases of the work are required to minimize these adverse effects.
Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is CONTRACTOR's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
As an absolute minimum, the Contractor shall insure that the following measures are taken:
1. An ample supply of water, hoses, and fog nozzles are available at the site.
2. Spare vibrators are on hand in the ratio of one spare vibrator for each three in use.
3. Preplanning has been accomplished to insure prompt placement, consolidation, finishing, and curing
Page 92 Rev. 08/01/16
of the concrete.
4. Concrete temperature on arrival should be approximately 60°F and in any event shall not exceed 90°F. The use of cold water and ice is recommended.
5. The subgrade is moist, but free of standing water.
6. Fog spray is utilized to cool the forms and steel. Under extreme conditions of high ambient temperature, exposure to the direct rays of the sun, low relative humidity, and wind, even strict adherence to these measures may not produce the quality desired and it may be necessary to restrict concrete placement to early morning only. If this decision is made, then particular attention must be directed to the curing process since the concrete will be exposed to severe thermal stresses due to temperature variation; heat of hydration plus midday sun radiation versus nighttime cooling.
B. Cold Weather Concreting:
Comply with ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
C. Wet Weather Concreting: Placing of concrete shall be discontinued when the quantity of rainfall is such as to cause a flow or wash to the surface. Any concrete already placed and partially cured shall be covered to prevent dimpling. A construction joint will be installed prior to shut down.
D. Replacement of Damaged or Defective Concrete: Upon written notice from the Engineer, all concrete which has been damaged or is defective, shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Contracting Agency.
E. References:
(1) ACI-305 Hot Weather Concreting
(2) ACI-306 Cold Weather Concreting
(3) ACI-308 Recommended Practices for Curing Concrete
F. No separate payment shall be made for adverse weather concreting. The work shall be considered incidental and included in the unit price bid for construction or installation of the appropriate contract pay item.
725.5 Admixtures and Additives: REPLACE the third (3rd) paragraph in its entirety with the following:
Air entraining admixtures incorporated into the approved concrete mix design shall meet the requirements of ASTM C260. All Portland cement concrete shall contain 6%, plus or minus 1%, entrained air of evenly dispersed air bubbles at the time of placement. The air-entraining agent shall contain no chlorides. The air-entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. The solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. Air entrainment in the concrete shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T-152. Air entrainment shall be tested at time of sampling in accordance with ASTM C143 and C231 respectively. The cost of this testing shall be the responsibility of the
Page 93 Rev. 08/01/16
Contractor.
725.8 Tests and Test Methods:
725.8.1 Field Sampling and Tests: REPLACE the fourth (4th) paragraph in its entirety with the following:
The slump of Portland cement concrete shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T119, ASTM C143 and ASTM C231 respectively. Concrete that does not meet the specification requirements as to slump shall not be used, but shall be removed from the job at no cost to the CITY. Slump tests shall be taken in the field by a representative of the Contractor’s quality control firm. The cost of this testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
725.8.2 Concrete Cylinder Test: MODIFY with the following:
Concrete cylindrical specimens for compression tests shall be taken in the field by a representative of the Contractor’s quality control firm in accordance with AASHTO T141 and T-23. These samples will be tested for compressive strength in accordance to AASHTO T22. Concrete samples will be taken in accordance with MAG 725.8.2 and 725.8.3 except as noted hereinafter. One set of not less than four (4) cylinders per fifty (50) cubic yards or ½ days pour shall be prepared and retained to verify compressive strength of the mixture. One (1) cylinder shall be tested at seven (7) days and two (2) at twenty-eight (28) days. The fourth (4th) cylinder shall be retained for up to sixty (60) days. If the 28-day test does not meet the minimum strength requirement, cores shall be taken as provided herein and the cost of such will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Acceptance shall be based on minimum 28-day strength requirements. The cost of testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
00001-1
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 00001
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 INSURANCE
A. The policies of insurance required by this Contract: 1. Shall contain a cross liability or severability of interest clause or endorsement.
Insurance covering the specified additional insured shall be primary insurance, and all other insurance carried by the additional insured shall be excess insurance; and
2. With respect to workers' compensation and employer's liability, comprehensive automobile liability, commercial general liability, and umbrella liability insurance, CONTRACTOR shall require CONTRACTOR's insurance carriers to waive all rights of subrogation against OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, and agents.
B. CONTRACTOR shall provide completed operations coverage insurance: 1. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment. 2. CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in
MAG 103.D., to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.
1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. The Contract. 2. Call for Bids. 3. Performance Bond. 4. Payment Bond. 5. Certificates of Insurance. 6. General Conditions. 7. Special Provisions. 8. Specifications. 9. Drawings. 10. Addenda. 11. Change Orders. 12. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):
a. CONTRACTOR's Proposal, as accepted by the Mayor and Council per Council Minutes of 2012.
1.3 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE FOR CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. In the event a conflict exists between Contract Documents, the order of precedence listed in descending order shall be as follows: 1. Change Orders. 2. Addenda.
00001-2
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Special Provisions. 4. Project Technical Specifications 5. Project Drawings. 6. City of Prescott Technical Specifications. 7. City of Prescott Typical Details. 8. Contracting Agency’s supplements to the MAG Uniform Standard Specifications and
Details. 9. MAG Uniform Standard Specifications. 10. MAG Standard Details.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Substantial Completion: The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
B. Field Order: A written order issued by ENGINEER which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
C. Work Change Directive: A written statement to CONTRACTOR issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.
1.5 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive.
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A field order; 2. ENGINEER’s approval of a shop drawing or sample; or 3. ENGINEER’s written interpretation or clarification.
1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
A. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.
00001-3
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
1.7 MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction conference: 1. Purpose:
a. To establish working understanding between parties and to discuss construction schedule, shop drawing and other submittals, cost breakdown of major lump sum items, processing of submittals and applications for payment, and other subjects pertinent to execution of the Work.
2. Presider: ENGINEER. 3. Attendees:
a. CONTRACTOR's superintendent, OWNER, ENGINEER, representatives of utilities, major subcontractors and others involved in performance of the Work, and others necessary to agenda.
4. Timing: a. Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable.
5. Location: Place convenient for majority of attendees. 6. Notification:
a. Distribute to each anticipated participant written notice and agenda at least 4 days before meeting
7. Agenda including: a. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. b. Distribution and discussion of list of major subcontractors and suppliers. c. Proposed progress schedules and critical construction sequencing. d. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. e. Project coordination. f. Designation of responsible personnel. g. Procedures and processing of:
1) Field decisions. 2) Proposal requests. 3) Submittals. 4) Change Orders. 5) Applications for Payment. 6) Record Documents.
h. Use of premises: 1) Office, construction, and storage areas. 2) OWNER's requirements.
i. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. j. Shoring requirements and submittal of CONTRACTOR’s geotechnical report. k. Temporary utilities. l. Safety and first aid procedures. m. Security procedures. n. Housekeeping procedures.
8. Minutes: a. ENGINEER will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within
7 days of meeting to participants and interested parties.
B. Progress meetings:
00001-4
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Purpose: a. To expedite Work, resolve conflicts, and coordinate and expedite execution of
the Work. 2. Presider: CONTRACTOR. 3. Attendees:
a. Required: CONTRACTOR's superintendent and subcontractors who are or are proximate to be actively involved in the Work, or who are necessary to agenda.
b. Invite, optional attendance: OWNER and ENGINEER, utility companies when the Work affects their interests, and others necessary to agenda.
4. Timing: At least once per week. 5. Location:
a. CONTRACTOR's field office, ENGINEER's field office, or other mutually agreed upon place.
6. Notification: a. Distribute to each anticipated participant written notice and agenda at least
4 days before meeting. 7. Agenda:
a. Review progress of the Work, Progress Schedule, narrative report, Application for Payment, record documents, discuss potential problems which may impede scheduled progress and corrective measures, and additional items of current interest that are pertinent to execution of the Work.
8. Minutes: a. ENGINEER will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within
7 days of meeting to participants and interested parties.
C. Pre-installation meetings: 1. Purpose:
a. Meet with manufacturers and installers of major units of construction, which require coordination between subcontractors.
b. Major units of construction which require pre-installation meetings include: 1) Waterproofing. 2) Roofing. 3) SCADA and PLC equipment. 4) Imported engineered fill.
2. Presider: CONTRACTOR. 3. Attendees:
a. Required: Superintendent, appropriate manufacturers and installers of major units of constructions, and affected subcontractors.
b. Invite, optional attendance: OWNER and ENGINEER. 4. Timing: Schedule meeting at least 7 days in advance of installation. 5. Location: CONTRACTOR's field office or other mutually agreed upon place. 6. Notification:
a. Distribute to each anticipated participant written notice and agenda at least 4 days before meeting.
7. Agenda: a. Discuss installation coordination, sequence, contingency plans, roles and
responsibilities. 8. Minutes:
a. CONTRACTOR will record minutes of meeting and distribute copies of minutes within 3 days of meeting to participants and interested parties.
00001-5
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.8 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by Laws and Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property.
B. Use construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads.
C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to assure adequate load bearing capability. 1. When requested, submit design calculations by professional registered engineer
prior to application of loads. 2. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only.
D. Accident prevention: 1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and
property. 2. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations. 3. Guard machinery and equipment, and eliminate other hazards. 4. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety
inspections of the Work. 5. Before commencing construction Work, take necessary action to comply with
provisions for safety and accident prevention.
E. Barricades: 1. Place barriers at ends of excavations and along excavations to warn pedestrian and
vehicular traffic of excavations. 2. Provide barriers with flashing lights after dark. 3. Keep barriers in place until excavations are entirely backfilled and compacted. 4. Barricade excavations to prevent persons from entering excavated areas in streets,
roadways, parking lots, treatment plants, or other public or private areas.
F. Warning devices and barricades: 1. Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas and conditions by visual warning
devices and, where necessary, physical barriers. 2. Devices shall conform to minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency which
administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.
G. Hazards in public right-of-way: 1. Mark at reasonable intervals, trenches and other continuous excavations in public
right-of-way, running parallel to general flow of traffic, with traffic cones, barricades, or other suitable visual markers during daylight hours. a. During hours of darkness, provide markers with torches, flashers, or other
adequate lights. 2. At intersections or for pits and similar excavations, where traffic may reasonably be
expected to approach head on, protect excavations by continuous barricades. a. During hours of darkness, provide warning lights at close intervals.
H. Hazards in protected areas:
00001-6
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard.
I. Above grade protection: 1. On multi-level structures, provide safety protection that meets requirements of
OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.
J. Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on Project site from injury, damage or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or other agents with substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with hazards.
K. Fences: 1. Enclose site of the Work with fence adequate to protect the Work against acts of
theft, violence and vandalism, and to prevent livestock from escaping during construction.
2. Fences shall not interfere with OWNER’s operation and maintenance of the facility. 3. Enclose temporary offices and storage areas with fence adequate to protect
temporary facilities against acts of theft, violence and vandalism. 4. When entire or part of site is to be permanently fenced, permanent fence may be
built to serve for both permanent and temporary protection of the Work site, provided that damaged or defaced fencing is replaced prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Protect temporary and permanent openings and close openings in existing fences to prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons.
6. Bear responsibility for protection of plant and material on site of the work when openings in existing fences are not closed.
7. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is performed at site, provide temporary closures or enlist services of security guards to protect temporary openings.
8. Fence temporary openings when openings are no longer necessary.
1.9 SECURITY
A. Make adequate provision for protection of the Work area against fire, theft, and vandalism, and for protection of public against exposure to injury.
B. Description: 1. CONTRACTOR shall safely guard all Work, materials, equipment, and property from
loss, theft, damage, and vandalism. 2. CONTRACTOR's duty to safely guard property shall include the OWNER’s property
and other private property from injury or loss in connection with the performance of the Contract.
3. Employ security staff as needed to provide the required security and prevent unauthorized entry.
4. CONTRACTOR shall make no claim against the OWNER for damage resulting from trespass.
5. Party responsible for security shall make good all damage to property of OWNER and others arising from failure to provide adequate security.
00001-7
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
6. If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to the existing in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and OWNER.
7. Security measures taken by the CONTRACTOR shall be at least equal to those usually provided by OWNER to protect his existing facilities during normal operation.
8. Maintain security program throughout construction until OWNER's acceptance and occupancy precludes need for CONTRACTOR's security program.
9. All costs for security as specified in this Section shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
C. CONTRACTOR's access to the Site: 1. For work on the Project Site, coordinate with the OWNER to obtain access
requirements and protocols prior to initiating work. 2. CONTRACTOR shall stage all equipment, materials, vehicles, trailers, etc within the
site walls. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that each of his employees, representatives,
material men, suppliers, and other acting for the CONTRACTOR shall be subject to the following regulations: a. Names of all CONTRACTOR's employees and subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers' employees requiring entrance to the site shall be listed on a security roster maintained at the Site entrance.
b. At all times CONTRACTOR's employees and subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers' employees entering the site shall be required to show photo identification (ID) to Site security/personnel before entering. Acceptable IDs are valid drivers license issued in the United States, state issued ID, employer issued ID, military ID, and driver’s license issued outside the United States and a work permit. Names on the ID must match the names listed on the security roster. In the event a construction "day labor" does not have the required photo ID, the Construction Superintendent for the CONTRACTOR may take responsibility for the person, including supervision of the laborer on the site at all times. Signatures of all persons entering the site will be required.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall notify Site security/personnel at the Site entrance of all scheduled deliveries to the site. Notification shall be provided 2 to 3 hours prior to delivery and shall include: expected time of arrival, the security seal number or listing of merchandise to be delivered, type of chemicals being delivered (if applicable), a fax copy of the driver's name, picture ID, and delivery vehicle license plate number.
d. CONTRACTOR's subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers' employees shall not park anywhere other than the CONTRACTOR Employee's Parking Area. The area shall be designated by the ENGINEER, as indicated on the Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and maintain this area, as required.
e. All work vehicles, including those belonging to CONTRACTOR, his employees and subcontractors, his material men and suppliers entering the Project Site shall conform to all security and safety regulations in force at the site, and in addition, must display a vehicle tag in the windshield while on the Project Site. The vehicle tag shall be 3 inches by 5 inches permanently mounted to the windshield (lower left-hand corner). The vehicle tag shall be green and identify the CONTRACTOR, subcontractor, etc.
f. Personal vehicles shall not be allowed outside the employee parking area (as indicated on the Drawings).
00001-8
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
g. Delivery vehicles shall access the project site through the off-site construction area as used by the CONTRACTOR.
h. Access to the site from any other entrance is strictly prohibited. Violators shall be banned from the site.
1.10 PROJECT SIGN
A. Provide and maintain Project identification sign consisting of painted 8 foot wide by 4 foot high exterior grade plywood and minimum 10 foot long 4 by 4 lumber posts, set in ground at least 3 feet, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter using no more than 5 sign colors. 1. List at least the title of the Project, and names of the OWNER, ENGINEER, and
CONTRACTOR. 2. CONTRACTOR’s and ENGINEER’s names shall be identified in upper right hand
corner underneath the bid number.
B. Provide Project Sign as a minimum at the planned entrances to the site as indicated on the Drawings and at any CONTRACTOR developed entrances and as directed by OWNER.
1.11 SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design requirements: 1. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code:
a. Design spectral acceleration at short period, SDS: 0.36. b. Design spectral acceleration at long period, SD1: 0.17. c. Site Class: C d. Seismic Importance Factor, IE: 1.50. e. Seismic Design Category: D f. Component amplification factor, ap: In accordance with ASCE 7-05, “Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1. g. Component response modification factor, Rp: In accordance with ASCE 7-05,
“Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
h. Component importance factor, Ip: 1.00. 2. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces. 3. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the mechanical and electrical
equipment for designing anchors for resisting overturning due to seismic forces. 4. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the tank for resisting overturning
due to seismic forces. 5. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic forces.
Anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex bolt head. Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J-shape.
6. Do not use chemical anchors, concrete anchors, flush shells, powder actuated fasteners, sleeve anchors, or other types of anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
7. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to resist seismic forces. Do not use connections that use friction to resist seismic forces.
B. Submittals:
00001-9
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic calculations. 2. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed
in the state where the Project is located.
1.12 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design requirements: 1. Building code criteria: Design for wind in accordance with building code:
a. Occupancy category: III. b. Basic wind speed: 90 miles per hour. c. Exposure category: C. d. Topographic factor, Ktz: 1.0. e. Wind importance factor, Iw: 1.15.
2. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting wind forces. Anchor bolts used to resist wind forces shall have a standard hex bolt head. Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L- or J-shape: a. Do not use concrete anchors, sleeve anchors, flush shells, chemical anchors,
powder actuated fasteners, or other types of anchor unless indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
b. Wind forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the anchors used to resist wind forces. Do not use connections which use friction to resist wind forces.
1.13 SUBMITTALS: 1. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and wind design
calculations. 2. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a Civil or Structural Engineer licensed
in the state where the Project is located.
1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Submittals: 1. Cutting and patching plan:
a. Submit details of proposed construction before cutting and patching construction commences affecting: 1) Work of OWNER or of others. 2) Structural integrity of element of Project.
b. Cutting and patching plan shall include the following: 1) Identification of Work. 2) Description of affected construction. 3) Necessity for cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. 4) Description of proposed construction. 5) Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
B. Preparation: 1. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure structural integrity of
affected portion of Work. 2. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage and
persons from injury. 3. Provide protection from elements for that portion of Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching, and maintain excavations free from water.
00001-10
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Execution: 1. Cut, fit, and patch when required to:
a. Make its several parts fit together properly. b. Remove and replace construction not conforming to Contract Documents. c. Remove samples of installed construction as specified for testing. d. Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of piping
and electrical conduit. 2. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage and will
provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. 3. Openings in existing concrete and masonry:
a. Create openings by: 1) Saw cutting completely through concrete or masonry. 2) Scoring edges of opening with saw to at least 1-inch depth on both surfaces
(when accessible) and removing concrete or masonry by chipping. b. Do not allow saw cuts to extend beyond limits of opening. c. Make corners square and true by combination of core drilling and grinding or
chipping. d. Prevent debris from falling into adjacent tanks or channels in service or from
damaging existing equipment and other facilities. 4. Sizing of openings in existing concrete or masonry:
a. Make openings sufficiently large to permit final alignment of pipe and fittings without deflections.
b. Allow adequate space for packing around pipes and conduit to ensure watertightness.
5. Grouting pipes in place: a. Sandblast concrete surfaces and thoroughly clean sand and other foreign
material from surfaces prior to placing grout. b. Grout pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits in place by pouring grout under a
head of at least 4 inches. Vibrate grout into place. Completely fill the spaces occupied by pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits.
c. Water cure the grout. 6. Connections to existing pipes:
a. Cut existing pipe square. b. Properly prepare the ends for the connection indicated on the Drawings. c. Repair any damage to existing lining and coating.
7. Rehabilitate all areas affected by removal of existing equipment, equipment pads and bases, piping, supports, electrical panels, electric devices, and conduits such that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains: a. Fill areas in existing floors, walls, and ceilings from removed piping, conduit and
fasteners with non-shrink grout and finish smooth. b. Remove concrete bases for equipment and supports by:
1) Saw cutting clean, straight lines with a depth equal to the concrete cover over reinforcement minus 1/2 inch below finished surface. Do not cut existing reinforcement on floors.
2) Chip concrete within scored lines and cut exposed reinforcing steel and anchor bolts.
3) Patch with non-shrink grout to match adjacent grade and finish. c. Terminate abandoned piping and conduits with blind flanges, caps, or plugs.
8. Treat existing concrete reinforcement as follows:
00001-11
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Where existing reinforcement is to remain, protect, clean, and extend into new concrete.
b. Where existing reinforcement is not to be retained, cut off as follows: 1) Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, cut
reinforcement flush with concrete surface at the removal line. 2) Where concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, cut
reinforcement 2 inches below the surface, paint ends with epoxy, and patch holes with dry pack mortar.
1.15 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit following Closeout Submittals upon completion of the Work and at least 7 days prior to submitting Application for Final Payment: 1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Warranties and Bonds. 5. Keys and Keying Schedule. 6. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens as outlined in Conditions of the Contract. 7. Release of claims. 8. Survey Record Documents. 9. Certificate of Final Completion.
1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Preparation: 2. Provide hardcopy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring binders with rigid
covers. Utilize numbered tab sheets to organize information. 3. Provide electronic copy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in PDF format. 4. Provide original and clear text on reproducible non-colored paper. 5. Provide all dimensions in English units.
B. Contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Cover page:
a. Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name, OWNER's name, appropriate date.
2. Table of Contents: a. General description of information provided within each tab section.
3. Equipment Summary Form: a. Completed form in the format shown in Appendix A. b. The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable.
4. Lubrication information: a. Required lubricants and lubrication schedules.
5. Control diagrams: a. Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams for
control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and connections between existing systems and new additions, and adjustments such as calibrations and set points for relays, and control or alarm contact settings.
b. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control system. c. Complete set of control schematics.
6. Programming:
00001-12
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Copies of all CONTRACTOR furnished programming. 7. Start-up procedures:
a. Recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting. 8. Operating procedures:
a. Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment under specified modes of operation.
b. Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown instructions. 9. Preventative maintenance procedures:
a. Recommended steps and schedules for maintaining equipment. 10. Overhaul instructions:
a. Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair and reassembly of the equipment; safety precautions; and recommended tolerances, critical bolt torques, and special tools that are required.
11. Parts list: a. Complete parts list for all equipment being provided. b. Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished including generic title and
identification number of each component part of equipment. 1) Include bearing manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass frequencies for
every bearing. 12. Spare parts list:
a. Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and special storage precautions.
13. Drawings: a. Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts. b. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment. c. Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings.
14. Source (factory) quality control test results: a. Provide copies of factory test reports.
15. Field quality control test results: a. After field-testing is completed, insert field test reports.
1.17 SPECIFICATION CLARIFICATIONS
A. The following City of Prescott MAG Supplement Specification Sections are not applicable to this Work: SECTION TITLE
200.2 BY-PASS PUMPING (SEWER)211 FILL CONSTRUCTION306 MECHANICALLY STABILIZED SUBGRADE – GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT317 ASPHALT MILLING321 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT326 PAVEMENT MATCHING AND SURFACING REPLACEMENT 329 TACK COAT
340 CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK, SIDEWALK RAMPS, DRIVEWAY, & ALLEY ENTRANCE
345 345 ADJUSTING FRAMES, COVERS, VALVE BOXES, WATER METER BOXES AND PULL BOXES
00001-13
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION TITLE
350.6.1 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPE 401 TRAFFIC CONTROL402.2 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS402.3 TEMPORARY STRIPING402.4 PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS403.1 PERMANENT SIGNING, SIGN POSTS AND DELINEATORS 404 LOOP DETECTORS430 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTING431 REMOVE AND REPLACE LANDSCAPE ROCK 505.1.1A CONCRETE DRAINAGE OUTLET/STRUCTURE505.1.1B CONCRETE HEADWALL505.1.1C CONCRETE CATCH BASIN505.1.1D SCUPPER 505.1.1E CONCRETE RETAINING WALL610.11 METER SERVICE CONNECTIONS610.9 FIRE HYDRANTS615.7 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE650 ABANDONMENT AND REMOVAL OF WATER MAIN
710 ASPHALT CONCRETE
B. The following MAG Specification Sections are subordinate to, and shall be supplemented by the corresponding City of Prescott MAG Specification Supplement sections, and/or the DIV 1-17 Technical Specification sections, as tabulated below. Where any conflict arises between the specifications, the more stringent requirement applies. It is NOT the intent of the following table to provide a comprehensive correlation of the various Project Specifications or expunge the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to review and act in accordance with ALL Contract Documents.
MAG (SUBORDINATE)
CITY OF PRESCOTT MAG SPECIFICATION SUPPLEMENT DIV 1-17
N/A 100.1 -- N/A 100.2 -- N/A 100.3 -- N/A 100.4 -- 101 101.1 01420 104 104.1.4 01110 105 105.6, 105.8, 105.16 01330,
1400 106 106, 106.2, 106.9 01330,
1400
00001-14
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
MAG (SUBORDINATE)
CITY OF PRESCOTT MAG SPECIFICATION SUPPLEMENT DIV 1-17
107 107.6, 107.9, 107.15 -- 108 108.4 -- 109 109.1, 109.11 01200 110 -- 01200 200 200.1 02200 205 205.2 02300 206 206 02300 310 310 02300 420 -- 02830 505 505 3300,
03400 510 -- 04200 515 -- 05500 530 -- 09900 601 601 608 -- 02158 610 610 15100 611 -- 15990,
15995 621 -- 630 -- 15120,
15200 701 -- -- 701 -- -- 725 -- 3300 726 -- 3300 727 -- 3200 729 -- -- 760 -- -- 770
5051
772 -- -- 775 -- -- 742 -- 3400 796 -- --
+ + END OF SECTION + +
00001-15
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
APPENDIX A EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM
1. EQUIPMENT ITEM 2. MANUFACTURER 3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(S)
(maps equipment number) 4. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT _____________________________________________ 5. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS)
6. NAMEPLATE DATA Horsepower
Amperage Voltage Service Factor (S.F.) Speed ENC Type Capacity Other
7. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE
Name
Address
Telephone Number
8. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
9. LUBRICANT LIST
10. SPARE PARTS (recommendations)
11. COMMENTS
00001-16
City of Prescott March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
01110-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01110
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Work covers the construction of City of Prescott, Zone 12 Interconnect Booster Pump Station and performing related required work, located as shown on these Drawings and Specifications.
B. The Work is located at the intersection of Pioneer Parkway and Willow Creek Road, on the South-West corner, just north of Pinon Oaks Subdivision.
C. The Work will be constructed under one contract. The Contract Documents include the following: 1. Volume 1 – Bid Documents, Specifications and Standard Details. 2. Volume 2 – Drawings
1.2 COORDINATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for coordination of all of the Work of this Contract.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall supervise, direct and cooperate fully with all Subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, distributors, installers, testing agencies and all others whose services, materials or equipment are required to ensure completion of the Work within the Contract Time.
C. Work of Others: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with and coordinate CONTRACTOR’s Work with the
work of any other contractor, utility service companies, or OWNER’s employees performing work at the site.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall also coordinate their Work with the work of others to assure compliance with schedules.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall attend and participate in all project coordination or progress meetings and report on the progress of all Work and compliance with schedules.
4. If any part of the work depends upon the work of others for proper execution or results, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to the ENGINEER any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work of others that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.
5. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of others as fit and proper except as to defects which may develop in the work of others after execution of the work by the CONTRACTOR.
D. Interference with work on utilities: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with all utility forces of the OWNER or forces
of other public or private agencies engaged in the relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities which interfere with the progress of the work.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the work so as to minimize interference with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities.
01110-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. Responsibility for Damage: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for damage done by CONTRACTORs not
under their jurisdiction. 2. The CONTRACTOR will not be liable for any such loss or damage, unless it is through
the negligence of the CONTRACTOR.
1.3 WORK BY OTHERS
A. OWNER will perform the following work: 1. Operation of all existing system valves and equipment, unless specified otherwise.
B. CONTRACTOR to coordinate with System Integrator for panel design and all associated items for complete operable system.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Investigation and Representation 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to the nature and
location of the work, the general and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon availability of transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads, and uncertainties of weather, tide stages, or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation and conditions of the ground, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work and all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under this Contract.
2. The CONTRACTOR further acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials to be encountered from inspecting the site and from evaluating information derived from exploratory work that may have been done by the OWNER or included in these Contract Documents. Any failure by the CONTRACTOR to become acquainted with all the available information will not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for properly estimating the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work.
3. Field Verification: a. Before undertaking each part of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully study
and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements.
b. As the work proceeds, the CONTRACTOR shall field verify the depth and location of all buried utilities, and existing systems, and location of hazardous waste and contaminants.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to the ENGINEER any conflict, error, or discrepancy which the CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from the ENGINEER before proceeding with any work affected thereby.
B. Existing Utilities and Improvements 1. Location of Underground Utilities:
a. Known existing underground conduits, pipelines and other utilities have been shown on the contract drawings in their approximate locations (within 3 feet of actual location). However, the accuracy or completeness of utilities indicated on the drawings is not guaranteed.
b. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to determine the exact location of all utilities and their service connections.
01110-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
c. All potholing or other procedures for verifying utility location shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as necessary to prepare for excavation at least 4 working days in advance of scheduled excavation.
d. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the ENGINEER as to any utility located by him which has been incorrectly shown or omitted from the drawings.
e. If the CONTRACTOR cannot locate an underground utility whose presence is indicated on the Drawings, the ENGINEER shall be notified in writing.
f. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the exact locations of underground utilities whose presence is indicated on the Drawings, the locations of their service laterals work and of service laterals or appurtenances of any other underground utilities which can be inferred from the presence of visible facilities such as buildings, meters and junction boxes prior to doing work that may damage such utilities or interfere with their service.
g. Utilities Not Shown on Drawings: 1) Attention is directed to the possible existence of underground utilities not
indicated on the Drawings and to the possibility that underground utilities may be in a location different from that indicated on the Drawings.
2) If the ENGINEER determines that the underground utility for which such notice has been given has not been depicted on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy (within 3 feet of actual location), the additional cost incurred in locating the utility will be paid for as extra work as provided in the General Conditions.
3) If the CONTRACTOR discovers underground an utility not indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately give the ENGINEER and the Utility Company written notification of the existence of such utility.
4) Such utilities shall be located and protected from damages as directed by the ENGINEER and the cost of such work will be paid for as extra work as provided in the General Conditions.
2. Utility Coordination: a. The CONTRACTOR shall notify Underground Service Alert (USA) at least 4 days
prior to excavation, telephone (800) 642-2444. b. The CONTRACTOR shall also contact all utility owners not registered with USA but
known to have utilities in the project area to field locate underground utilities at least 4 days prior to excavation.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall notify all owners of utilities when the Work is in progress and shall make arrangements as are necessary to make any emergency repairs.
d. Existing utilities that are shown or that are made known and located to the CONTRACTOR prior to excavation, and that are to be retained; and all utilities that are constructed during excavation operations shall be properly supported and protected from damage during the progress of the work.
3. Utility Protection and Damage: a. Existing utilities that are shown or that are made known and located to the
CONTRACTOR prior to excavation, and that are to be retained, and all utilities that are constructed during excavation operations shall be properly supported and protected from damage during the progress of the work.
b. Should any damage to a utility occur during the progress of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER or the utility at once and render all assistance possible to repair the damage and restore the service.
c. No extra compensation will be made for the repair of any services or utility damaged by the CONTRACTOR nor for any damage incurred through neglect or failure to provide adequate protection to existing utilities.
d. The provisions of this Section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after backfilling or is not discovered until after completion of the backfilling.
01110-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
e. Damaged water pipelines will be repaired by the OWNER at the CONTRACTOR's expense. If the CONTRACTOR fails to pay the cost of repairs to water pipelines within thirty days of receipt of the invoice, the OWNER reserves the right to withhold the amount owed from the CONTRACTOR's Progress Payment.
f. Damage Report: 1) In the event that the CONTRACTOR damages any underground utilities not
shown on the Drawings or not depicted on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy (within 3 feet of actual location) or any lateral service the location of which could not be inferred by the CONTRACTOR, a written report thereof shall be made immediately to the ENGINEER.
2) The CONTRACTOR's report shall also advise the ENGINEER of any schedule delays. Compensation for such delays will be determined in accordance with the General Conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no other compensation for any such damage.
4. All utilities encountered along the line of the work shall remain continuously in service during all work under the Contract, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or unless other arrangements satisfactory to the ENGINEER are made with the owner of said utilities.
C. CONTRACTOR's Responsibility for Utility Facilities and Service 1. Where the CONTRACTOR's operations could cause damage or inconvenience to
railway, telephone, television, power, oil, gas, water, sewer, or irrigation systems, the CONTRACTOR shall make all arrangements necessary for the protection of these utilities and services.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely and directly responsible to the owner and operators of such properties for any damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits, actions, or claims of any character brought because of any injuries or damage which may result from the construction operations under this Contract.
3. Neither the OWNER nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the CONTRACTOR for damages as a result of the CONTRACTOR's failure to protect utilities encountered in the work.
4. In no event shall interruption of any utility service be allowed outside working hours unless granted by the owner of the utility.
5. No sand, mud, rocks or other construction debris shall be disposed of in the sanitary sewers or storm sewers.
6. Where bypassing of sewage is required to perform sewer repairs or service relocations and where temporary pumps are required to bypass any sewage across traffic lanes, the discharge lines crossing the traffic lanes shall be buried a minimum of 4 inches below the pavement surface and backfilled with temporary asphalt concrete surfacing. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary steps to assure continuous flow of sewage. Bypassing of untreated wastewater to surface waters or courses will not be permitted.
7. The CONTRACTOR shall replace, at its own expense, any and all existing utilities or structures removed or damaged during construction, to their existing condition unless otherwise provided for in these Contract Documents.
8. The CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace, at its own expense, all pavement damaged during the construction, to its existing condition unless otherwise provided for in these Contract Documents.
D. Names of Known Utilities Serving the Area 1. The following is a list of the known public utilities serving the area:
a. See Drawings
E. Railroads
01110-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. The CONTRACTOR shall not perform work or occupy any part of railroad property without a permit authorizing the same.
F. Interfering Structures 1. The CONTRACTOR shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing
structures whether on the surface, aboveground, or underground. An attempt has been made to show major structures on the Drawings. While the information has been compiled from the best available sources, its completeness and accuracy cannot be guaranteed, and it is presented as a guide to avoid possible difficulties.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items on the project site that are to be preserved, by substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with the hazard, from injury or destruction by vehicles, equipment, workmen, or other agents.
3. Where existing fences, gates, buildings, or any other structure must be removed to properly carry out the work, or are damaged during the work, they shall be restored at the CONTRACTOR's expense to their original condition or better.
4. Without additional compensation, the CONTRACTOR may remove and replace in a condition as good as or better than original, any small structures such as fences, and signposts that interfere with the CONTRACTOR's operations.
G. Field Relocation 1. During the progress of construction, it is expected that minor relocations of the work
will be necessary. 2. Such relocations shall be made only by direction of the ENGINEER. 3. If existing structures are encountered that will prevent construction as shown, notify
the ENGINEER before continuing with the work in order that the ENGINEER may make such field revisions as necessary to avoid conflict with the existing structures.
4. If the CONTRACTOR shall fail to notify the ENGINEER when an existing structure is encountered, and shall proceed with the work despite this interference, CONTACTOR shall do so at their own risk.
5. Any CONTRACTOR request(s) for additional compensation or contract time resulting from necessary field relocations will be considered as set forth in the General Conditions.
6. If the CONTRACTOR fails to notify the ENGINEER when a structure which interferes with construction is encountered, and proceeds with the work despite this obstruction, the CONTRACTOR shall do so at their own risk and at no additional cost to the OWNER.
1.5 REFERENCE POINTS AND SURVEYS
A. Location and elevation of bench marks are shown on Drawings.
B. Dimensions for lines and elevations for grades of structures, appurtenances, and utilities are indicated on Drawings, together with other pertinent information required for laying out Work. If conditions vary from those indicated, notify OWNER immediately, who will make minor adjustments required.
C. OWNER may perform checks to verify accuracy of CONTRACTOR's layout Work and that completed Work complies with Contract Documents.
D. Any existing survey points or other control markers destroyed without proper authorization will be replaced by owner of the survey points or control markers at CONTRACTOR's expense.
01110-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities: 1. Provide all survey and layout required. 2. Locate and protect reference points prior to starting site preparation. 3. Notify OWNER at least 3 working days in advance of time when grade and line to be
provided by others will be needed. 4. Check and establish exact location of existing facilities prior to construction of new
facilities and any connections thereto. 5. In event of discrepancy in data provided by OWNER, request clarification before
proceeding with Work. 6. Provide cut sheets for all staking. 7. Preserve and leave undisturbed control staking until ENGINEER has completed checks
it deems necessary. 8. Re-establish reference points resulting from destruction by CONTRACTOR's
operations. 9. Cooperate with ENGINEER so that checking and measuring may be accomplished with
least interference to CONTRACTOR's operations.
1.6 SEQUENCE AND PROGRESS OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a Construction Schedule covering the entire Work in accordance with Section 01320, Progress Schedule.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall incorporate the requirements of Section 01130, Special Project Constraints, into the Construction Schedule.
C. Alternate Sequence: 1. The CONTRACTOR’s schedule may use a different sequence from that shown or
specified, if techniques and methods known to the CONTRACTOR will result in cost and time savings to the OWNER, still achieve the required objective and maintain the same or greater level of treatment.
2. The ENGINEER’s determination on the acceptability of any alternative sequence from that shown or specified shall be final.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate use of the premises, for the CONTRACTOR’s storage and the operations of the CONTRACTOR’s workmen, with OWNER and utility service companies.
B. Restriction of Work Area: 1. The full use of the premises for storage, the operations of workmen and for all other
construction activities will not be available to the CONTRACTOR. 2. The CONTRACTOR must operate entirely within the space allowed to the
CONTRACTOR. 3. CONTRACTOR to coordinate with the OWNER for laydown area before mobilization.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for obtaining and paying all costs in connection with any additional work area, storage sites, access to the site or temporary right-of-way, which may be required for proper completion of the Work.
D. Limitations on Use of Work Area: 1. It shall be understood that responsibility for protection and safe-keeping of equipment
and materials on or near the site will be entirely that of the CONTRACTOR and that no
01110-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
claim shall be made against the OWNER or their authorized representatives by reason of any act.
2. It shall be further understood that should any occasion arise necessitating access to the sites occupied by these stored materials or equipment, the ENGINEER shall direct the CONTRACTOR owning or responsible for the stored materials and equipment to immediately move the same.
3. No materials or equipment may be placed upon the property of the OWNER, other than in the designated areas as shown on the Drawings, unless the ENGINEER has agreed to the location contemplated by the CONTRACTOR to be used for storage.
4. All stored materials shall be labeled according to the appropriate contractor or Subcontractor with the manufacturer's label as well.
5. Appropriate material safety data sheets (e.g., MSDS) shall be provided.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to share use of the premises with other Contractors whose services the OWNER has obtained or will obtain for construction of other facilities on the site.
1.8 USE OF OWNER’S FACILITIES
A. The CONTRACTOR may use existing facilities or equipment in the Work for construction purposes, only if the OWNER’s written permission is obtained.
B. Restore existing facilities and equipment used for temporary purposes to original condition in a manner satisfactory to OWNER.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
++ END OF SECTION ++
01130-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01130
SPECIAL PROJECT CONSTRAINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 LIMIT OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ON WORK SITE
A. Traffic Control: 1. During non-work hours, the CONTRACTOR shall keep all lanes of traffic open
and clear. All trenches shall be backfilled or covered with suitable steel plates and open to traffic.
2. No equipment, construction material or excavated material that will interfere with traffic shall be stored on streets or roadways at any time.
1.2 SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. General: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule and sequence their work in order to
complete the Work by the specified completion date. 2. The OWNER’s wastewater treatment plant and wastewater collection system
must remain operational at all times. 3. Re-vegetation of graded areas shall take place as quickly as possible as
weather permits.
1.3 PROJECT CONSTRAINTS
A. Maintenance of OWNER’s Operations: 1. Constraints listed herein involve limits on activities during construction. These
limits relate to the critical nature of the existing water system. 2. Continuous operation of OWNER's facilities is of critical importance. Schedule
and conduct activities to enable existing facilities to operate continuously, unless otherwise specified.
3. Work Plan: a. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed Work Plan and time schedule for
all construction activities that will make it necessary to remove a tank, pipeline, electrical circuit, equipment, structure, road or other facilities from service, including the critical outages identified herein.
b. The Work Plan shall, at a minimum, identifying: 1) the date and time when each activity will occur; 2) what equipment will be present including standby equipment; 3) what assistance will be required by OWNER’s operating personnel; 4) an emergency backup plan identifying what action will be taken if Work
cannot be completed within the allotted time; and 5) what individual will be in charge of the activity.
c. Submit Work Plan 10 days prior to the scheduled activity. 4. Perform Work continuously during critical connections and changeovers, and
as required to prevent interruption of OWNER's operations.
01130-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
5. Shutdowns: a. Coordinate proposed Work with OWNER and facility operations personnel
before affecting unit shutdowns. The CONTRACTOR shall provide written confirmation of the shutdown date and time two (2) working days prior to the actual shutdown.
b. Under no circumstances shall the CONTRACTOR cease Work at the end of a normal working day or at the end of a working week if such actions may inadvertently cause a cessation of any facility operating process, in which case, remain onsite until necessary repairs are complete.
6. Do not close lines, open valves or gates, shut down equipment, or take other action which would affect the operation of existing systems, except as specifically required by the Contract Documents and after approval of OWNER.
7. Do not proceed with Work affecting a facility's operation without obtaining OWNER's advance approval of the need for and duration of such Work.
B. Relocation of Existing Facilities: 1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of Work will be
necessary. 2. Provide complete relocation of existing structures and Underground Facilities,
including piping, utilities, equipment, structures, electrical conduit wiring, electrical duct bank, and other necessary items.
3. Use only new materials for relocated facility. Match materials of existing facility, unless otherwise shown or specified.
4. Perform relocations to minimize downtime of existing facilities. 5. Install new portions of existing facilities in their relocated position prior to
removal of existing facilities, unless otherwise accepted by OWNER.
C. Overtime: 1. Conduct Work outside regular working hours on prior written consent of
OWNER to meet Project schedule and avoid undesirable conditions. 2. All overtime Work by the CONTRACTOR necessary to conform to the
requirements of this Section and related Sections shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR, at no cost to the OWNER and shall be performed in accordance with the General Conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall make no claims for extra compensation as a result thereof.
1.4 SCHEDULED SHUTDOWNS AND CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING CONSTRAINTS
A. Scheduled Shutdowns: 1. The scheduled shutdowns during the period of the CONTRACTOR’S Work will
be as shown in Table 01130-A 2. All Work requiring the OWNER’s facilities to be out-of-service shall be
performed during the scheduled shutdowns shown. 3. The OWNER’s staff will continue to perform administrative, operation and
maintenance functions during shutdowns.
01130-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Critical work sequencing constraints are described in this paragraph. Work not specifically covered in this Section may, in general, be done anytime during the contract period.
C. Key work sequencing constraints are as follows: 1. Hot tap existing 12” distribution main and install isolation valves. Coordinate with
OWNER, if system isolation is required. 2. Construct Zone 12 BPS. 3. Pressure test the pipes. 4. Disinfect the piping system and all associated components. 5. Connect pipe with isolation valves. 6. Project completion.
TABLE 01130-A SCHEDULED SHUTDOWNS
AREA/ITEMS
SHUT-DOWN
FACILITY SUBSTANTIAL/ FINAL COMPLETION & CONSTRAINTS
Installing 18” x 12” tapping
sleeve (2 location)
- Distribution System Tapping sleeves to be
installed keeping distribution system in service
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
This page was intentionally left blank
01200-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01200
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Payment will be made at the price bid for each item listed on the bidding form or as extra work as provided in the General Conditions.
B. No initial progress payment (other than a single mobilization payment as described in Article 1.3 below) will be made prior to acceptance by the ENGINEER of the CPM Construction Schedule, the associated Schedule of Costs, and the list of anticipated submittals.
C. No subsequent progress payment will be made prior to receipt by the ENGINEER of the monthly update of the Construction Progress Schedule, as specified in Sections 01310, Project Meetings and 01320, Progress Schedule.
D. No subsequent progress payment will be made prior to receipt by the ENGINEER of Certified Payrolls for the previous month.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF COSTS FOR PAYMENTS
A. Submit to the ENGINEER, within 5 days of acceptance of the Construction Schedule, five (5) copies of a Schedule of Costs. The Schedule of Costs shall be a form showing a detailed breakdown of quantities and prices of work and materials required to perform and complete the contract.
B. The Schedule of Costs shall provide a cost breakdown for each element detailed in the approved Construction Schedule. The total of the price breakdown must agree with the lump-sum price bid. The elements listed and price breakdown shall not be front end loaded or unbalanced, shall be subject to adjustment between the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR, and will be used as a basis for progress payments.
C. The Schedule of Costs will be used as a basis for determining the amount of the monthly progress payments.
D. Acceptance of the Schedule of Costs by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility of performing all the work needed to complete the project at the lump-sum price bid.
1.3 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION
A. Mobilization Cost Breakdown: 1. As soon as practicable after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall
submit a breakdown to the ENGINEER for approval, which shall show the estimated value of each major component of mobilization.
2. When approved by the ENGINEER, the breakdown will be the basis for initial progress payments in which mobilization is included.
3. Said breakdown shall not be "front end loaded" or unbalanced.
01200-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. One CONTRACTOR payment may be made prior to acceptance of the Construction Schedule, Schedule of Costs, and list of anticipated submittals. 1. Payment shall be limited to mobilization items only. 2. The Construction Schedule is described in Section 01320, Construction Schedule. 3. Mobilization items are described in Section 01505, Mobilization. 4. The Schedule of Costs is described in Article 1.2 of this Section. 5. The list of anticipated submittals is described in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.
1.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Progress Payment Request Submittal: 1. Unless otherwise mutually agreed, by the 25th of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall
prepare and submit monthly progress payment requests for work completed through the 25th day of the month.
2. Said payment request shall be based on the breakdown of activities as specified in the Schedule of Costs described in Article 1.2 above.
3. The monthly schedule update shall be submitted as part of the monthly progress payment report.
B. The ENGINEER will review progress payment requests and make a determination of the percent completion of all activities (rounded to the nearest whole percent) based on an approximate measurement of all materials supplied and work performed.
C. In the event that the CONTRACTOR fails to provide the OWNER with an acceptable Monthly Contract Record Drawing Submittal in accordance with Section 01330, the OWNER shall deduct compensation for such monthly submittal as provided in Section 01320. Said deduction shall become the sole property of the OWNER.
D. Retention: 1. From the amount thus determined, five percent thereof will be deducted as retention
by OWNER for performance security. 2. Acceptance of separate components shall not operate to release performance
retention. 3. The amount of all payments previously made to the CONTRACTOR and any amounts
due the OWNER from the CONTRACTOR for supplies, materials, services, damages, or otherwise deductible under the terms of the contract will be deducted from the remainder.
4. The remaining amount will be paid as a progress payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR on the third Friday of the succeeding month or as soon thereafter as is practical.
E. In addition to the retention under Paragraph D above, the whole or part of any payment of the estimated amount due the CONTRACTOR may be withheld as an additional retention if such course be deemed necessary to protect the OWNER from loss due to the CONTRACTOR’s failure to perform any of the following: (1) meet CONTRACTOR’s payment obligations; (2) execute the work; (3) correct defective work; (4) settle damages as provided; or (5) produce substantial evidence that no stop notices will or have been filed, and/or if it has been determined that unpaid balances may be insufficient to complete the work.
F. All material and work covered by progress payments thereupon become the sole property of the OWNER, but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR from sole responsibility for all materials and work upon which payments have been made
01200-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
or the restoration of any damaged work or as a waiver of the OWNER’s right to require fulfillment of all of the contract terms. Said CONTRACTOR’s obligation extends through the close of the warranty period.
G. Payment for Materials: 1. No payment shall be made for materials stored offsite. 2. Payment may be made for those materials delivered to the site but not incorporated
in the work to the extent that the materials are included in the Construction Schedule as cost-loaded material delivery activities.
3. Only material items manufactured specifically for this project and that cost individually in excess of $20,000 will be considered for partial payment as stored materials.
4. Partial payment for materials delivered will not be made before the respective shop drawings, installation instructions and O&M manuals have been submitted, reviewed, and accepted in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.
5. To receive partial payment for materials delivered to the site, but not incorporated in the work, it shall be necessary for the CONTRACTOR to submit to the ENGINEER, at least 7 days prior to the end of said month, a list of such materials.
6. At their sole discretion, the ENGINEER will approve items for which partial payment is to be made.
7. The list of materials and invoices shall be clearly identified by referencing the associated activity or item on the price breakdown.
8. Partial payment for materials delivered to the site or a bonded warehouse will be made in an amount equal to 75% of the respective suppliers’ invoices(s) for the actual net cost for the item(s) delivered plus delivery charges.
9. The CONTRACTOR's actual net cost for the materials must be supported by invoices of suppliers.
10. Proper storage and protection of materials shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. Final payment shall be made only for materials actually incorporated in the work and, upon acceptance of the work, all materials remaining for which advance payments had been made shall revert to the CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for these items shall be deducted from the final payment for the work.
1.5 FINAL PAYMENT AND RELEASE OF CLAIMS 1. Upon the completion of the work as determined by the ENGINEER, a Notice of
Acceptance will be issued and recorded with the County. 2. The OWNER will pay to the CONTRACTOR within 35 days after filing of the Notice of
Acceptance, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the remaining amount due the CONTRACTOR including retainage, less all prior payments and advances whatsoever to or for the account of the CONTRACTOR for supplies, materials, services, damages, stop notices, or otherwise deductible under the terms of the contract.
3. All prior estimates and payments including those relating to extra work shall be subject to correction by this payment, which throughout this contract is called "Final Payment".
1.6 RELEASE OF CLAIMS:
A. Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the CONTRACTOR shall have delivered to the OWNER a complete release of all claims against the OWNER arising under and by virtue of this contract and related to undisputed amounts, including claims of Subcontractors and suppliers of either materials or labor.
01200-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. If disputed contract claims in stated amounts are unresolved 35 days after issuance of the Notice of Acceptance, a progress payment of undisputed amounts and retained funds will be made by OWNER upon receipt of a release specifically excluding the disputed contract claims.
C. Claims by the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR for liquidated damages or actual damages or other causes will be a valid basis for withholding of funds by the OWNER.
D. Upon resolution of disputed claims the CONTRACTOR shall execute a supplemental release and, upon delivery the OWNER will make final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01310-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed, or at an earlier time if mutually agreeable, the ENGINEER will arrange a preconstruction conference to be attended by the CONTRACTOR's superintendent or other project representative authorized to commit on the behalf of the CONTRACTOR and to direct the performance of the work by others, the OWNER, the ENGINEER or ENGINEER’s representative, and representatives of utilities, major subcontractors, and others involved in the execution of the work.
B. The purpose of this conference will be to establish a working relationship and understanding between the parties and to discuss subjects as may be pertinent for the execution of the work.
C. CONTRACTOR shall be prepared to discuss the following subjects, as a minimum: 1. Required schedules. 2. Status of Bonds and insurance. 3. Sequencing of critical path work items. 4. Progress payment procedures. 5. Project changes and clarification procedures. 6. Use of site, access, office and storage areas, security and temporary facilities. 7. Major product delivery and priorities. 8. CONTRACTOR’s safety plan and representative.
1.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The ENGINEER will arrange and conduct progress meetings. The ENGINEER will prepare and circulate a draft agenda of each meeting. The CONTRACTOR may add items as appropriate to the draft agenda.
B. Progress meetings will be conducted on a regular basis, at such frequency as the OWNER and CONTRACTOR may mutually agree. Progress meetings shall be attended by the ENGINEER, OWNER Operations personnel, CONTRACTOR's superintendent or other project representative, and representatives of all subcontractors involved in the work at the time of the meeting, required by the CONTRACTOR, or requested by the OWNER.
C. The purpose of the meetings will be to facilitate the work of the CONTRACTOR and any subcontractor or other organization that is not up to schedule, resolve conflicts, identify and resolve any potential delays or necessary changes in the work and in general, coordinate and facilitate the execution of the work.
D. The agenda of progress meetings shall include review of work progress, the latest Construction Schedule submittal (monthly), potential project delays, the status of key shop drawings, submittal reviews, information requests, safety concerns, record drawings, and extra work items.
01310-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE REVIEW
A. The Construction Schedule will be reviewed monthly during an agreed upon progress meeting to verify at a minimum: 1. Actual start and finish dates of completed activities since the last progress meeting. 2. Durations and progress of all activities not completed. 3. Critical submittals/materials delivery problems. 4. Potential project delays. 5. Any activity behind schedule and CONTRACTOR's plan to bring it back on schedule. 6. Reason, logic, time, and cost data for Change Order work that is to be incorporated
into the Construction Schedule or payment request form. 7. Payment due to the CONTRACTOR based on percentage complete of items in the
submittal payment request form.
B. At the progress meeting, the CONTRACTOR shall provide an update of the Construction Schedule as described in Section 01320, Progress Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
++ END OF SECTION ++
01320-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01320
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work specified in this Section includes the CONTRACTOR’s preparation, submittal, maintenance and use of a computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule to plan and monitor construction progress for the project.
B. The computerized CPM schedule shall be completed using Microsoft Project for Windows or another software package acceptable to the ENGINEER.
C. The requirements specified under Section 01330, Submittal Procedures, also apply to the Construction Schedule initial submittal(s) and subsequent updates and revisions.
1.2 PREPARATION AND SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Schedule Preparation and Submittal: 1. The CONTRACTOR’s on-site construction supervisor (superintendent, project
manager, etc.) shall be directly involved in preparation of the Construction Schedule. 2. The Construction Schedule shall be completed and submitted to the ENGINEER within
30 days after Notice to Proceed. a. By preparing and submitting the Construction Schedule the CONTRACTOR
represents that the CONTRACTOR can and intends to execute the work and portions thereof within the specified times and constraints and that the CONTRACTOR’s bid covers the costs associated with the execution of work in accordance with the Construction Schedule.
3. At the time of submittal of the Construction Schedule, CONTRACTOR’s on-site construction supervisor shall review the schedule with ENGINEER’s construction project representative.
4. If the initial Construction Schedule submittal is not acceptable to the ENGINEER, it shall be revised in coordination with observations and comments from the ENGINEER and resubmitted within 7 days of the return of the schedule to the CONTRACTOR.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CONTENT
A. The Construction Schedule shall be calendar-based, time-scaled, and show the durations of and relationships between the various work activities.
B. Work activities shall be selected which reflect actual work to be performed for this specific project. No generic work activities shall be allowed. 1. Work activities shall include non-construction activities such as submittal preparation
and review, manufacturing, equipment delivery, mobilization, preparation of Contract Record Drawings, etc. for a complete picture of the CONTRACTOR’s plan for project execution.
2. Information on each activity shall include: a. Concise description of the activity. b. Duration in working days. c. The dates for the beginning and completion of each activity.
01320-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
d. The relationship of each activity to other activities. 3. No work activity shall be longer than 10 working days.
a. Work tasks which will take longer than 10 working days shall be broken down into several work activities which are no longer than 10 working days.
b. Each work activity must be defined clearly and measurable. For example, a series of work activities such as “Building 1, east wall piping; Building 1, west wall piping; Building 1, north and south wall piping”, each with a duration less than 10 days would be acceptable. A series of work activities all labeled “Building 1 Piping”, even if each had a duration less than 10 days, would not be acceptable because the tasks are not defined clearly or measurable.
4. Provide a monthly activity for preparation of Contract Record Drawings, in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures with a minimum monthly cost of $2,500.
C. The schedule shall be referenced to calendar dates, and the beginning of the contract time shall be the date of receipt of the Notice to Proceed.
D. Failure to include an activity required for the execution of the work shall not excuse the CONTRACTOR from completing the work and portions thereof within the specified times and at the price specified in the Agreement, and from meeting the constraints specified for sequence of work and control dates.
1.4 UPDATING THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall review and discuss the project progress relative to the most up to date Construction Schedule (updated monthly) at the weekly progress meetings, as specified in Section 01310, Project Meetings.
B. The schedule update shall reflect progress to date. The schedule update shall incorporate all revisions to logic and duration.
1.5 ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTRACT TIME AND CHANGE ORDERS
A. Adjustments of the contract time due to delays, additional work, or any other cause will only be issued through a contract change order in accordance with the General Conditions. 1. The CONTRACTOR shall include, as part of each change order proposal for which the
CONTRACTOR is requesting an adjustment in the contract duration, a proposed revised Construction Schedule.
2. The proposed revised Construction Schedule shall be compared to the most recent Construction Schedule to assess overall schedule impact.
3. If a Change Order is issued by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall incorporate the Change Order into the Construction Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01330-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. General: 1. This Section outlines in general the items that the CONTRACTOR must prepare or
assemble for submittal during the progress of the work. 2. There is no attempt herein to state in detail all of the procedures and requirements
for each submittal. 3. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the individual Specification Sections in
these Contract Documents, which may contain additional and special submittal requirements.
4. The OWNER reserves the right to direct and modify the procedures and requirements for submittals as necessary to accomplish the specific purpose of each submittal.
5. The CONTRACTOR shall anticipate resubmitting submittals for major pieces of equipment and for control systems.
6. Should the CONTRACTOR be in doubt as to the procedure, purpose, or extent of any submittal, inquiries shall be directed to the ENGINEER.
B. Schedule of Submittals: 1. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a complete
list of anticipated submittals, including specification/drawing references. 2. This list shall be updated with "late start" submittal dates within 15 days of submittal
of the CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule. 3. The submittal dates shall be updated upon approval of the Construction Schedule and
periodically thereafter. 4. Any additional submittals shall also be included in updates.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR is reminded of their obligation as required by law to make required submittals promptly to the applicable federal, state, or local agency. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in the withholding of progress payments and make the CONTRACTOR liable for other prescribed action and sanctions.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a copy of all letters relative to the Contract, transmitting notifications, reports, certifications, certified payrolls, and the like, that the CONTRACTOR submits directly to a federal, state, or other governing agency.
C. During the performance of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall maintain on a daily basis, and submit to the ENGINEER as requested, full and correct information as to the number of persons employed in connection with each subdivision of the work, the classification, rate of pay, citizenship status, and address of each person, and the cost, source, and amount of each class of materials delivered, equipment received, and major construction equipment used in each subdivision of the work.
01330-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.3 TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: 1. Requirements in this Section are in addition to any specific requirements for
submittals specified in other divisions and Sections of these Contract Documents. 2. Submittal Contents and Numbering:
a. Each submittal shall contain material pertaining to no more than one equipment or material item and shall have the specification Section and applicable paragraph number clearly identified on the front of the submittal transmittal form.
b. Each submittal shall be numbered starting with the specification number, followed by specific item within the specification.
c. Resubmittals shall include the number of the original submittal plus the suffix "01" for the first resubmittal, "02" for the second resubmittal, etc. 1) For example:
a) Check Valve – 1st submittal – 15200-01-00 b) Check Valve – 2nd submittal (Resubmittal) – 15200-01-01 c) Plug Valve – 1st submittal – 15200-02-00 d) Plug Valve – 2nd submittal (Resubmittal) – 15200-02-01
d. Submittals not conforming to these requirements will be rejected. 3. Submitted data shall be fully sufficient in detail for determination of compliance with
the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. 4. Specification review shall be performed by the supplier and written comments
regarding any deviation from the contract documents shall be included as part of submittal.
5. Coordination Responsibilities: a. Shop drawing submittal and coordination are the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR; this responsibility shall not be delegated in whole or in part to Subcontractors or suppliers.
b. Designation of work "by others," if shown on shop drawings, shall mean that the work will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR rather than the Subcontractor or supplier who has prepared the shop drawings.
6. No equipment or material for which listings, drawings, or descriptive material is required shall be fabricated, purchased, or installed until the ENGINEER has reviewed and accepted such lists, final shop drawings, or other descriptive material. Installation of such equipment or material without accepted submittals will be considered defective work.
7. Resubmittal will include responses to the comments generated by the ENGINEER and OWNER.
8. Submittal Review Time: a. Submittals will be acted upon by the ENGINEER as promptly as possible, and
returned to the CONTRACTOR not later than the time allowed for review in Paragraph B.2 below.
b. The CONTRACTOR shall provide in their Construction Schedule the time for OWNER review of each submittal (and resubmittal for major equipment and control systems) in accordance with the allowable time specified herein and in Section 01320, Progress Schedule.
c. This required time for OWNER review shall not be a cause for delay in contract completion nor shall it be a reason for an extension of contract time.
d. If the CONTRACTOR is required by the OWNER to resubmit data, then neither the time required for the CONTRACTOR to prepare and resubmit such data, nor the required time for OWNER review, shall be a cause for delay in contract completion or for an extension of contract time.
01330-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
e. Responsibility for time required for preparing and submitting required data shall be assigned solely to the CONTRACTOR.
9. Excessive Submittal Review: a. It is considered reasonable that the CONTRACTOR shall make a complete and
acceptable submittal to the ENGINEER by the second submission of a submittal item.
b. Additional costs of the ENGINEER's review beyond the second submission shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and may be deducted from the monthly progress payments.
c. This applies to all submittals including shop drawings. 10. Changes After Review:
a. After a submittal has been reviewed and accepted, no changes or substitutions in that submittal will be allowed without the ENGINEER's approval.
b. If allowed, the CONTRACTOR will be responsible for the additional costs for engineering, administrative, clerical or other work required for additional review.
11. Intent of Review: a. Shop drawings will be reviewed for general conformance with the drawings and
specifications. b. The intent of the review is to determine if the CONTRACTOR is submitting
materials and equipment which are in general conformance with the Contract Documents.
c. Detailed review of dimensions, sizes, space requirements, coordination with other equipment, and other construction details is not performed.
d. Additional work and costs, resulting from errors in the shop drawings shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility and liability.
e. Accuracy, coordination, and completeness of shop drawings shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, including responsibility to backcheck comments, corrections, and modifications from the ENGINEER's review before fabrication.
12. The CONTRACTOR shall indicate on the submittal transmittal form if and how the submittal deviates from the contract requirements.
13. Rebar Shop Drawings: a. The CONTRACTOR shall supply the ENGINEER with a copy of all reinforcing steel
detail drawings. b. Changes to the Contract Documents made by the CONTRACTOR in reinforcing
steel shop drawings shall be called out in the letter of submittal. c. Such changes will not be acceptable unless the ENGINEER has expressed consent
to such changes in writing. 14. Shop drawings, layout diagrams, catalog cuts and data, test reports, and information
in sufficient detail to show complete compliance with all specified requirements shall be furnished to the ENGINEER, covering but not limited to the following items:
Aggregate Base Course Asphalt mixes Caulking and sealing compounds Concrete mixes Control panels Demolition plan Detection systems Electrical conduit, wire and specials Electrical fixtures and appliances Electrical load centers Electrical conduit, wire and specials Engineered fill
01330-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR Gravel bedding Grout Hardware Imported fill Instrumentation Meters Miscellaneous fabricated metals Motor control centers Motors, starters and controls Paints, coatings and finishes Pipe, fittings and specials Pipe supports and anchors Plumbing fixtures Precast concrete elements Pressure gauges Primary elements Programmable logic controllers Pumps Reinforcing steel and layout drawings Signs Structural steel Temporary bypasses Temporary dewatering systems and equipment Valve and gate operators and controllers Valves and gates Variable frequency drives
B. Submittal Procedure: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review an electronic copy (pdf
format with bookmarks to various sections) of each submittal (shop drawings, electrical diagrams, and catalog cuts for fabricated items and manufactured items furnished under this Contract, etc.) Review comments along with the original submittal will be returned to the contractor in an electronic format (pdf file). CONTRACTOR to provide three (3) hardcover copies of approved submittal along with review submittal comments to ENGINEER for their records.
2. Shop drawings shall be submitted in sufficient time to allow the ENGINEER not less than twenty (20) working days for examining the shop drawings except for designs for turnkey items for which thirty (30) working days will be allowed, and substitutions for which (40) working days will be allowed.
3. Shop drawings shall be accurate, distinct, and complete, and shall contain all required information, including satisfactory identification of items, units, and assemblies in relation to the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
4. CONTRACTOR Certification: a. Shop drawings shall be submitted only by the CONTRACTOR, who shall indicate by
a signed stamp on the shop drawings, or other approved means, that the CONTRACTOR has checked and approved the shop drawings, and that the work shown is in accordance with Contract requirements and has been checked for dimensions and relationship with work of all other trades involved.
b. Submitting incomplete or unchecked shop drawings for the ENGINEER to correct or finish will not be acceptable, and shop drawings that, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, indicate that they have not been checked by the CONTRACTOR will be rejected and returned to the CONTRACTOR for resubmission in the proper form.
01330-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
5. Return of Reviewed Submittals: a. When the shop drawings have been reviewed by the ENGINEER, the appropriate
number of submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR appropriately stamped.
b. If major changes or corrections are necessary, the shop drawing will be rejected and returned to the CONTRACTOR with the need for such changes or corrections indicated.
c. The CONTRACTOR shall correct and resubmit rejected shop drawings in the same manner and quantity as specified for the original submittal.
d. If changes are made by the CONTRACTOR (in addition to those requested by the ENGINEER) on the resubmitted shop drawings, such changes shall be clearly explained in a transmittal letter accompanying the resubmitted shop drawings.
6. The review of such shop drawings and catalog cuts by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for correctness of dimensions, fabrication details, coordination with other work, and space requirements, or for deviations from the Contract Drawings or Specifications, unless the CONTRACTOR has called attention to such deviations in writing by a letter accompanying the shop drawings and the ENGINEER approves the change or deviation in writing at the time of submission; nor shall review by the ENGINEER relieve the CONTRACTOR from the responsibility for errors in the shop drawings.
7. The CONTRACTOR agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the ENGINEER do not become Contract Documents and are not Change Orders; that the purpose of the shop drawing review is to establish a reporting procedure and to permit the ENGINEER to monitor the CONTRACTOR's progress and understanding of the design.
C. Shop Drawing Requirements: Shop drawings referred to herein shall include shop drawings, catalog cuts and information schematic diagrams, and other submittals for both shop and field-fabricated items. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, as applicable, the following for all prefabricated or manufactured structural items, material, and equipment: 1. General:
a. For structures, submit all shop, setting, equipment, miscellaneous iron and reinforcement drawings and schedules necessary for construction. The foregoing shall include detailed "pour drawings" which shall show the sequence of concrete placement, and the type, quantity and location of all embedment items (sleeves, anchor bolts, door frames, etc.)
b. For pipelines, submit a detailed layout of the pipeline with details of bends, closure pieces and fabricated specials and furnish any other details necessary.
c. For trench excavation, submit detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions necessary for safety.
d. For boring and jacking, submit a detailed description of the process to be used. e. For equipment which requires electrical service, submit detailed information to
show power supply requirements, MCC and control panel, elevations, wiring diagrams, control and protection schematics, shop test data, operation and maintenance procedures, outline drawings, and manufacturer's recommendation of the interface/interlock among the equipment.
f. For mechanical equipment submit all data pertinent to the installation and maintenance of the equipment including shop drawings, anchorage requirements, manufacturer's recommended installation procedure, detailed installation drawings, test data and curves, operation and maintenance manuals, and other details necessary.
g. For architectural fabrication submit all data pertinent to the installation of the fabrications, including shop drawings, manufacturer's recommended installation procedure, detailed installation drawings, and other details necessary.
01330-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
h. For shop drawings or equipment drawings, including dimensions, size and location of connections to other work, and weight of equipment.
i. Installation or placing drawings for equipment, drives, and bases. j. Supporting calculations for equipment and associated supports, or hangers
required or specified to be designed by equipment manufacturers, including seismic restraint information and details.
k. Complete coating manufacturer's specifications, including materials description and paint system.
l. Performance data and head vs. flow curves for compressor and pumps. m. Suggested spare parts list with current price information. n. List of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and
maintenance. (Special tools are those which have been specially designed or adapted for use on parts of the equipment, and which are not customarily and routinely carried by maintenance mechanics.)
o. List of special tools furnished with the equipment. p. List of materials and supplies required for the equipment prior to and during
startup. q. Installation instructions. r. List of materials and supplies furnished with the equipment. s. Samples of finish colors for selection. t. Special handling instructions. u. Requirements for storage and protection prior to installation. v. Requirements for routine maintenance required prior to plant startup. w. Startup and operating instructions. x. Seismic design calculations and restraint details for equipment and piping
supports. Calculations shall be stamped by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona.
2. Electrical: a. Wiring and control diagrams of systems and equipment. Local control panel
details. b. List of special motor features being provided (e.g., space heaters, altitude
corrections, thermal protectors, mounting arrangement, etc.). c. Complete motor rating for all motors, including motor no-load, starting, and
full-load current at rated voltage; full-load speed and full-load current at 110 percent voltage; motor service factor; motor efficiency and power factor at 1/2, 3/4, and full-load at rated voltage; recommended maximum kVAR of power factor correction capacitors when capacitors are switched with motor.
d. See Division 16, ELECTRICAL, for additional specific submittal requirements. 3. Instrumentation and Control:
a. See Technical Sections for additional specific submittal requirements. b. The submittals shall include satisfactory identification of items, units, and
assemblies in relation to the Specification Section number, and the system or equipment identification or tag number shown on the Drawings, the Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID), or as provided in applicable Specification Section.
D. Submittals required for foreign-manufactured items: 1. In addition to the submittal requirements stated above, suppliers of
foreign-manufactured items shall submit the names and addresses of companies within the United States that maintain technical service representatives and a complete inventory of spare parts and accessories for each foreign-made item proposed for incorporation into the work. Failure to provide the foregoing capabilities shall be just cause for rejection of the foreign-manufactured items.
01330-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. Final shop drawings to be submitted to OWNER: 1. Complete sets of reproducible (full size mylar or vellum base) final shop drawings
shall be submitted to the OWNER before, or at the time of, delivery of equipment onto the site.
F. Seismic loading design provisions: 1. All equipment supports that are not specifically detailed on the Drawings or specified
herein shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturers and shall be designed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona.
2. The design shall be in accordance with the seismic provisions of the latest edition of the International Building Code and of the seismic design requirements listed in Section 01610, General Equipment Requirements, in addition to all other loading conditions.
G. Submittal of interface information (connection and correlation with other work): 1. Where called for in the Specifications, and as determined necessary by the ENGINEER
to provide proper correlation with other equipment, complete interface information shall be submitted.
2. This interface information shall be accurate, and contain all information necessary to allow the completion of detailed design and construction of the interfacing or connecting work.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall include in their negotiation for subcontract work, such agreements as may be necessary to ensure the accuracy of Subcontractor's interface submittal information.
4. In the event additional costs are incurred due to subsequent changes to information given in said interface information, such additional costs shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
H. Record Drawings 1. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER one complete set of final Record
Drawings for OWNER records before the contract will be accepted by the OWNER. The Record Drawings will consist of a set of reproducible drawings of all CONTRACTOR supplied equipment (including control systems) and a marked-up set of Contract Record Drawings.
2. Record Drawings of CONTRACTOR-Supplied Equipment a. The drawings shall be submitted with the operation and maintenance manuals for
the project specific supplied equipment. The dimensions, weights, serial and model numbers shall accurately depict what was supplied for the project.
b. Drawings shall be 11x17 or large format folded to fit in 3-ring binders for final submittal with operation and maintenance manuals.
c. Drawings shall be legible at scale submitted and easily reproducible with photo-copying.
3. Contract Record Drawings a. The CONTRACTOR shall keep an up-to-date set of marked-up Contract Drawings
on an OWNER-supplied set of Drawings. b. The OWNER-supplied set of Drawings will consist of one set of full-size sepia
reproductions of the Contract Drawings, supplied to the CONTRACTOR at the start of the work.
c. During the progress of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall record on the Contract Record Drawings any changes from or additions to the work described in the Plans and Specifications.
d. All information recorded on the Contract Record Drawings shall be clearly legible.
01330-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
e. Information to be recorded on the Contract Record Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1) Actual routing of electrical conduits, whose routing is only indicated in general
on the Drawings. 2) Actual location of manhole structures. 3) Actual alignment of all installed pipe. 4) Specific details of pipe connections, and manhole structures. 5) Specific details on the installation and connection of mechanical and electrical
equipment. 6) Field dimensions where they differ from those shown on the Drawings. 7) Additions to and/or deletions from the work, including all contract change
orders. 8) Other details showing as-built conditions, which are shown differently or only
in general on the Drawings. 9) Addenda. 10) Location of buried features located during construction except utility service
connections. f. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that any changes, deletions,
specific construction details, etc., performed by a Subcontractor are recorded on the Contract Record Drawings.
g. Location Survey: 1) The CONTRACTOR shall professionally survey the lateral and vertical position
of anything buried underground as part of this Contract to within one inch accuracy of the benchmark and baseline provided by the OWNER.
2) The survey information shall be included on the record drawings and the CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed to cover the buried materials until after the OWNER’s inspector has verified the information as accurate and complete, and is shown on the record drawings.
h. Once every month, starting from the completion of mobilization as defined in Section 01505, Mobilization, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with a copy of the then up-to-date set of marked-up Contract Record Drawings in accordance with the provisions under Section 01200, Measurement and Payment, and Section 01320, Project Schedule.
i. At the end of the work, prior to Project Closeout, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with the Contract Record Drawings, showing all "as-built" conditions.
j. See also Section 01800, Operational Completion and Project Closeout.
I. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish five (5) hard-copies and one (1) electronic copy of a
complete instruction manual for installation, operation, maintenance, and lubrication requirements for each component of mechanical and electrical equipment or system.
2. Submittal reviews will be as following: a. Preliminary Submittal: Indexed .pdf file which satisfies O&M Manual Checklist b. Hardcopy Submittal: Upon approval of Preliminary Submittal, submit two (2)
hardcopies for Final Submittal review and approval c. Final Submittal: Upon approval of Hardcopy Submittal, provide final submittal of
documents (amount and type) as listed in Section 01330-1.3.I.1. 3. All equipment manufacturers shall be made aware of these requirements and all
associated costs shall be included in the costs for furnishing the equipment or system. 4. O&M Submittal Review Checklist:
a. The CONTRACTOR shall include a completed O&M Manual Submittal Review Checklist (copy included at the end of this Section) with each O&M manual submittal.
01330-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. The checklist shall indicate that the O&M manual as submitted complies in all respects to the contract requirements.
c. Any O&M manual submitted without a completed checklist will be rejected. 5. The manuals shall be furnished to the ENGINEER upon the delivery of the respective
equipment. 6. No payment will be made for equipment or materials or equipment installation before
the respective O&M manuals have been approved by the ENGINEER. 7. Each O&M manual shall be complete in all respects for all equipment, controls,
accessories, and associated appurtenances. 8. Each O&M manual shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Diagrams and illustrations, including pump curves indicating operating points. b. Detailed description of the function of each principal component of the system. c. Performance and nameplate data. d. Installation instructions. e. Starting procedure f. Proper adjustment procedure. g. Test procedures. h. Operating procedure. i. Shutdown instructions. j. Emergency operating instructions and troubleshooting guide. k. Safety instructions. l. Maintenance and overhaul instructions which shall include detailed assembly
drawings with part numbers, parts list, instructions for ordering spare parts, and complete preventive maintenance instructions required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of the equipment.
m. Lubrication instructions which shall list points to be greased or oiled, shall recommend type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants, and shall recommend frequency of lubrication.
n. List of electrical relay settings and control and alarm contact settings. o. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram for equipment furnished, including all
control and lighting systems. p. Recommendations for spare parts and special tools.
9. Hard-Copy O&M Manuals: a. Each copy of the manual shall be assembled in one or more hard-back type three-
ring binders, each with title page, typed table of contents, and heavy section dividers with numbered plastic index tabs.
b. Cover label and title page shall be clearly labeled to designate the project title, project number, Specification Section where the item is specified, system or equipment for which it is intended with reference to the facility, equipment number, and equipment manufacturer name.
c. Typed table of contents for the entire set, identified by volume number, shall appear in each binder.
d. Each manual shall be divided into sections paralleling the equipment specifications.
e. All data shall be hole-punched for binding and composition and printing shall be arranged so that punching does not obliterate any data.
f. Pages larger than 8-1/2” x 11” shall be folded, showing title block or optionally included in binder pockets.
g. Where more than one binder is required, they shall be labeled "Vol. 1", "Vol. 2", and so on.
h. Submit manual organization and format to the ENGINEER for approval prior to manual preparation.
10. Electronic O&M Manuals:
01330-10
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. In addition to the designated number of hard-copies for each required Manufacturer’s O&M manual, provide an electronic copy, each on its own separate compact disc/s (CD-ROM).
b. The CD-ROM shall contain one full version of the O&M manual in Adobe’s Portable Document File (PDF) format.
c. In addition, the CD-ROM shall contain the separate text and drawing files used to create the PDF O&M manual.
d. An index shall be provided on the CD-ROM as a separate text file with the name “index” and shall include the file name and detailed description of each individual file included on the CD-ROM.
e. The CD-ROM and the CD-ROM case shall be labeled with the Project title, Project number, Specification section, equipment number, equipment name, and equipment manufacturer name.
11. Manuals shall be transmitted to the ENGINEER upon delivery of the equipment and all equipment shall be serviced in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to operation. A service record shall be maintained on each item of equipment and shall be delivered to the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance of the project.
J. Manufacturers' certificates and proper installation: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturers' certificates of proper installation for
items of equipment as specified under Section 01750, Testing, Training and Startup.
K. Samples and test specimens: 1. Where required in the Specifications, and as determined necessary by the ENGINEER,
test specimens or samples of materials, appliances, and fittings to be used or offered for use in connection with the work shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at the CONTRACTOR's expense, with information as to their sources, with all cartage charges prepaid, and in such quantities and sizes as may be required for proper examination and tests to establish the quality or equality thereof, as applicable.
2. All samples and test specimens shall be submitted in ample time to enable the ENGINEER to make any tests or examinations necessary, without delay to the work. The CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for any loss of time due to their neglect or failure to deliver the required samples to the ENGINEER, as specified.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit additional samples as required by the ENGINEER to ensure equality with the original approved sample and/or for determination of Specification compliance.
4. Laboratory tests and examinations that the OWNER elects to make in its own laboratory will be made at no cost to the CONTRACTOR, except that, if a sample of any material or equipment proposed for use by the CONTRACTOR fails to meet the Specifications, the cost of testing subsequent samples shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
5. All tests required by the Specifications to be performed by an independent laboratory shall be made by a laboratory approved by the ENGINEER. Certified test results of all specified tests shall be submitted in duplicate to the ENGINEER. The samples furnished and the cost for the laboratory services shall be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR and included in the prices bid for the associated work.
6. Approved sample items (fixtures, hardware, etc.) may be incorporated into the work upon approval, and when no longer needed by the ENGINEER for reference.
L. Material and equipment colors: 1. The ENGINEER will provide a schedule of selected colors within 30 days after approval
of materials and equipment, and after receiving samples of the manufacturers' standard colors for those items requiring OWNER's selection.
01330-11
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
M. Certificates of Compliance: 1. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished for materials specified to a recognized
standard or code prior to the use of any such materials in the work. 2. The ENGINEER may permit the use of certain materials or assemblies prior to
sampling and testing if accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance. 3. The certificate shall be signed by the manufacturer of the material or the
manufacturer of assembled materials and shall state that the materials involved comply in all respects with the requirements of the Specifications.
4. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished with each lot of material delivered to the work and the lot so certified shall be clearly identified in the certificate.
N. Quality Assurance 1. Source limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide products, materials, or equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source.
2. Compatibility of options: a. Where more than one choice is available as options for CONTRACTOR's selection
of a product, material, or equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall select an option which is compatible with other products, materials, or equipment already selected.
b. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material selections.
O. Review by ENGINEER 1. After review by the ENGINEER of each of the CONTRACTOR's submissions, the
material will be returned to the CONTRACTOR with actions defined as follows: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN: Accepted subject to its compatibility with further
submittals and additional partial submittals for portions of the work not covered in this submittal. Does not constitute approval or deletion of specified or required items not shown in the partial submittal.
b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED: Same as 1.a., except that minor corrections as noted shall be made by the CONTRACTOR.
c. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Rejected because of major inconsistencies or errors which shall be resolved or corrected by the CONTRACTOR prior to subsequent review by the ENGINEER.
d. REJECTED - RESUBMIT: Submitted material does not conform to Plans and Specifications in major respect, e.g., wrong item, wrong size, model, capacity, or material.
2. Review actions (a) and (b) above constitute acceptance by the ENGINEER of the submittal.
P. Requests for Information 1. Requests for Information about the Contract Documents shall be directed by the
CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER using a Request for Information (RFI) form as agreed to by the OWNER and the ENGINEER. Such requests shall not be transmitted directly to the ENGINEER from a Subcontractor or Supplier.
2. A separate form shall be used for each specific item for which information is required. Requests for Information for more than one item using a single RFI form will be permitted only when the items are so functionally related that expediency indicates review of the group of items as a whole.
3. The ENGINEER will reply to the CONTRACTOR's Request for Information as soon thereafter as practicable.
Q. Construction Photographs
01330-12
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Provide photographs showing the preconstruction site, construction progress, and the post-construction site.
2. Format: Photographs shall be digital format a. Digital Format:
1) Digital photos shall be taken with a minimum 8.0 mega pixel density and provided in JPG format.
2) Digital photo files shall be provide on a CD accompanied by a text file that lists the file name, date photo was taken, and brief description of the photograph and location where the photograph was taken.
3. Take a minimum of 36 photos of the preconstruction site and the property adjacent to the perimeter of the construction site. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures both inside and outside the site, or as directed by OWNER.
4. Take a minimum of 72 photos monthly showing the progress of construction. The location of these photographs shall be determined by OWNER.
5. Take a minimum of 36 photos of the post-construction site and the property adjacent to the perimeter of the site. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures both inside and outside the plant boundary, or as indicated by OWNER.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01330 CL-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
O&M MANUAL REVIEW CHECKLIST
SUBMITTAL NO. DATED
SPEC. SECTION. REVIEW DATE
SUBJECT REVIEWER
EQUIP. ITEM SUPPLIER
MANUFACTURER
ACCEPTABLE PROJECT TITLE: Zone 12 Interconnect BPS
UNACCEPTABLE PROJECT NO. 15-002
ACCEPTABLE? DISPOSITION YES NO NA COMMENTS HARD-COPY O&M MANUALS Minimum five (5) copies ..........................................
Three-ring binder with hard-back cover .....................
Cover Label and Title Page: Project title and Project number ............................
Specification section ............................................
System/Equipment names ....................................
Facility ...............................................................
Equipment number ..............................................
Typed table of contents ...........................................
Heavy section dividers w/numbered plastic index tabs .
Sections parallel equipment specifications .................. Pages punched for 3 ring binder (punching does not
obliterate data) ...................................................... Info larger than 8-1/2”x11” folded showing title block,
or included in binder pockets ...................................
Multiple volumes labeled “Vol. 1”, “Vol. 2”, etc. ..........
Table of contents for entire set in each binder ............
ELECTRONIC O&M MANUALS Minimum one (1) copy on CD-ROM ...........................
Full version of O&M manual in PDF format ................. Separate text and drawing files used to create PDF
O&M manual .........................................................
Index on CD-ROM as separate file titled “index” ..........
CD-ROM and case labeled ........................................
TECHNICAL CONTENT Diagrams and illustrations, including pump curves ...... Detailed description of function of principal
components ..........................................................
Performance and nameplate data .............................
Installation instructions ...........................................
Starting procedure .................................................
01330 CL-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
ACCEPTABLE? DISPOSITION YES NO NA COMMENTS Proper adjustment procedure ...................................
Test procedures .....................................................
Operating procedure ...............................................
Shutdown instructions ............................................
Emergency operating instructions & troubleshooting ....
Safety instructions .................................................
Maintenance and overhaul instructions ......................
Lubrication instructions ........................................... List of electrical relay settings and control and alarm
contact settings ..................................................... Electrical interconnection wiring diagrams, including
control and lighting systems ....................................
Recommended spare parts and special tools ..............
01400-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 OBSERVATION AND SUPERVISION
A. The ENGINEER or ENGINEER’s appointed representative will review the Work and the CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities and access to the Work at all times as required to facilitate this review.
B. Responsibility: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible to supervise and direct the entire Work
competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality control, and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto.
3. The foregoing includes work performed by the CONTRACTOR's Subcontractors. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished Work complies
accurately with the Contract Documents.
C. Superintendent: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall designate in writing and keep on the work site at all times
during its progress a technically qualified, English-speaking superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written acceptance of the ENGINEER.
2. The superintendent shall be the CONTRACTOR's representative at the job site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR.
3. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR.
4. The CONTRACTOR's superintendent shall be present at the site of the Work at all times while work is in progress. Failure to observe this requirement shall be considered as suspension of the Work by the CONTRACTOR until such time as such superintendent is again present at the site.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for conducting all testing and inspection specifically required by the Specifications and otherwise necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Approval of Testing Laboratories:
a. All laboratory work under this contract shall be performed by a laboratory approved by the ENGINEER, whether the laboratory is employed by the CONTRACTOR, or is owned and operated by the CONTRACTOR.
b. The basis of approval includes the following: 1) Testing laboratories performing work in connection with concrete, steel, and
bituminous materials shall comply with ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3666, respectively.
01400-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2) Testing laboratories performing work not in connection with concrete, steel, bituminous materials, soils and non-destructive testing shall comply with ASTM E 548.
B. The ENGINEER may conduct periodic independent testing and inspection to verify compliance with the Contract Documents.
C. Retesting: 1. The OWNER reserves the right to back-charge the CONTRACTOR for retesting of
deficient or defective work or products upon written notification. 2. Compensation for retesting on behalf of the OWNER will be made through deductions
from the Progress Payments.
D. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for correcting all defective work discovered prior to final acceptance of the Contract, despite the failure of the Inspector(s) to discover it.
1.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for scheduling all inspections and tests required. 1. The ENGINEER shall be given a minimum 48 business hours notice prior to any
inspections or tests.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall pay for all tests including, but not limited to: 1. Inspections and tests necessary to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations
and orders of public authorities pursuant to General Conditions. 2. Mix designs, including tests of trial batches, on concrete mixes. 3. Tests of materials, inspections, and certifications required by the Specifications. 4. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment and systems required by the
Specifications. 5. One tension and elongation test for each 5 tons of steel or fractional part thereof for
each size will be required, unless the steel can be identified by heat or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis and test reports. Commercial stock may be used, subject to approval of the ENGINEER.
6. Any testing performed by the CONTRACTOR for their own quality control (e.g., compaction tests).
7. Retests or re-inspections by the OWNER, if required, and tests or inspections required due to CONTRACTOR error or lack of required identifications of material.
8. Any and all water used by the CONTRACTOR in any testing.
C. Two copies of the agency or laboratory report of each test or inspection shall be provided to the ENGINEER. All tests of materials shall be made in accordance with the commonly recognized standards of national technical organizations, and such other special methods and tests as are prescribed in the Contract Documents.
D. Purchase Orders: 1. One copy of each of the CONTRACTOR's purchase orders for materials forming a
portion of the work shall be furnished to the ENGINEER, if requested. 2. Each such purchase order shall contain a statement that the materials included in the
order are subject to inspection by the OWNER. 3. Materials purchased locally will be inspected at the point of manufacture or supply,
and materials supplied from points more than 50 miles from the job site will be inspected upon arrival at the job, except when other inspection requirements are provided for specific materials in other Sections of this Specification.
01400-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. Samples: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples of materials as are required by the
ENGINEER, without charge. 2. No material shall be used until the ENGINEER has had the opportunity to test or
examine such materials. 3. Samples will be secured and tested whenever necessary to determine the quality of
the material. 4. Samples and test specimens prepared at the job site, such as concrete test cylinders,
shall be taken or prepared by the ENGINEER in the presence and with the assistance of the CONTRACTOR.
1.4 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTOR
A. Inspectors employed by the OWNER shall be authorized to inspect all work done and materials and equipment furnished to complement the CONTRACTOR furnished independent inspector. 1. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work, and to the preparation,
fabrication, or manufacture of the materials and equipment to be used. 2. The Inspector will not alter or waive the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3. The Inspector will keep the ENGINEER informed as to the progress of the work and
the manner in which it is being done. 4. The Inspector will call the CONTRACTOR's attention to nonconformance with the
Contract Documents that the Inspector may have observed. 5. The Inspector will not be responsible for the adequacy or correctness of the
CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for construction.
6. The Inspector will not approve or accept any portion of the work, issue instructions contrary to the Contract Documents, or act as foreman for the CONTRACTOR.
7. The Inspector may reject defective materials, equipment, or work when it is not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
8. The Inspector will not be responsible for: a. The CONTRACTOR's quality control program. b. The CONTRACTOR's safety program. c. Coordinating the work or activities of the CONTRACTOR or their Subcontractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01420-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01420
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND ABBREVIATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The standards referred to, except as modified, shall have full force and effect as though printed in this Specification, and shall be the latest edition or revision thereof in effect on the bid opening date, unless a particular edition or issue is indicated. Copies of these standards are not available from the OWNER.
B. The ENGINEER will furnish, upon request, information as to how copies may be obtained.
C. Abbreviations and terms, or pronouns in place of them, shall be interpreted as follows:
AAMA: Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association AAN: American Association of Nurserymen AAR: Association of American Railroads AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,
Standard Specifications AATCC: American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ACI: American Concrete Institute, Standards AFBMA: Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc. AGA: American Gas Association AGC: Associated General Contractors AGMA: American Gear Manufacturer's Association AHAM: Association of Home Appliance Manufacturer's AI: The Asphalt Institute AIA: American Institute of Architects AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction, Specification for the Design,
Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, and the AISC Code of Standard Practice
AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute AITC: American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Standards ANS: American Nuclear Society ANSI: American National Standards Institute APA: American Plywood Association API: American Petroleum Institute APWA: American Public Works Association, Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction ASA: Acoustical Society of America ASAE: American Society of Agriculture Engineers ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers ASLE: American Society of Lubricating Engineers ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
01420-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
ASQC: American Society of Quality Control ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, Standards AWG: American Wire Gauge AWPA: American Wood-Preservers' Association, Standards AWPI: American Wood Preservers Institute AWS: American Welding Society AWWA: American Water Works Association, Standards BBC: Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators
International BHMA: Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association CBM: Certified Ballast Manufacturer's CEMA: Conveyors Equipment Manufacturer's Association CGA: Compressed Gas Association CISPI: Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, Standards CLFMI: Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute CMAA: Crane Manufacturers' Association of America CMA: Concrete Masonry Association CRSI: Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Standards DCDMA: Diamond Core Drill Manufacturer's Association EIA: Electronic Industries Association ETL: Electrical Test Laboratories FED/OSHA: Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Standards FM: Factory Mutual ICBO: International Conference of Building Officials ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES: Illuminating Engineering Society IME: Institute of Makers of Explosives IP: Institute of Petroleum (London) IPC: Institute of Printed Circuits IPCEA: Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association ISA: Instrument Society of America ISO: International Organization of Standardization ITE: Institute of Traffic Engineers MAG: Maricopa Association of Governments, Uniform Standard
Specifications for Public Works Construction. References to MAG Standard Details refer to the "Uniform Standard Details for Public Works Construction" sponsored and distributed by the Maricopa Association of Governments, Arizona.
MBMA: Metal Building Manufacturer's Association MPTA: Mechanical Power Transmission of Association MTI: Marine Testing Institute MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society NAAM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE: National Association of Corrosion Engineers, Standards NBS: National Bureau of Standards NCCLS: National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards NEC: National Electric Code
01420-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association, Standards NFPA: National Fire Protection Association NFPA: National Forest Products Association NGLI: National Lubricating Grease Institute NMA: National Microfilm Association NWMA: National Woodwork Manufacturers Association OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA: Portland Cement Association PCI: Prestressed Concrete Institute RIS: Redwood Inspection Service, Standard Specifications RVIA: Recreational Vehicle Industry Association RWMA: Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers SAMA: Scientific Apparatus Makers Association SDI: Steel Door Institute SIS: Swedish Standards Association SMA: Screen Manufacturer's Association SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPR: Simplified Practice Recommendation SSBC: Southern Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress SSPC: Steel Structures Painting Council, Specifications SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction TAPPI: Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry TFI: The Fertilizer Institute UBC: Uniform Building Code of the International Conference of Building
Officials UPC: Uniform Plumbing Code UL: Underwriters Laboratories WCLA: West Coast Lumbermen's Association, Standard Grading and Dressing
Rules WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCRSI: Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute WRI: Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association YAG: Yavapai Association of Governments, uniform Standard Specifications
for Public Works Construction. References to YAG Standard Details refer to the “Uniform Standard Details for Public Works Construction” sponsored and distributed by the Yavapai Association of Governments, Arizona.
1.2 OTHER ABBREVIATIONS
A. Other common abbreviations that may be found in the Specifications are, but may not be limited to:
acrylonitrile butadiene ABS styrene alternating current a-c, AC American wire gauge AWG ante meridiem am ampere A, amp
average avg biochemical oxygen BOD demand brake horsepower bhp British thermal unit Btu
01420-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Centigrade C chlorinated polyvinyl CPVC chloride company Co cubic inch cu in, in³ cubic foot cu ft, CF, ft³ cubic yard cu yd, CY, yd³ cubic feet per minute cfm, ft³/min cubic feet per second cfs, ft³/s decibel dB decibels, A-weighted dBA degree Centigrade (Celsius) °C, C degree Fahrenheit °F, F diameter diam, ø direct current d-c, DC dollars $ ductile iron DI each ea, @ efficiency eff elevation El., Elev ethylene proplylene rubber EPDM exhaust fan EF Fahrenheit F feet ft feet per hour fph, ft/h feet per minute fpm, ft/min feet per second fps, ft/s fiberglass reinforced FRP plastic figure Fig. flange flg foot-pound ft-lb gallon gal gallons per hour gph, gal/hr gallons per minute gpm, gal/min gallons per second gps, gal/s gram g ground fault current GFCI interrupter hand/off/automatic HOA heating, ventilating, and HVAC air conditioning Hertz Hz hour hr horsepower hp inch in
inch-pound in-lb input/output I/O inside diameter ID instrumentation and I&C control kilovolt kV kilovolt-ampere kVA kilowatt kW kilowatt-hour kWhr length L length to least radius L/r of gyration light emitting diode LED linear lin linear foot lin ft liter l manhole MH maximum max mean sea level MSL mercury Hg miles per hour mph milli-amp mA milliampere DC mAdc milligram mg milligrams per liter mg/l milliliter ml millimeter mm million gallon mil million gallons per day mgd minimum min motor control center MCC net positive suction head available NPSHA net positive suction head required NPSHR number No., # National Pipe Thread NPT Operation and Maintenance O&M ounce oz outside diameter OD parts per million ppm post meridiem pm plus or minus +/-, ± polytetrafluorethylene PTFE polyvinyl chloride PVC pound lb
01420-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
pounds per square foot psf, lb/ft² pounds per square inch psi, lb/in² pounds per square inch absolute psia pounds per square inch gage psig Process and Instrumentation Diagrams P&ID random access memory RAM reinforced concrete pipe RCP reinforced concrete cylinder pipe RCCP relative humidity RH revolutions per minute rpm second sec, s specific gravity sp gr square foot sq ft, SF, ft² square inch sq in, in² square yard sq yd, SY, yd² stainless steel SS
standard std standard cubic feet per minute scfm symmetrical sym. total dynamic head tdh totally-enclosed, fan- cooled TEFC totally-enclosed, non- ventilated TENV twisted shielded TWSH ultraviolet UV United States US, USA variable frequency drive VFD, AFD volt V volts alternating current VAC volts direct current VDC water to cement W/C, wc water column W.C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01500-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACTOR'S STAGING AREA AND WORK ACCESS PLAN
A. The CONTRACTOR shall limit the location of the storage of equipment and materials to the staging area(s) designated on the Drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall make their own arrangements for additional space that may be required and shall bear all associated costs.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a work access plan showing the planned access route for deliveries of supplies and mobilization of work force for ENGINEER's approval prior to mobilization.
D. On-Site Project Office: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain near the work in progress a suitable office or other
protected area in which shall be kept project copies of the Contract Documents, project progress records, project schedule, shop drawings and other relevant documents which shall be accessible to the OWNER and ENGINEER during normal working hours.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall make their own arrangements for additional space that may be required and bear all associated costs.
E. Temporary Facilities Plan: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for approval, as part of the
mobilization effort, the proposed plan and layout for all temporary offices, sanitary facilities, temporary construction roads, storage buildings, storage yards, temporary water service and distribution, temporary telephone and temporary power service and distribution.
2. The plan shall show all temporary fencing and gates and all proposed access to the work areas.
3. Prior to the removal of existing fence, the CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary security fencing at least equal to the existing chain link and barbed wire fencing to protect the existing facilities and structures.
F. Access Roads: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall "winterize" all access roads to provide a surface reasonably
satisfactory for traffic during wet winter months. 2. The roads shall be gravel surfaced, even, free from humps and depressions. 3. All costs of complying with this requirement shall be included in the lump sum bid.
1.2 STORAGE - GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide any temporary storage required for the protection of equipment and materials as recommended by manufacturers of such materials.
01500-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.3 STORAGE BUILDINGS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall erect or provide temporary storage buildings of the various sizes as required for the protection of mechanical and electrical equipment and materials as recommended by manufacturers of such equipment and materials.
B. The buildings shall be provided with such environmental control systems that meet recommendations of manufacturers of all equipment and materials stored in the buildings.
C. The buildings shall be of sufficient size and so arranged or partitioned to provide security for their contents and provide ready access for inspection and inventory.
D. At or near the completion of the work, and as directed by the ENGINEER, the temporary storage buildings shall be dismantled, removed from the site, and remain the property of the CONTRACTOR.
E. Combustible materials (paints, solvents, fuels, etc.) shall be safely stored and separated in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and in compliance with hazardous material storage requirements. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing proper storage buildings for combustible materials.
1.4 STORAGE YARDS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary storage yards as required for the storage of materials that are not subject to damage by weather conditions.
B. Materials such as pipe, reinforcing and structural steel, shall be stored on pallets or racks, off the ground, and stored in a manner to allow ready access for inspection and inventory.
C. Temporary gravel surfacing of the storage yards shall meet with the approval of the ENGINEER.
1.5 PARKING AREAS
A. Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking, access by emergency vehicles, OWNER’s operations, or construction operations.
1.6 VEHICULAR TRAFFIC
A. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding closing or restricting use of public streets or highways. No public or private road shall be closed, except by written permission of proper authority. Assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits.
B. Conduct the Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian.
C. Whenever it is necessary to cross, close, or obstruct roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for accommodation of public and private travel.
01500-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.7 DELIVERY-STORAGE-HANDLING
A. General: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver, handle, and store materials and equipment in
accordance with supplier's written recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft.
2. Delivery schedules shall be controlled to minimize long-term storage at the site and overcrowding of construction spaces.
3. In particular, the CONTRACTOR shall provide delivery/ installation coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage for material or equipment recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss.
B. Transportation and Handling: 1. Materials and equipment shall be transported by methods to avoid damage and shall
be delivered in dry, undamaged condition in supplier's unopened containers or packaging.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials, and equipment by methods that will prevent soiling and damage.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging packaging, and surrounding surfaces.
C. Storage and Protection: 1. Materials and equipment shall be stored in accordance with supplier's written
instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Exposed metal surfaces of valves, fittings and similar materials shall be coated with grease in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent corrosion. Sensitive materials and equipment shall be stored in weather-tight enclosures and temperature and humidity ranges shall be maintained within tolerances required by supplier's written instructions.
2. For exterior storage of fabricated materials, they shall be placed on sloped support above ground. Materials or equipment subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious sheet covering; ventilation shall be provided to avoid condensation.
3. Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid surfaces in a well-drained area and shall be prevented from mixing with foreign matter.
4. Inspection: a. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. b. The CONTRACTOR shall periodically inspect to assure materials and equipment are
undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. 5. Storage shall be arranged in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored
items.
1.8 PROJECT SECURITY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall make adequate provision for the protection of the work area against fire, theft and vandalism, and for the protection of the public and OWNER personnel against exposure to injury, and for the security of any off-site storage areas.
B. All costs for this protection shall be included within the CONTRACTOR's bid.
01500-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.9 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all necessary temporary telephones, fuel, power, potable water, sanitary, and proper toilet accommodations. CONTRACTOR shall not use OWNER-owned utilities.
B. The temporary facilities to be provided by the CONTRACTOR as described above shall conform to all requirements in regard to operation, safety, and fire hazards of State and local authorities and of Underwriters.
C. CONTRACTOR shall return the site and facilities to their original "as-found" condition, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, at the completion of the project.
1.10 SOUND CONTROL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all local sound control and noise level rules, regulations and ordinances which apply to any work performed pursuant to the contract.
B. Each internal combustion engine, used for any purpose on the job or related to the job, shall be equipped with a muffler of a type recommended by the manufacturer, so as to produce a maximum noise level of 85 dBA at 5 feet.
C. No internal combustion engine shall be operated on the project without said muffler.
D. Special Precautions for Inhabited Areas: 1. In inhabited areas, particularly residential, operations shall be performed in a manner
to minimize unnecessary noise generation. 2. In residential areas, special measures shall be taken to suppress noise generated by
repair and service activities during the night hours.
1.11 DUST/AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall take whatever steps, procedures, or means as are required to prevent dust conditions being caused by operations in connection with the execution of the Work; and on any road which the CONTRACTOR or any of their Subcontractors are using, excavation or fill areas, demolition operations, or other activities.
B. Control shall be by sprinkling, use of dust palliatives, modification of operations, or any other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Damage to personal property, etc., resulting from the CONTRACTOR's construction operations shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the OWNER.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the streets and work area clean at all times by means of mechanical sweepers or hand sweeping. Water will be used for dust control only, and not for cleaning streets.
E. Burning of waste, rubbish, or other debris will not be permitted on or adjacent to site.
1.12 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris and shall make necessary arrangements for such disposal. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain written
01500-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
permission from property owner prior to disposing surplus materials, waste products, or debris on private property.
B. All waste disposal shall be done in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
C. Landfill Disposal: 1. If the CONTRACTOR proposes to dispose of construction debris, trench spoils,
excavation spoils, etc., at a landfill, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide and pay for all permits and analyses required by the landfill.
2. If the analyses determine that the material is hazardous, then an equitable adjustment of the Contract for the cost of hazardous waste disposal will be made in accordance with the General Conditions, and the following: a. Time extension or contract costs will not be granted for delays that could have
been avoided by the CONTRACTOR redirecting their forces and equipment to perform other work on the contract.
D. Ditches, washes, or drainage ways shall not be filled.
E. Disposal operations shall not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances.
F. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the disposal site in a condition of good appearance and safety during the construction period.
G. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall have completed the leveling and cleanup of the disposal site.
1.13 CLEAN UP
A. Throughout the period of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the work site free and clean of all rubbish and debris, and shall promptly remove from the site, or from property adjacent to the site of the work, all unused and rejected materials, surplus earth, concrete, plaster, and debris.
B. Upon completion of the work, and prior to final acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall remove from the vicinity of the work all plant, surplus material, and equipment belonging to the CONTRACTOR or used under their direction during construction.
1.14 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. When sandblasting, spray painting, spraying of insulation, or other activities inconveniencing or dangerous to property or the health of employees, the public or construction workers, are in progress, the area of activity shall be enclosed adequately to contain the dust, over spray, or other hazard.
B. In the event there are no permanent enclosures of the area, or such enclosures are incomplete or inadequate, the CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable temporary enclosures as required by the ENGINEER to meet field conditions in accordance with the recommendations of the owner-furnished equipment supplier (if applicable) and the CONTRACTOR's equipment supplier requirements.
C. Said temporary or permanent enclosures shall be adequately ventilated to ensure the safety of the workers.
01500-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.15 DRAINAGE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary actions as required to meet discharge requirements of the Arizona Dept. of Environmental Quality and other pertinent local ordinances and regulations pertaining to dewatering and/or site drainage discharged into storm drains and creeks. This may include, but may not be limited to, the use of retention basins and silt basins to settle most of the solids prior to discharge.
B. In excavation, fill, and grading operations, care shall be taken to disturb the pre-existing drainage pattern as little as possible.
C. Particular care shall be taken not to direct drainage water onto private property or into streets or drainage ways inadequate for the increased flow.
D. Drainage means shall be provided to protect the work.
1.16 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary lighting in all work areas sufficient to maintain a lighting level during working hours not less than the lighting level required by OSHA standards.
1.17 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A. Construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities shall be of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move the loads to which they will be subjected. Railings, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by law or for adequate protection of life and property shall be provided.
B. Temporary supports shall be designed with an adequate safety factor to assure adequate load bearing capability. Whenever required by safety regulations, the CONTRACTOR shall submit design calculations for staging and shoring prior to application of loads.
1.18 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
A. At such time or times as any temporary construction facilities and utilities are no longer required for the work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of their intent and schedule for removal of the temporary facilities and utilities, and obtain the ENGINEER's approval before removing the same.
B. As approved, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the temporary facilities and utilities from the site as CONTRACTOR’s property and leave the site in such condition as specified, as directed by the ENGINEER, and/or as shown on the Drawings.
C. In unfinished areas, such as planted medians, the condition of the site shall be left in a condition that will restore original drainage, evenly graded, seeded or planted as necessary, and left with an appearance equal to, or better than original.
01500-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01505-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01505
MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all bonds, insurance, and licenses; moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, temporary buildings, and other construction facilities; all as required for the proper performance and completion of the work.
B. Mobilization shall include but not be limited to the following principal items: 1. Moving on to the site of all CONTRACTOR's plant and equipment. 2. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 3. Establishing fire protection system. 4. Developing construction water supply. 5. Furnishing the work access plan as specified in Section 01500, Temporary
Construction Facilities and Utilities. 6. Providing all on-site CONTRACTOR communication facilities, including telephones, and
radio pagers and any radio communications facilities required for the CONTRACTOR to coordinate their forces.
7. Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified in Section 01500, Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities.
8. Arranging for and erection of the CONTRACTOR's work and storage yard, including site security.
9. Posting all EPA and OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs. 10. Post all required labor and EEOE notices. 11. Have the CONTRACTOR's superintendent at the job site full time. 12. Submittal and OWNER acceptance of the Construction Schedule. 13. Establishing site security, lighting, fencing, and signing. 14. Obtaining all bonds, insurance and licenses. 15. Providing an organization chart of the project and for the CONTRACTOR's firm. The
project chart shall include the name, title and responsibilities of each position which is involved in the work.
16. Other mobilization items approved by the ENGINEER required to support the complete work (e.g., Health and Safety Plans for Hazardous Waste).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01610-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01610
GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. All products furnished and installed under this contract shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this Section except as otherwise specified in other Sections.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all details of the products and equipment with other related parts of the work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the work required to accommodate products or equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Contract Drawings or Specifications.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Where CONTRACTOR design is specified, design and installation of systems, equipment, and components, including supports and anchorage, shall be in accordance with provisions of 2012 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) with ASCE 7-10 (w/March 2013 Errata), as amended by the City of Prescott, AZ. 1. Importance Factors:
a. Is = 1.15 Snow b. It = 1.25 Ice c. Iw = 1.0 Wind d. Ie = 1.25 Seismic
2. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph, Exposure C. 3. Snow: 30-psf, non-reducible. Given by the City of Prescott 4. Seismic:
a. SS (maximum short-term spectral response acceleration) = 0.313 b. S1 (maximum 1-second spectral response acceleration) = 0.091 c. SDS (design short-term spectral response acceleration) = 0.323 d. SD1 (design 1-second spectral response acceleration) = 0.145 e. Seismic Design Category = C
5. Maximum Rain Intensity: 3-inches/hour
B. Proof of Compliance: 1. Structural integrity and anchorage shall be certified by an approved calculation that
demonstrates the adequacy of the anchorage system for seismic forces. This calculation may be based on principles of structural analysis and engineering mechanics, or based on similarity to approved shake-table tests.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for review and approval test data or calculations certified by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona to show compliance with the above requirements.
01610-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Altitude: Provide materials and equipment suitable for installation and operation under rated conditions at 5090 feet above sea level.
B. Provide equipment and devices installed outdoors or in unheated enclosures capable of continuous operation within an ambient temperature range of -20 degrees F to 110 degrees F.
1.5 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.
B. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.
C. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick.
D. Except where otherwise specified, all metal which will be exposed to weather, submerged or otherwise exposed to moisture shall be either non-ferrous or stainless steel, as the application may require.
1.6 LUBRICATION
A. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants.
B. Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by OWNER. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, the use of synthetic lubricants will not be acceptable.
C. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the normal operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal installed position.
1.7 ELECTRIC MOTORS
A. Unless otherwise specified, motors furnished with equipment shall meet the following requirements: 1. Designed and applied in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, AFBMA, and NEC for the
duty service imposed by the driven equipment, such as frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment.
01610-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Rated for continuous duty at 40oC ambient, unless the application is well recognized for intermittent duty service as a standard industry practice.
3. Insulated with Class F insulation and designed for a service factor of 1.15, or greater. 4. Three phase motors used in conjunction with variable speed drives shall have Class F
insulation with a Class B temperature rise at rated nameplate horsepower, and 1.15 service factor.
5. When operating at service factor load, maximum observable temperature rise of insulation and motor parts, as determined by resistance or thermometer methods, shall not exceed the NEMA allowable limits for the type of motor, the type of enclosure, and the particular application with regard to continuous or intermittent duty.
6. To ensure long motor life, nameplate horsepower, regardless of service factor, shall be at least 115 percent of the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment.
7. Designed for full voltage starting. 8. Designed to operate from an electrical system that may have a maximum of 5
percent voltage distortion per IEEE Standard 519. 9. Derated, if required, for the altitude at which the equipment is installed. 10. Clamp-type grounding terminal shall be inside motor conduit box. 11. External conduit boxes shall be oversized at least one size larger than NEMA standard. 12. Totally enclosed motors shall have a continuous moisture drain which also excludes
insects. 13. Bearings shall be either oil or grease lubricated. 14. Manufacturer's standard motor may be supplied on integrally constructed, packaged
assemblies such as appliances, tools, unit heaters, and similar equipment specified by model number, in which case a redesign of the unit would be required to furnish motors of other than the manufacturer's standard design. However, in all cases, totally enclosed motors are preferred and shall be furnished if offered by the manufacturer as a standard option.
15. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished on: a. Equipment for installation below grade. b. Equipment operating in wet or dust-laden locations.
16. Drip-proof motors, or totally enclosed motors at the supplier's option, shall be furnished on equipment in indoor, above-grade, clean, and dry locations.
17. Explosion-proof or submersible motors shall be furnished as required by applicable codes, as specified in other Sections, or at the supplier's option.
18. Motors shall be rated and constructed as follows: a. Below 1/2 hp:
1) 115 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. 2) Built-in manual-reset thermal protector, or integrally mounted stainless steel
enclosed manual motor starter. b. 1/2 hp and above:
1) 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase. 2) Where specified or required by the drawings, motors used on 240 volt systems
shall be 230 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
1.8 DRIVE UNITS
A. The nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer shall be at least equal to the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hours continuous service.
B. Unless otherwise specified, the use of gearmotors will not be acceptable.
01610-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Gear reducers: 1. Each gear reducer shall be a totally enclosed unit with oil or grease lubricated
antifriction, rolling element bearings throughout. 2. Helical, spiral bevel, combination bevel-helical, and worm gear reducers shall have a
service factor of at least 1.50 based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Shaft-mounted and flange-mounted gear reducers shall be rated AGMA Class II. Helical gear reducers shall have a gear strength rating to catalog rating of 1.5. Each gear reducer shall bear an AGMA nameplate.
3. The thermal horsepower rating of each unit shall equal or exceed the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. During continuous operation, the maximum sump oil temperature shall not rise more than 100oF above the ambient air temperature in the vicinity of the unit and shall not exceed 200oF.
4. Bearings: a. Each grease lubricated bearing shall be installed in a bearing housing designed to
facilitate periodic regreasing of the bearing by means of a manually operated grease gun.
b. Each bearing housing shall be designed to evenly distribute new grease, to properly dispose of old grease, and to prevent overgreasing of the bearing.
c. The use of permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings will not be acceptable. d. An internal or external oil pump and appurtenances shall be provided if required
to properly lubricate oil lubricated bearings. e. A dipstick or sight glass arranged to permit visual inspection of lubricant level
shall be provided on each unit. 5. Gear reducers that require the removal of parts or periodic disassembly of the unit for
cleaning and manual regreasing of bearings will not be acceptable. 6. Certification shall be furnished by the gear reducer manufacturer indicating that the
intended application of each unit has been reviewed in detail by the manufacturer and that the unit provided is fully compatible with the conditions of installation and service.
D. V-belt drives: 1. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment.
V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.6 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor.
1.9 SAFETY GUARDS
A. All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard.
B. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gauge or heavier galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet steel or 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal.
C. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation and removal.
D. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized.
E. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water.
01610-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.10 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment.
B. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed.
C. Anchor bolts shall comply with Section 05051, Anchors, Inserts and Epoxy Dowels and, unless otherwise specified, shall have a minimum diameter of 1/2-inch.
D. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete.
1.11 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed on concrete bases at least 6 inches high.
B. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates shall be provided for pumps, compressors, and other equipment.
C. Each unit and its drive assembly shall be supported on a single baseplate of neat design.
D. Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all components and adequate grout holes.
E. Baseplates for pumps shall have a means for collecting leakage and a threaded drain connection.
F. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with grout as specified in Section 03600, Grout.
1.12 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices.
1.13 SHOP PAINTING
A. Surface Protection: 1. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable paint or coatings applied in
the shop. 2. Surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the
equipment. 3. Exposed surfaces shall be finished smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as
necessary to provide a smooth uniform base for painting. 4. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed
components shall be shop primed or finished with a high-grade oil-resistant enamel suitable for coating in the field with an alkyd enamel.
5. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed.
01610-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Shop Primer: 1. Surfaces to be painted after installation shall be prepared for painting as
recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of the specified primer.
2. Unless otherwise specified, the shop primer for steel and iron surfaces shall be: a. Cook "391-N-167 Barrier Coat", b. Koppers "No. 10 Inhibitive Primer", c. Tnemec "37H Chem-Prime HS", d. Valspar "13-R-28 Chromox Primer", e. Or equal.
C. Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust-preventive compound, Houghton "Rust Veto 344", Rust-Oleum "R-9", or equal.
1.14 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times.
B. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of ENGINEER.
C. Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items.
D. Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment.
1.15 STORAGE
A. Upon delivery, all equipment and material shall immediately be stored and protected until installed in the work.
B. Pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and all equipment with antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight structures maintained at a temperature above 60o F. Equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture and water damage. All space heaters furnished in equipment shall be connected and operated continuously.
C. Equipment and materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other deleterious effects of storage when installed in the work.
1.16 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary for proper results. When so specified, or when employees of the CONTRACTOR or their subcontractors are not qualified, such personnel shall be field representatives of the manufacturer of the equipment or materials being installed.
01610-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Qualified field representatives shall be provided by the equipment manufacturers as required by Section 01750, Testing, Training and Startup.
C. All equipment installed under this Contract, including that furnished by OWNER shall be placed into successful operation according to the written instructions of the manufacturer or the instructions of the manufacturer's field representative. All required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activity shall be provided.
D. Acceptance of work in connection with the installation of equipment furnished by others will be subject to approval of the field representative. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for planning, supervising, and executing the installation of work, and the approval or acceptance of ENGINEER or the field representative will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for defective work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01750-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01750
TESTING, TRAINING AND STARTUP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Scope: 1. This Section covers general equipment and system testing and startup requirements,
services of the manufacturer's representatives and special coordinating services required of the CONTRACTOR that shall apply during construction and training of the OWNER's personnel for facilities operation.
2. Specific testing and tracking procedures and requirements found in the Technical Specifications shall also apply.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall inform all Subcontractors and manufacturers of the requirements herein and include the required services in their costs for the work specified in these Contract Documents. Where a minimum amount of time is stated in the Technical Specifications for manufacturers' services, any additional time required to perform the specified services shall be provided at no additional cost to the OWNER.
C. Scheduling: 1. Equipment testing and plant startup are requisite to satisfactory completion of the
Contract and, therefore, shall be completed within the contract time. 2. All equipment testing and plant startup activities shall be realistically allowed for and
shown on the CONTRACTOR's Construction Schedule, in accordance with Section 01320, Progress Schedule.
3. All equipment testing and plant startup activities shall be scheduled in conformance with the restrictions specified in Section 01130, Special Project Constraints.
D. Equipment testing shall be satisfactorily completed prior to commencing plant startup associated with the particular equipment item or equipment package. The equipment shall not be considered ready for testing until the following conditions are satisfied: 1. Manufacturer's certification of equipment installation has been accepted by the
ENGINEER. 2. Electrical and/or instrumentation Subcontractor certification of motor control logic has
been accepted by the ENGINEER. 3. Related Technical Submittals, O&M Manual and Final Shop Drawings have been
accepted by the ENGINEER. 4. Operator training services have been furnished by the CONTRACTOR (operational
testing only). 5. Testing procedures have been submitted in writing and accepted by the ENGINEER in
accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. All testing procedures and results shall be submitted in writing.
E. The requirements of plant startup specified herein shall also apply to the startup of individual treatment plant processes and facilities.
F. Startup Plan:
01750-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Not less than 3 months prior to initial equipment or system startup, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review, a detailed Facilities Startup Plan for the associated items of equipment and/or systems.
2. The Startup Plan shall include: a. A detailed sub-network of the CONTRACTOR's Construction Progress Schedule
including the following activities: 1) Manufacturer's Services; 2) Installation Certifications; 3) Operator Training; 4) O&M Manual; 5) Functional Testing; 6) Performance Testing; 7) Operational Testing; 8) All other activities necessary to affect a coordinated and successful Testing,
Training and Startup. b. Written testing plan with proposed data logs for each item of equipment to be
tested. c. A discussion of any coordination required with the Owners staff and/or any system
or equipment outage requirements. d. The Plan shall be updated and/or revised as necessary prior to subsequent
Construction Progress Meetings. e. Testing shall not be scheduled earlier than 30 days after approval of the Plan.
1.2 SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. General: 1. Manufacturer’s Representative:
a. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of competent and experienced technical representatives of the manufacturers of all equipment and systems furnished under the contract, for as many days as may be necessary for assembly, installation, testing assistance and operator training.
b. Manufacturer's field representatives shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct CONTRACTOR's erection or installation procedures, or perform an installation check, as required.
c. In each case, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange to have the manufacturer's representative revisit the job site as often as necessary until operator training is complete and testing and startup problems have been resolved to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
d. This requirement applies to manufacturers of all equipment furnished (excluding manually operated valves smaller than 24 inches in size, and any other items of equipment specifically exempted by the ENGINEER in writing), whether or not specifically set forth in the Technical Specifications.
e. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a service record on each item of equipment and shall deliver these service records to the ENGINEER prior to acceptance of operational testing.
B. Fulfillment of Specified Minimum Services: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior written approval from the ENGINEER for
providing manufacturers' services. 2. All requests to the ENGINEER for prior approval shall (1) be in writing, (2) be
submitted not less than 10 calendar days prior to the providing of the subject services, (3) state the service to be provided, and (4) state the reason(s) why the timing of the service is appropriate.
01750-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Request made to the ENGINEER less than 10 calendar days prior to the manufacturers' services may not receive consideration and response prior to the times the services are provided.
4. Visits of manufacturers and their representatives to the jobsite or training classroom without prior approval as provided herein may not act to fulfill the specified minimum man-day requirements.
C. Certificate of Proper Installation: 1. Equipment requiring factory tests shall not be delivered to the jobsite until the
CONTRACTOR submits acceptable certified test results to the ENGINEER. 2. Equipment shall not be considered ready for functional testing until after the following
certifications have been submitted and accepted by the ENGINEER. a. Manufacturer Representatives:
1) The CONTRACTOR shall require that each manufacturer's representative furnish to the ENGINEER a written and signed report addressed to the OWNER certifying that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts, has been operated satisfactorily under full-load conditions and is ready for full-time operation.
2) For pumps, compressors, blowers, engines, motors, and other rotating or reciprocating equipment, the report shall certify that the equipment operates within the manufacturer's allowable limits for vibration.
3) The report shall also certify that all controls, protective devices, \instrumentation, and control panels furnished as part of the manufacturer's equipment package are properly installed and calibrated; and that the control logic for equipment startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating.
4) The CONTRACTOR shall also sign said certification. 5) The CONTRACTOR shall submit "Manufacturer's Certification of Proper
Installation" on the OWNER form. b. Electrical and Instrumentation Subcontractor:
1) The CONTRACTOR shall require that the electrical and/or instrumentation Subcontractor shall furnish a written and signed report to the ENGINEER certifying that the motor control logic for the equipment item that resides in motor control centers, control panels, control boards, microprocessors, distributed processing units, computers, and the like furnished by the electrical and/or instrumentation Subcontractor has been properly tested and calibrated.
2) The report shall certify that the control logic for equipment startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating.
3) The CONTRACTOR shall also sign said certification.
1.3 STARTUP AND TESTING
A. General: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the effective coordination of all parties necessary for
the successful project startup. 2. The ENGINEER shall not be responsible to instruct the CONTRACTOR in the startup of
the project, however, the ENGINEER will be available prior to and during startup to provide operational and technical support to the CONTRACTOR.
01750-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, consumables (power, water, chemicals, air, etc.) tools, equipment, instruments, and services required and incidental to completing all functional, performance and operational testing of installed equipment.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed test procedures to the ENGINEER for review at least 30 days prior to testing.
5. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER written notice confirming the date of testing at least five working days before the time the equipment is scheduled to be tested.
6. All testing shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER to be considered valid. 7. Test Reports:
a. CONTRACTOR shall submit written detailed results of all functional, performance and operational testing.
b. Upon successful completion of Operational testing all equipment installation, testing and maintenance records shall be submitted to the ENGINEER.
c. Said records shall be bound separately for each piece of equipment or system and shall be collected by type of record.
8. For factory tests, written test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 10 days prior to shipment.
B. Functional testing: 1. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be functionally tested by the
CONTRACTOR after installation for proper operation. 2. A minimum of ten (10) days prior to the start of functional testing, the CONTRACTOR
shall submit interconnection diagrams for the equipment and for the alarms, controls and instruments associated with the equipment. This requirement shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of meeting any requirements in the technical specifications for earlier submittal of the interconnection diagrams.
3. Minimum Test Requirements a. The functional test of each piece of mechanical equipment shall continue for not
less than eight (8) continuous hours without interruption. b. The functional test shall include checking for proper rotation, alignment, speed,
flows, pressure, vibration, sound level, etc. Initial equipment and system adjustment and calibrations shall be performed in the presence of and with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative.
c. The functional test shall include a demonstration of the proper performance of all alarms, local and remote controls, instrumentation, equipment functions, and all other electrical, mechanical and piping systems.
d. All parts shall operate satisfactorily in all respects, under continuous full load, and in accordance with the specified requirements, for the full duration of the eight-hour test period.
e. If any part of a unit shows evidence of unsatisfactory or improper operation during the eight-hour test period, correction or repairs shall be made and the full eight-hour test operation, as specified herein, shall be repeated after all parts operate satisfactorily.
C. Performance testing: 1. Where performance testing is required by the Technical Specifications, the testing
shall be supervised by the manufacturer's representative. These services shall continue until such times as the applicable equipment or system has been successfully tested for performance and has been accepted by the ENGINEER for operational testing.
2. Performance testing shall take place after functional testing is successfully completed in accordance with Article 1.3 B.
01750-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Performance testing shall demonstrate that the equipment meets all performance requirements specified.
D. Startup/operational testing: 1. Upon successful completion of operator training and the functional, performance and
leakage testing, the CONTRACTOR shall startup the plant facilities and test the equipment operation and performance by conducting a seven (7) day, continuous operational test of the completed facilities as an operational process unit to demonstrate to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that all equipment and systems required by these specifications will operate in the manner in which they are intended to perform.
2. The OWNER will provide CONTRACTOR-trained operating personnel for the duration of the operational test. Said operation shall be conducted and under the supervision and direction of the CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer's representative.
3. Operational Defects: a. All defects in materials or workmanship which appear during the operational test
shall be immediately corrected by the CONTRACTOR. b. In the event of a malfunction or deficiency that results in shutdown or partial
operation of a system or process unit or results in performance that is less than that specified, the startup duration shall be repeated for that corresponding system or process unit and any other affected equipment so its proper operation and performance as required by the Contract Documents is demonstrated for a minimum of seven (7) continuous and trouble free days.
4. If the operational test is interrupted through no fault of the CONTRACTOR the test may resume at the earliest mutually agreeable time.
5. No unit process or part thereof shall be placed in service until it has successfully completed operational testing.
6. During plant startup, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the appropriate construction trades and the services of authorized Manufacturer's representatives for operational testing and as necessary, to correct faulty equipment operation.
7. After completion of all startup/operational testing, the CONTRACTOR shall repaint, hose, scrub, clean up and otherwise return the work to a "like new" condition, prior to OWNER acceptance.
1.4 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. General: 1. Operation and maintenance training of OWNER's personnel shall be provided for
mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and control equipment as listed in this Section or elsewhere in the Specifications.
2. For the purposes of this requirement, operations training is considered to be separate from maintenance training. Instructions are to be tailored to the needs of each group.
3. These training services shall be conducted by the manufacturer's representative and shall ensure measurable and observable means that OWNER personnel are qualified to perform equipment task requirements, including essential knowledge, skills and abilities.
4. Training shall be conducted by competent representatives who are certified by the manufacturer to be thoroughly familiar with the subject matter as well as instructional methods.
5. Training materials shall be submitted to the OWNER (see Paragraph 1.4 C below) for review. Acceptance of training materials is required prior to start of training.
6. All training shall be completed prior to beginning operational testing.
01750-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
7. The OWNER shall have the right to videotape any or all training sessions, or may designate separate sessions or portions thereof for the sole purpose of videotaping.
B. Training coordinator: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall designate and provide one or more persons to be responsible
for coordinating and expediting training duties. 2. The person or persons so designated shall be present at all training coordination
meetings with the OWNER.
C. Training schedule: 1. The CONTRACTOR's coordinator shall coordinate the training periods with OWNER’s
personnel and manufacturer's representatives, and shall submit a training schedule and the training materials for each piece of equipment or system for which training is to be provided.
2. The training schedule shall be submitted not less than 21 calendar days prior to the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the then current Plan of Operation.
3. Equipment and/or systems shall be deemed suitable for use in training upon satisfactory completion of functional testing.
4. All training with regards to a unit process or part thereof shall be completed prior to the start of operational testing.
5. As a minimum, training shall be provided on the following equipment and systems: a. Booster Pump b. Valves c. Actuator d. Electrical Gear
6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide distinct and separate training sessions for both operations and maintenance personnel, meeting the following criteria: a. Maintenance Training:
1) Maintenance training shall be provided for all items in 1.4.C.5 above. 2) The CONTRACTOR shall provide two (2) separate training sessions on a day
agreed to by the ENGINEER. 3) Training shall emphasize theory of operations, troubleshooting, and
preventative maintenance and repair procedures. 4) The discussion shall encompass issues relating to instrumentation, electrical,
and mechanical systems. b. Operations training:
1) Operations training shall be provided for each piece of equipment listed in Paragraph 1.4.C.5 above.
2) The CONTRACTOR shall provide two (2) separate training sessions for each three (3) operating shifts.
3) Sessions are to be provided for each shift within the following time periods. a) Day Shift 8:00 a.m. - 2:00 p.m. b) Swing Shift 4:00 p.m. - 10:00 p.m. c) Grave Shift 12:00 a.m. - 6:00 a.m.
c. Training session schedules shall be approved by the ENGINEER. d. Training shall emphasize theory of operations, startup instructions, emergency
and normal shutdown instructions, lockout procedures, troubleshooting, preventative maintenance, and alarm and control logic.
7. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm each training period a minimum of three working days prior to the schedule time.
8. If a manufacturer's representative fails to conduct a scheduled training class, the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to compensate the OWNER for labor costs, including
01750-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
overhead, for all OWNER personnel in attendance for the entire scheduled training period.
9. If the CONTRACTOR or the manufacturer's representative fails to provide training that qualifies the OWNER personnel to perform equipment task requirements, the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to provide remedial training to ensure OWNER personnel proficiency at no additional cost to the OWNER.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORD KEEPING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain as a minimum, the following records: 1. Equipment manufacturer's shop drawings. 2. Daily logs indicating all equipment testing and startup activities. 3. Log and time sheets of all manufacturer's representatives performing services on the
jobsite. 4. Updated equipment testing and startup schedules. 5. Records of system cleaning. 6. Hydrostatic and pressure test records. 7. Equipment alignment and vibration measurements and corrective actions. 8. Equipment lubrication records. 9. Insulation resistance measurements. 10. Electrical phase, voltage and amperage measurements. 11. Electrical breaker inspection, test, and adjustment records. 12. Logs of abnormal circuits and lifted wires. 13. Testing and validation of all central and alarm functions. 14. Data sheets of all testing and calibration of instrumentation devices and control loops
including documentation of set points. 15. Equipment and system release logs (from construction to startup). 16. Daily work reports.
3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES
A. The general work procedures listed below outline the work to be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Additional procedures applicable to specific equipment items are specified elsewhere.
B. Technical assistance and support: 1. Obtain the assistance of the appropriate construction trades and the manufacturer or
vendor, as required for technical assistance during equipment installation, testing, and startup by the CONTRACTOR and for training of the OWNER's Operation and Maintenance personnel.
2. Furnish names and telephone numbers of manufacturer's and vendor's current technical service representatives for use by the ENGINEER.
C. Instructions: 1. Maintain an adequate manufacturer's instruction file so that the information will be
readily available during equipment testing and startup.
01750-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Prior to equipment testing, finalize, and transmit to the ENGINEER the applicable technical manuals as required under Section 01330, Submittal Procedures of the Contract Specifications.
D. Removal of rust preventives: 1. Prior to equipment testing, remove all rust preventives and oils used to protect the
equipment during the construction period whenever these protective materials will be detrimental to operation or equipment maintenance.
E. Lubricants: 1. At least 60 days prior to startup, provide a list of the manufacturer's recommended
lubricants for use in the plant. All equipment lubrication shall be listed with the lubricant types and quantities recommended and approved by the equipment manufacturers.
2. Provide the necessary lubricants for startup and the initial 60 days of operation. 3. Flush systems and install the initial charge of all lubricants. Dispose of flushing oil in
accordance with applicable regulations. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall lubricate the equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations until the equipment is accepted by the OWNER. 5. Maintain a lubrication record for each item of equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall
submit the lubrication records to the ENGINEER prior to equipment testing.
F. Packing and seals: 1. Install, adjust, and replace packing, mechanical seals, and accessories, as necessary,
during the equipment testing and startup period. 2. Adjust seal water and flushing water flow rates in accordance with the equipment
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Removal of temporary bracing: 1. Prior to equipment testing, remove all temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign
objects that were installed in vessels, transformers, rotating machinery, or other equipment to prevent damage during shipping, storage, and erection, and repair any damage sustained.
H. Rotation, alignment, and vibration: 1. Prior to equipment testing, check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation
and for freedom of moving parts before connecting the driver. 2. Prior to equipment testing, perform the cold alignment and hot alignment to the
manufacturer's tolerances. 3. Prior to equipment testing, test equipment vibration and correct any vibration in
excess of the manufacturer's recommendation.
I. Tie-ins at the contract limits: 1. Provide proper notification, preparation, and coordination for safe tie-ins and minimal
interference with the plant operation. 2. Obtain approval and make the necessary tie-ins at the unit limits as required by the
Contract Documents and as approved by the ENGINEER. 3. Prior to startup, remove the temporary blind flanges, plugs, bulkheads, seals, etc.
J. Leak and pressure tests: 1. Provide the ENGINEER with 3-day advance notification in writing of the schedule for
non-operating field leak tests or field pressure tests on piping and field fabricated equipment, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER.
01750-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Provide the water, air and any special media required for the test purposes. 3. Prior to startup, conduct all leak and pressure tests in accordance with applicable
codes, regulations, and the Contract Documents, and as approved by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR is advised that the tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER, to be considered valid.
4. Maintain a record of the leak and pressure test data and work completed. 5. Dispose of the test media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the
OWNER and applicable regulatory agencies. 6. Isolate in-line equipment as necessary for protection against test pressure.
K. Pressure/vacuum safety relief devices: 1. Prior to equipment testing, test and adjust all safety devices as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. 2. Prior to plant startup, provide the ENGINEER with a list of all field or factory
equipment settings.
L. Flushing and chemical/mechanical cleaning: 1. Prior to equipment operation, conduct all flushing, blowing, and chemical/mechanical
cleaning operations without using the permanently installed equipment. 2. Provide any special media needed for flushing and/or cleaning purposes. 3. Dispose of all media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the OWNER
and the applicable regulatory agencies. 4. All systems shall be free of trash and construction debris before initiating startup. 5. Maintain a record of the work completed.
M. Screens, strainers, and blind flanges: 1. Provide and install temporary strainers, screens, and blind flanges as necessary to
protect the equipment and to test the equipment and pipelines. 2. Prior to startup, remove all of the temporary blinds and temporary appurtenances. 3. Clean the screens and strainers as required during startup. 4. At the end of startup, clean all of the permanently installed screens and strainers.
N. Purging/inerting: 1. Prior to startup, purge and/or passivate the facilities as specified. 2. Install purge/inerting connections in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. 3. Provide purge or inerting materials and conduct the necessary operations as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
O. Drying out: 1. Prior to startup, dry out the facilities as specified or recommended by the equipment
manufacturer to prevent contamination of catalysts, operating materials, and/or product.
2. Dry out systems, protective coatings, refractories, and linings as specified or recommended by the equipment manufacturers.
3.3 SPECIFIC PROCEDURES
A. In addition to the work responsibilities described in Subsection 3.2, the procedures outlined below further define the work responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR for specific systems and items of equipment.
B. Mechanical equipment:
01750-10
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Level baseplates and soleplates and grout under all load bearing surfaces. 2. Install suitable supports and flexible connections to alleviate any piping stresses that
may be imposed on pumps, compressors, and drivers. 3. In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, chemically clean lube oil,
seal oil, and cooling systems. Dispose of waste and cleaning media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the OWNER and applicable regulatory agencies.
4. In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, charge the lube oil, seal oil, and cooling systems with flushing media and circulate for cleaning purposes. Dispose of any flushing media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the OWNER and applicable regulatory agencies.
5. Charge the lube oil systems, seal oil systems, and cooling systems with the amount and type of operating oil or coolant recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Operate the equipment and check for excessive vibration, abnormal operating noises, overheating and lubricant leakage, etc., and test any safety shutdown/alarm devices for proper operation, and make any operating tests required by the ENGINEER. The adjustments required for proper operation shall be made prior to operational testing.
7. Utilize manufacturer's representative for technical assistance during installation and startup.
8. Prior to startup, all sidewalks, gratings, handrails, safety chains, safety shields, etc., shall be installed.
9. Prior to startup, demonstrate to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that all chemical solution pipelines are connected to the intended tank(s), feeder(s), pump(s), and application points, and that the pipes, appurtenances contained therein and diffusers will operate at the intended flow rates.
10. Prior to startup, the applicable safety equipment, emergency shower and eyewash units, fire extinguishers, fire suppression equipment, self-contained breathing apparatus, toxic and/or combustible gas detectors (including the respective personnel warning system), protective clothing, emergency repair kits, etc., shall be installed in an acceptable manner-subject to the ENGINEER's approval, and be fully ready for operation.
11. All safety hazards, e.g., exposed drive shafts or rotating equipment members, exposed electrical circuitry, open electrical junction boxes and panels, improperly supported piping and conduits, missing safety devices, etc., shall be corrected prior to supplier training of the OWNER's personnel.
12. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a comprehensive safety inspection and correct any safety deficiencies found before implementing plant startup.
13. Roadways that are required for ambulance service, fire fighting access, delivery of treatment chemicals and supplies, and disposal of the treatment byproducts shall be completed prior to startup.
14. Prior to startup, install all warning and safety signs, labels, and devices.
C. Tanks: 1. Test all tanks and internals, as required to demonstrate conformance to the Contract
Documents. Dispose of test media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the OWNER and the applicable regulatory agencies.
2. Prior to startup, conduct chemical cleaning or flushing operations as specified. Dispose of wastes and cleaning media in a manner that is acceptable to and approved by the OWNER and the applicable regulatory agencies.
3. Prior to startup, install all chemical identification, warning, and safety signs and labels.
D. Electrical power and lighting systems:
01750-11
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Provide the ENGINEER with 3-day advance notification in writing of the test schedule. The CONTRACTOR is advised that the tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER.
2. Perform insulation resistance tests on all wiring 120 volt and larger. Do not meggar instruments or solid-state devices.
3. Perform insulation resistance tests on all motor and transformer windings from phase to phase and phase to ground.
4. Perform grounding system tests to determine the continuity of connections and the value of resistance to ground.
5. Fill electrical gear with oil and/or other media as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
6. Prior to substantial completion and startup, test and set switchgear and circuit breaker relays for proper coordination and operation.
7. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualified "independent testing service", member of the National Electric Testing Association, to perform a thermographic survey on all switchgear buses, insulators and power connections when energized and under at least 20 percent load. Significant hot spots shall be further checked by infrared pyrometer for exact temperature rise. The CONTRACTOR shall troubleshoot and correct the thermographic hot spots. Correction shall be verified by repeating the thermographic survey at no additional cost to the OWNER.
8. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualified "independent testing service", member of the National Electric Testing Association, to inspect and test the protective relays and the 800-ampere and larger drawout breakers for proper installation, adjustment, and operation in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
9. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualified "independent testing service", member of the National Electrical Testing Association, to perform DC high potential tests on all cables that will operate at more than 2,000 volts to ground.
10. Obtain local electrical inspector's approval where required. 11. Energize all substations, with approval of the Utility Company and the ENGINEER after
completion of all electrical testing. 12. Prior to startup, perform tests and adjustments on all switchgear and motor control
equipment to demonstrate proper operation and conformance to the Contract Documents and manufacturer's recommended settings.
13. Prior to startup, test installation of emergency power and lighting systems for proper operation, including light intensity.
14. Prior to startup, provide the ENGINEER with a record of all test data and the work completed.
15. Vacuum clean all electrical equipment prior to startup and acceptance.
E. Piping systems: 1. Provide the ENGINEER with 3-day advance notification in writing of test schedule. 2. Hydrostatically or pneumatically test all piping as required by the codes and contract
documents. 3. After successful testing of the piping, slowly drain the system and then flush the
system. Orifice plates shall be installed after testing. If installed with the piping, they will be removed and replaced with spacers or pipe spools of equal length prior to the pressure test.
4. Dewater the system, remove blind flanges, and perform tightness tests, as required by the ENGINEER.
5. Insulate or paint piping, flanges, threaded joints, or field welds after the specified testing of each item has been completed unless instructed otherwise by the ENGINEER.
01750-12
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
6. Leave exposed all welded joints (longitudinal, girth, and nozzle) in underground piping that have not been shop tested until the specified testing has been completed. After final testing of these joints, cover the system.
7. Prior to substantial completion and startup, check pipe hangers, supports, guides, and pipe specialties for the removal of all shipping and erection stops and for the correctness of the cold and hot settings for the design service, make adjustments as necessary to obtain proper installation. Provide the ENGINEER with instructions for the hot settings.
8. As necessary during equipment testing and at the end of substantial completion and startup, clean or replace the screens and filter elements as appropriate for the filter type and service.
9. Prior to startup, verify, to the extent required by the ENGINEER, that specified valve packing has been provided on valves installed in the plant.
10. Prior to startup, install all of the valve and piping system identification labels. 11. Prior to startup, check and record the position of all process system valves. 12. Prior to startup, correct support, vibration, and thermal expansion problems detected
during the preliminary equipment testing. 13. Prior to the startup, retorque all hot and cold service bolting as required to ensure a
permanent and proper installation. 14. Prior to startup, demonstrate to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that each piping system
(e.g., chemical, sample, utility, irrigation process, etc.) functions as designed and required by the Contract Documents.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01800-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01800
OPERATIONAL COMPLETION AND PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Work will be considered operationally complete when all technical and administrative submittals, testing, training and startup are completed satisfactorily in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Operational completion shall apply to the project in its entirety.
1.2 CERTIFICATION OF OPERATIONAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting the ENGINEER's inspection for certification of each phase as operationally complete, the CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that each phase of the Work is operationally complete and shall submit a list of known items still to be completed or corrected (punchlist) prior to Contract Completion.
B. The following items shall be completed: 1. OWNER has been advised of any pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Specific warranties, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar
documents have been submitted. 3. All tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items have been
delivered to OWNER. 4. Instruction of OWNER's operation/maintenance personnel, and start up testing has
been completed. 5. Submittal and acceptance of all O&M manuals. 6. Changeover of locks to OWNER's cores/keys.
C. Punchlist: 1. When the CONTRACTOR considers that the Work, or a portion or phase thereof which
the OWNER agrees to accept separately, is operationally complete, the CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that the work is operationally complete and shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to Contract Completion (punchlist).
2. The ENGINEER may add additional work items to the punchlist. 3. Failure to include an item on the punchlist does not alter the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Upon receipt of the CONTRACTOR's punchlist, the ENGINEER will make an inspection
to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is operationally complete.
5. If the ENGINEER's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the CONTRACTOR's list, that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, upon notification by the ENGINEER and before an issuance of the Certificate of Operational Completion is provided, complete or correct such item.
6. The CONTRACTOR shall then submit a request for another inspection by the ENGINEER.
01800-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
7. When the Work or designated portion thereof is accepted by the ENGINEER to be operationally complete, the ENGINEER will prepare a Certificate of Operational Completion.
8. The date of Operational Completion shall be the date of the ENGINEER's inspection and acceptance.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near the end of the Contract Time, in preparation for Final Acceptance, Final Payment, normal termination of Contract, occupancy by OWNER and similar actions evidencing completion of the Work.
B. Specific requirements for individual units of Work are specified in Sections of Divisions 2 through 16.
1.4 FINAL CLEANUP
A. At completion, leave project clean and ready for use. 1. Legally dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish off the site. 2. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials from
exposed and enclosed surfaces. 3. Repair, patch and touch up all affected curbs, gutters, and sidewalks to match
adjacent surfaces. 4. Broom clean paved surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds. Vacuum clean all
interior surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit Contract Record Drawings for the OWNER. 1. The CONTRACTOR shall make a record of changes during construction on prints of the
Drawings provided by the OWNER for this purpose (Contract Record Drawings) as described in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.
2. The reproducible drawings on which changed conditions are recorded shall be returned to the ENGINEER prior to project completion.
1.6 GUARANTEES
A. The General Conditions cover the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to remedy defects due to faulty workmanship and materials which appear within one year from the date of Final Acceptance.
B. Special guarantees are required by various Sections of the Specifications. Assemble written guarantees, label and submit to the ENGINEER. 1. Provide the "Warranty Form" included in the General Conditions. 2. Equipment guarantees shall be written in the manufacturer's standard form and shall
be countersigned by the Subcontractor or supplier and the CONTRACTOR. 3. All other guarantees shall be written on the Subcontractor's or supplier's letterhead
and shall be countersigned by the CONTRACTOR.
1.7 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Spare parts and maintenance materials are required by various Sections of the Specifications.
01800-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Parts and materials shall be packaged so as to preclude damage in normal handling and storage.
2. Packages shall be labeled with full description of contents and project name and clearly identified as to which item of equipment they belong to. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a spare parts inventory list which shall be provided to the OWNER prior to Final Acceptance.
3. Submit packaged parts and materials to ENGINEER. 4. Submit the value of all spare parts.
1.8 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Prior to requesting ENGINEER's final inspection for certification of Final Acceptance and Final Payment, complete the following and list known exceptions (if any): 1. Submit Final Payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. 2. Submit copy of final punchlist of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating
that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, endorsed and dated by ENGINEER.
3. Submit Consent of Surety. 4. Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
B. Certify in writing that the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and request ENGINEER's final inspection.
C. Reinspection: 1. Within seven (7) days after receipt of the CONTRACTOR's notice that the work has
been completed, including punchlist items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstance, the ENGINEER will reinspect the work.
2. Upon completion of reinspection, ENGINEER will either prepare a certificate of Final Acceptance or advise the CONTRACTOR of work not complete or obligations not fulfilled as required for Final Acceptance.
3. If necessary, inspection procedure will be repeated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
01810-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 01810
CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section covers the work necessary for cleaning during construction and final cleaning on completion of the Work.
1.2 GENERAL
A. At all times maintain areas covered by the Contract and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by construction operations.
B. Pollution Control: 1. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-
pollution laws. 2. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site. 3. Volatile wastes shall be properly stored in covered metal containers and removed
daily. 4. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm
or sanitary drains. 5. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
C. Construction materials such as concrete forms and scaffolding shall be neatly stacked by the CONTRACTOR when not in use. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint, corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring or other damage.
D. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
E. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. During execution of Work, clean site and public properties and dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish to assure that buildings, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.
B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.
C. Provide approved containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Empty containers within one day after they are full.
01810-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
E. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish to match adjacent surfaces.
F. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets. Broom clean paved surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
G. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights.
H. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
I. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for substantial completion or occupancy.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. See Section 01800, Operational Completion and Project Closeout, for additional requirements.
B. At the completion of Work on all Contracts and immediately prior to final inspection, cleaning of the entire Project will be accomplished according to the following provisions: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and
equipment, including finishes. The cleaning shall leave the structures and site in a complete and finished condition to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
2. Should the CONTRACTOR not remove rubbish or debris or not clean the building and site as specified above, the OWNER reserves the right to have the cleaning done at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
3. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning. 4. In preparation for substantial completion of occupancy, conduct final inspection of
sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces. 5. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials
from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine finish.
6. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.
7. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. 8. Replace air-handling filters if units were operated during construction. 9. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air-handling units were operated without filters
during construction. 10. Clean luminaires in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all light
fixtures. 11. Remove from the OWNER's property all temporary structures and all materials,
equipment, and appurtenances not required as a part of, or appurtenant to, the completed work. See Section 01500 - Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
02158-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 02158
HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide all plant, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for the construction of a an uncased Horizontal Directional Drilled (HDD) bore to install 3-2” HDPE conduits as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. HDD is meant as a method of trenchless pipe installation using a steerable drilling operation which directly installs a pipe along a linear alignment (not necessarily horizontal) without an open hole or open face.
B. Furnish all survey including layout, inspection and record-keeping incidental to the drilling and pipe installation.
C. Drilling shall be conducted below Pioneer Parkway, as shown on the Contract Drawings. All work must be conducted from off the roadway. Location control, recovery, installation, bypassing obstructions and drilling must all be conducted within right-of-way and easement boundaries.
D. Drilling shall either be conducted from a pit or as a sacrificial tangent curve to intersect the alignment outside of the highway embankment. Should a pit be used, all work to construct and maintain the pit will be part of this work.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Earthwork is included in Section 02200
B. High density polyethylene pipe and fittings (HDD Conduit) is included in Section 16130
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, letters, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction, installation equipment and details of installation for the HDD operation including:
1. Qualifications of the HDD Contractor 2. Name, business, address and telephone number of the Contractor. 3. Experience in successfully constructing directional drilling operations. 4. List of similar projects performed over the last five years including the name of
contact person and telephone number. 5. Certification of workman training. 6. Name(s) of all supervisory personnel to be directly involved with the project.
02158-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
7. The Contractor shall sign and date the information provided and certify that to the extent of his knowledge, the information is true and accurate, and that the supervisory personnel for the HDD operations will be directly involved with this project.
B. Construction Procedures
1. Submit below documents and procedures thirty (30) days prior to mobilization to the Owner for approval.
a. Written descriptions of the construction method and equipment to be used, and
access pit sizes and locations required for equipment and material access. b. Grouting techniques to be used for over-excavation if any, including equipment,
pumping procedures, grout types, and mixtures. c. Description of line and grade control. d. Proposed procedures, materials and equipment for lubricating the exterior of the
pipe during pulling. e. Details of spoil removal system, including equipment type, number and disposal
location. f. Proposed methods, materials and equipment for removing and clearing
obstructions so that the HDD can advance forward. g. Procedures for locating and controlling the direction of the drilling operation. h. Profile of the bore plotted at a scale appropriate for the crossing and acceptable to
the Engineer.
C. As-Built Documentation 1. Boring path Report:
a. Furnish a Bore Path Report to the Engineer within seven days of the completion of each bore path. Include the following in the report: 1) Location of project and project number. 2) Name of person collecting data, including title, position and company name 3) Identification of the detection method used 4) Elevations and offset dimension as required in section 3.4.E.
2. As-Built Plans: a. Provide the Engineer a complete set of As-Built Plans showing all bores (successful
and failed) within 30 calendar days of completing the work. b. Ensure that the plans are dimensionally correct copies of the Contract plans and
include roadway plan and profile, cross-section, boring location and subsurface conditions as directed by the Engineer. The plans must show appropriate elevations and be referenced to a USGS grid system and datum.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. HDD Contractor
1. The HDD contractor shall be trained and certified to operate the HDD equipment with at least 5 years experience in directional drilling obtained over the last five years. Perform HDD operations under the constant direction of a drilling supervisor who shall remain on site and be in responsible charge throughout the drilling operation. The supervisor shall have performed or supervised directional drilling of a minimum of 10,000 linear feet of pipe.
02158-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.5 PERMITS
A. Obtain all permits required by local, state, and federal regulators, including the City of Prescott Department of Public Works (COP), Arizona Department of Transportation (ADOT), and Arizona Public Service (APS) prior to the start of work. Execute all requirements of the permits. Provide any construction phase submittals required by the aforementioned regulators.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS
A. Boring logs, locations and geotechnical data report are included in the Appendix B of these specifications. The boring logs indicate the soil and groundwater conditions at the boring location at the time of the investigation and conditions can change away from the actually boring location and with time. The boring logs and geotechnical data report are made available to the Contractor or his information to be used at his own risk. The Contractor is responsible for any conclusions to be drawn from the boring including the character of the materials to be encountered and the degree of difficulty to be expected in the performance of the work. The Contractor is encouraged to perform his own subsurface investigation.
B. All utilities must be marked and all known utilities accounted for prior to beginning any construction. “Potholing” will be required when no other accurate information is available to verify the actual location of an existing utility. The Contractor shall provide modern vacuum type test pit equipment and employ modern day methods to minimize the destructive nature of potholing and test pitting for utilities.
C. Do not assume that materials other than those disclosed by the borings will not be encountered or that the proportions and character of the various materials will not vary from those indicated in the boring logs.
D. The Contractor shall contact the appropriate utility company and construct all observation pits, if required.
E. Comply with all local, state, federal, and utility requirements for vertical and horizontal separation.
F. Damage Restoration: Take responsibility for restoration for any damage caused by heaving, settlement, separation of pavement, escaping drilling fluid (frac-out), or the directional drilling operation, at no cost to the OWNER. 1. Remediation Plans: When required by the Engineer, provide detailed plans which
show how damage to any roadway facility will be remedied. These details will become part of the As-Built Plans Package.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Reference Section 01400, Quality Control.
B. Take control of the operation at all times. Have a representative who is thoroughly knowledgeable of the equipment, boring and Department procedures, present at the job
02158-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
site during the entire installation and available to address immediate concerns and emergency operations. Notify the Engineer 48 hours in advance of starting work. Do not begin installation until the Engineer is present at the job site and agrees that proper preparations have been made.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Carrier pipe shall be HDPE as indicated and as specified in Section 16130.
B. Lubricant shall be bentonite or polymer based slurry.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. The drill rig and associated equipment shall be in good condition and capable of completing the project without significant delays.
B. The drill bit and reamers shall have a closed face and shall be capable of supporting the excavated area (face) during excavation and shutdown. The bit shall be full directional in both the horizontal and vertical directions from the drill rig so that the alignment can be maintained during the entire drilling operation.
C. The drill bit shall be capable of drilling through all materials encountered including rock, gravel, glacial till and outwash, organics and clay.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESS PITS/PREPARATION
A. Excavation, trenching, dewatering, sheeting, shoring and bracing shall comply with all applicable OSHA, local, state, and federal regulators, and these specifications.
B. Locate and protect existing utilities as required and shown on the Drawings, and those discovered during Contractor’s due diligence and/or operations that may not be shown on the Drawings. Coordinate utility protection with the respective utility companies.
3.2 HDD OPERATIONS
A. Though the installation process may be licensed or proprietary in nature, the Contractor shall not change any material, thickness, design, values or procedural matters stated in the approved submittals, without the prior knowledge and approval of the Owner. The Contractor shall submit, in writing, full details about component materials, their
02158-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
properties and installation procedures and abide by them fully during the entire course of the work.
B. Ream the pilot hole to a diameter which is sufficiently sized to reduce forces applied to the pipe during pull back. Intermediate temporary pipes may be used as required to install final pipe.
C. If pulling equipment is not capable of monitoring pulling forces imposed upon the pipe, a weak link shall be included between the pipe and the molehead/reamer to not exceed the safe pulling strength as prescribed by the pipe manufacturer.
D. Install a swivel between the molehead/reamer and pipe connection to minimize torsional stresses imposed on the pipe.
E. Directly install the 16-inch DR 13.5 HDPE AWWA C906-07 casing pipe below the highway embankment by making either a single or multiple passes with a directional drill to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. HDPE pipe installation using HDD shall meet the requirements stated in ASTM F1962.
F. Directly install the 3-2” HDPE conduits in the uncased, stabilized bore.
G. Betonite slurry fill all voids between the carrier pipe and the bore after installation.
H. Install the pipe with minimal interruption in traffic as depicted on the drawings.
I. Install the pipe from either a pit which allows the pipe installation along the proposed grade directly or by drilling an initial sacrificial tangent section outside the limits of the highway embankment which is then excavated and cut-off or turned down to make the pipe connection at the grades indicated.
J. Provide remote sensing at the drill rig to maintain alignment of the drilling operation and provided a profile and plan locations of the as-installed pipe.
K. Install final pipe as one continuous fused string. Install final pipe in a continuous operation.
L. Pull pipe into place without damaging the pipe joints or pipe sections. Replace any pipe damaged during installation at no additional cost to the Owner.
M. Maintain proper lubrication during sleeve pipe installation to reduce the exterior friction and possibility of the pipe seizing in place.
N. At no point during the pipe installation shall the loads imposed on the pipe by the installation procedure exceed the rated loads of the pipe(s) being installed.
O. Submit a written record of each drive for daily review by the Owner.
3.3 BORING FAILURE
A. If an obstruction is encountered during boring which prevents completion of the installation in accordance with the design location and specification, the pipe may be taken out of service and left in place at the discretion of the Engineer. Immediately fill the product left in place with excavatable flowable fill.
02158-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Submit a new installation procedure and revised plans to the Engineer for approval before resuming work at another location.
C. If, during construction, damage is observed to existing facilities, cease all work until resolution to minimize further damage and a plan of action for restoration is obtained and approved by the Engineer.
D. the Contractor shall perform all remedial work associated with a bore failure at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 MONITORING
A. Surface Settlement Monitoring 1. Make a visual inspection of the roadway from the each shoulder to look for signs of
settlement on an hourly basis during the time of active drilling. 2. Establish surface settlement monitoring points on the shoulders of the roadway and at
any intermediate points which may be accessible or as directed by ADOT or City of Prescott Department of Public Works. Establish surface settlement monitoring points along the centerline of the pipe. Install additional monitoring points at locations deemed necessary.
3. Record location of settlement monitoring points with respect to construction baselines and elevations. Record elevations to an accuracy of 0.01 feet for each monitoring point location. Establish monitoring points at locations and by methods that protect them from damage by construction operations, tampering, or other external influences.
4. Monitor ground settlement directly above and 10-feet before and after any utility or pipeline intersection.
B. Reporting Frequency 1. Submit records of readings daily from the various surface settlement monitoring
points and visual observations of the highway road surface along the centerline of the pipe.
2. Report any loss of ground, roadway cracking, depression or settlement or other unusual activities immediately.
C. HDD operations shall limit vibrations transmitted to surrounding structures so as not to cause damage.
D. Disposal of Wastes and Groundwater 1. The Contractor shall dispose of all waste soils, slurries and other wastes in accordance
with applicable regulations. No waste shall be left on-site following completion of the work.
E. Product Locating and Tracking 1. Use a locating and tracking system capable of ensuring that the proposed installation
is installed as intended. The CONTRACTOR shall use locating and tracking system to record the following bore information at least once per drill pipe length: a. Clock and pitch information b. Depth c. Position (x,y)
2. Ensure proper calibration of all equipment before commencing directional drilling operation.
02158-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.5 GROUND SURFACE MOVEMENTS AND TOLERANCES
A. Ground Surface Movement. Settlement or heave of the ground surface along the HDD alignment shall not exceed 0.5-inch.
B. Tolerances.
1. No more than 3-inch horizontal and 3-inch vertical deviation from design location shall be permitted in the position of the carrier pipe.
2. When the initial bore deviates from the design line or grade by amounts greater than that specified, return the pipe to design line or grade plus or minus the specified tolerance at a rate of not more than 1-inch per 25 feet.
3. If either pipe is off design line or grade by an amount that requires redesign of the pipeline or associated structures, the Contractor shall do so at no additional cost to the Owner.
02158-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
+ + END OF SECTION + +
02200-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 02200
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Interfering or Objectionable Material: Trash, rubbish, and junk; vegetation and other organic matter, whether alive, dead, or decaying; topsoil.
B. Clearing: Removal of interfering or objectionable material lying on or protruding above ground surface.
C. Grubbing: Removal of vegetation and other organic matter including stumps, buried logs, and roots greater than 0.5 inch caliper to a depth of 6 inches below subgrade.
D. Stripping: Removal of topsoil remaining after applicable scalping is completed.
E. Project Limits: Areas, as shown or specified, within which Work is to be performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Clear, grub, and strip areas actually needed for waste disposal, borrow, or site improvements within limits shown or specified.
B. Do not injure or deface vegetation that is not designated for removal.
3.2 LIMITS
A. As follows, but not to extend beyond Project limits. 1. Excavation 5 feet beyond top of cut slopes. 2. Trench Excavation: 4 feet from trench centerline, regardless of actual trench width. 3. Waste Disposal:
a. Clearing: 5 feet beyond perimeter. b. Scalping and Stripping: Not required. c. Grubbing: Around perimeter as necessary for neat finished appearance.
4. Structures: 5 feet outside of new structures. 5. Roadways: Clearing , grubbing and stripping 50 feet from centerline. 6. Overhead Utilities:
a. Clearing and Grubbing: Entire width of easements and rights-of-way. b. Scalping and Stripping: Wherever grading is required.
7. Other Areas: As shown.
B. Remove rubbish, trash, and junk from entire area within Project limits.
02200-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.3 CLEARING
A. Clear areas within limits shown or specified.
B. Fell trees so that they fall away from facilities and vegetation not designated for removal.
C. Cut stumps not designated for grubbing flush with ground surface.
D. Cut off shrubs, brush, weeds, and grasses to within 2 inches of ground surface.
3.4 GRUBBING
A. Grub areas within limits shown or specified.
3.5 STRIPPING
A. Do not remove topsoil until after scalping is completed.
B. Strip areas within limits to minimum depths shown or specified. Do not remove subsoil with topsoil.
3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Clearing and Grubbing Debris: Dispose of debris offsite.
B. Strippings: 1. Dispose of strippings that are unsuitable for topsoil or that exceed quantity required
for topsoil offsite or approved by ENGINEER. 2. Stockpile topsoil in sufficient quantity to meet Project needs. Dispose of excess
strippings as specified for clearing and grubbing.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
02220-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 02220
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. “Demolish”: CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site as property of CONTRACTOR. Demolition includes disconnecting, removal, loading, repairs, cleanup, transportation, unloading, disposal permits and fees, disposal, and all other items required to remove the material from the site.
B. “Salvage”: CONTRACTOR shall remove from area of Work and place in location designated by ENGINEER. Equipment is property of OWNER. Salvage includes disconnecting, removal, repairs, cleanup, loading, transportation, unloading, and all other items required to remove and relocate the material.
C. “OWNER to Remove”: OWNER will remove from area of Work prior to CONTRACTOR commencing demolition Work for this area.
D. “Relocate”: CONTRACTOR shall relocate material shown to new locations shown on Drawings or stated herein. Relocation includes disconnecting, removal, reconnecting, attaching, repairs, and all other items required to relocate material to new location.
E. “Abandon”: CONTRACTOR shall disconnect and leave in place as specified.
F. “Materials”: Any and all items and objects that are scheduled, specified, or shown to be demolished, salvaged, removed, relocated, or abandoned.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Information: Grout, sealants, and bonding agents to be used for patching.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. Plan and schedule phased demolition, including limits of demolition, as part of and
consistent with the progress schedule specified in Section 01320, PROGRESS SCHEDULE.
2. Methods of demolition and equipment proposed to demolish materials. 3. Copies of any authorizations and permits required to perform Work. 4. Copies of Hazardous Materials Inspection Reports. 5. Repair procedures for demolition of materials beyond limits shown on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all materials and equipment in suitable and adequate quantity as required to accomplish the Work shown, specified herein, and as required to complete the Project.
02220-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Drawings are based on available information. The Work may differ slightly from what is shown. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining the work required by inspecting the site.
3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. All Work shall be done in conformance with all applicable rules and regulations pertaining to safety.
B. Hazardous Materials: 1. See General Conditions. 2. Existing facilities, or portions thereof, to be demolished may contain hazardous
materials such as asbestos cement piping, residual chemicals in existing or abandoned piping, lead-based paint, mercury seals, or other unknown hazardous materials.
3.3 SEQUENCE
A. Be responsible for the sequence of Work.
B. Conform to constraints as specified in Section 01130, SPECIAL PROJECT CONSTRAINTS.
3.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination with ENGINEER: 1. Only materials specified herein, shown on the Demolition Photographs or the
Drawings, or approved by ENGINEER in the field shall be demolished, salvaged, removed, relocated, or abandoned.
2. Verify materials scheduled to be demolished, salvaged, removed, relocated, or abandoned with ENGINEER prior to performing Work.
3. Do not remove materials without prior approval of ENGINEER. 4. Provide at least 3 working days’ notice to ENGINEER prior to start of Work. 5. Notify ENGINEER to turn off affected services or facilities before starting Work. 6. Provide temporary services during interruptions to affected services or facilities as
acceptable to ENGINEER. 7. ENGINEER will indicate limits of Work if not clearly shown.
B. Coordination with Utility Owners: 1. Notify utility owners to turn off affected services or facilities before starting Work. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to utility owners prior to shutdown, unless
otherwise directed by utility owners. 3. Provide temporary services during interruptions to affected services or facilities as
acceptable to utility owners.
02220-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.5 LIMITS
A. Drawings define minimum portions of materials to be demolished. Unless otherwise shown, rough cuts or breaks may be made to limits of demolition shown. If rough cuts or breaks are made exceeding limits shown, CONTRACTOR shall repair the cuts or breaks back to the dimensions shown on Drawings at CONTRACTOR’s expense.
B. If limits are not clear on the Drawings or Demolition Photographs, limits shall be as directed by ENGINEER.
C. All areas not within the limits of demolition Work shown on the Drawings, or as specified herein, shall be left undisturbed, unless necessary for demolition of materials.
3.6 DEMOLITION
A. General: 1. Inspect condition of materials to be demolished prior to bidding to assess potential for
salvage value. 2. Remove all materials associated with existing equipment that is to be demolished. 3. Materials within limits of demolition will become the property of CONTRACTOR. 4. All materials from the demolition process shall be removed safely from the project site
as soon as possible. They shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable federal, state, and city regulations. CONTRACTOR is responsible for determining these regulations and shall bear all costs associated with disposal of the materials.
B. Pavement and Curbs: 1. Provide saw cut at all concrete and pavement surfaces and curb removal limits and
where neat connection lines are required. 2. Surfaces exposed by demolition activities shall be repaired and finished to provide a
uniform, smooth, level transition between adjacent surfaces.
C. Concrete, CMU, and Reinforcing: 1. In areas where concrete or CMU portions are to be removed from a structure, the
edge of removal shall be cut with a concrete saw to leave a perpendicular edge or by core-drilling where a circular hole is required.
2. Damaged concrete shall be removed to solid concrete. Damaged concrete shall include concrete that is soft, spalled, cracked, or otherwise damaged as determined by ENGINEER.
3. Depth of removal shall be as determined by ENGINEER unless otherwise shown or specified.
4. Reinforcing shall be cut and removed unless otherwise shown or instructed by ENGINEER.
5. Spalled edges may be required to be resawn at the discretion of the ENGINEER. 6. Protect adjacent structures and equipment from damage during Work. 7. Exposed surfaces following demolition activities shall be repaired and finished to
provide a uniform, smooth, and level transition between adjacent surfaces. 8. Remove and repair designated cracked and damaged concrete areas shown in
accordance with this section and Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
D. Concrete Embedded Items: 1. Except for core drills, demolish anchor bolts, reinforcing steel, conduit, and other
materials that are concrete embedded to a minimum of 1 inch below final finished
02220-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
surface. For core drills, coat rebar exposed by core drilling with System No. 304 in accordance with Section 09900, PAINTING.
2. Plug empty pipes and conduits with fireproof sealant to maintain fire ratings for floors or walls.
3. Patching: a. Demolish damaged concrete. Damaged concrete shall be removed to solid
concrete. Damaged concrete shall include concrete that is soft, spalled, cracked, or otherwise damaged as determined by ENGINEER.
b. Coat with approved bonding agent. c. Patch with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
E. Piping: 1. Pressurized Services: Install restrained caps or plugs at the demolished ends, unless
otherwise shown. 2. Gravity Services: Install concrete plugs, 5-foot minimum length.
F. Utilities: 1. Excavate utility lines serving structures to be demolished. 2. Demolish electrical, sanitary, and storm drainage lines serving structures to be
demolished. 3. Support or relocate utility lines exposed by Work. 4. For water and gas lines to be demolished or capped and terminated, provide a
permanent leakproof closure. Closure type shall be as recommended by utility owner.
G. Electrical: 1. Remove conduits and wiring from materials to be demolished back to nearest junction
box. 2. For existing circuits to remain operational, intercept existing conduit at the most
convenient location, or as shown, and splice and extend conduit to new location. Install new conductors as required to accomplish intended results. New conductors shall be continuous without splices between junction boxes.
3. For existing circuits no longer needed, demolish conductors from conduits. 4. Demolish all surface-mounted conduit which is no longer needed. 5. For conduit below grade or concealed within walls, cap and abandon in place.
3.7 SALVAGE
A. Salvage materials for OWNER’s own use where shown.
B. Remove materials with extreme care so as not to damage.
C. Promptly remove materials from Work area.
D. Store materials in location designated by ENGINEER.
E. Clean and protect materials from dust, dirt, natural elements, and store as directed.
3.8 RELOCATION
A. ENGINEER will determine condition of materials prior to removal.
B. Remove all materials associated with items to be relocated.
02220-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Existing materials shall not be damaged during removal.
D. Properly store and maintain materials in same condition as when removed.
E. Clean and protect materials from dust, dirt, natural elements, and store as directed.
3.9 ABANDONMENT
A. Structures: Break holes into or core drill floor slabs, catch basins, and other below-grade concrete structures to be abandoned in place to allow water to freely migrate through.
B. Piping and Conduits: 1. General: Piping and conduits to be abandoned shall be capped with a watertight plug
at demolished end in a manner that will prevent entrance of soil, groundwater, or moisture.
2. Pressurized Services: Install restrained caps or plugs at the demolished ends, unless otherwise shown.
3. Gravity Services: Install concrete plugs, 5-foot minimum length.
3.10 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Any damaged materials scheduled to be salvaged or relocated shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of ENGINEER or replaced at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
B. Any damage to areas not within the limits of demolition Work shown on the Demolition Photographs, Drawings, or as specified herein shall be repaired or replaced to original precontract conditions at the CONTRACTOR’s sole expense.
3.11 DISPOSAL
A. Dispose of materials offsite in licensed landfills and in accordance with all local, state, and federal regulations. CONTRACTOR is responsible for obtaining any and all necessary permits for disposal.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
02300-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes: All excavating, backfilling, filling, grading, subgrade preparation and disposing of earth materials as required. It also includes all temporary means needed to prevent discharge of sediment to watercourses from dewatering systems or erosion.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Aggregate Material. 2. ASTM D422, Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. 3. ASTM D423, Liquid Limit of Soils. 4. ASTM D427, Shrinkage Factors of Soils. 5. ASTM D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil. 6. ASTM D1556, Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method. 7. ASTM D2922, Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth). 8. ASTM D2166, unconfined compressive strength of soils.
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1. Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926
C. A geotechnical investigation was conducted and a report was prepared for City of Prescott, Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station. The Contractor shall reference Subsurface Soil Exploration For City of Prescott Zone 12 Interconnect Pump Station, Prescott, AZ by Engineering and Testing Consultants Inc., February 7, 2016 as the “Geotech Report”. Whenever there is a conflict between the Geotech Report and this specification, the most stringent requirement applies.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Permits and Regulations: 1. Perform excavation Work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing
authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Obtain all necessary permits for Work in roads, rights-of-way, railroads, etc. Also,
obtain permits as required by local, state and federal agencies for discharging water from excavations, for erosion control, and for prevention of air and water pollution.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports - Borrow, Backfill, and Grading: Testing laboratory shall submit copies of the following reports directly to ENGINEER: 1. Tests on borrow material. 2. Tests on footing subgrade. 3. Field density tests.
02300-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
4. Optimum moisture - maximum density curve for each soil used for backfill. 5. Reports of observations for conformance of borrow material to the Project
Geotechnical Report. 6. Quality Control Plan: Names and phone numbers of independent testing companies
that will be used to perform soil and asphalt concrete testing, qualifications, and proposed procedures for performing tests and providing test results to ENGINEER.
B. Submit to the ENGINEER samples of all materials, including select backfill, general backfill, bedding, crushed stone, sand and topsoil. Submit samples of the proposed material at least seven days in advance of its anticipated use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: 1. All material will be tested by the laboratory and approved by the ENGINEER. 2. No material shall be placed without the approval of the ENGINEER.
B. Marking Tape: 1. Plastic:
a. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil.
b. Thickness: Minimum 4 mils. c. Width: 12 inches. d. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted
continuously over entire length. e. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Reef Industries; Terra Tape. 2) Allen; Markline. 3) Or equal.
2. Metallic: a. Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprinted side, encased in a protective high
visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket. b. Foil Thickness: Minimum 5.5 mils. c. Width: 12 inches. d. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted
continuously over entire length. e. Joining Clips: Tin or nickel-coated, furnished by tape manufacturer. f. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Reef Industries; Terra ”D”. 2) Allen; Detectatape. 3) Or equal.
3. Marking tape shall be marked with the following statements: a. Pipeline: “CAUTION – WATER PIPELINE BURIED BELOW.” b. DRAIN: “CAUTION – DRAIN PIPE BURIED BELOW.” c. For Existing Utilities Within Trench Limits: “CAUTION – BURIED
PIPELINE/CONDUIT” or as specified by utility owner. 4. Color:
a. Pipeline: Purple, as specified in ANSI Z53.1 Safety Color Code. b. Sanitary Sewer Pipeline: Green, as specified in ANSI Z53.1 Safety Color Code.
02300-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
c. Others Disturbed: Color, as specified for specific utility in ANSI Z53.1 Safety Color Code.
C. Pipe Locating Wire: 1. Pipe locating wire shall be bare AWG No. 10, soft drawn, single-strand copper wire. 2. Provide at least 6-mil PVC electrical tape insulation around wire where adjacent to
metal pipe, valves, and in all valve boxes.
D. Fill Material: 1. Classification:
a. Fill adjacent to structures to a distance measured horizontally from the structure that is equal to the depth from the finished grade is classified as Select Fill.
b. Outside these limits, the fill is classified as Common Fill, unless otherwise specified.
2. Common Fill: a. Common Fill materials shall consist of soils obtained from on-site excavations or
off-site sources that are uniformly mixed, contain no organic material, and have been passed through a 3” screen.
b. The maximum expansion of off-site materials shall be 1.5% as performed on a sample remolded to approximately 9% of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 at 2% below optimum moisture content under a 100 psf surcharge pressure.
c. If on-site material is unsuitable as determined by the ENGINEER, imported fill shall be used.
3. Select Fill: a. Select fill or backfill is material selected by the ENGINEER from the excavation. b. Select material shall be free of organic or other unsuitable materials and shall not
contain rocks, or unbroken masses of soil larger then 4" in greatest dimension.
E. Aggregate Base: 1. Conforming to Section 702 of the MAG Standard Specifications.
F. Granular Bedding: 1. Well-graded sand and gravel materials. 2. Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material. 3. Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve, as determined
in accordance with ASTM D1140, or gravel or crushed rock within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless otherwise specified.
4. 3/4-inch maximum particle size, except 1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe under 3-inch diameter.
5. Conduit and Direct-Buried Cable: a. Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200 sieve. b. Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges. c. Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve. d. If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that passes No. 40 sieve
shall be non-plastic as determined in accordance with ASTM D4318.
G. Sand: 1. Natural or manufactured granular material, containing no organic material. 2. Sand will be non-plastic, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318, 100% passing
a 1/2” screen and no more than 20% passing a No. 200 screen.
H. Crushed Stone:
02300-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Crushed stone will be crushed rock or gravel conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33, Size #57.
I. Gravel Surfacing 1. Gravel Surfacing will be crushed rock, angular, and well-graded. 2. Maximum size of ¾”, at least 50% passing the No 4. screen, between 10 and 30%
passing the No. 10 screen and no more than 15% passing the No. 40 screen. 3. Color to be selected by OWNER.
J. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): 1. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 50 and
150 psi at 7 days in accordance with ASTM D4832. Sufficient cement shall be added to meet the strength and material requirements given below and as required to provide sufficient strength for compacting overlying trench backfill. Provide certified mix design and test results in accordance with submittal requirements.
2. Materials: a. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, two sacks minimum per cubic yard. b. Aggregate: ASTM C33, maximum Size 7. The amount of material passing a No.
200 sieve shall not exceed 12 percent. The above No. 200 sieve material shall be well graded so as to avoid segregation. The minus #200 sieve fraction shall be nonplastic.
c. Fly Ash (if used): ASTM C618, Class C or F. d. Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.
3. Mix Design: a. The CONTRACTOR and its suppliers shall determine the materials and proportions
used to meet the requirements of these Specifications. Make daily checks of the aggregate gradation and adjust the mix design as required. Modify the CLSM mix as necessary to meet the flowability, pumpability, and set time requirements for each individual pour.
b. At least 30 days before placing CLSM, submit to the ENGINEER a mix design for each CLSM to be used. The mix design shall include trial lab and field data, with pairs of 6-inch by 12-inch cylinder breaks performed at 7, 14, and 28 days. Molds shall be plastic or waxed cardboard. The mix design shall be performed by an independent laboratory under the direction of an engineer licensed in Arizona.
c. No CLSM shall be placed until the ENGINEER has approved the mix design. The ENGINEER’s approval of the mix design shall be understood to indicate conditional acceptance. Final acceptance will be based on tests conducted on field samples and conformance with these Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: 1. Provide ENGINEER with sufficient notice and with means to examine the areas and
conditions under which excavating, filling, and grading are to be performed. 2. ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR if conditions are found that may be detrimental to
the proper and timely completion of the Work. 3. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. “Pot-holing”:
02300-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Excavate and backfill, in advance of the construction, test pits to determine conditions or location of the existing utilities and structures.
2. Definite the location of each existing facility involved within the area of his excavation for Work under this Contract.
3. Exercise care during such location work to avoid damaging and/or disrupting the affected facility.
4. CONTRACTOR is responsible for repairing, at his expense, damage to any structure, piping, or utility caused by his Work.
C. Temporary Fencing: 1. Furnish and install a temporary fence surrounding excavations and work area,
including the stockpile and storage areas. 2. Provide fence openings only at vehicular, equipment and worker access points.
3.2 EROSION CONTROL
A. General: Implement the construction procedures outlined herein to assure minimum damage to the environment during construction. Take all additional measures required to conform to the requirements of applicable codes and regulations. 1. Whenever possible, locate and construct access and temporary roads to avoid
environmental damage. Make provisions to regulate drainage, avoid erosion and minimize damage to vegetation.
2. Where areas must be cleared for storage of materials or temporary structures, provisions will be made for regulating drainage and controlling erosion, subject to the ENGINEER'S approval.
3. Remove only those shrubs and grasses that must be removed for construction. Protect the remainder to preserve their erosion-control value.
B. Control Measures: Apply measures to control erosion and to minimize the siltation of the existing waterways, and natural ponding areas. Such measures include, but are not limited to, the use of berms, baled straw silt barriers, gravel or crushed stone, mulch, slope drains and other methods. 1. Install erosion and sediment control practices where shown and according to
applicable standards, codes and specifications. The practices will be maintained in effective working condition during construction and until the drainage area has been permanently stabilized.
2. Temporary measures will be coordinated with the construction of permanent drainage facilities and other Work to the extent practicable to assure economical, effective, and continuous erosion and siltation control.
3. CONTRACTOR will provide special care in areas with steep slopes. Disturbance of vegetation will be kept to a minimum to maintain stability.
4. After stabilization, remove all straw bale dikes, debris, etc., from the site.
C. Dust Control: 1. Prevent blowing and movement of dust from exposed soil surfaces and access roads
to reduce on- and off-site damage and health hazards. 2. Control may be achieved by irrigation in which the site is sprinkled with water until
the surface is moist. 3. Repeat the process as needed.
D. Failure to Comply: In the event CONTRACTOR repeatedly fails to satisfactorily control erosion and siltation, the OWNER reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to
02300-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
use its own forces to provide the corrective measures indicated. The cost of such work, plus engineering costs, will be deducted from monies due CONTRACTOR.
3.3 DEWATERING
A. General: 1. Continuously control all water during the course of construction, including surface
water and ground water, to prevent any damage to any excavation or to the construction activities occurring within those excavations.
2. Maintain all dewatering systems full time (24-hours/day) during the entire time the excavation is open. Do not shut down dewatering systems at night, on weekends or on holidays, or any other time the excavation is open.
3. Each excavation will be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein is inspected by the ENGINEER and backfill operations have been completed.
4. Provide adequate alarm, monitoring and back-up systems for all dewatering systems to maintain control of all water during all times any excavation is open.
B. Surface Water: 1. Provide and maintain adequate drainage and dewatering system to prevent surface
water from entering excavations and to remove and dispose of all rainwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the Work.
2. Keep the different working areas on the site free of surface water at all times. Special care will be taken to eliminate depressions that could serve as mosquito pools.
3. The diversion and removal of surface water will be performed in a manner that will prevent the accumulation of water behind temporary structures or at any other locations within the construction area where it may be detrimental.
C. Ground Water: 1. Provide, operate and maintain dewatering system to permit excavation and
subsequent construction activities in a dry, safe environment. 2. System shall be of sufficient size and capacity to maintain groundwater level a
minimum of 2 feet below the lowest point of excavation. 3. Contractor shall make an assessment of the potential for dewatering induced
settlement of surrounding soils and structures. Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and facilities, including re-injection wells, cutoff walls, infiltration trenches, etc, to prevent damage to adjacent structures.
D. Disposal of water: 1. Disposal of discharge water shall conform to any and all applicable permit
requirements.
3.4 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Trench Support 1. Provide, install and maintain trench shields for all trench excavations for which trench
shields are required (at a minimum, as required by OSHA). 2. Follow all OSHA guidelines and other applicable laws and ordinances. 3. Elevation of Bottom:
a. Excavation of earth material below the bottom of a shield will not exceed the limits established by ordinances, codes, laws and regulations.
b. When using a shield for pipe installation, the bottom of the shield will not extend below the mid-diameter of installed pipe at any time.
02300-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
c. When using a shield for the installation of structures, the bottom of the shield shall not extend below the top of the bedding for the structures.
4. Moving Shield: When a shield is removed or moved ahead, extreme care will be taken to prevent the movement of pipe or structures or the disturbance of the bedding for pipe or structures. Pipe or structures that are disturbed are to be removed and reinstalled as specified.
B. Below Grade Structure Excavation Support 1. Provide, install and maintain excavation support systems for all structural excavations
where excavation support is required (at a minimum, as required by OHSA). 2. Follow all OSHA guidelines and other applicable laws and ordinances. 3. Prepare excavation support plan addressing the following topics:
a. Details of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions for worker protection from the hazards of caving ground
b. Design assumptions and calculations c. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support d. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated materials e. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes for vehicles, equipment and
materials f. Location of vertical and horizontal monitoring points on structures and
recommended frequency of monitoring for excavation support system stability and performance
4. Design of excavation support systems and excavation support plan shall be prepared by a civil or structural engineer registered in the state in which the system is installed. a. Excavation support system shall consist of h-pile and lagging, sheet piles, or other
reliable method of excavation support. b. The use of below-ground tiebacks is allowed, however, Contractor is responsible
for locating and avoiding potential conflicts with existing utilities in the area in which the tie-backs are installed. All tiebacks shall be further than 3 feet from any conflicting utility. Tiebacks shall not use existing structures for support.
C. Removal of Excavation Support 1. Completely remove all excavation support unless ENGINEER specifically allows
requested excavation support to remain in place after backfill. 2. Remove all excavation support in a manner that will maintain support as excavation is
backfilled and will not leave voids in the backfill.
3.5 EXCAVATION
A. General: 1. Material removed: Excavations include earth, sand, clay, gravel, hardpan, boulders,
rock, pavements, rubbish and all other materials within the excavation limits. 2. Excavations for structures and pipelines will be open excavations. Provide excavation
protection system(s) required by ordinances, codes, law and regulations to prevent injury to workmen and to prevent damage to new and existing structures or pipelines. Unless shown or specified otherwise, protection system(s) will be utilized under the following conditions. a. Excavation Less Than 5’ deep: Excavations in stable rock or in soil conditions
where there is no potential for a cave-in may be made with vertical sides. Under all other conditions, excavations will be sloped and benched, shielded, or shored and braced.
02300-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Excavations More Than 5’ deep: Excavations in stable rock where there is no potential for a cave-in may be made with vertical sides. Under all other conditions, excavations will be sloped and benched, shielded or shored and braced.
c. Excavation protection system(s) will be installed and maintained in accordance with the excavation plan submitted.
B. Structural Excavation: 1. The elevation of the bottom of footings shown is approximate only. ENGINEER may
order such changes in dimensions, and elevations as may be required to secure a satisfactory footing.
2. Hand-trim all structure excavations to permit the placing of full widths and lengths of footings on horizontal beds. Rounded and undercut edges will not be permitted.
3. Excavations shall allow for aggregate base, forms, working space, installation of shoring or bracing or the safe sloping of banks.
C. Pipe Trench Excavation: 1. No more than 100’ of trench may be opened in advance of pipe laying. 2. Minimize trench width to the greatest extent practical, but conform to the following: 3. Sufficient to provide room for installing, jointing and inspecting piping, but in no case
wider at top of pipe than pipe barrel outside diameter plus 3’. 4. Enlargements at pipe joints may be made, if required, and approved by ENGINEER. 5. Sufficient for shoring and bracing, or shielding and dewatering. 6. Sufficient to allow thorough compaction of backfill adjacent to bottom half of pipe. 7. Depth of trench will be as shown. If required and approved by ENGINEER, depths
may be revised.
D. Subgrades: 1. Subgrades for roadways, structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense, and
thoroughly compacted and consolidated; free from mud, muck, and other soft or unsuitable materials; and remain firm and intact under all construction operations.
2. Subgrades that are otherwise solid, but which become soft or mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with select fill.
3. The finished elevation of stabilized subgrades shall not be above subgrade elevations shown.
E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials in approved areas, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as specified hereinafter.
F. Unauthorized Excavation: 1. All excavation outside the lines and grades shown, and which is not approved by
ENGINEER, together with the removal and disposal of the associated material is at the CONTRACTOR'S expense.
2. Unauthorized excavations shall be filled and compacted with select fill by the CONTRACTOR at his expense.
3.6 PLACEMENT OF FILL AND BACKFILL
A. General: 1. Backfill excavations as promptly as Work permits, but not until completion of the
following:
02300-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Acceptance by the ENGINEER of construction below finish grade. b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording of locations of underground piping
and ductwork. c. Removal of concrete formwork. d. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory
materials. e. Removal of trash and debris.
2. Remove and replace with approved fill material, as specified, fill containing organic materials or other unacceptable material.
3. Compact all fill and backfill as specified in Subsection 3.7.
B. Structural Backfill: 1. Select fill shall be placed as structural backfill where shown on the Drawings or
indicated herein. 2. Constraints:
a. Backfill water-holding basins or structures only after satisfactory leakage tests have been conducted as specified in Sections Concrete and Precast Concrete.
b. No backfill or fill material shall be placed when free water is standing on the surface of the area.
c. No compaction of fill will be permitted with free water on any portion of the fill to be compacted.
d. No fill shall be placed or compacted in a frozen condition or on top of frozen material.
e. Any fill containing organic materials or other unacceptable material previously described shall be removed and replaced with approved fill material prior to compaction.
3. Levels of backfill against concrete walls are not to differ by more than 2’ on either side of walls, unless walls are adequately braced or all floor framing is in place up to and including grade level slabs.
4. Wherever a pipe passes through a structure backfill, the structure backfill shall be placed and compacted to an elevation 12” above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated.
C. Backfill in Pipe Trenches: 1. Pipeline trenches may be backfilled prior to pressure testing, but no structure shall be
constructed over any pipeline until it has been tested. 2. Unless otherwise shown, place all pipe on a minimum 6” thick layer of Granular
Bedding. The bedding shall extend 12” above the top of the pipe. 3. Install bedding as follows:
a. Spread bedding and grade to provide a uniform and continuous support beneath the pipe at all points between bell holes or pipe joints.
b. After each pipe section is placed, deposit and compact sufficient bedding material under and around each side of the pipe to hold the pipe in proper position and to maintain alignment during subsequent pipe jointing and bedding operations.
c. Bedding material shall be deposited and compacted uniformly and simultaneously on each side of the pipe to prevent lateral displacement. Then place and compact the bedding material to an elevation 12” above the top of pipe.
4. Above the level of bedding, place Select or Common Fill, as specified elsewhere in these specifications.
5. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): a. When CLSM pipe zone material is indicated, the pipe may be supported above the
trench floor on pea gravel bags or sandbag supports. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate to the ENGINEER, 7 days prior to full pipeline backfill installation,
02300-10
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
placement of CLSM as described below. This demonstration shall occur on the first 300 feet of trench, The CLSM pipe zone material shall be installed as indicated. 1) Bedding and Embedment: Place and compact CLSM pipe zone material using
the following techniques: a) Following placement and anchoring of the pipe, remove all loose soil from
trench walls and floor. Remove any unstable soil at the top of the trench which might fall into the trench during placement of the CLSM.
b) Deliver the CLSM to the trench in ready mix trucks or traveling pug mill and utilize pumps or chutes to place the CLSM in the trench. Direct CLSM to one side of the pipe, taking care not to displace the pipe at any time. Continue placing CLSM on one side of the pipe until CLSM has gone under the pipe and up the other side to a depth of 6 inches above the pipe bottom. Use at least two handheld vibrators to continuously liquefy and move CLSM into all voids. Adjust water in mixture to maintain fluid consistency but maintain strength requirements. Continue placing CLSM on both sides of the pipe continuously using two vibrators for every 30 feet of pipe run.
c) Maintain stability of pipe and conduit throughout CLSM placement and curing. CLSM will likely require placement in lifts to prevent pipe flotation. No movement of the pipe caused by flotation will be allowed. If any movement occurs, the CLSM material shall be removed and/or repaired in full conformance with these Contract Documents at no additional cost to the OWNER. Remove all sloughed material or other debris from top of previously placed CLSM.
d) CLSM shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 4 hours prior to placing each lift as well as trench zone material. A smaller cure period will be allowed if it can be demonstrated to the ENGINEER that it will support the individual lift or trench zone material. The CLSM shall be sufficiently strong to support trench backfill material and the compaction effort required to achieve the specified compaction.
D. Marking Tape: 1. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of all buried piping, on top of last
lift of pipe zone material unless otherwise shown. Coordinate with piping installation drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. a. Metallic Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and waterlines. Join ends
with clips provided by the manufacturer. b. Plastic Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping.
E. Pipe-Locating Wire: 1. Pipe-locating wire shall be provided for the entire length of all nonmetallic pipelines
and shall be continuous around restrained joint sections. 2. Install pipe locating wire by strapping to the top of the pipe with PVC tape,
polyethylene-backed tape, or tie locks. Test pipe locating wire with pipe locator equipment prior to final acceptance.
3. Stub the pipe-locating wire up inside each valve box or flush-mounted Type C corrosion monitoring stations. Sufficient excess length shall be provided at terminal connections to allow continuation of the pipe-locating wire to the terminal connection.
4. Wire splices shall be made with compression fittings or soldering; wrapped with Tac-Tape, Aqua-Seal, or equal, and wrapped with electrical tape. Prevent bare copper wire from contacting metallic appurtenances including, but not limited to, pipe, buried valves, or fittings.
02300-11
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
F. Resume backfilling operations using the techniques described above to complete the pipe zone backfill. ENGINEER will approve the pipe zone backfill prior to initiating the trench zone backfill.
G. Embankments: 1. To the maximum extent available, use excess earth obtained from structure and
trench excavations for construction of embankments. Obtain additional material from borrow pits, if such pits are shown, otherwise obtain additional material from offsite sources as necessary.
2. Strip, scarify, level and roll the subgrade so that surface materials of the subgrade will be compact and well bonded with the first layer of the embankment.
3. Wherever a pipe is to pass through a fill or embankment, place and compact the fill or embankment material to an elevation 12” above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated.
H. Crushed Stone: 1. Place where shown on the Drawings, to the limits shown. 2. Place in hand-tamped lifts, not to exceed 6”.
I. Replacement of Unacceptable Excavated Materials: In cases where over-excavation for the replacement of unacceptable soil materials is required, backfill the excavation to the required subgrade with select backfill material and thoroughly compacted.
3.7 COMPACTION
A. General: 1. Compaction by inundation with water will not be permitted. 2. Provide equipment capable of discing, aerating, and mixing the soil to ensure
reasonable uniformity of moisture content throughout the material and to reduce the moisture content by air drying, if necessary.
3. Perform compaction with equipment suitable for the type of fill material being placed. Select equipment that is capable of providing the minimum density required by these Specifications. Use hand-operated compacting equipment within a distance of 10 feet from the wall of any completed below grade structure. Provide equipment that is capable of compacting in restricted areas next to structures and around piping.
B. Compaction Density Requirements: The degree of compaction required for several types of fill is listed below. Moistened or aerated material as necessary to provide the moisture content specified, or if not specified, that will facilitate obtaining the specified compaction.
MATERIAL Required
Minimum Density (ASTM D 1557)
Maximum Uncompacted Lift*
Common Fill/Prepared Subgrade: 90% 8”
Select Fill/Trench Backfill above pipe: More than 2 feet below final grade 90% 8” Less than 2 feet below final grade 95% 8”
Aggregate Base: 95% 8”
Granular Bedding 90% 6”
Sand 90% 6”
02300-12
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Gravel Surfacing 95% 6” *Where large areas of backfill allow for use of large, heavy equipment, ENGINEER may, at their option, allow uncompacted lifts up to 12”.
C. Moisture Content: All fill and backfill shall be prepared and thoroughly mixed to achieve optimum moisture content, ±3%, with the following exception: On site clayey soils optimum to +3%.
D. Testing: Testing will be as specified under Paragraph 3.10, “Field Quality Control”.
3.8 GRADING
A. General: 1. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent
transition areas. 2. Smooth subgrade surfaces within specified tolerances, and compact with uniform
levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades.
B. Adjacent to Structures: Grade areas adjacent to structures to drain away from structures (including masonry fences) and to prevent ponding.
C. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1” above or below the required subgrade elevation.
D. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, and grade and cross-section with finish surface not more than 1/2” above or below the required subgrade elevation.
E. Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2” when tested with a 10’ straightedge.
F. Special Areas: In turfed areas or areas covered with gravel, stone, wood chips, or other special cover, grade to within not more than 1-inch above or below the required subgrade elevations.
G. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification.
Area Required Minimum Density
(ASTM D 1557) Beneath Treatment Structures and Buildings 95% Beneath Pavement 90% Landscaped and other areas 85%
3.9 PAVEMENT BASE COURSE
A. Shoulders: 1. Place shoulders along edges of base course to prevent lateral movement. 2. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact
to thickness of each base course layer.
02300-13
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Compact and roll at least a 12” width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of base course.
B. Placing: 1. Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness
conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting base material during placement
operations.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. General: Testing by a testing laboratory of materials, testing for moisture content during placement and compaction of fill materials, and of compaction requirements for compliance with technical requirements of the Specifications.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall retain one or more independent testing agencies to perform all quality control testing required for all materials except portland cement concrete. The required testing is for soil, aggregates, imported gravel, aggregate base, asphalt concrete, and CLSM. Each independent testing agency shall perform the testing under the supervision of an engineer registered in Arizona. Technicians performing the testing shall be certified to operate the equipment and have at least 1 full year of experience in the type of tests being performed.
C. A Quality Control Plan shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER at least 30 days before field testing is required. It shall include the names, addresses, and phone number of the companies, the major personnel that will be involved, and resumes of the individuals that will be supervising and performing the tests. Copies of certificates held by the companies and the testing personnel shall be included.
D. CONTRACTOR’s independent testing agency shall perform all field and laboratory testing as described in these Specifications. Test shall include specific gravity, sand equivalent, durability, abrasion resistance, soundness, gradation, compaction curves, lab and field moisture contents, compressive strength, and field density. Other tests shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR’s independent testing agency as may be required to meet the Specifications. Mix design testing for portland cement concrete, CLSM, and asphalt concrete shall also be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Field testing for portland cement concrete will be performed by the ENGINEER.
E. CONTRACTOR shall schedule all lab testing so that materials arriving at the site have been approved by the ENGINEER for use on the Project.
F. All lab tests shall be performed on Samples obtained from the source of actual material that will be used on the Project. No test results more than 90 days old shall be submitted for review.
G. The location of field density tests shall be determined by the ENGINEER.
H. Frequency of tests: Frequency will be not less than as follows: 1. For trenches:
a. In open fields: 2 locations every 1,000 linear feet, for each layer b. Along dirt, gravel, or paved roads or off traveled right-of-way: 2 locations every
500 linear feet, for each layer c. Crossing roads: 2 locations along each crossing, for each layer
02300-14
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. For structural backfill: 1 every 50 cubic yards. 3. In embankment or fill: 1 every 200 cubic yards. 4. Base material: 1 every 50 cubic yards. 5. Footing Subgrade: 1 every 50 linear feet, for each layer. 6. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: 1 every 500 square feet, but in no case
less than 3 tests, for each layer.
I. The ENGINEER may modify the frequency or spacing of tests to provide for testing at specific structures or locations where the ENGINEER deems additional testing is required. The CONTRACTOR shall perform such additional testing up to 10 percent above the frequency and total number of tests specified at no additional cost to the OWNER.
J. Verbal and hand-written test results shall be provided to the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR immediately following the field testing. Written test data sheets shall be provided to the ENGINEER not more than 12 hours following completion of the field test. Typed lab test results shall be provided to the ENGINEER not more than 7 calendar days following completion of the tests; however, the results must be reviewed and approved by the ENGINEER prior to placing the material in the trenches or incorporating it in the Work.
K. Any location where a failing test occurs shall be recompacted and retested until a passing test is obtained. Specified testing values are minimums and no tests shall be accepted below the specified minimums. No material shall be placed over the failing test area until the failing material is recompacted and a passing test is obtained, and the area is approved by the ENGINEER. The limits of the failing test shall be assumed to be halfway between the failing location and the nearest passing location. Additional tests may be taken to determine the limits of unsatisfactory compaction.
L. At the first of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall provide to the ENGINEER a typed summary of all tests performed for the previous month including test location by station, depth below finished grade, material tested, wet density, moisture content, dry density, maximum density curve used, and percent relative compaction. Lab test results shall also be included in the monthly report with clear description of material tested, intended use on the Project, and a statement of compliance or noncompliance with the Project Specifications.
M. Any material which does not meet the Specifications shall be removed from the site and replaced with material in compliance.
N. Material which has been softened or modified prior to placing the overlying lift shall be removed down to material which is in compliance.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Material removed from the excavations that does not conform to the requirements for fill or is in excess of that required for backfill shall be hauled away from the Work site and disposed of by CONTRACTOR in compliance with ordinances, codes, laws and regulations at no additional cost to the OWNER.
B. A site is not available to dispose of excess material.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
02830-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detailed information and specifications for materials, finishes, and dimensions.
B. Samples: Approximately 6 inches square, or 6 inches long of posts, rails, braces, fabric, wire, ties, and fittings.
C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 2. Evidence of Supplier and installer qualifications.
1.2 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Complete necessary site preparation and grading before installing chain link fence and gates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Match style, finish, and color of each fence component with that of other fence components.
2.2 CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. PVC-coated galvanized fabric conforming to ASTM F668, Class 1 or 29. 1. Color: Brown, as selected by OWNER. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Pexco Tacoma, Tacoma, WA b. Colorbond Corp., Raritan, NJ; Colorbond II. c. Cyclone Fence, United States Steel, Chicago, IL; Cyclone Color Fence System.
B. Height: as shown on drawings.
C. Wire Gauge: No. 9.
D. Pattern: 3.5” x 5” mesh.
E. Diamond Count: Manufacturer's standard and consistent for fabric furnished of same height.
F. Loops of Knuckled Selvages: Closed or nearly closed with space not exceeding diameter of wire.
02830-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
G. Wires of Twisted Selvages: 1. Twisted in a closed helix three full turns. 2. Cut at an angle to provide sharp barbs that extend minimum 1/4-inch beyond twist.
2.3 POSTS
A. General: 1. Strength and Stiffness Requirements: ASTM F669, Heavy Industrial Fence, except as
modified in this section. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM F1083. 3. Roll-Formed Steel Shapes: Roll-formed from ASTM A570, Grade 45, steel. 4. Protective Coatings:
a. Zinc Coating: ASTM F1234, Type A external and internal coating. 5. Color Coating: ASTM F1043, minimum 10 mils thickness over zinc coating to match
color of chain link fabric.
B. Line Posts: 1. Steel Pipe:
a. Outside Diameter: 2.375-inch. b. Weight: 3.65 pounds per foot.
2. Roll-Formed Steel C Shape: a. Outside Dimensions: 2.25-inch by 1.625-inch. b. Weight: 2.70 pounds per foot.
3. Steel H-Section: a. Outside Dimensions: 2.25-inch by 1.70-inch. b. Weight: 3.26 pounds per foot.
C. End, Corner, Angle, and Pull Posts: 1. Steel Pipe:
a. Outside Diameter: 2.875-inch. b. Weight: 5.79 pounds per foot.
D. Posts for Removable Fence Panels: As specified for end, corner, angle, and pull posts.
E. Posts for Swing Gates: 1. ASTM F900. 2. Roll-formed steel shapes may be substituted for steel pipe posts for gate leaf widths
up to 6 feet and fabric heights up to 8 feet. a. Outside Dimensions: 3.5-inch by 3.5-inch. b. Weight: 4.85 pounds per foot.
F. Posts for Swing Gates Over 8 Feet High: As recommended by fence manufacturer.
2.4 TOP RAILS AND BRACE RAILS
A. Galvanized steel pipe or roll-formed steel C shapes, color-coated.
B. Protective Coatings: As specified for posts.
C. Color Coating: ASTM F1043, minimum 10 mils thickness over zinc coating to match color of chain link fabric.
02830-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Strength and Stiffness Requirements: ASTM F669, Top Rail, Heavy or Light Industrial Fence.
E. Steel Pipe: 1. ASTM F1083. 2. Outside Diameter: 1.66-inch. 3. Weight: 2.27 pounds per foot.
F. Roll-Formed Steel C Shapes: 1. Roll formed from ASTM A570, Grade 45. 2. Outside Dimensions: 1.625-inch by 1.25-inch. 3. Weight: 1.40 pounds per foot.
2.5 FENCE FITTINGS
A. General: In conformance with ASTM F626, except as modified by this article.
B. Post and Line Caps: Designed to accommodate passage of top rail through cap, where top rail required.
C. Tension and Brace Bands: No exceptions to ASTM F626.
D. Tension Bars: 1. One-piece. 2. Equal in length to full height of fabric.
E. Truss Rod Assembly: 3/8-inch diameter.
2.6 TENSION WIRE
A. Zinc-coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming to ASTM A824, Type II, Class 2.
2.7 GATES
A. General: 1. Gate Operation: Opened and closed easily by one person. 2. Welded Steel Joints: Paint with zinc-based paint. 3. Chain Link Fabric: Attached securely to gate frame at intervals not exceeding
15 inches.
B. Swing Gates: ASTM F900. 1. Hinges:
a. Furnished with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. b. Designed to swing either 180 degrees outward, 180 degrees inward, or
90 degrees in or out, as shown, and not twist or turn under action of gate. 2. Latches: Plunger bar arranged to engage stop, except single gates of openings less
than 10 feet wide may each have forked latch. 3. Gate Stops: Mushroom type or flush plate with anchors, suitable for setting in
concrete. 4. Locking Device and Padlock Eyes: Integral part of latch, requiring one padlock for
locking both gate leaves of double gates. 5. Hold-Open Keepers: Designed to automatically engage gate leaf and hold it in open
position until manually released.
02830-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Fabric Salvage: Knuckled.
D. Appurtenances and Framework: As specified.
2.8 REMOVABLE FENCE PANELS
A. Panel Length: 1. Equal division of total length of removable fence section. 2. Maximum 10 feet.
B. Frames: ASTM F1184, Type I.
2.9 CONCRETE
A. Provide as specified in Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2.10 PRIVACY SLATS
A. Features: 1. Material: HDPE with UV inhibitor 2. Privacy Factor: 90% minimum 3. Color: Match chain link fence
B. Products and Manufacturers: 1. Pexco, Fin2000 pre-inserted HDPE slat
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install chain link fences and gates in accordance with ASTM F567, except as modified in this section, and in accordance with fence manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by ENGINEER. Erect fencing in straight lines between angle points.
B. Provide all necessary hardware for a complete fence and gate installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Establish locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts.
B. Embedment Coating: Coat portion of galvanized or aluminum-coated steel posts that will be embedded in concrete with System No. 305, as specified in Section 09900, PAINTING. Extend coating 1-inch above top of concrete.
3.3 POST SETTING
A. Driven posts are not acceptable.
B. Post Hole Depth: 1. Minimum 3 feet below finished grade. 2. 2 inches deeper than post embedment depth below finish grade.
02830-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Backfill post holes with concrete to 2 inches above finished grade.
D. Before concrete sets, crown and finish top of concrete to readily shed water.
3.4 BRACING
A. Brace gate and corner posts diagonally to adjacent line posts to ensure stability.
3.5 TOP RAILS
A. Install top rail sleeves with springs at 105 feet maximum spacing to permit expansion in rail.
3.6 CHAIN LINK FABRIC
A. Do not install fabric until concrete has cured minimum 7 days.
B. Install fabric with twisted and barbed selvage at top.
3.7 GATES
A. Hang gates and adjust hardware so gates operate satisfactorily from open or closed position.
B. Set gate stops in concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar.
3.8 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
A. Ground fences in accordance with applicable requirements of IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Gate Tests: Prior to acceptance of installed gates and gate operator systems, demonstrate proper operation of gates under each possible open and close condition specified.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
03100-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Falsework and formwork, as required to construct cast-in-place concrete, including placing of all items such as sleeves, anchor bolts, inserts and all other items to be embedded in concrete for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections.
B. REFERENCES
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 347, Guide for Concrete Formwork.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of
items that must be installed with the formwork. 2. Coordinate formwork specifications herein with the requirements for finished surfaces
specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for information purposes the following: Copies of manufacturer's data and installation instructions for all proprietary materials, including form coatings, manufac-tured form systems, ties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Forming, shoring and bracing drawings for footings, walls and roofs.
C. Calculations: Calculations verifying the selection of form ties, horizontal and vertical stiff-backs or braces for wall panels, forming and form openings, falsework or roof forms, or any other part of forming, shoring or bracing which may be considered critical by the ENGINEER. The drawings, with supporting calculations, must be signed and sealed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of Arizona.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Allowable Tolerances: Construct formwork to provide completed concrete surfaces complying with tolerances specified in ACI 347, Chapter 3.3, except as otherwise specified.
B. Furnish and install all items for permanent or temporary facilities in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
03100-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood overlaid with MDO or HDO specifically designed for concrete forms, metal, metal-framed plywood-faced or other acceptable panel materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth as-cast surfaces. Furnish in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to remain watertight and withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. 1. At circular structures wall forms shall conform to the circular shape of the structure.
Straight panels not exceeding 2 feet in horizontal width and installed with angular deflection not greater than 3-1/2 degrees per joint may be substituted for circular forms.
B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces that will be unexposed in the finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side.
C. Form Ties: 1. Form ties on exposed surfaces shall be located in a uniform pattern or as indicated on
the Drawings. Form ties shall be constructed so that the tie remains embedded in the wall, except for a removable portion at each end. Form ties shall have conical or spherical type inserts, inserts shall be fixed so that they remain in contact with forming material, and shall be constructed so that no metal is within 1 inch of the concrete surface when the forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed. Wire ties will not be permitted. Ties shall withstand all pressures and limit deflection of forms to acceptable limits.
2. Flat bar ties for panel forms shall have plastic or rubber inserts having a minimum depth of 1 inch and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of the tie hole.
3. Ties for water-holding structures or dry structures with access such as basements, pipe galleries, etc., that are below finish grade, shall have either an integral steel water stop 0.103 inch thick and 0.625 inch in diameter that is tightly and continuously welded to the tie, or a neoprene water stop 3/16-inch thick and 15/16 inch in diameter whose center hole is ½ the diameter of the snap tie, or a molded plastic water stop of comparable size. Flat snap ties complying with above requirements and other sections of this Specification may be used. The water stop shall be considerably larger in area than the tie cross sectional area, and shall be oriented perpendicular to the tie and symmetrical about the center of the tie. The ties shall be constructed to provide a positive means of preventing rotation or disturbance of the center portion of the tie during removal of the ends.
D. Alternative Form Ties – Through-Bolts: 1. Alternate form ties consisting of tapered through-bolts at least 1 inch in diameter at
smallest end, or through-bolts that utilize a removable tapered sleeve of the same minimum size may be used at the CONTRACTOR’s option. Clean and roughen, fill, and seal form tie hole as shown on the Drawings; or where not shown on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a shop drawing submittal of his proposed method of sealing the through-bolt hole by sandblasting or mechanically cleaning and roughening the entire interior surface of the hole, epoxy coating the roughened surface and driving a vinyl plug and then dry packing the entire hole on each side of the plug with nonshrink grout, meeting these Specifications. Dry packing shall be
03100-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
done while the epoxy is tacky or remove the epoxy by mechanical means and reapply new epoxy. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for watertightness and any repair needed. Any leaks or dampness on the exterior of through-bolt patches during or after water testing shall require repair or replacement of the patch.
2. The elastic plug to be inserted into the form tie hole as shown on the Drawings shall be a Dayton Sure Plug, or approved equal, sized to allow insertion using the insertion tool to elongate the plug, place it at the correct location, and allow the plug to return to its original length and diameter upon removal to form a watertight seal. The plugs shall be as manufactured and supplied by Dayton Superior, Dayton OH, phone: 888/977-9500.
E. Forms Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.
2.2 DESIGN OF FORMWORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall design all formwork prior to fabrication. The design shall account for all the tolerances, form ties, finishes, architectural features, rebar supports, construction joint locations, and other features and other nonstructural formwork requirements specified. Forms shall contain pouring and observation windows to allow placement of concrete through windows or shall be staged to allow visual observation at all times of the fresh concrete to ensure correct placement and vibration. Provide a formwork and placement design that will limit free fall of concrete in forms 8-inch or less in width to 5 feet; and for forms wider than 8 inches, limit this fall to 8 feet, except as hereinafter specified. Review methods with ENGINEER prior to start of work. Use placement devices, such as chutes, pouring spouts, pumps, as required.
B. Wall forms shall be designed such that wall sections can be poured full height without creating horizontal cold joints and without causing snapping of form ties which shall be of sufficient strength and number to prevent spreading of the forms during the placement of concrete and which shall permit ready removal of the forms without spalling or damaging the concrete.
C. Reuse of forms will be permitted only if a “like new” condition, unless otherwise approved in writing, is maintained. The ENGINEER shall be notified 1 full working day prior to concrete placement so that the forms can be inspected. The CONTRACTOR shall correct any defective work, found in the ENGINEER’s inspection, prior to delivery of concrete to the project. Formwork surfaces that were in good condition and accepted for use, but were damaged during removal and handling shall not be reused on additional pours. The CONTRACTOR is expected to take care in the handling of forms and to obtain approval of form surfaces prior to each reuse.
D. Roof forms and falsework supports for structural slabs shall be sufficiently rigid and strong to support the wet concrete and the men and equipment necessary for its placement without appreciable deflections. A minimum of 50 PSF for live load shall be allowed in the design.
E. All forms, falsework, shoring, and other structural formwork required shall be structurally designed by the CONTRACTOR and the design shall comply with all applicable safety regulations, current OSHA regulations, and other codes. Where federal or state agencies require a licensed engineer to prepare and/or seal all formwork, falsework or shoring
03100-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
designs, the CONTRACTOR shall hire this engineer and pay all costs. The designs shall be made available to any governing agency upon request. Comply with applicable portions of ACI 347, ACI 318 current edition, and theses Specifications. All design, supervision, and construction for safety of property and personnel shall be the CONTRACTOR’s full responsibility.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the substrate and the conditions under which Work is to be performed with installer and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347; to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown; as required to obtain accurate alignment, location and grades; to tolerances specified; and to obtain level and plumb work in finish structures. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Finish shall be as determined by approved mock-up or sample panel, if specified.
B. Fabricate forms for easy removal without damaging concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.
C. Provide temporary form windows where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Brace temporary closures and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate form windows on forms in locations as inconspicuous as possible, consistent with requirements of the Work. Form intersecting planes of openings to provide true, clean-cut corners, with edge grain of plywood not exposed as form for concrete.
D. Falsework: 1. Erect falsework and support, brace and maintain it to safely support vertical, lateral
and asymmetrical loads applied until such loads can be supported by in-place concrete structures. Construct falsework so that adjustments can be made for take-up and settlement.
2. Provide wedges, jacks or camber strips to facilitate vertical adjustments. Carefully inspect falsework and formwork during and after concrete placement operations to determine abnormal deflection or signs of failure; make necessary adjustments to produce finished Work of required dimensions.
E. Forms for Exposed To View Concrete: 1. Do not use metal cover plates for patching holes or defects in forms. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets.
Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections.
03100-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Use extra studs, walers and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between studs and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips of form material that will produce bow.
4. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to exposed concrete surfaces.
5. Form molding shapes, recesses, rustication joints and projections with smooth-finish materials, and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement.
F. Corner Treatment: 1. Form exposed corners of beams, walls, foundations, bases and columns to produce
smooth, solid, unbroken lines, except as otherwise shown. Except as specified below for reentrant or internal corners, exposed corners shall be chamfered.
2. Form chamfers with 3/4”x 3/4” strips, unless otherwise shown, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edge joints. Use rigid PVC chamfers for all architecturally formed concrete. Extend terminal edges to require limit and miter chamfer strips at changes in direction.
3. Reentrant or internal corners and unexposed corners need not be formed chamfered.
G. Openings and Built-In Work: 1. Provide openings in concrete formwork shown or required by other Sections or other
contracts. 2. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms.
H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is to be placed. Retighten forms immediately after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks.
3.3 FORM COATINGS
A. Coat form contact surfaces with a non-staining form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with surfaces that will be bonded to fresh concrete. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Set and build into the formwork, anchorage devices and other embedded items, shown, specified or required by other Sections and other contracts. Use necessary setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions.
B. Edge Forms and Screeds Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units to support screeds.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Before concrete placement, check the formwork, including tolerances, lines, ties, tie cones, and form coatings. Make corrections and adjustments to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems.
03100-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. During concrete placement check formwork and related supports to ensure that forms are not displaced and that completed Work is within specified tolerances.
C. If forms are unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during placing of concrete, postpone or stop placement of concrete until the defects have been corrected, and reviewed by ENGINEER.
3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Conform to the requirements of ACI 301, Chapter 2 and ACI 347, Chapter 3.7 except as specified below. 1. Removal of Forms and Supports: Continue curing in accordance with Section 03300,
Cast-In-Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.7. Forms are to remain in-place for the time specified below. The temperature cited is the average of the daily high and low.
Temperature: Above 50oF Below 50oF or when retarders are used Walls 24 hours 48 hours
48 hours 24 hours Do not remove forms until site-cured test cylinders develop 90% of 28 day strength.
Columns 24 hours Sides of Beams and Slabs 12 hours Joist or Beam Soffits 21 days Structural Floor or Roof Slabs 21 days
2. When wall or column forms also support formwork for slab or beam soffits, the
removal times of the latter should govern. 3. When high-early strength concrete is specified, a schedule for removal of forms will
be developed in the field from the age/ strength relationships established for the materials and proportions used by tests in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2.3.4.
4. When construction loads are approximately equal to the structural live load, the forms for structural slabs, joists, and beams shall remain in place until the concrete has reached the specified compressive strength.
B. Leave form-facing material in place a minimum of 4 days after concrete placement, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER.
3.7 PERMANENT SHORES
A. Provide permanent shores as defined in ACI 347 Chapter 3.7. Reshores will not be permitted.
3.8 RE-USE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces. Form surfaces shall be subject to ENGINEER'S approval.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
03200-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Fabrication and placement of reinforcement including bars, ties and supports, and welded wire fabric for concrete, encasements and fireproofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all materials and
reinforcement accessories. 2. Drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply
with ACI 315, Parts A and B. For walls, show elevations to a minimum scale of 1/4-inch to 1 foot. For slabs, show top and bottom reinforcing on separate plan views. Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies, as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement, unless otherwise noted. Keep splices to a minimum. Avoid splices in regions of maximum tension stresses whenever possible.
B. Certificates: Submit one (1) copy of steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and bend tests for reinforcing steel.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. ACI 315, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures.
b. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:
a. Manual of Standard Practice, includes ASTM standards referred to herein.
B. Allowable Placing Tolerances: Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 - Details of Reinforcement.
1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver concrete reinforcement materials to the site bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams.
B. Store concrete reinforcement material at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or excessive rust. Store on heavy wood blocking so that no part of it will come in contact with the ground.
03200-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for all non-welded bars. ASTM A706, Grade 60 for welded bars.
B. Smooth Steel Dowels: ASTM A36. 1. Epoxy coated conforming to ASTM A775 or ASTM A934.
C. Mechanical Couplers: Reinforcement bars may be spliced with a mechanical connection. Provide a full mechanical connection which shall develop in tension or compression, as required, at least 125% of specified yield strength (fy) of the bar in accordance with ACI 318 Section 12.14.3.4. The locations of the connections are subject to the approval of the ENGINEER.
D. Steel Wire: ASTM A82.
E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls.
F. Column Spirals: Hot-rolled rods for spirals, ASTM A615.
G. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place. 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, except as
specified below. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials. 2. For slabs on grade, use 5000 psi concrete blocks. 3. At all formed surfaces, provide supports complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practice" as follows: Plastic protected or stainless steel legs. 4. For all PVC lined concrete surfaces, provide supports complying with CRSI "Manual of
Standard Practice" as follows: Either plastic or metal plastic protected legs.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI, "Manual of Standard Practice". In case of fabricating errors, do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.
B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the Work: 1. Bar lengths, bends, and other dimensions exceeding specified fabrication tolerances. 2. Bends or kinks not shown on approved Shop Drawings. 3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrate and conditions under which concrete reinforcement is to be placed with installer, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not
03200-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the applicable recommendations of specified codes and standards, and CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports.
B. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, oil, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during formwork construction or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. 1. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum concrete cover as specified below, unless
noted otherwise: a. 3” for concrete cast against ground b. 2” for formed surfaces exposed to weather or ground c. 1-1/2” for all other conditions
2. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16-gage wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Slab and wall bars shall be tied at every intersection around the periphery of the slab or wall and not less than every 48 inches in the field at walls and 60 inches in the field at slabs.
3. Bar supports shall be placed no further than 4 feet apart in each direction. Supports must be completely concealed in the concrete and shall not discolor or otherwise mar the surface of the concrete.
4. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. 5. Do not secure reinforcing steel to forms with wire, nails or other ferrous metal. Do
not permit metal supports subject to corrosion to touch or be within the required clearance to formed or exposed concrete surfaces.
D. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practical. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.
E. Provide sufficient numbers of supports of strength required to carry reinforcement and maintain the specified concrete cover. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2-inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment or similar construction loads.
F. Splices: Provide reinforcement lap splices by placing bars in contact, and tying tightly with wire. Comply with requirements shown for minimum lap of spliced bars. Reinforcing steel shall not be welded or tack welded.
G. Mechanical Couplers in Lieu of Lap Splicing: 1. Provide mechanical butt splices in accordance with the recommendation of the
manufacturer of the mechanical splicing device. Butt splices shall develop 125 percent of the specified minimum yield tensile strength of the spliced bars or of the smaller bar in transition splices. Flame dry bars before butt splicing. Provide
03200-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
adequate jigs and clamps or other devices to support, align, and hold the longitudinal centerline of the bars to be butt spliced in a straight line.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Bar-Lock (MBT) Coupler, as manufactured by Bar-Lock (MBT) Coupler Systems. b. Dayton-Superior DBR Coupler - Allow for the reduction of bar area at threads. c. Or approved equal.
H. Reinforcement Around Openings: Place an equivalent area of steel around the pipe or opening and extend on each side sufficiently to develop bond in each bar. See the Details on Drawings for bar extension length each side of opening. Where welded wire fabric is used, provide extra reinforcing using fabric or deformed bars.
I. Field Bending: Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not permitted when rebending will later be required to straighten bars. Rebending of bars at the same place where strain hardening has taken place due to the original bend will damage the bar. Consult with the ENGINEER prior to any pour if the CONTRACTOR foresees a need to work out a solution to prevent field bending.
3.3 INSPECTION OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Do not place concrete until the reinforcing steel is inspected and permission for placing concrete is granted by ENGINEER. All concrete placed in violation of this provision will be rejected.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
03251-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 03251
CONCRETE JOINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes installation of concrete joints including, construction joints, expansion joints and fillers, waterstops, and contraction (control) joints.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM D1752, Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
C. United States Army Corps of Engineers 1. CRD-C572, Specifications for Polyvinyl-Chloride Waterstop.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All joints subject to hydrostatic pressure shall be provided with continuous waterstop.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for approval, Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all materials required.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval: 1. Layout of all construction joint locations prior to the submittal of steel reinforcing
drawings. The concrete pour sequence and placement schedule shall be stated in the construction joint shop drawing layout.
2. Detail for joining polyvinyl chloride to steel waterstops.
C. Samples: Submit for approval: 1. Waterstops for joints. 2. Expansion joint fillers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install all manufactured items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Store materials off the ground and protected from moisture, dirt and other contaminants. Protect installed and uninstalled materials from UV exposure in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
03251-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERSTOPS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride: 1. Reference Standard: CRD-C572. 2. Construction Joints: Minimum of 3/8” thick, ribbed, center bulb type, width as shown,
or if not shown, 6-inch minimum. 3. Expansion Joints: Minimum thickness of 1/4”, 9” minimum width. Provide with "O"
or "U" shaped center bulb . The "O" shall have an outside diameter of 3/4” minimum. 4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide polyvinyl chloride waterstops of one of the
following: a. W.R. Meadows, Incorporated. b. Greenstreak Group, Incorporated. c. Or approved equal.
B. Hydrophilic: 1. Provide chloroprene rubber waterstops, 3/8” thick. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Greenstreak Hydrotite. b. Or approved equal.
C. Retrofit Waterstop 1. Polyvinyl chloride or thermoplastic vulcanizate waterstop used between existing
concrete and new concrete: Minimum of 3/8-inch thick, ribbed, 4-inch nominal width, 3-inch minimum height, T or L shaped.
2. Provide epoxy gel bed below retrofit waterstop. 3. Attach waterstop to existing concrete with stainless steel expansion anchors or
concrete screws and stainless steel batten bar with minimum dimensions of 1 ½-inch by 3/16-inch.
4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Greenstreak 581. b. Earth Shield JP 320L. c. Or approved equal.
2.2 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
A. Bituminous type conforming to ASTM D994 or D1751, unless otherwise shown or specified.
2.3 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINT ROUGHENER
A. Provide a water-soluble non-flammable, surface-retardant roughener.
B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Rugasol-S, as manufactured by Sika Corporation for horizontal joints. 2. MBT EAC-S, as manufactured by Master Builders for horizontal joints. 3. MBT Tuf-Cote (Deep Etch), as manufactured by Master Builders for vertical joints. 4. Or approved equal.
2.4 EPOXY BONDING AGENT
A. Provide an epoxy-resin bonding agent, two component type.
03251-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2. Eucopoxy LPL, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. 3. Epoxtite Binder (Code # 2390), as manufactured by A.C. Horn, Incorporated. 4. Or approved equal.
2.5 RUBBER BONDING AGENT
A. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Scotch-Grip 1300 Rubber Adhesive, as manufactured by 3M Company. 2. Or approved equal.
2.6 MORTAR
A. Mortar must be composed of cement, sand and water. Materials for mortar must comply with Section 03300. The proportion of sand to cement measured by volume must be 2 to 1 respectively. Mortar must contain only enough water to allow placing.
2.7 BOND BREAKER
A. Tape for Joints: Adhesive-backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape, same width as joint that will adhere to premolded joint material or concrete surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed with installer and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 2.2, and as specified below.
B. Safety and performance of the structures is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to the extent that the structure is affected by the location and details of construction joints, unless shop drawings of the proposed construction joint locations and details are submitted and approved by the ENGINEER. Limit spacing between construction joints to less than 100 feet unless otherwise noted or approved.
C. Locate and install construction joints as shown. Locate additional construction joints as required to satisfactorily complete all Work.
D. Horizontal Joints: 1. Roughen concrete at the interface of construction joints by sandblasting to expose the
aggregate (1/4-inch minimum amplitude) and remove accumulated concrete on rebar immediately subsequent to form stripping. When sandblasting adjacent to installed waterstops, shield installed waterstops from the sandblasting operation. Immediately before placing fresh concrete, thoroughly clean the existing contact surface using a stiff brush or other tools and a stream of water under pressure. The surface shall be
03251-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
clean and wet, but free from pools of water at the moment the fresh concrete is placed.
2. Remove laitance, waste mortar or other substance that may prevent complete adhesion.
3. Place a 3” thick coat of mortar over the surface of the old concrete. Place fresh concrete before the mortar has attained its initial set.
E. Vertical Joints: 1. Apply roughener to the form in a thin, even film by brush, spray or roller in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. After roughener is dry, concrete may be placed.
2. When concrete has been placed and the form removed, wash loosened material off with high-pressure water spray to obtain roughened surface subject to approval by ENGINEER.
3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Locate and install expansion joints as shown. Install bituminous joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install caulking and sealants as specified in Section 07900, Joint Sealants.
3.4 WATERSTOPS
A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 2, and as specified below. Make all joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Obtain ENGINEER'S approval for waterstop locations not shown. 3. Provide waterstops in all basements, tanks and other substructures up to an elevation
at least 12” above grade or to an elevation at least 12” above highest liquid level in tanks, whichever is higher, except where otherwise shown or noted.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop: 1. Tie waterstops to reinforcing steel at 12-inches on center, in each direction, so that it
is securely and rigidly supported in the proper position, centered in the joint, during concrete placement. Hog rings shall be used to facilitate placing and tying of waterstops to reinforcing steel forms or form-ties.
2. Continuously inspect waterstops during concrete placement to ensure their proper positioning.
3. Provide fused waterstops using equipment as supplied by or recommended by the manufacturer. Joints shall be inspected for strength and pinholes after splicing. Splices shall be strong enough to develop a pulling force of 75 percent of the strength of the waterstop, and shall be watertight.
4. Cover and protect installed waterstops from UV if the pour of concrete will be delayed more than 30 days.
5. Shield installed waterstops from sandblasting when performing surface roughening adjacent to installed waterstops.
C. Hydrophilic Waterstop: Install where shown in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 BONDING WITH EPOXY ADHESIVE
A. Use adhesive for the following:
03251-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Bonding of fresh concrete to concrete cured at least 45 days or to existing concrete. 2. Bonding of horizontal surfaces, which will receive a topping.
B. Handle and store epoxy adhesive in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, including safety precautions.
C. Mix the epoxy adhesive in complete accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
D. Before placing fresh concrete, thoroughly roughen and clean hardened concrete surfaces and coat with epoxy adhesive not less than 1/16" thick. Place fresh concrete while the epoxy material is still tacky, without removing the in-place grout coat, and as directed by the epoxy manufacturer.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
03300-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Place, finish, cure, strip, and repair concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and
Mass Concrete. 2. ACI 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. 3. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, (includes ASTM
Standards referred to herein). 4. ACI 304, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 5. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 306, Cold Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 309, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 8. ACI 311, Guide for Concrete Inspection. 9. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 10. ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete 11. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.
B. Maintain a copy of ACI SP-15, Field Reference Manual, Latest Edition, at the project field office at all times during construction.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Class A Concrete shall be steel reinforced and includes: 1. Foundations. 2. Walls. 3. Slabs. 4. Beams. 5. Girders. 6. Columns. 7. Equipment bases. 8. Pipe supports.
B. Class B Concrete shall be placed without forms or with simple forms, with little or no reinforcing, and includes: 1. Concrete fill. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Sidewalks. 4. Thrust blocks. 5. Encasements.
03300-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise may be requested by ENGINEER, including names, sources and descriptions.
B. Product Data: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's specifications with application and installation instructions for
proprietary materials and items, including admixtures and bonding agents. 2. List of concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. Include the
results of all tests performed to qualify the materials and to establish the mix designs.
C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory test reports for materials and mix design tests
D. Delivery Tickets: Furnish to ENGINEER copies of all weighmaster certificate delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to the site. Provide items of information as specified in ASTM C94, Section 16. Delivery tickets shall be signed by a Certified Weighmaster.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests for Concrete Materials: Submit written reports to ENGINEER, for each material sampled and tested, prior to the start of Work. Provide the Project identification name and number, date of report, name of CONTRACTOR, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended use.
B. If the concrete mix designs specified herein have not been used previously by the ready-mix supplier, mix proportions and concrete strength curves for regular cylinder tests shall be established by an approved ready-mix supplier or an independent testing laboratory based on the relationship of 7, 14 and 28 day strengths versus slump values of 2, 4 and 6 inches, all conforming to these Specifications. A laboratory, independent of the ready-mix supplier, shall be required to prepare and test all concrete cylinders. The costs for preparation of mix designs, not previously used by the ready-mix supplier, and testing of concrete and materials shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: 1. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II; or blended hydraulic cement, ASTM C595,
Type 1P (MS). 2. Do not use cement which has deteriorated because of improper storage or handling.
B. Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified. 1. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts, substances such as iron sulfides,
pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials that can cause stains on exposed concrete surfaces.
2. Fine Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
03300-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Coarse Aggregate: Provide clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Coarse Aggregate Size: Size to be ASTM C33, Nos. 57 or 67, except that No. 467
may be used for footings, foundation mats and walls 16" or greater in thickness.
C. Water: Clean, free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
2.2 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES
A. Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers, and use in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes and approved by the ENGINEER, unless otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER.
B. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260. 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. SIKA AER, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. b. Micro Air, as manufactured by BASF. c. Daravair, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Conn. d. Or approved equal.
C. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (“Superplasticizer”): ASTM C494, Type F/G. 1. Superplasticizer shall be used in all Class A Concrete. Do not use high range
water-reducing admixture containing more chloride ions than are contained in municipal drinking water. Add only at the job site to concrete in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Sikament 320, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. b. Glenium, as manufactured by BASF. c. Daracem-100, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Conn. d. Or approved equal.
D. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 1. A water-reducing, aqueous solution of a modification of the salt of polyhydroxylated
organic acids. Do not use admixture containing any lignin, nitrates or chlorides added during manufacture.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Eucon WR-75, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Pozzolith, as manufactured by BASF. c. WRDA series, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Conn. d. Or approved equal.
E. Pozzolanic Admixtures: 1. Pozzolanic admixtures shall be used in water-retaining structures, and may be used in
other concrete. 2. Provide Mineral admixtures, when used, meeting the requirements of ASTM C618
Class F. 3. A substitution by weight, of the portland cement by pozzolan, so that the total
tricalcium aluminate content of the resulting cement plus pozzolan is not greater than 8%, will be considered. However, the pozzolan shall not exceed 20% by weight of the cement plus pozzolan.
03300-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
F. Set-Control Admixtures: ASTM C494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water-reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water-reducing and Accelerating. 5. Type F, Water-reducing, high range admixtures. 6. Type G, Water-reducing, high range, and retarding admixtures.
G. Color Pigments: 1. Color pigments for colored concrete must be of iron oxides complying with ASTM
C979.
H. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride, or admixtures containing chlorides or nitrates in concrete at any time, unless otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER.
2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. General: 1. Concrete design shall conform to ACI 318. 2. Concrete construction shall conform to ACI 301, as modified by the following notes
and specifications herein. a. Concrete is classified as “Other Reinforced Concrete Construction” for the
purposes of ACI 301, Table 4.2.2.6.
B. Prepare design mixes of concrete. Mixes shall be proportioned per the requirements ACI 30, as modified with the following limitations: 1. Class A Concrete
a. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
b. Air content: 6% ± 1%. For concrete placed at least 2 feet below the adjacent grade, an air-entraining admixture is not required unless otherwise specified.
c. Slump, before addition of superplasticizer: 3½" ± ½" d. Slump, after addition of superplasticizer: 8” maximum
Coarse Aggregate Size
Cementitious Content-Pounds Per Cubic Yard
Water-Cement Ratio With Superplasticizer
¾” 625 min, 800 max 0.375 1” 600 min, 800 max 0.385 1 ½” 590 min, 800 max 0.400
e. Use superplasticizer in all Class A Concrete. Use water reducers in combination
with superplasticizers as required for mixing. 2. Class B Concrete
a. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 2,500 psi. b. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio by Weight: 0.49. c. Slump: 3" Minimum, 5" Maximum.
C. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to ENGINEER for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
D. Admixtures:
03300-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete, except interior slabs subject to abrasion, unless otherwise shown or specified. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the prescribed limits.
2. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.
2.4 EPOXY BONDING AGENT
A. For use in all dry-packed holes, concrete repair and for unplanned cold-joints.
B. Provide an epoxy-resin bonding agent, two component, polysulfide type.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2. Eucopoxy LPL, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. 3. Or approved equal.
2.5 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 10 ounces per square yard and complying with AASHTO M182, Class 3.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1-D (water retention requirements): 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Super Aqua Cure VOX, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sealtight 1100, as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Incorporated. c. Or approved equal.
D. Concrete Densifier and Chemical Hardener (Surface Applied) 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. LS, as manufactured by Consolideck. b. Liqui-Hard, as manufactured by W. R. Meadows. c. Duro-Nox LS, as manufactured by Nox-Crete. d. Or approved equal.
2.6 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Provide and install items such as plates, angles, inserts, bolts and similar items not specified elsewhere under this Section. Carbon steel embedded items shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
B. Abrasive Stair Nosings 1. Provide single-component stair nosing 2. 3-inch width 3. Aluminum Extrusion, with provisions for anchoring into concrete
03300-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
4. Extruded with multiple channels, dovetail shaped, filled with black aluminum oxide grit set in epoxy resin
5. Designed for installation before concrete sets, at the front edge of the stair 6. Provide continuous stair nosings, width of stairway less 3 inches on each side. No
splices in stair nosings. 7. Manufacturers/Models:
a. Balco; Model R315P b. Arden Architectural Specialties; Model N-B30 c. Or Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Provide concrete produced by the ready-mixed process.
B. Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. Proposed changes in mixing procedures, other than herein specified, must be accepted by ENGINEER before implementation. 1. Plant equipment and facilities: Conform to National Ready- Mix Concrete Association
“Plant and Delivery Equipment Specification.” 2. Mix concrete in revolving type truck mixers that are in good condition and which
produce thoroughly mixed concrete of the specified consistency and strength. 3. Do not exceed the proper capacity of the mixer. 4. Mix concrete for a minimum of two minutes after arrival at the job site, or as
recommended by the mixer manufacturer. 5. Mix concrete during transit only as recommended by the mixer manufacturer. 6. Mix at proper speed until concrete is discharged. 7. Maintain adequate facilities at the job site for continuous delivery of concrete at the
required rates. 8. Provide access to the mixing plant for ENGINEER at all times.
3.2 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
A. Transport and place concrete not more than 90 minutes after water has been added to the dry ingredients or before 250 revolutions of the drum or blades, whichever occurs first.
B. If an admixture is used to retard the set time and the concrete temperature does not exceed 85 degrees F, the travel and placing time may be extended to 120 minutes or 300 revolutions of the drum or blades, whichever occurs first.
C. Take care to avoid spilling and separation of the mixture during transportation.
D. Do not place concrete in which the ingredients have been separated.
E. Do not retemper partially set concrete.
F. Use suitable and approved equipment for transporting concrete from mixer to forms.
03300-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General: Place concrete continuously so that no concrete will be placed on concrete, which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified in Section 03251, Concrete Joints. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure that will cause segregation. 1. Screed concrete that is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid
excessive skimming or grouting. 2. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet
the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign materials. Do not use retempered concrete. Remove rejected concrete from the job site and dispose of it in an acceptable location.
3. Do not place concrete until all forms, bracing, reinforcement, and embedded items are in final and secure position.
4. Do not place in cold weather, unless adequate precautions are taken against frost action.
5. Do not place footings, piers or pile caps on frozen soil. 6. Unless otherwise approved, place concrete only when ENGINEER is present. 7. Allow a minimum of 3 days before placing concrete against a slab or wall already in
place.
B. Concrete Conveying: 1. Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to the concrete conveying
equipment and to the locations of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods that will prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials.
2. Provide mechanical equipment for conveying concrete to ensure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Provide runways for wheeled concrete conveying equipment from the concrete delivery point to the locations of final deposit. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes, free of hardened concrete, debris, water, ice and other deleterious materials.
3. Pumping concrete is permitted, however do not use aluminum pipe for conveying.
C. Placing Concrete into Forms: 1. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place concrete at such a rate that concrete that is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.
2. Do not permit concrete to free fall within the form from a distance exceeding 8'-0", except as noted in Section 03100. Use “elephant trunks” or “wall pipes” to prevent free fall and excessive splashing on forms and reinforcement.
3. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached the elevation of such spreaders.
4. Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the applicable recommended practices of ACI 309. Vibration of forms and reinforcing will not be permitted.
5. Vibrators shall have a frequency of at least 8,000 vpm, with amplitude required to consolidate the concrete in the section being placed. At least one stand-by vibrator in operable condition shall be at the placement site prior to initiating placement of the concrete.
03300-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
6. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the layer of concrete and at least 6" into the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix.
7. The forms shall contain sufficient windows or be limited in height to allow visual observation of the concrete and the vibrator operators shall be required to see the concrete being consolidated to ensure good quality workmanship or the CONTRACTOR shall have a person who is actually observing the vibration of the concrete at all times and advising the vibrator operators of any changes needed to assure complete consolidation.
8. Do not place concrete in beam and slab forms until the concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic.
9. Force concrete under pipes, sleeves, openings and inserts from one side until visible from the other side to prevent voids.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs and Footings: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete in a continuous operation, within the limits of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 2. Consolidate concrete during placing operations using mechanical vibrating equipment,
so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
3. Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs, and against bulkheads of slabs on ground, as specified for formed concrete structures.
4. Bring surfaces to the correct level. Smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
E. Bonding for Next Concrete Pour: Per Section 03251, Concrete Joints.
F. Quality of Concrete Work: 1. Make all concrete solid, compact and smooth, and free of laitance, cracks and cold
joints. 2. All concrete for liquid retaining structures, and all concrete in contact with earth,
water, or exposed directly to the elements shall be watertight. 3. Cut out and properly replace to the extent ordered by ENGINEER, or repair to the
satisfaction of ENGINEER, surfaces which contain cracks or voids, are unduly rough, or are in any way defective. Thin patches or plastering will not be acceptable.
4. Repair all leaks through concrete, and cracks, holes or other defective concrete in areas of potential leakage and make watertight.
5. Repair, remove, and replace defective concrete as ordered by ENGINEER at no additional cost to OWNER.
G. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect all concrete Work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be
caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with the requirements of ACI 306 and as herein specified.
2. When the air temperature has fallen to or may be expected to fall below 40°F, provide adequate means to maintain the temperature, in the area where concrete is being placed, at between 50°F and 70°F for at least seven days after placing. Provide temporary housings or coverings including tarpaulins or plastic film. Maintain the
03300-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
heat and protection, if necessary, to ensure that the ambient temperature does not fall more than 30°F in the 24 hours following the seven-day period. Avoid rapid dry-out of concrete due to overheating, and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or heating.
3. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40°F, uniformly heat all water and aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 55°F and not more than 85°F at point of placement.
4. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Ascertain that forms, reinforcing steel, and adjacent concrete surfaces are entirely free of frost and ice before placing concrete.
5. When temperatures are expected to be below 32oF the night before the concrete is placed, then all reinforcing steel, forms and the ground shall be preheated, for a minimum of 12 hours, under a minimum temperature of 50oF.
6. Do not use salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, or set-control admixtures, unless approved by ENGINEER, in mix designs.
7. Weather predictions made by the nearest NOAA station, and corrected for the local elevation and environmental conditions, may be used to determine whether cold weather protection shall be required. Thermometers will be used by ENGINEER and these readings shall determine whether cold weather protection shall be required and whether cold weather protection is adequate.
H. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist as any combination of high air temperature, low
relative humidity and wind velocity that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete as recommended by ACI 305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 85°F. No concrete shall be placed if its temperature exceeds 90°F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used, or liquid nitrogen may be added. Ice, when introduced into the mixer shall be in such form that it will be completely melted and dispersed throughout the mix at the completion of the mixing time. The addition of ice shall not increase the specified water to cement ratio.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
4. Thoroughly wet forms before placing concrete. Forms shall be free of standing water when concrete is placed.
5. Do not use set-control admixtures, unless approved by ENGINEER in mix designs. 6. Fog spray shall be used during finishing operations whenever necessary to avoid
surface plastic shrinkage cracking. Fog spray shall also be used after finishing and before the specified curing is commenced to avoid surface plastic shrinkage cracking.
7. Obtain ENGINEER'S approval of other methods and materials proposed for use.
I. Removal of Forms: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage resulting from improper and
premature removal of forms. Satisfy all applicable OSHA requirements with regard to safety of personnel and property.
2. Forms and shoring for elevated structural slabs or beams shall remain in place in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 6, and until the concrete has reached a compressive strength equal to the specified 28-day compressive strength as determined by test cylinders unless noted otherwise in Section 03100 - Concrete
03300-10
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Formwork. Removal of all supports prior to obtaining adequate field cured cylinder results and reshoring shall not be permitted.
J. Backfill Against Walls: 1. Do not place backfill against walls until the concrete has obtained a compressive
strength equal to the specified 28-day compressive strength. Where backfill is to be placed on both sides of the wall, the backfill shall be placed simultaneously on both sides to prevent differential pressures.
2. Since the walls of some structures are laterally restrained or supported by suspended slabs and/or slabs on grade and are not designed as cantilever retaining walls, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule of wall shoring, bracing, and backfilling that is coordinated with the concrete curing, test cylinder reports and the design assumptions and obtain a review from the ENGINEER prior to proceeding.
K. Patching: 1. Patching of concrete shall provide an acceptable and structurally sound surface finish
uniform in appearance or the CONTRACTOR shall upgrade the finish by other means at no additional cost.
2. Tie Holes: All tie holes, except where sealant is indicated, shall be filled with dry pack nonshrink grout. White cement shall be added as needed so the color of grout after curing matches the color of adjacent concrete. Tie holes shall be thoroughly sandblasted or roughened. Flush the patch area with water and allow to dry. Coat the surface of the existing concrete with an approved bonding agent prior to filling with nonshrink grout. Complete the repair in the time duration specified by the bonding agent manufacturer. The grout shall be rammed into place in thin layers and leveled to the plane of the surrounding concrete. Cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Defective Areas: Remove all defective concrete such as honeycombed areas and rock pockets out to sound concrete. Small shallow holes caused by air entrapment at the surface of the forms shall not be considered defects unless the amount is so great as to be considered not the standard of the industry and due primarily of poor workmanship. If chipping is required, the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface. Feather edges shall not be permitted. The defective area shall be filled with a nonshrink, nonmetallic, grout. Use an approved bonding agent on horizontal patches prior to placing nonmetallic, non shrink grout. Since some bonding agents may not be compatible for some vertical surface patching techniques, demonstrate all methods for repair of vertical surfaces using the actual materials, methods, and curing procedures required by the manufactures of the materials on the project site. The CONTRACTOR shall consult with representatives of the bonding agent manufacturer and the nonshrink grout manufacturer, and these representatives shall be onsite and assist in the demonstration.
4. Blockouts at Pipes or Other Penetrations: Conform to details shown or submit proposed blockouts for review. Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
3.4 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough Form Finish: 1. Standard rough form finish is with concrete surface having the texture imparted by
the form material, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched with mortar of 1 part cement to 1½ parts sand & all fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off.
2. Use rough form finish for the following: a. Exterior vertical surfaces up to 1' below grade.
03300-11
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Interior exposed vertical surfaces of liquid containers up to 1' below liquid level. c. Interior and exterior exposed beams and undersides of slabs. d. Other areas shown.
B. Smooth Form Finish: 1. Produce smooth form finish (Class A, as defined by ACI-347) by selecting form
materials that will impart a smooth, hard, uniform texture. Arrange panels in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas as above with all fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.
2. Use smooth form finish for surfaces that are to be covered with a coating material. The material may be applied directly to the concrete or may be a covering bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing, damp proofing, painting or other similar system.
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: 1. Provide smooth, rubbed finish to concrete surfaces which have received smooth form
finish as follows: a. Rubbing of concrete surfaces not later than the day after form removal. b. Moistening of concrete surfaces and rubbing with carborundum brick or other
abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Except where surfaces have been previously covered as specified above, use smooth rubbed finish for the following: a. Interior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces. b. Exterior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces down to 1' below grade. c. Interior and exterior horizontal surfaces, except exterior exposed slabs and steps. d. Interior exposed vertical surfaces of liquid containers down to 1' below liquid level. e. Other areas shown.
D. Sack Rubbed Finish: 1. Before applying the sack-rubbed finish, fill all tie rod holes and large cavities and
remove or correct all fins and irregularities as specified in the Smooth Rubbed Finish. 2. Produce a sack rubbed finish by rubbing the concrete surface with a clean rubber float
or wad of burlap and mortar. Use mortar made of premixed sacking mortar or one part portland cement and 1.5 parts, by volume, clean sand passing a No. 16 sieve, mixed with sufficient water to provide a consistency equal to that of a thick cream. Use the same type and brand cement as used in the concrete or colored premixed sacking mortar. The mortar finish color shall match the surrounding concrete. If necessary, blend white cement into the mortar to match the surrounding concrete surface.
3. Thoroughly wet the surface of the concrete and then perform sack rubbing while the surface is damp but not wet. Thoroughly rub the mortar over the area with a rubber float or wad of burlap, filling all pits. While the mortar is still plastic in the pits, rub the surface with the rubber float or burlap using a dry mix of the above proportions, removing all excess plastic material and placing enough dry material in the pits to stiffen and solidify the mortar, then finish the mortar fillings flush with the surface. At the end of the rubbing, no mortar or material shall remain on the surface other than that within the pits.
4. Ensure the completed surface is free of surface voids and blemishes, and is uniform in appearance and texture, except for the difference in texture between the filled voids and the remainder of the surface.
5. A thorough wash-down with stiff bristle brushes shall follow the final bagging or stoning operation. No extraneous materials shall remain on the surface of the wall.
03300-12
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
The wall shall be sprayed with a fine fog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition for at least 3 days after the application.
6. Use a sack rubbed finish for the following areas or as indicated in the Drawings: a. Interior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces. b. Exterior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces down to 1’ below grade. c. Interior and exterior horizontal surfaces, except exterior exposed slabs and steps. d. Or other areas shown.
E. Related Unformed Surfaces: 1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching the adjacent formed surfaces. Continue the final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across the adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
3.5 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Float Finish: 1. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for floating.
Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared or when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently. Check and level the surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10'when tested with a 10' straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill all low spots. Uniformly slope surface to drains as shown. Immediately after leveling, refloat the surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
2. Use float finish for the following: a. Interior horizontal surfaces of liquid containers, except those to receive grout
topping. b. Exterior below grade horizontal surfaces. c. Surfaces to receive additional finishes, except as shown or specified.
B. Trowel Finish: 1. After floating, begin the first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel.
Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface.
2. Consolidate the concrete surface by the final hand troweling operation. Finish shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straight edge. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
3. Use trowel finish for the following: a. Interior exposed slabs, unless otherwise shown or specified. b. Slabs to receive resilient floor finishes.
C. Non-Slip Broom Finish: 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming in
the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use fiber-bristle broom, unless otherwise directed. Coordinate the required final finish with ENGINEER before application.
2. Use Non-Slip Broom Finish for the following: a. Exterior exposed horizontal surfaces subject to light foot traffic. b. Interior and exterior concrete steps and ramps. c. Horizontal surfaces which will receive a grout topping or a concrete equipment
base slab.
03300-13
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete.
2. Start initial curing after placing and finishing concrete as soon as free moisture and bleed water sheen has disappeared from the concrete surface. Keep concrete continuously moist during initial curing.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before the concrete has dried. The total curing duration shall not be less than ten (10) days. For concrete sections over 30" thick, continue curing for an additional seven (7) days, minimum. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the final curing period.
B. Use one of the following methods as approved by ENGINEER: 1. Walls:
a. Method 1: Leave concrete forms in place and keep entire surfaces of forms and exposed concrete surfaces wet for the entire curing duration. If forms are loosened and the contact between the concrete surface and forms is broken then the entire wall shall be wet cured.
b. Method 2: Continuously sprinkle or fog with water 100 percent of the exposed surfaces for the curing duration immediately after removal of forms.
c. Method 3: When approved by ENGINEER and as noted below, apply curing compound immediately after removal of forms.
2. Slab and Curbs: a. Method 1: Protect surface by water ponding for the entire curing duration. b. Method 2: Cover concrete surfaces and exposed edges with the specified
absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating the cover with water, and keeping the absorptive cover continuously wet with sprinklers or porous hoses during the curing duration. Lap adjacent absorptive cover sections 3-inches minimum.
c. Method 3: Cover the concrete surfaces and exposed edges with the specified moisture-retaining cover during the curing duration. Seal edges and seams with waterproof tape, adhesive or sand berm. Water must be introduced between the moisture-retaining cover and the concrete surface whenever moist drops cannot be detected on the concrete side of the cover or the concrete surface is noticeably dry.
d. Method 4: Cover all exposed surfaces with 1-inch minimum layer of wet sand, earth, or sawdust and keep continuously wet for the curing duration.
e. Method 5: Continuously sprinkle or fog exposed surfaces for the curing duration. f. Method 6: When approved by ENGINEER and as noted below, apply liquid curing
compound immediately after final finishing when surface will no longer be damaged by traffic necessary to apply curing compound.
C. Liquid curing compound: 1. Apply the specified curing compound to concrete surfaces when permitted by
ENGINEER. Slabs to receive terrazzo floors, concrete/grout topping or ceramic tile, concrete of water bearing structures, and concrete that will receive coatings shall not be cured with liquid curing compound. The compounds shall be applied by power spray equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas, which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain the continuity of the coating and repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period. Remove curing compound from exposed surfaces at the end of the curing
03300-14
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
duration. For concrete surfaces, which will be in contact with potable water, the manufacturer shall certify that the curing compound used is NSF 61 approved.
D. Temperature of Concrete During Curing: 1. When the nighttime low temperature may drop to 40°F or below, maintain the
concrete temperature between 50°F and 70°F continuously throughout the curing period, by heating, covering, insulation or housing as required.
2. When the daytime high temperature may rise to 90°F or above, maintain the concrete temperature at a minimum and reduce temperature variations by providing moist curing continuously for the concrete curing period.
3. During either of the conditions specified above, the minimum curing time shall be 10 days (240 hours), after which coverings, housings, and insulation shall remain on the work for an additional 3 days, to allow gradual temperature equalization with the atmosphere.
E. Protection from Mechanical Injury: During the curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances including load stresses, heavy shock, excessive vibration, and from damage caused by rain or flowing water. Protect all finished concrete surfaces from damage by subsequent construction operations.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The CONTRACTOR will employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. ENGINEER will direct the number of tests and cylinders required. Furnish all necessary assistance required by ENGINEER.
B. Quality Control Testing During Construction: 1. Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement of
concrete, as follows: a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172. b. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and
one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. c. Air Content: ASTM C231; one for the first concrete load, and one for every two
concrete loads thereafter, or when required by an indication of change. Adjust mix if test results are unsatisfactory and resubmit for ENGINEER'S approval.
d. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set of 4 standard compression cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in any one day; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, and 2 specimens tested at 28 days, 1 held. Cast, store and cure specimens as specified in ASTM C31. 1) Adjust mix if test results are unsatisfactory and resubmit for ENGINEER'S
approval. 2) Concrete that does not meet the strength requirements is subject to rejection
and removal from the Work, or to other such corrective measures as directed by ENGINEER, at the expense of CONTRACTOR.
e. Concrete Temperature: Test each time a slump test is made. 2. Where questionable field conditions may exist during placing concrete or immediately
thereafter, strength tests of specimens cured under field conditions will be required by ENGINEER to check the adequacy of curing and protecting of the concrete placed. Specimens shall be molded at the same time and from the same samples as the laboratory cured specimens. a. Provide improved means and procedures for protecting concrete when the 28-day
compressive strength of field- cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders.
03300-15
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. When laboratory-cured cylinder strengths are appreciably higher than the minimum required compressive strength, field-cured cylinder strengths need not exceed the minimum required compressive strength by more than 500 psi even though the 85 percent criterion is not met.
3. The testing laboratory shall submit certified copies of test results directly to ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR after tests are made.
C. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: 1. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement that has slump or
temperature outside the specified values, nor that which is older than 90 minutes from batching.
2. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed the 28 day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete; and, no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
3. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject to replacement, reconstruction or to other action approved by ENGINEER.
D. Testing Concrete Structure for Strength: 1. When there is evidence that the strength of the in-place concrete does not meet
specification requirements, provide the services of a concrete testing service to take cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination at no additional expense to OWNER. Provide tests complying with ASTM C42 and the following: a. Take at least three (3) representative cores from each member or suspect area at
locations directed by ENGINEER. b. Strength of concrete for each series of cores will be considered satisfactory if their
average compressive strength is at least 85% and no single core is less than 75% of the 28 day required compressive strength.
c. Report test results, in writing, to ENGINEER on the same day that tests are made. Include in test reports the Project identification name and number, date, name of CONTRACTOR, name of concrete testing service, location of test core in the structure, type or class of concrete represented by core sample, nominal maximum size aggregate, design compressive strength, compression breaking strength and type of break (corrected for length-diameter ratio), direction of applied load to core with respect to horizontal plane of the concrete as placed, and the moisture condition of the core at time of testing.
2. Fill core holes solid with non-shrink, high strength grout, and finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces.
E. Water Leakage Tests for All Water-Holding Structures: 1. All water-holding structures shall be subjected to leakage tests after the concrete has
been cured and obtained its design strength, and before backfill, brick facing, or other work which will cover the concrete surfaces of the walls is begun. Water leakage tests shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR as follows: a. All water-holding structures shall be filled with water to the maximum liquid level
shown on the Drawings prior to leak testing at a rate less than 4 ft/hr. After these structures have been kept full for 3-days, it will be assumed for the purpose of the test that the absorption of moisture by the concrete in the basin is complete. All valves and gates to the structure shall then be closed and the change in water surface measured over a 48-hour period. The vertical distance to the water
03300-16
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
surface shall be measured to within 1/16-inch from a fixed point on the containment structure above the water surface. Measurements shall be recorded at 24-hour intervals.
b. During the test period, all exposed portions of the structure shall be examined for dampness or leaks and all visible leaks or damp spots shall be marked; such leaks or damp spots shall be later patched or corrected in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER prior to additional leakage testing. If the drop in water surface in the 48-hour period exceeds 0.05% of the normal volume of liquid contained in the water-holding structure, after accounting for evaporation, precipitation and temperature in open basins, or if damp spots or any seepage is present on the walls or other areas exposed to view where moisture can be picked up on a dry hand, the leakage shall be considered excessive and the leakage test will be considered to have failed. A floating, restrained, partially filled, calibrated, open container for evaporation and precipitation measurement should be positioned in open containment structures, and the water level in the container recorded. Determination of evaporation by a shallow pan-type measuring device is discouraged as the heating of the bottom of a shallow pan can cause accelerated evaporation of water when compared with that taking place from a deep containment structure. 1) Wet areas on top of wall footings shall not be considered cause of a qualitative
failure of the leakage test unless the water can be observed to be flowing. c. If the leakage is excessive, and if damp spots and observed seepage is present on
exposed surfaces, the water-holding structure shall be drained, all leaks and damp spots previously marked shall be patched, and the necessary repairs made, and the basin shall be retested. The CONTRACTOR’s method of repair shall be subject to the requirements of these specifications and submitted for review by the ENGINEER.
d. The water-holding structure shall then be refilled and again tested for leakage and this testing and repair process shall be repeated as many time as necessary until the leakage test passes. This process shall be continued until the drop in water surface in specified test period with the basin full is less than quantity specified above and all damp spots and seepage disappears when the structures are full of water. All repairs of faulty workmanship and materials, and additional tests, shall be made by the CONTRACTOR in an acceptable manner, at no additional cost to the OWNER. Both the correction for excessive leakage and the removal of the damp or wet spots on exposed surfaces shall be required to pass the leakage test.
e. The purpose of this test is to determine the integrity of the finished concrete and to show that the exposed wall surfaces are visually acceptable. Therefore, all other equipment, e.g., stop gates, sluice gates, etc. or temporary bulkheads, should be made watertight prior to the test.
f. As an alternative to having watertight bulkheads, gates or valves, the CONTRACTOR shall accurately measure the leakage through gates, valves, and bulkheads with methods acceptable to the ENGINEER.
g. An assumed leakage through gates and valves based on the manufacturer’s recommendations is not acceptable.
3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for the passage of work by other contractors, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of other contractors is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place
03300-17
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: 1. Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
2. Exterior curbs shall have rubbed finish for vertical surfaces and a broomed finish for top surfaces.
C. Equipment Bases: 1. Unless specifically shown otherwise, provide concrete bases for all pumps and other
equipment. Construct bases to the dimensions shown, or as required to meet manufacturers; requirements and drawing elevations. Where no specific elevations are shown, bases shall be 6-inches thick and extend 3-inches outside the metal equipment base or supports. Bases to have smooth trowel finish, unless a special finish such as terrazzo, ceramic tile or heavy duty concrete topping is required. In those cases, provide appropriate concrete finish.
2. Include all concrete equipment base work not specifically included under other Sections.
3. In general, place bases up to 1-inch below the metal base. Properly shim equipment to grade and fill 1-inch void with non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03600, Grout.
D. Installation of embedded items 1. Install all embedded items prior to concrete placement, or, if necessary, as soon after
concrete placement as possible, before concrete is set. 2. Installation of all embedded items shall be verified with all affected parties where
possible prior to concrete placement. 3. Use temporary support and bracing to keep embedded items in place while concrete
cures. 4. Protect all embedded items from damage during concrete installation.
E. Chamfers: 1. Provide ¾” x 45 degree chamfer on exposed corners of columns, beams, pile caps
and walls, unless otherwise noted.
3.9 CONCRETE REPAIRS
A. Repair of Formed surfaces: 1. Repair exposed-to-view formed concrete surfaces that contain defects which
adversely affect the appearance of the finish. Surface defects that require repair include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, and holes left by the rods and bolts; fins and other projections on the surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
2. Repair concealed formed concrete surfaces that may contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. Surface defects that require repair include cracks in excess of 0.01-inch wide, cracks of any width and other surface deficiencies which penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections, honeycomb, rock pockets, holes left by tie rods and bolts, and spalls except minor breakage at corner.
3. Repair structural cracks and cracks in water-holding structures.
03300-18
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Method of Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of
forms and as directed by ENGINEER. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/2" diameter, and holes left by tie rods
and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case, to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing the cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with the specified bonding agent. a. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland
cement so that, when dry, the patching mortar color will match the color of the surrounding concrete. CONTRACTOR shall impart texture to repaired surfaces to match texture of existing adjacent surfaces. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture, texture and color match before proceeding with the patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than the surrounding surface.
3. Cracks which require repair shall be pressure grouted, epoxy injected, using one of the following in accordance with Section 03740. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. a. Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V. and Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel, as manufactured by Sika
Corporation Company. b. Euco Epoxy #452 Epoxy System, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical
Company. c. Or approved equal.
4. Fill holes extending through concrete by means of a plunger- type gun or other suitable device from the least exposed face, using a flush stop held at the exposed face to ensure completely filling.
5. Sandblast exposed-to-view surfaces that require removal of stains, grout accumulations, sealing compounds, and other substances marring the surfaces. Use sand finer than No. 30 and air pressure from 15 to 25 psi.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify
surface plane to the tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified.
2. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having the required slope. Correct high and low areas as herein specified.
3. Repair finish of unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect the durability of the concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01-inch wide or which penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
4. Repair structural cracks and cracks in water-holding structures.
D. Methods of Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after the concrete has cured
sufficiently so that repairs can be made without damage to adjacent areas. 2. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of
surface finishing operations by cutting out the low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Use one of the following. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. a. Euco Poly-Patch, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
03300-19
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Sikatop 122, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. c. Or approved equal.
3. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 2" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts, and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen all concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and brush with the specified bonding agent. Place patching concrete before grout takes its initial set. Mix patching concrete of the same materials and proportions to provide concrete of the same type or class as the original adjacent concrete. Place, compact and finish as required to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
4. Repair isolated random cracks, as approved be ENGINEER, and single holes not over 2" diameter, by the dry-pack method. Groove the top of cracks, and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen all cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with the specified bonding agent. Place dry-pack before the cement grout takes its initial set. Mix dry-pack, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2½ parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched areas continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
5. Cracks which extend through the full member section, or any cracks determined by ENGINEER to require pressure grouting repair, shall be pressure grouted, epoxy injected, using one of the following in accordance with Section 03740. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. a. Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V. and Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel, as manufactured by Sika
Corporation. b. Euco Epoxy #452 Epoxy System, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical
Company. c. Or approved equal.
6. Assure that surface is acceptable for flooring material to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Other Methods of Repair: 1. Repair methods not specified above may be used if approved by ENGINEER.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
03400-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 03400
PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes all plant-precast products, including wet wells, catch basins, manholes, vaults, and wheel stops.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Precast products shall be designed for the indicated service, the loadings specified in the Contract Documents, and all transportation, handling, and erection loads, in accordance with requirements and recommendations of the references.
B. If precast products are proposed as substitutes for cast-in-place designed structures, such precast products shall meet the above requirements and any other requirements for which the cast-in-place structures were designed by the ENGINEER. Such products shall be designed by an engineer licensed to practice in the State where the project is performed.
C. Items located in or adjacent to traffic areas shall be designed to resist AASHTO H-20-44 loading, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lifting inserts shall have a minimum safety factor of 4.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years experience in the design and manufacture of
precast concrete products substantially similar to those required for this project.
B. Installer: 1. Precast Items shall be in stalled by the Manufacturer or by an installer regularly
engaged for at least 5 years in erection of precast products similar to those required on this project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Material specifications. 2. All dead, live and other applicable loads used in the design. 3. Applicable standards (from "References") met by the item(s). 4. Setting plans locating and designating all items furnished by the manufacturer, with
all major openings shown and located. 5. Details to indicate quantities, location and type of reinforcing and prestressing steel. 6. Sections and details showing connections, edge conditions, support conditions, and
connections of the items. 7. Description of all embeds, including stripping, lifting and erection inserts, with piece
mark and location, including those cast into products or sent loose to the job site.
03400-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
8. Description and drawings of all frames and covers. 9. Dimensions and special finishes.
B. Mix Designs: Submit all precast mix designs for approval. Mix designs shall be prepared by an independent testing facility or qualified employee of the Precast Manufacturer.
C. Design Modifications: 1. Submit design modifications necessary to meet performance requirements and field
conditions. 2. Variations in details or materials shall not adversely affect the appearance, durability
or strength of products. 3. Maintain general design concept without altering size of members, profiles and
alignment unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In-Plant Quality Control 1. The Manufacturer shall have an established PCI quality control program in effect prior
to bidding. If requested, a copy of this program shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. 2. Testing of materials and inspection of production techniques shall be the responsibility
of the Manufacturer's Quality Control Department. 3. Keep quality control records available for two years after final acceptance. 4. Keep certificates of compliance available for five (5) years after final acceptance.
B. All other testing and inspection, if any, to be provided by OWNER.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and transport products in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damage.
B. Lift or support products only at the points shown on the Shop Drawings.
C. Installer shall be responsible for the repair of damage to items except that caused by others.
D. After items are installed in their final positions, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for their protection. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the repair of any damage to the items caused by someone other than the Manufacturer/Installer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement ASTM C150 Type I, II or III cement.
B. Aggregates: 1. Fine and coarse aggregate for mix shall conform to ASTM C33 or C330. 2. Aggregates shall be clean, hard, strong, durable, inert, and free of staining and
deleterious materials.
C. Water Potable, free from deleterious material.
03400-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Admixtures: 1. Conforming to ASTM C260 and/or ASTM C494. 2. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used.
E. Concrete Strength: Concrete strength shall be determined by design with a minimum 28 day design strength of 4,000 psi.
2.2 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Products: 1. Structural Shapes, Bars & Plates (1.6mm and thicker): ASTM A36M 2. Pipe: ASTM A53 Grades A or B 3. Tube Steel: ASTM A500 Grades A or B 4. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615M Grades 300 & 420 or AS TM A706M 5. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A416M Grade 270, low relaxation 6. Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 7. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 8. Deformed Welded Wire Fabric: ASTMA497 9. Plain Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 10. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D1.1 Type B 11. Standard Machine Bolts: ASTM A307 Grade A or SAE J429 Grade 2 12. Standard Studs/Threaded Round Stock: ASTM A307 Grade C, ASTM A572M Grade 345 13. Nuts for Standard Machine Bolts and Threaded Studs: ASTM A563M Grade A Hex Nuts 14. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325M Type 1, ASTM A449 Type 1, or SAE J429 Grade 5 15. Nuts for High-Strength Bolts and Threaded Studs: ASTM A563M Grade DH Heavy Hex
Nuts 16. Coil Rods and Bolts: ASTM A108 - SAE 1016 to 1026, Fu/FY = 480/380 MPa minimum 17. Coil Nuts for Coil Rods and Bolts: Nuts passing a proof load stress of 80 ksi, based on
the tensile stress area of the matching coil rods and bolts. 18. Carbon Steel Castings: ASTM A27M Grade 415-205
B. Protective Coatings: 1. All connection hardware permanently exposed to weather after completion shall be
protected. All connection hardware not exposed to weather after completion may be uncoated, except as otherwise explicitly required by the contract drawings. Fasteners can have either an electroplated zinc or cadmium coating.
2. Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Primers (shop primers such as red iron oxide) : a. Tnemec Series FD88 Azeron Primer b. Ameron 5105 c. Weld-Thru Primer, Red, 2-0101 & Gray, 2-0102
3. Zinc Coatings: a. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: ASTM A123, or ASTM A153M b. Electroplated Zinc for Steel Products and Steel Hardware: ASTM B633 c. Zinc Rich Paints: DOD-P-21035
4. Cadmium Coatings: a. Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium: ASTM B766
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Grout: 1. Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand and water sufficient for placement and
hydration. 2. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed, packaged non-ferrous aggregate shrink resistant.
03400-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Epoxy Resin Grout: Two-component mineral-filled resin: ASTM C881.
B. Joint Sealing Compound: The joint sealing compound shall be a permanently flexible plastic material complying in every detail to Federal Specification SS S-00210 (GSA-FSS) dated July 26, 1965. "Quickseal", or approved equal.
C. Frames and Covers: Catch basins, manholes, and vaults shall be provided with fabricated aluminum or steel frames and covers as specified or shown on the drawings and shall be built up so that the cover is flush with the surrounding surface unless otherwise specified.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturing procedures shall be in general compliance with PCI MNL-116.
B. Manufacturer shall provide for those openings 10 in. or larger, round or square as shown on the drawings. Other openings shall be located and field drilled or cut by the trade requiring them after the units have been erected. Openings and/or cutting of prestressing strand shall be approved by ENGINEER and manufacturer before drilling or cutting.
C. Forms: 1. Forms for precast products shall be rigid and constructed of materials that will result
in finished products conforming to the profiles, dimensions and tolerances indicated by this Section, the Contract Documents and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
2. Construct forms to withstand vibration method selected. 3. Release agents shall be applied and used according to manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Plastic Liner: 1. Where called for on the Drawings, provide cast-in-place plastic liner system. 2. Install liner system per manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Follow all requirements of Specification Section 06640, Plastic Liner for Concrete Pipe
and Structures.
E. Concreting: 1. Batching of Concrete shall be in accordance with approved Mix Design(s). 2. Convey concrete by methods which will prevent separation, segregation or loss of
material. 3. Consolidate all concrete in the form to minimize honeycombing or entrapped air.
F. Curing: Procedures sufficient to insure specified concrete strength of all products must be employed. Stripping of a panel shall not occur until concrete strength is sufficient to prevent cracking or damage of the panel.
G. Manufacturing Tolerances: 1. Cross Sectional Dimensions:
a. Less than 24 inches: ±1/4" b. 24 to 36 inches: ±3/8" c. Over 36 inches: ±1/2"
2. Length: a. Less than 25 ft: ±1/2" b. 25 to 50 ft: ±3/4" c. Over 50 ft: ±1"
3. Variation from square or designed skew (difference in length of two diagonal measurements): Max. ±3/4"
03400-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
H. Identification: Mark each precast item to correspond to identification mark on Shop Drawings for product location, and with casting date.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Access: Clear unloading areas and access roadways to point of component placement shall be provided and maintained by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all required traffic controls, barricades, warning lights and/or signs to insure a safe installation.
B. Sitework: The CONTRACTOR shall excavate and prepare the subgrade, including 2 inches of clean sand, graded level and to the proper elevation.
C. Installer Responsibility: Prior to installation of the precast products, notify the CONTRACTOR of any discrepancies discovered which affect the work under this contract.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Precast products shall be lifted with suitable lifting devices at points provided by the Manufacturer to prevent excessive stresses or damage to the products. Brace and secure items before unhooking.
B. Sitework: 1. Openings or "knockouts" shall be located as shown on the drawings and shall be sized
sufficiently to permit passage of the largest dimension of pipe and/or coupling flange. Upon completion of installation, all voids or openings in the vault walls around pipes shall be filled with 4,000-psi concrete or mortar, using an approved epoxy for bonding concrete surfaces.
2. All joints between precast sections shall be made watertight using preformed mastic material. The sealing compound shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations to provide a watertight joint which remains impermeable throughout the design life of the structure. All joints shall be filled with dry-pack non-shrink grout. If plastic liner system is used, after the joint has been made and is cured, install plastic liner weld strip at all joints and seams.
3. Frames and covers shall be built up so that the cover is flush with the surrounding surface unless otherwise specified. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for placing the cover at the proper elevation where paving is to be installed and shall make all necessary adjustments so that the cover meets these requirements.
4. After the structure and all appurtenances are in place and approved, and after any required disinfection or testing, backfill shall be placed to the original ground line or to the limits designated on the plans.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hydrostatic Testing: 1. All Manholes, Wetwells, Junction Boxes, or other water bearing structures shall be
hydrostatically tested prior to acceptance. 2. Test Procedure:
a. Plug all inlets and outlets with temporary plugs b. Fill water bearing structure with clean, potable water
03400-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
c. Let stand for 24 hours, if desired, to allow for “soaking-in” d. Fill to rim elevation e. Let stand for a minimum of 2 hours f. Check distance from rim to water surface g. Calculate water loss. Leakage in each manhole may not exceed 0.1-gallon per
hour per foot of water depth during the test. 3. Repair all manholes which do not meet the above test requirements with a method
approved by the ENGINEER and re-test until passing.
3.4 PATCHES AND REPAIRS:
A. Patching of products, when required, shall be performed to industry standards for structural concrete. Repairs shall be sound, permanent and flush with adjacent surface.
3.5 WARRANTY:
A. All labor and materials under the Precast Manufacturers contract shall be warranted by the Precast Manufacturer for a period of one (1) year after substantial completion.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
03600-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes epoxy, non-metallic, non-shrink, and ordinary Portland cement-sand grouts.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 4. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish ordinary cement-sand grout for the following: 1. Foundation grout. 2. Construction joint grout. 3. As shown in the Drawings.
B. Furnish non-shrink, non-metallic grout for the following: 1. Equipment bases, 25 hp or less. 2. Base plates. 3. Guardrail and railings. 4. Through-bolt and form tie openings. 5. As shown in the Drawings.
C. Furnish epoxy grout for the following: 1. Equipment bases, 26 hp or more and/or sole plates with vibration, thermal
movement, etc. 2. Blockouts for gate guides. 3. Retrofit waterstop installation. 4. As shown in the Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all proprietary materials. 2. Proposed method for keeping existing concrete surfaces wet prior to placing grout. 3. Forming method for fluid grout placements. 4. Curing method for grout.
B. Laboratory Test Reports and Certificates: 1. For proprietary materials, submit copies of reports on quality control tests. 2. Submit certification that materials meet specification requirements for nonproprietary
materials.
03600-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. For ordinary cement-sand grout, copies of grout mix design and laboratory strength test reports.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver grout materials from manufacturers in unopened containers and bearing intact manufacturer's labels.
B. Storage of Materials: Store grout materials in a dry shelter and protected from moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. High-Strength Epoxy Grout. 1. Use 100% solids, prepackaged, solvent-free, moisture insensitive, high-strength
epoxy grout. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. E3-HP, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikadur 42 Grout Pak, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. c. Five Star HP Epoxy Grout by Five Star Products, Incorporated. d. Or approved equal.
B. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: 1. Prepackaged non-staining cementitious grout which shall meet the minimum
requirements of ASTM C1107 and requiring only the addition of water at the jobsite. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. NS, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b. Five Star Grout, as manufactured by Five Star Products, Incorporated. c. Sika Grout 212, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. d. Or approved equal.
C. Ordinary Cement-Sand Grout: Prepare design mixes of ordinary cement grout. 1. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II; or blended hydraulic cement, ASTM
C595, Type 1P. 2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified.
a. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials that can cause stains on exposed concrete surfaces.
b. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand, free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 1) Dune sand, bank run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
c. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows: 1) Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2) Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of slag and pit or bank run
gravel is not permitted. 3) Coarse Aggregate Size: Size to be ASTM C33, No. 7 for Class B grout. Coarse
aggregate not permitted in Class A grout. 3. Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers
and use in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless
03600-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER. Refer to Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, for additional admixture requirements.
4. Proportioning and Design of Mixes: Prepare design mixes for each class of grout. Mixes are subject to the following limitations: a. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi. b. Minimum amount of water necessary for the mixture to flow under its own weight. c. Fine Aggregate meeting ASTM C33. d. Air Content Percentage: ±1.5%. e. Minimum Cement Content in Pounds per Cubic Yard: 658. f. Slump at point of placement: 5"±1".
5. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the Project for grout required. Comply with ACI 211.1 and provide a complete report, from an independent testing laboratory, to ENGINEER, at least 30 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin grout production until ENGINEER has approved mixes.
6. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select grout proportions, prepare test specimens and conduct strength tests as specified in ACI 301, Chapter 3 - Proportioning.
7. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select grout proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301, Chapter 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which grout is to be placed with installer and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Mix, place and cure grout as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. If manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Specifications, do not proceed until ENGINEER provides clarification.
2. Manufacturers of proprietary products shall make available upon 72 hours notification the services of a qualified, full time employee to aid in assuring proper use of the product under job conditions. The cost of this service, if any, shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
3. When placing grout conform to temperature and weather limitations in Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Through-bolt and form-tie holes: Fill space with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool and hammer. Coordinate dry pack dense grout application with bonding agent in Section 03251 - Concrete Joints.
C. Columns, Beams and Equipment Bases: Prepare concrete surface by sandblasting, chipping, or by mechanical means to remove any soft material prior to setting base plates and machinery. After shimming columns, beams and equipment indicated to be grouted on the plans to proper grade, securely tighten anchor bolts. Properly form around the base plates allowing sufficient room around the edges for placing the grout. Adequate
03600-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
depth between the bottom of the base plate and the top of concrete base must be provided to assure that the void is completely filled with grout.
D. Guardrails and Railings: After posts and rails have been properly inserted into holes or sleeves, fill the annular space between posts and cast-in-place sleeves and/or below base plates with non-shrink grout. Bevel grout at juncture with post so that moisture flows away from posts.
E. Construction Joints: Class A cement grout may be used in place of mortar over the contact surface of the old concrete at the interface of horizontal construction joints as outlined in Section 03251 - Concrete Joints, and Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, of these Specifications.
F. Curing: Cure all grout in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Wet cure ordinary cement-sand grout and non-shrink non-metallic grout for a minimum of three (3) days unless directed otherwise by the ENGINEER.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
05051-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 05051
ANCHORS, INSERTS, AND DOWELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes all post-installed anchors and inserts required to anchor parts of the Work to supporting concrete or masonry construction, and plaster. This Section also includes adhesives for anchoring reinforcing dowels into existing concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products. 3. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware. 4. ASTM A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for High-Pressure
or High-Temperature Service, or both. 5. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
Tensile. 6. ASTM A320, Standard Specification for Alloys - Steel Bolting Materials for
Low-Temperature Service. 7. ASTM A484, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Stainless and Heat-
Resisting Steel Bars, Billets and Forgings. 8. ASTM A525, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide the size, type, and length of anchor shown on the drawings or, if not shown, as specified in the detailed sections of these specifications.
B. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, expansion anchor, toggle bolt, or concrete insert is not shown or specified, provide the size, length and capacity required to carry the design load times a minimum safety factor of 4.
C. For equipment anchors, if the design load is not specified by the manufacturer, provide anchors of diameter no less than the diameter of the hole minus 3/16 inch. When the design load is not specified by the manufacturer, provide structural calculations in accordance with Section 01610.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval copies of material certification, manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams and installation instructions for the devices.
05051-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Installer’s Qualifications: When installing adhesive anchors subject to sustained tension loading or when specifically noted in the Drawings, submit for approval copies of the installer’s qualifications certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Post-installed concrete anchors shall be ICC approved for seismic applications in cracked concrete and prequalified in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Nonsubmerged Use in areas of wet use, washdown areas, or areas outside heated buildings:
1. Stainless steel Type 316, unless otherwise shown. 2. Diameter, Length and Bend Dimensions: As required by equipment or machinery
manufacturer. Unless otherwise required, provide 3/4–inch minimum diameter by 12-inches long and other geometry as shown.
3. Furnish minimum two A320 nuts and two washers of same material for each bolt, unless otherwise shown.
4. Provide sleeves as required or as shown for location adjustment.
B. Submerged Use: 1. Submerged use is defined as any connection 1 foot 6 inches below the normal water
surface elevation in a water holding basin. 2. As specified for nonsubmerged use, for equipment, machinery or other connections
except as follows: a. Coating of anchor bolt threads is not required. b. Where threads are covered with fusion bonded coating, provide nut of proper size
to fit and provide connection of equal strength to embedded bolt.
C. For anchoring fabricated metalwork, structural steel, or other components where connections will be protected or dry: 1. Galvanized Steel, 36 ksi, minimum. 2. Minimum Size: ¾-inch diameter by 12-inch long, unless otherwise shown. 3. Furnish two nuts and two washers per bolt of same material as bolt, unless otherwise
shown.
2.2 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS LUBRICANT (ANTISEIZING)
A. Provide for stainless steel nuts and machined bolts, anchor bolts, concrete anchors, and all other threaded fasteners.
B. Lubricant shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc, or copper as manufactured by: 1. Loc Tite Co., Permatex. 2. Or equal
05051-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2.3 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. For vertical support of grating or floor plate, provide cast-in metal fabrications as shown.
B. Except as permitted below, or as otherwise shown, provide malleable iron inserts for hanging piping and conduit from concrete ceilings and soffits. Comply with Federal Specification WW-H-171-E (Type 18). Provide those recommended by the manufacturer for the required loading.
C. Obtain inserts in sufficient time so as not to delay concrete or masonry work.
D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide inserts of one of the following: 1. Figure 282, as manufactured by Anvil/Grinnell. 2. Sharktooth Insert, as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Incorporated. 3. Or equal.
2.4 ADHESIVE (EPOXY) ANCHORS AND DOWELS
A. Provide adhesive anchors where specifically shown and where adhesive anchors are allowed. Unless otherwise shown, adhesive anchors are allowed for anchoring: 1. Supports for pipe, conduit, and electrical boxes, devices, and panels, on floors and
walls 2. Handrails, guardrails, sunshades, stairs, 3. Fixtures and equipment on floors and walls, and 4. Single pipes and conduits <2 inch in diameter to ceilings and soffits.
B. Adhesive shall be epoxy resin (NSF 61 certified). Vinylester resin anchors are NOT allowed.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Installation to Concrete:
a. HIT-HY 200 as manufactured by Hilti, Inc. b. SET-XP as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc. c. Or approved equal meeting ACI 355.4.
2. Installation to solid-grouted Masonry: a. HIT-HY 70 as manufactured by Hilti, Inc. b. SET as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc. c. Or approved equal.
2.5 EXPANSION ANCHORS
A. Provide expansion anchors only where specifically shown and where expansion anchors are allowed. Unless otherwise shown, and except as noted below, expansion anchors are allowed for anchoring: 1. Supports for pipe, conduit, and electrical boxes, devices, and panels, to floors and
walls. 2. Handrails, guardrails, and sunshades. 3. Fixtures and equipment which have no moving parts, to floors and walls.
B. Expansion anchors are NOT allowed in any submerged or chemical containment areas.
C. Leveling nuts shall not be used with expansion anchors. If leveling nuts are required, provide adhesive anchors, unless otherwise shown.
05051-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Wedge anchors: Provide one of the following: 1. Installation to Concrete:
a. Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ by Hilti, Inc. b. Strong-Bolt 2 by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc. c. Or approved equal meeting ACI 355.2.
2. Installation to solid-grouted Masonry: a. Hilti Kwik Bolt-3 by Hilti, Inc. b. Wedge-All by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc. c. Or approved equal.
E. Drop-in anchors, only where specific shown on the drawings: Provide one of the following: 1. HDI by Hilti, Inc. 2. Drop-In by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc. 3. Or equal.
2.6 TOGGLE BOLTS
A. Provide toggle bolts only where specifically shown, to fasten single pipes and conduits <1 inch and equipment weighing less than 50 lbs (4-bolts required) to hollow walls.
B. Provide spring-wing toggle bolts, with two-piece wings, carbon steel bolts with zinc coating in accordance with Federal Specification FF-S-325.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide toggle bolts of one of the following: 1. The Rawlplug Company, Incorporated. 2. Haydon Bolts, Incorporated. 3. Or equal.
2.7 OTHERS
A. Powder actuated fasteners and other types of anchors not specified herein shall not be used, unless approved by ENGINEER.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide Belleville washers, or approved equal, at anchorage connections used to transfer anchorage loads at sheet metal equipment housings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Obtain anchor bolts in sufficient time so as not to delay concrete or masonry work.
B. Adhesives shall be stored and installed at the service temperature ranges recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Locate and accurately set the anchor bolts using templates or other devices as necessary.
D. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation of equipment and structural steel.
05051-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. Post-installed anchors are NOT acceptable substitutes for cast-in-place anchor bolts.
F. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete.
G. Unless otherwise shown, the minimum diameter of anchor bolts for structural steel is ¾ inch, and for other applications, 3/8 inch.
H. Unless otherwise shown, provide the following minimum embedment, where “d” is the nominal anchor diameter: 1. Cast-in-place anchors: 12d. 2. Adhesive anchors: 12d. 3. Expansion anchors: 8d.
I. Unless otherwise shown, provide a minimum edge distance equal to six times the bolt diameter for adhesive anchors, eight times the bolt diameter for expansion anchors and a bolt spacing equal to twelve times the bolt diameter.
J. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi and a minimum age of 21 days at the time of post-installed anchor installation. 1. Concrete temperature at the time of adhesive anchor installation shall be at least
50oF.
K. Existing reinforcing bars in the concrete structure may conflict with specific anchor locations. Unless noted on the Drawings that the bars can be cut, the contractor shall review the existing structural drawings and shall undertake to locate the position of the reinforcing bars at the locations of the concrete anchors by ferroscan, ground penetrating rebar (GPR), x-ray, chipping or other means.
L. Drilling equipment used and installation of post-installed anchors shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
M. For the adhesive and expansion anchors, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions on the drilled hole diameter and depth.
N. CONTRACTOR shall properly clean out the hole utilizing a wire brush and compressed air in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed installation instructions to remove all loose material from the hole, prior to installing adhesive or expansion anchors. Drilled and cleaned anchor holes shall be protected from contamination until the anchor is installed. A drilled anchor hole shall be re-cleaned assuming the hole was just drilled, if in the opinion of ENGINEER or Inspector that the hole has become contaminated after initial cleaning.
O. Unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer, adhesive shall be dispensed through a tube or cartridge extension, beginning at the maximum depth of the hole and withdrawn as adhesive is injected, followed by insertion and rotating the anchor to the specified depth. Where necessary, spaces around anchors at the surface shall be sealed at horizontal to vertically overhead locations to prevent loss of the adhesive during curing.
P. Anchors to be installed in the adhesive shall be clean, oil-free, and free of loose rust, paint, or other coatings.
05051-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Q. Installed anchors shall be securely fixed in-place to prevent displacement. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, anchors shall be installed perpendicular to the concrete surface.
R. Reinforcing adhesive dowel bars or all-threaded adhesive bars shall not be bent after being adhesively embedded in hardened, sound concrete.
S. In lieu of the use of stacked standard washers, if threads of an anchor bolt protrude beyond the attachment, the installers shall use a fabricated filler plate of equal or greater size of the washer. Hole on the filler plate shall be 1/16" (or 2 to 3 mm) greater than the bolt size. Coat as appropriate in accordance with the material and installation location requirements.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Anchors shall be installed by qualified personnel in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. Installation of adhesive anchors shall be performed by personnel trained to install adhesive anchors.
B. Installation of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall be performed by personnel certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program.
C. CONTRACTOR shall employ a special inspector to perform field inspection services in accordance with Chapter 17 of the IBC for all post-installed anchors. 1. The special inspector must be periodically on the jobsite during post-installed anchor
installation. 2. Adhesive anchors installed to resist sustained tension loads shall be continuously
inspected during installation by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by the building official.
D. CONTRACTOR shall employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality testing of installed adhesive anchors. A minimum of 10% of randomly selected adhesive anchors and reinforcing dowel bars greater than 3/8 inch diameter are to be tension tested to the least of 50 percent of expected adhesive ultimate bond strength or 80 percent of steel yield strength of the anchor rod. Maintain the proof load at the required load level for a minimum of 10 seconds. 1. Tension testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E488. 2. The independent testing laboratory shall submit an anchorage testing plan for
approval to ensure the testing requirements are fulfilled. 3. If failure of more than 5 percent of the tested anchors or reinforcing dowel bars
occurs, CONTRACTOR will be required to pay for the costs involved in testing the remaining 90%. a. Concrete cracking in the vicinity of the anchor after loading shall be considered a
failure.
E. CONTRACTOR shall correct improper workmanship, remove and replace, or correct as instructed by the ENGINEER, all anchors or bars found unacceptable or deficient, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
F. The independent testing and inspection agency shall complete a report on each area. The report should summarize the observations made by the inspector and be submitted to ENGINEER.
05051-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
G. Provide access for the testing agency to places where Work is being produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
05500-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for the fabrication and erection of the miscellaneous metal Work. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Clearly show all field connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimensions, diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions for manufactured products.
C. Samples: Submit representative samples of manufactured products.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the Work.
B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units to the extent necessary for shipping limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plate, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.
B. Stainless Steel: 1. Plates and Sheets: ASTM A240, Type 304L or 316 2. Fasteners and fittings: ASTM A320, Type 304L or 316
C. Galvanizing: 1. Zinc coated hardware: ASTM A153. 2. Fabrications: ASTM A123.
D. Surface preparation and Finish: 1. Steel: Where not indicated to be galvanized, steel shall be primed in the shop.
Comply with Section 09900, Painting.
2.2 FABRICATIONS
A. Miscellaneous Framings and Supports: 1. Fabricate units to the sizes, shapes, and profiles shown, or if not shown, of the
required dimensions to receive the adjacent gratings, plates, tanks, doors, or other work to be retained by the framing.
05500-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural shapes, plates, and bars of compatible material, all-welded construction, using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates, and a minimum number of joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and other items to be anchored to the work.
3. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or integrating into masonry. Furnish inserts for casting in, if units must be installed after concrete or grout is placed. Anchor spacing shall b 24" on-center, unless otherwise shown.
4. Galvanize where shown.
B. Anchors, Fasteners, and Fittings: Provide zinc-coated carbon steel for steel fabrications, and stainless steel for aluminum and stainless steel fabrications.
C. Ladders: 1. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown on the Drawings, with dimensions, spacings,
details and anchorages as shown on the Drawings, and specified. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified. a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide 3/8 inch by 2 1/2 inch
continuous extruded flat bar side rails, spaced 12-inches apart, minimum. b. Provide extruded square rungs, spaced 12-inches on centers, maximum, with non
slip surface on the top of each rung. Adhesive strips for non-slip surfaces will not be allowed.
2. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more
than five feet on centers. Use welded or bolted brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder clear of the wall surface with a minimum of 7-inches clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer, extend rails 42-inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure, unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, level, plumb, true, and square, measured from established lines and levels. Brace or anchor temporarily in formwork where units are to b built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
B. Anchor securely as shown or as required for the intended use, using concealed anchors wherever possible.
C. Fit exposed edges accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of galvanized or anodized units and are intended for bolted or screwed connections.
D. Field Welding: Where field welding is necessary, grind joints smooth and touch-up the shop paint. Comply with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 for the procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used in correcting welding.
E. Field Coat all miscellaneous metals per Specification Section 09900, System 300.
05500-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
+ + END OF SECTION + +
07900-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation and installation instructions. Indicate where each product is proposed to be used. Provide sealant certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 where sealant is in direct contact with potable water.
B. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available.
C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Applicator Qualification: Documentation showing minimum of 5 years' experience
installing sealants in projects of similar scope. 2. Certificates of Compliance: Proposed materials meet Specification requirements.
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 and 80 degrees F (4 and 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Sealant Characteristics: 1. Uniform, homogeneous. 2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed. 3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding. 4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661 method. 5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible.
B. Sealant Color: To match adjacent surfaces or as selected by ENGINEER.
C. One-Part Polyurethane, Immersible: 1. Polyurethane base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS or P, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Designed to be used where the maximum depth of sealant will not exceed 1/2 inch. 4. Provide sealant certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 where sealant is in direct contact
with potable water. 5. Manufacturers and Products for Nonsag:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-1a. b. Tremco: Vulkem 116. c. Or approved equal.
6. Manufacturers and Products for Self-Leveling: a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-1C SL.
07900-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Tremco: Vulkem 45 SSL. c. Or approved equal.
D. Two-Part Polyurethane, Immersible: 1. Polyurethane elastomeric, two-part, self leveling (or gun grade), non-staining, which
cures at ambient temperature and conforms to ASTM C920. 2. Designed to be used where the maximum depth of sealant will exceed 1/2 inch or
where chemical curing is required. 3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-2C. b. Tremco: Dymeric 240FC. c. Or approved equal.
E. Waterproof Expandable Sealant 1. One-component, polyurethane foam that expands and cures slowly to a semi-rigid,
closed cell foam upon reaction with moisture, such as ambient humidity 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Sika Chemical Corp.; Boom b. Or approved equal
2.2 BACKUP MATERIAL
A. Nongassing, extruded, closed-cell round polyethylene foam rod, compatible with sealant used, and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant material manufacturer. Provide for joints greater than 1/2-inch deep. Backup material should be sized to maintain 2:1 width to depth ratio to the greatest extent possible.
C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Dow Corning; Ethafoam SB. 2. Sonneborn; Sonofoam. 3. Or approved equal.
2.3 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Provide bond breaker tape in the bottom of joints to prevent 3-sided joint sealant adhesion when backup material is not used.
B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Use of more than one material for the same joint is not allowed unless approved by the sealant manufacturer.
07900-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints of 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self-leveling (Grade P) joint sealant.
D. Steeper Sloped Joints, Vertical Joints, and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag (Grade NS) joint sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions, are acceptable to receive sealant.
B. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, and other foreign materials. 1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge. 2. Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
E. Carefully follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing multi-component products.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform intended function. 1. Install backup material as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2. Where possible, provide full length sections without splices; minimize number of
splices. 3. Tape sealant may be used as joint filler if approved by sealant manufacturer.
B. Use bond breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer and in the bottom of joints to prevent 3-sided joint sealant adhesion.
C. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Joint Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturer's recommendation and instructions, filling joint completely from back to top, without voids.
E. Joints: Tool slightly concave after sealant is installed. 1. When tooling white or light color sealant, use a water wet tool. 2. Finish joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50 percent of expanded thickness and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
07900-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant of sealing application.
B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
09900-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide and install coatings on all exposed surfaces as indicated herein, in other Specification Sections, and on the Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Experience: Both Coatings Manufacturer and Coatings Installer shall have a minimum 5 years’ experience in production and application, respectively, of specified products. Coatings Installer shall be approved and endorsed, in writing, by Coatings Manufacturer.
B. Regulations: Meet federal, state, and local requirements which apply to the work, including, but not limited to those regulations limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds.
C. Coatings Manufacturer Recommendations: Coatings Installer shall follow all recommendations of the Coatings Manufacturer regarding storage, handling, surface preparation, application of coatings, recoat times, environmental conditions during storage, preparation and application of coatings, and all other Coatings Manufacturer recommendations.
D. Warranty: 1. Coatings Installer shall provide a 1-year complete replacement warranty for all
coatings. Manufacturer shall provide 4-year warranty for long-term performance of coatings after the 1-year installer warranty for a total warranty period of 5 years.
2. Warranty period commences after date of substantial completion.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Coatings Manufacturer shall submit for approval the following: 1. Copies of Manufacturer's technical information and application instructions for each
material proposed for use. Specify exactly which product is being proposed for each coating type (as specified below). This may be accomplished through a reference table along with information on the various products, or by a separate, tabbed section with information on products being submitted for each system in a separate tab of a binder. Submittal of general Manufacturer’s literature without detailing which product is proposed for each paint system will be unacceptable.
2. Copies of Manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system. 3. Letter from the Coatings Manufacturer approving and endorsing Coatings Installer. 4. Furnish copies of the final, approved submittal to the Coatings Installer so that it is
clear which product is to be used for which each system.
B. Reference Samples: 1. Provide reference samples of paint colors and textures as required by the ENGINEER.
Reference samples will show the color and texture of the final paint to be applied and shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to painting. Reference samples should be
09900-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
applied to similar substrates to the final surfaces to be painted. If ENGINEER chooses to forego reference samples, CONTRACTOR must receive the allowance to forego reference samples before painting begins or all painted surfaces will be re-painted at the ENGINEER’s discretion and at no additional cost to the OWNER.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Protect all pre-coated items from coating damage during shipping.
B. Store products in accordance with Manufacturer’s directions.
C. Store products in a neat, orderly fashion. Protect products from damage. Protect storage area from damage from stored products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER:
A. Provide coating types as listed in the following table. The systems referenced in the table are those provided by Tnemec. Sherwin-Williams, or Equal are also acceptable manufacturers. If manufacturers other than Tnemec are desired, the CONTRACTOR shall submit equivalent paint systems.
COATING TYPE DESCRIPTION TNEMEC SERIES Clear Polyamine Epoxy
Clear Polyamine Epoxy, high solids, moisture resistant, designed as a one-coat wood sealer.
Series 201, Epoxoprime
Acrylic Filler Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic designed for application on porous surfaces such as rough-faced concrete masonry units
Series 130, Envirofill
Acrylic Latex Single component, finish as required N/A Latex Primer/ Sealer
Waterborne vinyl acrylic primer/sealer for interior gypsum wallboard/plaster. Capable of providing uniform seal and suitable for use with specified finish coats.
N/A
Polyamine Epoxy Waterborne Polyamine Epoxy, penetrating, flexible and low-odor primer designed for sealing porous substrates.
Series 151, Elasto-Grip FC
Acrylate Modified Waterborne Acrylate designed for application on porous surfaces such as rough-faced concrete masonry units or wood surfaces. Flexible and breathable, moisture and UV resistant. Matte Finish
Series 156, Enviro-crete
Polyamidoamine Epoxy
Polyamidoamine Epoxy designed for use on steel or other ferrous metals not in contact with potable water.
Series N69, Hi-Build Epoxoline II
Polyamidoamine Epoxy designed for use on steel or other ferrous metals in contact with potable water.
Series 140, Pota-Pox Plus
Polyurethane Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane designed for exterior weathering, abrasion and corrosion resistance
Series 73, Endura-Shield
Silicone Sealant Silane/Siloxane penetrating water repellent blend designed for application on above-grade concrete,
Series 636, Dur A Pell 20
09900-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
stucco, block, masonry and stone surfaces
2.2 COLOR
A. Color Pigments: Pure, nonfading, lead-free applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated.
B. Provide colors as described in the drawings or specifications, or as selected by ENGINEER from standard color palette. For piping system colors, reference pipe schedule.
TABLE OF STANDARD COLORS Colors Designation Black Safety Black; IN06 Blue Safety Blue; SC06
Brown "Chipmunk"; YB23 Charcoal "Graphite"; GR32
Gray "Gray-ANSI 61"; IN05 Green Safety Green; SC07
Light Gray "Battleship Gray"; GR13 Light Green "Misty Jade"; GB38
Orange Safety Orange; SC03 Red Safety Red; SC09
White Safety White; WH0 Yellow Safety Yellow; SC01
*Color designations are provided as Tnemec Company, Incorporated paint color numbers and are provided as a standard of quality; equivalent colors matching these colors will be acceptable to ENGINEER. Provide ENGINEER with direct color comparisons of color numbers available from manufacturer submitted at time of Shop Drawing submission.
C. Where existing colors are to be matched or satisfactory color is not available from standard color palette, provide custom-mixed colors.
D. Provide samples of each color on the substrate to be coated for approval by the ENGINEER prior to beginning coating application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Coatings Installer shall prepare all surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with Coatings Manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Coatings Manufacturer representative shall observe Coatings Installer’s methods of preparing surfaces and approve of the work prior to Coatings Installer beginning coating installation. If, after a period of time, Coatings Manufacturer is satisfied with Coatings Installers methods, Coatings Manufacturer can allow Coatings Installer to proceed without inspection following surface preparation. Coatings Manufacturer and installer will still both be held equally accountable for any coatings failure.
C. Wood surface preparation
09900-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Coatings Installer shall clean and prepare all wood surfaces in accordance with the Coating Manufacturer’s recommendations. Patching may be required where approved by the Engineer. All joints in wood members including trim, siding, soffits, and joints between wood and dissimilar materials shall be filled with joint sealant prior to coating.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect all adjacent surfaces from overspray, dripping or other transfer of coatings not intended for those surfaces. Use masking, tape, drop cloths, plastic and other protective materials as appropriate. 1. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates,
aluminum surfaces, stainless steel surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted.
2. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Mask openings in motors, fan housings, etc. to prevent coatings from falling inside.
3. Correct all damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Completely remove all masking, tape, drop cloths, plastic and other protective materials within 48 hours of completion of application of finish coat. Take special care to remove masking and plastic which cover tank vent openings, HVAC registers, vents, motor vents, and other areas where airflow is critical to proper operation.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Paint all exposed surfaces not specifically excluded in 3.3.C, below. Provide and install Coatings in accordance with the following Table, unless otherwise specified in other Sections:
COATING SYSTEM
NO.*
SURFACE TO BE COATED
PRIMER COATING
NO OF PRIMER COATS
PRIME COAT THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
FINISH COATING
NO OF FINISH COATS
FINISH COAT THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
300 Exposed Ferrous Pipe Systems and Exposed Steel Items
Polyamidoamine Epoxy
2 4-6 MDFT Polyurethane 2 2-3 MDFT
301 Exposed, Non-metallic Pipe Systems
Polyamidoamine Epoxy
1 350 SF/Gal Application Rate
Polyurethane 2 350 SF/Gal Application Rate
Pumps Touch up factory applied coatings, per Pump Specifications
* Where in contact with potable water, coating shall be NSF-61 certified.
B. Items Delivered with Factory Applied Primer: 1. For items delivered with a factory applied primer and requiring painting under this
Section, the factory applied primer may be used in lieu of field applied primer only under the following conditions: a. The ENGINEER approves the use of the factory applied primer in lieu of field
applied primer.
09900-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. The factory applied primer is certified by the Coatings Manufacturer as compatible with the field applied finish coat.
c. The Coatings Manufacturer’s recommended recoat time for the factory applied primer has not been exceeded.
2. If all of the above conditions are not met, the Coatings Installer shall re-prepare all surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with Coatings Manufacturer’s recommendations and primer applied, in accordance with this Section.
C. Table Definitions: 1. SF/Gal: Square foot of coverage per gallon of coating used. 2. MDFT: mil dry film thickness 3. mil: 1/1000 of an inch paint thickness 4. Ferrous Pipe: Includes Ductile Iron, Cast Iron, Steel, and Galvanized Steel piping 5. Steel Items: Includes steel and galvanized steel items such as structural steel, doors,
window frames, overhead coiling doors, bollard posts, steel gates, steel fences, and all other steel and galvanized steel items.
6. Non-Metallic Pipe: Polyvinyl Chloride, Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic, High Density Polyethylene
7. Exposed: Located above grade, exposed to the atmosphere not submerged. Includes surfaces inside and outside of buildings.
8. Submerged: In an area which normally is under water or other liquid or is intermittently under water or other liquid.
9. Buried: Located below grade, surrounded by backfill.
D. Surfaces Not Requiring Painting: 1. Unless otherwise stated or shown below or in other sections, the following areas or
items will not require painting or coating: a. Concrete surfaces. b. Reinforcing steel. c. Copper, bronze, brass, Monel, aluminum, chromium plate, and stainless steel
surfaces, except where: 1) Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals. 2) Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or
aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry. 3) Color coding of equipment and piping is required.
d. Pipe unions or portions of piping systems where painting would make disassembly difficult or impossible.
e. Prefinished electrical, mechanical and architectural items such as motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, HVAC equipment enclosures, ductwork, acoustical tile, cabinets, louvers, and wall panels.
f. Electrical conduits. g. Cathodic protection anodes. h. Insulated piping and insulated piping with jacket will require prime coat only. i. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) surfaces with an integral ultra-violet resistant
colored gel coat do not require painting, provided the color is as selected. j. Glass, plexiglass or other transparent or translucent material intended to allow
passage of light. k. Civil/site materials such as asphalt, gravel, rock, chain-link fence, and plantings.
09900-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.4 RECOAT TIMES:
A. Coatings Installer shall observe all requirements of the Coatings Manufacturer regarding recoat times.
3.5 PAINT LOG
A. Coatings Installer shall keep a paint log 1. Specific details of the contents and format paint log shall be determined by the
Coatings Installer and approved by the ENGINEER. 2. At a minimum, paint log shall record, on a daily basis for any day when coating work
is performed: a. Weather conditions, including 3-day forecast b. Which surfaces were prepared for coating c. Approval of surface preparation by the Coatings Manufacturer representative d. Which surfaces or systems were coated that day e. Who the installer was (specific names of persons on crew) f. Which coating type was used g. Which coat was installed h. What the application rate or MDFT was (as approved by ENGINEER)
3. Paint log shall be kept on-site. Paint log shall be signed on a daily basis, for any day when coating work is performed, by the supervisor of the coatings installer field crew and by the ENGINEER.
4. Any painted surface which was not recorded in the paint log shall be stripped, re-prepared, and recoated at the ENGINEER’s discretion.
3.6 WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. Warranty inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of the Work. All defective Work shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with this Specification and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and at the CONTRACTOR'S expense.
B. Any location where paint has peeled, bubbled, or cracked and any location where rusting is evident shall be considered to be a failure of the system. The CONTRACTOR shall make repair at all points where failures are observed by removing the deteriorated paint, cleaning the surface, and recoating or repainting with the same system. If the area of failure exceeds 25 percent of the total coated or painted surface, the entire coating or paint system may be required to be removed and repainted in accordance with this specification as determined by the ENGINEER.
C. All costs for CONTRACTOR'S inspection, Manufacturer's inspection and all costs for repair shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
10400-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Furnish and install signs, placards, and labels for safety equipment, hazards, and equipment and piping identification.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide manufacturer's literature showing available letter sizes and styles, standard
and custom colors, and standard mounting details. 2. Provide drawings showing layouts, actual letter sizes and styles, colors, and project-
specific mounting details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.1 MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY SIGNAGE
A. Safety signs shall comply with the following standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Standards for General
Industry, Subparts 1910.200 Hazard Communication (July, 1986). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 704 - Label System. 3. International Fire Code, Latest Edition.
B. Safety signs shall be of height and width required by layout and shall be formed from semi-rigid butyrate, polyethylene or fiberglass. Lettering shall be 3-inches high and 1/2-inch in stroke.
C. Provide the following safety signs: DRAWING REFERENCE
NUMBER TEXT BACKGROUND
COLOR LETTERING
COLOR M-100 CAUTION:
EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY
Yellow Black
M-100 DANGER: HIGH VOLTAGE
Yellow Black
2.2 IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Pipe Labels and Flow Direction Arrows: 1. Label, Lettering Color, Size and Placement: In accordance with ANSI A13.1, and as
listed below. 2. Label Colors:
10400-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Fluid Service Background Color Letter Color Potable Water Safety green White
3. Label Size:
Outside Diameter of
Pipe Covering, inchesLength of Color
Field, inches Size of Letters,
inches 3/4 to 1-1/4 8 ½ 1-1/2 to 2 8 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 12 1-1/4
8 to 10 24 2-1/2 Over 10 32 3-1/2
4. Label Placement:
a. Labels shall be positioned on the pipes so they can be easily read. Proper label placement is on the lower side of the pipe if the employee has to look up to the pipe, on the upper side of the pipe if the employee has to look down towards the pipe, or directly facing the employee if on the same level as the pipe. Labels should be located near valves, branches, where a change in direction occurs, on entry/re-entry points through walls or floors, and on straight segments with spacing between labels that allows for easy identification.
5. Material: Manufacture from or encase in outdoor grade plastic or vinyl that will resist damage or fading from washdown, sunlight, mildly corrosive atmosphere, dirt, grease, and abrasion.
6. Message: See Piping Schedule. 7. Labels:
a. Snap-Around Type: Size for finished outside diameter of pipe and insulation. b. For 6 Inches and Over Diameter Pipe: May furnish strap-on type fastened without
use of tools with plastic or stainless steel straps. c. Firmly grip pipe so labels remain fixed in vertical pipe runs.
8. Manufacturers and Products: a. T & B/Westline, Rariton, NJ, Model WSS Snap-Around. b. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven, CT, Setmark Series. c. Or equal.
B. Equipment Labels: 1. Applies to equipment with assigned tag numbers wherever specified. 2. Lettering: Black bold face, 3/4-inch minimum high. 3. Background: OSHA safety yellow. 4. Materials: Either of the following:
a. Aluminum or stainless steel base with a baked-on finish that is suitable for use on wet, oily, exposed, abrasive, and corrosive areas.
b. Fiberglass with fiberglass-encased lettering. 5. Furnish 1-inch margin on each end of label for mounting. On fiberglass labels furnish
grommets at each end for mounting. 6. Size:
a. As appropriate for lettering provided. b. Provide same-size labels for equipment series which are adjacent.
7. Message: Equipment names and tag numbers as used in Sections where equipment is specified and/or on Drawings.
8. Manufacturers and Products: a. T & B/Westline Co., Rariton, NJ; Type KQ.
10400-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven, CT; Style EB. c. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SIGNS
A. Install all other signs at locations as shown on the drawings. Signs should be installed approximately 5’-6” off of finished floor, attached to doors where appropriate. Where two signs are indicated in the same location, signs should be mounted side-by-side, where possible.
B. Install all signs plumb and level. They shall be attached with four stainless steel screws or anchor bolts as required for substrate. Provide theft/tamper-resistant fasteners on all signs.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Provide pipe identification label with flow arrows on all exposed piping systems as follows: 1. At all connections to equipment, valves, tees or wall penetrations. 2. At intervals along piping not greater than 18 feet on center with at least one label
applied to each exposed horizontal and vertical run of pipe.
B. Install pipe identification labels after all painting has been completed.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Install equipment identification labels on all equipment which has been given an equipment number in the Drawings or Specifications. Provide identification label which includes equipment name and tag number.
B. Where no damage will be caused to equipment, mount equipment identification label directly to equipment. Otherwise, mount equipment identification labels to concrete equipment base or wall space. Install equipment identification label such that it is clear which piece of equipment is being labeled.
C. Anchor to equipment or base for easy removal and replacement with ordinary hand tools.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
11200-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 11200
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide all materials, equipment, and accessories necessary to furnish and install multi-stage vertical turbine pumps, complete and operational with drivers, suction barrels, anchor bolting systems, and variable frequency drives where specified.
B. The following equipment numbers have been assigned to the equipment that shall be provided. See attached pump and motor data sheets for detailed descriptions: 1. Booster Pump Station
a. PMP-101
C. Booster pump should able operate at various operating conditions (head, flow and VFD speed). These conditions vary based on the operational conditions of the distribution system. Pump should be designed to operate at these condition listed in the data sheet for various flow, head and VFD speed.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with requirements and recommendations of the following references, except as otherwise specified: 1. Hydraulic Institute (HI) 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 3. National Electric Code (NEC) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 6. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) 7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 8. ASTM International (ASTM) 9. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 10. American Petroleum Institute (API)
B. Quality Certification: Manufacturer supplying equipment furnished under this section shall hold current ISO 9001 certification.
C. Unit Responsibility: All equipment specified herein shall be coordinated and provided by the pump manufacturer. Manufacturer assumes full responsibility for coordination of all components.
D. Factory Tests: The selected manufacturer shall provide the following factory tests for approval upon acceptance of shop drawings: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard functional test on all equipment. 2. Performance Test:
a. Conduct on each pump in conformance with the test standards and procedures specified in the Hydraulic Institute Standards and ANSI/AWWA E101.
b. Conduct the test using complete pump bowl assembly at manufacturer’s minimum submergence, from shut-off head to maximum capacity. Record resulting curve
11200-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
showing head, flow, brake horsepower, speed, pump efficiency, and net positive suction head required (NPSHr). Plot results for a minimum of seven (7) evenly spaced measurements, including shut-off head, primary design point, best efficiency point, and maximum capacity.
c. Pump performance results compared to rated speed and capacity at the primary design point shall be within tolerances specified by Hydraulic Institute Standards.
d. Pumps shall not be shipped prior to ENGINEER’s approval of test results. 3. Hydrostatic Test: test discharge heads and bowl assemblies at either twice the total
dynamic head or one and a half times the shutoff head, whichever is greater. 4. Motor Test: Provide short commercial motor test per IEEE 115.
E. Warranty: 1. Provide a 2-yr warranty on all equipment from date of start-up. Warranty shall cover
defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any component should fail during the warranty period, it shall be corrected and the unit restored to service at no expense to the OWNER.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following items to the ENGINEER for approval: 1. Shop drawings:
a. Detailed drawings showing component and assembly dimensions, location of mechanical and electrical connections, weights of all equipment, installation details, and accessory details.
b. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. c. Drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts.
2. Product data: a. Descriptive literature, specifications, and engineering data. b. Materials of construction for all components and accessories. c. Impeller type and diameter, including rated diameter and minimum and maximum
diameter available for the pump model. d. Pump weight, motor weight, and complete assembly weight. e. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA. f. Where specified, complete variable frequency drive information. g. Factory finish system description. h. Critical speeds of the pumps supplied. i. Motor data:
1) Test results 2) Motor manufacturer 3) Type 4) Enclosure 5) Service Factor 6) Phase 7) Voltage 8) Rated Horsepower 9) Speed 10) Full load and locked rotor amperage 11) Temperature rating 12) Estimated bearing life under design conditions. 13) Minimum efficiency at ¼, ¾, and full load. 14) Descriptive literature including description of motor insulation.
3. Performance data: a. Pump rated speed.
11200-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Rated and maximum pump horsepower, and driver horsepower. c. Casing working pressure. d. Minimum submergence. e. Maximum down and up thrust. f. Efficiency and NPSHr at each specified operating condition.
4. Submit Pump Performance Curves: a. Provide pump curves showing head, brake horsepower, pump efficiency, and
NPSHr and capacity, for the entire operating range of the pump. b. Correct curves for pump losses and shaft friction horsepower losses. Include pump
losses, column and discharge head losses. c. All curves shall clearly display the specified operating conditions and the
manufacturers Allowable Operating Region (AOR) and Preferred Operating Region (POR) as defined under ANSI/HI 9.6.3.
d. Where variable speed drives are specified, curves shall have at least five (5) speeds plotted between maximum and minimum speed.
e. Speed shall be clearly shown on all curves. 5. Pump weight, forces and moments for pump operating at various speed. 6. Base plate and anchor bolt sizing. 7. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 8. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: The selected manufacturer shall provide six
sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the equipment provided. The manuals shall contain the following information at minimum: a. Equipment description. b. Recommended and limiting operational range. c. Installation instructions including assembly, alignment, and adjustment
procedures. d. Operation instructions including start-up and shutdown procedures, and
troubleshooting guide. e. Lubrication and regular maintenance instructions. f. Shop drawings. g. Parts list with catalog numbers. h. Performance curves.
B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. A list of any and all instances where the equipment proposed deviates from these
specifications. 2. Names and addresses of the factory authorized service organization nearest to project
site. 3. Guarantee pump efficiency and NPSHr at the specified operating points. 4. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide certified copies of factory
test reports for functional, performance and hydrostatic tests as specified. 5. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide printed installation
instructions.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All equipment and accessories shall be properly protected during shipment such that no damage or deterioration shall occur between shipment and installation. 1. Finished surfaces shall be protected by wooden blanks. 2. Finished ferrous metal surfaces not painted shall be protected from corrosion. 3. Each box and package shall be clearly marked with the contents and total weight.
11200-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment until permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER.
C. Manufacturer shall provide any special storage and handling instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide pumps with performance curves with constantly increasing head from maximum capacity to shut-off head.
B. Pumps shall rotate counter-clockwise when viewed from above.
C. Balancing: Pump assemblies shall be dynamically and statically balanced. Vibration at any point of pumps operation shall not exceed the upper limits of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
2.2 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER:
A. Simflo Pumps, SG14C (15 stages)
B. Flowserve
C. National Pump
D. No Equal
2.3 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE
A. See attached data sheets for service conditions and performance requirements.
B. Pumps shall have capacity no less than 98% and no greater than 103% of the specified capacity at each of the total dynamic head operating conditions shown.
C. All wetted components shall be rated for a 350 psi working pressure.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Coatings: 1. Exterior of discharge head and motor shall be painted Sherwin Williams SW MV18967
color. Prepare surfaces to be painted per coating manufacturer’s requirements. a. Primer: 2 coats polyamidolamine epoxy, 4-6 mil thickness
1) Series N69, Hi-Build Epoxoline II 2) Or Equal
b. Polyurethane: 1 coat Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane designed for exterior weathering, abrasion and corrosion resistance, 2-3 mil thickness 1) Series 73, Endura-Shield 2) Or Equal
2. All wetted ferrous metal surfaces, including interior and exterior of suction barrel, exterior of bowl assembly, interior and exterior of column, and interior of discharge head shall be coated with an ANSI/NSF STD 61 approved bonded epoxy, minimum
11200-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
thickness 8-10 mils. Prepare surfaces to be painted per coating manufacturer’s requirements. a. Coatings:
1) Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus Series N140 2) Or Equal
B. Fasteners: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners, bolts, nuts and washers conforming to ASTM A276 where exposed to liquid and where fasteners contact tapped holes.
C. Suction Flange: 1. Material: Fabricated steel conforming to ASTM A36 & A53. 2. Location: below grade on suction barrel. 3. Flange rating shall be ANSI 150# minimum.
D. Suction Barrel: 1. Fabricated steel conforming to ASTM A36 & A53. 2. Barrel shall have 0.38-inch minimum wall thickness. 3. Suitable for encapsulation in concrete with mortar conforming to AWWA C205. 4. Flanged mount for discharge head assembly designed to withstand 150% of
maximum operating thrust loads. 5. Manufacturer shall be responsible for verification of barrel dimensions to provide
acceptable hydraulic conditions at column inlet and minimal vibration per ANSI/HI 2.3.
6. Barrel shall include internal guide vanes to prevent fluid rotation (anti-vortex). 7. At minimum, suction barrel shall be sized to accept one inch larger diameter bowls
and one additional stage.
E. Suction Bell: 1. Material: ASTM A48 Class 30. 2. Internal vanes shall be provided.
F. Column: 1. Material: Fabricated steel conforming to ASTM A36. 2. Flanged connections shall be provided at column section, bowl, and discharge head
connections. 3. Provide O-ring seals at all flange connections. 4. Column section length shall be five (5) ft maximum. 5. Align and support lineshaft bearings. 6. Column diameter:
a. Outside diameter shall match standard pipe outside diameters as specified in ANSI B36.10
b. Columns 6-inch in diameter and less shall be at least Schedule 40 c. Columns 8-inch to 16-inch shall be at least Schedule 30
7. The column pipe shall be sized such that the friction loss will not exceed 5 feet per 100 feet, based on the rated capacity of the pump.
G. Bowl Assembly: 1. Bowls shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30, with a minimum tensile
strength of 30,000 psi. 2. Interior of bowls shall be lined with porcelain enamel or abrasion resistant epoxy. 3. Where specified, each bowl shall have thrust-balanced replaceable wear rings with
side seal to prevent slippage.
11200-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Material shall be ASTM B505 aluminum bronze, composite, or stainless steel conforming to the requirements of API 610.
4. Bolted flange connections shall be provided between bowls with O-ring seals. 5. Bowl bearings shall be bronze conforming to ASTM B505, C93200 6. Bowls shall be able to withstand the greater of twice the total head or one and a half
times the shutoff head.
H. Impellers: 1. Material: ASTM B584 C83800 bronze alloy. 2. Enclosed or semi-open design. 3. Securely fasten impellers to impeller shaft with Type 416 stainless steel tapered lock
collets. 4. Impellers shall be vertically adjustable using an adjustable spacer coupling accessible
through the discharge head openings.
I. Shaft 1. Material: 416 stainless steel conforming to ASTM 582 2. Shaft sizing shall conform to ANSI/AWWA E101-88, and shall be of sufficient size to
prevent excessive elongation and transmit required torque without distortion in both forward and reverse direction.
3. Maximum combined shear stress shall not exceed 30% of the elastic limit in tension or be more than 18% of the ultimate tensile strength of the shaft material.
4. Shaft shall have a first critical speed not less than 20% above maximum operating speed.
5. A two-piece headshaft and solid intermediate line shaft shall be provided. 6. Maximum section length shall be ten (10) feet. 7. Minimum of two line shaft bearings shall be provided. 8. Maximum spacing of bearing intervals shall be 5 feet. 9. Line shaft couplings shall be ASTM 582 416 stainless steel, left-hand threaded type
with perfect butt-fit. Couplings shall be designed with safety factor equal to 1.5 times the shaft safety factor.
10. Shaft bearings shall be neoprene or bronze, lubricated by the pumped liquid.
J. Shaft Seal: 1. Cartridge style mechanical seal with adjustable spacer coupling shall be provided in
discharge head at terminus of lineshaft. 2. Material:
a. Metal parts: 316 stainless steel. b. Seal faces shall be tungsten carbide or sintered silicon carbide. c. Elastomer bellows secondary seal.
3. Manufacturer: a. Environamics b. Flowserve ISC Series c. Crane d. Or Equal
K. Discharge Head Assembly: 1. Location: above grade 2. Assembly shall be of sufficient design to support the entire weight of pump assembly
and NEMA rated driver and transmit all loads to the foundation with minimum vibration.
3. Material: Fabricated steel conforming to ASTM A36 & A53 or cast iron conforming to ASTM A48 C30.
11200-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
4. Discharge head natural frequency shall be elevated above maximum operating speed. 5. Discharge flange rating shall conform to AWWA C207 for fabricated steel, or ANSI
B16.1 Class D 150# minimum for cast iron. 6. Openings shall be screened to prevent access to rotating equipment.
L. Mounting Plates: 1. Manufacturer shall provide all supporting sole plates and fabricated steel base plates
necessary to properly mount the equipment. 2. If required, CONTRACTOR to revised pad sizing as required to meet manufacturer sole
plate and base plate installation. Provide information to the ENGINEER for review and approval.
M. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with the following information at minimum: 1. Equipment number. 2. Manufacturer’s model and serial number. 3. Rated capacity and discharge head. 4. Speed.
N. Motors 1. Motors shall be solid shaft, squirrel-cage induction motors meeting the requirements
of NEMA MG 1. 2. Motor shall be de-rated for site elevation. 3. Motor shall be rated to operate at 50oF. Motor/pump head is housed within pump
enclosure. 4. Motor manufacturer shall be ISO9000 certified. 5. Motor shall be inverter duty, with class H insulation. 6. Motors shall be adequately sized to prevent overload above nameplate horsepower at
maximum pump brake horsepower. 7. Motors shall have the following guaranteed minimum efficiencies at full load as
determined by IEEE 112-B: a. 100 hp and above: 92%
8. Motors shall have minimum power factor of 87%. 9. Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled enclosures shall be provided. 10. Provide thrust bearings with a minimum L-10 life of 30,000 hours, as defined by
AGMA, at the worst operating condition. a. Minimum L-10 bearing life at normal operating conditions shall be 60,000 hours.
11. Where specified motors shall be provided with normally closed thermostat switches. a. Switch shall shutdown the motor upon exceedance of the motor’s maximum
temperature rating. 12. Where bearing thermostat switches are specified, motor and bearing thermostat
contacts shall be wired in series and leads shall be wired to the motor terminal box. 13. Where specified motors shall be provided with 120V single phase space heaters wired
to a terminal box. 14. Where specified motors shall have a vibration switch with automatic alarm and
shutdown limits. a. Provide adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance trips.
15. Provide oversized terminal box with terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire.
16. Oil lubricated motor bearings shall be provided. Provide replaceable site glass for oil bath. Bearings shall be lubricated with Mobil SHC 629 Synthetic Gear and Bearing Oil, no equal.
17. Provide stainless steel nameplate with the following information, at minimum:
11200-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Manufacturer’s name, make, and serial number b. Type c. Voltage d. Frame e. Insulation f. Class g. HP h. Full load amps i. RPM
O. Spare Parts: Provide the following spare parts for each pump: 1. One complete mechanical seal. 2. One set of any special tools required to dismantle the pump.
P. Acoustical Sound Enclosure 1. Acoustical Enclosure Size – 8’ x 8’ x 10’ minimum (Coordinate with pump/motor
assembly. Upsize if required) 2. Air Changes Per Hour – 6 minimum 3. Acoustical Enclosure Construction:
a. 4-1/4" thick acoustical panel with 18GA solid steel outer skin, 22GA perforated steel inner skin, 16GA solid steel stiffeners & trim, encapsulated fill with spacer.
b. Painted finish on exterior and interior (Sherwin Williams Dark Brown SW MV18967)
c. One (1) 3'-0" x 7'-0" single leaf Access Door with magnetic seals and stainless steel pad lockable hasp
d. One (1) double leaf discharge pipe door, removable roof with stainless steel lifting eye bolts
e. Three (3) pre-wired marine type lights with light switch and a silenced ventilation system including a thermostat, silenced intake vent and a side wall exhaust fan.
f. Enclosure anchors shall be fastened to internally threaded sleeves. Sleeves shall be installed per manufacturer’s written instructions flush with surface of the concrete.
4. Manufacturer a. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. b. Or Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect and approve the installation before operation.
B. Installation Test: Performed by manufacturer’s representative in the presence of ENGINEER or OWNER 1. Functional test complete assemblies for proper alignment, connection, and operation. 2. Vibration Test: Results shall not exceed Hydraulic Institute Standards
recommendations. a. Test from shut-off head to maximum capacity. b. Units exceeding the vibration limit recommendations of the Hydraulic Institute
Standards shall be adjusted or modified as necessary. Units which can not meet Hydraulic Institute Standards shall be replaced.
11200-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Installation Performance Test shall be conducted in conformance with Hydraulic Institute Standards ANSI/HI 2.6-2000. Conformance with performance requirements shall be verified.
4. Monitor bearing and motor temperatures during all tests and correct overheating if necessary.
3.2 MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A. Pump manufacturer shall provide the services of an authorized service representative for not less than four (4) days, for the following: 1. One (1) day for installation assistance. 2. Two (2) days for inspection of installation, start-up instruction, performance testing
supervision, and adjustment assistance. 3. One (1) day for training of OWNER’s personnel.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
11200-10
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Section 11212 Pump and Drive Data Sheet
Project Zone 12 Interconnect Booster Pump Station Equipment Numbers PMP-101 Equipment Location Booster Pump Station Drive Description: Drive Type Variable Speed Motor 3 PH 460V 60 HZ Motor Horsepower 200 hp minimum. 300 hp maximum Pump Description: Pump Type Canned Vertical Turbine Bowl Size 14 in Number of Stages 15 minimum Suction Diameter 12 in Discharge Diameter 12 in Operating Conditions: Liquid Pumped Potable water Temperature 50 to 80 degrees F, 60 deg average Site Altitude 5090 ft Pump Operating Conditions: Pump Rated Speed 1160 rpm Minimum NPSHa 34.6 ft (15 psi) Minimum Continuous Stable Flow 800 gpm at full speed Minimum Shutoff Head 850 ft Pump Design Points: 1st Operating Point: Capacity (gpm) 1200 gpm Total Dynamic Head (ft) 460 ft Min Efficiency 80% VFD Speed 100% 2nd Operating Point: Capacity (gpm) 800 gpm Total Dynamic Head (ft) 595 ft Min Efficiency 69% VFD Speed 100% 3rd Operating Point: Capacity (gpm) 1700 gpm Total Dynamic Head (ft) 210 ft Min Efficiency 60% VFD Speed 100% Appurtenances: Motor Winding Thermostat Yes Bearing Thermostat Switch No Wear Rings Yes Vibration Switch No
11200-11
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
13300-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 13300
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS – GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall procure the services of a single Control System Supplier (CSS) to furnish all materials, equipment, labor and services, except for those services and materials specifically noted, required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein and in other Specification Sections listed below.
B. Items specifically excluded from the scope include the following: 1. PLC programming, testing of PLC logic, and startup/training activities associated
with programmed portions of the PLC. These services will be supplied by the Application Engineering System Supplier (AESS) under separate Contract.
2. Human Machine Interface (HMI) graphics development, HMI software configuration, database development, report development, and startup/training activities associated with the configured portions of the HMI system. These services will be supplied by the Owner.
C. The work shall include furnishing, installing and testing the equipment and materials detailed in the following Sections:
Section No Title
13300 Instrumentation and Controls (I&C) - General Provisions 13302 I&C - Testing 13330 I&C - Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment 13335 I&C - Uninterruptible Power Supply (1 Phase) 13341 I&C - Flow Devices 13343 I&C - Pressure Devices Requirements specified in this Section apply to all equipment specified in the above sections, unless otherwise specified.
D. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance, such as transducers, relays, signal amplifiers, intrinsic safety barriers, and signal isolators, to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by others under other Sections of these specifications, shall be included whether they are shown on the Drawings or not.
E. Substitutions on functions or type of equipment specified shall not be acceptable unless specifically noted. In order to confirm compatibility between all equipment, coordinate all interface requirements with mechanical and electrical systems and furnish any signal isolation devices that might be required.
F. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed and placed in operating condition in full conformity with the project Specifications, Drawings, engineering data,
13300-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
G. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance, similar products (e.g., differential pressure transmitters, SCADA I/O cards) shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.
H. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State and local codes.
I. Use the equipment, instrument, and loop numbering scheme that has been developed and shown on the Drawings and specifications in the development of the submittals. Do not deviate from or modify said numbering scheme without the Engineer's approval.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Process & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID) are included in the Drawings.
B. Control System Network Block Diagram is included in the Drawings.
C. Specific control system and instrumentation materials and requirements are included in related Sections of Division (16) & (13).
D. Instrumentation and Controls conduit systems are specified in Section 16130.
E. Instrumentation signal cable and alarm and status wiring are specified in Section 16125.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General submittal requirements include: 1. Refer to Section 01300 for general submittal requirements. 2. Other Division (16) & (13) Sections may have additional submittal requirements. 3. Shop drawings shall be submitted as detailed herein. Shop drawings shall
demonstrate that the equipment and services to be furnished comply with the provisions of these specifications and shall provide a complete record of the equipment as manufactured and delivered.
4. Submittals shall be complete; giving equipment specifications, details of connections, wiring, ranges, installation requirements, and specific dimensions. Submittals consisting of only general sales literature shall not be acceptable.
5. Submittals shall be bound in separate three-ring binders, with an index and sectional dividers, with all drawings reduced to a maximum size of 11-inch by 17-inch, then folded to 8.5 inch by 11 inch for inclusion within the binder. Maximum binder size shall be 3 inches.
6. The submittal drawings' title block shall include, as a minimum, the CSS's registered business name and address, Owner and project name, drawing name, revision level, and personnel responsible for the content of the drawing.
7. Incomplete or partial submittals not complying with the submittal arrangements outlined in this Section will be returned without review.
8. Separate submittals shall be made as follows: a. Qualifications Submittal
13300-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Project Plan, Deviation List and Schedule Submittal c. Coordination Meetings Agenda d. I/O List Submittal e. Field Instrument Submittal f. Hardware Submittal and Software Packages Submittal g. Panel Drawings and Wiring Diagram Submittal h. Testing Plans Submittal i. Training Plan Submittal j. Preliminary Training Plan Submittal k. Final Training Plan Submittal l. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Submittal m. Final System Documentation
B. Qualifications Submittal 1. Submit, within 30 calendar days after Contract Award, detailed information on
their staff and organization to show compliance with the Quality Assurance requirements of this Section. The Qualifications submittal shall be submitted and approved before any further submittals will be accepted. Failure to meet the minimum requirements shall be grounds for rejection as an acceptable CSS. The Qualifications Submittal shall, as a minimum, contain the following:
2. Copy of UL-508 certificate for panel fabrication facilities. 3. Project references for water or wastewater projects as defined in the Quality
Assurance paragraphs. 4. Sufficient documentation to demonstrate the CSS's capabilities to complete this
project including: resumes of key staff, bonding capacities, details on engineering, design, fabrication, and field service capabilities, and location of staff responsible for responding to the site within four hours to resolve startup issues.
C. Project Plan, Deviation List, and Schedule Submittal 1. Submit, within 45 days, a Project plan. The Project Plan shall be submitted and
approved before any further submittals shall be accepted. The Project Plan shall, as a minimum, contain the following: a. Overview of the proposed control system in clear text format describing the
CSS understanding of the project work, preliminary system architecture drawing, interfaces to other systems, schedule, startup, and coordination.
b. Preliminary testing plan. 2. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined in a separate
Deviation List. The Deviation List shall consist of a paragraph by paragraph review of the Specifications indicating acceptance or any proposed deviations, the reason for exception, the exact nature of the exception and the proposed substitution so that an evaluation may be made by the Engineer. The acceptability of any device or methodology submitted as an "or equal' or "exception" to the specifications shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer. If no exceptions are taken to the specifications or drawings the CSS shall make a statement as such. If there is no statement by the CSS, then it is acknowledged that no exceptions are taken.
D. Coordination Meetings Agenda: 1. Agendas shall be submitted for the Coordination Meetings as specified herein.
Submit proposed Control System Coordination Meeting Agenda a minimum of two weeks prior to the scheduled meeting date for review and comment by the Engineer.
13300-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. Input/Output (I/O) Address List Submittal 1. Submit, within 60 days, a complete system Input/Output (I/O) address list for
equipment connected to the control system under this Contract. 2. I/O list shall be based on the P&ID's, the Drawings, the design I/O list (if included
within these specifications), and requirements outlined in the Specifications. 3. The I/O list shall be submitted in both a Microsoft Excel readable electronic file
format on a CD-ROM and an 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch hard copy. 4. The I/O list shall reflect all active and spare I/O points. Add points to
accommodate spare I/O. 5. The I/O list shall be arranged such that each control panel has a dedicated
worksheet. At a minimum, I/O worksheet tables shall include the following information: a. TAG NUMBER(S): The identifier assigned to a device that performs a function
in the control system. As part of this information, the loop number of the tag shall be broken out to allow for sorting by loop.
b. DESCRIPTION: A description of the function of the device (text that includes signal source, control function, etc.) Include the text "Spare Points" for all I/O module points that are not connected to equipment.
c. PHYSICAL LOCATION: The Control Panel designation of where the I/O point is wired to.
d. PHYSICAL POINT ADDRESS: Rack, Slot, and Point (or Channel) assignment for each I/O point.
e. LOGICAL POINT ADDRESS: If the CSS is performing the PLC programming, I/O address of each point. If the CSS is not performing the PLC programming, then leave this field blank for use by the AE.
f. I/O TYPE: use DO - Discrete Output, DI - Discrete Input, AO - Analog Output, AI - Analog Input, PI - Pulse Input, or PO – Pulse Output.
g. RANGE/STATE: The range in engineering units corresponding to an analog 4-20 mA signal, or, the state at which the value of the discrete points are "1."
h. ENGINEERING UNITS: The engineering units associated with the Analog I/O. i. ALARM LIMITS: Include alarm limits based on the control descriptions and the
Drawings. j. P&ID – the P&ID or drawing where the I/O point appears on. Mark as "NA"
(Not Applicable) if the I/O point is derived from a specification requirement and is not on the P&IDs.
6. The I/O list shall be sorted in order by: a. Physical location b. I/O Type c. Loop Number d. Device Tag
7. After the I/O list is approved, do not modify the PLC I/O addresses without approval by the Engineer.
8. Where multiple mechanical components are provided for process redundancy, their field connections to I/O modules shall be arranged such that the failure of a single I/O module will not disable all mechanical components of the redundant system. This applies to all I/O types.
F. Field Instruments Submittal 1. Submit complete documentation of all field instruments using ISA-S20 data sheet
formats. Submit a complete Bill of Materials (BOM) or Index that lists all
13300-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
instrumentation equipment ordered by the loop numbering system as shown in the Contract Documents.
2. Submit separate data sheets for each instrument including: a. Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the drawings b. Product (item) name used herein and on the Contract Drawings c. Manufacturer's complete model number d. Location of the device e. Input - output characteristics f. Range, size, and graduations in engineering units. g. Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification and mounting
details in sufficient detail to determine compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
h. Materials of construction for enclosure and wetted parts. i. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable j. Certified calibration data for all flow metering devices. k. Two-wire or four-wire device type as applicable.
3. Submit index and data sheets in electronic format as well as hard copies on 8-1/2" x 11" formats. Electronic format shall be in Microsoft Excel or Word. Submit electronic copy on CD-ROM or DVD disk.
G. Hardware Submittal and Software Packages Submittal 1. For each hardware component indicated below, submit a cover page that lists, at
a minimum, date, specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA S20, general data sheet; however, other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required information.
2. Catalog cuts for supplied Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), process controller equipment, remote telemetry units (RTU), including central processing units, memory, input modules, output modules, modems, network interface modules, mounting racks, and power supplies. Submit descriptive literature for each hardware component that fully describes the units being provided. Submit list of 3 firms that are located within 100 miles of the project site that are actively installing, programming, supporting, and maintaining the submitted PLC. Any deviation of the hardware systems from the preliminary hardware submittal included in the Process Plan shall be described in detail.
3. Catalog cuts for HMI servers, HMI workstation, laptops, historian servers, memory, printers, mass storage devices, modems, peripherals, power supplies, and all other hardware being provided. Submit descriptive literature for each hardware component, which fully describes the units being provided.
4. Complete system architecture diagram showing in schematic form, the interconnections between major hardware components including control centers, panels, power supplies, consoles, computer and peripheral devices, networking equipment, processors, I/O modules, local operator interfaces, and like equipment. The system architecture shall be complete and shall depict all required cables, media type between components, network protocol used at each network level, details on connection requirements such as cable pin-outs, port numbers, and rack slot numbers. The intent of this specification requirement is for the CSS to develop a diagram that is complete in every aspect to allow purchase of all required equipment by part number, and to allow a qualified technician to interconnect all equipment without having to refer to additional
13300-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
manuals or literature. Minimum sheet size shall be 11"x17" and using a larger sheet size or more than one sheet is acceptable.
5. Submit details of field instrument, valve, power monitoring, and field device digital networks. Submittal shall include details of the field device digital networks technology including type, wiring requirements, configuration details, device addressing, and interface to the process control system. Include details of the field device digital network configuration for each field level digital network and subnetwork.
6. Submit details of the controller development software package, the local operator graphic panel development software package, and the HMI software application packages to be used for each piece of equipment. Indicate all standard and optional features provided. Confirm in the submittal that the licenses will be assigned to the Owner at the time of purchase. Any deviation of the software platforms from the preliminary software submittal included in the Project Plan shall be described in detail.
H. Panel Layout Drawings and Wiring Diagrams Submittal 1. Where direct hardwired interfaces exist between the CSS control panels and
vendor provided control panels furnished under other Divisions, the Contractor shall provide to the CSS the approved shop drawings and submittals in order for the CSS to provide complete wiring diagrams showing all wiring connections in the I/O system. This includes but is not limited to terminal block numbering, relay contact information, instruments, equipment, and control panel names. These drawings will be included in the Final Documentation submittal. Leaving this information blank on the Final Documentation drawings is not acceptable.
2. Panel Layout Drawings: Drawings shall be furnished for all panels, consoles, and equipment enclosures specified. Panel assembly and elevation drawings shall be drawn to scale and detail all equipment in or on the panel. Panel drawings shall be 11"x17" minimum in size. As a minimum, the panel drawings shall include the following: a. Interior and exterior panel elevation drawings to scale. b. Nameplate schedule. c. Conduit access locations. d. Panel construction details. e. Cabinet assembly and layout drawings to scale. The assembly drawing shall
include a bill of material on the drawing with each panel component clearly defined. The bill of material shall be cross-referenced to the assembly drawing so that a non-technical person can readily identify any component of the assembly by manufacturer and model number.
f. Fabrication and painting specifications including color (or color samples). g. Submit construction details, NEMA ratings, intrinsically safe barrier
information, gas sealing recommendations, purging system details, etc. for panels located in hazardous locations or interfacing to equipment located in hazardous areas.
h. Heating and cooling calculations for each panel supplied indicating conformance with cooling requirements of the supplied equipment and environmental conditions. Calculations shall include the recommended type of equipment required for both heating and cooling.
i. Submit evidence that all control panels shall be constructed in conformance with UL 508 and bear the UL seal confirming the construction. Specify if UL compliance and seal application shall be accomplished at the fabrication
13300-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
location or by field inspection by UL inspectors. All costs associated with obtaining the UL seal and any inspections shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the Project Bid Price.
3. Panel Wiring Diagrams: Panel wiring diagrams depicting wiring within and on the panel as well as connections to external devices. Panel wiring diagrams shall include power and signal connections, UPS and normal power sources, all panel ancillary equipment, protective devices, wiring and wire numbers, and terminal blocks and numbering. Field device wiring shall include the device ISA-tag and a unique numeric identifier. The diagrams shall identify all device terminal points that the system connects to, including terminal points where I/O wiring lands on equipment not supplied by the CSS. Wiring labeling used on the drawings shall match that shown on the Contract Documents or as developed by the CSS and approved by the Engineer. I/O wiring shall be numbered with rack number, slot number, and point number. Two-wire and four-wire equipment shall be clearly identified and power sources noted. Submit final wire numbering scheme. Panel drawings shall be 11" x17" minimum in size.
4. UPS submittal per section 13335. 5. Submit seismic calculations and anchoring requirements in conformance with
Division 1.
I. Testing Plan Submittals 1. Test Procedure Submittals: Submit the procedures proposed to be followed for
each test. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms, and checklists to be used to control and document the required tests. Include sign-off forms for each testing phase or loop with sign-off areas for the CSS, Engineer, and Owner. Refer to Section 13302 for specific testing requirements, and submit separate procedures for each specified test phase.
2. Test Documentation: Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a copy of the signed off test procedures. Testing shall not be considered complete until the signed-off test procedures have been submitted and favorably reviewed. Submittal of other test documentation, including "highlighted" wiring diagrams with field technician notes, are not acceptable substitutes for the formal test documentation.
3. Each loop shall have a Loop Status signoff form to organize and track its inspection, adjustment and calibration. These forms shall include the following information and checkoff items: a. Project Name. b. Loop Number. c. Detailed test procedure indicating exactly how the loop will be tested including
all required test equipment, necessary terminal block numbers, and simulation techniques required.
d. Tag Number for each component. e. Checkoffs/signoffs for each component.
1) Tag/identification 2) Installation 3) Termination - wiring 4) Termination - tubing 5) Calibration/adjustment
f. Checkoffs/signoffs for the loop. 1) Panel interface terminations 2) I/O interface terminations
13300-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3) I/O signal operation 4) Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted 5) Total loop operation 6) Space for comments. 7) Sign off and date fields for the Contractor, the Engineer, and the CSS.
4. Each active analog subsystem element shall have a Component Calibration form. These forms shall have the following information including space for data entry: a. Project Name. b. Loop Number. c. ISA Tag Number and I/O Module Address. d. Manufacturer. e. Model Number/Serial Number. f. Summary of Functional Requirements. For example:
1) For Indicators: Scale ranges 2) For Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges 3) For Computing Elements: Function 4) For Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID) 5) For Switching Elements: Unit range, differential (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE),
reset (AUTO/MANUAL) 6) For I/O Modules: Input or output
g. Calibrations; for example: 1) For Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 50 and
100 percent of span. 2) For Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points. 3) For Controllers: Mode settings (PID). 4) For I/O Modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs for 0, 50 and 100
percent of span. h. Space for comments. i. Sign off and date fields for the Contractor, the Engineer, and the CSS.
J. Training Plan Submittals 1. Preliminary Training Plan Submittal: Prior to the preparation of the Final Training
Plans, submit outlines of the specific training, resumes of trainers, prerequisite requirements for each class, and general samples of handouts for review.
2. Final Training Plan Submittal: Upon receipt of the Engineer's comments on the preliminary training plan, submit the specific proposed training plan. The training plan shall include: a. Definitions of each course. b. Specific course attendance. c. Schedule of training courses including dates, duration and locations of each
class. d. Complete copy of all proposed handouts and training materials. Training
information shall be logically arranged in a three ring binder with all materials reduced to a maximum size of 11 inch by 17 inch, then folded to 8.5 inch by 11 inch for inclusion into the binder.
3. Refer to Section 13303 for specific training requirements.
K. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Lists Submittal 1. This submittal shall include for each Subsystem:
a. A list of, and descriptive literature for, spares, expendables, and test equipment as specified in Division 13.
13300-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. A list of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables, and test equipment recommended by the manufacturer.
c. Unit and total costs for the additional spare items specified or recommended for each subsystem.
L. Final System Documentation 1. Submit in accordance with section 01730. 2. The Final System Documentation shall consist of operations and maintenance
manuals as specified herein. If the CSS is performing the AE work, provide AE Operator Manuals as specified in Section 13306. The manuals shall be bound in three-ring binders, maximum size of three inches, with Drawings reduced to 11 inch by 17 inch, then folded to 8.5 inch by 11 inch for inclusion. Each section shall have a uniquely numbered tab divider, and each component within each section shall have a separate binder tab divider.
3. The operations and maintenance manuals shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: a. Table of Contents
1) A Table of Contents shall be provided for the entire manual with the specific contents of each volume clearly listed. The complete Table of Contents shall appear in each volume.
b. Instrument and Equipment Lists 1) The following lists shall be developed in Excel and provided not only as a
hardcopy in O&M but also electronically on a CD. 2) An instrument list for all devices supplied including tag number,
description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, range, span, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data.
3) An equipment list for all non-instrument devices supplied listing description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data.
c. Data Sheets with Vendor Operations and Maintenance Information 1) ISA S20 data sheets shall be provided for all field instruments. 2) Cover page for each device, piece of equipment, and OEM software that
lists, at a minimum, date, specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA S20, general data sheet; however, other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required information.
3) Final vendor O&M documentation for each device, piece of equipment, or OEM software shall be either new documentation written specifically for this project, or modified standard vendor documentation. All standard vendor documentation furnished shall have all portions that apply clearly indicated with arrows or circles. All portions that do not apply shall be neatly lined out or crossed out. Groups of pages that do not apply at all to the specific model supplied shall be removed.
4) For any component requiring dip switch settings or custom software configuration, that information shall be included along with the corresponding data sheets and O&M information.
d. As-Built Drawings
13300-10
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1) Complete as-built drawings, including all drawings and diagram specified in this section under the "Submittals" section. These drawings shall include all termination points on all equipment the system in connected to, including terminal points of equipment not supplied by the CSS.
2) As built documentation shall include information from submittals, as described in this Specification, updated to reflect the as-built system. Any errors in or modifications to the system resulting from the Factory and/or Functional Acceptance Tests shall be incorporated in this documentation.
e. Original Licensed Software 1) Submit original software diskettes or CD-ROMs of all software provided
under this Contract. Submit original paper based and electronic documentation for all software provided. Submit license agreement information including serial numbers, license agreements, User Registration Numbers and related information. All software provided under this Contract shall be licensed to the Owner at the time of purchase. Provide media in software sleeves within O&M manual.
f. Electronic O&M Information 1) In addition to the hard copy of O&M data, provide an electronic version of
all equipment manuals CDROM or DVD. Electronic documents shall be supplied in Adobe Acrobat format.
2) Provide electronic files for all custom-developed manuals. Text shall be supplied in both Microsoft Office format and Adobe Acrobat format.
3) Provide electronic files for all drawings produced. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD ".dwg" format and in Adobe Acrobat format. Drawings shall be provided using the AutoCAD eTransmit feature to bind external references, pen/line styles, and fonts into individual zip files along with the drawing file.
4) Each computer system hardware device shall be backed up onto CDROM or DVD after Substantial Completion and shall be turned over to the Owner.
5) If specified in the training section, provide digital copies of all training videos. Videos shall be in a format that is readable by standard DVD players and by standard PC DVD drives. Format and shall be a minimum of 800 by 600 pixels and shall include sound.
4. The cover and edge of each volume shall contain the following information: Project Name (refer to Contract Documents) Contract Number (refer to Contract Documents) Instrumentation and Control System
Hardware and Applications Engineering Operations and Maintenance Manual
Specification Sections _____, _____, ______ Subcontractor Name Date Volume X of Y
(Where X is the volume number and Y is the number of volumes)
1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Schedule the mandatory coordination meetings as described herein. The meetings shall be held at the Owner's designated location and shall include attendance by the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor, the CSS's Project Engineer, and the AE Project
13300-11
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Engineer, if applicable. Other Division 13 specifications may require additional meetings. 1. A project kickoff coordination meeting shall be held within two weeks after
submitting the Project Plan and Schedule Submittal. The purpose of the meeting shall be to discuss the CSS's Project Plan and Schedule Submittal, to summarize the CSS's understanding of the project; discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives; schedule testing and delivery deadline dates; provide a forum to coordinate hardware and software related issues; and request any additional information required from the Owner. Prepare and distribute an agenda for this meeting a minimum of one week before the scheduled meeting date. The meeting will last up to one (1) business day.
2. A submittal review coordination meeting shall be held after the Hardware, Panel Drawing, and Loop Drawing Submittal package has been reviewed by the Engineer and returned to the CSS. The purpose of this meeting shall be to review comments made on the submittal package; to refine scheduled deadline dates; coordinate equipment installation activities; and provide a forum for any further required coordination between the CSS and AE. The meeting will last up to one (1) business day.
3. Regular on-site meetings for during time CSS staff is at the plant site.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
B. International Society of Automation (formerly the Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society) (ISA) 1. ISA S5.2 Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations 2. ISA S5.3 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems. 3. ISA S5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams. 4. ISA S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments,
Primary Elements and Control Valves. 5. ISA RP60.3, Human Engineering for Control Centers 6. ISA RP60.6, Nameplates, Labels, and Tags for Control Centers
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
D. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection
Facilities.
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. UL 508 – Industrial Control Equipment
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service.
13300-12
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Control System Supplier (CSS) shall be a "systems integrator" regularly engaged in the design and the installation of instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water and wastewater industry. For the purposes of this Specification Section, a "systems integrator" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all of the following criteria: 1. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed ISA or
manufacturers training courses on general process instrumentation and configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. Key personnel shall hold ISA CCST Level 1 certification or have a minimum of 10 years of verifiable plant startup experience. Key personnel shall include, as a minimum, the lead field technician.
2. Has successfully completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three previous projects within the last five years. Successful completion shall be defined as a finished project completed on time, without any outstanding claims or litigation involving the CSS. Potential references shall be for projects where the CSS's contract, was of similar size to this project.
3. Has been actively engaged in the type of work specified in this Specification Section for a minimum of five years.
B. The CSS shall maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 200 miles of the project site with full time employees capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, and testing the systems specified herein. At a minimum, the CSS shall be capable of responding to on-site problems within 12 hours of notice. Provide an on-site response within four hours of notification starting at two months before scheduled startup to two months after startup completion.
C. Actual installation of the instrumentation system need not be performed by the CSS's employees; however, the CSS as a minimum shall be responsible for the technical supervision of the installation by providing on site supervision to the installers of the various components.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Section 01600.
B. Shipping Precautions 1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval of all equipment,
cabinets, panels and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty (5 mil) polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide protection from damage, dust and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weights shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing and handling at the job site.
2. Manufacturer's special instructions for field handling, storage and installation required for protection, shall be securely attached to the packaging for each piece of equipment prior to shipment. The instructions shall be stored in resealable plastic bags or other means of protection.
13300-13
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. None of the HMI control and monitoring equipment shall be shipped to the site until the control room areas comply with specified ambient temperature and humidity. Have qualified personnel accept the equipment on delivery and supervise unloading within the control room areas.
4. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost to the owner.
1.8 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Field Instrument Tags 1. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag firmly attached
and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as indicated in the Drawings, shall be provided on each piece of equipment supplied under this Section. Equipment shall be tagged before shipping to the site.
2. Provide 1/8-in by 3/8-in, Type 316 stainless steel button head machine screws. 3. All supplied field instrument transmitters and field instrument transmitter
elements shall have a stainless steel identification tag attached to each transmitter and element prior to shipment. Tag shall be attached via stainless steel chain or stainless steel wire (24 gauge min) to a non-removable part of the device. The tag size shall be a minimum of 1.5 square inches. Tag shall include the ISA alphanumeric instrument number as indicated in the P&ID, loop, and detail drawings. The alphanumeric instrument number shall be stamped into the tag and shall have a minimum of 3/16-in high alphanumeric characters.
B. Panel Nameplates 1. See Section 13330.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide equipment warranty per Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds, and as specified herein.
B. Provide software updates throughout the warranty period. Provide latest official released version for all software provided under this Contract. Owner shall have the latest software releases at the end of the warranty period.
1.10 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS
A. Environmental Requirements. Refer to Section 16000 for specific environmental and hazardous area classifications.
B. Elevation: Equipment shall be designed to operate at the project ground elevation.
C. Temperature: 1. Outdoor areas' equipment shall operate between -30 to 50 C degrees ambient. 2. Equipment located in indoor locations shall operate between 10 to 35 C degrees
ambient minimum. 3. Storage temperatures shall range from 0 to 50 C degrees ambient minimum. 4. Additional cooling or heating shall be furnished if required by the equipment as
specified herein.
13300-14
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Relative Humidity. Air conditioned area equipment shall operate between 20 to 95 percent relative, non-condensing humidity. All other equipment shall operate between 0 to 100 percent relative, condensing humidity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL
A. All instrumentation and electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, utilizing printed circuitry and epoxy or equal coating to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. The field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid and slightly corrosive service conditions.
B. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks unless otherwise noted. Fasteners for securing control panels and enclosures to walls and floors shall be either hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication or stainless steel. Provide stainless steel fasteners only in corrosive areas rated NEMA 4X on the Drawings or as defined under Section 16000. Provide and size anchors in accordance with Division 1 and 5 as required per the seismic calculations. Provide minimum size anchor of 3/8-inch.
C. All indicators shall be linear in process units, unless otherwise noted. All transmitters shall be provided with indicators in process units, accurate to two percent or better.
D. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished shall be heavy-duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain similar products of a single manufacturer, and shall consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion.
E. All electronic/digital equipment shall be provided with radio frequency interference protection.
F. Electrical 1. Equipment shall operate on a 60 Hertz alternating current power source at a
nominal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. Regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied.
2. With the exception for field device network connected devices, all electronic instrumentation shall utilize linear transmission signals of isolated 4 to 20 mA DC (milliampere direct current) capable of driving a load up to 750 ohms, unless specified otherwise. However, signals between instruments within the same panel or cabinet may be 1-5 VDC (volts direct current).
3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, shall have the output immediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission. No zero based signals will be allowed.
13300-15
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
4. All switches shall have double-pole double-throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless noted otherwise.
5. Switches and/or signals indicating an alarm, failure or upset condition shall be wired fail-safe to the SCADA system unless otherwise shown. A fail-safe condition is an open circuit when in an alarm state.
6. Materials and equipment shall be UL approved. Where components are not available with UL approval, integrate the device with ground fault protective devices, isolation transformers, fuses, or other protective equipment necessary to achieve compliance with UL 508 requirements.
7. All equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of power interruption, the systems specified herein shall go through an orderly shutdown with no loss of memory, and shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored, unless otherwise noted.
8. All transmitter output signals shall include signal and power source isolation.
2.2 LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION
A. General - Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system from induced surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines from lightning, utility, or the internal plant electrical distribution system. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level. Protection shall be maintenance free and self-restoring. Ground wires for all instrumentation device surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground in accordance with Section 16060.
B. Field Instrumentation Protection - Provide individual device protection for the 4-20 mA signal and, if 4 wire field instrument, the power supply of each field instrument mounted outside of the building or facility housing the control panel. Instruments mounted within the structure as the associated control panel shall not require surge protection. Instruments shall be housed in a grounded metallic case. Device surge protectors shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or a separate junction box coupled to the enclosure. Provide gas tube or metal oxide varisters (MOVs) surge protection devices as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, EDCO, Emerson Network Power Control Concepts, or equal.
C. Control Panel Power Feed – Provide protection of all 120 VAC power feeds into the control panels. Source voltage to cabinets/panels regardless of location (indoor or outdoor), shall be protected by isolation transformers and surge suppressors. Provide gas tube surge suppressors or metal oxide varisters (MOVs) located at the point where the 120V source supply enters the enclosure. Install the surge device to in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendation for maximum allowable circuit length between protective device and incoming circuit. Provide signal surge suppression devices as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, EDCO, Emerson Network Power Control Concepts, or equal.
D. 4-20 mA Signal Lines and Non-Fiber Based Data Highway Circuits – Provide protection on all signal and data highway circuits that leave a building or are routed external to a building. Provide gas tube surge arrestors, and Zener diode protectors. Circuit protection shall be provided at both ends of the signal or data highway lines within the control panel at one end and as close to the instruments or termination device as
13300-16
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
possible. Provide signal surge suppression devices as manufactured by Phoenix Contact EDCO, Emerson Network Power Control Concepts, or equal.
E. Inductive Loads – At a minimum, provide coil surge suppression devices, such as varistors, or interposing relays on all process controller outputs or switches rated 120 VA or less that drive solenoid, coil, or motor loads.
F. Telephone Circuits - At a minimum, provide Telephone Company approved line protection units for all telephone lines used for telemetry or SCADA system use under this Contract.
2.3 TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. All instrument air header takeoffs and branch connections less than 2-in shall be 316 stainless steel.
B. All instrument shut-off valves and associated fittings shall be supplied in accordance with the piping specifications and all instrument installation details. The materials for fittings and valves shall be compatible with process fluids. Where metallic fittings and valves are compatible, wetted materials shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
C. The materials for instrument tubing shall be compatible with process fluids. Where metallic tubing is compatible, tubing shall be fully annealed ASTM A269 Seamless 316 grade free of OD scratches having the following dimensional characteristics as required to fit the specific installation: 1. 1/4-in to 1/2-in O.D. by 0.035 wall thickness. 2. 5/8-in to 1-in O.D. by 0.049 wall thickness. 3. 1-in O.D. by 0.065 wall thickness. 4. 1-1/4-in O.D. by 0.065 wall thickness. 5. 1-1/2-in O.D. by 0.083 wall thickness. 6. 2-in O.D. by 0.095 wall thickness.
D. All process connections to instruments shall be annealed 1/2-inches O.D. stainless steel tubing, Type 316.
E. All tube track shall be supported by stainless steel and installed as per manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts of the type and quantity as recommended by the manufacturer shall be furnished for all devices furnished under these sections.
B. All spare parts shall be wrapped in bubble wrap, sealed in a polyethylene bag complete with dehumidifier, then packed in cartons and labeled with indelible markings. Complete ordering information including manufacturer's part number, part ordering information including manufacturer, part number, part name, and equipment name and number(s) for which the part is to be used shall be supplied with the required spare parts. The spare parts shall be delivered and stored in a location directed by the Engineer.
13300-17
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. As a minimum, furnish the following spare parts for control panels: 1. Timers - Five of each type installed. 2. Relays - Five of each type installed. 3. Fuses and circuit breakers - 10% (minimum of 10 fuses and 2 circuit breakers) of
each type and size installed. 4. Light bulbs - 10% (minimum of 10) of each type installed. 5. Power supplies - one of each type installed. 6. Manufacturer's cables - one of each type installed. 7. Selector switches/pushbuttons - Two of each type installed including 5 contact
blocks. 8. Surge protection devices - One of each type installed. 9. Provide one quart of touch-up paint, for each type and color used for all RTU/PLC
cabinets, panels, and consoles supplied.
D. The following field Instrument related Spare Parts shall be furnished: 1. One flow indicating transmitter for each type of flow element provided. 2. One level indicating transmitter for each type of level element provided. 3. One temperature transmitter for each type provided. 4. One pressure transmitter for each type provided. 5. One spare ultrasonic level switch for each type provided. 6. One spare float type level switch for each type provided. 7. One spare gas detection system sample pump module for each type provided. 8. Miscellaneous: One year supply of items recommended by the manufacturer of
the equipment including all reagents, pH probes, batteries, chart paper, calibration standards as needed to operate and maintain the furnished equipment.
E. The following Network and Communications System spare parts shall be furnished 1. One switch of each type provided. 2. One media converter of each type provided 3. Manufacturer's cables - one of each type installed. 4. Five-10ft CAT 6 cables with connectors installed 5. Printer cartridges- five of each color, one box of letter size paper, One container
of DVD-RW disks
F. The following Computer Hardware and Software spare parts shall be furnished 1. One Operator Interface terminal of each type provided
G. PLC components 1. One spare CPU of each type supplied 2. Two spare I/O modules of each type supplied 3. One spare specialty interface module of each type supplied 4. One spare remote I/O communication module of each type supplied 5. One spare communications module of each type supplied. 6. One spare power supply of each type supplied 7. One spare type of each communication cable supplied
13300-18
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2.5 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all test equipment, instruction manuals, carrying/storage cases, unit battery charger, special tools, calibration fixtures, cord extenders, patch cords, test leads, and miscellaneous items for checking field operation of all supplied equipment.
B. All test equipment shall be wrapped in bubble wrap, sealed in a polyethylene bag with a dehumidifier, then packed in cartons and labeled with indelible markings. Complete ordering information including manufacturer's part number, and equipment name shall be supplied. The test equipment shall be delivered and stored in a location directed by the Engineer.
C. As a minimum, furnish the following test equipment as a separate line item: 1. One complete electronic process calibrator sets with rechargeable batteries, cases,
spare fuses, test leads, and PC based software. Provide model 830 as manufactured by Altek, or equal.
2. One calibration pump, Model A-396A as manufactured by Dwyer Instruments, Inc., or equal.
3. One hand-held HART communicator, with case and all necessary accessories, Model 375 by Rosemount, or equal.
4. One (1) portable digital multi-meter (DMM) with rechargeable battery and test leads, and carrying-case, Fluke 189 Series Digital Multimeter, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The locations of equipment, transmitters, alarms and similar devices indicated are approximate only. Exact locations of all devices shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field, all information relevant to the placing of process control equipment and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Contractor and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The P&IDs and Drawings indicate the intent and not the precise nature of the interconnection between the individual instruments. Where indicated on the P&IDs or Drawings as not requiring installation, provide the instruments suitably packaged for storage.
C. All equipment used in areas designated as hazardous shall be designed for the Class, Group and Division as required for the locations as shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 16. All work shall be in strict accordance with codes and local rulings.
D. Unless specifically indicated, direct reading or electrical transmitting instrumentation shall not be mounted on process piping. Instrumentation shall be mounted on instrument racks or stands. All instrumentation connections shall be provided with shutoff and drain valves. For differential pressure transmitters, 5-valve manifolds for
13300-19
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
calibration, testing and blow down service shall also be provided. For chemical or corrosive fluids, diaphragm seals with flushing connections shall be provided.
E. All piping and tubing to and from field instrumentation shall be provided with necessary unions, calibrations and test tees, couplings, adaptors, and shut-off valves. Process tubing shall be installed to slope from the instrument toward process for gas measurement service and from the process toward the instrument for liquid measurement service. Provide drain/vent valves or fittings at any process tubing points where the required slopes cannot be maintained.
F. Brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment shall be provided. They shall be installed as shown and not interfere with any other equipment.
G. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source to destination and be grounded at only one ground point for each shield.
H. Investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, ship material in sections sized to permit passing through restricted areas in the building. Provide on-site service to oversee the installation, the placing and location of system components, their connections to the process equipment panels, cabinets and devices, subject to the Engineer's approval. Certify that field wiring associated with his/her equipment is installed in accordance with best industry practice. Schedule and coordinate work under this section with that of the electrical work specified under applicable Sections of Division (16).
I. Installation of fiber optic cable within control panel and console assemblies. Refer to cable manufacturer's specifications for bend radius. Use cable breakout assembly as recommended by the cable manufacturer. Provide wire basket, strain relief as required to meet manufacturer's strain requirements.
J. Provide local electrical shutoffs and disconnects for all 4-wire field instruments requiring 120 VAC power. Electrical disconnects shall be suitably rated disconnect switches or manual motor starters as specified under Division (16).
K. Provide sunshades for equipment mounted outdoors in direct sunlight. Sunshades shall include standoffs to allow air circulation around the cabinet. Orient equipment outdoors to face to the North or as required to minimize the impact of glare on LED, LCD, or other digital readouts.
L. Loop Tuning - All electronic control stations incorporating PID controllers shall be tuned following device installation but prior to commencement of the field tests. 1. Optimal loop tuning shall be achieved either by auto-tuning software or manually
by trial and error, Ziegler-Nichols step-response method, or other documented process tuning method. Assigning common PID factors for identical loops following field tuning of a single typical loop is acceptable. However, tuning documentation shall be submitted for each loop individually as specified in Part 1 of these Specifications.
2. Determine and configure optimal tuning parameters to assure stable, steady state operation of final control elements running under the control of field mounted, dedicated PID controllers or software based PID controllers residing as part of the programmable logic controller system. Each control loop that includes anti-reset
13300-20
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
windup features shall be adjusted to provide optimum response following startup from an integral action saturation condition.
3. Tune all PID control loops to eliminate excessive oscillating final control elements. Loop parameters shall be adjusted to achieve 1/4 amplitude damping or better. In addition, loop steady state shall be achieved at least as fast as the loop response time associated with critical damping.
4. Loop performance and stability shall be verified in the field following tuning by step changes to setpoint. Submit loop tuning methodology and verification as part of the final system documentation as specified in Part 1.
5. For cascade loops, tune both sets of controllers so that the cascade loop achieves the loop tuning characteristics specified herein.
3.2 TESTING
A. Refer to Section 13302.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Refer to Section 13303.
3.4 PROCESS CONTROLLER INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O)
A. Provide I/O signals and hardware as required to furnish a complete and functional system.
++ END OF SECTION ++
13302-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 13302
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS – TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor and materials required and installed. Complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. This section covers the testing requirements for all devices and systems furnished and installed detailed on the Drawings, and as described in the related Sections of Division 13.
C. Refer to Section 13300.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. N/A
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
13302-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.11 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.12 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING – GENERAL
A. See execution requirements in Section 13300.
B. As part of the requirement of this specification section, it is the responsibility of the CSS to provide a complete operational control system. Confirmation of an operational control system is dependent upon results derived from test procedures as specified in this Section. The CSS shall test all equipment at the factory prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all equipment provided by the CSS shall be tested at the factory as a single fully integrated system.
C. The CSS shall test the system so that the Owner can verify all the points in the existing control system. The CSS shall coordinate the testing of the ORT and FDT with the Owner.
D. At a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Unwitnessed Factory Test (UFT). 2. System Integration Test (SIT). 3. Operational Readiness Test (ORT). 4. Functional Demonstration Test (FDT). 5. 30-day Site Acceptance Test (SAT).
E. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied.
F. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Engineer and/or Owner-approved procedures, forms, and all checklists as submitted by the CSS under Part 1.03 of this Specification. Each test to be performed shall be described and a space provided after it for sign-off by the appropriate parties after its satisfactory completion. The
13302-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
CSS shall include “punchlist” forms with the test procedures to document issues that arise during the testing. Punchlist forms, at a minimum, shall include a specification cross reference; an issues description field; a resolution description field; and a sign-off area for the CSS, Owner, and Engineer.
G. Copies of the signed-off test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required testing documentation. The test result forms shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 10 days of completion of each test.
H. The CSS shall provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. These simulation techniques shall be defined in the test procedures.
I. The CSS shall coordinate all required testing with the Contractor, all affected Subcontractors, the Engineer, and the Owner.
J. The CSS shall furnish the services of field service technicians, all special calibration and test equipment, and labor to perform the field tests.
K. The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions, whether or not explicitly stated on the Test Procedures, as required to determine compliance with the functional requirements of the overall system. Such testing required to determine compliance with the specified requirements shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing.
L. Not used.
M. Correction of Deficiencies 1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing
requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 FACTORY TESTING - UNWITNESSED FACTORY TEST (UFT)
A. Prior to shipment of the equipment, the entire system, except primary elements, final control elements, and field-mounted transmitters, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure the system will operate as specified. All analog and discrete input/output points not interconnected at this time shall be simulated to ensure proper operation of all alarms, monitoring devices/functions, and control devices/functions.
B. All panels, consoles, and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify their conformance with related submittals, Specifications, and Drawings.
13302-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. During the tests, all digital system hardware and software shall be operated for at least five days continuously without a failure to verify the system is capable of continuous operation.
D. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following. Each of these tests shall be specifically addressed in the Test Procedure submittal. 1. All panels and enclosures being provided shall undergo a thorough inspection to
verify the integrity of the cabinet enclosures, frame structures, paint work and finish, etc. Additionally, the CSS shall review the panel drawings with the Owner and/or Engineer to ensure they accurately reflect the panel layout and wiring.
2. Panel wire pull tests shall be performed on all wiring to ensure all wiring has been connected to the appropriate torque to prevent wires from coming loose.
3. For panels provided in new enclosures, heat loading tests shall be performed to ensure proper cooling/ventilation is being provided.
4. UPSs shall be tested with all equipment connected to verify the UPSs have been sized correctly to maintain the specified run time.
5. An I/O point checkout of at least 50 percent of each I/O module shall be performed to verify proper operation of the input/output points. To perform this test, the CSS shall obtain copies of the PLC configuration files from the AES supplier prior to proceeding with the UFT. The verification of the signals will be accomplished via the use of the PLC programming software. At a minimum, the I/O checkout shall consist of four steps. a. Digital input signals shall be jumpered within the termination connections of
the PLC panels and verification of proper alarming, statuses, etc., shall be performed utilizing the tools available in the PLC programming software.
b. Analog input signals shall be connected to a signal generator at the termination connections and signals shall be verified at zero percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of full scale. The appropriate scaled value shall be verified utilizing the tools available in the PLC programming software.
c. Digital output signals shall be initiated by the user by writing to the signals utilizing the PLC programming software. Verification shall occur in the PLC panel by connecting a digital multimeter to measure the continuity at the terminations, thus verifying the command from the PLC has properly executed the contact closure.
d. Analog output signals shall be initiated by the user by writing to the signals utilizing the PLC programming software. Verification shall occur in the PLC panel by utilizing a digital multimeter to measure the current/voltage generated at the termination points.
6. 100 percent wiring and database address verification of panel components and process controller I/O as applicable.
7. Demonstrate functionality of the process controls in conformance with the process control loop descriptions. Simulate operating conditions to verify the performance of the monitoring and control functions.
8. Demonstrate graphical user interfaces (hardware and software) for process controllers, local operator panels, and HMI.
9. Demonstrate the data communication network and protocol for in-plant and remote site locations.
10. Demonstrate all system software functions specified, including clock synchronization.
11. Generate reports using test data.
13302-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
12. Test system recovery from failure scenarios including cold boot, warm boot, communication loss, power failure, process failure, redundancy backup systems, RAID array operability, historical archiving, etc.
E. All control panels provided or modified under the requirements of the related technical specification sections of Division 13 shall be included in these tests.
F. Upon successful completion of the UFT, the CSS shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and coordinate the scheduling of the SIT
3.3 FACTORY TESTING - SYSTEM INTEGRATION TEST (SIT)
A. Before scheduling the SIT, the CSS shall determine through his own UFT and through his internal quality assurance program that the equipment is ready for the SIT.
B. The SIT shall be conducted a minimum of three weeks before the Witnessed Factory Test and in accordance with Section 01310. The SIT shall be a joint test by the CSS and Owners representative. The test will be a witnessed test, and the CSS shall include time within the construction schedule for this test.
C. The purpose of the SIT is to allow the CSS and the AESS to jointly verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software as a complete integrated system. The AESS will load the application software on the PLCs, SCADA servers, and historian. The entire system will then be tested. All process control strategies shall be simulated to ensure proper operation. The primary objective of the SIT is to allow the CSS and the AESS to perform a dry run thus verify the system’s readiness to move forward with the ORT.
D. Not used.
E. Minimum testing to be performed during the SIT shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Verification of proper scanning, communication, and complete data acquisition of
the entire system. 2. Verification of all redundant functionality of components. 3. Verification of proper power failure recovery. 4. Verification of proper indication for communication error issues. 5. A complete I/O point checkout shall be performed to verify proper operation of
each input/output point. The I/O checkout shall consist of four steps. a. Digital input signals shall be jumpered within the termination connections of
the PLC panels and verification of proper alarming, statuses, etc., shall be performed at the HMI.
b. Analog input signals shall be connected to a signal generator at the termination connections and signals shall be verified at zero percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of full scale. The appropriate scaled value shall be verified at the HMI. Simultaneously, verification of alarming shall occur. The alarming verification shall, at a minimum, include HiHi, Hi, Lo, LoLo, Rate of Change, and Alarm eadband.
c. Digital output signals shall be initiated by the user from the HMI system. Verification shall occur within the PLC panel by connecting a digital multimeter
13302-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
to measure the continuity at the terminations, thus verifying the command from the PLC has properly executed the contact closure.
d. Analog output signals shall be initiated by the user from the HMI system. Verification shall occur in the PLC panel by utilizing a digital multimeter to measure the current/voltage generated at the termination points.
6. Upon successful completion of the SIT, the CSS shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and request the scheduling of the ORT as noted below.
3.4 NOT USED.
3.5 FIELD TESTING - OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT)
A. Following installation of the process control system components and prior to startup and the Functional Demonstration Test, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, wired, calibrated, tested, etc., and documented) that it is installed and ready for the ORT as defined below.
B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these Specifications.
C. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer-approved forms and checklists. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check-off items with spaces for sign-off by the system supplier: 1. Project Name, Test Date, CSS Name, and Lead CSS Technician Name. 2. Loop Number. 3. Tag Number for each component. 4. Check-offs/sign-offs for each component: Tag/identification; installation;
termination (wiring and tubing); scale, range, and setpoint as applicable; and calibration/adjustment (four-point for analog, set point for switches) rising and falling.
5. Check-offs/sign-offs for the loop: Panel interface terminations; I/O interface terminations; I/O signal operation; inputs/outputs operational (received/sent, processed, adjusted); total loop operation; process controller scaling and adjustment; and space for comments.
6. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign-off by the CSS. a. Project Name. b. Loop Number. c. Component Tag Number of I/O Module Number. d. Component Code Number Analog System. e. Manufacturer (for Analog system element). f. Model Number/Serial Number (for Analog system). g. Summary of functional requirements shall include, but not be limited to, scale
and chart ranges of indicators, recorders, and transmitters/converters;
13302-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
functions of computing elements; and parameters of controllers (i.e., proportional, integral, derivative, reverse/forward acting, etc.).
h. Calibrations shall include testing of analog input and output signals at zero, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span. Where appropriate, discrete input signals shall include details regarding actual trip points and reset points.
i. Space for comments. j. Space for sign-off by the CSS.
D. The CSS shall maintain the Loop Status Reports sheets at the job site and make them available to the Engineer/Owner at any time.
E. These inspections, calibrations, and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer will review Loop Status Sheets and spot-check the CSS test process periodically. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected by the CSS prior to commencement of the Functional Acceptance Test.
F. Prior to checkout of the I/O to the HMI, the CSS shall thoroughly test all I/O from the field device to the PLC terminals, and verify the PLC is powered up and the PLC is communicating. After the CSS has successfully tested all I/O from the field devices to the PLC terminals, the CSS and AESS shall jointly test all I/O from the HMI to the field device. Should this test prove to be unsuccessful, the CSS and AESS shall test from the HMI to the terminations located in the Owner’s termination cabinet, and the CSS shall inform the Owner in writing of the discrepancy with the existing field wire.
G. Computer-Manual (i.e., Auto-Manual) start/stop, open/close commands of all devices controlled by the SCADA system shall be verified jointly by the CSS and AESS during the ORT. Subsequent to verification of Computer-Manual control, the CSS may request from the Owner and Engineer permission to begin replacement of the next PLC. Simultaneously, the AESS may continue with Computer-Automatic testing to confirm the control strategies were implemented as specified.
H. For all panels with enclosures (new and existing) modified by this contract, heat load tests shall be performed to ensure proper cooling/ventilation is being provided.
I. Upon successful completion of the ORT, the CSS shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and request the scheduling of the FDT as noted in the following section.
3.6 FIELD TESTING - FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT)
A. Prior to startup and the 30-day Site Acceptance Test, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the ORT. The FDT will be a joint test by the CSS and the AESS.
B. Once a process area has been started up and is operating, a witnessed FDT shall be performed on that system to demonstrate that it is operating and is in compliance with these Specifications. A witnessed FDT shall be performed on each process area. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis.
13302-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under WFT, except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functions demonstrated using live field-based data to the greatest extent possible.
D. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the factory tests shall be made available to the Engineer at the job site both before and during the tests. In addition, one copy of all O & M Manuals shall be available for reference at the job site, both before and during testing.
E. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the factory tests shall also be followed during the FDT.
F. During the FDT, a demonstration of communication failure and recovery shall be accomplished. This test shall be scheduled and coordinated with Owner’s personnel to minimize the impact on plant operations.
G. Following initial startup, the entire process control system shall operate for a continuous 100 hours without failure before this test will be started.
H. Punchlist items and resolutions noted during the test shall be documented on the Punchlist/Resolution form. In the event of rejection of any part or function test procedure, the CSS shall perform repairs, replacement, and/or retest within 10 days.
I. Upon successful completion of the FDT, the CSS shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and request the scheduling of the SAT as noted in the following section.
3.7 FIELD TESTING - 30-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT)
A. After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the system shall undergo a 30-day Site Acceptance Test (SAT), under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non-field-repairable malfunction.
B. B. During this test, plant operations and CSS personnel shall be present as required to address any potential issues that would impact the overall system operation. The CSS is expected to provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system. When CSS personnel are not on-site, the CSS shall provide cell phone/pager numbers that Owner personnel can use to ensure that support staff are available by phone and/or on-site within four hours of a request by operations staff.
C. While this test is proceeding, the Engineer and Owner’s Agent shall have full use of the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. Plant operations shall remain the responsibility of Owner and the decision of plant operators regarding plant operations shall be final.
D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed and corrections made by the CSS. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test.
13302-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. Any malfunction during this 30 consecutive day test period which cannot be corrected by the CSS's personnel within 24 hours of occurrence, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered as a non-field-repairable malfunction. Upon completion of repairs by the CSS, the SAT will be re-started from the date which the CSS successfully corrected the malfunction(s) and the Owner and Engineer have accepted and signed off on the repairs.
F. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the CSS shall perform repairs or replacement within 10 days.
G. All data base, process controller logic, and graphical interface system errors must be functioning as required per the specifications prior to the start of each test period. The 30-day test will not be considered successful until all data base points and logic functions are tested and verified to be correct.
H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent during this test period. Availability shall be defined as:
Availability in percent = 100 * (Total Testing Time – Down Time) / Total Testing Time
I. Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or backup power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above.
J. Throughout the duration of the 30-day SAT, no software or hardware modifications shall be made to the system without prior approval from the Owner and Engineer.
K. Upon successful completion of the 30-day operation test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete and the warranty period shall commence.
L. Certification of Installation: Following successful completion of the 30-day test, the CSS shall issue a Certification of Installation. Certification shall be on CSS corporate letterhead and signed by an officer of the firm. Certification shall state that the process control system has been completed in conformance with plans and specifications. Certification shall be submitted to the Engineer as specified herein.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
13330-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 13330
PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown,
specified and required to furnish and place into satisfactory operation control panels and/or enclosures.
2. The RTU cabinet will be provided and programmed by the owner. The contractor shall install the RTU cabinet and provide all field wiring.
3. The contractor shall coordinate with the owner’s representatives for all integration and testing.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards, Codes and Regulations: 1. Construction of panels and the installation and interconnection of all equipment and
devices mounted within shall comply with applicable provisions of the following standards, codes and regulations: a. National Fire Protection 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery (NFPA 79). b. National Electrical Code (NEC). c. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards (NEMA). d. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). e. Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations. f. State and Local code requirements. g. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent
requirement shall apply. 2. All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label of the
Underwriters' Laboratory (UL), Inc., Factory Mutual (FM) or equivalent where standards have been established and label service regularly applies.
B. General Design Requirements: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 16050.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 16050.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 16050.
13330-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all electrical and/or pneumatic components and devices, support hardware, fasteners, interconnecting wiring and/or piping required to make the control panels and/or enclosures complete and operational.
B. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made and that there is ample room for servicing each item.
C. Components for installation on panel exterior shall be located generally as shown. Layouts shall be submitted for approval in accordance with Section 16050.
D. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the panel to prevent any movement.
E. Provide sub-panels for installation of all relays and other internally mounted components.
F. All wiring to panel connections from field instruments, devices, and other panels shall be terminated at master numbered terminal strips, unless otherwise specified.
G. Provide copper grounding studs for all panel equipment.
H. The bottom 12-inches of free standing panels shall be free of all devices, including terminal strips, to provide ease of installation and testing.
I. No device shall be mounted less than 36-inches above the operating floor level, unless otherwise specified.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for identification of panels and components mounted thereon as follows: 1. Nameplates shall be of 3/32-inch thick laminated phenolic type with black matte finish
surface and white letter engraving. 2. Panel identification nameplates to have 1/2-inch high letter engravings. 3. Panel mounted component identification (e.g., control devices, indicating lights,
selector switches, etc.) nameplates to have 1/4-inch high letter engravings. 4. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel face with two stainless steel self-tapping
screws. 5. Nameplate engravings shall include the instrument or equipment tag number and
descriptive title as shown and specified.
B. Tag all internally mounted components in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Tag numbers shall be as shown. 2. The identifying tag number shall be permanently etched. 3. Identification tag shall be installed so that the numbers are easily visible to service
personnel. 4. Front of panel mounted instruments shall have the tag attached to rear of device.
C. Tag all electrical components and devices mounted within control panels and enclosures with embossed plastic tape labels.
13330-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Tag all pneumatic lines with plastic tags. Paper tags are not acceptable.
E. Numerically code terminals on terminal strips using a Brady LS2000 Labeling System, or equal.
F. Color code and/or numerically code wiring as required by applicable standards. Wires shall be identified at each end with permanent number codes using a Brady LS2000 Labeling System, or equal.
2.3 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. General: 1. Panels and enclosures shall meet the NEMA requirements for the type specified. 2. Sizes shown are estimates. CONTRACTOR shall furnish panels and enclosures amply
sized to house all equipment, instruments, front panel mounted devices, power supplies, power distribution panels, wiring, tubing and other components installed within.
B. Construction Features: 1. Control panels located inside control or electrical room areas shall be NEMA 12 rated.
a. Fabricate enclosures using minimum 14 gage steel for wall or frame mounted enclosures and minimum 12 gage for free standing enclosures. Steel shall be free of pitting and surface blemishes.
b. Continuously weld all exterior seams and grind smooth. Also, surface grind complete removal of corrosion, burrs, sharp edges and mill scale.
c. Reinforce sheet steel with steel angles where necessary to adequately support equipment and ensure rigidity and to preclude resonant vibrations.
d. Panel shall be flat within 1/16-inch over a 24-inch by 24-inch area, or flat within 1/8-inch for a larger surface. Flatness shall be checked by using a 72-inch long straight edge. Out-of-flatness shall be gradual, in one direction only, and shall not consist of obvious depressions or a series of wavy sections.
e. Use pan type construction for doors. Door widths shall not exceed 36- inches. f. Mount doors with full length heavy duty piano hinge with stainless steel hinge
pins. g. Provide oil resistant gasket completely around each door or opening. h. Provide handle-operated, oil-tight, key-lockable three point stainless steel latching
system with rollers on latch-rods for easy door closing. i. Use stainless steel fasteners throughout. j. Provide interior mounting panels and shelves constructed of minimum 12 gage
steel with a white enamel finish. k. Provide steel print pocket with white enamel finish. l. Provide enclosure mounting supports as required for floor, frame, or wall
mounting. m. Provide all holes and cutouts for installation of conduit and equipment. Cable and
piping to enter the enclosure through the bottom unless otherwise noted. All conduit and piping openings and all conduits shall be sealed watertight.
n. Completely clean all interior and exterior surfaces so they are free of corrosive residue, oil, grease and dirt. Zinc phosphatize for corrosion protection.
o. One coat of primer shall be applied to all interior and exterior surfaces immediately. Exterior surfaces shall then be given sufficient coats of primer surfacer, applied with sanding and cleaning between coats, until a Grade 1 finish can be produced on the finish coat.
p. All interior surfaces shall be painted with two coats of semi-gloss white enamel.
13330-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
q. All exterior surfaces shall be painted with a minimum of three finish coats of enamel to ultimately produce a Grade 1 finish (super smooth; completely free of imperfections). Color to be selected from color charts furnished by CONTRACTOR. Provide one extra quart of touch-up paint for each exterior finish color.
r. Primer and finish paint shall be compatible and shall be Sherwin-Williams "Polane T Polyurethane Enamel", or equal.
s. Provide one extra quart of touch-up paint for each exterior finish color. 2. Control panels located in field shall be NEMA 4X rated. Panels shall be either metallic
or non-metallic, as shown on the Drawings. a. Non-metallic Panels:
1) Panels shall be constructed of fiberglass mat-reinforced polyester resin, with a minimum thickness of 3/16-inch for all surfaces except those areas requiring reinforcement.
2) Panels shall be precision molded to form a one-pieced unit with all corners rounded.
3) Exterior surfaces shall be gel-coated to provide a corrosion-resistant, maintenance-free satin finish which shall never require painting.
4) Color pigments shall be molded into the resin. 5) Color to be selected from color charts furnished by CONTRACTOR. 6) Panels shall have "half height" front access doors wherever rear access is not
feasible; no devices to be mounted on doors. 7) Provide a clear plastic, gasketed, hinged door to encompass all non-NEMA 4
front of panel instruments. 8) All hardware, including hinge and means of locking shall be corrosion
resistant. 9) Provide 5/16-inch diameter copper ground studs which will be the ground
connection points for all panel equipment. 10) Floor Pad: Refer to Part 3 of this Specification Section.
b. Metallic Panels: 1) Panels shall be Type 316 stainless steel construction with a minimum
thickness of 12 gage for all surfaces (except those areas requiring reinforcement) having a smooth brushed finish.
2) Stainless steel fast-operating clamp assemblies on three sides of each door. 3) Rolled lip around three sides of door and along top of enclosure opening. 4) Hasp and staple for padlocking. 5) Provide a clear plastic, gasketed lockable hinged door to encompass all non-
NEMA 4 front of panel instruments. 6) Provide 3-inch high channel base assembly, with solid bottom, drilled to mate
the panel to its floor pad for free-standing panel. 7) Floor Pad: Refer to Part 3 of this Specification Section.
3. Where the application applies and with the approval of ENGINEER, wall mounted enclosures may be provided. The enclosure shall comply with Paragraph 2.3.B.1 and Paragraph 2.3.B.2, except for the following: a. Doors shall be full height. b. No extra holes or knockouts shall be provided. No light or convenience outlet
need be provided.
C. Electrical Systems: 1. Power Source and Internal Power Distribution:
a. General: Control panel power supply source, type, voltage, number of circuits and circuit ratings shall be as shown.
2. Electrical Systems:
13330-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Internal wiring shall be Type THHN stranded copper wire with thermoplastic insulation rated for 600 V at 85 deg C for single conductors, color coded and labeled with wire identification.
b. For DC panel signal wiring, use No. 16 minimum AWG shielded. For DC field signal wiring, terminal strips shall be capable of handling No. 12 wiring (minimum).
c. For AC power wiring, use No. 12 minimum AWG. For AC signal and control wiring, use No. 14 minimum AWG. For wiring carrying more than 15 amps, use sizes required by NEC and JIC standards.
d. Group or bundle parallel runs of wire using covered troughs. Maximum bundle size to be 1-inch. Troughs shall have 40 percent spare capacity.
e. Install wire troughs along horizontal or vertical routes to present a neat appearance. Angled runs are not acceptable.
f. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or other movement.
g. Terminate all field wiring using forked, insulated, crimp-on connectors (soldered type not acceptable) at 600 V rated barrier type terminal strips with screwed connections and permanently affixed numeric identifiers beside each connection. Identifiers to be self-stick plastic tape strips with permanent type, machine printed numbers.
h. All wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from any one device, power will not be disrupted to any other device.
i. All alarms generated external to the panel, spare alarm, and repeat contacts shall be wired out to terminal blocks.
j. For internal component to component wiring only, compression type terminal blocks are acceptable.
k. Provide spare terminals equal in number to 20 percent of the terminals used for each type of wiring (e.g., DC signal and AC power).
l. Provide a separate terminal for grounding each shielded cable. m. Use separate 5/16-inch diameter copper grounding studs for instrument signal
cable shields and AC power. n. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent
cutting or abrading of insulation. o. When DC power and/or low voltage AC power is required, provide and install the
necessary power supplies and transformers in the panel. p. Provide complete wiring diagram showing "as-built" circuitry. Diagram shall be
enclosed in transparent plastic and placed in easily accessible pocket built into panel door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in conformance with NEC.
B. Unless otherwise noted, install free standing panels on 4-inch concrete pad. Lay grout after panel sills have been securely fastened down. Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides.
C. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor non-free standing NEMA 4X panels on a frame support made of steel channel as required. 1. Top of panels shall be no more than 6 feet above finished grade.
13330-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Channel support shall be designed and installed to handle the full weight of the individual panel and shall be installed to prevent sway motion in all directions. Angle supports shall be utilized to accomplish this.
3. Material of construction shall be appropriate for the area of installation. Corrosive areas require either stainless steel unistrut and hardware or PVC Coated.
D. Install and interconnect all equipment, devices, electrical hardware, instrumentation and controls and process controller components into and out of and among the enclosures as shown on the Drawings.
3.2 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Perform system testing and make any adjustments necessary to provide a complete accurate operating system as shown on the contract drawings. All PLC programming shall be performed by others.
B. Perform power supply, voltage adjustments to tolerances required by the appurtenant equipment.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
13331-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 13331
PANEL INSTRUMENTS AND DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown,
specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, adjust and place into satisfactory operation panel instruments and devices.
2. Drawings and Specifications illustrate and specify functional and general construction requirements of the panel components and do not necessarily show or specify all components, wiring, piping and accessories required to make a completely integrated system. CONTRACTOR shall provide all piping, wiring, accessories and labor required for a complete, workable and integrated system.
3. The RTU panel will be constructed and provided by the owner.
B. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of all items specified herein and required to ensure the complete and proper interfacing of all the components and systems.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Furnish instruments and devices by the named manufacturers or equal equipment by
other manufacturers. 2. The named manufacturers have been specified to establish the standard of quality
and performance of the equipment to be supplied. 3. Obtain all instruments or devices of a given type from the same manufacturer.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Instruments and devices shall not be assembled in the panels until all product information and system shop drawings for respective components have been approved.
1.4 IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. All panel instruments and devices shall have an identification tag meeting the following requirements: 1. Tag numbers shall be as shown on the drawings. 2. Identifying tag number shall be permanently etched or embossed onto a stainless
steel tag which shall be fastened to the device housing with stainless steel rivets or self tapping screws of appropriate size.
3. Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished, tags shall be permanently attached to the device by a circlet of 1/16-inch diameter stainless steel wire rope.
4. All instruments and devices mounted within panels shall have the stainless steel identification tag installed so that the numbers are easily visible to service personnel. Front of panel mounted components shall have the tag attached to the rear of the device.
5. Front of panel mounted components shall have plastic engraved nameplates.
13331-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PROCESS INDICATOR
A. Indicator shall be a minimum 4-1/2 digit, LED display, programmable.
B. Required Design and Construction Features: 1. Front panel LED type display. 2. 4-20 mADC optically isolated retransmission output if required. 3. Alarm Relays: Normally energized Form C contacts where required. 4. Inputs:
a. Thermocouple (B, C, D, G2, J, K, L, N/N, PL2, R, S and T). b. RTD (100 Ohm Pt ANSI or DIN 120 Ni, 100 Ni, 10Cu). c. DC Volts. -20 percent to 100 percent of spans from 20 mV to 5 VDC. d. AC Volts. 0 percent to 100 percent of spans from 1-600 VAC e. Strain Gauge. Transducer supply configures to provide 5, 7.5, 10 or 20 VDC
power. f. Sample Rate. 3 per second. g. 4-20mADC or 10-50mADC as required.
5. Ratings: a. Accuracy: 0.1 percent of full scale. b. Conformity: 0.2�C for thermocouples; 0.1�C for RTD. c. Normal Mode Rejection: 55 dB at 60 Hz. d. Common Mode Rejection: 120 dB at 60 Hz.
C. Supply transmitter power supply for all strain gauge applications.
D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Red Lion IMP or PAX as required. 2. Or approved equal.
2.2 POWER SUPPLIES
A. General: Single unit and multiple unit power supplies, located in control room panels, remote terminal units and field panels as required.
B. Single Unit Required Features: 1. Solid state circuitry. 2. Surface mounting. 3. Input Power: 117 Vac �10 percent, 60 Hz. 4. Output Power: 24 VDC or as required. 5. Line/Load Regulation: �0.005 percent. 6. Ripple: 0.25 mv RMS. 7. Overload Protection: Internal preset. 8. Include mounting brackets, fuse, and mating connector for AC power plug.
C. Multiple Unit Required Features: 1. Solid state circuitry. 2. Input Power: 120 VAC �10 percent, 60 Hz. 3. Output Power: 24 VDC or as required. 4. Include over-voltage protection, output current limiting protection, power supply
failure alarm contacts, provisions for paralleling power supplies and front panel mounted indicating fuses, test jacks and adjustments.
13331-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
5. If the power supplies are connected in parallel, provide isolation diodes in series with the positive lead of each of the parallel connected power supplies.
6. Connections: a. Twist-lock ac power connector. b. DC power terminal strip.
D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Acopian Corporation. 2. Power One. 3. Or equal.
2.3 CURRENT ISOLATOR
A. General: The isolating unit shall be a two wire, loop powered device. It shall accept a 4-20 mADC input signal and deliver a 4-20 mADC output.
B. Required Features: 1. Repeatability: �1 percent of span. 2. Ambient Temperature Range: -25°F to +185°F. 3. Linearity: ±0.1 percent of full scale. 4. Provide one spare isolator.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Weidmuller 2. Or equal.
2.4 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Type: General purpose, plug-in type rated for continuous duty.
B. Construction Features: 1. Coil Voltages: 24 VDC and 120 VAC as required. 2. Contacts:
a. Silver cadmium oxide rated not less than 5 amperes resistive at 120 VAC or 28 VDC continuous.
b. For switching low energy circuits (less than 200 mAdc) fine silver, gold flashed contacts rated not less than 3 amperes resistive at 120 VAC or 28 VDC continuous shall be provided.
3. Relays to have clear plastic dust cover. 4. Relays to be UL recognized.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Type R and/or Type K, as manufactured by Square D Company. 2. IDEC. 3. Or equal.
2.5 TIME DELAY RELAYS
A. Type: Dial adjustable, plug-in type time delay relay providing delay-on-make, delay-on-break or interval operation.
B. Construction Features: 1. MOS digital circuit with transformer coupled power.
13331-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Switch selectable ranges as follows: a. 1 second. b. 10 seconds. c. 1 minute. d. 10 minutes. e. 1 hour. f. 10 hours.
3. Minimum Setting: 3 percent of range, except 50 ms for 1 second range. 4. Contacts:
a. Type: DPDT. b. Rating: 7 amps resistive at 120 VAC, 7 amps at 24 VDC.
5. Housing: Plug-in design with dust and moisture resistant molded plastic case. 6. Power Input: 120 VAC and 24 VDC as required. 7. Relays shall be UL recognized.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Series 328, as manufactured by Automatic Timing and Controls Company. 2. IDEC. 3. Or equal.
2.6 SELECTOR SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS AND INDICATING LIGHTS
A. General: 1. Selector switches, pushbuttons and indicating lights shall be supplied by one
manufacturer and be of the same series or model type. 2. Type:
a. Heavy duty, oiltight. 3. Provide legend plate for indication of switch, pushbutton or light function (e.g.,
Open-Closed, Hand-Off-Auto). 4. Mounting: Flush mounted on control panel front, unless otherwise noted. 5. NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted.
B. Selector Switches: 1. Type: Provide selector switches with number of positions as required to perform
intended functions as shown and specified. 2. Contacts:
a. Provide number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform intended functions specified but not less than one single pole, double throw contact.
b. Type: Double break, silver contacts with movable contact blade providing scrubbing action.
c. Rating: Compatible with AC or DC current with devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts but not less than 10 amperes resistive at 120 volts AC or DC continuous.
3. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
C. Pushbuttons (Standard or Illuminated): 1. Type: Provide momentary lighted and/or unlighted, single and/or dual type
pushbuttons as required to perform intended functions specified and shown. 2. Contacts: Comply with the requirements specified for selector switches.
D. Indicating Lights: 1. Type: Compact, integral transformer type. 2. Lamps: 6 volt, long life (20,000 hours minimum).
13331-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Where shown on the Drawings, common, push to test circuitry shall be provided to simultaneously test all indicating lights on the panel using a single pushbutton.
E. Button and Lens Colors: 1. Red for indication of open, on, running. 2. Green for indication of closed, off (ready), stopped. 3. Amber for indication of equipment malfunction, process trouble and alarms (e.g., high
level, low level, etc.). 4. Blue for indication of equipment under local control. 5. White for indication of electric power available.
F. Rotary Cam Switches: 1. Provide rotary cam switches with number of positions and poles as required to
perform the required signal switching function specified and shown. 2. Contacts:
a. Gold-flashed contacts housed in mechanical contact blocks with number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform intended functions.
b. Contact Rating: Compatible with AC or DC throughput current of signals and devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts but not less than 20 amperes at 600 VAC or 250 VDC continuous.
3. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
G. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Square D. 2. Or equal.
2.7 ELAPSED TIME METER
A. General: The unit shall be a powered, non-reset, solid-state counter which provides silent, accurate and noise immune operation.
B. Required Features: 1. Power: 120 vac. 2. Display:
a. Digits: Six. 3. Input: 120 VAC. 4. Mounting: Provide accessories for panel mounting.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Crompton. 2. Or equal.
2.8 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE
A. General: Lightning and surge protection shall be provided for instrument and main power protection.
B. Required Features: 1. Amp Rating: 10 kA for instruments; 20 kA for main power. 2. Voltage Rating: Compatible with working voltage of protected device. 3. Reaction Time: nanosecond range. 4. Mounting: DIN rail. 5. Enclosure Rating: Intrinsically safe when noted.
13331-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Phoenix Contact. 2. Or equal.
2.9 RADIO
A. Manufacturer and Model: Per City of Prescott, IT department. No substitution.
B. Type: Frequency hopping spread spectrum radio transceiver 902-928 MHz part 15 Spread Spectrum with 8 selectable zones each containing 128 frequencies. Non licensed.
C. Power requirements: 13.8VDC (10.5-30 VDC operating range). 400mA.
2.10 COAXIAL CABLE PROTECTOR
A. Manufacturer: Polyphaser model IS-B50LN-C2. No Substitutions.
2.11 ANTENNA
A. Manufacturer: Scala model TY900. No equals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. All items shall be mounted and anchored in compliance with Section 13330, Panels and Enclosures.
3.2 START-UP, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING AND TRAINING
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 13321, General Requirements.
++ END OF SECTION ++
13341-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 13341
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS – FLOW DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for the flow related instruments.
B. Refer to Section 13300.
1.2 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
B. Test Equipment: 1. Refer to Section 13300.
1.3 ACCESSORIES
A. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting shall be provided.
B. Each instrument shall be provided with a manufacturer installed stainless steel tag identifying the instrument tag number.
C. Provide a sun shade for each exterior mounted instrument.
1.4 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS
A. Instruments specified herein shall meet at a minimum, the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) rating for non-hazardous locations listed with each instrument. Those instruments that are submerged in a liquid or are located in submersible area shall also meet NEMA 6 ratings approval. All instruments that are located in hazardous areas as indicated on the Electrical Classification Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule shall meet the Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC Class, Division and Group approvals and certifications listed for that area. The instrument shall have a stainless steel tag identifying the relevant approval or certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Magnetic Flowmeter (remote)
A. Flow Element: 1. Type:
a. Pulsed DC type.
13341-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Function/Performance: a. Operating Temperature: Process liquid temperatures of 0 to 140 degrees F or
greater dependent upon liner and an ambient of minus 30 to 150 degrees F. b. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) protection: RFI protection shall be
provided as recommended by the manufacturer. c. Pressure rating: Equal to piping system where meter is installed. Minimum
350 psi. d. Additional: Meter shall be capable of running empty indefinitely without
damage to any component. 3. Physical:
a. Metering Tube: 304 stainless steel or equivalent. b. Flanges: ANSI 150 lb. or DIN PN 16 carbon steel, as required by the piping
system, unless otherwise indicated. ANSI 150 lb. or DIN PN 16 stainless steel flanges shall be used on all SS process pipes.
c. Liner: Polyurethane or composite elastomer unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule.
d. Electrodes: 316 stainless steel standard minimum requirements. All electrodes to be compatible with process fluid as indicated on the Drawings or electrodes to be supplied as listed in the Instrument Device Schedule.
For sludge, polymer, or any slurry application where the electrodes will be coated, a self cleaning or a removable electrode option must be provided with that meter.
e. Housing: Meters below grade shall be suitable for submergence for up to 48 hours to a depth of 30 ft (9m). Meters above grade shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). Where hazardous areas are indicated on the Drawings, the equipment shall be rated for that area.
f. Finish: All external surfaces shall have a chemical and corrosion resistant finish.
4. Power Requirements: a. Meter shall be 24 VDC powered instrument, receiving its power from
transmitter. 5. Accessories/Documentation Required:
a. Factory calibration: All meters shall be factory calibrated. A copy of the report shall be included in the O&M manual.
b. Grounding: Meter shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. Provide ground ring, ground wires, gaskets, etc., as required. All materials shall be suitable for the liquid being measured and must be compatible with process fluid and with the process pipe.
c. Signal cable for installation between the flowtube and the transmitter. Length shall be as required by installation indicated on the Drawings.
B. Flow Converter/Transmitter 1. Type:
a. Micro processor based, intelligent transmitter compatible with flowtube provided.
b. Mounted remote from the flowtube. 2. Functional/Performance:
a. Accuracy (including flowtube): Plus/minus 0.5 percent of flowrate. b. Operating Temperature: –20 to 140 degrees F.
13341-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
c. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA with HART protocol. Current output adjustable over the full range of the instrument. A dry contact rated for 120 VAC, 2A to indicate reverse flow.
d. Diagnostics: Self diagnostics with on screen display of faults. e. Display: Digital indicator displaying flow in engineering units indicated in the
Instrument Device Schedule. f. Totalizer: A fully configurable totalizer integral to the transmitter. Totalized
flow shall be displayed. g. Empty Tube Zero: The transmitter shall include a feature that will lock the
output at zero when no flow is detected. The empty tube zero feature shall be enabled automatically when the transmitter detects no flow or manually through a contact input.
h. Provide electrode cleaning unit to match flow element requirements. 3. Physical:
a. Transmitter shall be suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. b. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X (IP65).
4. Power Requirements: a. The transmitter shall be 120 VAC powered instrument.
5. Accessories/ Required: a. Keypad where required for transmitter configuration.
C. Manufacturer: 1. Endress+Hauser 2. Siemens 3. Krohne Optiflux 2000 or 4000 Series with IFC-3000 Transmitter. 4. No Equal
2.2 Magnetic Flowmeter (integral)
A. Flow Element 1. Type:
a. Pulsed DC type. 2. Function/Performance:
a. Operating Temperature: Process liquid temperatures of 0 to 140 degrees F or greater dependent upon liner and an ambient of minus 30 to 150 degrees F.
b. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) protection: RFI protection shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer.
c. Pressure rating: Equal to piping system where meter is installed. d. Additional: Meter shall be capable of running empty indefinitely without
damage to any component. 3. Physical:
a. Metering Tube: 304 stainless steel or equivalent. b. Flanges: ANSI 150 lb. or DIN PN 16 carbon steel, as required by the piping
system, unless otherwise indicated. ANSI 150 lb. or DIN PN 16 stainless steel flanges shall be used on all SS process pipes.
c. Liner: Polyurethane or composite elastomer unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule.
d. Electrodes: 316 stainless steel standard minimum requirements. All electrodes to be compatible with process fluid as indicated on the Drawings or electrodes to be supplied as listed in the Instrument Device Schedule.
13341-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
For sludge, polymer, or any slurry application where the electrodes will be coated, a self cleaning or a removable electrode option must be provided with that meter.
e. Housing: Meters shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). Where hazardous areas are indicated on the Drawings, the equipment shall be rated for that area.
f. Finish: All external surfaces shall have a chemical and corrosion resistant finish.
4. Power Requirements: a. Meter shall be 24 VDC powered instrument, receiving its power from integral
transmitter. 5. Accessories/Documentation Required:
a. Factory calibration: All meters shall be factory calibrated. A copy of the report shall be included in the O&M manual.
b. Grounding: Meter shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. Provide ground ring, ground wires, gaskets, etc., as required. All materials shall be suitable for the liquid being measured and must be compatible with process fluid and with the process pipe.
B. Flow Converter/Transmitter: 1. Type:
a. Micro processor based, intelligent transmitter shall be mounted integral and on top of the meter.
2. Functional/Performance: a. Accuracy (including flowtube): Plus/minus 0.5 percent of flowrate. b. Operating Temperature: –20 to 140 degrees F. c. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA with HART protocol. Current output adjustable over
the full range of the instrument. A dry contact rated for 120 VAC, 2A to indicate reverse flow.
d. Diagnostics: Self diagnostics with on screen display of faults. e. Display: Digital indicator displaying flow in engineering units indicated in the
Instrument Device Schedule. f. Totalizer: A fully configurable totalizer integral to the transmitter. Totalized
flow shall be displayed. g. Empty Tube Zero: The transmitter shall include a feature that will lock the
output at zero when no flow is detected. The empty tube zero feature shall be enabled automatically when the transmitter detects no flow or manually through a contact input.
h. Provide electrode cleaning unit to match flow element requirements. 3. Physical:
a. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). Where hazardous areas are indicated on the Drawings, the equipment shall be rated for that area.
b. Transmitter to be integral to meter. 4. Power Requirements:
a. The transmitter shall be 120 VAC powered instrument. 5. Accessories/ Required:
a. Keypad or remote device where required for transmitter configuration depending upon area classification.
C. Manufacturer(s): 1. Endress+Hauser 2. Siemens
13341-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Krohne Optiflux 2000 or 4000 Series with IFC-3000 Transmitter. 4. No Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. See execution requirements in Section 13300.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
13343-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 13343
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS – PRESSURE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for the field-mounted instruments as detailed on the Drawings.
B. Refer to Section 13300.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.8 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION.
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
B. Accessories:
13343-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting shall be provided.
2. Each instrument shall be provided with a manufacturer installed stainless steel tag identifying the instrument tag number.
1.10 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS
A. Instruments for hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instrument specifications in Part 2 state the Class, Division, and gas groups for FM/CSA approval, followed in parenthesis by the CENELEC certification; however, instruments provided are only required to have the approval/certification stated above. The instrument shall have a stainless steel tag identifying the relevant approval or certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Diaphragm Seal - Threaded
A. Type: 1. Thread attached. 2. Welded Metal Diaphragm.
B. Function/Performance: 1. Maximum Pressure: Two times the maximum process pressure. Minimum 350
psi. 2. Operating Temperature: -40 to 100 degrees C.
C. Physical: 1. All 316L stainless steel construction. 2. Teflon gaskets and O rings on process connection. 3. Bleeding connection provided. NOTE: filling screw not recommended since it
provides poor quality measurement if done incorrectly in the field.
D. Accessories Required: 1. Stainless steel armored capillary tubing as required for the installation.
E. Manufacturer(s): 1. Ashcroft. 2. Ronningen-Petter Company. 3. Siemens 7MF4861 4. Equal.
2.2 Diaphragm Seal - Annular Flange Mounted
A. Type: 1. Line mounted, between two flanges.
B. Function/Performance:
13343-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Pressure Limit: Correspond to flange ratings. 2. Inside diameter shall conform to the dimensions of the pipe where the seal is
installed. 3. ANSI or DIN flange class shall be equivalent to the flange class of the piping
where the seal is installed. Bolting dimensions shall conform to ANSI or DIN drilling specifications as required by the installation.
C. Physical: 1. Body material: Carbon steel. 2. Process connection: 1/4-inch NPT. 3. Sensing Sleeve: Buna-N. 4. Sensing Liquid: Silicone Oil.
D. Manufacturer(s): 1. Red Valve Company, Inc. 2. Wika. 3. Siemens 7MF4880 (we resell the Wika seal) 4. Equal.
2.3 Gauge Pressure or Pressure Sensing Level Transmitters
A. Type: 1. Microprocessor based, intelligent type.
B. Function/Performance: 1. Range: Range of the transmitter shall be the standard range of the manufacturer
closest to the pressure range to be metered. 2. Accuracy: 0.075 percent of span. 3. Operating Temperature: -20 to 80 degrees C. 4. Temperature Effect: Combined temperature effects shall be less than 0.2 percent
of maximum span per 28 degrees C temperature change. 5. Output: 4-20 mA DC linear with pressure or level, with HART protocol. Zero
adjustable over the range of the instrument provided calibrated span is greater than the minimum calibrated span.
6. Stability: 0.05 percent of upper range limit for 1 year. 7. Display: Digital indicator displaying pressure or level in the engineering units
indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. 8. Diagnostics:
a. Self-diagnostics with transmitter failure driving output to above or below out of range limits.
b. Simulation capability for inputs and loop outputs. c. Test terminals available to ease connection for test equipment without opening
the loop. d. Registers to record minimum and maximum pressure and temperatures
transmitter has been exposed to shall be available. e. Run-time clock available to determine usage for warranty purposes. 5-year
warranty on this clock reading is included. 9. Over Range Protection: Provide positive over range protection to 150 percent of
the maximum pressure of the system being monitored by the instrument. 10. If required to meet the range or suppression/elevation requirements, a differential
pressure transmitter shall be provided.
13343-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Physical: 1. Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP66). 2. Process Wetted Parts: Isolating diaphragm and other wetted metal parts shall be
316L stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated in the device schedule. Gaskets and O rings shall be Teflon.
3. Power Supply: 24 VDC loop power. 4. Sensor Fill Fluid: Silicone.
D. Accessories Required: 1. Provide span and zero adjustment at each transmitter and through the handheld
programming unit. a. Configuration of the transmitter may be accomplished using the local display
and pushbuttons without the use of an external programming device. NOTE: Siemens, ABB and Foxboro have this capability
2. For each transmitter provide a 316 stainless steel block & bleed shut off valve. Valves may be mounted directly to the instrument or separately mounted. Valves shall be by the instrument manufacturer or by D/A Manufacturing or Anderson Greenwood.
E. Manufacturer(s): 1. Rosemount 2. Foxboro 3. Or Equal.
2.4 Pressure Switch
A. Type: 1. Diaphragm actuated.
B. Function/Performance: 1. Repeatability: Better than 1 percent of full scale. 2. Setpoint: Field adjustable and set between 30 and 70 percent of the adjustable
range. 3. Dead Band: Fixed unless adjustable dead band requirement is noted in the
Instrument Device Schedule. 4. Reset: Unit shall be of the automatic reset type unless noted otherwise in the
Instrument Device Schedule. 5. Over Range Protection: Over range protection to 150 percent of the maximum
process line pressure. 6. Output: Single pole double throw (SPDT) unless requirement for double pole
double throw (DPDT) switch is shown on the instrument device schedule. Switch rating shall be 10 A at 230 VAC.
C. Physical: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X (IP65) for non hazardous areas. For installation in hazardous
areas, housing shall be explosion proof approved for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D (EEx d IIB).
2. Switch Assemblies: Hermetically sealed switches. 3. Wetted Parts: 316L stainless steel diaphragm, viton seals, 316 stainless steel
connection port.
13343-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Accessories/Options Required: 1. Shutoff Valve: Provide a 316 stainless steel shutoff valve. Valve shall be by D/A
Manufacturing, Anderson Greenwood, or Equal. 2. Where indicate on the instrument device schedule, provide a 316 SS snubber for
pulsation dampening.
E. Manufacturer(s): 1. Static-O-Ring (SOR). 2. Ashcroft. 3. Mercoid. 4. Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. See execution requirements in Section 13300.
++ END OF SECTION ++
15010-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15010
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Details of each pipe support type used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT SYSTEMS:
A. Channel-type support systems 1. 304 Stainless Steel
a. Unistrut b. B-Line c. Or Equal.
2. Non-metallic a. Aikenstrut b. CLIC c. Or Equal.
B. Hanger- and Clevis-type support systems 1. B-line 2. Anvil 3. Or Equal
C. Stanchion-type support systems 1. B-Line 2. Anvil 3. Or Equal
D. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Support 1. B-Line, Figure B-3092 2. Or Equal
E. Wall Bracket (14-inch to 24-inch pipe) 1. B-Line Figure B-3067 Heavy Duty Angle Bracket 2. Or Equal
F. Wall Bracket (8-inch to 12-inch pipe) 1. B-Line Figure B-3066 Medium Duty Angle Bracket 2. Or Equal
G. Wall Bracket (4-inch to 6-inch pipe) 1. B-Line Figure B-3068 Light Duty Angle Bracket 2. Or Equal
15010-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. In addition to the pipe supports specifically called for on the drawings, CONTRACTOR shall provide pipe supports as required to fully support all piping systems.
B. CONTRACTOR shall design, supply and install pipe support system using manufacturer’s standard available pipe support hardware.
C. Pipe supports shall, at a minimum, be installed at the following locations: 1. On both sides of each valve, piece of equipment or other appurtenance, such that
allowance is made for removal of the valve, piece of equipment, or other appurtenance while leaving the pipe system fully supported. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment.
2. Along straight runs of pipe, the maximum distance between supports shall be as listed below: Pipe Diameter Maximum Distance
Between Supports Minimum Hanger Rod Diameter
(if Hanger Rods are used) 2” and smaller 6-feet ½” 2-1/2” to 6” 8-feet ¾”
8” to 12” 10-feet 2 @ ¾” 14” to 18” 10-feet 2 @ 1” Over 18” Custom Design
3. Directly supporting valves 8-inch in diameter and larger. 4. At least two supports on each side of flexible couplings or flanged coupling adapters
to provide that no load is applied to the flexible coupling. 5. On the pipe within two pipe diameters of each side of elbows and each branch of tees
and crosses. 6. Where piping passes through walls, such that no load is transferred to the wall.
D. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 69, Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application and MSS SP 89, Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation, unless shown otherwise. 1. Support no pipe from the pipe above it. 2. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane
runs.
E. Bracing and lateral support: 1. Provide vertical sway bracing on 10-foot maximum centers
a. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing.
2. Install lateral supports for seismic loads at all changes in direction.
F. Thermal expansion and thrust restraint 1. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct
and control thermal expansion.
G. Support types: 1. Horizontal Suspended Piping:
a. Single Pipes: Adjustable swivel-ring, splint-ring or clevis hangers.
15010-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger systems. c. For insulated piping, furnish galvanized steel protection shields, welding insulation
saddles, or precut sections of rigid insulation (with vapor barrier) at all hanger locations.
2. Horizontal Piping Supported From Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets or wall clips attached to wall with anchors. Clips
attached to wall-mounted framing also acceptable. b. Stacked Piping:
1) Wall-mounted framing system and clips acceptable for piping smaller than 3-inch minimal diameter.
2) Piping clamps that resist axial movement of pipe through support not acceptable.
c. Insulated piping shall have the insulation removed in the vicinity of wall brackets and piping clips to allow only direct pipe wall contact with the support system.
3. Horizontal Piping Supported From Floors: a. Stanchion Type:
1) Pedestal type; adjustable with stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. 2) Use yoked saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is 18 inches or
greater above the floor and for all exterior installations. 3) Provide neoprene waffle isolation pad under anchoring flanges, adjacent to
equipment or where otherwise required to provide vibration isolation. b. Floor-Mounted Channel Supports:
1) Use for piping smaller than 3-inch nominal diameter running along floors and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports.
2) Attach channel framing to floors with anchor bolts. 3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps.
c. Concrete Cradles: 1) Use for piping larger than 3-inch along floor and in trenches at piping
elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type. 4. Vertical Pipe:
a. Support with wall brackets and base elbow or riser clamps on floor penetrations. b. Insulated piping shall have the insulation removed in the vicinity of wall brackets
and riser clamps, to allow only direct wall contact with the support system.
H. Standard Attachments: 1. To Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts. 2. To Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments. 3. To Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than 2-1/2 inches
thick. 4. To Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with anchor bolts. 5. Existing Walls and Ceilings: Install as specified for new construction, unless shown
otherwise. 6. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are made.
I. Isolation: 1. Install elastomeric inserts designed to isolate piping from pipe supports where copper
pipe is run in stainless steel supports, or where other dissimilar metals are in contact with pipe supports.
J. Materials: 1. Channel-type, hanger-type and trapeze-type support systems and pipe racks
constructed of channel systems:
15010-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Provide non-metallic support systems in all chemical storage and feed areas. Provide type 316 stainless steel fasteners.
b. Provide type 304 stainless steel support systems and fasteners in all other areas. 2. Stanchion-type support systems
a. Provide steel and ductile iron stanchion components b. Coat stanchions after assembly per specification Section 09900, Painting.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
15080-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15080
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish, install, test
and place in satisfactory operation the following equipment as shown on the drawings and as specified herein to prevent the freezing of the corresponding wetted components: a. Insulation and Heat Trace Systems:
1) Valves and piping smaller than 4” 2) Pilot systems for control valves 3) Instrumentation
b. Removable Insulation Wrap: 1) Valves 4” and larger
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Heat Trace Equipment:
a. Complete layout and installation drawings for the heat tracing system showing mounting details, dimensions, fitting locations, materials of construction, including Manufacturer's literature, catalog cuts and specifications for the equipment and accessories, showing performance data, electrical wiring and point-to-point connection drawings.
b. Listing of heat trace cable types identifying where they are used. 2. Insulation:
a. Thermal properties b. Physical Properties c. Fire Hazard Ratings d. Facing information e. Fabrication information for pipe fittings and valve insulation and coatings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. General: 1. Operating Conditions:
a. Ambient Temperature: -20°F to 110°F b. Location: Outdoors, exposed c. Wind Speed: 20 mph maximum
2.2 PIPE INSULATON
A. Rigid Fiberglass with PVC Cover 1. Material:
15080-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Insulation: UL rated, preformed, sectional rigid fiberglass b. Weatherproof Vapor Barrier Insulation Jacket:
1) Type: Smooth or embossed aluminum metal jacket coated on the interior to resist corrosion, or smooth stainless steel.
2) Thickness: 0.016-inches. 3) Moisture Barrier: Polycraft. 4) Fastening: Pre-formed "Z"-lock seam with 2-inch butt strap with sealant. 5) Bands: 1/2-inch aluminum or SS bands with wing seals.
c. Cover: Preformed PVC Cover 1) UV resistant 2) Joints designed to shed water 3) Color: White 4) Shell shall be two halves (clamshell) with closing clasp to keep system inplace
but shall be easily removable. 5) Provide Identification Labels per the requirements of 10400 – Identification
Devices to identify liquid service of insulated piping. 2. Insulation Thickness: 2-inches 3. Temperature Rating: -60 degrees to 850 degrees Fahrenheit 4. Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and minimum of 0.27 BTU-in/hr-ft2
degrees F at 75 degrees F per ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. 5. Minimum water vapor transmission of 0.02 perm-inch per ASTM E96 6. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25 per ASTM E84 7. Fittings:
a. Insulate with fabricated sections of insulation b. Wrap with vapor barrier jacket
8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglass; ASJ/SSL-II with PVC Cover b. Johns Manville Corp; Micro-Lok 650 with AP-T Plus Jacket and PVC Cover c. Or Equal.
2.3 HEAT TRACING
A. Parallel resistance, low watt density, self limiting output electrical cable heaters. Designed for use on metallic or non-metallic piping, under insulation, for freeze protection.
B. Features: 1. Two 16 AWG multistrand copper buss wire 2. Extruded in a self-regulating conductive polymer core with polyolefin inner jacket 3. Tinned copper braid for mechanical protection and ground path 4. Covered with a thermoplastic elastomer overjacket for chemical protection. Suitable
for use in chemical areas. 5. Designed to be field-cut and spliced 6. 120VAC 7. 8 watts/foot 8. Allowable circuit length up to 880 feet 9. Approximately 3/8 inch by 1/8 inch 10. Approved for use on equipment located outdoors exposed to outside ambient
conditions.
C. Provide all connectors, cables and other appurtenances required for a complete installation.
D. Manufacturers and Products:
15080-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Chromalox; Model SRL 2. Tempco; Style SL 3. Raychem; Model BTV 4. Or Equal
2.4 REMOVABLE INSULATION WRAP
A. Features: 1. Insulation shall have a minimum k- factor .26, using fiberglass blanket. 2. Outer jacket shall be made of material equal to DuPont Tychem® QC, overlapping
and completely covering the insulation with seams joined by tabs made from hook and loop fasteners (Velcro). Butt ends shall have sewn- in-place elastic.
3. Outer jacket shall overlap adjoining sections of pipe insulation as required. 4. Installation shall not require the use of any special hand tools. 5. Outdoor vertical applications should be sealed on all North Ends by the use of a white
matching PVC tape or equal.
B. Manufacturers: 1. No Sweat Valve Wraps, Inc. 2. Or Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION WETTED COMPONENT PRODUCT
Valves and pipes less than 4” Rigid Fiberglass with PVC Cover, and Heat Tracing
Valves 4” and Larger Removable Insulation Wrap
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install heat tracing per manufacturer’s instructions 1. Provide electrical service to heat tracing from nearest 120V panelboard or receptacle,
whether shown on the electrical drawings or not. Electrical service shall be in accordance with all codes and regulations for the installation.
B. Install insulation according to manufacturer’s instructions 1. Install insulation only after piping system has passed pressure testing. 2. Requirement for insulation does not negate the requirement for coating of the piping
system. Apply piping coating system as called for in 15100 PS – Piping Schedule. Allow coating system to completely cure prior to installation of pipe insulation.
3. If heat tracing is required on piping system, do not install pipe insulation until after heat tracing has been installed and successfully tested.
4. Do not “gap” insulation at pipe supports. Trim insulation to allow for pipe support while providing continuous insulation of piping in those parts of the pipe not in contact with pipe support.
5. Install removable/replaceable insulation sections and cover panels over fittings or valves which require maintenance access.
6. Use accessories, adhesives and tapes per manufacturer’s recommendations.
15080-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Finishing 1. Overall installation shall result in smooth, straight, neat and clean piping insulation
system. No frayed ends, irregular lumps or other unsightly installation result will be acceptable.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
15100-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15100
PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product data sheets for each piping system.
a. Include information on pipe, fittings and joint systems. 2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification
of materials of construction. 3. Complete descriptions and data for all coatings and linings. 4. Tests and inspection data for pipe and coatings/linings.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEETS
A. Piping system data sheets (PSDS) have been attached to this Specification and are incorporated herein by reference. Provide piping systems in accordance with piping system data sheets.
2.2 THRUST RESTRAINT
A. Provide rigid or restrained joints and fittings for all piping systems specified with a test pressure in the Pipe Schedule.
B. Unless otherwise specified in the Pipe Schedule or shown on the Drawings, thrust blocks shall not be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE SCHEDULE
A. A Pipe Schedule has been attached to this Specification and is incorporated herein by reference. Install piping systems in accordance with Pipe Schedule.
B. For pipe which is shown on the Drawings, but not referenced in the Pipe Schedule, CONTRACTOR to provide pipe material and fittings which are appropriate for the intended service and acceptable to the ENGINEER.
15100-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.
B. Repair any coatings or linings which were damaged during shipping and handling using manufacturer-approved coating and lining repair materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise
shown or specified.
B. Joint Assembly: 1. Flanged Joints (FLG):
a. Bolt Holes: Straddle vertical centerlines, aligned with connecting equipment flanges or as shown.
b. Follow a bolt tightening pattern which produces uniform bearing pressure. c. Do not over-tighten bolts. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for bolt torque. d. Provide gasket at every flanged joint. e. Provide insulating flange kit where indicated on Drawings and required in this
Specification. 2. Threaded and Coupled Joints (THR):
a. Conform to ANSI B1.20.1. b. Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when screwed home in
fittings. c. Ream pipe ends and clean chips and burrs after threading. d. Make connections with not more than three threads exposed. e. Lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant or tape as specified on Piping
Data Sheets. f. PVC Threaded Joints:
1) Provide Schedule 80 threaded nipple where necessary to connect to threaded valve or fitting.
2) Use strap wrench for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not overtighten fittings.
g. Provide dielectric union or insulating coupling where indicated on Drawings and required in this Specification.
3. Grooved-End Joints (GRV): a. Type: Rigid, except where joints are used to correct misalignment, to provide
flexibility, and where shown otherwise, in which case provide flexible type. 4. Soldered Joints (SLD):
a. Before soldering, remove stems and washers from solder joint valves. b. Use only solder specified for particular service. c. Cut pipe ends square and remove fins and burrs. d. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during soldering.
1) Protect from high temperatures due to flame 2) Protect from damage due to dripping flux or solder
e. After thoroughly cleaning pipe and fitting of oil and grease using solvent and emery cloth, apply noncorrosive flux to the male end only.
f. Solder Joint g. Wipe excess solder from exterior of joint before hardened.
15100-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
5. Solvent Welded Joints (SLV): a. Use only solvent cement which is rated for use in the service intended. Check
compatibility of solvent cement with service, especially in pipelines which carry chemicals.
b. Observe all manufacturer’s requirements for environmental conditions for use of solvent cement.
c. Cut pipe ends square and remove fins and burrs. d. Apply appropriate primer. e. Apply solvent cement and assemble joint.
1) Hold in place long enough for solvent cement to set-up and hold joint, as assembled, until solvent cement has cured.
f. Wipe excess solvent cement from exterior of joint before hardened. 6. Proprietary Restrained Mechanical Joints (PRJ):
a. PRJ piping shall be furnished with factory-fabricated retainer weldment on spigot end.
b. If PRJ piping is field cut, the pipe joint shall be restrained using Restrained Mechanical Joint (RMJ) Glands as specified in Section 15120, Piping Specialties. Field welding of retainer weldment will not be allowed.
7. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Dielectric Unions: a. Applications: Provide insulating flange, coupling or di-electric union for all joints at
the following locations: 1) Dissimilar metal piping connections. 2) Cathodically protected piping penetration to buildings. 3) Submerged to unsubmerged metallic piping connections. 4) Where required for electrically insulated connection.
b. Installation: 1) Insulating joints connecting immersed piping to non-immersed piping shall be
installed above maximum water surface elevation. 2) Align and install insulating joints according to manufacturer's
recommendations to avoid damaging insulating materials.
C. Exposed Piping Installation: 1. Piping Runs:
a. Parallel to building or column lines and perpendicular to floor, unless shown otherwise.
b. Piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices shall provide straight lengths as required for accurate flow measurement.
2. Supports: As specified in Section 15010, PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS. 3. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve building
space and not interfere with use of space and other work. 4. Provide unions or flanges at each piping connection to equipment or instrumentation
on equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation and removal. 5. Install piping so that no load or movement in excess of that stipulated by equipment
manufacturer will be imposed upon equipment connection; 6. Install piping to allow for contraction and expansion without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment. 7. Piping clearance, unless otherwise shown:
a. Over Walkway and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet 6 inches, measured from walking surface or stair tread to lowest extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
b. Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping: Minimum 3 feet 0 inch, measured from equipment extremity and extremity of piping system
15100-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
c. From Adjacent Work: Minimum 1 inch from nearest extremity of completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
d. Do not route piping in front of or to interfere with access ways, ladders, stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows.
e. Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows shall not be less than the top of the opening.
f. Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer vaults or electrical equipment rooms.
g. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or other similar electrical work.
D. Buried Pipe Installation: 1. Pipe Placement:
a. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. b. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or damage to
pipe. c. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement.
1) Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement operations are not in progress and at close of day’s work.
d. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. e. Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical closure of
spigot into bell. Utilize a maximum of 75 percent of manufacturer’s recommended allowable joint deflection. 1) If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths will not accommodate horizontal or
vertical curves in alignment, provide: a) Shorter pipe lengths. b) Fittings/bends.
f. Secure pipe which has been placed from movement or damage while placing the next section of pipe.
g. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.
E. Cleaning: 1. Following assembly and testing, and prior to disinfection and final acceptance, flush
pipelines with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until foreign matter is removed. At a minimum, flush for a period of time which will flush the entire pipeline volume three times. a. If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps, clean in-place from inside by
brushing and sweeping, then flush line at lower velocity. If lower velocity is used, flush the entire pipeline volume five times.
2. Provide temporary means of removing flushing water from pipeline during flushing. 3. Provide means for removal/screening of debris from the flushing water, disposal of
debris and disposal of flushing water.
3.4 TESTING
A. Pressure test piping in accordance with the Pipe Schedule, and Section 15990, Pressure Testing of Piping Systems.
15100-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.5 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The following supplements are attached to this Specification section and incorporated herein by reference: 1. 15100 PS – Pipe Schedule 2. 15100 PSDS DIP – Ductile Iron Pipe 3. 15100 PSDS PVC1 - Solvent Welded PVC Pipe
+ + END OF SECTION + +
15100 PS-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15100 PS
PIPE SCHEDULE
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: 1. This schedule is provided for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR. Some flow
streams may be shown on the drawings, but not listed here.
B. Flow Stream IDs: 1. PW – Potable Water 2. DR – Drain Pipe
C. Pipe Materials: 1. DIP – Ductile Iron Pipe
D. Joint Types: 1. FLG – Flanged 2. PRJ – Proprietary Restrained Mechanical Joint 3. RMJ – Restrained Mechanical Joint 4. SLV – Solvent Welded Socket
E. Lining Systems: 1. CM – Cement Mortar
F. Coating Systems: As described in Section 09900
15100 PS-2
City of Prescott Jan 2016 Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 60% Submittal
1.2 PIPE SCHEDULE
Contractor shall install piping systems in accordance with the following pipe schedule: FLOW STREAM I.D.
DESCRIPTION SERVICE EXPOSURE SIZE RANGE MATERIAL JOINT
TYPE TEST PRESSURE LINING
COATING SYSTEM/ COLOR
NOTES
W Potable Water – High Pressure
Water
Buried All DIP PRJ/RMJ 350 psi Cement-Mortar
Asphaltic + Poly Wrap
All components within and attached to the “W” piping system shall have a working pressure rating of 350 psi.
Exposed All DIP FLG 350 psi Cement-Mortar No. 300/Tan
DR Drain Pipe Water Buried All PVC1 SLV 10 psi None None Exposed All PVC1 SLV 10 psi None No. 301/Tan
.
15100 PSDS DIP-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15100 PSDS DIP
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET – DUCTILE IRON PIPE
ITEM DESCRIPTION Pipe Buried Piping: Pressure class as indicated in the pipe schedule. If
not indicated: All pipe shall be pressure class 350.
Flanged Piping: Pressure class as indicated in the pipe schedule. If not indicated:
All pipe shall be pressure class 350.
Lining Water: Cement-Mortar: AWWA C104/A21.4. Coating Unless otherwise specified in the Pipe Schedule, piping shall be coated
as follows: Buried Piping:
AWWA C151/A21.51: Minimum 1-mil asphaltic coating. AWWA C105/A21.5: Polyethylene encasement, 4-mil high-
density cross laminated or 8-mil linear-low density, color as required by local/state regulations.
Exposed/Immersed Piping: Primer Coating: Where shop primer is applied to protect pipe
during shipping, storage and handling, primer shall be compatible with pipe coating requirements of Section 09900, Painting.
Fittings Lined and coated same as pipe. Push-On (PO): AWWA C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.11, gray or ductile iron, 350 psi minimum working pressure. American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Fastite Joint; U.S. Pipe and Foundry, Tyton Joint. Mechanical (MJ): AWWA C110/A21.10, C111/A21.11, and C153/A21.53 gray or ductile iron, 350 psi minimum working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron. Restrained Mechanical Joint (RMJ): Standard MJ Fittings with RMJ Gland conforming to requirements of Section 15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES. Proprietary Restrained (PRJ): AWWA C111/A21.11 and C153/A21.53, ductile iron, 350 psi minimum working pressure. Clow Corp., Super-Lock Joint; American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring Joint; U.S. Pipe, TR Flex. Grooved End (GRV): AWWA C606 and C110/A21.10, ductile iron, 350 psi minimum working pressure. Victaulic. Flange (FLG): AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, flat face. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.
Joints Push-On (PO): 350 psi minimum working pressure, AWWA C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.11. American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Fastite Joint; U.S. Pipe and Foundry, Tyton Joint.
15100 PSDS DIP-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
ITEM DESCRIPTION Mechanical (MJ): 350 psi minimum working pressure. Restrained Mechanical Joint (RMJ): Standard MJ Joint with RMJ gland conforming to requirements of Section 15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES. Proprietary Restrained (PRJ): 350 psi minimum working pressure. Clow Corp., Super-Lock; American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring; U.S. Pipe, TR Flex. Grooved End (GRV): Rigid type radius cut conforming to AWWA C606, 350 psi minimum working pressure. Victaulic. Flange (FLG): flat face, ductile iron, threaded conforming to AWWA C115/A21.15. Gray cast iron will not be allowed. Branch connections 3 inches and smaller, shall be made with service saddles as specified in Section 15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES. Weldolet connections are not permitted.
Couplings Grooved End: 350 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per ASTM A47 or ductile iron per ASTM A536. Victaulic. Grooved End Adapter Flanges: 350 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per ASTM A47 or ductile iron per ASTM A536. Victaulic.
Bolting T-Bolts and other specialty bolts: Type 304 stainless steel Hex Bolts: ASTM A320 B8, Type 304 stainless steel Nuts: ASTM A320 Grade B8, Type 304 stainless steel
Gaskets Push-On, Mechanical, and Proprietary Restrained Joints: Red Rubber (SBR) conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Grooved End Joints: Halogenated butyl conforming to ASTM D2000 and AWWA C606. Flanged, Water and Sewage Service: 1/8 inch-thick, red rubber (SBR), hardness 80 (Shore A), rated to 200 degrees F, conforming to ANSI B16.21, AWWA C207, and ASTM D1330, Grades 1 and 2. Full face for 125-pound flat-faced flanges, flat-ring type for 250-pound raised-face flanges. Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering the entire inside face with the gasket cemented to the blind flange. Gasket pressure rating to equal or exceed the system hydrostatic test pressure.
Joint Lubricant
Manufacturer's standard.
15100 PSDS PVC1-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15100 PSDS PVC1
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET – SOLVENT WELDED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Pipe Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), unless indicated otherwise. Type I, Grade I or Class 12454-B conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Pipe shall be manufactured with 1% titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.
Fittings Schedule to match pipe above, ASTM D2466 and ASTM D2467 for socket weld type and Schedule 80 ASTM D2464 for threaded type. Fittings shall be manufactured with 1% titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.
Joints Solvent socket weld except where connection to threaded valves and equipment may require future disassembly.
Flanges One piece, molded hub type PVC flat face flange in accordance with Fittings above, 125-pound ANSI B16.1 drilling
Bolting Hex Bolts: ASTM A193 B8, Type 304 stainless steel Nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 8, Type 304 stainless steel
Gaskets Flat-Face Mating Flange: Full-faced 1/8-inch thick EPDM rubber.
Solvent Cement As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer conforming to ASTM D2564, except solvent weld cement for PVC pipe joints in sodium hypochlorite service shall be free of silica filler and shall be certified by the manufacturer to be suitable for that service. Certification shall be submitted.
Thread Sealant Teflon Tape.
15120-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Manufacturer’s data on materials, construction, end connections, ratings, overall
lengths, etc.
B. All piping specialties shall be rated for 350 psi working pressure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SERVICE SADDLES
A. Double-Strap Iron: 1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 350 psi internal pressure without leakage or
over stressing. 2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which saddle is installed. 3. Taps: Iron pipe threads. 4. Materials:
a. Body: Malleable or ductile iron. b. Straps: Galvanized steel. c. Hex Nuts and Washers: Steel. d. Seal: Rubber.
5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Smith-Blair. b. Dresser. c. Or Equal
2.2 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
A. Flexible Couplings (FC) 1. Features:
a. Description: Sleeve-type flexible couplings b. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping. c. Sleeve material: Carbon steel for carbon steel and ductile iron piping systems, or
stainless steel for stainless steel piping systems. d. Coating and Lining: All cast and carbon steel components shall be epoxy lined
and coated, minimum 16 mils thickness. For potable water service, lining shall be NSF-61 certified.
e. Gasket: EPDM f. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, prime coated. Buried couplings
shall have Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.
15120-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3) Or Equal.
B. Flanged Coupling Adapters (FCA) 1. Features:
a. Description: One end of adapter shall be flanged and the other end shall have a sleeve type flexible coupling.
b. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping. c. Adapter body material: Cast iron or steel. d. Gasket: EPDM e. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, prime coated. Buried couplings
shall have Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.. 3) Or Equal.
C. Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapters (RFCA) 1. Features:
a. Description: One end of adapter shall be flanged and the other end shall have a sleeve type flexible coupling.
b. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping. c. Adapter body material: Cast iron or steel. d. Gasket: EPDM e. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, prime coated. Buried couplings
shall have Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. f. Restraining lug.
2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1) Romac Industries; RFCA 2) Or Equal.
D. Restraint Rods for Flexible Couplings: As shown on the Drawings
2.3 RESTRAINED COUPLINGS
A. Restrained Mechanical Joint Glands (RMJ) 1. Pressure Rating:
a. Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 350 psi. b. Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall be supported
by manufacturer’s proof testing. 2. RMJ gland shall be designed for use with standard mechanical joint pipe. Pipe
restraint products designed for use with push-on joints will not be acceptable. 3. Thrust Restraint:
a. Provide hardened steel wedges that bear against and engage outer pipe surface, and allow articulation of pipe joint after assembly while wedges remain in their original setting position on pipe surface.
b. Products employing set screws that bear directly on pipe will not be acceptable. 4. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe Only 1) EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Megalug. 2) Romac Industries Inc.: RomaGrip 3) Or Equal.
15120-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Dismantling Joint 1. Pressure Rating
a. Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 350 psi b. Pressure rating to be no less than test pressure for piping system in which the
Restrained Dismantling Joint is used. c. Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall be supported
by manufacturer’s proof testing. 2. Thrust Restraint
a. Provide steel tie rods, ASTM A 193 GR B7 b. Number and arrangement of tie rods to provide dismantling joint assembly which
meets pressure rating requirement. 3. Materials of Construction
a. Flanged Adapter Body: Steel b. Follower Flange: Ductile Iron c. Gasket: Buna-N, NSF-61 approved d. Flange: Steel, per AWWA C207 e. Spigot: Steel f. Studs: Type 304 stainless steel g. Coating: NSF-61 approved epoxy
4. Manufacturer and Product a. Romac Industries, Model DJ405 b. No Equal.
2.4 ELASTOMER BELLOWS:
A. Type: Reinforced, molded wide-arch elastomer bellows
B. Features: 1. End Connections: Flanged, with split hot-dip galvanized steel retaining rings. 2. Washers: Use with retaining rings to provide leak-proof joint at twice the rated
pressure. 3. Thrust Protection: Control rods with gusset connection shall prevent over-extension. 4. Bellows Arch lining shall be Buna-N, nitrile, or butyl. 5. Rated Temperature: 250 deg F. 6. Rated Deflection and Pressure:
a. Lateral deflection shall be ¾-inch minimum. b. Burst Pressure: Four times the working pressure. c. Compression deflection and minimum working pressure as follows:
Size
(inch) Deflection
(inch) Pressure (psig)
2-1/2 to 12 1.06 350
C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. General Rubber Corp. 2. Mercer 3. Goodall Rubber Co. 4. Or equal.
15120-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General 1. Follow all manufacturer’s directions
B. Flexible Couplings (FC) 1. Follow all manufacturer’s directions 2. No more than 1-inch gap between pipe ends 3. Center flexible coupling in joint 4. Tighten bolts in an alternating pattern to provide even tension around the coupling 5. Tighten bolts to specified torque 6. In buried installations, wrap coupling with plastic fastened to pipe to protect bolts and
coupling from backfill material
C. Flanged Coupling Adapters (FCA) 1. Follow all manufacturer’s directions 2. No more than 1-inch gap between pipe plain end and flange face 3. Tighten flange bolts prior to tightening coupling bolts 4. Tighten bolts in an alternating pattern to provide even tension around the coupling 5. Tighten bolts to specified torque 6. In buried installations, wrap coupling with plastic fastened to pipe to protect bolts and
coupling from backfill material
D. Restrained Mechanical Joint Glands (RMJ) 1. Follow all manufacturer’s directions 2. Tighten mechanical joint gland bolts before tightening restraint lugs 3. Tighten restraint lugs until torque head breaks off 4. In buried installations, wrap joint with plastic fastened to pipe to protect bolts and
coupling from backfill material
+ + END OF SECTION + +
15200-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15200
VALVES AND OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product data sheets for make and model. 2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification
of materials of construction. 3. Certificate of Compliance for: Butterfly valves; full compliance with AWWA C504.
B. Tests and inspection data.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All valves shall be the same size as the pipe in which they are installed, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. All valves shall include all appurtenant parts (operators, chainwheels, handwheels, valve stems, floor stands, gear boxes, operating nut, etc.) for a complete operating valve. 1. Valve shall be, as much as practical, fully factory assembled.
C. All valves shall open by turning counter-clockwise. Maximum force required for operation shall be 40 lbs.
D. Where Lead-Free Bronze or Brass is specified, materials shall be in compliance with California Health & Safety Code Section 116875. Not more than a weighted average of 0.25 percent of the wetted surface of the valve shall be lead. Valve shall be provided with a “hang tag” or other marking that easily identifies the valve as Lead-Free.
E. Coatings and Linings: 1. Provide factory-applied coatings as described herein. 2. Where liquid epoxy coatings are specified, coatings shall conform to AWWA C550. 3. Field coat the exterior of all valve bodies with the same coating as is required for the
adjacent pipe in Section 09900, PAINTING and Section 15100, PIPE AND FITTINGS, unless otherwise specified.
F. Nuts, Bolts and Washers 1. Hex Bolts: ASTM A320/A320M, Type 304 stainless steel, Grade B8, Class 2
15200-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Nuts: ASTM F594, Type 304 stainless steel, Grade B8, Class 2 3. Washers: Type 304 stainless steel
G. All valves shall be rated for 350 psi working pressure.
H. Automatic operator shall be installed on the existing gate valve. CONTRACTOR to field verify make and model of the existing gate valve and coordinate with automatic operator manufacturer for sizing and designing of this operator. Operator shall be located within the valve vault.
I. All valves smaller than 4” and pilot systems for control valves shall be insulated and heat traced. All valves 4” and larger shall be fitted with an insulated removable wrap. Reference Section 15080, Piping Insulation.
J. Warranty: 1. Provide a 2-yr warranty on all valves from date of start-up. Warranty shall cover
defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any component should fail during the warranty period, it shall be corrected and the unit restored to service at no expense to the OWNER.
2.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. BAV-01LF: Lead-Free Ball Valve, 3 inches and smaller: 1. Service: Potable Water 2. Features:
a. Two-piece, end-entry type b. Lead-Free Brass & Bronze Materials in compliance with California Health & Safety
Code Section 116875. Not more than a weighted average of 0.25 percent of the wetted surface of the valve shall be lead. Valve shall be provided with a “hang tag” or other marking that easily identifies the valve as Lead-Free.
c. Lead-Free Bronze (Alloy C89836, C89833 or C69300) body d. Chrome-plated lead-free brass (Alloy C27450 or C69300) ball e. RTFE or PTFE seats and packing f. Zinc-coated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip g. Rated 600-psig WOG, 150-psig SWP.
3. Manufacturer and Products: a. Threaded:
1) Apollo 70LF100 Series 2) Milwaukee; UPBA100 3) Nibco T-685-80-LF 4) Or Equal
b. Soldered: 1) Apollo 70LF200 Series 2) Milwaukee; UPBA150 3) Nibco S-685-80-LF 4) Or Equal
15200-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. CKV-15: Slanting Disc Check Valve, 2 Inches to 24 Inches: 1. Service: Water. 2. Features:
a. Slanting or tilting disc design b. Off-center pivot c. Body: ductile iron d. Two-piece design e. Bronze seat on 55 degree angle, f. Disc: bronze or ductile iron, g. Pivot pin and bushing: stainless steel, h. 350 psi working pressure rating, i. Bottom mounted buffer cylinder for cushion closing, j. Valve disc position indicator. k. Coatings and Linings:
1) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. 2) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved.
3. Manufacturers and Products: a. APCO; Series 800. b. ValMatic c. Or equal.
2.5 GATE VALVES
A. GAV-10: Resilient-Seated Gate Valve, 3 Inches to 24 Inches: 1. Service: Water. 2. Features:
a. Conforms to AWWA C509 (<12”) or AWWA C515 (14” to 24”) b. Iron body c. Resilient seat, bronze mounted d. Full port e. Valve Ends:
1) Mechanical joint ends for buried service, unless shown otherwise on drawings or valve schedule
2) Flanged ends for exposed service f. Non-rising stem g. Actuator for Buried Service:
1) Stem extension, as required, to bring operating nut to within 12” of ground surface.
2) 2-inch operating nut h. Actuator for Exposed Service:
1) Handwheel i. Design working water pressure: 350 psig j. Coatings and Linings:
1) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. 2) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved.
3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Mueller b. M&H Valve c. Or Equal.
15200-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2.6 NEEDLE VALVES
A. NED-10: Needle Valve: 1. Service: Water. 2. Working Pressure: 350 psi minimum 3. Body Material: 316 SS 4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Swagelok b. Haskel c. Hy-Lok d. Or Equal.
2.7 AIR RELIEF AND VACUUM VALVES
A. AVV-02: Air/Vacuum Valve for Vertical Turbine Pumps, 2” 1. Service: Potable, Raw or Reclaimed Water. 2. Features:
a. Automatically exhausts large amounts of air when pump starts, and allows large quantities of air to re-enter the pump column when pump stops to break vacuum.
b. Once air has been exhausted, uses water pressure to close valve. In CLOSED position, seat against resilient seat to prevent water leakage.
c. Discharge orifice shall be fitted with a double-acting throttling device to automatically regulate and restrict air venting and to establish pressure loading on rising suction column of water to minimize air surging. On pump stop, throttling device shall automatically open to allow full line unrestricted air re-entry to prevent vacuum from forming in the pump column.
d. Rated 350 psi working pressure e. Cast iron, ductile iron, or semi-steel bodyand cover with stainless steel float and
trim. f. Model determined by size as indicated in Valve Schedule or on Drawings. g. Provide vent hose or piping and route discharge line to nearest drain/structure.
3. Manufacturers and Products: a. APCO Valve and Primer Corp. b. Val-Matic Valve
4. Or equal.
2.8 OPERATORS:
A. General: 1. Operator force not to exceed 40 pounds under any operating condition, including
initial breakaway. Gear reduction operator when force exceeds 40 pounds. 2. Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device. 3. Provide position indicator on all valves. 4. Worm and gear operators one-piece design worm-gears of gear bronze material.
Worm hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operators threaded steel reach rods with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.
5. Valve handles, wheels, etc. to be designed to accommodate a padlock.
B. Manual Operator: 1. Galvanized and painted handwheels. 2. Lever operators allowed on quarter-turn valves 8 inches and smaller. 3. Cranks on gear type operators.
15200-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
4. For all valves above 5’-0” above adjacent working surface (finished floor or finished grade), provide chain wheel operator with tiebacks
5. For all exposed valves below adjacent working surface (finished floor or walkway), provide extension stem, floor stands, and other accessories to permit operation from 2’-6” above adjacent working surface.
6. For all buried valves 3” and larger, provide stem extension, valve bonnet, valve box and 2” AWWA operating nut such that operating nut is within 12” of adjacent finished grade. a. For small-diameter buried valves, provide cross-shaped handle for operating with
forked key.
C. Automatic Operators: 1. General:
a. Where indicated on the drawings and/or in the valve schedule, provide automatic operators.
b. Size operators to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque not to exceed torque capacity of valve.
c. Provide stem protection for rising stem valves. d. All automatic operated valves shall have manual override option. Manual override
option shall not require any more than 40 lbs of force for valve operation. e. Coordination of all automatic operators with the valves being operated shall be
the responsibility of the valve manufacturer. Automatic operators shall be completely compatible with the valves being controlled.
f. Automatic Operators shall be of the following types: 2. Type 100 – Motor, Heavy-Duty – Open/Close:
1) Shall operate valve from fully closed to fully open or the reverse in 30 seconds.
2) Power Supply: 480V, 3 PH, 60 HZ AC b. Motor:
1) Sized for 15-minute, intermittent duty. 2) 480 VAC, 3 PH, 60 HZ 3) 1800 RPM 4) Class F insulation 5) TENV
c. Controls: Each actuator shall be equipped with the following: 1) Transformer: Provide 480-120 VAC control transformer for 120 VAC controls. 2) Magnetic reversing starter. 3) Provide a lost motion device to enable the motor to attain full speed before
encountering the stem load. 4) Control Relays: Actuator shall accept maintained OPEN and CLOSE contact
inputs. Upon loss of signal actuator shall stop and hold last position. 5) Two position limit switches: Provide two-train gear limit switches. LSC and
LSO 2NO, 2NC contacts each. Provide switches rated 10A at 120 VAC. 6) Torque limiting switches: Provide torque limiting switches responsive to the
mechanical torque developed in seating, backseating, or by obstruction. Torque control accuracy shall be within plus or minus five percent. Permit calibration of the switches without requiring the use of torque wrenches. Provide dry contacts for an external torque alarm.
7) Local Controls: Provide LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE selector switch and OPEN/STOP/CLOSE push button controls.
8) Local Position indication: provide open and closed indicator lights. Lights shall be at least 2 watt LED, green lens for open and red lens for closed. Activate both lights when between open and closed.
15200-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
9) Dry contact for remote indication of the actuator mode of operation. Contact shall be closed when the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in the remote position and internal control power exists.
10) Terminal connections for remote controls fed from an internal 120VAC supply. d. Enclosure:
1) NEMA 4 2) Provide space heater and thermostat. Space heater shall maintain internal
enclosure temperature 5 degrees F greater than ambient temperature at all times.
e. Spare Parts: Furnish a set of the following spare parts with each actuator: 1) Electric Motor (only one motor for each different size and type of motor is
required). 2) Declutch Level O-ring. 3) Drive Sleeve Assembly O-ring. 4) Drive Sleeve Assembly seal ring. 5) Worm gear shaft O-ring. 6) Torque transmission stem O-rings.
f. Manufacturers and Products: 1) EIM Series 2000 2) Or Equal
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. T-Handled Operating Wrench: 1. One each galvanized operating wrench, 4 feet long. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Mueller; No. A-24610. b. Clow No.; F-2520. c. Or Equal.
B. Cast Iron Valve Box: Designed for traffic loads, sliding type, with minimum of 6-inch ID shaft. 1. Box: Cast iron with minimum depth of 9 inches. 2. Lid: Cast iron, minimum depth 3 inches, marked WATER. 3. Extensions: Cast iron.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. A Valve Schedule has been attached to this Specification and is incorporated herein by reference. Provide valves in accordance with Valve Schedule.
B. For valves that are not referenced in Valve Schedule, provide the valve type called for on the Drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: 1. Clean all mating faces of valve (threads, flange faces, etc.) prior to assembly. 2. Remove all debris from valve body prior to assembly.
15200-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Take extra care to clean mating faces of existing pipe and fittings which may have corrosion, dirt, debris and mineral build-up which should be removed for a proper fit.
B. Apply joint compound, lubricant, etc. as recommended by valve manufacturer for proper installation prior to installation.
C. Install valves in accordance with the following schedule and as noted on the Drawings:
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed without encountering obstructions.
C. Install valves in location and orientation for easy access for routine operation and maintenance. Access should be such that an operator can operate the valve by reaching a handle, chain, etc. at a height between 2’-6” and 5’-0” above adjacent work surface (for buried valves, this is accomplished with a t-handle wrench and the operating nut being within 12” of finished grade).
3.4 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step.
B. Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions. Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions from both directions.
C. Inspect air release and vacuum valves as pipe is being filled to verify venting and seating is fully functional.
D. Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for any discrepancies with manufacturer’s data.
E. Set, verify, and record set pressures for all relief and regulating valves.
F. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set all opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by the ENGINEER.
3.5 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The following supplements are attached to this Specification section and incorporated herein by reference: 1. 15200 VS – Valve Schedule
+ + END OF SECTION + +
15200 VS-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15200 VS
VALVE SCHEDULE
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: 1. This schedule is provided for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR. Some valves may
be shown on the drawings, but not listed here. 2. Valve specifications are given in Section 15200, Valves and Operators.
B. Valve Tag Number: 1. Tag numbers are as noted in the Drawings.
C. Valve Type: 1. Valve types are as described in 15200, Valves and Operators
D. Valve Ends: 1. FLG – Flanged 2. GRV – Grooved End 3. LUG - Lugged 4. MJ – Mechanical Joint
a. Where the surrounding piping system is installed with restrained joints, MJ valves shall be installed using RMJ (restrained mechanical joint) glands per 15120, Piping Specialties.
5. SLV – Solvent Welded Socket 6. SLD – Soldered Socket 7. THR – Threaded 8. W – Wafer
E. Installation Codes 1. Ex – Exposed 2. Un – Underground
F. Valve Actuators, as described in 15200, Valves and Operators 1. HW – Handwheel 2. L – Lever 3. N – 2” Nut 4. N/A – Not Applicable 5. Type 100 – Motor, Heavy-Duty – Open/Close
1.2 VALVE SCHEDULE
VALVE TAG NUMBER VALVE TYPE ENDS DIAMETER INSTALLATION ACTUATOR
GAV-101 GAV-10 MJ 12” Un N GAV-102 GAV-10 FLG 12” Ex HW GAV-103 GAV-10 FLG 12” Ex HW
15200 VS-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
VALVE TAG NUMBER VALVE TYPE ENDS DIAMETER INSTALLATION ACTUATOR
GAV-104 GAV-10 MJ 12” Un N CKV-104 CKV-15 FLG 12” Ex N/A ARV-101 AVV-02 THD 2” Ex N/A ARV-102 AVV-02 THD 2” Ex N/A BAV-101 BAV-01LF THD 2” Ex L BAV-102 BAV-01LF THD 1” Ex L BAV-103 BAV-01LF THD 2” Ex L BAV-104 BAV-01LF THD 1” Ex L BAV-105 BAV-01LF THD 2” Ex L NED-101 NED-10 THD 1” Ex L NED-102 NED-10 THD 1” Ex L
Notes: Motorized operator Type 100 shall be installed on the existing 12” gate valve.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
15990-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15990
TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - SUBMITTALS
1.1 TESTING PLAN
A. Testing Plan: Submit prior to testing and include at least the information that follows. a. Testing dates. b. Piping systems and section(s) to be tested. c. Test type. d. Method of isolation. e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s) to be tested.
2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment. 3. Certified Test Report.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOTIFICATION
A. Notify ENGINEER in writing 5 days in advance of testing. Perform testing in presence of ENGINEER.
3.2 PRESSURE TESTING
A. General: 1. Complete installation of piping system, including all thrust restraint, prior to pressure
testing. a. If thrust blocking is specified, wait 5 days minimum after concrete thrust blocking
is installed to perform pressure tests. If high-early strength cement is used for thrust blocking, wait may be reduced to 2 days.
2. Prior to test, remove and replace with pipe spools or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by pressure testing.
3. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: Isolate new piping with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, blind flanges, or as acceptable to ENGINEER.
4. Piping to be Pressure Tested and Test Pressure: as indicated on Piping Schedule.
B. Testing with Water: 1. Fluid: Clean, potable water. 2. Pipeline Protection:
a. Maximum Filling Velocity: 0.25 foot per second, applied over full area of pipe. b. Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or loosen
flanges, using at least four bolts, or use equipment vents to purge air pockets. 3. Exposed Piping:
a. Perform testing on insulated piping prior to application of insulation b. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 60 minutes, minimum, and for
such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage.
15990-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
c. Examine joints and connections for leakage. 1) Correct visible leakage and retest as specified. 2) Empty pipe of water prior to final cleaning or disinfection.
4. Buried Piping: a. Test after backfilling has been completed. b. Expel air from piping system during filling. c. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump. Valve off
piping system when test pressure is reached. d. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours minimum, reopening
isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure. e. Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water necessary to maintain
specified test pressure for duration of test. f. Maximum Allowable Leakage:
200,133)D(PS
= L2/1
where:
L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour. S = Length of pipe tested, in feet. D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches. P = Test pressure during leakage test, in pounds per square inch.
g. Correct leakage greater than allowable, and retest as specified.
C. Testing with Air: 1. Perform only where specifically allowed or called for in Pipe Schedule. 2. Do not perform on:
a. PVC or CPVC pipe. b. Buried and other non-exposed piping.
3. Use Oil-free, dry air. 4. Procedure:
a. Apply 25% of specified test pressure to piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate visible leaks. Apply soap bubble mixture to joints and connections; examine for leakage.
b. Correct visible leaks and repeat preliminary test until visible leaks are corrected. c. Gradually increase pressure in system to half of specified test pressure.
Thereafter, increase pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of specified test pressure until required test pressure is reached.
d. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum of 10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct soap bubble examination for leakage.
e. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified. 5. Allowable Leakage: Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or
valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leakage. 6. After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will carry
flammable gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be present in system during filling process.
3.3 PIPE PRESSURE TESTING LOG
A. All pressure tests shall be witnessed by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall keep a pipe pressure testing log to document the pressure testing and ENGINEER’s approval of such.
15990-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Specific details of the contents and format pipe pressure testing log shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER.
2. At a minimum, pipe pressure testing log shall record, on a daily basis for any day when pipe pressure testing is performed: a. Test Report Documentation:
1) Test date. 2) Description and identification of piping tested. 3) Test fluid. 4) Test pressure. 5) Remarks, including:
a) Leaks (type, location). b) Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage.
3. Pipe pressure testing log shall be kept on-site. Pipe pressure testing log shall be signed on a daily basis, for any day when pipe pressure testing log work is performed, by the supervisor of the CONTRACTOR’s field crew and by the ENGINEER.
4. Any piping system which was pressure testing, but which was not recorded in the pipe pressure testing log shall be re-tested at the ENGINEER’s discretion.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
15995-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 15995
DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals: 1. Plan describing and illustrating conformance to appropriate AWWA standards and this
Specification. 2. Procedure and plan for cleaning system. 3. Procedures and plans for disinfection and testing. 4. Proposed locations within system where Samples will be taken. 5. Type of disinfecting solution and method of preparation. 6. Certification that employees working with concentrated chlorine solutions or gas have
received appropriate safety training. 7. Method of disposal for highly chlorinated disinfecting water. 8. Independent Testing Agency: Certification that testing agency is qualified to perform
bacteriological testing in accordance with AWWA standards, agency requirements, and this Specification.
9. Certified Bacteriological Test Results: a. Facility tested is free from coliform bacteria contamination. b. Forward results directly to ENGINEER.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Independent Testing Agency: Certified in the State of Arizona with 10 years’ experience in field of water sampling and testing. Agency shall use calibrated testing instruments and equipment, and documented standard procedures for performing specified testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER FOR DISINFECTION
A. Clean, uncontaminated, and potable.
B. CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for water supply and convey water in disinfected pipelines or containers.
2.2 CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish chemicals and equipment, such as pumps and hoses, to accomplish disinfection.
B. Water used to fill pipeline may be supplied using a temporary connection to existing distribution system. Provide protection against cross-connections as required by AWWA C651.
15995-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Conform to AWWA C651 for pipes and pipelines, C652 for tanks and reservoirs, C653 for water treatment plants and filters, and C654 for wells, except as modified in these Specifications.
B. Disinfect the following items installed or modified under this Project, intended to hold, transport, or otherwise contact potable water: 1. Pumps. 2. Pipelines: Disinfect new pipelines that connect to existing pipelines up to point of
connection.
C. Disinfect surfaces of materials that will contact finished water, both during and following construction, using one of the methods described in AWWA C652 and C653. Disinfect prior to contact with finished water. Take care to avoid recontamination following disinfection.
D. Prior to application of disinfectants, clean pump, tank, filters, and pipelines of loose and suspended material.
E. Allow freshwater and disinfectant solution to flow into pipe or vessel at a measured rate so chlorine-water solution is at specified strength. Do not place concentrated liquid commercial disinfectant in pipeline or other facilities to be disinfected before it is filled with water.
3.2 PIPING
A. Cleaning: 1. Before disinfecting, clean all foreign matter from pipe in accordance with
AWWA C651.
B. If the continuous feed method or the slug method of disinfection, as described in AWWA C651 are used, flush pipelines with potable water until clear of suspended solids and color. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches, and other conduits as needed to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties.
C. Flush service connections and hydrants. Flush distribution lines prior to flushing hydrants and service connections. Operate valves during flushing process at least twice during each flush.
D. Flush pipe through flushing branches and remove branches after flushing is completed.
E. Disinfecting Procedure: In accordance with AWWA C651, unless herein modified.
3.3 PUMPS
A. Disinfecting Solutions: Minimum free chlorine concentration of 100 ppm.
B. Application:
15995-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Inject disinfecting solution into pump and associated piping and circulate for a minimum 3-hour period of time. At end of 3-hour period, solution shall have a strength of at least 50 ppm free chlorine.
2. Operate valves and pump appurtenances during disinfection to ensure that disinfecting solution is dispersed into all parts of pump and lines.
3. If disinfecting solution contained in pump has a residual free chlorine concentration less than 50 ppm after the 3-hour retention period, reclean pump, reapply disinfecting solution, and retest until a satisfactory test result is obtained.
4. After chlorination, flush water from pump until water through the unit is chemically and bacteriologically equal to permanent source of supply.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF HEAVILY CHLORINATED WATER
A. Do not allow flow into a waterway without neutralizing disinfectant residual.
B. See the appendix of AWWA C651, C652, C653, and C654 for acceptable neutralization methods.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
16050-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16050
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown,
specified, and required to complete the electrical Work.
B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of
items that shall be installed with the formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings and panels. 2. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the installation of all conduits, inserts and other
items to be embedded in the concrete, or built into walls, partitions, ceilings or panels constructed by other contractors. CONTRACTOR shall provide other contractors with detailed plans or sketches of the location of said conduits and other built-in items as may be required. CONTRACTOR shall keep himself fully informed of the construction where conduits and other built-in items are to be installed. CONTRACTOR shall install said conduits and other built-in items in such a manner and within such time periods as will not unnecessarily delay the Work of the other contractors.
C. General: 1. Interpretation of Drawings:
a. Dimensions shown on the Drawings that are related to equipment are based on one manufacturer's equipment. Coordinate the dimensions of the equipment furnished with the space allocated for that equipment.
b. The Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical installation. They are not intended as detailed working drawings for the electrical Work but as a complement to the Specifications to clarify the principal features of the electrical systems.
c. It is the intent of this Section that all equipment and devices, furnished and installed under this and other Sections, be properly connected and interconnected with other equipment so as to render the installations complete for successful operation, regardless of whether all the connections and interconnections are specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings.
D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 01610, General Equipment Requirements. 3. Section 02300, Earthwork.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Permits: Obtain all permits required to commence work and, upon completion of the
Work, obtain and deliver to ENGINEER a Certificate of Inspection and Approval from the State Board of Fire Underwriters or other authority having jurisdiction.
2. Codes: Material and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the current standards and recommendations of the National Electrical Code, the National
16050-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Electrical Safety Code and with local codes which apply. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive regulation shall apply.
3. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Electrical material and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other nationally-recognized, independent testing laboratory, wherever standards have been established and label service regularly applies.
4. Utilities: a. Work in connection with the electric service and utility metering shall be done in
strict conformance with the requirements of the serving electric utility.
B. Reference Standards: Electrical material and equipment shall conform in all respects to the latest approved standards of the following: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 2. The American National Standards Institute. 3. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 4. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association. 5. National Electrical Code (NEC). 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: 1. Conform to requirements of Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the particular item: 1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number. 2. Electrical ratings. 3. Conformance to applicable standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA, IEEE,
ISA, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other organizations. 4. Dimensioned plan, section, and elevations showing means for mounting, conduit
connection, and grounding. 5. Materials and finish specification, including paints. 6. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers. 7. Internal wiring diagram indicating all connection to components and numbered
terminals for external connections.
1.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit complete manuals including: 1. Copies of all Shop Drawings, test reports, maintenance data and schedules,
description of operation, and spare parts information. 2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of
Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.
B. Record Drawings: 1. Record Drawings shall include the following:
a. One line wiring diagram of the distribution system. b. Actual in place conduit and cable layouts with schedule of conduit sizes and
number and size of conductors. c. Layouts of the grounding system and lighting arrangement. d. Control wiring diagrams with terminal numbers and all control devices identified.
16050-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: CONTRACTOR shall instruct the manufacturers and vendors as to the maximum shipping sizes of equipment that can be accommodated at the site.
B. Handling and Storage of Materials: Conform to the requirements of Section 01650, Transportation, Handling, and Storage.
1.6 CONTROL CABINETS AND PANELS
A. All control cabinets and panels located in corrosive environments shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel, unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings.
B. All outdoor panels shall be provided with sunshade structures.
C. All control cabinets and panels located outdoors shall be weatherproof NEMA 4X steel, unless noted otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings.
1.7 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. All electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load, without failure, with an ambient outside air temperature of 25oF to 131oF and an elevation of 1,050 feet (MSL).
B. All electrical devices and equipment shall have ratings based on 75oC terminations.
1.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION. (ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION)
A. Equipment Identification Tags shall be 1"x3" with two holes centered on each end of the tag (available from Brady). The tags shall be constructed of the following materials: Aluminum 0.020" thick and coated with black enamel paint. Each tag shall be engraved with the equipment identification number and description as indicated in the drawings and/or specifications. Print shall be ¼” Gothic. Each tag shall be attached with fasteners of nylon coated 48 mil stainless steel wire (Brady catalog number 23310 or equal) and brass wire clamps - double ferrule design (Brady catalog number 23312 or equal) to secure the stainless steel wire.
B. Instrument Identification Tags shall be GREEN 1-½” round aluminum (Brady catalog number 49903) engraved with the instrument loop number as indicated in the drawings and/or specifications. Print shall be ¼” Gothic”. Each tag shall be attached with fasteners of nylon coated 48 mil stainless steel wire (Brady catalog number 23310 or equal) and brass wire clamps - double ferrule design (Brady catalog number 23312 or equal) to secure the stainless steel wire.
Brady Signmark Division 2221 West Camden Road P.O. Box 2999 Milwaukee, WI 53201-2999 www.bradysignmark.com USA 1-800-635-7557
16050-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.9 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS
A. Wet Locations: The following areas shall be considered wet locations: 1. Outdoor Areas and indoors in the pump room. 2. Materials, equipment and incidentals in areas identified as wet locations shall meet
NEC and NEMA requirements for wet locations. Enclosures installed in wet locations shall meet NEMA 4X requirements unless otherwise indicated. Conduits shall be terminated at enclosures with watertight, threaded hubs.
1.10 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
A. Schematic diagrams are provided for the CONTRACTOR'S guidance in fulfilling the operational intent of the Contract Documents.
B. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to meet all safety and electrical codes, and to provide all equipment, appurtenances and specialty items required to provide for complete and operable systems.
C. Review of control schemes submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his contractual responsibility to provide complete and successfully operating systems.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
++ END OF SECTION ++
16060-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Furnish and install a complete grounding system for the electrical systems.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. NEC Article 250, Grounding. 2. UL Standard #467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit, for approval, the following: 1. Listing of grounding connector types identifying where they are to be used. 2. Layouts of each structure ground grid. 3. Test point construction details.
C. Test Records: Submit for review copies of results of ground resistance tests at each test point.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Bare Ground Cable: Annealed, bare, stranded copper, No. 8 AWG minimum size or as otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. Ground Rods: Copperclad rigid steel rods, 3/4-inch diameter, 10 feet long.
C. Grounding Connectors: 1. Material: Pressure connectors shall be copper alloy castings, designed specifically for
the items to be connected, and assembled with Durium or silicone bronze bolts, nuts and washers. Welded connections shall be by exothermic process utilizing molds, cartridges and hardware designed specifically for the connection to be made.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide grounding connectors of one of the following: a. Pressure Connectors:
1) O.Z./Gedney, Division of General Signal Corporation. 2) Burndy Corporation. 3) Or equal.
b. Welded Connections: 1) Cadweld by Erico Products, Incorporated. 2) Therm-O-Weld by Burndy Corporation.
16060-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3) Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STRUCTURE GROUND SYSTEM
A. Provide ground grids as shown on the Drawings:
B. Install ground rods where shown on the Drawings. Install additional ground rods if necessary to attain a resistance to ground of less than 5 ohms for each ground grid.
C. For structures with steel columns, install #2/0 ground cable from grid to each column around the perimeter of the structure. Connect cable to steel using exothermic welds.
D. Connect grids to a continuous underground water pipe system when practical.
E. Provide accessible test points for measuring the ground resistance of each grid.
F. Weld all buried connections, except for test points.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Ground all electrical equipment in compliance with the National Electrical Code.
B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green stranded copper cable of adequate size installed in metal conduit where necessary for mechanical protection.
C. Connect ground conductors to conduit with copper clamps, straps or with grounding bushings.
D. Connect to piping by welding or brazing. Use copper bonding jumpers on all gasketed joints.
E. Connect to equipment by means of lug compressed on cable end. Bolt lug to equipment frame using holes or terminals provided on equipment specifically for grounding. Do not use hold down bolts. Where grounding provisions are not included, drill suitable holes in locations designated by ENGINEER.
F. Connect to motors by bolting directly to motor frames, not to sole plates or supporting structures.
G. Connect to service water piping by means of copper clamps. Use copper bonding jumpers on all gasketed joints.
H. Scrape bolted surfaces clean and coat with a conductive oxide-resistant compound.
3.3 TESTING
A. Test the completed ground systems for continuity and for resistance to ground using an electrical ground resistance tester.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16120-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16120
600 VOLT CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide 600 volt cable for all wiring for circuits carrying 480 volts and less, except where instrumentation cable is specified or required. The types of cable required include the following: 1. Insulated cable for installation in raceways. 2. Cable for installation in trays.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16060, Grounding Systems. 2. Section 16125, Instrumentation Cable.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Codes: Cable shall be installed in accordance with the standards and
recommendations of the National Electrical Code and with local codes which apply. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive regulation shall apply.
2. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Cable shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. ASTM B 3, Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. ASTM B 8, Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-hard or Soft. 3. IPCEA S-66-524, NEMA WC7-1971, Cross-linked-thermosetting-polyethyl-ene-
insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 4. National Electrical Code. 5. UL Standard No. 44, Wires and Cables, Rubber-Insulated.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein.
B. Test Records: Submit for review copies of written records of field insulation resistance test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Insulated Cable In Raceways: 1. Material: Stranded copper cable conforming to ASTM B 3 and B 8 with
flame-retardant, moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic insulation rated 90 deg. C in dry locations and 75 deg. C in wet locations and listed by UL as Type THHN/THWN.
2. Wire Sizes: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting and No. 14 AWG for 120 volt control circuits.
16120-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Cable for Installation in Trays: 1. Material: Factory assembled cable, single or multi-conductor as required by the
Drawings, Type THHN/THWN bearing the UL label, Type TC and specifically approved for installation in cable trays and meeting the flame test requirements of IEEE 1202.
C. Cable Connectors, Solderless Type: 1. For wire sizes up to No. 6 AWG, use compression type. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. T & B Sta-Kon. b. Burndy Hylug. c. Or equal.
3. For sizes No. 4 AWG and above, use either compression type or bolted type with silver-plated contact faces.
4. For sizes No. 250 MCM and larger, use connectors with at least two (2) cable clamping elements or compression indents and provision for at least two (2) bolts for joining to apparatus terminal.
5. Properly size connectors to fit fastening device and wire size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all cables complete with proper terminations at both ends. Check and correct for proper phase sequence and proper motor rotation.
B. Pulling: 1. Use insulating types of pulling compounds containing no mineral oil. 2. Pulling tension shall be within the limits recommended by the wire and cable
manufacturer. 3. Use a dynamometer where mechanical means are used. 4. Cut off section subject to mechanical means.
C. Bending Radius: Limit to six (6) times cable overall diameter.
D. Slack: Provide maximum slack at all terminal points.
E. Splices: 1. Where possible, install cable continuous, without splice, from termination to
termination. 2. Where required, splice in junction box using terminal boards. 3. Splices in conduits are not allowed.
F. Identification: 1. Each cable and conductor shall be identified in each pullbox, manhole and each
termination point with circuit identification markers. The markers shall self-laminating vinyl on white background and shall be printed using a Brady "XC Plus" printer or equal.
2. All control wires shall be assigned a unique wire identification number and shall be shown on the submittal drawings. These wire identifications shall be installed on each wire per item 1 above.
G. Phase Identification\Color Coding: 1. All three phase circuits shall be identified at switchgear, motor control centers,
manholes (5 KV. cables and panelboards as "PHASE A"," PHASE B", and "PHASE C".
16120-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Three phase 480 volt systems shall have the following color coding: a. Phase A-Brown b. Phase B-Orange c. Phase C-Yellow d. Neutral (if applicable)- White
3. Single phase, 120/240 volt circuits shall be color coded as follows: a. Phase A-Black b. Phase B-Red c. Neutral-White
4. Control circuits shall be color-coded Red.
3.2 TESTING
A. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place to demonstrate that the circuit and connected equipment perform satisfactorily and that they are free from improper grounds and short circuits.
B. Individually test 600 volt cables for insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to ground. Test after cables are installed and before they are put in service with a Megger whose rating is suitable for the tested circuit. Tests shall meet with the applicable specifications of IPCEA S-66-524 and NEMA WC7-1971.
C. The insulation resistance for any given conductor shall not be less than the value recommended by the IPCEA or a minimum of 1 megaohm for 600 volt and less service, if not IPCEA listed. Any cable not meeting the recommended value or which fails when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with a new cable for the full length.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16125-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16125
INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This Section includes instrumentation cable of the following types: 1. Shielded instrument cable. 2. Unshielded instrument cable. 3. Telephone cable.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for shielded instrumentation cable proposed for
use. 2. Manufacturer's technical information for telephone cable and underground splicing for
approval by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Single Shielded Pair Instrument Cable: Tinned copper, stranded, Polyethylene insulated conductors, No. 18 AWG minimum, twisted with aluminum-polyester shield, stranded tinned 20 AWG copper drain wire and PVC outer jacket. Rated for 600 volts by Belden or equal.
B. Single Unshielded Pair Instrument Cable: Bare, soft annealed copper, stranded, PVC insulated conductors, No. 18 AWG minimum, twisted. Outer jacket to be PVC. Rated for 600 volts minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in conduit separate from power cables, unless otherwise noted.
B. Ground shield of shielded cables at one end only and as recommended by instrument manufacturer.
C. Terminate stranded conductors with pre-insulated crimp type spade or ring torque terminals properly sized to fit fastening device and wire size.
D. Install and terminate vendor furnished cable in accordance with vendor equipment requirements.
E. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the installation and termination of the telephone cables with the OWNER and the Utility.
16125-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.2 TESTING
A. Test shielded instrumentation cable shields with an ohmmeter for continuity along the full length of the cable and for shield continuity to ground.
B. Connect shielded instrumentation cables to a calibrated 4-20 milliamp DC signal transmitter and receiver. Test at 4, 12, and 20 milliamp transmitter settings.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16130-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16130
CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: All electrical and instrumentation wiring shall be installed in conduit, unless otherwise shown. Provide conduit and fittings to form complete, coordinated and grounded raceway systems, as follows: 1. Rigid steel conduit for exposed indoor conduit runs above grade level, unless
otherwise indicated. 2. PVC coated rigid steel for exposed conduit runs in all indoor areas below grade level,
corrosive areas and in all outdoor areas. 3. Schedule 40 PVC for concrete encased duct bank runs. 4. Schedule 40 PVC for conduit runs embedded in structural concrete slabs. 5. Schedule 40 PVC for direct buried conduit with minimum of 2 ft. 6 inches of cover
with 6 inches of sand as shown on the details. 6. HDPE conduit for Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) installations. 7. PVC-coated rigid steel for underground conduit runs buried shallower than noted
above (except those encased in concrete). No “taped” conduit allowed. 8. Provide flexible conduit at motors and equipment that are subject to vibration or
require movement for maintenance purposes. Provide necessary reducer where equipment furnished cannot accept 3/4-inch size flexible conduit. Limit flexible conduit length to three feet maximum. Where PVC coated conduit is required, provide PVC coated fittings for flex conduit to match.
9. Provide sealing fittings for hazardous and corrosive locations as required by the National Electrical Code and where shown on the Drawings.
10. Provide expansion fittings in conformance with the National Electrical Code where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.
11. Install expansion/deflection fittings where conduits cross structural expansion joints. 12. No more than 270 degrees of bends allowed in a continuous run of conduit.
B. Coordination: 1. Conduit runs shown on the drawings are diagrammatic. 2. Coordinate conduit installation with piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures and other
systems and equipment and locate so as to avoid interferences.
C. Related Sections: 1. Section 16136, Underground Duct Banks.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. NEC Article 346, Rigid Metal Conduit. 2. NEC Article 347, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. 3. NEC Article 351, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. 4. UL Standard 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 5. UL Standard No. 6, Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit. 6. UL Standard No. 360, Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 7. UL Standard No. 514, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings.
16130-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
8. UL Standard No. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit. 9. UL Standard 1242, Intermediate Metallic Conduit. 10. ANSI C80.1, Specification for Zinc Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. 11. NEMA FB 1, Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical
Metallic Tubing, and Cable 12. NEMA TC2, Electrical Plastic Tubing, Conduit and Fittings. 13. NEMA TC3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: Layout drawings showing proposed routing of exposed conduits, conduits embedded in structural concrete and conduits directly buried in earth. Drawings shall show locations of pull and junction boxes, expansion fittings, sealing fittings, flexible conduit runs and all penetrations in walls and floor slabs.
C. Record Drawings: Include the actual routing of exposed and concealed conduit runs on Record Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RIGID CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows and Couplings: Rigid, heavy wall, mild steel, hot dip galvanized, smooth interior, tapered threads and carefully reamed ends; 3/4-inch NPS minimum size.
B. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows and Couplings: Material: Rigid, heavy wall, mild steel, hot dip galvanized, smooth interior, tapered threads, carefully reamed ends, 3/4-inch NPS minimum size with a exterior factory coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride and an interior coating of 2-mil thick urethane. Color of coating shall be the same on all conduit and fittings. Robroy, Permacote or Ocal.
C. Metallic Conduit Fittings and Outlet Bodies: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron bodies and covers. Outdoor units shall be gasketed and watertight. Gaskets shall be of an approved type designed for the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not acceptable. All units shall be threaded type with five full threads. Material shall conform to ANSI C80.4 and shall be listed by UL. Fittings and bodies in or on PVC coated conduit runs shall have an exterior factory-applied coating of 40 mil thick polyvinyl chloride, an interior coating of 2-mil thick urethane, and V-seal gasketing.
D. Non-Metallic Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC plastic, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVD, 90°C rated, conforming to UL No. 651. Form elbows, bodies, terminations, expansions and fasteners of same material and manufacturer as base conduit. Provide cement by same manufacturer as base conduit.
E. Conduit Hubs: (Myers or T&B). 1. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration proof, weather proof with captive O-ring
seal, zinc metal with insulated throat. Hubs used on PVC coated conduit systems shall have a factory applied PVC coating.
16130-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and other enclosures located in areas designated as set locations.
F. Conduit Tags: Conduit Identification Tags shall be YELLOW 1-½” round aluminum (Brady catalog number 49900) engraved with the conduit number as indicated in the drawings and/or specifications. Print shall be ¼” Gothic”. Each tag shall be attached with fasteners of nylon coated 48 mil stainless steel wire (Brady catalog number 23310 or equal) and brass wire clamps - double ferrule design (Brady catalog number 23312 or equal) to secure the stainless steel wire.
2.2 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Non-hazardous Areas: Flexible galvanized steel core with smooth, abrasion resistant, liquid-tight, polyvinyl chloride cover. Continuous copper ground built in for sizes 3/4-inch through 1-1/4 inch. Material shall be UL listed. Provide one of the following: 1. Sealtite UA by Anaconda Metal Hose Division, Anaconda American Brass Company. 2. Liquatite Type L.A. by Electric-Flex Company. 3. Anaconda Metal Hose
B. Wet and/or Corrosive areas, including Hazardous wet / corrosive areas: All fittings shall be PVC coated .
C. Flexible Conduit Fittings: Malleable iron with cadmium finish. Fittings shall adapt the conduit to standard threaded connections, shall have an inside diameter not less than that of the corresponding standard conduit size and shall be UL listed. Provide one of the following: 1. Crouse-Hinds Company. 2. Appleton Electric Company. 3. Or equal.
2.3 HDPE CONDUIT
A. Material Type: 1. Conduit shall be constructed of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) meeting
the requirements of ASTM D 3350 with a minimum cell classification of 33420C, as shown in the table below:
16130-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
Characteristic Requirement Relevant Standard(s)
Code
density 0.941 − 0.955 g/cm3
ASTM D 792 or 1505
3
melt flow index
0.4 − 0.15 g / 10 minutes max
ASTM D 1238 3
flexural modulus
80,000 psi minimum
ASTM D 790 4
tensile strength at yield
3,000 psi minimum
ASTM D 638 4
environmental stress crack resistance
condition B, F10 max, 10% Igepal, 96 hrs. minimum
ASTM D 1693
2
brittleness temperature
-60 ASTM D 746 0
elongation 400% minimum
ASTM D 638 --
Class C minimum 2% carbon black
ASTM D 3350 C
B. Size: 1. As indicated on Drawings.
C. Wall thickness: 1. Standard Dimensional Ratio (SDR) per ASTM D 3035: 11 minimum
D. Color 1. Conduit whall be black with red longitudinal striped spaced 120 degrees
apart. Red color shall be UV stabilized for color retention.
E. Markings: 1. The following markings shall be heat-indented using a print color that is easily
distinguishable, legible, UV-Stabilized, and marked at an interval not to exceed 8 feet: a. Manufacturer’s name b. “HDPE” material designation c. Trade size based on ASTM D 3350 d. Month & year of manufacture e. Manufacturing lot code f. Manufacturing plant location g. Sequential footage markings h. Classification code (33420C) i. Standard dimension ratio (SDR)
F. Pull Tape:
16130-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Pre-lubricated, pre-installed, 2500 lb minimum pull tape manufactured from low friction materials.
2. Distance markings at 2 foot intervals, minimum.
2.4 SEALING FITTINGS
A. Cast gray iron alloy or cast malleable iron bodies with zinc electroplate and lacquer or enamel finish. Provide with ample opening with threaded closure for access to conduit hub for making dam. Sealing fiber for forming the dam within the hub and the sealing compound shall be approved for use with the fittings furnished. PVC Coated where required per these specifications and Section 16050. Provide one of the following: 1. Series EYS by Crouse Hinds Company. 2. EYS by Appleton Electric Company. 3. T&B. 4. Or Equal.
2.5 EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Cast gray iron alloy or bronze end couplings, malleable iron or hot dipped galvanized body, stainless steel clamps and tinned copper braid bonding jumper. Fittings shall be watertight, corrosion-resistant UL listed and compatible with the conduit system. PVC Coated where required per these specifications and Section 16050. Provide one of the following: 1. Type DX for expansion/deflection or AX for expansion only by O-Z Gedney Company. 2. Type XD for expansion/deflection or XJ for expansion only by Crouse Hinds Company. 3. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Supports: 1. Rigidly support conduits with clamps, hangers or Unistrut channels. 2. Support single conduits by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination with
one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the support surface. Support multiple runs of conduits on trapeze type hangers with steel horizontal members and threaded hanger rods, Kindorff or equal. Rods shall be not less than 3/8-inch diameter, and shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
3. For PVC coated rigid steel conduit, supports and hardware shall be stainless steel.
B. Fastenings: Fasten raceway systems rigidly and neatly to supporting structures by the following methods: 1. To Wood: Wood screws. 2. To Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. 3. To Concrete: Reusable Expansion anchors. (Lead drive in or any anchors not re-
usable are not allowed). 4. To Steel: Steel welded threaded studs, beam clamps or bolts with lockwashers or
locknuts.
C. Exposed Conduit: 1. Install parallel or perpendicular to structural members or walls.
16130-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Wherever possible, run in groups. Provide galvanized conduit racks of suitable width, length and height and arranged to suit field conditions. Provide support at every 10 feet minimum.
3. Install on structural members in protected locations. 4. Locate clear of interferences. 5. Maintain 6-inches from hot fluid lines and 1/4-inch from walls. 6. Install vertical runs plumb. Unsecured drop length shall not exceed 12 feet.
D. Conduit Embedded in Concrete: 1. Separation: Three times outer diameter of larger conduit center to center. 2. Minimum Slab Thickness:
a. With no crisscrossing of conduit, three times outer diameter of conduit. b. With crisscrossing of conduits, four times outer diameter of larger conduit.
3. Run conduit in center of slab. 4. Before concrete is placed, make the necessary location measurements of the conduit
to be embedded so that the information is available to prepare record drawings. 5. All conduits entering or exiting concrete shall be PVC coated a minimum of 12-inches
on each side of air/concrete interface.
E. Underground Conduits: 1. Not within directional drilling installations:
a. Install individual underground conduits a minimum of 24-inches below grade, unless otherwise indicated or as required to avoid existing obstructions.
b. Perform all excavation, bedding, backfilling and surface restoration including pavement replacement where required.
c. Make conduit connections watertight. 2. Within directional drilling installations:
a. Reference Section 02158, Horizontal Directional Drilling. b. HDPE conduits shall be installed as continuous lengths into drilled bore.
Joints, couples, splices, etc. are not permitted. c. Ensure that installation conditions are not injurious to the HDPE conduit at
all times during installation. d. At HDPE conduit transitions to PVC, bond HDPE conduit to PVC conduit
with a standard schedule 40 PVC end bell using Polywater “BonDuit” High Strength Sealant. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions on the installation of the sealant.
F. Empty Conduits: 1. Install nylon pull wire in each empty conduit and cap conduits not terminating in
boxes with permanent fittings designed for the purpose. 2. Identify each empty conduit with a durable tag in accordance with Paragraph 2.1.F
and Paragraph 3.3.A, showing the conduit number indicated on the Drawings.
G. Field Bends: No indentations. Diameter of conduit shall not vary more than 15 percent at any bend.
H. Joints: 1. Apply conductive compound to all joints before assembly. 2. Make up joints tight and ground thoroughly. 3. Use standard tapered pipe threads for conduit and fittings. 4. Cut conduit ends square and ream to prevent damage to wire and cable.
16130-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
5. Use full threaded couplings. Split couplings are not permitted. 6. Use strap wrenches and vises to install conduit. Replace conduit with wrench marks. 7. Apply zinc-rich paint to exposed threads and other areas of galvanized conduit system
where the base metal is exposed.
I. Terminations: 1. Install insulated bushings on conduits entering boxes or cabinets, except threaded
hub types. 2. Provide locknuts on both inside and outside of enclosure for grounding. 3. Bushings shall not be used in lieu of locknuts.
J. Moisture Protection: 1. Plug or cap conduit ends at time of installation to prevent entrance of moisture or
foreign materials. 2. Make underground and embedded conduit connections watertight. 3. Thruwall Seals: Install for conduits passing through new exterior subsurface walls or
base slabs of buildings and for conduits passing through existing exterior walls. For individual exposed conduits passing through interior walls, install non-metallic sleeves to protect the conduit against action of alkaline substances that may be present.
4. Drainage: Pay particular attention to drainage for conduit runs. Wherever possible, install conduit runs so as to drain to one end and away from buildings. Avoid pockets or depressions in conduit runs. Where conduits enter buildings below grade, seal inside of conduit to form a watertight seal around cables to prevent the entry of water into building. Sealant shall be Silicone and shall form an elastomeric compression seal. Sealant shall be Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV Foam or equal.
K. Corrosion Protection: 1. Conduit Curb:
a. In concrete slabs or floors, provide a 2-inch high curb extending 2-inches from the outer surface of the conduit penetrating the floor, to prevent corrosion.
b. Terminate conduit stub-ups in couplings, slightly above the finished concrete curb. 2. Dissimilar Metals:
a. Take every action to prevent the occurrence of electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.
b. Do not use copper products in connection with aluminum work, and do not use aluminum in locations subject to drainage of copper compounds on the bare aluminum.
c. Back paint aluminum in contact with masonry or concrete with two coats of aluminum-pigmented bituminous paint.
L. Reused Existing Conduits: 1. Pull rag swab through conduits to remove water and to clean conduit prior to
installing cable. 2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed. 3. Pull mandrel through conduit, if necessary, to remove obstructions.
M. Core drill for individual conduits passing through existing concrete walls or slabs. Obtain authorization from OWNER prior to core drilling. Seal spaces around conduit and the wall penetration details as shown on the Drawings.
N. Non-Metallic Conduit: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
16130-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Join sections in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures for push-fit, bell and spigot type joints, if applicable, or with manufacturer's recommended cement.
3. During installation provide expansion fittings for expansion and contraction to compensate for temperature variations. Expansion fittings shall be watertight and of the type suitable for direct burial.
4. Make transition to PVC coated rigid steel conduit before making turn up to enclosures.
3.2 TESTING
A. Test conduits by pulling through each conduit a cylindrical mandrel not less then two pipe inside diameters long, having an outside diameter equal to 90 percent of the inside diameter of the conduit.
B. Maintain a record, by number, of all conduits testing clear.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Tag all conduits at the ends and in all intermediate boxes, chambers, handholes and other enclosures. Fasten tags to conduits with bare stainless steel wire. Where this method is not practical, fasten to the adjacent masonry by means of expansion bolts.
B. Use numbers on all conduits as designated in the cable and conduit schedule and record the conduit numbers and the cable content by cable designation, size, quantity, origin and termination of conductors, and name of equipment served. Assign numbers to unidentified conduits such as home runs to panelboards. Lighting conduits are excluded from these requirements. This information shall be included with the Record Drawings.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16135-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16135
OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide boxes, as follows: 1. Provide outlet boxes for mounting wiring devices and lighting fixtures. 2. Provide junction or pull boxes in runs containing more than three 90 degree bends,
runs exceeding 200 feet, where shown on the Drawings and where required to conform with the National Electrical Code.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. NEC Article 370, Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes, and Fittings. 2. UL Standard No. 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes. 3. UL Standard No. 514, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings. 4. UL Standard No. 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous
Locations.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Outlet Boxes: PVC Coated where required per these specifications and Section 16050. Cast gray iron alloy, or cast malleable iron, with zinc electroplate finish in damp, wet or exterior locations and zinc-coated sheet steel in dry locations. Provide boxes of one of the following: 1. Crouse-Hinds Company. 2. Appleton Electric Company. 3. Bowers. 4. Or equal.
B. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Material and Construction:
a. Cast gray iron alloy with hot-dip galvanized finish or cast malleable iron bodies and covers.
b. Neoprene gaskets. Gaskets shall be of an approved type designed for the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not acceptable.
c. Stainless steel cover screws. d. External mounting lugs. e. Drilled and tapped conduit holes. f. Boxes where conduits enter a building below grade shall have 1/4-inch drain hole.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide pull and junction boxes of one of the following:
16135-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Appleton Electric Company. b. O-Z/Gedney Company. c. Hoffman. d. Or equal.
3. Large boxes not generally available in cast construction may be fabricated of copper-free aluminum alloy or Type 316 stainless steel as required by location.
4. Boxes for installation in areas classified as hazardous locations shall be explosion proof and shall comply with UL 886.
5. For flush-mounted pullboxes in exterior slabs or pavement and where indicated in interior slabs, provide vehicular traffic-bearing covers.
6. Junction boxes and pullboxes embedded in concrete slabs shall be cast iron. Junction boxes and pullboxes located in wet, or outdoor areas shall be NEMA 4X. Junction boxes and pullboxes located in corrosive locations shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel. All other areas shall be NEMA 12.
7. PVC Coated where required per these specifications and Section 16050.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount boxes so that sufficient access and working space is provided.
B. Securely fasten boxes to walls, other structural surfaces or slabs on or in which they are mounted. Provide independent galvanized steel supports where no walls or other structural surface exists.
C. For units mounted on masonry or concrete walls, provide suitable 1/2-inch spacers to prevent mounting back of box directly against wall.
D. Where sizes are not indicated, size junction and pull boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code.
E. Provide terminal blocks in junction boxes where cable terminations or splices are required.
F. Leave no open conduit holes in boxes. Close unused openings with capped bushings.
G. Label each circuit in boxes and identify with durable tag.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16136-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16136
UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide underground ductbanks where shown and where required. Duct bank routing on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Coordinate installation with piping and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300, Earthwork. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Section 16130, Conduit.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the National Electrical Code and National Electrical Safety Code.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval typical cross-sections and Layouts showing the proposed routing of duct banks.
B. Record Drawings: Include the actual routing of underground duct bank runs on Record Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Backfill: Select backfill in accordance with Section 02300, Earthwork.
B. Reinforcement: In accordance with Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Concrete: In accordance with Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
D. Duct: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 16130, Conduit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight.
B. Top of ductbanks shall be a minimum of 24-inches below grade, unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
16136-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Assemble duct banks using non-magnetic saddles, spacers and separators. Position separators to provide 3-inch minimum concrete separation between the outer surfaces of the ducts.
D. Provide a 3-inch minimum concrete covering on both sides, top and bottom of concrete envelopes around conduits. Add red dye to concrete mix for easy identification during subsequent excavation.
E. Firmly fix ducts in place during pouring of concrete. Carefully spade and vibrate the concrete to ensure filling of all spaces between ducts.
F. Make bends with sweeps of not less than 48-inch radius or 5-degree angle couplings.
G. Make a transition from non-metallic to PVC Coated rigid steel conduit where duct banks enter structures or turn upward for continuation above grade. Continue ducts inside buildings with PVC Coated rigid steel conduit where required per the area classification.
H. Reinforce all duct banks. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, reinforce with No. 4 longitudinal steel bars placed at each corner and along each face at a maximum parallel spacing of 18-inches on centers, and No. 3 tie-bars transversely placed at 18-inch maximum longitudinal intervals. Maintain a minimum clearance of 2-inch from bars to the edge of the concrete encasement.
I. Where ducts enter structures such as manholes, handholes, pullboxes, transformer and switchgear compartments, or buildings, terminate the ducts in suitable end bells, insulated bushings or couplings on steel conduits.
J. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, corrosive material or other materials which can damage or contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables or prevent adequate compaction of fill.
K. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope of approximately 3-inches per 100 feet.
L. Install a 3/0 bare stranded copper duct bank ground in each duct bank envelope. Make ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system and connect to switchgear and motor control center (MCC) ground buses and to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system.
M. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel, not less than 12-inches long and with a cross section approximately 1/4-inch less than the inside cross section of the duct, through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the duct.
N. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12-inches below finished grade over all underground duct banks carrying cables of 480 volts and higher. The identifying ribbon shall be a PVC tape, 3-inches wide, yellow color, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" in black letters.
O. Reused Existing Ducts: 1. Pull rag swab through duct to remove water and to clean duct prior to installing new
cable. 2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed. 3. Pull mandrel through duct, if necessary, to remove obstructions.
16136-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
P. No more than 270 degrees of bends allowed in a continuous run of conduit.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16137-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16137
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide manholes and handholes where shown on Drawings. Verify final locations in field. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all excavation and backfilling required for installation.
B. Coordination: Coordinate manhole and handhole installation with piping, sheet piling and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences.
C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02300, Earthwork. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Section 16136, Underground Duct Banks.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. National Electrical Safety Code. 3. ASTM A 48, Gray Iron Castings. 4. ANSI A14.3, Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders. 5. OSHA.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit, for approval, drawings showing interior and exterior dimensions and details of openings, jointing, inserts and reinforcing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Material and Construction: 1. Precast or cast-in-place type of reinforced concrete. 2. Minimum interior dimensions as shown on the Drawings. 3. Duct entrances sized and located to suit duct banks.
B. Accessories: 1. Frames and Covers:
a. Material: Cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 30A. b. Covers: Watertight, sealed type marked "ELECTRICAL" in raised 2- inch letters.
16137-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
c. Frame shall be grouted on the manhole or handhole. 2. Pulling Irons:
a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Cast in the wall opposite to the centerline of each incoming duct bank and 12-
inches below centerline of bottom line of ducts. 3. Cable Racks:
a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Cable racks shall adequately support cables with space allowed for future cables. c. Each rack shall be a vertical assembly of 24-inch cable racks extending from
within 6-inches of the manhole roof slab to within 6-inches of the manhole floor. d. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1) Catalog Number J-5125 by Joslyn Manufacturing and Supply Company. 2) Catalog Number 2125 by Hubbard and Company. 3) Or equal.
4. Cable Hooks: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Length: 7-1/2-inch minimum. c. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1) Catalog Number J-5132 by Joslyn Manufacturing and Supply Company. 2) Catalog Number 2132 by Hubbard and Company. 3) Or equal.
5. Insulators: a. Material: Porcelain. b. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1) Catalog Number J-5122 by Joslyn Manufacturing and Supply Company. 2) Catalog Number 2120 by Hubbard and Company. 3) Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Complete installation of manholes and handholes so that structures are watertight.
B. Cable Racks: 1. Attach with 3-inch by 3/8-inch diameter "tamp-in" studs mounted in 1-inch holes
drilled into walls of manholes in the absence of inserts. 2. Provide cable hooks to support each cable on each rack along the cable run within the
manholes. 3. Individually support each cable at each hook on porcelain insulators. 4. In the manhole securely tie each cable in place at each insulator block to prevent
excessive movement of insulators, cables, or fireproof tape. Tie cables with non-metallic 3/4-inch strapping tape as manufactured by 3M or tie down with nylon straps.
C. Grounding: Install a 3/4-inch by 10-foot copper-clad ground rod for each manhole. Bond all exposed metal manhole accessories and the concrete reinforcing rods with No. 4 AWG minimum bare copper wire and connect to the ground rod and to the ductbank ground cable.
D. Provide grading rings for manholes when required to adjust manhole cover to proper grade. Stacks shall be minimum of 12-inches in height, constructed on the roof slab or
16137-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
cone section on which the manhole frame and cover shall be placed. The height of the grading ring shall be such as is necessary to bring the manhole frame to the proper grade.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16140-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide wiring devices, including: 1. Receptacles. 2. Snap switches for lighting and other systems.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Section 16135, Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. UL Standard #20, General Use Snap Switches. 3. UL Standard #894, Switches for Use in Hazardous Locations. 4. UL Standard #1010, Electrical Receptacle - Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous
Locations.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECEPTACLES
A. Non-Hazardous Locations: Duplex grounding receptacle, two pole, three wire, 125 volt AC, 20 ampere. All outlets shall be ground-fault interrupting type. Provide one of the following: 1. Catalog Number 53CM62, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. 2. Catalog Number 5362-CR, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated. 3. Leviton. 4. Or equal.
B. Special Receptacles: Provide receptacles with number of poles, voltage and current rating as shown on the Drawings. Coordinate with equipment plugs. Provide matching plug for each receptacle.
2.2 SWITCHES
A. Non-Hazardous Locations: 1. Single pole AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 volt AC, 20 ampere, Ivory,
specification grade. Provide one of the following: a. Catalog Number 1221-I, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated.
16140-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Catalog Number 1991-I, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated. c. Leviton. d. Or equal.
2. Single pole, 3-way AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 volt AC, 20 ampere, Ivory, specification grade. Provide one of the following: a. Catalog Number 1223-I, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. b. Catalog Number 1993-I, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated. c. Leviton. d. Or equal.
3. Two pole AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 volt AC, 20 ampere, Ivory, specification grade. Provide one of the following: a. Catalog Number 1222-I, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. b. Catalog Number 1992-I, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated. c. Leviton. d. Or equal.
2.3 COVERS
A. Indoor covers shall be Type 304, stainless steel.
B. Outdoor or wet location covers shall be weatherproof and corrosion resistant. PVC Coated where required per these specifications and Section 16050.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices in outlet or device boxes.
B. Install receptacles with ground pole in the down position.
C. Mount receptacles 18-inches above finished floor in non-hazardous locations and 4 feet-6 inches above finished floor in hazardous locations, unless otherwise noted.
D. Mount wall switches 4 feet-6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise noted.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16269-1
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
SECTION 16269
VFD 600V
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the design, manufacturing, testing, and delivery to the jobsite of metal enclosed, free-standing Variable Frequency Controller (VFD)(drive), complete with accessories and all auxiliary equipment needed to accomplish the functions required by this specification.
B. This specification shall cover NEMA 3R, outdoor, 18 pulse Variable Frequency Controllers for 460V loads.
C. Provide panel mounted air conditioning to meet internal environmental requirements of the drive and components.
D. Related Sections 1. 16120 600V Cable 2. 16130 Conduit
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The drive shall comply with the following: 1. National Electric Manufactures Association (NEMA) Safety standards for Construction
and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Variable Frequency Controller Systems
2. National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70 3. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 4. IEC 146 International Electrical Code 5. ISO 9001 6. UL 508 Qualifications 7. IEEE Standard 519
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The drives will be Manufacturers standard design, suitable for heavy duty industrial use and for the intended service. They will be installed in an industrial facility operating 24 hours a day 7 days a week.
B. This specification requires compliance with all laws and regulations which may be applicable including the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), as well as rules, regulations, and standards of the Secretary of Labor.
16269-2
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal literature, drawings, and documentation shall be clear, legible, and written in English. Failure to comply will result in rejection of submittal.
B. Product brochures must be sufficiently detailed so that an engineering evaluation may be completed on the suitability and part number of the equipment.
C. Submit details of the manufacturing quality assurance/quality control program and any QA/QC certifications.
D. Receipt by Owner or Owner’s Representative of all test and calibration submittals is a condition for final payment of the purchase order.
E. Submit written certification that all assembly, fabrication, and manufacturing has been performed in accordance with manufacturer’s written QA/QC policy and standards. Receipt of this submittal is a condition for final payment of the purchase order.
F. Submit cost for the services of a factory trained technician or engineer to assist in startup and commissioning. Pricing shall include hourly or daily rate, estimated travel and per diem costs, and minimum number of days recommended for this service.
G. Note any exceptions to this Specification.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the production of these drives and shall have in place a quality assurance program to be applied during the preparation and fabrication of the instruments.
B. After Sales Support 1. Qualified support shall be available either directly from the manufacturing facility or
from a network of factory-trained distributors and certified service centers located throughout North America and Canada.
C. Drive manufacturing facility shall be an ISO9001 certified manufacturing facility.
D. Assembly shop to be UL-508 certified.
E. Regulatory Requirements 1. Instruments shall have a UL listing and are marked and labeled in accordance with
applicable codes and standards. If manufacturer’s equipment is approved by a recognized testing laboratory other than UL, then the manufacturer shall provide a letter from the local authority having jurisdiction stating that such testing is acceptable to them.
16269-3
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
B. All equipment shall be adequately crated or protected, including export packing where required to prevent damage in handling, transit, and storage at the site.
C. Each item, piece, or subassembly of equipment shall have a securely attached metal tag stamped with the tag number. All crates and boxes shall be stenciled with the tag number. Tags and stencils shall be in a conspicuous place and readable.
D. Transmit to Owner or Owner’s Representative the shipping lists and delivery dates prior to the day the equipment leaves the shop. Transmittal receipt must be confirmed by Owner or Owner’s Representative prior to shipping equipment.
E. Each shipping piece shall be clearly marked with 2 to 3 inch high contrasting numbers and/or letters, giving tag number as called out on detail drawing. Piece marking shall be with a non-erasable marker.
F. In addition to the piece marking, a standard 3 inch by 5 inch red shipping tag shall be wired to each shipping lot. This tag shall state the range of tag and mark numbers, Vendor’s name and address, owner or Owner’s Representative’s name, jobsite address and Purchase Order number.
1.7 TAGGING
A. Each piece of equipment and loose accessory shall be tagged with a non-corroding metal tag as described below and securely affixed to the equipment by pins or non-corroding metal screws.
B. Tagging information shall include the Owner’s Purchase Order Number, P.O. Item Number, Owner’s Equipment Number, Vendor’s Name, Vendor’s Model Number, Vendor’s Shop Order Number, and Voltage stamped on the tag. Letters and numbers must be at least 1/8” (.125 inches) high.
1.8 ACCEPTANCE AT SITE
A. Inspect for visible and hidden damage and immediately notify Owner and Shipper of damage. Return to manufacturer for repair or replacement without compromising the construction schedule.
1.9 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. At a minimum, protect equipment from water, excess heat or cold, and construction dirt and debris.
B. Environmental Requirements
16269-4
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
1. Drive will be located within an environmentally conditioned electrical control room. Location is moderately dusty.
1.10 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate shipping schedules as per priorities with the Owner or the Owner’s Representative.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period for the equipment specified herein shall be a minimum one (1) year from the date of commercial operation at Owner's facility or eighteen (18) months from the date of delivery, whichever comes first. Vendor shall retain originals of all test reports through the duration of the equipment warranty period
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Toshiba HX7
B. No Equal
2.2 GENERAL
A. The manufacturer shall not have less than fifteen years of experience in the manufacture of AFD’s.
B. All components will be accessible from the cabinet door for service. Drive(s) must be designed for side-by-side, back-to-back, or against the wall installation.
C. The unit shall be NEMA type 3R, freestanding metal enclosed control cabinet with hinged front access door(s), filtered air conditioning system and containing main circuit breaker, autotransformer, static power conversion equipment, and all necessary controls, protection and metering, mounted, wired and tested, including at least the following: 1. Input disconnect switch, externally operated, with current limiting fuses for inverter.
Provide mechanical interlocks with enclosure door. 2. 115 Volt grounded AC control circuit.
a. Operator controls as shown on the schematic diagram which may include the following:
b. A speed control potentiometer c. Hand/Off/Auto Selector Switch d. Emergency Stop Pushbutton
D. Furnish each unit with a nameplate of laminated black and white plastic with beveled edges, with letters engraved through the white finish top lamination, exposing black interior lamination, containing the following information:
16269-5
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
1. Unit Number 2. Shop Order Number 3. Horsepower 4. Short Circuit Rating 5. Date Manufactured 6. Drawing Number(s)
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Input Power 1. The drive main input power shall be three phase 480VAC 50/60 Hz 2. The voltage tolerance for 600V drives twenty horsepower and above shall be +/-10%
and +5/-10 for 600V product below 20 Hp. 3. Input frequency tolerance shall be +/-5% for all ratings. 4. The efficiency of the drive shall be a minimum of 97.0% at full load at full speed.
Displacement power factor will be greater than 0.95 lagging over the entire speed range.
5. The Maximum Short Circuit Current Rating of the VFD shall be 65,000A RMS symmetrical for all ratings.
B. Hardware Design 1. Overall hardware design is for maximum flexibility, robustness, serviceability, and
reliability for the most demanding applications. 2. Power Terminations are oversized for the drive current rating to allow for flexibility on
all power terminations. 3. Drive cabinets contain a minimum of three ground termination points. 4. Power Terminations are ‘finger safe’ and clearly labeled with both the US (NEMA)
standards (L1, L2...T2) and IEC standards (R, S…W). 5. The latest technology in packaging, heat sink design, and cooling is utilized to
minimize overall size and weight without degrading performance or functionality. 6. Plastics, where used, are UV resistant. 7. Interrupting current rating of 200KAIC for all ratings. 8. Power Semiconductor heat sinks contain one or more thermal sensors monitored by
the microprocessor to prevent semiconductor damage caused by excessive heat or fan loss.
C. Converter Section 1. The drive employs diode bridge rectification to convert AC to DC. SCRs and other
switching power devices are not used in the converter section of the drive to minimize line notching and RFI.
2. Semiconductors on all ratings are sized (current) to allow full operation and overload capabilities at minimum input voltage.
3. PIV Ratings of the rectifier will be as follows: a. 220V drives--rectifier minimum PIV rating of 800V b. 460V drives—rectifier minimum PIV rating of 1600V c. 600V drives – rectifier minimum PIV rating of 1700V
4. The drive shall have MOVs mounted phase to phase for surge protection.
16269-6
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
D. DC Bus Section 1. Overall DC Bus design is passive capacitive filter to minimize ripple and maximize
power-loss ride-through. 2. DC Bus capacitance (total filter capacitance) is sized to eliminate any requirement for
bus inductance (for filtering purposes) when the DRIVE is used on a three-phase distribution system.
3. The DC bus voltage and current are monitored by the control section to prevent damage to either the drive or the driven equipment.
4. All ratings will contain fast acting fuses in the DC Bus section. 5. 220V drives – bus capacitance voltage rating 400VDC (minimum) 6. 460V drives – bus capacitance voltage rating 800VDC (minimum) 7. 600V drives – bus capacitance voltage rating 1050VDC (minimum) 8. All capacitors have balance/discharge resistors to equalize charge voltage and permit
safe discharge on power outage 9. Soft charge circuitry does not utilize power transistors nor time delay relays 10. The DC Bus Section has complete power terminations to allowing:
a. Rectifier Isolation (positive side) b. Addition of extended ‘ride through’ capacitor bank c. Line regeneration using third party units d. DC Link inductor e. Common DC bus applications f. DC input
11. A readily visible LED indicates when DC voltages are present 12. The DC Bus section is designed to permit common DC bussing of multiple drives.
E. Inverter Section 1. The inverter section makes use of the latest generation of IGBT power switching
transistors to convert DC to three phase, variable frequency, sinusoidal coded PWM waveform.
2. IGBT initialization testing is performed by the control section on each power up and run command.
3. The inverter section does not require commutation capacitors. 4. All drives have software and hardware to limit reflected wave caused by long motor
cable lengths. 5. The IGBT ratings will be as follows: 6. 220V drives – IGBT minimum Vce rating 600V 7. 460V drives – IGBT minimum Vce rating 1200V 8. 600V drives – IGBT minimum Vce rating 1200V 9. All IGBTs have reversed biased diodes (free wheeling) to prevent IGBT failure when
subjected to motor discharge spikes 10. PWM switching frequencies are adjustable from 0.5 to 15kHz to 100Hp and 0.5 to
5kHz above to minimize audible motor noise and maximize both motor and drive efficiency.
11. IGBTs are sized (current) to allow the drive to operate at 110% (current) continuous and 150% (current) for up to 120 seconds. On units greater than 100Hp IGBT’s will have an overcurrent rating of 130% for 120 seconds.
12. To allow dissipation of regenerated energy, all drives contain a microprocessor controlled dynamic braking transistor. The dynamic braking transistor is an IGBT
16269-7
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
power semiconductor that is sized to allow 100% motor braking torque when connected to an appropriate resistor.
13. The dynamic braking transistor is fully protected by the microprocessor. 14. The dynamic braking transistor will not ‘turn on’ when the drive is not actively
engaged in controlling a motor. 15. Output currents in each phase are monitored using hall-effect current transducers to
enabling control of flux current, torque current, and providing protection to both the drive and driven equipment.
16. The inverter section is capable of sensing and interrupting a phase to phase or phase to ground fault on the output of the drive.
F. Control Section 1. The control section is designed to provide complete monitoring and protection of drive
internal operations while communicating with the outside world via one or more user interfaces.
2. The microprocessor used is the latest design CPU with adjustable frequency drive specific circuitry and firmware.
3. Algorithms for sensorless vector speed control, sensorless vector torque control, feedback vector speed, torque, and position control are resident in EEPROM memory and utilized by the microprocessor when applicable.
4. Microprocessor logic circuits are isolated from power circuits 5. Where switching logic power supplies are utilized, they are powered from the DC Bus
Section of the drive. 6. Microprocessor diagnostics are performed (on application of power) to prove
functionality and viability of the microprocessor. 7. Memory cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is performed (on application of power) to
prove integrity of EEPROM and UVPROM memories. 8. Motor diagnostics are performed (on application of power and each start) to prevent
damage to a grounded or shorted motor. The motor diagnostics may be disabled when using a low impedance motor.
9. All ratings contain at a minimum the following communications ports; a. 1200 to 9600 baud rate, automatic baud rate and parity setting b. RS222/RS485 automatic switching port – 1200 to 28400 baud rate,
10. The control section is designed to allow ‘quick change’ of the interface sections for both configuration and functionality.
G. Interface Section 1. Each drive shall have two user interfaces (in addition to the communication ports) as
standard: a. Electronic Operator Interface – A 90 X 280 (nominal) Graphical Backlit LCD display
with the ability to display multiple parameters on one screen. The EOI shall provide complete operating, monitoring, and programming functionality. The EOI shall be capable of operation from an external power source and firmware operating system is flash upgradeable and may be customized for special applications. The EOI shall contain a TTL communication port and an RS485 communications port for remote mounting. A Real Time Clock option shall be available for the EOI that allows provides complete data logging in the event of a fault.
16269-8
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
b. Terminal Board Interface shall provide complete operation functionality. Standard terminal board interface shall provide eight digital inputs, three digital outputs, four analog inputs, two analog outputs, and one pulse output. Inputs and outputs are independently configurable for both scaling and functionality.
2. The drive shall retain the ability to function with no attached interface. a. Output Power
1) The output voltage is adjustable from 0 to rated input voltage. 2) The output frequency range is adjustable for a maximum frequency output of
60 Hz. 3) The output (inverter) section of the drive will produce a PWM sinusoidal coded
waveform. 4) The output power switching devices shall be IGBT devices of the latest design.
2.4 ELECTRONIC OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. The EOI shall provide a convenient method of programming, operating, and monitoring the AFD. Parameters shall be grouped in a logical manner allowing rapid access to all parameters. All parameters are displayed in an easily understandable format using plain English for all items.
B. The graphical display shall allow groupings of multiple, logically associated parameters to be displayed on a single screen.
C. EOI backlighting controls may be configured for the wide range of ambient lighting conditions.
D. The customizable graphical display enables the use of user friendly units such as feet per minute, gallons per hour.
E. For security, the EOI functionality and access may be limited and password protected preventing an unauthorized user from accessing parameters, functions, or monitoring.
2.5 FUNCTIONALITY
A. Drive shall contain four sets of independently configurable acceleration / deceleration ramps. Each set is configurable as to both time and pattern. Times are adjustable from 0.01seconds to 6000 seconds.
B. Available patterns are Linear, S-Curve, and Overspeed ‘C’ Curve with both ‘S’ and ‘C’ curves allow user adjustment to customize the pattern
C. Acceleration/Deceleration sets (total four) are selectable via discrete input, Electronic Operator Interface, communications, or automatic switching based on output frequency.
D. An automatic acceleration/deceleration selection is available which dynamically structures each change in speed to match conditions of the driven equipment to minimize shock due to changes in velocity and/or load conditions.
16269-9
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
E. Overvoltage stall and overcurrent stall settings prevent damage to the driven equipment should acceleration or deceleration settings exceed the ability of the motor to accelerate or decelerate the driven equipment.
F. Braking 1. Drive shall have as an integral part of the power and control circuitry an IGBT
transistor for dynamic braking. The braking transistor is controlled by the AFD control system and allows, with the addition of an optional resistor, an economical means of rapidly stopping a high inertia load with up to 100% braking torque.
2. The braking transistor, braking resistor, and associated circuitry are fully protected by adjustable protection parameters eliminating the requirement for an external resistor overload protective device.
3. In addition to the dynamic braking, DC injection braking configurable for both standard and emergency stops, allowing full motor current applied as DC to rapidly bring a rotating load to a stop.
G. Control modes 1. The AFD shall have three distinct modes of operation
a. Speed control as V/Hz sensorless vector, or feedback vector b. Torque control both sensorless vector and feedback vector c. Position control with feedback vector
2. The drive has the ability to switch between modes of operation while running.
H. Current Detection/protection 1. Overcurrent stall adjustable from 0.0 to 250% 2. Configurable undercurrent detection and response 3. UL recognized speed sensitive motor FLA trip curves adjustable from 10 to 100%
inverter current rating 4. Motor 150% OL time limits adjustable from 10 seconds to 2400 seconds 5. OL Reduction Frequencies to optimize the speed sensitive motor overload to the
application/motor characteristics 6. Configurable overtorque detection levels, times, and reactions
I. Critical (skip) Frequencies 1. To avoid mechanical resonate frequencies, the AFD shall contains three programmable
jump frequencies with adjustable bandwidths. 2. The jump frequencies may be any frequency less than or equal to the programmed
value of maximum frequency. 3. The jump frequency bandwidths are independently programmable from +/- 0.00 to
+/- 20.0 Hertz.
J. Load Sharing 1. AFD shall have the ability to share the load among multiple motors mechanically
coupled to a common load. Because of variances in motors and mechanical speed reducers, one motor may experience more load than it counterparts and become overloaded. Drooping allows the overload motor to slow down, thus shedding torque and forcing the other motors to pick up the slack.
16269-10
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
2. The drooping parameters allow the user complete adjustment over drooping gain, speed droop and multiple load levels, drooping filters, and drooping torque range.
K. Process Control (PID) 1. The AFD shall contain an internal PID control algorithm with adjustable proportional,
integral, and differential. Feedback may be configured for direct or inverse reaction and is adjustable to span. PID may be enabled via discrete input, Electronic Operator Interface, or communications. Reaction to loss of feedback is configurable and discrete outputs may be configured to indicate loss of feedback or maximum deviation from setpoint.
L. Electronic Thermal Motor Protection 1. The drive contains four independently configurable electronic thermal motor protection
levels. The electronic thermal motor protection level may be selected by Electronic Operator Interface, discrete input, communication protocol, or fixed frequency.
2. The Electronic Thermal Motor Protection is speed sensitive and adjustable for motors with speed ranges of 2:1 to 10000:1 allowing the user to optimize motor protection to suit a variety of motors and applications.
3. The Electronic Thermal Motor Protection levels have configurable 150% motor FLA
time limits allowing the user to adjust the I2T protection slope.
M. Emergency off Modes and Settings 1. Emergency off response is configurable to either Deceleration Stop, Coast Stop, or DC
Injection Stop regardless of the standard stop mode. Emergency stop may be operator initiated via EOI, Discrete input (multiple E-Stop inputs allowed), Communication protocol
N. Feedback 1. For process control purposes, the drive will accept feedback signals as either an
analog signal, binary digital, BCD digital, communication protocol, or 50% duty cycle pulse train.
O. Input/Output (I/O) 1. As a minimum, the standard control terminal board contains:
a. Four discrete inputs independently configurable for any of multiple functions, sink or source selectable and ‘true/false’ on closure software selectable
b. Two discrete relay outputs configurable for any of multiple functions with form ‘C’ contacts rated 2 amps/250v
c. Three analog inputs with adjustable gains and bias and multiple functions d. Potentiometer input e. Two analog outputs with adjustable gain and bias 0-1ma or 4-20ma switch
selectable 2. All control terminal boards are remote mountable (up to fifteen feet) using a standard
25conductor computer cable.
P. Jog
16269-11
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
1. Jog frequency may be configured for any frequency from 0.0Hz to 10Hz. Jog is initiated from an appropriately configured input terminal, Electronic Operator Interface, or communication protocol.
2. Jog stop method is user configurable to coast, controlled deceleration or DC Injection. 3. Jog may be configured to allow reversing or only operate in a configured direction. 4. When jog direction is reverse from direction of motor rotation, the drives jog function
will smoothly decelerate the motor to zero then jog in the commanded direction.
Q. Override Control 1. Override control allows one or more analog signals to act as a trim source to a
frequency command. Override may be configured as either a additive (or subtractive) input such as – 5Hz to +5Hz, or as a percent of frequency command. Override may be assigned to any analog input, communication option, or Electronic Operator Interface.
R. Overvoltage Stall 1. Overvoltage stall prevents faults caused by regeneration. During deceleration,
overvoltage stall extends deceleration time when bus levels reach a user configurable level. When applied to overhauling loads, the drive will compensate for rising dc bus levels by momentarily increasing output frequency. Two overvoltage stall levels allow complete configuration and control for most cyclic overhauling loads and high inertia loads.
S. Pattern Run 1. The Pattern Run feature allows the drive to emulate many of the function of a small
programmable logic controller. Useful on any application which requires a set pattern of speed changes, based on either time or contact input, the drive may be programmed for four independent or interactive patterns each consisting of up to 7 changes in speed and/or direction. Each step may be configured to any of the four accel/decel times and patterns, direction, and timed from either step change, speed reached, or contact closure.
T. Preset Speeds 1. Up to 15 preset speeds may be configured in the drive. Each preset speed may have
defined direction, 1 of 4 accel/decel times and patterns, and motor protective set. The preset speed may be selected via input terminals (using BCD selection), Electronic Operator Interface, or communication function.
U. Ridethrough 1. Ridethrough mode allows the user to configure the drive to utilize motor regenerative
voltages to continue operation during brief power outages. Undervoltage detection time and undervoltage stall levels are user configurable items in addition to the drives response to undervoltage conditions.
V. Retry/Restart 1. The retry/restart drive function allows the drive to smoothly start a rotating load
regardless of the direction of rotation. When enabled, the drive will attempt to restart after a fault. The number of attempts and time between attempts are configurable items.
16269-12
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
W. Soft Stall 1. Soft Stall allows the drive to reduce output frequency when the current requirements
of the motor exceed the motor’s Electronic Thermal Protection setting. If the current drops below the motors overload protection level within the specified time, the output frequency of the drive will return to the commanded output frequency. Soft Stall is highly effective in preventing motor overload trips when used on fans, blowers, pumps, and other centrifugal loads which require less torque and current at lower speeds.
X. Torque Limiting 1. Drive shall have a torque limiting function prevents mechanical shock to rotating
equipment by allowing a user to establish a maximum torque limit. When enabled, the drive will prevent motor torque in excess of the user programmed torque limit.
2. Separate Torque Limits are configurable for positive and negative torque, and user adjustable from 0 to 250% motor torque. This allows complete torque control over both the motoring and generating regions on applications such as vibratory feeders and stamping machines.
Y. Torque Speed Limiting 1. Speed limits unique to torque control modes are configurable for both forward and
reverse operation.
2.6 REGULATION
A. Speed Control 1. Sensorless Vector – 0.1% of motor base speed from 1 to 60HZ
B. Torque Control 1. Sensorless Vector -- +/-10% of torque setpoint from 50 to 100% of the motors rated
torque.
2.7 SOFTWARE AND COMMUNICATION
A. Programming Software 1. Drive shall be programmable via a computer software program and which shall
provide the same functionality as the EOI with the additional capabilities of data logging, trending, storing and restoring multiple parameter sets. Cascading windows allow a user interface similar to the EOI in look and feel while allowing direct parameter access for experienced users. Trending and monitoring functions allow up to three items be graphically displayed on a standard trend chart and logged to a historical data file for future reference.
B. Communications 1. All parameters are accessible from any of the following drive supported
communication protocols. a. RS222 b. RS485 c. DeviceNet
16269-13
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
d. Profibus e. Modbus RTU f. Ethernet
C. Environment 1. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure with air conditioning to maintain operation within
manufacturer’s recommendations. Operating environmental ambient conditions without derating shall be: a. Temperature: –10 to +40 C b. Relative humidity: 5 to 95% non condensing c. Elevation: to 1000 meters (2200 ft) d. Shock: 0.5 G maximum
2. Storage environmental ambient conditions: a. Temperature: -10 to +65 C b. Relative humidity: 5 to 98% non condensing c. Elevation: to 5000 meters
2.8 LONG LEAD LENGTH
A. All drives shall have software and hardware to limit reflected wave caused by long motor cable lengths. When applied to motors with insulation systems that are compliance with NEMA MG-1-1998 Section IV Part 31, output filters shall not be required when motor lead length are within recommended limits.
B. If motor lead lengths are in excess of recommended limits, provide output filters with the drive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. Contractor installing and commissioning the facility.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the jobsite and identifying site conditions which may affect the installation, storage, or operation of the equipment and notifying Owner or Owner’s Representative of such conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protect equipment from damage during installation.
B. Prepare installation location in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
16269-14
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Do not locate drives where subject to mechanical damage or where subject to washdown or frequent water spray.
C. Securely attach wall mount units to a wall or fabricated support stand.
D. Provide a 4” housekeeping pad extending 2” out from all sides of the drive for floor mount units.
E. Allow sufficient space around the drive to allow for required cooling.
F. Install conduit and cable for power and control.
G. Ground drive in accordance with NEC and manufacturer’s requirements.
H. Coordinate installation with other trades and disciplines.
3.5 CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate and assemble drives and test to assure conformance to specification requirements.
B. Notify Owner or Owner’s Representative of factory testing schedule so that they have the option of witnessing the factory tests.
C. Provide each drive with an engraved nameplate of laminated black and white plastic with beveled edges. Letters shall be black on a white background. Nameplates shall contain the following information: 1. Drive tag number 2. Shop order number 3. Horsepower, voltage, phases 4. Short circuit rating 5. Date manufactured 6. Reference drawing numbers
3.6 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Repair or restore to previous condition any facility or equipment damaged or disturbed by the installation of the equipment.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and with the requirements of this specification.
16269-15
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
B. Verify field wiring and equipment calibration.
C. If required by the purchase order, schedule Manufacturer’s Field Services representative for startup assistance. Submit report detailing all actions performed by this individual, all findings and recommendations. Report must state that manufacturer’s representative has certified the installation in compliance with manufacturer’s requirements.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Perform any field adjustments required by manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative.
B. Configure all drive parameters required for proper operation. Submit to Owner or Owner’s Representative a configuration and startup report documenting all drive settings and containing the following information: 1. Date of startup/configuration 2. Name of technician 3. Tag number and name of drive 4. Complete list of all configured parameters.
C. If parameters have been downloaded to a computer, submit a CD with this configuration file and labeled with the information required above.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean all debris from the equipment. Vacuum out all loose dirt and materials. Wipe down outside of drive.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner or Owner’s Representative and leave equipment ready for normal operation.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect work at all times from damage by other trades or disciplines. Repair or replace any equipment damaged by other trades or disciplines.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16410-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16410
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Furnish and install disconnect switches as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16140, Wiring Devices, for disconnect switches on 120 volt, single-phase
circuits.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. UL #98, Enclosed Switches. 3. NEMA KS-1, Enclosed Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit, for approval, Product Data for disconnect switches proposed for use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Single Throw, Circuit Disconnect Switches: 1. Type: Fused or unfused, horsepower rated, heavy-duty, single- throw, quick-make,
quick-break mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety handle. 2. Rating: 600 volts, with number of poles and ampere rating as required for motor or
equipment circuits being disconnected. Switches shall bear a UL label.
B. Double Throw Safety Switches: 1. Type: Unfused, double throw with center OFF position, quick-make, quick-break
mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety handle. 2. Rating: 600 volts, with number of poles and ampere rating as shown on the
Drawings for the circuits being disconnected.
C. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 12 for dry, indoor non-corrosive areas. 2. NEMA 4X for all wet or outdoor non-corrosive locations. 3. NEMA 4X stainless steel for corrosive locations. 4. NEMA 7 or 9 for all hazardous locations. 5. Nameplate identifying equipment for which switches serve as the disconnecting
means.
16410-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide disconnect switches of one of the following: 1. Square D 2. GE 3. Allen Bradley 4. Appleton 5. Killark
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance.
B. Securely fasten equipment to walls, handrails or other structural supports on which they are mounted. Provide independent stainless steel supports where no wall or other structural surface exists.
C. Furnish one (1) set of spare fuses for each fused disconnect switch to be installed.
D. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16440-1
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
SECTION 16440
LIGHTING AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide lighting and distribution panelboards, as shown.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. NEC Article 384, Switchboards and Panelboards. 2. UL Standard #50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes. 3. UL Standard #67, Electric Panelboards. 4. NEMA PB1, Panelboards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein, and a listing of the panelboards to be furnished identifying their location and number of branch circuit breakers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Panelboards: 1. Rating: Voltage rating, current rating, number of phases, number of wires and
number of poles shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, bolt-in thermal magnetic type with number of poles
and trip ratings as shown on the Drawings. 3. Main and branch circuit breakers shall be fully rated with interrupting capacities as
follows: a. 22,000 or 35,000 amps or as shown on the drawings for 480/277 volt circuit
breakers. b. 10,000 or 22,000 amps or as shown on drawings for 120/240 volt circuit break-
ers. 4. Bus Bars: 98 percent conductivity copper, tin plated. All 4 wire panelboards shall
have a solid neutral bar. All panels shall have ground bus. 5. Main: All panelboards shall have a main circuit breaker, unless Drawings specifically
call for main lugs only. 6. Branch circuit breakers connected for sequence phasing. 7. Construction: Code grade steel, NEMA 12, ample gutter space, flush door, flush
snaplatch and lock for dry indoor locations. NEMA 3R steel for all damp, or wet locations. NEMA 4X stainless steel for corrosive locations.
8. Trim: Surface or flush as required. 9. Directory: Typed card, with cover in frame on back of door giving the circuit numbers
and the area or equipment served. 10. Identification: Nameplate identifying the panel number and voltage.
16440-2
City of Prescott October 2016Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002 For Construction
11. Product and Manufacturer: Provide panelboards of one of the following: a. Square D. b. GE. c. Eaton-Culter Hammer d. Siemens.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting: Install panelboards at locations shown on Drawings. Set cabinets so that top circuit breaker is not over 6 feet from the floor.
B. Directory: Complete typewritten directory indicating items controlled by each circuit breaker and the size of feeder serving the panel.
C. Arrange circuits to balance the loads on the panelboards.
++ END OF SECTION ++
16461-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16461
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
C. Source quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.
16461-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
1. All equipment shall be adequately crated or protected, including export packing where required to prevent damage in handling, transit, and storage at the site.
2. Each item, piece, or subassembly of equipment shall have a securely attached metal tag stamped with the tag number. All crates and boxes shall be stenciled with the tag number. Tags and stencils shall be in a conspicuous place and readable.
3. Transmit to Owner or Owner’s Representative the shipping lists and delivery dates prior to the day the equipment leaves the shop. Transmittal receipt must be confirmed by Owner or Owner’s Representative prior to shipping equipment.
4. Each shipping piece shall be clearly marked with 2 to 3 inch high contrasting numbers and/or letters, giving tag number as called out on detail drawing. Piece marking shall be with a non-erasable marker.
5. In addition to the piece marking, a standard 3 inch by 5 inch red shipping tag shall be wired to each shipping lot. This tag shall state the range of tag and mark numbers, Vendor’s name and address, owner or Owner’s Representative’s name, jobsite address and Purchase Order number.
C. Tagging
1. Each piece of equipment and loose accessory shall be tagged with a non-corroding metal tag as described below and securely affixed to the equipment by pins or non-corroding metal screws.
2. Tagging information shall include the Owner’s Purchase Order Number, P.O. Item Number, Owner’s Equipment Number, Vendor’s Name, Vendor’s Model Number, Vendor’s Shop Order Number, and Voltage stamped on the tag. Letters and numbers must be at least 1/8” (.125 inches) high.
D. Acceptance At Site
16461-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Inspect for visible and hidden damage and immediately notify Owner and Shipper of damage. Return to manufacturer for repair or replacement without compromising the construction schedule.
E. Storage and Protection
1. Store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. At a minimum, protect equipment from water, excess heat or cold, and construction dirt and debris.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 3. Controlled Power Company. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp. 6. General Electric Company. 7. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc. 8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. 9. Micron Industries Corp. 10. Myers Power Products, Inc. 11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 12. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 13. Square D; Schneider Electric.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
16461-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2 or 3R as required by project drawings..
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
E. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None
F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.
G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity
H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
16461-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:
a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.
c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.
L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16461-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "600V Conductors, Wire, and Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.
B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
16461-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
END OF SECTION
16670-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: 1. Design and installation of a complete lightning protection system. 2. Materials and components for the lightning protection system.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 16050.
B. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI): 1. LPI-175 - Standard of Practice.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. ANSI/NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection
Systems.
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 96 - Standard for Lightning Protection Components. 2. 96A - Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection
Systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Section 16050.
B. Specific definitions: 1. LPI: Lightning Protection Institute.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Retain the services of a lightning protection contractor to design, furnish, and install a complete lightning protection system, connected to the facility grounding system.
B. Lightning protection system: ANSI/NFPA 780; Class I UL 96A; master labeled system consisting of: 1. Air terminals on roof(s). 2. Bonding of structure and other metal objects. 3. Grounding electrodes. 4. Interconnecting conductors.
16670-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
C. Connect the lightning protection system to the facility grounding electrode: 1. Provide common ground connections as necessary to the electric and radio
antennas.
D. The installing contractor is responsible for all costs associated with UL inspection of the lightning protection system, including any costs associated with re-inspection necessary to obtain the UL 96A Master Label.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals as specified in Contract Documents and Section 16050.
B. Product data: 1. Provide pertinent catalog data for:
a. Air terminals. b. Conductors. c. Connectors. d. Accessories. e. Include dimensions and materials of each component, and include
indication of listing in accordance with UL 96.
C. Shop drawings: 1. Including but not limited to:
a. Layout of air terminals with the respective configuration of the zone of protection.
b. Grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects.
c. Type, size and locations for: 1) Terminal. 2) Electrode. 3) Conductor.
d. Conductor routing details. e. Connection details. f. Termination details. g. Applicable air terminal and other calculations.
2. Details showing installation of air terminals, conductors, and connectors.
D. Certificates: 1. Submit 2 notarized photocopies of the completed Application for UL Master
Label for each lightning protection system. 2. Submit written confirmation of having obtained UL Master Label and LPI
certification for each lightning protection system. 3. Photocopy of UL and LPI Installers' Certificate(s) for installation of lightning
protection systems. 4. Written confirmation regarding the system manufacturer's and the system
installer's membership in the Lightning Protection Institute. 5. Proof of the manufacturer and installer are UL-listed and LPI-certified.
E. Record Documents:
16670-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Provide Record Documents as specified in Contract Documents and Section 16050.
2. Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding connections, and routing of system conductors.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 16050.
B. Conform to the requirements of the UL and NFPA standards for lightning protection systems: 1. Components shall be listed in accordance with UL 96.
C. Manufacturer’s qualifications: 1. Company specializing in lightning protection equipment and a fully certified
manufacturer member of the Lightning Protection Institute: a. Listed in section "Lightning Conductor, Air Terminals and Fittings" of
the UL "Electrical Construction Materials Directory" for at least 5 years previous to this Contract's bid opening date.
D. Installers qualifications: Authorized installer for manufacturer, member of the UL quality control program, and LPI-certified installer for installation of lightning protection systems.
E. The lightning protection system shall meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 780.
F. Upon completion of installation the lightning protection contractor to have the facility lightning system physically inspected by Underwriters Laboratories and furnish a UL Master Label for the building: 1. Application for the UL Master Label without a physical inspection by UL is
unacceptable.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 16050.
1.08 SEQUENCING
A. Pre-installation conference: 1. Convene a pre-installation conference 1 week before commencing the Work
of this Section, as specified in Contract Documents and Section 16050.
B. Coordinate Work with other trades to ensure neat, correct, and unobtrusive installation.
C. Coordinate the Work of this Section with roofing and exterior and interior finish installations.
16670-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 16050.
1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. As specified in Section 16050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal: 1. Erico. 2. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 4. VFC, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Air terminals: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Size : 3/8-inch by 18-inch minimum extending a minimum of 12 inches
above the object to be protected. 3. On flat or walkable roofs, provide air terminals with:
a. Mushroom type blunt tip incapable of impalement if fallen upon. b. Spring mounted and capable of being pushed flush to the roof.
4. Air terminal bases: a. Cast bronze with bolt pressure cable connections securely mounted
with stainless steel screws and bolts.
B. Ground rods: 1. As specified in Section 16060.
C. Ground plate: Copper.
D. Conductors: 1. Perimeters:
a. Aluminum. b. At least 28 strands of 14 gauge or larger copper wire weighing not less
than 95 pounds per 1000 feet. 2. Down and counterpoise conductors:
a. Copper. b. At least 28 strands of 17 gauge or larger copper wire weighing not less
than 187 pounds per 1000 feet. 3. UL listed for the application. 4. Cable fasteners:
a. Electrolytically compatible with conductors and mounting surface: 1) Spaced in accordance with LPI and NFPA requirements.
16670-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
E. Connectors and splicers: Bronze or Aluminum as appropriate: 1. Make connections between dissimilar metals with approved bimetallic
connectors.
F. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Copper of type and size recommended by the manufacturer of the lightning
protection system. 2. Stainless steel bolts, screws, and other threaded fasteners.
G. System: Aluminum components for steel roofing, compatible with steel roofing materials; mechanical connectors and transition joints between aluminum and copper, suitable, properly installed by trained personnel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. It is the responsibility of the lightning protection subcontractor to review the electrical system design, and provide any and all additional equipment and materials needed in order to construct a master labeled UL lightning protection system.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the Drawings and as specified elsewhere in this Section.
D. Protect elements surrounding Work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 16050.
B. Install systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise specified in this Section.
C. Installation must be made by an LPI certified master installer. 1. Physically connect lightning protection equipment to structural roof framing
members including metal deck. 2. Do not attach lightning protection equipment to rigid roof insulation. 3. Coordinate sealing roofing penetrations to prevent leakage.
D. Conductor installations: 1. Install the lightning protection roof system(s) grounding and bending
conductors exposed on flat roof areas and concealed at ridge roof areas. 2. Install main downleads completely concealed and sleeved. 3. Other than for the purpose of protecting downlead conductors from damage
up to 6 inches above grade level, do not use exposed conduits to conceal the downleads on the exterior of the building outside walls.
16670-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
4. Use minimum 1-inch PVC conduits to protect lightning system conductors from damage: a. Bond both ends of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit to conductor.
E. Clearances: Assure 6-foot minimum distance required by NEC: 1. From lightning rod conductors to non-current-carrying metal parts of
electrical equipment unless they are bonded to the rods. 2. From lightning system conductors to open conductors of communication
systems. 3. From lightning protection grounding electrodes to electrodes of other
grounding systems.
F. Extend air terminals a minimum of 12 inches above object to be protected.
G. Maintain horizontal or downward coursing of main conductor and ensure that bends have at least an 8-inch radius and that no bend of a conductor forms an included angle of less than 90 degrees.
H. Install ground electrodes not less than 1 foot below grade and not less than 2 feet from foundation walls.
I. Interconnection of metals: 1. Bond all metal bodies within 6 feet of the conductor to the system with
approved fittings and conductor. 2. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with approved
bimetallic connections. 3. Bond metal bodies of inductance located within 6 feet of a conductor or
object with secondary bonds.
J. Bond all isolated metallic bodies at or below the roof subject to inductance and within 6 feet of lightning protection system conductors.
K. Provide necessary common grounds between the lightning protections system and the electric and telephone service entrance wires, TV and radio antenna grounds.
L. Ensure that air terminals are installed to withstand calculated wind force due to 100 miles per hour winds or as specified in Contract Documents, whichever is greater with a 1.3 gust factor without structural damage and without damage to integrity of the lightning protection system.
M. Protect down conductors entering corrosive soil against corrosion by a protective coating for not less than 3 feet above grade level and for the entire length below grade level until connection to the ground ring and rods.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 16050:
16670-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Provide the services of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to physically inspect the entire lightning protection system and issue the UL Master Label: 1. Furnish Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Master Label as evidence that the
installation has met with UL 96A code requirements.
C. Obtain LPI system certification reports and LPI system certification.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. As specified in Section 16050.
END OF SECTION
16050-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 17050
PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all Process Control and Instrumentation Work. 2. General requirements for process control and instrumentation submittals.
B. Work and or Materials by others and field supported by the CONTRACTOR: 1. All SCADA, PLC, HMI software and program development shall be performed by
the OWNER’s representative (Application Engineering System Supplier (AESS). The CONTRACTOR shall provide support of the testing and field verification of all signals (inclusive of ranging, scaling and troubleshooting) and equipment/systems associated with the PLC/HMI and or SCADA programming.
C. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for all other work, including but not limited to: 1. Supply and install of all field devices, wiring, instruments, panels, switches, lights,
receptacles, etc. 2. Installation of control cabinets and terminate all field wires as required to function
as a complete system. 3. Testing of the complete system.
D. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components: 1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary
information furnished by various equipment manufacturers, which identify a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems.
2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, include all costs to add any additional instruments, wiring, control system inputs/outputs, controls, interlocks, electrical hardware etc., which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished: a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer’s wiring requirements.
3. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance as specified.
4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure that all items related to the instrumentation and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any items that appear on Drawings or in Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work: a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer conflict
to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution. 5. Loop drawings:
16050-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Provide complete loop drawings for all systems, including packaged equipment furnished as part of a vendor furnished package, and for all pre-purchased equipment.
b. The form, minimum level of detail, and format for the loop drawings must match that of the sample loop drawings included in the Contract Documents or ISA-5.4 standard if no diagrams are provided.
c. The OWNER and ENGINEER are not responsible for providing detailed loop diagrams for CONTRACTOR furnished equipment.
E. All instrumentation, and control equipment and systems for the entire project to comply with the requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not: 1. The requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications apply to all
Instrumentation and Control Work specified in other Specifications, including packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.
2. Inform all vendors supplying instrumentation, control systems, panels, and/or equipment of the requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
3. The OWNER is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the CONTRACTOR to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications’ requirements.
F. Contract Documents: 1. General:
a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used together in order to fully describe the Work.
2. Specifications: a. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements.
3. Contract Drawings: a. The Instrumentation and Control Drawings show in a diagrammatic manner,
the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of the Instrumentation Work. Follow the Drawings as closely as possible, use professional judgment and coordinate with the other trades to secure the best possible installation, use the entire Drawing set for construction purposes.
b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximate only, exercise professional judgment in executing the Work to ensure the best possible installation: 1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and
elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all instrumentation and control equipment is compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions.
2) The CONTRACTOR has the freedom to select any of the named manufacturers as identified in the individual Specifications; however, the ENGINEER has designed the spatial equipment layout based upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named manufacturer’s equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space.
c. Installation details:
16050-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1) The Contract Drawings include installation details showing means and methods for installing instrumentation and control equipment. For cases where typical details are not provided or compatible with an installed location, develop installation details that are necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the ENGINEER.
d. Schematic diagrams: 1) All controls are shown de-energized. 2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system. 3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts for the
control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system voltage drop considerations.
4) Provide intrinsic barrier relays where wiring will interface with equipment located in hazardous classified locations that is not inherently suited for the location.
5) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or indicated.
6) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the descriptive operating sequences indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional control system.
G. Alternates/Alternatives: 1. Substitute item provisions as specified in Document 16050.
H. Changes and change orders: 1. As specified in Document 16050.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Code compliance: 1. As specified in Contract Documents:
a. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. The latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced publications in effect at the time of Bid governs.
2. The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into this Section: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1) B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. b. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1) RP551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation. 2) RP552 - Transmission Systems. 3) RP553 - Refinery Control Valves. 4) RP554 - Process Instrumentation and Control. 5) RP555 - Process Analyzers. 6) RP557 - Guide to Advanced Control Systems.
c. ASTM International (ASTM): 1) A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service. d. FM Global (FM). e. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
16050-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
f. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) g. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). h. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1) 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing.
i. International Society of Automation (ISA): 1) 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 2) 5.2 - Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations. 3) 5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems. 4) 5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams. 5) 5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. 6) 7.00.01 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air. 7) 18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 8) 20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. 9) TR20.00.01 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27 New Specification Forms in 2004-2005.
10) 50.00.01 - Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electric Industrial Process Instruments.
11) 51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology. 12) RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers. 13) 71.01 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Temperature and Humidity. 14) 71.02 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Power. 15) 71.03 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Mechanical Influences. 16) 71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Airborne Contaminants. j. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). k. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1) 70 - National Electric Code (NEC). 2) 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection
Facilities. l. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1) 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
B. Compliance with Laws and Regulations: 1. As specified in Document 16050.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth by: 1. FM. 2. IEC. 3. IEEE. 4. ISA.
16050-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
5. ISO. 6. NEC. 7. NETA. 8. NFPA. 9. NIST. 10. UL.
B. Specific definitions: 1. Control circuit: Any circuit operating at 120 volts alternating current (VAC) or
direct current (VDC) or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device.
2. Panel: An instrument support system that may be either a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the context, the term “panel” in these Contract Documents is interpreted as a general term, which includes flat surfaces, enclosures, cabinets and consoles.
3. Power circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device.
4. Signal circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 VAC or VDC, which conveys analog information or digital communications information.
5. Digital bus: A communication network, such as Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus, or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control functions and diagnostic information.
6. 2-Wire transmitter (loop powered): A transmitter that derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this Section, two-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter that provides 4 to 20 milliamperes current regulation of a signal in a series circuit with an external 24 VDC driving potential: a. Fieldbus communications signal or both.
7. Powered transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source (120 VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As used in this Section, the produced signal may be either a 4 to 20 milliampere current signal, a digital bus communications signal or both.
C. Acronym definitions: 1. CCS:The SCADA central computer system (CCS) consisting of personal computers
and software. The personal computer-based hardware and software system that includes the operator interface, data storage, data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reports, trending, and other higher level control system software and functions.
2. DPDT:Double-pole, double-throw. 3. ES:Enterprise system: Computer based communications or data sharing system
utilized for non-process control functions such as E-mail, sharing files, creating documents, etc.
4. FAT:Factory acceptance test. 5. HART:Highway addressable remote transducer. 6. HOA:Hand-Off-Auto control function that is totally PLC based. In the Hand mode,
equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through operator direction under the control of the PLC software. In the Auto mode, equipment is
16050-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
started or stopped and valves are opened or closed through a control algorithm within the PLC software. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding from the PLC control.
7. HMI:Human machine interface: PLC based operator interface device consisting of an alphanumeric or graphic display with operator input functionality. The HMI is typically a flat panel type of display mounted on the front of a PLC enclosure with either a touch screen or tactile button interface.
8. ICSC: Instrumentation and control system contractor: Subcontractor who specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software development, installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial instrumentation and control systems. (Owner’s Representative has been selected. Contact information shall be provided to the awarded CONTRACTOR.)
9. IJB:Instrument junction boxes: A panel designed with cord sets to easily remove, replace or relocate instrument signals.
10. I/O:Input/Output. 11. IP:Internet protocol or ingress protection. 12. LCP:Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI, pilot
type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO.
13. LAN:Local area network: A control or communications network that is limited to the physical boundaries of the facility.
14. LOR:Local-Off-Remote control function. In the Remote mode, equipment is started or stopped, and valves are opened or closed through the PLC based upon the selection of the HOA. In the Local mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding to any control commands.
15. NJB:Network junction box. An enclosure that contains multiple access points to various networks within the facility. Networks could be Ethernet, Ethernet/IP, Fieldbus, RIO, etc.
16. OIT:Operator interface terminal: PC-based interface device used for operator interface with the SCADA system.
17. P&ID:Process and instrumentation diagram. 18. PC:Personal computer. 19. PCIS:Process control and instrumentation system: Includes the entire
instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the Work specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings.
20. PCM:Process control module: An enclosure containing any of the following devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO.
21. PJB:Power junction box: An enclosure with terminal blocks that distribute power to multiple instruments.
22. PLC:Programmable logic controller. 23. RIO:Remote I/O device for the PLC consisting of remote I/O racks, or remote I/O
blocks. 24. RTU:Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC, and a
means for remote communications. The remote communications devices typically are radios, modems, etc.
25. SCADA:Supervisory control and data acquisition system: A general name for the computerized system that gathers and processes data from sensors and applies operational controls to the process equipment. It includes the PLCs and/or RTUs,
16050-7
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
HMI PLC-based operator interface units, related interconnecting communications systems, and the CCS operator interface and data management system.
26. SPDT:Single-pole, double-throw. 27. SPST:Single-pole, single-throw. 28. UPS:Uninterruptible power supply. 29. VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with particular
equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc.
30. WAN:Wide area network: A control or communications network that extends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General requirements: 1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the Instrumentation and Control System Work indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications and reasonably inferable there from including but not limited to: a. Preparing hardware submittals for field instrumentation. b. Design, develop, and draft loop drawings, control panel designs, and all other
drawing submittals specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications. c. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals. d. Procure all hardware. e. Provide all PCIS system hardware and software; except that listed in section
1.01.B above. f. Fabricate panels; except that listed in section 1.01.B above. g. Perform factory tests on panels; except that listed in section 1.01.B above. h. Perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation. i. Oversee and certify installation of the PCIS system. j. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing. k. Oversee, document, and certify system pre-commissioning. l. Conduct the performance tests. m. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals. n. Conduct training classes; except for the training associated with the
PLC/HMI/SCADA system hardware and software by ICSC. o. Prepare Record Drawings. p. Coordinate with the ICSC to integrate the PCIS with instrumentation and
control devices provided under other sections. q. Develop all requisite loop drawings and Record Drawings associated with
equipment provided under the Contract Documents and OWNER furnished and existing equipment.
r. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS and interfacing devices.
s. Perform all required corrective and preventative maintenance. 2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of all equipment furnished by others, as well as equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are necessary for successful operation.
16050-8
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Provide the complete operating PCIS to perform the specified monitoring, communications, alarm, control, display, and reporting functions in accordance with the SCADA requirements; Note: Master site PLC/HMI RTU programming shall be provided by the OWNER.
4. Provide support and coordinate all aspects of the Work between CONTRACTOR and all subcontractors before bidding to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The OWNER is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the CONTRACTOR, the ICSC, the other subcontractors or suppliers.
5. Furnish detailed, complete, and thorough operations and maintenance documentation, including but not limited to operations manuals, maintenance manuals, as-built wiring drawings, training manuals, as-built software documentation, and all other documentation required to operate, modify, and maintain all parts of the PCIS.
6. Revise in a manner as directed by the ENGINEER all I/O and addressing that the ENGINEER determines to be unacceptable as a result of a lack of CONTRACTOR coordination between Contract Documents and all suppliers.
7. Defective Work: a. As specified in Document 16050 shall be repaired or replaced until approved
by the OWNER or ENGINEER.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals as specified in Contract Documents and this Section.
B. General: 1. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and
maintenance manuals of the requirements in this Section. 2. Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Electrical
Specifications. 3. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Section 16075
throughout the Project: a. Uniquely number each wire. b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings.
4. Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all submittals.
C. Submittal organization: 1. First page:
a. Specification section reference. b. Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal
before delivery to ENGINEER. c. Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible
for the development of the submittal. d. Place for CONTRACTOR’s review stamp and comments.
2. Next pages: a. Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that
individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub-paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and offers alternative means for compliance.
16050-9
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
b. Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER’s comments or questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted: 1) In the order that the comments or questions were presented
throughout the submittal. 2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the
comment appeared. 3) Acceptable responses to ENGINEER’s comments are either:
a) ENGINEER’s comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made.
b) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made.
c) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by ENGINEER.
4) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the ENGINEER’s previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Re-submittal.
5) No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received.
3. Remaining pages: a. Actual submittal data:
1) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section. For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used.
D. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. As specified in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete set of written operation and
maintenance manuals 8 weeks before energization start-up and/or commissioning.
E. Material and equipment schedules: 1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use: a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such
other information required to identify the items.
F. Schedule of values: 1. In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values,
Contract Documents, submit per unit material and labor costs used in developing the final bid for the electrical system, for the express purpose of pricing and cost justification for any proposed change orders. In addition to the items shown on the schedule of values, provide per unit material and labor costs for conduit and wire installation for specific types, sizes, and locations as indicated on the Drawings and Conduit Schedule. It is the responsibility of the electrical subcontractor to prove to the ENGINEER’s satisfaction that said per unit costs were used in the development of the final Bid amount.
16050-10
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
G. Installation recommendations: 1. Submit the manufacturer’s printed recommendations for installation of
electrical equipment.
H. Record documents: 1. Furnish as specified in Contract Documents. 2. Provide record documents of all Electrical Drawings. 3. Record Drawing requirements:
a. Update Record Drawings weekly. b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments. c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review. d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following:
1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures encountered or uncovered during construction.
4. Shop drawings: a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the
final as-built configuration of the systems: 1) Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on
11-inch by 17-inch using bond paper. 1) Generate all drawings developed for this project utilizing AutoCAD by Auto
Desk Version 2004 or later: 2) Furnish on CD-ROM disks containing the following for each drawing:
a) Original CAD files b) PDF version.
b. Furnish written information prepared specifically for this Project using .pdf and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper: 1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks.
5. Review and corrections: a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be
incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for
correction.
I. Test reports: 1. As specified in Contract Documents.
J. Calculations: 1. Where required by specific Electrical Specifications:
a. Because these calculations are being provided by a registered professional engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means.
K. Factory acceptance test: 1. As specified in Contract Documents.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.
16050-11
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
C. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the implementation of the PCIS and the integration of the PCIS with other required instrumentation and control devices.
D. The CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility to perform all work to select, furnish, install, test, calibrate, and place into operation all instrumentation, controls, telemetry equipment, control panels, and control system for a complete, integrated and functional PCIS system.
E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
F. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not interfere with the construction or the OWNER’s operations.
G. Shipping precautions: 1. After completion of shop assembly, successful FAT, pack all equipment, cabinets,
panels, and consoles in protective crates and enclose in heavy-duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture.
2. Place dehumidifiers when required, inside the polyethylene coverings. 3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport. 4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering. 5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
H. Special instructions: 1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.
I. Tagging: 1. Tag each component and/or instrument to identify its location, instrument tag
number, and function in the system. 2. Firmly attach a permanent tag indelibly machine marked with the instrument tag
number, as given in the tabulation, on each piece of equipment constituting the PCIS.
3. Tag instruments immediately upon receipt in the field. 4. Prominently display identification on the outside of the package. 5. Utilize the Tag and Loop Number identifications shown on the P&IDs.
J. Delivery and inspection: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container or
packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label.
1.7 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site conditions:
16050-12
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
1. Provide a PCIS, including all equipment, raceways, and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below.
2. Seismic classification: a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic
requirements for the site, as specified in Contract Documents. 3. Wind:
a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the site wind loading criteria, as specified in Contract Documents.
4. Altitude, temperature and humidity: a. As specified in Contract Documents. b. Provide all equipment and instrumentation fully rated for continuous operation
at this altitude, temperature and humidity conditions with no additional derating factors applied.
c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment and instrumentation in non-conditioned spaces or outdoors subject to these ambient temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature as determined by the equipment manufacturer’s guidelines: 1) Provide all power wiring for these devices (e.g., heaters, fans, etc.),
whether or not indicated on the Drawings. 5. Area classifications:
a. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications as specified in Section 16050 and shown on the drawings.
6. Site security: a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site, as
specified in Contract Documents.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. General: 1. As specified in Contract Documents. 2. Testing requirements are specified in Section 13302 and other sections. 3. General scheduling requirements are specified in Contract Documents. 4. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in Contract
Documents.
B. Pre-submittal conferences: 1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre-submittal conference for the
purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules, and submittal requirements.
2. The CONTRACTOR, instrumentation and control subcontractor, electrical subcontractor, and all manufacturers furnishing major pieces of equipment must attend, including but not limited to: a. Vendor control panels. b. Variable frequency drives. c. System configuration meetings:
3. OWNER’s SCADA System Programmer and ICSC are required to attend the system configuration meetings.
16050-13
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
4. Review the system configuration, the system database, control schemes, displays, report formats, etc. with the ENGINEER and OWNER on at least 3 occasions during development.
5. Preliminary meeting: Before configuration work is begun. The SCADA System Programmer and the ICSC must bring to this meeting examples of displays, display symbols, reports, etc. to show the capabilities of the system software.
6. Intermediate review meeting: Held after the initial database is entered and typical screens and reports have been entered.
7. Final review meeting: Held after initial completion of all configuration work. This final meeting may not be held in conjunction with the FAT. Make final format revisions after this review.
8. Loop validation test. 9. Notify the ENGINEER of scheduled tests a minimum of 30 days before the
estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the PCIS. 10. Complete loop validation testing a minimum of 5 days before the pre-
commissioning phase of the project. 11. Loop validation certifications:
a. After the field device loop tests have been successfully completed as specified in Section 17950 for all individual instruments, all separate analog control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors, all local operator interface panels, all motor control centers, etc., submit a certified copy of all test forms signed by the CONTRACTOR, ICSC, and the OWNER’s representative with test data entered, together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation, including all control and signal wiring, has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested.
C. Training: 1. Complete all training before the pre-commissioning phase of the project may
start. 2. Schedule the training sessions a minimum of 15 days before the start date of the
courses. 3. Submit training manuals to the ENGINEER a minimum of 10 days before starting
the training session. 4. Within 10 days after the completion of each session, submit the following:
a. A list of all OWNER personnel that attended the session. b. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with all notes,
diagrams, and comments.
D. Pre-commissioning test: 1. Commence after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and loop
validation tests, and all inspections have demonstrated that the PCIS complies with all Contract requirements.
2. Acceptance of the PCIS pre-commissioning testing must be provided in writing by the ENGINEER before the performance testing may begin.
E. Provide all special tools and spare parts, as specified in the Maintenance paragraph of this Section, before performance testing commences, suitably wrapped and identified.
F. Performance testing: 1. Complete pre-commissioning test a minimum of 5 days before the performance
test.
16050-14
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Conduct a 7-day performance test.
G. Substantial completion: The following conditions be fulfilled before the PCIS is considered complete: 1. All submittals have been completed and approved. 2. The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested and pre-commissioned. 3. The OWNER training has been performed. 4. All required spare parts, expendable supplies, and test equipment have been
delivered to the OWNER. 5. The performance test has been successfully completed. 6. All debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed. 7. All probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have
been cleaned and are in like-new condition.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the PCIS as specified in these Documents: 1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Instrumentation and
Control Specifications.
1.10 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Replace or modify equipment, software (if applicable), and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements: 1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional
testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by the Contract Documents including any calibrations, final adjustments, component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems in service.
B. Furnish all spare parts as required by the Contract Documents.
C. Provide additional spare parts specified in other sections of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
D. Submit all special tools and spare parts, suitably wrapped and identified, before performance testing commences.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide similar items from a single manufacturer throughout the PCIS portion of the Project.
16050-15
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual instrument and equipment specifications in other sections of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these devices and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications.
B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in the Contract Documents.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Furnish all meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent field proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop drawings unless otherwise specified to match existing equipment.
B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish individual instruments that have a minimum accuracy of ±0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of ±0.25 percent of full scale.
C. Signal transmission: 1. Analog signals:
a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Furnish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4 to 20 milliamperes 24 VDC, except as indicated.
c. Analog signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 VDC. d. Electrically or optically isolate all analog signals from other signals. e. All pneumatic signals: 3 to 15 pounds per square inch gauge. f. Discrete input signal as indicated in the controller hardware specification. g. Discrete output signals:
1) Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the ENGINEER) as needed to coordinate with the field device.
2) Provide external terminal block mounted fuse with blown fuse indication for all discrete outputs.
3) Interposing relays: a) Provide interposing relays for all discrete outputs.
h. Furnish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in supply voltage or load resistance within the unit’s rating.
i. Maintain the total 4 to 20 milliamperes loop impedance to 10 percent below the published value at the loop operating voltage.
j. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current-to-current (I/I) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission.
D. Discrete circuit configuration: 1. Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of
power. 2. Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition.
16050-16
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
3. Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
E. Grounding: 1. Provide control panels with a signal ground bus, isolated from the power ground
bus: a. Provide multiple panels in one location with a common point for signal ground
bus connection to ground. 2. Ground single point ground shields and measurement loops at the source panel
external terminals, unless otherwise noted, by bonding to the control panel signal ground bus.
3. Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is galvanically isolated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide flow conditioning and surge protection devices or other required accessories if necessary to meet the accuracy requirements in the Contract Documents.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications.
B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and cabinets, to allow the OWNER and ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication: 1. Equipment includes the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring devices,
and other pertinent systems and devices.
C. Factory testing is specified in Section 17950 and other sections of the Electrical, and the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Provide a complete instrumentation and control system: 1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to provide a
complete and operating electrical, and process control and instrumentation system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment locations indicated on the Drawings may change due to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels.
16050-17
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Review all information indicated on the Drawings, including architectural, structural, mechanical, instrumentation, and the accepted electrical, instrumentation, and mechanical shop drawings, and coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes.
3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by the OWNER or ENGINEER.
B. Perform all related Electrical Work in accordance with the applicable sections of the Electrical Specifications.
C. The PCIS configurations are diagrammatic: 1. The locations of equipment are approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where Project conditions require, make reasonable changes in locations and
arrangements.
D. Field instruments installation: 1. Install field instruments as specified in the Contract Documents, ANSI/API 550
and 551, and the manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached, and
easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical equipment: a. Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not directly
mounted, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Provide sun shields for all field electronic instruments exposed to direct
sunlight. 3. Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC coated
flexible conduit: a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification:
1) Area classification as specified in Section 16050. b. Maximum length of 18 inches.
4. Connect field instruments with cable as specified in the Electrical Specifications, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special cable, or otherwise specified herein: a. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC.
5. Verify the correctness of each installation: a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections. b. Ensure all process connections are free of leaks.
6. Provide a power disconnect switch for each 120 VAC powered instrument which does not have a built-in power disconnect: a. Disconnect enclosure suitable for the area classification:
1) As specified in Section 16050.
E. Process sensing lines and air tubing: 1. Install individual tubes parallel and/or perpendicular to and near the surfaces from
which they are supported. 2. Provide supports for rigid tubing at intervals of not more than 3 feet. 3. Slope horizontal runs of instrument tubing at a minimum of 1/16th inch per foot
to allow for draining of any condensate. 4. Bends:
a. Use proper tool. b. Make bends for parallel lines symmetrical. c. Make bends without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing.
16050-18
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
5. Square-cut and clean all ends of tubing before being inserted in the fittings. 6. Provide bulkhead fittings at all panels requiring pipe and/or tubing entries. 7. Use stainless steel tubing for all piping hard piped from the air header, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or not compatible with the fluids or atmosphere in the area: a. Use flexible connections only on moving equipment and under the constraint
that the length shall be less than 1.5 times maximum travel of the equipment.
F. Conduit, cables, and field wiring: 1. Provide all PCIS equipment cables, and process LAN communication networks
under the Instrumentation and Control Specifications. 2. Provide terminations and wire identification as specified in the Electrical
Specifications. 3. Protect all wiring from sharp edges and corners. 4. Provide all conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in accordance with all the requirements
of the Electrical Specifications.
G. Equipment tie-downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the Site. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., shall be permanently mounted
and tied down to structures.
H. Existing instrumentation: 1. Clean, recondition and re-calibrate each existing instrument to be reused,
removed, or reinstalled using an authorized service facility of the instrument manufacturer.
2. Provide certification of this Work before reinstallation of each instrument.
I. Instrument tagging: 1. As specified in Section 16075. 2. Provide all field-mounted instruments with nameplates:
a. Nameplates engraved with the instrument’s full tag number as indicated on the Drawings: 1) Affix tags with stainless steel wire fasteners.
3. Provide all back of panel instruments with nameplates: a. Engraved with the instrument’s full tag number as indicated on the Drawings:
4. Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate: a. Engraving to include the instrument’s full tag number and service description. b. Secure nameplates to the panel with stainless steel screws. c. Use an approved adhesive if screws would violate the NEMA or other ratings of
the enclosure.
J. Cable and conductor termination: 1. Terminate all cables and conductors on terminal blocks. 2. Terminal block enclosures:
a. Suitable for the area classification as specified in Section 16050.
K. Surge protection: 1. Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units installed
on the instruments.
16050-19
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
2. Individually fuse each 4-20 milliamperes direct current loop with a 1/16 ampere fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors.
3. Provide voltage surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers: a. Protect both power source and signal loop.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: 1. Allow for inspection of PCIS installation as specified in Contract Documents. 2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 3. ENGINEER inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around
equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage, and
assembly. e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements. f. Inspect cable terminations. g. Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications.
4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection requirements specified in Section 17950.
B. Field testing is specified in Section 17950. Additional general requirements are specified in Section 01756.
C. Installation supervision: 1. Ensure that the entire PCIS is installed in a proper and satisfactory manner. At a
minimum, the ICSC shall provide the following services: a. Installation resources:
1) Coordinate with the CONTRACTOR regarding installation requirements of the Contract Documents.
b. Provide technical assistance to installation personnel by telephone: 1) Furnish installation personnel with at least one copy of the approved
submittals, including all installation details. c. Periodic inspections during the construction period. d. A complete check of the completed installation to ensure that it is in
conformance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer and the Contract Documents.
e. Field verify accuracy and calibration of all instruments.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Control valves: 1. Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the
control system as well as local control devices and adjust to verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position.
2. Check control valve actions and positioner settings with the valves in place to ensure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration.
16050-20
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
B. Make all revisions necessary to the control system software, as directed by the ENGINEER. It is understood that the CONTRACTOR knows and agrees that changes will be required in the control system software during the factory acceptance tests, the pre-commissioning, performance testing, start-up and during the warranty period.
3.5 CLEANING
A. As specified in Contract Documents.
B. Vacuum clean all control panels and enclosures before start-up and again after final completion of the project.
C. Clean all panel surfaces.
D. Return to new condition any scratches and/or defects.
E. Wipe all instrument faces and enclosures clean.
F. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations in a neat, clean, and organized manner: 1. Neatly coil and label all spare wiring lengths. 2. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as
determined by the ENGINEER.
G. As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Demonstration requirements are specified in Section 13300. B.
B. PROTECTION
C. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until date of Substantial Completion.
+ +END OF SECTION+ +
17101-1
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
SECTION 17101
SPECIFIC CONTROL STRATEGIES
(FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: 1. Loop descriptions:
a. Specific control requirements and functional descriptions for individual control loops.
B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s Work.
C. Trending is to be provided for all instruments provided in this project. Programming and transmitters shall be selected accordingly.
D. The severity of alarms is defined for the purpose of this document as follows: 1. Level 1 (Emergency): Reserved for fire system alarms only. Fire call-out initiated
followed by operator call-out. 2. Level 2 (Critical): For alarms that require immediate action and initiates operator
call-out. 3. Level 3 (Urgent): For alarms that require action within a limited time period (less
than an hour) and initiates operator call-out. 4. Level 4 (Warning): For alarms that do not require immediate action, no call-out
initiated. 5. Level 5 (Routine): Event only, no call-out initiated.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. See Division 1, Division 16 and Division 17.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. List of Terms HMI human machine interface LCP local control panel LOR local-off-remote MCC motor control center P&IDs process and instrumentation diagrams PLC programmable logic controller
17101-2
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
psi pounds per square inch SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition VFD variable frequency drive
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Develop detailed loop descriptions based on the information in the Contract Documents, and submit as specified in Division 1 and Division 17. 1. For each control loop, provide a detailed functional description of the operation of
the equipment, signals, and controls shown on the P&IDs: a. Include all functions depicted or described in the Contract Documents. b. Include the following within each loop description:
1) All requirements specific to that loop. 2) Common control requirements applicable to that loop. 3) List of all ranges, setpoints, timers, values, counters, etc.
2. Where there are similar loops with identical control, such as multiple loops for individual raw water pumps, only 1 loop description need be developed and the remaining loops may reference that loop description.
B. Loop description format: 1. Loop number and title. 2. References:
a. List P&IDs that are specifically referenced. 3. Abstract:
a. General description of how the loop works, what devices are involved, and how the process will be controlled.
b. Process values, setpoints, and limits, including units and ranges: 1) Show span and range values for analog inputs and outputs, and operating
point and deadband for discrete inputs. 4. Hardwired control:
a. Detailed description of the control functions at the local level. b. Function of local operator interfaces. c. Operation of hardwired field pilot controls:
1) Pushbuttons. 2) Selector switches. 3) Potentiometers. 4) Pilot lights, indicators, and other displays.
5. Hardwired interlocks: a. Explanation of the operation of system interlocks and hardwired permissive
conditions. 6. PLC control:
a. Detailed description of the control functions that are under control of the PLC. b. Operator controls and automatic controls. c. Setpoints, alarms, etc.:
1) Include units and ranges for analog values. 2) Include span and range for analog inputs and outputs. 3) Include operating point and deadband for discrete inputs, and identify
conditions where contacts are open, and when they close. d. Control sequences.
7. Software interlocks:
17101-3
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Operation of system software interlocks. 8. HMI control:
a. Detailed description of the operator controls. 9. SCADA control:
a. Detailed description of the operator controls. b. Setpoints, alarms, etc.
10. Indicators and alarms: a. List any indicators and alarms specific to the loop that are not covered in the
common control strategies. 11. Failure modes:
a. List any failure modes specific to the loop that are not covered in the common control strategies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION
A. Booster Pump Station: 1. References:
a. P&ID: I-001. 2. Abstract:
a. The Booster Pump Station is designed to provide water from Zone 12 to Zone 0.
b. The Pump is VFD operated. c. A PI/PSH assembly, a PIT, and a magnetic flow meter is provided on pump
discharge to monitor pressure and flow. d. The Pump can be controlled locally by the operator via the local control panel
(LCP-VFD). e. A motorized valve actuator is included on the PRV station isolation valve on
Zone 0 side to prevent water from circulating when pump is running. 3. Hardwired control:
a. When the Local-Off-Remote (LOR) switch (HS-101) at the LCP-VFD is in LOCAL position, the pump is controlled by the HMI panel which has start/stop buttons.
b. When the Start button for the pump is pushed by the operator, the pump operates at the speed set at the VFD. VFD speed can be manually varied via the HMI at the LCP-VFD.
c. When the Stop button for the pump is pushed by the operator, the pump stops.
4. Hardwired interlocks: a. The pump is stopped and prohibited from starting if:
1) Motor high temperature switch (TSH-101) is activated. 2) High pressure switch (PSH-101) is activated.
5. SCADA/PLC Pump control:
17101-4
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. When the LOR switch at the LCP-VFD is in the REMOTE position, the pump is controlled by the PLC. SCADA will have a software Hand-Off-Auto selector switch for the pump.
b. When the software selector is in the HAND setting, the pump is started and stopped using Start-Stop (MN-101 AND MS-101) controls displayed on the SCADA graphic screen. Speed of the pump is varied by changing the set-point (SC-101) on the SCADA graphic screen.
c. When the software selector is in the AUTO setting, the pump will be operated based on the selected mode. 1) Pressure Mode (Suction Mode):
a) In this mode, operator sets suction pressure setpoint (20-60 psi (operator adjustable), initially set at 40 psi, operator adjustable).
b) Pump starts automatically at minimum speed. VFD speed will increase to maintain suction pressure setpoint. Pump will operate at full speed if pressure raises beyond 60 psi (operator adjustable).
c) Pump turns off when one or more of following criteria are met: 1. Operator turns off the pump. 2. Based on high discharge pressure (0-250 psi, initially set at 200 psi
operator adjustable). 3. Based on low suction pressure (0-100 psi, initially set at 35 psi
operator adjustable). 4. Based on High Tank Level in Zone 0 reservoirs (0-50 feet, Operator
Adjustable) 5. Based on Low Tank Level in Zone 12 reservoirs (0-50 feet, Operator
Adjustable) 2) Pressure Mode (Discharge Mode):
a) In this mode, operator sets discharge pressure setpoint (0-250 psi (operator adjustable), initially set at 150 psi, operator adjustable).
b) Pump starts automatically at minimum speed. VFD speed will increase to maintain discharge pressure setpoint. Pump will operate at full speed if pressure falls below 140 psi (operator adjustable).
c) Pump turns off when one or more of following criteria are met: 1. Operator turns off the pump. 2. Based on high discharge pressure (0-250 psi, initially set at 200 psi). 3. Based on low suction pressure (0-100 psi, initially set at 20 psi). 4. Based on High Tank Level in Zone 0 reservoirs (0-50 feet, Operator
Adjustable) 5. Based on Low Tank Level in Zone 12 reservoirs (0-50 feet, Operator
Adjustable) 6. SCADA/PLC Valve Control:
a. When the LOR switch at the valve actuator (MOV-101) is in the LOCAL position the valve can be operated using the local open/close pushbuttons on the actuator.
b. When the LOR switch at the valve actuator (MOV-101) is in the REMOTE position, the valve is controlled by the PLC/SCADA. SCADA will have a software Hand-Off-Auto selector switch and a software Open-Close switch.
c. When the software selector is in the HAND position, the valve can be opened and closed using the software Open-Close switch.
d. Fully opened and fully closed indication will be present at the valve actuator and the SCADA graphic screen.
7. Software interlocks:
17101-5
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
a. Prohibit the pump from running when: 1) Motorized isolation valve for Zone 0 is open. 2) High discharge pressure alarm (Operator Adjustable 0-150 psi, initially set
at 75 psi). 8. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and Specifications. b. At a minimum provide the following:
1) LCP: a) High motor temperature alarm (TSH-101) b) Pump Status
1. Green – On/Running (YL-101) 2. Amber – Fault (YA-101)
c) Pump local and remote status (HS-101) d) VFD Speed (HMI)
2) SCADA: a) Pump Status
1. Red – Off 2. Green – On/Running (YL-101) 3. Amber – Fault (YA-101)
b) Pump remote status (YIR-101) c) VFD speed (SI-101) d) Motorized valve open/close status (ZSO-101A & ZSC-101A) e) Flow (FI-101) f) Discharge/Zone 0 pressure (PI-101) g) Zone 12 pressure (PI-102) h) Pump high motor temperature alarm (TAH-101) i) High pressure alarm (PSH-101) j) LCP-VFD Intrusion alarm (ZS-101) k) Site Intrusion alarm (ZS-102) l) Vault Intrusion alarm (ZS-103) m) Low flow alarm (FAL-101)
+ +END OF SECTION+ +
17101-6
City of Prescott, AZ March 2017Zone 12 Interconnect BPS 15-002
This page was left blank intentionally.
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Appendix A – Standard Details
RESTORE LANDSCAPING
TO EQUAL OR BETTER
CONDITION THAN EXST
4"
SAW CUT 1’-0"
MIN
EXST GRADE
UN-SURFACED AREAS
NTS
LANDSCAPE AREAS GRAVEL SURFACE AREAS
TYPICAL TRENCH SECTIONS
2000
12
"
TOPSOIL
COMMON FILL
SEE NOTE 2
COMMON FILL
SEE NOTE 2
COMMON FILL
SEE NOTE 2
2500
GRAVEL SURFACING
PER
NOTE 3,
TYP
WITHOUT LANDSCAPINGASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PER 2501
PIPE ZONE
PIPE BEDDING
SEE NOTE 1
6"
EXISTING PAVED AREA
12
"
NEW PAVED AREA
MATCH EXISTING
PAVEMENT AND
BASE
SELECT FILL OR
SLURRY FILL
SEE NOTE 2
SELECT FILL OR
SLURRY FILL
SEE NOTE 2
BACKFILL AND SURFACE RESTORATION
VARY BY LOCATION MATCH EXISTING
CONDITIONS WITH A SURFACE TREATMENT
SHOWN ON THIS DETAIL
12" MIN
SEE NOTE 1
12" MIN
SEE NOTE 1
COMPACT SUBGRADE
TO 90% COMPACTION
PIPE LOCATOR
TAPE
(TYPICAL ALL SECTIONS)
12"
MIN
SAWCUT PAVEMENT
NOTES:
1. PIPE BEDDING SHALL BE GRANULAR BEDDING FOR ALL DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE AND SAND FOR ALL OTHER PIPE.
COMPACT TO 90% RELATIVE COMPACTION. ALTERNATELY, SLURRY FILL MAY BE USED FOR PIPE BEDDING. IF SLURRY
FILL IS USED, TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT PIPE FLOATING. ALSO, IF SLURRY FILL IS USED, TRENCH WIDTH CAN
BE NARROWED TO 6-INCHES OUTSIDE OF PIPE WALL ON EACH SIDE.
2. COMPACT ALL TRENCH BACK FILL (COMMON FILL AND SELECT FILL) TO 90% COMPACTION MORE THAN 2-FEET BELOW
GRADE; 95% COMPACTION LESS THAN 2-FEET BELOW GRADE.
3. UNLESS NOTIFIED OTHERWISE, PROVIDE MINIMUM 3-FEET OF COVER OVER ALL BURIED PIPELINES.
Drin
k ng
t
i W
r
2000.DGN 7/28/2010FILENAME: PLOT DATE:
6"
MIN
FINISHED GRADE
CAST IRON LID
CAST IRON VALVE BOX,
SLIDING TYPE,
UPPER SECTION
CAST IRON
VALVE BOX
LOWER SECTION
VALVE SIZE AND ENDS
AS SPECIFIED OR
INDICATED ON PLANS
SET COVER OF VALVE BOX
AND CONC PAD 1/4 " BELOW
GRADE IN PAVEMENT OR
SHOULDER, AND FLUSH WITH
GRADE ELSEWHERE
NTS
2202
PROVIDE 1’-6" SQ x 6"
THICK CONC PAD
EXTENSION ROD REQD W/ 2"
OPERATING NUT 1’-0" BELOW
GRADE WHEN VALVE IS
OVER 3’-0" BELOW GRADE
BURIED GATE OR PLUG VALVE BOX, TYPE 1
GATE VALVE OR PLUG
VALVE AS CALLED OUT ON
DRAWINGS
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
2202.dgn 1/24/2011FILENAME: PLOT DATE:
2501
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENTNTS
3" PAVEMENT
ASPHALT CONCRETE
COMPACTION
TO 95% RELATIVE
BASE COMPACT
AGGREGATE
AS SHOWN
FINISH GRADE
8"
COMPACTION)
RELATIVE
TO 95%
UPPER 1 FT
(COMPACT
SUBGRADE
PREPARED
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
Drin
kng
t
iW
r
2504
NT
S
SU
BG
RA
DE
, CO
MP
AC
T
TO
90%
RE
LA
TIV
E
CO
MP
AC
TIO
N
4"
FIN
ISH
GR
AD
E
GR
AV
EL
SU
RF
AC
ING
GR
AV
EL
SU
RF
AC
ING
2504.D
GN
9/3
/20
09
FIL
EN
AM
E:
PL
OT
DA
TE
:
CO
NC
SL
AB
3’-6"
4"
MINCLR
3"
3’-6"
MIN
DIA
1’-6
"
CLR
3"
1/4
PL
1/2
x1
2x
12
1 1
/2" C
LR
,
MIN
SE
AL
3’-6"
SE
AL
3’-6"
2’-0"
G
CO
NC
RE
TE
EN
CA
SE
ME
NT
6" S
CH
40
ST
EE
L P
IPE
PL
1/4
" x
RE
QU
IRE
D D
IA
1/2
" D
RA
IN P
IPE
2’-0
"
MIN
DIA
10"
MIN
EX
TE
RIO
R
INT
ER
IOR
RE
MO
VA
BL
E
1/2
"x
2" F
LA
NG
E
AL
L A
RO
UN
D2
AD
DL
#4x2’-0
"
EA
SID
E
PL
1/4
" x
RE
QU
IRE
D D
IA
26
00
GU
AR
D P
OS
TN
TS
GR
OU
T P
LU
GG
RO
UT
PL
UG
CO
NC
RE
TE
EN
CA
SE
ME
NT
3/8
" D
IA
U-B
OL
T
6" D
IA S
CH
40
ST
L P
IPE
.
GR
IND
SM
OO
TH
, FIL
L
WIT
H C
ON
C A
ND
PA
INT
SA
FE
TY
YE
LL
OW
WIT
H
PA
INT
SY
ST
EM
AS
SP
EC
IFIE
D
FIN
ISH
ED
GR
AD
E
RE
MO
VA
BL
E 5
" S
CH
40
ST
EE
L P
IPE
PA
INT
SA
FE
TY
YE
LL
OW
WIT
H P
AIN
T
SY
ST
EM
AS
SP
EC
IFIE
D
FIN
ISH
ED
GR
AD
E
DR
AIN
INT
O 8
" M
IN
DE
PT
H O
F C
RU
SH
ED
ST
ON
E
Drin
kng
t
iW
r
26
00
.DG
N6
/23
/20
09
FIL
EN
AM
E:
PL
OT
DA
TE
:
NTS
2" FROM JOINT
BREAK REINFORCING
2" FROM JOINT
BREAK REINFORCING
FILL WITH JOINT SEALANT
FORM VOID AT SURFACE AND
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
METAL KEYED
BOND BREAKER
COAT SURFACE WITH
@ 12"OC WITH DOWEL CAP
1" DIA x 18" SMOOTH DOWEL
AND BACKER ROD
FILL WITH JOINT SEALANT
3160
SLAB ON GRADE SAWN JOINT, TYPE A
SLAB ON GRADE CONSTRUCTION JOINT, TYPE B
SLAB ON GRADE CONSTRUCTION JOINT, TYPE C
NOTES:
CONC SLAB ON GRADE JOINTS
3/8" TOOLED JOINT MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF SAWN JOINT.
BREAK REINF AND ADD SPLICE BARS SIMILAR AT DOUBLE MAT.
REINFORCING AND LOCATE SAWCUT.
CONTRACTOR SHALL USE STRING LINE OR OTHER POSITIVE MEANS TO PLACE
SAW-CUT SAME DAY AS POUR AS SOON AS SPALLING WILL NOT OCCUR.
4.
3.
2.
1.
2" FROM JOINT
BREAK EVERY OTHER BAR
FILL WITH JOINT SEALANT
SAW-CUT DEPTH –1/4 SLAB DEPTH
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
$FILES$ $DATE$FILENAME: PLOT DATE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
AB DIA (IN.)
MIN PAD HT (IN.)
1 2
7 10 11 15 18 21 24
1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2 1 3/4
8 1/2 12 1/2 16 1/2
THE SIZE, NUMBER, TYPE, LOCATION, AND THREAD PROJECTION OF THE ANCHOR
BOLTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER, AND SHALL
BE AS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE HELD IN POSITION
WITH A ONE PIECE TEMPLATE, MATCHING THE BASE PLATE, WHILE PAD IS BEING
POURED.
ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES SHALL BE USED TO PROVIDE THE ANCHOR BOLT A MINIMUM
MOVEMENT OF 1/2" IN ALL DIRECTIONS. THE MINIMUM SLEEVE LENGTH SHALL BE 8
TIMES THE BOLT DIAMETER. SLEEVES SHALL BE FILLED WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT.
ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM INTERNAL DIAMETER 1" GREATER
THAN BOLT DIAMETER AND A MAXIMUM INTERNAL DIAMETER 3" GREATER THAN
ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER. SLEEVES SHALL BE FILLED WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT.
EQUIPMENT BASES SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
TYPE "D" DETAIL SHALL BE USED ONLY FOR SLABS ON GRADE AND AT GRADE. THE
SURROUNDING FLOOR SLAB SHALL NOT BE PLACED UNTIL THE EXACT SIZE AND
LOCATION OF THE PAD IS KNOWN.
WEDGES OR SHIMS SHALL BE USED TO SUPPORT THE BASE WHILE THE NON-SHRINK
GROUT IS PLACED. TEMPORARY LEVELING NUTS SHALL BE BACKED OFF. IF LEFT IN,
THE WEDGES OR SHIMS SHALL NOT BE EXPOSED TO VIEW.
HEIGHT OF PADS SHALL BE MINIMUM REQUIRED FOR ANCHOR BOLT CLEARANCE TO
KEEP ANCHOR BOLT OUT OF SLAB (SEE TABLE BELOW). WHERE EQUIPMENT OR
PIPING ELEVATION REQUIRE A PAD HEIGHT LESS THAN THE MINIMUM SHOWN, USE
TYPE B WITH BLOCKOUT.
NOTES:
EQUIPMENT PAD NOTESNTS
3200
9. TYPE "F" PADS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR TYPE "A" PADS FOR LOCATIONS
APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE ENGINEER.
10. SEE ANCHOR BOLT AND BLOCKOUT DETAILS 3210 .
PAD SIZE SHALL BE MINIMUM INDICATED OR AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR AS
INDICATED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
Drin
k ng
t
i W
r
2" C
LR
4" M
IN
8"
8"
2" M
IN
#4
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
BA
SE
CO
NS
TR
UC
TIO
N JO
INT
,
LE
AV
E R
OU
GH
& C
LE
AN
2" M
IN A
LL
AR
OU
ND
1 1/2"
CLR
TO
OL
ED
ED
GE
(3/4
")
OP
NG
SIZ
E, V
ER
IFY
W/
PL
AN
S &
EQ
UIP
MF
R
FO
RM
TO
RE
TA
IN G
RO
UT
32
00
CN
TS
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PA
D-T
YP
E C
NO
TE
2
TH
ICK
NE
SS
PE
R D
WG
S
1 1
/2"
NO
N-S
HR
INK
GR
OU
T, T
YP
NO
TE
5
SU
SP
EN
DE
D S
LA
B,
FO
R T
HIC
KN
ES
S,
SE
E P
LA
NS
AD
HE
SIV
E A
NC
HO
R, S
IZE
AN
D L
OC
AT
ION
PE
R
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
MA
NU
FA
CT
UR
ER
,
NO
TE
3
3210
NO
TE
S:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3200
3210
SE
E F
OR
GE
NE
RA
L E
QU
IPM
EN
T P
AD
NO
TE
S.
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PA
D S
IZE
PE
R D
RA
WIN
GS
. WH
ER
E P
AD
SIZ
E IS
NO
T S
HO
WN
,
SIZ
E T
O F
IT E
QU
IPM
EN
T.
IF A
NC
HO
R B
OL
TS
AR
E C
AL
LE
D O
UT
FO
R O
N D
RA
WIN
GS
, PR
OV
IDE
AN
CH
OR
BO
LT
S P
ER
IN L
IEU
OF
AD
HE
SIV
E A
NC
HO
RS
.
AN
CH
OR
BO
LT
LO
CA
TIO
N S
HA
LL
BE
WIT
H IN
4-IN
CH
OF
TH
E F
INA
L
LO
CA
TIO
N R
EQ
UIR
ED
FO
R E
QU
IPM
EN
T M
OU
NT
ING
OR
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PA
D S
HA
LL
BE
DE
MO
LIS
HE
D A
ND
RE
-CO
NS
TR
UC
TE
D.
IF R
EQ
UIR
ED
TO
AC
CO
MO
DA
TE
AN
CH
OR
BO
LT
LE
NG
TH
, PR
OV
IDE
BL
OC
K-O
UT
OR
CO
RE
DR
ILL
IN S
LA
BS
AT
AL
L A
NC
HO
R B
OL
T
LO
CA
TIO
NS
PE
R .
#4@
12" M
IN 4
PE
R
BA
SE
, US
E #
5@
12" W
HE
RE
AB
IS 3
/4" O
R L
AR
GE
R
Drin
kng
t
iW
r
32
00
c.D
GN
7/1
6/2
010
FIL
EN
AM
E:
PL
OT
DA
TE
:
4"
4"
6"
MIN
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
TH
ICK
EN
ED
ED
GE
OF
SL
AB
AL
L A
RO
UN
D
NT
S
RO
UN
D
ED
GE
W/
SH
OR
T
RA
DIU
S
TO
OL
#5@
12" E
W,
CE
NT
ER
ED
3210
NO
TE
S:E
QU
IPM
EN
T P
AD
-TY
PE
D3
20
0D
FIN
ISH
ED
GR
AD
E
NO
TE
2
3200
SE
E F
OR
GE
NE
RA
L E
QU
IPM
EN
T P
AD
NO
TE
S.
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PA
D S
IZE
PE
R D
RA
WIN
GS
. WH
ER
E P
AD
SIZ
E IS
NO
T S
HO
WN
,
SIZ
E T
O F
IT E
QU
IPM
EN
T.
IF A
NC
HO
R B
OL
TS
AR
E C
AL
LE
D O
UT
FO
R O
N D
RA
WIN
GS
, PR
OV
IDE
AN
CH
OR
BO
LT
S P
ER
IN L
IEU
OF
AD
HE
SIV
E A
NC
HO
RS
.
AN
CH
OR
BO
LT
LO
CA
TIO
N S
HA
LL
BE
WIT
H IN
4-IN
CH
OF
TH
E F
INA
L
LO
CA
TIO
N R
EQ
UIR
ED
FO
R E
QU
IPM
EN
T M
OU
NT
ING
OR
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PA
D S
HA
LL
BE
DE
MO
LIS
HE
D A
ND
RE
-CO
NS
TR
UC
TE
D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
8"
6" T
YP
ICA
L U
NL
ES
S
NO
TE
D O
TH
ER
WIS
E
ON
DR
AW
ING
S
UP
TO
5/8
" A
DH
ES
IVE
AN
CH
OR
S, S
IZE
AN
D
LO
CA
TIO
N A
S
RE
CO
MM
EN
DE
D B
Y
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
MF
R,
NO
TE
3
4" C
OM
PA
CT
ED
AG
GR
EG
AT
E
BA
SE
, CO
MP
AC
T T
O 9
5%
RE
LA
TIV
E C
OM
PA
CT
ION
DE
NS
ITY
Drin
kng
t
iW
r
32
00
d.D
GN
7/1
6/2
010
FIL
EN
AM
E:
PL
OT
DA
TE
:
4"
ROUND
EDGE W/
SHORT
RADIUS
TOOL
NTS
NOTE:
1.
NOTE 1
CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD
6"
MIN
4"
THICKENED
EDGE OF PAD
ALL AROUND
TYP
#5@12" EW,
CENTERED
15’ MAX
4" AGGREGATE BASE
COMPACT TO 95% RELATIVE
COMPACTION DENSITY
3201
2.
CONCRETE PAD, SIZED PER DRAWINGS.
CONTROL JOINT SHALL BE FORMED IN FRESH CONCRETE
BY HAND TOOLING OR SAW CUTTING. CONTROL JOINTS
SHALL BE FORMED TO A DEPTH OF 1 1/2"
CONTROL JOINT,
LOCATION(S) AS
SHOWN ON DWGS,
SEE NOTE 2
2"
FINISHED
GRADE
Drin
k ng
t
i W
r
3201.dgn 5/13/2009FILENAME: PLOT DATE:
PROJECTION
AS REQD
TOP OF
FOUNDATION
ANCHOR BOLT,
SIZE AS SHOWN OR
AS REQD BY MFR
REMOVE FORM AT TOP
BY CUTTING AFTER
CONC IS CAST &
PRIOR TO GROUTING
GROUT
12dMIN
MF
R
RE
QD
OR 8
d4dd
BA
R
DIA
SEE NOTE 2
1.
2.
NOTES:
3210ANCHOR BOLT DETAILSNTS
d + 1", MIN
ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE BY THE ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE COMPANY,
SHELTON, CT, OR EQUAL.
3d WHERE MANUFACTURER VERIFIES NO BOLT PULLOUT
RESISTANCE REQUIRED.
SLEEVE, NOTE 1
ANCHOR BOLT
MACHINERY ANCHOR
BOLT DETAIL
FILL BLOCKOUT
W/ NON-SHRINK
GROUT
13d+1"
DEPTH AS
REQUIRED3" 3" C
LR
1"
PAD HEIGHT
TOP OF PAD
TOP OF
STRUCTURAL
BEAM
SLAB OR
BOLT BEND
ANCHOR BOLT BLOCKOUT
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
3210.DGN 4/25/2011FILENAME: PLOT DATE:
1.
2.
FO
LL
OW
AD
HE
SIV
E M
AN
UF
AC
TU
RE
R’S
INS
TR
UC
TIO
NS
FO
R IN
ST
AL
LA
TIO
N.
3.
4.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
3 1
/2"
4"
5"
6"
7"
12
1/2
"
8"
13"
16"
20"
US
E M
INIM
UM
EM
BE
DM
EN
TS
SH
OW
N, E
XC
EP
T U
SE
MA
NU
FA
CT
UR
ER
’S
MIN
IMU
M R
EC
OM
ME
ND
ED
EM
BE
DM
EN
T IF
GR
EA
TE
R.
7"
22"
#9
24"
NO
TE
S:
#8
2 1
/2"
7 1
/2"
5"
8"
10
1/2
"
14"
15"
11"
UN
LIM
ITE
D E
DG
E D
IST
AN
CE
LIM
ITE
D E
DG
E D
IST
AN
CE
CO
NF
OR
M T
O T
HE
RE
QU
IRE
ME
NT
S O
F S
PE
CIF
ICA
TIO
N S
EC
TIO
N 0
32
15
, DO
WE
LIN
G F
OR
CO
NC
RE
TE
.
MIN
IMU
M
EM
BE
DM
EN
T A
MIN
IMU
M
EM
BE
DM
EN
T B
MIN
IMU
M
ED
GE
DIS
T
LO
CA
TE
DO
WE
LS
CE
NT
ER
ED
IN W
AL
L O
R S
LA
B U
NL
ES
S O
TH
ER
WIS
E N
OT
ED
ON
DR
AW
ING
S. W
HE
RE
2 R
OW
S O
F D
OW
EL
S IN
DIC
AT
ED
, ST
AG
GE
R S
PA
CIN
G &
LO
CA
TE
AL
TE
RN
AT
ING
DO
WE
LS
AT
MIN
IMU
M E
DG
E D
IST
AN
CE
FR
OM
OP
PO
SIT
E F
AC
ES
.
DO
WE
L
SIZ
E
RE
BA
R D
OW
EL
S,
SE
E D
RA
WIN
GS
FO
R S
IZE
AN
D S
PA
CIN
G
NE
W W
AL
L O
R
SL
AB
EX
TE
NS
ION
MIN
ED
GE
DIS
TA
NC
E
HO
LE
DIA
ME
TE
R A
S R
EC
OM
ME
ND
ED
BY
AD
HE
SIV
E M
AN
UF
AC
TU
RE
R
MIN
IMU
M E
MB
ED
ME
NT
"B"
T/2
, SE
E N
OT
E 4
MIN
IMU
M
EM
BE
DM
EN
T "A
"
EX
IST
ING
RE
INF
OR
CIN
G
AD
HE
SIV
E A
NC
HO
R
NE
W W
AL
L O
R S
LA
B
FA
CE
OF
EX
IST
ING
WA
LL
OR
SL
AB
EX
IST
ING
RE
INF
OR
CIN
G
T
ST
D L
AP
LE
NG
TH
, SE
E G
EN
ER
AL
ST
RU
CT
UR
AL
NO
TE
S
EN
D O
F E
XIS
TIN
G W
AL
L O
R S
LA
B
ST
D L
AP
LE
NG
TH
,
SE
E G
EN
ER
AL
ST
RU
CT
UR
AL
NO
TE
S
24
-JU
N-2
00
9a3
26
5.d
gn
FIL
EN
AM
E:
PL
OT
DA
TE
:
DR
ILL
-IN D
OW
EL
SN
TS
3265
Drin
kng
t
iW
r
32
65
.dg
n6/2
4/2
009
FIL
EN
AM
E:
PL
OT
DA
TE
:
13301
FINISHED
FLOOR
AS R
EQ’D
INSTRUMENT(S)
7’-0"
MA
X
1/2" MIN SST WEDGE
ANCHORS
6" SQ 304 SST UNISTRUT
P2073ASQ SQ BASE PLATE
OR EQUAL
2-1 5/8" x 1 5/8" 304 SST
UNISTRUT P1001
CHANNEL, OR EQUAL
NTS
FOR INSTRUMENTS
DOUBLE CHANNEL SUPPORT
3/16" SST OR 3/4" FRP
BACK PANEL
4’-0" MAX
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
13301.dgn 4/26/2011FILENAME: PLOT DATE:
NTS
15000A
ADJUSTABLE-HEIGHT
SADDLE PIPE SUPPORT
WITH CONCRETE PAD
DIMENSION TABLE
PIPE
SIZE
2-1/2"
3"
4"
6"
8"
12"
14"
16"
20"
24"
30"
36"
10"
18"
( A ) ( B )
2’-0"
2’-0"
2’-0"
2’-0"
2’-0"
2’-0"
2’-0"
2’-0"
2’-0"
3’-0"
3’-0"
3’-0"
4’-0"
4’-0"6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
4"
4"
3"
3"
3"
3"
3"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
ADJUSTABLE PIPE
SADDLE SUPPORT
WITH U-BOLT,
B-LINE FIG. B3092
OR EQUAL
( A )
FG
2 1/2" THRU 36" PIPE
INSULATION, IF
CALLED FOR IN
PIPE SCHEDULE
LEVELING GROUT
SCHEDULE 40 STEEL
PIPE, FOR SIZE SEE
TABLE
3"
1’-
0"
MIN
( B ), SQ
STD PIPE FLANGE.
ATTACH TO CONC
WITH 3/4" ADHESIVE
ANCHORS, 9"
EMBEDMENT
DEPTH
Drin
k ng
t
i W
r
15000A.dgn 5/20/2009FILENAME: PLOT DATE:
15230
NTS
WATER SERVICE
AIR RELEASE VALVE INSTALLATION
1" BAV-03
HOSE FITTING
W/ FEMALE
CONNECTION
BACKFLUSH
DRAWING
ARV-03, SIZE PER
PIPE TAP 15300
1/2" GSP DR
DRAIN
ROUTE TO
PROCESS PIPE
NIPPLES
TYPE 304 SST
DRAWINGS WITH
BAV-03, SIZE PER
FILENAME:15230.DGN PLOT DATE:6/24/2013 3:40:32 PM
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
15232NTS
(GPM)
PUMP CAPACITY
(IN)
SIZE
1000 - 1500 1"
NOTE :
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP
3/4"
2"
0 - 1000
1500 - GREATER
AIR/VACUUM RELEASE
TYPE
ARV
ARV-03
ARV-03
ARV-01
PIPE TAP 15300
1/2" GSP DR
DRAIN
ROUTE TO
PROCESS PIPE
CKV-01
ARV-XX
BAV-03
NIPPLE, TYP
TYPE 304 SST
WHERE INDICATED OTHERWISE ON DWGS.
PIPING AND VALVE SIZES PER TABLE, EXCEPT
FILENAME:15232.DGN PLOT DATE:9/7/2012 8:26:38 AM
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
NTS
NOTES:
PRESSURE GAUGE
SNUBBER
DIAPHRAGM SEAL
PIPE TAP 15300
1/2" PIPE NIPPLE
PROCESS PIPE
SNUBBER
PRESSURE GAUGE
PIPE TAP 15300PROCESS PIPE
1/4" PIPE NIPPLE
DIAPHRAGM SEAL INSTALLATION
DIRECT INSTALLATION
15310
FILENAME:15310.DGN PLOT DATE:9/5/2012 2:29:06 PM
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER
PRESSURE GAUGE OR
TRANSMITTER INSTALLATION
1/4" BAV-01
1/2" BAV-03
1/2" BAV-03
1. USE DIRECT INSTALLATION FOR POTABLE WATER, RAW WATER,
RECLAIMED WATER AND AIR PROCESS PIPING.
2. USE DIAPHRAGM SEAL INSTALLATION FOR SEWAGE, SLUDGE,
CHEMICAL AND ALL PROCESS PIPES THAT ARE NOT WATER OR AIR.
3. ALL PIPE NIPPLES TO BE TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL.
4. FOR MULTIPLE INSTRUMENTS, PROVIDE TEE, PIPE NIPPLES AND
ELBOWS AS REQUIRED IN INSTRUMENT LOCATION.
Drin
kng
t
i W
r
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Appendix B – Geotechnical Report
